JP7332975B1 - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to hide a screw on the back side of the upper end of a lower door when the upper door and the lower door are opened. A slot machine has an upper door 12a and a lower door 12b capable of opening and closing the front face of the slot machine. A screw SC02 for fixing the push button 86 is provided on the rear side of the upper end of the lower door 12b. In a situation where the lower door 12b is opened to its open limit and the upper door 12a is closed, the screw SC02 is accessible. When both the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are opened to their open limits, the upper door 12a is located near the screw SC02 so that the screw SC02 cannot be accessed. [Selection drawing] Fig. 252

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine has been known as one of gaming machines (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-016110 A

The problem to be solved by the present invention is to improve the performance as a gaming machine.

The present invention (14th embodiment) solves the above-described problems by means of the following solution (the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses). The present invention (the fourteenth embodiment) corresponds to the initial invention 9 among the initial inventions 1 to 15, which will be described later.
The present invention (14th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
A front door that can open and close the front of the cabinet and consists of an upper door (12a) and a lower door (12b),
A predetermined fixing member (screw SC02) for fixing a predetermined operating member (push button 86) is provided on the back side of the lower door,
When the lower door is open to the limit (120°) and the upper door is closed, the predetermined fixing member is accessible,
When the upper door and the lower door are opened to the limit of opening, the upper door is positioned near the predetermined fixing member so that the predetermined fixing member cannot be accessed (Fig. 252(a)).
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, performance as a gaming machine can be improved.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine as an example of a game machine in the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of the reel in 1st Embodiment. In the first embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the display window and each reel and the effective lines, and (B) is a diagram showing the designation of symbol positions. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of a role, the number of payouts, etc. (1) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of a role, the number of payouts, etc. (2) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of a role, the number of payouts, etc. (3) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of a role, the number of payouts, etc. (4) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of a role, the number of payouts, etc. (5) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of a role, the number of payouts, etc. (6) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of a role, the number of payouts, etc. (7) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination of a role, the number of payouts, etc. (8) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows RT transition in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a non-RT number table (1) in the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) of non-RT in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (1) of RT1 in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the number table (2) of RT1 in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a numerical table (1) during RB operation in the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) during RB operation|movement in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the accessory condition device, and the small combination and replay condition device (1) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows a small combination and replay conditions apparatus (2) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the small combination and replay conditions apparatus (3) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows a small combination and replay conditions apparatus (4) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows a small combination and replay conditions apparatus (5) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows a small combination and replay conditions apparatus (6) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows a small combination and replay conditions apparatus (7) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows a small combination and replay conditions apparatus (8) in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation group number in 1st Embodiment. In the first embodiment, it is a diagram for explaining the expected value in the irregular pressing order and regular pressing when the effect group number is "8". In 1st Embodiment, (a) is a flowchart which shows a normal area lever process, (b) is a figure which shows initial normal mode lottery. In the first embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing types of normal modes, and (b) is a diagram showing numbers set in the normal mode lottery for the first game of the advantageous interval. In a 1st embodiment, (a) is a figure showing the kind of normal mode, and (b) is a figure showing the transition probability of each normal mode. In the first embodiment, it is a flow chart showing a pseudo-game production "red 7" aligned. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section continuation production in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing transitions of a difference number counter and a stop counter in the first embodiment; FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the relationship between the difference number counter, the stopping counter, and power off in the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing a flow from power-on to main processing in the first embodiment; FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing error processing in step S513 of FIG. 36. FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing complete function calculation processing in step S525 of FIG. 36; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an image for notifying the operation of the complete function in the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a section for announcing the operation of the complete function in the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of displaying a complete function operation as an image on the entire surface in the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a complete function activation image in the first embodiment; In 1st Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the case where a stop counter reaches "19000" during a special game state. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power shutdown in the first embodiment; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power shutdown in the first embodiment; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power shutdown in the first embodiment; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power shutdown in the first embodiment; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power shutdown in the first embodiment; FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the relationship between the complete function and power shutdown in the first embodiment; In the first embodiment, in the game in which the complete function operates after payout, it is a diagram showing an example in which a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement. In the first embodiment, in the game in which the complete function operates after payout, it is a diagram showing an example in which a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement. 6 is a flowchart showing sub-side power supply recovery processing in the first embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of main CPU, ROM, and RWM in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in RWM usage areas in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the RWM usage area in the second embodiment; FIG. 35 is a diagram following FIG. 34 showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the RWM usage area in the second embodiment; (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display substrate in the second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing management information display LEDs in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the second embodiment; It is a figure which shows the relationship between a digit and a segment in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the second embodiment; (B) is a diagram showing the LED display counter 2 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the second embodiment; _SC_LED_DSP2) and a signal output from the output port 6, and (C) is a diagram illustrating an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the second embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing power return processing (M_POWER_ON) in the second embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in the second embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in the second embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in the second embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the second embodiment; 9 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in the second embodiment; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in the second embodiment. 9 is a flow chart showing blinking request flag generation processing (S_LED_FLASH) in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the second embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing a ratio display timer update process (S_RATE_TIME) in the second embodiment; 9 is a flow chart showing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a flashing bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modified example of the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and signals output from output ports 3 and 6 in a modification of the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor in a third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM in FIG. 82 in the third embodiment; FIG. 83 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in RWM in FIG. 82 in the third embodiment; In the third embodiment, it is a diagram for explaining the interrupt initialization address, (A) is a diagram showing the data details of the interrupt initialization address, (B) is the relationship between the interrupt priority and the interrupt priority setting value It is a figure which shows. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining vector address values and data values stored in the vector addresses in the third embodiment, where (A) shows vector address values and (B) shows interrupt factors and automatically assigned values; (C) shows an example of the data value of the vector address. In the third embodiment, after the power is turned on, it is a diagram showing the process until transition to the user mode. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a program example starting from “0000H” in the program area of the used area of the built-in ROM in the third embodiment; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example when a vector address is set to "00F4H" in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing called by an RST instruction in the third embodiment, (A), (B) and (C) showing examples 1, 2 and 3, respectively; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing program code area setting addresses and their data values in the third embodiment; In the fourth embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing the type of combination, the winning probability, the number of payouts for each order of pressing the stop switch, etc., and (b) is a diagram showing the ball payout performance of the biased combination. . In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the flow (example 1) of production|presentation when the stop switch is operated in recommended pushing order in an advantageous area and non-AT. In 4th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the flow (example 1) of production|presentation when the stop switch is operated by a non-recommended pushing order in an advantageous area and non-AT. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing a flow of effects (example 2) when the stop switch is operated in the recommended pressing order during the advantageous section and non-AT. In the fourth embodiment, it is a diagram showing a flow of effects (example 2) when the stop switch is operated in the non-recommended pressing order during the advantageous section and non-AT. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating the transition of (image) layers when a recommended image is displayed in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 98 is a diagram following FIG. 97; In the fourth embodiment, it is a time chart (when replay is not won) showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when the bet operation and the start switch operation are performed after the demonstration display, and (a) is a recommended push. (b) shows a non-recommended pushing order time. In the fourth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when the start switch is operated 60 seconds after winning the replay, and (a) shows the recommended pressing order. , (b) shows the non-recommended pressing sequence. In the fourth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamp, and the menu display when the bet operation is performed within 3 seconds after the complete stop and the start operation is performed 60 seconds after the complete stop. ) indicates the recommended push order, and (b) indicates the non-recommended push order. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a pressing order instruction number setting process in step S181 of FIG. 102; FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing effect group number setting processing in step S182 of FIG. 102; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between a winning combination (biased combination), an instruction monitor, and an image display in the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing temporary storage processing 1 in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart continued from FIG. 106; 108 is a flowchart showing another example of FIG. 107; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing temporary storage processing 2 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart following FIG. 109; FIG. FIG. 11 is a side cross-sectional view of a slot machine according to a fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram (1) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram (2) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram (3) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram (4) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram (5) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram (6) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram (7) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram (8) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram (9) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 11 is a time chart (1) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart (2) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart (3) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart (4) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 15 is a time chart (5) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart (6) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart (7) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart (8) showing an operation mode when an error is detected and canceled in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a time chart (1) which shows the operation|movement aspect when a power supply is turned off during door opening alerting|reporting in 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart (2) which shows the operation|movement aspect when power is turned off during door opening alerting|reporting in 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart (3) which shows the operation|movement aspect when a power supply is turned off during door opening alerting|reporting in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an example 1 of error notification in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing example 2 of error notification in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing Example 3 of error notification in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing an example (example 4) in which power is interrupted while the first error is occurring in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 137 is a time cheat showing an example (re5) in which the power is cut off while the first error is occurring in the sixth embodiment, and is a modification of FIG. 136; FIG. 14 is a time chart showing example 6 of error notification in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing example 7 of error notification in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a time chart showing an example 8 of error notification in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a time chart showing Example 9 of error notification in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is an external perspective view showing a slot machine in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 10A is a front view of the door cylinder, and FIG. 10B is a side view of the door key inserted through the door key insertion opening. FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view showing the positional relationship between the door key insertion slot and the door key in the seventh embodiment; In the seventh embodiment, (a) is a front view illustrating various dimensions of a door key cylinder, and (b) is a plan view and a side view illustrating dimensions of a power plug. It is a schematic diagram explaining the locking device in 7th Embodiment, and is the front view seen from the inside of a front door to the outside (player side). 147 is a diagram showing a state when the cam is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 146 in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a state when the cam is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state of FIG. 146 in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view showing a structure for locking the door key at that position after the front door is opened in the seventh embodiment; FIG. 12A is a side view showing a state in which the setting key is inserted, and FIG. 11B is a view showing the setting key rotated clockwise by 90 degrees in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is a side view showing the state of when. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the relationship between the rotation angles of the door key and the setting key and the rotation torque corresponding to the rotation angles in the seventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation stage in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the kind of production|presentation in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the event names, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of effects 01, 03, and 14 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the event names, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of effects 15, 16, and 17 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the event names, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of production 18, production 20, production 21, and production 22 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the event names, the number of cuts, and the number of branches of effects 23, 24, and 25 in the eighth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing counting-related processing in the ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing changes in the number of icons in the pullback zone, etc., in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing pullback lottery processing in the pullback zone in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing advantageous section continuation determination in step S705 of FIG. 161 in the tenth embodiment. In the 10th embodiment, it is a flow chart showing pull-back lottery processing in the normal section. In the tenth embodiment, it is a flow chart showing pull-back lottery processing in the transition preparation state. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing in the tenth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the flow of display processing of a demonstration image in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 167 is a flowchart continued from FIG. 166; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing control processing of an SP flag in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of sub-bonus shift processing in the tenth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing a configuration outline of a one-chip microprocessor in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 170 is a block configuration diagram showing an arithmetic circuit (APU) in FIG. 170; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the structure of a multiplication/division register in the eleventh embodiment; In the eleventh embodiment, after the power is turned on, it is a diagram showing the process until transition to the user mode. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a diagram showing the display specifications of the role ratio monitor. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a data table provided in the second area of the ROM in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an area outside the RWM use area (second area) in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an area outside the RWM use area (second area) in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing program start processing in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing test pattern display setting in step S902 of FIG. 178; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main processing in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing a ratio setting process in step S910 of FIG. 180; FIG. FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing a ratio calculation process in step S921 of FIG. 181; FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing a modification of FIG. 182; FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. In the eleventh embodiment, it is a flow chart showing ratio display preparation executed in the interrupt process. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing generation of a blinking request flag in step S961 of FIG. 185; FIG. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing updating of a ratio indication timer in step S962 of FIG. 185; FIG. FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing a ratio display process in step S963 of FIG. 185; FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a blinking bit inspection count table in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of a jump instruction in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing types and addresses of areas in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing data of empty areas. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the average processing time for each state in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main loop processing and interrupt processing during game standby (no bet) in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main loop processing and interrupt processing before starting a game after betting in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing main loop processing and interrupt processing after the reel 31 reaches a constant speed after detection of operation of the start switch and start of rotation of the reels in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main loop processing and interrupt processing during reel constant speed rotation and before all reels are stopped in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main loop processing and interrupt processing during payout processing after all reels are stopped in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing main processing and interrupt processing from insertion of medals to winning combination lottery in the twelfth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing main processing from the start of reel rotation to operation of a stop switch, and interrupt processing executed during that time, in a twelfth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing and interrupt processing from insertion of medals to immediately after the start switch is operated in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing and interrupt processing when a settlement switch is operated after medals have been inserted in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing and interrupt processing when an abnormal state occurs after medals have been inserted in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing and interrupt processing when the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. In the twelfth embodiment, it is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing and interrupt processing in the next game of the game in which the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing and interrupt processing from after all reels are stopped to lighting processing of the insertion display LED in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing and interrupt processing from when a specified number of medals are inserted to when the insertion display LED is turned off in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is an external perspective view of a slot machine according to a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of the inside of the cabinet of the slot machine in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of a slot machine in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram of a main control board, a start switch, and a stop switch in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram of a motor drive board, a motor, and a reel sensor in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram of a main control board, a lamp control board, and a stop switch lamp in a thirteenth embodiment; In the thirteenth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the state when the connection of the stop switch harness is recovered in the state where all the stop switches are turned off while all the reels are rotating. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing a state when the connection of the stop switch harness is restored with the left stop switch turned on during all reel rotations in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the state when the connection of the stop switch harness is recovered in the state where all the stop switches are turned on while all the reels are rotating. In the thirteenth embodiment, it is a time chart showing a state when the connection of the stop switch harness is restored with the left stop switch turned on after the power is turned off while all the reels are rotating. In the thirteenth embodiment, it is a time chart showing the state when the connection of the stop switch harness is restored in the state where all the stop switches are turned on after the power is turned off during rotation of all the reels and the power is restored. In the thirteenth embodiment, the state when the power is turned off while all the reels are rotating, the connection of the stop switch harness is restored with the left stop switch turned on while the power is turned off, and then the power is restored with all the stop switches turned off. is a time chart showing In the thirteenth embodiment, the state when the power is turned off while all the reels are rotating, the connection of the stop switch harness is restored with all the stop switches turned on while the power is turned off, and then the power is restored with all the stop switches turned off. is a time chart showing FIG. 20 is a time chart showing a state when the connection of the start switch harness is recovered in the thirteenth embodiment when the specified number of medals are bet and the start switch is turned on while all the reels are stopped; FIG. In the thirteenth embodiment, it is a time chart showing when the start switch is turned on while the start switch harness is disconnected while the power is off, and the connection of the start switch harness is restored while the start switch is on after the power is restored. be. FIG. 13 is a time chart showing a state when the connection of the start switch harness is restored while the start switch is turned on during power failure, and then the power is restored while the start switch is turned off in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 31 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine showing that the main control board cannot be visually recognized from the display window in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 31 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine showing that the front door can be closed with the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion slot in the thirteenth embodiment; In the thirteenth embodiment, a side view (partial cross-section) of the slot machine showing that a space necessary for the setting key to slide and move out of the setting key insertion opening is provided with the front door closed. Figure). FIG. 20 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine showing that the height from the upper end of the pattern display device to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening is greater than the entire longitudinal length of the setting key in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine showing that the distance between the back plate of the cabinet and the pattern display device is greater than the thickness of the setting key in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a front view of the inside of the cabinet showing that the distance between the left and right side plates of the cabinet and the pattern display device is greater than the thickness of the setting key in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 30 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of a slot machine showing that a setting key is not inserted between a gap cover that hides a gap between adjacent reels and the reels in a thirteenth embodiment; . FIG. 13 is a plan view (partial cross-sectional view) of the pattern display device showing that the setting key is not inserted between the gap cover that hides the gap between the adjacent reels and the reel in the thirteenth embodiment; be. FIG. 32 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine showing that the distance between the display window and the reel is greater than the thickness of the setting key in the thirteenth embodiment; In the thirteenth embodiment, a side view of the slot machine showing that the rearward projection width of the lower frame portion of the frame-shaped member on the back surface of the front door is narrower than "1/2" of the width of the setting key in the lateral direction ( is a partial cross-sectional view). FIG. 22 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine showing the relationship between the setting key insertion slot and the power supply unit in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. 31 is a plan view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine showing the relationship between the setting key insertion opening and the power supply unit in the thirteenth embodiment; A plan view (partial cross-sectional view) of a slot machine showing that the gap between the front door and the cabinet on the hinge side is smaller than the total length of the setting key in the thirteenth embodiment when the front door is fully open. is. FIG. 32 is an external perspective view of a slot machine according to a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 30 is a front view showing the inside of the cabinet with the front door opened in the slot machine according to the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine in the fourteenth embodiment; In the fourteenth embodiment, it is a figure which shows a sub-control board and a sub-board case, (a) shows a top view, (b) shows a front view. FIG. 31 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing a state in which the sub-board case is detached from the upper door in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 31 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing a state in which the sub-board case is detached from the upper door in the fourteenth embodiment; In the fourteenth embodiment, (a) is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing a state in which the sub-board case is removed from the upper door, and (b) is a partially enlarged view of (a). In a fourteenth embodiment, it is a front view showing a pattern display device. In the fourteenth embodiment, (a) is a front view (partial cross-sectional view) showing a reel module, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing dimensions of screws. FIG. 21 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing a reel module and a reel case in a fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a side view showing the positional relationship among the reel case, the reel module, and the display window in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a side view showing an example in which the reel bracket and the reel case are disengaged in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a side view showing the relationship between the reel base and the reel case in the fourteenth embodiment, where (a) shows the normal state, (b) shows the maximum movement, and (c) shows the movement restricted by the harness. FIG. 20 is a front view of the slot machine showing a state in which the lower door is opened and the upper door is closed in the fourteenth embodiment; In the fourteenth embodiment, (a) is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing the upper end portion of the lower door and the lower end portion of the upper door, and (b) is a view viewed in the direction of arrow B. FIG. In the fourteenth embodiment, (a) is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing a state in which no human load is applied to the upper door and the lower door, and (b) is an upward human load on the upper door. It is a side view (partial sectional view) which shows the condition when a load is applied. FIG. 20 is a plan view showing the slot machine when the upper door and the lower door are opened in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a front view showing the reel module in the fourteenth embodiment, (a) showing no load, and (b) showing a human load applied in the F4 direction. In the fourteenth embodiment, (a) is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing a back lamp unit, a reel tape, etc., and (b) is a front view showing the positional relationship between the back lamp unit and the reel tape. . FIG. 22 is a front view (partial cross-sectional view) showing adjacent reel modules in the fourteenth embodiment;

In this specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
A “bet” is a bet of medals (game media) to play a game. To bet medals, the actual medals are inserted from the medal slot 47, or the bet switch 40 is operated to bet credited (stored) medals.
On the other hand, "credit (also referred to as "reservation")" is different from the above-described "bet" and refers to the accumulation of medals inside the slot machine 10 . As used herein, the term "credit" does not include "bet."
Furthermore, "throwing in" refers to betting or crediting medals.
Also, the “specified number” refers to the number of bets that can be started (executed) in the game. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the game can be started with either the bet number of "2" or "3", and the game cannot be played with the bet number of "1".
For convenience of explanation, the "specified number" may also be referred to as the "bet number".
On the other hand, the term "number of bets" may refer to anything other than the "specified number". For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3", the bet number is "1" (the bet number at that time) when one medal is inserted (before the game starts).

“Maintenance” means that the player inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (described later).
“Handling bet” means that the player bets on medals by handing over the medals from the medal slot 47 .
“Cleaning credit” means that the player credits medals (adding credits) by cleaning the medals from the medal slot 47 .

“Bet medals” means the medals that are bet on.
“Reserved Medals” means Medals that are credited (reserved).
A "reserved bet" is a bet in which a player operates a bet switch 40 (described later) to bet part or all of the credited medals within a bettable range in the game. It means to
“Automatic bet” means that the number of medals that were betted in the previous game is automatically betted by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when the replay wins.
Here, when the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination has been stopped and displayed (meaning that the symbol combination has stopped on the active line; the same shall apply hereinafter), this is referred to as "winning a small combination".
On the other hand, in the "Regulations Concerning Approval and Model Testing of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as "rules")", when the symbol combination corresponding to replaying is stopped and displayed, the conditional device for replaying is activated. are interpreted as not “winning”.
However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the combinations (replay combination), and stopping display of a symbol combination corresponding to replay may be referred to as "replay winning".
“Settlement” means paying out bet medals and/or accumulated medals to a player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 43 (described later) is operated.

“Payout” refers to paying out medals to a player based on winning a winning combination or paying out medals through the above settlement. When paying out medals to the player based on winning a role, the medals are stored as credits (adding the stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described later)) and paying out the medals. This includes both dispensing actual medals from a mouth (not shown). The payout of medals is controlled such that, for example, "50" is credited as the limit number of medals, and medals exceeding the credit number of "50" are actually paid out to the player.
Note that "payout" may also be referred to as "grant". Therefore, the "number of payouts" may also be referred to as the "number of awards."

The "game medium" is medals in this embodiment, but electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as the game medium in the case of, for example, an enclosed (ECO) gaming machine. It should be noted that "electronic information" means that, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is used to play a game on a game machine. It is possible to credit the game machine as a game medium for performing.
Note that the "game medium" may also be referred to as "game value".

Further, when the game medium is electronic information, "payout of medals" means crediting (adding) to a game medium credit device provided in the gaming machine. Therefore, "payout of medals" does not mean only that the medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 (described later). addition) is also included.

``N-1'' game, ``N'' game, ``N+1'' game, . When it is a number, the game of the "N"th game is called "this time game". Also, the game of the "N-1"th game is referred to as the "previous game". Furthermore, the game of the "N+1"th game is referred to as the "next game".

In this specification, numbers with "(B)" at the end of numbers (especially 8 bits) mean binary numbers. Similarly, numbers with "(H)", "H" or "h" at the end of the numbers mean hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a numeric value indicating "16" in decimal is expressed as "00010000(B)" in binary and as "10(H)", "10H" or "10h" in hexadecimal. . Numerical values representing decimal numbers are written as "16(D)" as necessary.
However, when it is clear whether it is a binary number, a decimal number, or a hexadecimal number, "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H" or "h" The trailing sign may be omitted.

Also, the probability that a desired pattern to be stopped and displayed on the activated line can be stopped on the activated line during the period from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops (the maximum number of moving frames) is called "pull-in." rate (PB)”.
If the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the effective line within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line (effective line). line) is called "PB≠1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. It is called "PB=1".

Further, the "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and/or the operation timing (timing of pressing the stop switch for stopping the target symbol on the activated line).
Furthermore, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 means that the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantage/disadvantage in the game result (symbol combination that stops on the active line), and the game has a payout or has a payout number. An operation mode in which many symbol combinations stop, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that shifts (promotes) to an advantageous RT stops, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not shift (falls) to a disadvantageous RT stops. The "advantageous operation mode" is also called a correct operation mode or a correct pressing order.

``A game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42'' is, for example, a game in which a plurality of types of small wins (bells) with different payout numbers are won repeatedly (a game in which a so-called "push order bell" is won) ), the types of small wins (bells) to be won differ depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (the number of payouts differs). Also, for example, in a game in which a plurality of types of replays are won (when duplicate replays are won; a game in which a so-called "push order replay" is won), the RT may change depending on the type of replay won.

The “instruction function” means a function of instructing the player how to operate the stop switch 42 . The instruction function is, in principle, a function of instructing the player on an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 .
In other words, "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning.
It should be noted that "display" is to show the content of the "instruction" in a visible manner, and "notification" is to inform the player of the content of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and a "notification function".

Further, there is a possibility that notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is not limited to notification of the most advantageous operation mode. The notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous may be the "activation of the instruction function", but the notification of any operation mode including the operation mode of the stop switch 42 that is most advantageous is the "operation of the instruction function". It may also be referred to as "activation".
For example, when the pushing order bell has a six-choice pushing order, the payout when winning the pushing order bell is one of 1, 3, 4, 10, or a dropout (non-winning), depending on the order of pushing. assume that
Here, informing of the pressing order for winning the 10-card combination is informing of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "activation of the instruction function".
On the other hand, the notification of the pushing order for winning the one-hand, three-hand, or four-hand, may be regarded as "notification of advantageous operation mode (operation of instruction function)", and "advantageous operation mode It does not have to be "notification of

The pushing order for winning the 4-card hand is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card hand, so it is not the most advantageous operation mode. However, the number of payouts is "4" for the number of bets of "3", and the number of difference in the game is "+1".
Similarly, the pushing order for winning the 3-card hand is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is the pushing order for not winning the 10-card hand. However, since the number of payouts is "3" for the number of bets of "3" and the difference number is maintained at the current state (the difference number is not decreased), it is not necessarily a disadvantageous operation mode.

Furthermore, similarly, the pushing order for winning a winning combination of 1 is not the most advantageous operation mode because it is a pushing order that does not win a winning combination of 10 cards. Further, in this operation mode, the number of payouts is "1" for the number of bets of "3", and the difference number is reduced. However, since it can be said that it is an operation mode that does not miss a role, it may not be said to be a disadvantageous operation mode.

In the present embodiment, when the pressing order bell is won, the operating mode (correct pressing order) in which the winning combination with the largest number of payouts wins is reported.
However, for example, when the ending condition in the advantageous section is approaching, when the pushing order bell is won, the pushing order for winning, for example, a 3-card hand or a 4-card hand is announced as described above, and the difference in the number of sheets is almost the current state. It is conceivable to control it so that it is maintained.

Also, in this embodiment, the activation of the pointing function is limited to one defined number. For example, assume that the specified number for activating the pointing function is set to "3". In this case, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3" in AT, when the game is started with the bet number of "3" and the pushing order bell is won, the instruction function can be activated. On the other hand, when the game is started with the number of bets "2", the instruction function cannot be operated even if the winning order bell is won.

The "game section" includes a "normal section (non-advantageous section)" and an "advantageous section". In addition, the 5.9 machine had a "waiting section" (a game section that was won in the advantageous section lottery but has not yet moved to the advantageous section), but the current regulations for the 6 machine do not include "waiting section" etc. is not provided. However, it is not limited to this, and game sections other than the normal section and the advantageous section may be provided.
"Normal section" means that a signal related to the instruction function, specifically, a pushing order instruction number and a winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct pushing order), which will be described later, is sent to a peripheral board (for example, the sub-control board 80). ) and has no effect on performance related to the instruction function (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the operation mode cannot be notified. However, in addition to the lottery for the role, it is possible to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous section (lottery etc.).

Since the instruction function must not be activated in the normal section, the pressing order instruction information cannot be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and the instruction function cannot be displayed. Therefore, the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 cannot display (notify) an advantageous operation mode.

On the other hand, the "advantageous section" is a game section having performance related to the instruction function (in which the instruction function may be operated). It refers to a game section in which a signal relating to the instruction function can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when the push order instruction information is displayed so that the content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated), that is, a game section in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed).
However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output an effect that contradicts the content of the instruction given by the main control board 60 or the received signal related to the instruction function.

In addition, even if the advantageous section is a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function does not need to be activated.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the instruction function may always be operated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42.
AT (notification game state) is a game state in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is notified in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 . Therefore, AT is always in the advantageous interval and AT is never executed in the non-advantageous interval.

In addition, in a game where the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the AT may always notify the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (at 100%), but the ball output rate in a predetermined period It is conceivable not to report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even in a game in which the game result is advantageous/disadvantageous depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in order to keep the game within the range defined by the rules.
For example, when the end condition of AT is approached during AT, from the viewpoint of prolonging the life of AT, it is conceivable to temporarily not report the operation mode of stop switch 42 (do not activate the instruction function).

In addition, various settings can be made for the relationship between the advantageous section and the AT. For example, the first method is to set “advantageous section=AT”. In this case, winning the advantageous section and winning the AT are equivalent. Then, AT is started from the first game in the advantageous section. Also, the AT ends when the advantageous section ends.

Secondly, it is possible to set "AT≠advantageous section".
In this case, the AT start (execution) condition is not satisfied just by moving to the advantageous section. When it is decided to execute, the AT is executed until a predetermined termination condition of the AT is satisfied. In addition, when it is non-AT when shifting to the advantageous section, for example, the main game state may be set to normal section, omen, CZ (chance zone (a period in which AT is likely to win)) or the like.

When shifting to the omen after winning AT, the game may be shifted to the main omen without fail, and after the predetermined number of games of the main omen is completed, the game may be shifted to AT. Alternatively, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether to be a real omen or a false omen, and when it is determined to be a real omen, after the real omen is completed, it may be shifted to AT. Further, when it is determined to be a false precursor, after the false precursor ends, the advantageous section may be maintained, or the section may be shifted to the normal section.
Furthermore, both the AT and the advantageous section may be terminated when the AT termination condition is satisfied. Alternatively, although the AT ends, if the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not satisfied, the advantageous section may be continued (non-AT and advantageous section). The same applies when AT is started at the same time as the advantageous section.

Further, the number of times of playing the advantageous section is determined when the advantageous section is started, and a lottery or the like regarding the advantageous section is not executed during the advantageous section.
Furthermore, when starting the advantageous section, the initial number of games in the advantageous section is determined, and during the advantageous section, it is decided (lottery, etc.) whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of games in the advantageous section. Things are mentioned.
Furthermore, a predetermined termination condition is set for the advantageous section, and when the predetermined termination condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, even if there is a remaining number of games in the advantageous section (or remaining number of AT games), at that point Ending the advantageous section with

Here, the "predetermined condition for ending the advantageous section" is, for example, that the difference counter value (described later) exceeds "2400 (D)" or the advantageous section clear counter (remaining number of games in the advantageous section) described later. reaches "0". When any one of these conditions is satisfied, it is determined that the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to the normal section (non-advantageous section). In this case, even if the final game is AT, the AT ends at the same time as the advantageous section ends.

In an advantageous interval, an advantageous interval display LED (also referred to as a "section indicator") 77 (see, for example, FIG. 58, which will be described later. Segment P of digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED 78)) is lit. The player may be notified that the advantageous section is in progress. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous interval display LED 77 or the like may not be provided, and the player may not be notified that the advantageous interval is in progress.
The advantageous section display LED 77 may always be illuminated during the advantageous section, or may be illuminated when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied after shifting to the advantageous section.
Here, the "predetermined lighting condition" is, for example, when the instruction function is activated in a game state in which the area Sim is in an advantageous area and the area Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1". It should be noted that once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.

In addition, the "interval Sim (simulation) ball payout rate" means that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is always stopped and displayed (even if the combination of "PB ≠ 1" is won, the symbols corresponding to the combination is stopped), and when there are multiple types of symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, the symbol combination that is most advantageous to the player (when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell, the highest payout is achieved). This is the payout rate when it is assumed that the display is stopped. The calculation of the section Sim ball-out rate does not include the number of balls (number of payouts) due to the operation of the accessory (1BB operation, etc.). In addition, in the game winning the replay, when the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is counted as "0", and in the replay based on the winning of the replay (the next game of the game winning the replay), the number of bets It is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts "x"("x" is the number of payouts in the game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for the game winning the replay and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted.
Furthermore, the “game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds “1”” includes RT and the main game state in which the interval Sim ball-out rate is set to exceed “1”.
Here, RTs with a section Sim payout rate exceeding "1" include, for example, RTs with a high replay winning probability.
Assuming that CZ (chance zone), AT, pullback section, etc. are usually provided as the main game state, AT can be mentioned as the main game state in which the section Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1".

When the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit, when the advantageous interval ends, more specifically, in the final game of the advantageous interval, for example, a game end check process, which will be described later, or the game in the next game of the last game in the advantageous interval. During the start set process, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing by executing the processing for initializing the advantageous section display LED flag, which will be described later.

The “process related to the advantageous section” includes, for example, the following processes.
1) Advantageous section (transfer) lottery 2) Advantageous section clear counter update (subtraction, clear)
3) Updating the difference counter (calculation, clearing)
4) Update of advantageous section type flag 5) Control of advantageous section display LED 77 (update of advantageous section display LED flag)

Also, the “processing related to the instruction function” includes, for example, the following processing.
1) Display of push order instruction information (activation of instruction function)
2) AT lottery 3) In the case of a game number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the number of remaining games becomes "0"), updating the AT game number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)
4) In the case of the difference number management type AT (specification that ends AT when the remaining difference number becomes "0"), updating the AT difference number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing)

According to the current rules, both the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function can be executed in one prescribed number in one gaming state (RT), except for the following. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specified number "3" enables execution of the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function, and the specified number "2" makes it impossible to execute the processing related to the advantageous section and the processing related to the instruction function. and
However, during the advantageous interval, it is necessary to update the advantageous interval clear counter and update the difference number counter regardless of the specified number.

In addition, when the combination lottery result is non-winning, in other words, in the game when the conditional device is not activated, it may be determined that the processing related to the advantageous interval (advantageous interval transition lottery) is not executed. However, this is not the only option, and the processing relating to the advantageous section may be executed even if the combination lottery result is non-winning.
On the other hand, even if the role lottery result is non-winning, if the non-winning probability is a predetermined value or more (when the probability is not extremely low. For example, "1/17500" or more.) ) may be executable.

Furthermore, as a result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone), when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone is set from the next game. Therefore, it is not possible to execute the advantageous zone transition lottery (process related to the advantageous zone) and execute the notification of the correct pressing order (process related to the instruction function) in the game in which the advantageous zone is won.
However, it is permissible to perform the advantageous zone transition lottery (process related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (process related to the instruction function) in one game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific combination lottery result is obtained, the advantageous section and AT may be determined (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also referred to as "role ratio monitor" or "ratio indicator") 74 consists of, for example, four LEDs (also referred to as "digits"). LED for displaying which item among them by a predetermined symbol or the like) and a two-digit ratio segment (LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratio of the following six items 1) to 6) at predetermined time intervals.
1) Either the advantageous section ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or the instructed accessory ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous accessory ratio (6000 games) (6y.)
3) Accessory ratio (6000 games) (7y.)
4) Continuous accessory ratio (cumulative) (6A.)
5) Role ratio (cumulative) (7A.)
6) Accessory condition ratio (total) (5H.)

For example, when displaying the role ratio (total), when the ratio is "50"%, the symbol "7A." indicating the role ratio (total) is displayed in the identification segment and "50" is displayed. Show on ratio segment.
Here, the "cumulative total" refers to the sum total of the numerical values that have been counted up to that point, and is counted until the total number of games reaches at least the reference number of games (for example, "17500" or "175000"). When the cumulative number of games is less than the reference number of games, the ratio is displayed, for example, by flashing display, and when the total number of games is equal to or greater than the reference number of games, the ratio is displayed by lighting display, for example. Even after reaching the reference number of games or more, the total continues to be added until it reaches a value (upper limit) that can be stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Also, "6000 games" is the total number of games for 15 sets of "400" games for one set.

The “advantageous section ratio” refers to the ratio (proportion) of staying in the advantageous section to the total game section (non-advantageous section + advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section therebetween is "700", the advantageous section ratio is "70%".
Further, the "instruction-inclusive role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the sum of the number of payouts when the role is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated, by the total number of payouts. In the case of a slot machine in which no role is installed, the "indicated role ratio" is a value obtained by dividing the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated by the total number of payouts.
The sum total of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is operated is counted by the instruction-inclusive role-thing counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated" is based on the operation of the stop switch 42 according to the pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function. "10" is added to the instructed accessory counter.
On the other hand, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a different order from the displayed order and, for example, one bell wins, "1" is displayed in the instruction-containing accessory counter. is added.
Similarly, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an order different from the displayed order of pushes, and the winning combination is not obtained (when the combination is not won), the indicated role counter is displayed. is not added to In other words, the count value in the previous game remains unchanged.

When the common bell is won during AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when the push order bell is won, and the push order instruction information (dummy) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and the instruction function is activated. and a case where it is not operated. When the instruction function is activated when the common bell is won, the number of payouts in the game is added to the instruction-included accessory counter.

On the other hand, when the common bell is won and the instruction function is not activated, the number of payouts in the game is not added to the instruction-included accessory counter. However, the total number of payouts is added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify the correct key pressing order by image or sound.

"Continuous bonus ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the first class special bonus (RB) to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of payouts".
For example, when the total number of payouts in the number of games played is "6000" is "2000", and the number of payouts when the "first class special bonus (RB)" is activated is "500". Ratio (6000 games)” becomes “25 (%)”.

Further, the "accessory ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of activation of the accessory to the total number of payouts. Here, the "accessories" are, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special-accessories (RB), second-class special-accessories (CB) and MB (also referred to as 2BB). Equipment. CB is continuous operation.), SB (single bonus) is included.
Furthermore, the "accessory state ratio" is the sum of the number of games when the accessory continuous activation device is activated and the number of games when the accessory is activated when the accessory continuous activation device is not activated, out of the total number of games played. Refers to percentage.
Here, "at the time of operation of the continuous operating device for the role product" firstly refers to the time when the first type continuous operating device (1BB) is activated, and the first It corresponds to the first class special function (RB) non-operation (including inside) and the first class special function (RB) operation.
In addition, "at the time of operation of the continuous operating device for the role product" secondly refers to the time when the continuous operating device for the second type role (MB (2BB)) is activated, and the continuous operating device for the second type role (MB (2BB) ), which corresponds to when the second class special function (CB) is not activated and when the second class special function (CB) is activated.
Furthermore, "when the role product is activated when the role product continuous operation device is not in operation" means that when the role product continuous operation device is not operating, when the first class special accessory (RB) is activated, (SB) corresponds to the time of operation or the time of the second class special role (CB) operation.
In addition, in the above six items, in a game machine that does not have the function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is lit and displayed as "--".
For example, if the "first class special role item (RB)" is not provided, there is no continuous role item ratio. ” lights up.
As described above, six types of ratios are displayed on the management information display LED 74, and a test pattern is displayed at a predetermined timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In addition, it is stipulated by regulation that the advantageous section ratio and the instructed accessory ratio should be 70% or less. Further, it is stated that the role product ratio should be 70% or less, and it is stipulated that the continuous role product ratio should be 60% or less. Furthermore, it is stipulated that the state ratio of accessories, etc. should be 50% or less.
Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, it is possible to confirm whether or not the information is within the legal range.

Note that a game machine with a specification of 70% or less advantageous section ratio is called a "7U" type, and a game machine with a specification of 70% or less instruction-inclusive role ratio is called a "7P" type. A game machine having an advantageous section is either a "7U" type or a "7P" type. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous section ratio (total) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instructed accessory ratio (total) is displayed.
In the '7U' type, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total game section should be '70'% or less, but in the '7P' type, the total number of payouts due to the operation of the instruction function and the operation of the accessory is The number of payouts may be 70% or less, and for example, the entire period or most of the game sections may be advantageous sections.

For example, when moving to a non-advantageous section, set so that you will win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of 100%, and set it so that you will win the advantageous section lottery with a probability of almost 100% (for example, about 98%). Alternatively, it may be set so that the advantageous section lottery is won with a high probability (for example, 70%).
The "7U" type cannot refer to the setting value itself to perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery), but the "7P" type refers to the setting value itself and performs processing related to the instruction function. Is possible.

Also, the management information display LED 74 can be applied to a pachinko game machine as a performance display monitor.
In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, as in the case of the slot machine (rotary game machine). Then, the real-time (measured) base value for every 60,000 out balls (the 'base value' indicates how many safe balls are out of 100 out balls), and 60,000 ”, the base values of 1, 2, and 3 times before are displayed in sequence. For example, the identification seg of the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification seg of the previous base value is displayed as "b1." is displayed, and the identification segment of the base value three times before is displayed as "b3.".
In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applied not only to slot machines but also to pachinko game machines among game machines.

"RT" means that the type (number) of the role to be selected by lottery and its winning probability are in a unique lottery state, and "RT transition" means transition from one RT to another RT By doing so, it means that the winning probability of at least one replay subject to lottery changes.
Therefore, the type of replay and its winning probability in one RT are values specific to that RT, and it is impossible for one RT and another RT to have the same replay type and its winning probability. do not have. However, there is no problem if one RT and another RT have the same total replay winning probability.
Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0". Therefore, when "RT" is referred to herein, it includes non-RT.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of a slot machine 10, which is an example of a game machine according to the first embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10 .
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (not meant to include only those shown in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1 , a main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52 . The input port 51 is a connection portion to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port 52 is a connection portion to transmit signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32 .
In FIG. 1, input peripherals are indicated by arrows from which signals from the peripherals are directed to the main control board 50, and output peripherals are indicated by arrows from the main control board 50 to the peripherals. (The same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data table) necessary for progressing the game.
The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC having a calculation function) provided on the main control board 50, and executes a program necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, etc. , and payout at the time of winning.

Further, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55 and an MPU including registers are mounted. Note that the RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be provided externally in addition to being mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including the RWM 83, the ROM 84, and the sub CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub control board 80, which will be described later. It should be noted that the RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be provided externally instead of being mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal slot 47 is sent inside the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, a passage sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44 (a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b) are provided in the medal selector (but not limited to these). These are electrically connected to the main control board 50 .
A medal inserted from the medal slot 47 is first detected by the path sensor 46 .

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 46 . The blocker 45 permits/disallows insertion of medals, and when the insertion of medals is not permitted, forms a medal passage for returning the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is allowed, a medal passage is formed to guide the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35 . The blocker 45 is, for example, a switching member that forms a medal passage for guiding medals to the hopper 35 side by closing an opening (opening leading to a medal return opening) formed in a part of the medal passage in the medal selector. and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 prohibits the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 stop, and when the payout corresponding to the winning combination ends). do. That is, the blocker 45 permits insertion of medals at least when no game is played.

Further downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal selector, an insertion sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided. The insertion sensor 44 is composed of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. is configured to be detected by Then, based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on/off, it is determined whether or not the correct medals have been inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 includes, as operation switches operated by the player, a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42, and a A settlement switch 43 is electrically connected.
Here, the "operation switch (or simply "switch")" is based on the operation of the operation body by the player (operator) (receiving an external force), switching the electrical signal on / off. It refers to a device (including electric circuits and/or electric parts), and does not limit the shape of an operation body operated by a player.

When the operation switch is in the off state, for example, light from the light emitting element continues to enter the light receiving element (while the light receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the off state). When the player or the like operates the operation switch (the operation body of the operation switch), the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal is sent to the main control board 50 indicating that the operation switch is turned on. Contrary to the above, when the operation switch is in the off state, the light from the light emitting element does not enter the light receiving element, and when the light from the light emitting element enters the light receiving element, the light is turned on. You may

In the present embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is a lever (bar) shape (therefore also referred to as "start lever (switch) 41"), and includes a bed switch 40, a stop switch 42, and an adjustment switch. The operation body 43 is in the shape of a push button (thus, it is also called "bet button (switch) 40", "stop button (switch) 42", and "settlement button (switch) 43").

Although not shown in FIG. 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operation body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation of the operation switch is permitted, for example, an LED or the like corresponding to the operation switch emits blue light. By emitting red light from an LED or the like, the permission/non-permission state of the operation switch is indicated to the player.

Specifically, for example, when all the reels 31 are rotating and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit blue light to notify the player that the operation is possible. shown in When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to be stopped. After that, the rest of the stop switches 42 become operable when the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the reel 31 controlled to stop is terminated and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 is turned off. later. Therefore, during that time, the LEDs of all the stop switches 42 emit red light. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 is turned off, the LED of the already operated stop switch 42 is turned off. The LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not yet been operated, while still emitting red light, are caused to emit blue light.

The bet switch 40 is an operation switch operated by the player when betting the accumulated medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bet switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bet switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number, specified number) medals are provided.
A bet switch for betting two cards may be provided without being limited to this.

In addition, the specified number may be determined in advance depending on, for example, firstly, whether the accessory is not activated/activated. In this case, for example, when the accessory is not activated, when the SB is activated, when 1BB is activated, 3 sheets are set, and when 2BB is activated, 2 sheets are set. Two medals can be inserted by operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice, and three medals can be inserted by operating it three times. Also, when the prescribed number is 3, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows 3 medals to be inserted at once, and when the prescribed number is 2, operating the 3-bet switch 40b. Two medals can be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the specified number has already been bet, the bet processing is performed so that the number of bets is 3.
Secondly, the specified number may be uniformly set to, for example, "three" (regardless of the game state, etc.). In the example of the first embodiment below, the specified number is always set to "three".

Also, the start switch 41 is an operation switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of the left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31, and are operation switches operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are to be stopped.
Further, the settlement switch 43 is an operation switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) the medals betted and/or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50 . In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected. 1, illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Further, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected to each other by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (relay boards, etc.) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .

The display substrate 75 is mounted with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 .
The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals accumulated (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, upper digits and lower digits.

In addition, the winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the player's winning number) when the combination is won, and is composed of two digits, upper digits and lower digits, similarly to the credit number display LED 76. .
Note that the acquired number display LED 78 may be controlled to be extinguished when there are no medals to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digits may be turned off and only the lower digits may be displayed as "0".

Also, the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the acquired number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying pressing order instruction information (notifying an advantageous pressing order) in a game that notifies the pressing order during AT. Therefore, the acquired number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also displays the acquired number, the error content, and the pressing order instruction information. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED or the like for displaying the pressing order instruction information.
It should be noted that, during AT, notification of an advantageous pressing order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80 .

In FIG. 1, a main control board 50 is electrically connected to a motor (a stepping motor in this embodiment) 32 and the like of the pattern display device.
The symbol display device includes (three in this embodiment) reels 31 that display symbols, motors 32 that drive the respective reels 31 , and reel sensors 33 that detect the positions of the reels 31 .

The motor 32 serves as driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by reel control means 65, which will be described later.
Here, the reel 31 is composed of a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31. A stop switch 42 operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped, a stop switch 42 is operated. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42 , and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42 .
The left reel 31 may be called the first reel 31 , the middle reel 31 may be called the second reel 31 , and the right reel 31 may be called the third reel 31 .

The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of kinds of patterns (symbols forming a combination of patterns corresponding to a role) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the reel 31 .
Also, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the peripheral side surface of the reel 31, and is used when detecting whether or not the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether or not it has made one revolution, and the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33 . A signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . When the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

In addition, the symbols on the reference position at the instant when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 are stored in the ROM 54 in advance. As a result, it is possible to detect the pattern on the reference position at the moment the index is detected. Furthermore, from the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, by how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 is driven, the symbol counted from the symbol on the reference position can be stopped on the effective line. can be identified.

A medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the paid out medals from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals that have been cleaned and accepted (determined to be normal) from the medal slot 47 are formed to be accommodated in the hopper 35 .
The payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 consists of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance in this embodiment. Then, when the medals are paid out, the predetermined moving member is moved by the medals. The payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off by movement of a predetermined moving member. Based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on/off within the range of the predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly paid out.

For example, when it is not detected that the pair of payout sensors 37 are ON even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected.
On the other hand, when at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output the ON signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

When starting a game, the player inserts medals that have been credited in advance by operating the bet switch 40 (stored bet), or inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 47 (repair bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the prescribed number of medals for the game being bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . When receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) performs a lottery by the combination lottery means 61, drives and controls all the motors 32, and rotates all the reels 31. Control to rotate. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reels 31 are moved up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

By pressing the stop switch 42, the player stops the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50 . Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, which will be described later) drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 so that the lottery result of the combination lottery means 61 (internal lottery The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed so as to correspond to the result determined by means).

Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to one of the winning combinations stops on the activated line (when the winning combination is won), the payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is provided with the following winning lottery means 61 and the like. Each means below in this embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 lotteries (determines and selects) winning numbers. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called "winning number lottery (determination, selection) means". Here, the "lottery of winning numbers by the role lottery means 61" is the same as the "internal lottery" in the regulations of the Entertainment Business Act (regulations regarding certification of gaming machines and model testing, etc.; hereinafter simply referred to as "rules"), The result of the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is the same as the "result determined by the internal lottery" in the rules. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the rules.
The combination lottery means 61 includes, for example, a lottery random number generation means (hardware random number, etc.), a random number extraction means for extracting the random number generated by the random number generation means, and a random value extracted by the random number extraction means. winning number determination means for determining a winning number.

The random number generating means generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts once every 200 n (nano) seconds continues to count the range of "0" to "65535" as one cycle. continue to count.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means determines the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number belongs by collating the random number extracted by the random number extraction means with a lottery table described later.

When the winning number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the condition device number (the winning and replay condition device number and the accessory condition device number) is determined based on the winning number, and the winning becomes operable in the game. And the replay condition device and the accessory condition device are determined. Therefore, the combination lottery means 61 is also called condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.
"Accessory condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a special role (accessory).
Furthermore, the "winning and replay condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a small win or replay.

The winning flag control means 62 controls ON/OFF of the winning flag corresponding to each winning combination based on the result of the lottery by the winning combination lottery means 61 . In this embodiment, a win flag is provided for each role for all the roles. Then, when any winning combination is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of that combination is turned on (a winning flag is set). Note that the winning of a combination includes the case where there is one winning combination (single winning) and the case where there are multiple winning combinations (double winning).

The pressing order instruction number selection means 63 selects a pressing order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct pressing order) based on the lottery result of the winning number by the role lottery means 61 (when the pressing order bell or the pressing order replay is won). decision).
The "pressing order" of the pressing order instruction number selected here means a pressing order (correct pressing order) that is advantageous for the player. For example, when the bell is won, it means the order of pushing the high bell (correct order of pushing). In addition, at the time of replay duplicate winning, it refers to a pushing order that promotes to an advantageous RT or a pushing order that does not fall to a disadvantageous RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is provided with a unique pushing order instruction number.
Then, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during the AT, the main control board 50 displays the above-described acquisition number display LED 78 with the push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically " =*” (“*”=1, 2, . . . ). Thus, the function of displaying push order indication information when a conditional device with an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an indication function.
Also, when winning the push order bell or push order replay during AT, the main control board 50, at the start of the game (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined), the sub control board 80, a command corresponding to the push order instruction number is transmitted.
When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct key pressing order on the image display device 23 .

It should be noted that the push order instruction number selected by the main control board 50 can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (AT). Therefore, even if the pressing order instruction number is selected by the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the pressing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Note that it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number in the normal section.

The effect group number selection means 64 selects a number to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80, which is the effect group number corresponding to the winning number.
Here, an effect group number corresponding to the winning number is determined in advance. When the winning number is determined by operating the start switch 41, the effect group number selecting means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the game, and the main control board 50 selects the selected effect group. The number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. The effect group number is selected for each game and transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, unlike the pressing order instruction number.

Also, the main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number of the game to the sub control board 80 . Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the game. However, since the sub-control board 80 receives the effect group number every game, it is possible to output the effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the pressing order bell or pressing order replay is won, the correct pressing order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 does not notify the correct pressing order based on the effect group number. . On the other hand, during AT, when winning the push order bell or push order replay, the main control board 50 transmits the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 . As a result, the sub-control board 80 can notify the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

The reel control means 65 controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating when receiving a command to start rotating the reels 31, particularly when detecting the operation of the start switch 41 in this embodiment. .
Furthermore, after the win number is determined by the combination lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 refers to the on/off of the win flag in the current game, and refers to the stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off of the win flag. is selected, and when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the timing when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, and the motor 32 is operated Drive control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is ON, the reel control means 65 validates a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination in which the winning flag is ON) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. The reels 31 are controlled to stop so that they can be stopped on the line, and the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination other than the winning combination (the winning flag is turned off) is not stopped on the effective line.

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving symbols (frames)). means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a constant speed of about 80 revolutions per minute.
Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is within 190 ms, except for a predetermined reel 31 (for example, the middle reel 31) during MB operation. is set to Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving symbol number from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 4 symbols, except for the predetermined reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 75 ms. Thus, for a predetermined reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum moving symbol number from the symbol at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 1 symbol.

At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped on a predetermined effective line, the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, the symbol is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line.
That is, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, if the pattern of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined effective line, the reels 31 are not stopped until the reels 31 are stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of the stop control, the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number is controlled to stop on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 are stopped immediately at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated, the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number will stop on the effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of the stop control, control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination that does not correspond to the winning number is not stopped on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won (for example, when the bell is won in the order of pressing), the order of priority of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the order of pressing the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. In accordance with a predetermined order of priority, the drawing-in stop control of the symbol associated with the highest priority combination is performed.

The winning judgment means 66 judges whether or not the symbol combination of the reels 31 stopped on the active line corresponds to any winning combination when the reels 31 are stopped.
Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on the activated line. Specifically, from the conditional device operated in the game, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and / or the operation timing of the stop switch 42, the symbol combination that stops on the effective line before the reel 31 actually stops is set in advance. Alternatively, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line after the reels 31 are stopped is determined in advance.

The control command transmitting means 71 transmits information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80 to the sub-control board 80 .
The control commands include, for example, information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, and a pressing order instruction number (only during AT and when a winning number having a correct pressing order is won). , effect group number, RT (game state) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, information on winning combination, and the like.

A set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50 .
The "set value" relates to the degree of advantage of the player, and in this embodiment, there are six levels of settings 1 to 6, although not shown. The higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.
Furthermore, when the power is turned off, the setting key switch (corresponding to the setting key switch 152 in FIG. 112 (fifth embodiment) to be described later) is turned on, and when the power is turned on in this state, the set value is changed. Transition to a possible configuration change state (configuration change mode). At this time, initialization processing (RWM clear processing) for initializing a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is executed.
Further, when the setting key switch is turned on while the power is on, the setting value cannot be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode).

In FIG. 1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection, output, etc. of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) is unidirectionally transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control commands) required for output.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, and may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, and may be serial communication, or both serial communication and parallel communication may be used.

Like the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to performance peripheral devices such as the following performance lamps 21 as shown in FIG. However, the peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data and the like taken in when the sub CPU 85 controls the effect.
In addition, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program, various data, etc. for performing a lottery related to an effect as data for effect.

The effect lamps 21 are made up of LEDs, for example, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 21 are arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 and are used to illuminate the patterns displayed on the reels 31 (three patterns that are vertically continuous and visible from the display window) from behind. Fluorescent lamps that illuminate symbols on the reels 31 from above, and frame lamps that are arranged in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and blink when winning a winning combination are included.

Also, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effects images during the game (correct pressing order, effects corresponding to the conditional devices that operate in the game, etc.). , and game information (such as the number of games played during the operation of the accessory, the number of games won during the advantageous section (AT), the number of winnings, etc.).

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the pattern arrangement of the reels 31 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 2, in the first embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames.
Further, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reels 31 stop is set to "4".
Therefore, if four predetermined symbols are arranged at intervals of five symbols on one reel 31, the predetermined symbols can always be stopped and displayed on the activated line regardless of which position the stop switch 42 is operated. Specifically, for example, on the left reel 31, "Replay" is arranged at Nos. 17, 12, 7, and 2. Therefore, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is arranged with 4 symbols at intervals of 5 symbols. Therefore, for the left reel 31, "replay" can always be stopped on the active line regardless of when the left stop switch 42 is operated. Such a symbol arrangement may be referred to as a ““PB=1” arrangement”. On the other hand, the case where such a symbol arrangement is not used may be referred to as "the 'PB≠1'arrangement".

On the left reel 31, "Replay", "Watermelon", and "Bell A" are arranged at "PB=1".
In addition, on the middle reel 31, "Replay", "Bell A", and "Bell B" are each arranged at "PB=1".
Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay", "Watermelon", and "Bell A" are arranged at "PB=1".
Further, for example, on the left reel 31, "Blank B" and "Cherry" are placed at "PB=1" by adding these two symbols. Therefore, whatever timing the left stop switch 42 is operated, either "blank B" or "cherry" can be stopped and displayed on the effective line. In this way, there is a portion where the "PB=1" symbol is arranged in the sum of the two symbols.
Furthermore, for example, on the left reel 31, "white BAR", "red 7", "black BAR", and "blank A" are placed at "PB=1" in total of these four symbols. Therefore, any one of "white BAR", "red 7", "black BAR", and "blank A" can be stopped on the effective line at any timing when the left stop switch 42 is operated. In this way, there is a portion where the "PB=1" symbol is arranged in the sum of the four symbols.

FIG. 3A is a diagram showing the display window 18, the positional relationship of each reel 31, and effective lines (display lines for displaying symbol combinations).
can be done.

Also, the valid line in the first embodiment is one line in the middle in the horizontal direction. Each reel 31 is arranged so that three patterns that are continuous vertically can be seen from the display window 18 . Therefore, a total of 9 symbols (frames) are arranged so that they can be seen from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10 .
In the first embodiment, the symbol positions at the time of stopping visible from the display window 18 are referred to as "upper stage", "middle stage", and "lower stage" in order from the top. middle stage" and "lower left stage".

FIGS. 4 to 11 are diagrams showing types of winnings (eg, winning numbers drawn by the winning lottery means 61, etc.), symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc., in the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 4, as the game state of the first embodiment, there are the time when the accessory is not activated (non-special game state) and the time when RB is activated (when the accessory is activated, special game state). is set to "3".
As shown in FIG. 4, the special award (accessory) is only the 1BB (first-class continuous operation device; first-class big bonus) with the winning number "001".
When 1BB is won, the winning is carried over to the next game until 1BB is won. A state in which winning of 1BB is not carried over is called "non-inside", and a state in which winning of 1BB is carried over is called "inside". Also, a game in which 1BB is won is defined as "non-internal". That is, when it is called "internal", it means that 1BB has been won by the previous game. It should be noted that the transition timing to the inside can be appropriately set. For example, in the game in which 1BB is won, after all the reels 31 are stopped, the reels 31 may be moved to inside 1BB. You can move inside.
When 1BB is won in a non-special game state (when the accessory is not activated) and 1BB wins, medals are not paid out in the game this time, but from the next game, it shifts to a 1BB game (special game state) and is in the 1BB game. RB is in a continuous operation (accessory operation) state until the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied.
Here, in the first embodiment, it is not assumed that 1BB wins, and the specification is such that the game is played while inside 1BB.
Winning is carried over to the next game for 1BB, while replays and small wins are valid only in the game and are not carried over to the next game.

In addition to the above 1BB, MB (Second-class role continuous operation device; Second-class big bonus) can be mentioned as a special bonus.
When the MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the MB stops on the effective line (MB wins), medals are not paid out in the current game, but the MB game is started from the next game. During the MB game, a CB (second type special accessory) game is continuously executed.
In the CB game, regardless of the lottery result by the lottery lottery means 61, all the small wins are repeatedly won, and from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31). The time until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (maximum moving frame number is 1 frame). A CB game ends after one game. When the number of medals to be paid out during the MB game exceeds a predetermined number, the MB game is terminated and the game state before shifting to the MB game from the next game is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, Replay 01 to Replay 22 are provided as the types of replays in the first embodiment. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to any replay is stopped and displayed, the game is replayed.
In addition, the symbol combination of Replay 04 with the combination number "008" is all "Red 7", and although the details will be described later, when the device is operated under predetermined conditions including Replay 04 as a winning combination, the stop switch 42 is pressed in a predetermined order. is operated, the "red 7" matching can be stopped and displayed, and a shift to a sub-bonus (also called a "sub-bonus game", which is the same as an "AT", will be described in detail later) is possible.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the types of small wins in the first embodiment include small wins 01 to 87. FIG.
Small winning combination 01 to small winning combination 08 are small combinations that pay out 14 coins. This is a small winning combination that can be won by operating the stop switch 42 in a pressing order that allows winning (also referred to as "advantageous pressing order" or "correct pressing order").
In addition, the small winning combination 09 to small winning combination 13 are small winning combinations with three payouts, and specific condition devices (winning C condition device, winning D condition device, or winning E condition device described later) that have different game results depending on the pressing order ), when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order in which the 3-card combination can be won (similar to the above, it is also called "advantageous order of pressing" or "correct order of pressing"), a small combination in which a prize can be won is operated. is.
Small wins 14 to 69 (single win) are wins that can be won when the stop switch 42 is operated in an unadvantageous push order when a conditional device with different game results depending on the push order is activated. .

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing RT transitions in the first embodiment. First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, it transitions to non-RT. "RWM initialization" here is executed, for example, when power is turned on with a setting change, and indicates initialization of the entire range of RWM 53, and initialization of 1BB winning information and RT state. includes. When the RT state data is initialized, it becomes "0", but when the RT state data is "0", it corresponds to non-RT.
Non-RT is in 1BB non-inside and continues until 1BB is won. As will be described later, the winning probability of 1BB in non-RT is "7564/65536 (approximately 11%)".

When the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is not stop-displayed in the game in which 1BB is won, RT1 (inside 1BB) is set from the next game. In this embodiment, there is no non-winning game for small wins and replays at RT1 (inside 1BB). Therefore, there is no case where 1BB wins in RT1. Therefore, winning 1BB is limited to non-RT games in which 1BB is won. Furthermore, the game in which 1BB is won in this embodiment includes a case where 1BB is won alone and a case where 1BB and a small combination (winning prize E) are won in duplicate. In a game in which 1BB and a small winning combination (winning E) are won in duplicate, the symbols related to the small winning combination (winning E) are preferentially stopped and displayed, so that 1BB is not won in the game.
Therefore, 1BB wins only in non-RT games in which 1BB wins alone (the probability is "4/65536", as will be described later). Therefore, such cases rarely occur.
On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB is stopped and displayed in a game in which 1BB is won, 1BB is in operation (RB is in operation) (special game state), until the end condition of 1BB operation (for example, 100 coins are paid out) until) continue. When the conditions for ending the 1BB operation are satisfied, the mode is shifted to non-RT again.

13 to 18 are diagrams showing numbers (winning probabilities) for each winning number in the first embodiment. 13 and 14 show the non-RT table of entries, FIGS. 15 and 16 show the table of RT1 entries, and FIGS. 17 and 18 show the table of entries during RB operation.
The probability of winning is obtained by dividing the numerical value in each numerical table by "65536". For example, in FIG. 13, the winning number "1" (replay A) is "8943" in common for all settings, so the winning probability is "8943/65536" (about "1/7. ).
Also, the "setting value" relates to the player's advantage, and has six levels of "setting 1" to "setting 6", as in the first embodiment.
In this way, a set number is determined for each RT (game state) and each set value.

In addition, in each numerical table, "advantageous section" indicates whether or not there is a lottery for transition to the advantageous section. '○' means that the advantageous zone lottery will be executed when the winning number is won, and '?' means that the advantageous zone lottery will not be executed when the winning number is won. "-" means that the lottery is not subject to the lottery (because the number is "0"), and thus the advantageous section is not subject to the lottery. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, it is set so that the advantageous section is won with a probability of "1/1".
For example, when the game is a normal section and winning number "1" (replay A) in FIG. 13 is won, the game always wins the transition to the advantageous section, and the next game is the advantageous section.
In addition, when it is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed.
Also, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 15, when the winning number "2" (replay B) is won for both non-RT and RT1, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed, so the transition to the advantageous section is not performed. Therefore, when the winning number "2" is won in the normal section, the next game will also be in the normal section.
Further, as shown in FIG. 16, in RT1, when winning numbers ``60'' to ``71'' (winning prize E1 to winning prize 12) are won, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed, so the transition to the advantageous section is not performed. Therefore, similarly to the winning number "2", when the winning numbers "60" to "71" are won in the normal section, the next game will also be in the normal section.
Instead of executing the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, a winning number for shifting to the advantageous section may be determined, and when the winning number is won, the next game may be shifted to the advantageous section. For example, when winning a winning number marked with "○" in the column of the advantageous section in each number table shown in FIGS. You may do so.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, as the winning of 1BB in non-RT (non-inside), the winning number "0" which is a single winning, and the winning number "60" to " 71”.
On the other hand, there is no case of winning 1BB in RT1 (internal). Therefore, in RT1, there is no case of winning the winning number "0". Winning of winning numbers "60" to "71" in RT1 is a single winning of prize E.
In this embodiment, non-RT is after RWM initialization, that is, after power-on with setting change, as shown in FIG. Then, assuming that 1BB is not won in a game in which 1BB is won, RT1 (internal middle) remains after 1BB is won.
On the other hand, although the details will be described later, the advantageous section ends at the end of the game in which the difference number (value obtained by subtracting the number of inputs from the number of payouts) from the start of the advantageous section exceeds "2400". The next game of the game exceeding ” will be the normal section. However, even if it shifts to the normal section, since the winning of 1BB is carried over, RT1 remains.
Therefore, in the case of this embodiment, after RWM initialization (after setting change), it is a non-RT and normal section, but if 1BB is won, it becomes RT1, and if a winning number that shifts to an advantageous section is won, it will be advantageous from the next game. Move to section.
When the difference number exceeds "2400" after becoming RT1 and the advantageous section, the next game becomes RT1 and the normal section. If a winning number that shifts to the advantageous section in the RT1 and normal section is won, the RT1 and advantageous section will be set from the next game.

19 to 26 are diagrams showing condition device numbers, condition devices, winning combinations, and the like.
First, the combination lottery means 61 draws a winning number with a winning probability corresponding to the above-described number table according to each game state. For example, if the winning number "0" (1BB) is won in non-RT, the game becomes a game in which the 1BB condition device of the accessory condition device number "1" can be operated. In a game in which the 1BB condition device can be operated, the winning combination included in the 1BB condition device, that is, the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB can be stopped on the activated line.
In addition, for example, if the winning number "1" (replay A) is won in non-RT, the game becomes a game in which the replay A condition device can be operated among the small wins and the replay condition device. Then, in a game in which the replay A condition device is activated, a winning combination included in the replay A condition device, specifically, any one of replays 01, 03 to 05, can be stopped on the activated line.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the game when the replay B condition device is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated by reverse pressing (pressing order 321 (right middle left)), the symbol combination corresponding to replay 04 ("Red 7" aligned) can be stopped, and the symbol combination corresponding to replay 01 can be stopped by operating the stop switch 42 in other pressing order.
In addition, in the game when the replay A, replay C to replay G condition devices are activated, the symbol combination corresponding to replay 01 can be stopped regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.
For example, the symbol combination of Replay 01 is "Blank B"-"Blank B"-"Replay" of winning combination number "001" in FIG. ' arrangement, and 'Replay' on the right reel 31 is 'PB=1' arrangement. Therefore, in the game when the replay A to replay G condition device is activated, replay 01 can be stop-displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated in any order.

In addition, the symbol combinations of replays 01 to 05, which are winning hands included in the replay B condition device, are, respectively,
Replay 01: "Blank B" - "Blank B" - "Replay"
Replay 02: "Bell A" - "Replay" - "Bell A"
Replay 03: "White BAR" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 03: "Red 7" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 03: "Black BAR" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 03: "Blank A" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Replay 04: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
Replay 05: "White BAR" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
Replay 05: "Black BAR" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
Replay 05: "Blank A" - "Red 7" - "Red 7"
is.
Then, in the game when the replay B condition device is activated, for example, when "Red 7" can be stopped at the right first stop, "Red 7" is stopped in the middle right row. When "red 7" cannot be stopped in the right middle row, "replay" is stopped in the right middle row.
After "Replay" is stopped in the right middle row, "Blank B" is stopped in the middle middle row, and "Blank B" is stopped in the left middle row.

On the other hand, after "Red 7" is stopped at the right first stop, if "Red 7" can be stopped at the middle middle stage at the middle second stop, "Red 7" is stopped at the middle middle stage. When "Red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle middle row, "Replay" is stopped in the right middle row. In addition, when "Red 7" is stopped at the right first stop and "Replay" is stopped at the middle second stop, "White BAR", "Red 7", "Black BAR" or "Black BAR" at the left third stop "Blank A" (symbol of "PB=1" in sum of 4 symbols) is stopped. As a result, Replay 03 is stopped and displayed.
Next, when "Red 7" is stopped at the right first stop and "Red 7" is stopped at the middle middle stage at the middle second stop, "Red 7" is stopped at the left middle stage at the left third stop. Stop "Red 7" in the left middle row when possible. As a result, the symbol combination of replay 04 is stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, when "red 7" cannot be stopped in the middle left row at the third left stop, "white BAR", "black BAR" or "blank A" is stopped in the middle left row. As a result, replay 05 is stopped and displayed.

Further, when the first stop is the left reel 31, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle left row (PB=1). After that, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage (PB=1), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" is stopped at the right middle stage (PB=1). As a result, replay 02 is stopped and displayed.
The same applies when the first stop is the middle reel 31 . When the middle reel 31 is stopped, "Replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage, after that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" is stopped at the left middle stage, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" is stopped at the right middle stage. Let

Furthermore, since RT1 carries over the winning of 1BB, when winning any of the replays, it becomes a game in which the 1BB condition device and the winning replay condition device operate. However, in a game in which both 1BB and replay can be stopped and displayed, priority is given to stopping and displaying replay. Furthermore, the replay is "PB=1". Therefore, in the game when the replay condition device is activated in RT1, there is no case where 1BB is stop-displayed.
Further, in RT1, when any small combination is won, the 1BB condition device and the won minor combination condition device are activated. However, in a game in which both 1BB and small wins can be stop-displayed, the stop-display of the small win is given priority. Here, the small win includes a small win of "PB=1" and a small win of not "PB=1". However, if priority is given to stop-displaying small wins, 1BB is configured not to be stop-displayed. In other words, 1BB is never stopped even in a game in which a small winning combination cannot be stopped.
Specifically, when the game is completed by forward pressing, in order to stop and display the symbol combination of 1BB, when the left reel 31 is stopped, it is necessary to stop "blank B" in the middle left row. However, only the small winning combination 72 with winning combination number "276", the small winning combination 76 with winning combination number "280", and the small winning combination 78 with winning combination number "282" have the symbol "Blank B" on the left reel 31. is. However, there is no case where the stop display of the small winning combination 72, the small winning combination 76 or the small winning combination 78 is prioritized in the game when the small winning combination condition device is activated. For example, the winning A1 condition device includes a small winning combination 72 as a winning combination, but the stop display of the small combination 52 or 54 is prioritized during forward pressing.
As described above, in RT1, there is no game in which the symbol combination of 1BB is stop-displayed when any conditional device is activated.

Next, a so-called pressing order bell condition device will be described.
The push order bell condition device consists of the following types:
Winning A condition device: Winning A1 condition device ~ Winning A16 condition device Winning B condition device: Winning B1 condition device ~ Winning B16 condition device Winning C condition device: Winning C1 condition device ~ Winning C8 condition device Winning D condition device: Winning D1 condition Device ~ Winning D12 condition device Winning E condition device: Winning E1 condition device ~ Winning E12 condition device And, for the winning A condition device and the winning B condition device, the order of pushing is irregular (middle first stop or right first stop) It is a conditional device that gives the correct answer. In the game when these conditional devices are activated, a small winning combination of paying out 14 coins is won when the pushing order is correct, and a small winning winning combination of paying out one coin is won or lost when the pushing order is incorrect.
On the other hand, the prize C condition device is a condition device in which forward pressing (left first stop) is the correct pressing order. In the game when the prize C condition device is activated, a small winning combination of paying out three coins is won when the pushing order is correct, and a small winning winning combination of paying out one coin is won or lost when the pushing order is incorrect.
In addition, among the games when the prize D condition device is activated, the left first stop 1 is the correct push order in the game with the prize D1 to D4 condition device, and the middle first stop is pressed in the game when the prize D5 to D8 condition device is activated. The order is correct, and in the game when the prize D9-D12 condition device is activated, the right first stop is the correct order. In the game when these conditional devices are activated, a small winning combination of paying out three coins is won when the pressing order is correct, and a small winning winning combination of paying out one coin is won or lost when the pushing order is incorrect.
Furthermore, among the games when the winning E condition device is activated, the left first stop is the correct push order in the game when the winning E1 to E4 condition device is activated, and the middle first stop in the game when the winning E5 to E8 condition device is activated. The correct pressing order is the correct pressing order. In the game when these conditional devices are activated, a small winning combination of paying out three coins is won when the pressing order is correct, and a small winning winning combination of paying out one coin is won or lost when the pushing order is incorrect.

Hereinafter, some conditional devices related to the pushing order bell will be extracted, and the reel stop control when the conditional devices are activated will be described. In addition, in the following description, even if winning of 1BB is carried over in RT1, stop control relating to 1BB is omitted.
(Example 1) Small hand A1 condition device (push order 213 correct answer)
For example, in a game in which the winning number is "8" in RT1 and the minor combination A1 condition device is activated, any one of the minor combinations 01, 14, 32, 52, 54, 70-72 can be won as shown in FIG. Become. However, any of the small wins 01, 14, 32, 52, and 54 can actually be won. The minor wins 70 to 72 are control wins (control wins are wins for differentiating the stop control of the reels 31, not wins).
As described in the first embodiment, when a plurality of types of small wins are won (at the same time), the reels 31 are stopped with priority given to the number of reels when the pressing order is correct, and the number of reels is prioritized when the pressing order is incorrect. stop control.
As shown in FIG. 19, when the winning A1 condition device is activated,
Push order 123 (wrong answer): Small wins 52, 54 (1 card) (winning rate "1/2")
Push order 132 (wrong answer): Small wins 52, 54 (1 card) (winning rate "1/2")
Push order 213 (correct answer): Small winning prize 01 (14 cards) (PB = 1)
Push order 231 (wrong answer): Small combination 14 (winning rate "1/2")
Push order 312 (wrong answer): Small combination 32 (winning rate "1/8")
Push order 321 (wrong answer): Small combination 32 (winning rate "1/8")
can win prizes.
In addition, each pushing order shown above is the same as in the first embodiment.
Push order 123: Push order left, middle, right Push order 132: Push order left, right, middle Push order 213: Push order left, right Push order 231: Push order right, left Push order 312: Push order right, left, middle Push order 321: Push order right, middle left respectively.

Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to each minor combination included in the winning A1 condition device is as follows.
Small role 01: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Watermelon"
Small role 14: "White BAR" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small role 14: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Bell A"
Small role 32: "Black BAR" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 32: "Blank A" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "White BAR"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Black BAR"
Small role 54: "Replay" - "Blank B" - "White BAR"
Small role 54: "Replay" - "Blank B" - "Black BAR"
Small role 70: "Bell A" - "Replay" - "Watermelon"
Small role 71: "Cherry" - "Replay" - "Red 7"
Small role 72: "Cherry" - "Replay" - "Blank B"
Small role 72: "Blank B" - "Replay" - "Blank B"
First, at the time of the middle first stop, since the pressing order is correct at this point, "Bell A" is stopped in the middle middle row with the number priority in order to win the small winning combination 01 (PB=1).
Next, at the time of the second stop on the left, since the pressing order is correct at this point, the "watermelon" is stopped in the middle left row with the number priority (PB=1).
Then, at the right third stop, "watermelon" is stopped in the middle right row (PB=1).
As a result, the small winning combination 01 wins.
Also, after the middle first stop, at the right second stop, since the pressing order is incorrect at this point, "Bell A" is stopped in the right middle row (PB=1) by giving priority to the number.
At the third stop on the left, if "white BAR" or "red 7" can be stopped in the middle left row, either of these symbols is stopped (PB.noteq.1). If "White BAR" or "Red 7" can be stopped in the middle left row, a small win 14 is won.
Here, the "white BAR" of the left reel 31 is arranged at the "16" number, and the "red 7" is arranged at the "11" number. Therefore, the probability of attracting "white BAR" or "red 7" to the middle left row (pull-in rate (PB)) is "1/2". Therefore, when the pressing order is 231, the small combination 14 can be won, and the winning rate is "1/2".

Next, at the first stop on the right, since the pressing order is incorrect at this point, if the number priority is adopted, the symbols with the largest number on the right reel 31 are "Bell A", "Replay", and "White BAR". , ``black BAR'', and ``blank B'' (two of each). When there are a plurality of symbols having the maximum number, they can be arbitrarily determined, so that ``Replay'' is given priority among these symbols, and ``Replay'' is stopped in the middle right row (PB=1).
Then, only the small combination 32 can be won at this time.
Next, at the second stop on the left, if "black bar" or "blank A" can be stopped on the middle left row, either of these symbols is stopped on the middle left row. The pull-in rate of "black BAR" or "blank A" to the middle left row is "1/2".
Further, at the middle third stop, if the "white BAR" can be stopped at the middle middle stage, the symbol is stopped at the middle middle stage. The pull-in rate to the middle middle stage of the "white BAR" is "1/4".
Therefore, when the pressing order is 312, the small combination 32 can win, and the winning rate is "1/8".
After the right first stop, at the middle second stop, the "white BAR" stops at the pull-in rate "1/4" in the same manner as described above. Further, at the third stop on the left, the "black BAR" or "blank A" stops at the pull-in rate of "1/2" as described above.
Therefore, at the push order 321, the small winning combination 32 can be won, and the winning rate is "1/8".

Next, at the first stop on the left, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so if the number priority is adopted, the symbol on the left reel 31 with the largest number is "Replay" (4 symbols). Therefore, it is determined that "replay" (PB=1) is stopped.
Then, at this point, the small winning combination 52 or 54 can be won.
Next, at the middle and second stop, if "watermelon" or "blank B" can be stopped at the middle middle stage, either of these symbols is stopped at the middle middle stage (total "PB=1").
Further, at the third stop on the right, if the "white BAR" or "black BAR" can be stopped at the right middle stage, either of these symbols is stopped at the right middle stage. The draw-in ratio of the "white BAR" or "black BAR" to the middle right row is "1/2".
Therefore, when the pressing order is 123, the small winning combination 52 or 54 can be won, and the winning rate is "1/2".
Further, after the first left stop, at the second right stop, the "white BAR" or the "black BAR" can be stopped at the pull-in rate "1/2" in the same manner as described above. Furthermore, at the middle third stop, "PB=1" can stop "Watermelon" or "Blank B" at the middle middle stage in the same manner as described above.
Therefore, when the pressing order is 132, the small winning combination 52 or 54 can be won, and the winning rate is "1/2".

(Example 2) Small hand A13 condition device (push order 321 correct answers)
As shown in FIG. 21, any one of the small wins 04, 20, 36, 60, 62, 77, 78 and 80 can be won in the game in which the minor win A13 conditional device is activated.
When the winning A13 condition device is activated,
Push order 123 (wrong answer): Small wins 60, 62 (1 card) (winning rate "1/4")
Push order 132 (wrong answer): Small wins 60, 62 (1 card) (winning rate "1/4")
Push order 213 (wrong answer): Small win 36 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/8")
Push order 231 (wrong answer): Small role 36 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/8")
Push order 312 (wrong answer): 20 small wins (1 card) (winning rate "1/2")
Push order 321 (correct answer): Small role 04 (14 cards) (PB = 1)
can win prizes.
Also, the symbol combination for each minor combination is as follows.
Small role 04: "Watermelon" - "Watermelon" - "Replay"
Small role 04: "Watermelon" - "Blank B" - "Replay"
Small role 20: "Bell A" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 20: "Bell A" - "Red 7" - "Replay"
Small role 36: "White BAR" - "Replay" - "White BAR"
Small role 36: "Red 7" - "Replay" - "White BAR"
Small role 60: "Replay" - "Bell A" - "Red 7"
Small role 62: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Red 7"
Small role 77: "Cherry" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small role 78: "Blank B" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small role 80: "Black BAR" - "Black BAR" - "Watermelon"
Small role 80: "Blank A" - "Black BAR" - "Watermelon"

Here, the pressing order 123 and the pressing order 132 (when the winning rate is "1/4") will be described as an example.
In the case of left first stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so the symbols are stopped with priority given to the number. In this case, "Watermelon", "Bell A" and "Replay" each have the number of symbols "2", but here they are defined as "Replay" (PB=1).
Also, at the middle (second or third) stop, if it is possible to stop "Bell A" or "Watermelon" in the middle middle row, either of these symbols are stopped. Note that the middle reel 31 has only "Bell A" and "PB=1".
Furthermore, at the right (second or third) stop, if the "red 7" in the middle right row can be stopped, the symbol is stopped (PB≠1). Since there is only one "red 7" on the right reel 31, the draw rate is "1/4".
Therefore, the winning rate of the small winning combination 60 or 62 in the pushing order 123 and the pushing order 132 when the small winning combination A13 condition device is activated is "1/4".

(Example 3) Small win B15 condition device (push order 321 correct answers)
As shown in FIG. 23, any one of the small wins 08, 21, 50, 64, 65, 77-79 can be won in the game in which the minor win B15 condition device is activated.
Also, when the winning B15 condition device is activated,
Push order 123 (wrong answer): Small wins 64, 65 (1 card) (winning rate "3/4")
Push order 132 (wrong answer): Small wins 64, 65 (1 card) (winning rate "3/4")
Push order 213 (wrong answer): 50 small wins (1 piece) (winning rate "1/8")
Push order 231 (wrong answer): Small role 50 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/8")
Push order 312 (wrong answer): Small role 21 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/2")
Push order 321 (correct answer): Small role 08 (14 cards) (PB = 1)
can win prizes.
Also, the symbol combination for each minor combination is as follows.
Small role 08: "Watermelon" - "Replay" - "Replay"
Small role 21: "Bell A" - "Black BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 21: "Bell A" - "Cherry" - "Replay"
Small role 50: "Black BAR" - "Bell A" - "Cherry"
Small role 50: "Blank A" - "Bell A" - "Cherry"
Small role 64: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Blank B"
Small role 65: "Replay" - "Blank B" - "Blank B"
Small role 77: "Cherry" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small role 78: "Blank B" - "Bell B" - "Watermelon"
Small role 79: "White BAR" - "White BAR" - "Watermelon"
Small role 79: "Red 7" - "White BAR" - "Watermelon"

Here, the pressing order 123 and the pressing order 132 (when the winning rate is "3/4") will be described as an example.
In the case of left first stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, so the symbols are stopped with priority given to the number. In this case, "Watermelon", "Bell A" and "Replay" each have the number of symbols "2", but here they are defined as "Replay" (PB=1).
Also, at the middle (second or third) stop, if it is possible to stop "watermelon" or "blank B" in the middle middle row, either of these symbols is stopped. The middle reel 31 has "PB=1" as a result of the sum of the two symbols "Watermelon" and "Blank B".
Furthermore, at the time of right (second or third) stop, if "Blank B" can be stopped in the middle right row, the symbol is stopped (PB≠1). In addition, since the "blank B" is arranged at three locations on the right reel 31 at intervals of five symbols, the draw-in rate is "3/4".
Therefore, the winning rate of the small winning combination 64 or 65 in the pushing order 123 and the pushing order 132 when the small winning combination B15 condition device is activated is "3/4".

As described above, in the game when the winning A condition device and the winning B condition device are activated, the irregular pressing becomes the correct pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, "PB=1" wins a 14-card combination.
In addition, when the first stop is correct and the second stop is incorrect, the winning rate is "1/2" and a winning combination of 1 is awarded.
Furthermore, when it is the first left stop (forward push), a winning combination of 1 card is won with a winning rate of "1/1", "1/2", "1/4" or "3/4".
Furthermore, when the first stop is incorrect in the irregular push, the winning rate is "1/8", and a one-card combination is won.

(Example 4) Winning C1 condition device (first correct answer on the left)
As shown in FIG. 23, any of the small wins 09, 28, 29, 44 and 45 can be won in the game in which the minor win C1 condition device is activated.
Also, when the winning C1 condition device is activated,
Push order 1-- (correct answer): Small role 09 (3 cards) (PB = 1)
Push order -1- (wrong answer): Small role 44, 45 (1 sheet) (prize rate "1/4")
Push order--1 (wrong answer): Small role 28, 29 (1 sheet) (winning rate "1/4")
can win prizes.
Also, the symbol combination for each minor combination is as follows.
Small role 09: "Replay" - "Replay" - "Watermelon"
Small role 28: "White BAR" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 28: "Red 7" - "White BAR" - "Replay"
Small role 29: "White BAR" - "Red 7" - "Replay"
Small role 29: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Replay"
Small role 44: "White BAR" - "Bell A" - "White BAR"
Small role 44: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "White BAR"
Small role 45: "White BAR" - "Bell A" - "Black BAR"
Small role 45: "Red 7" - "Bell A" - "Black BAR"
First, when it is the first left stop (correct pressing order), "Replay" is stopped at the middle left (PB=1). Further, when the game is stopped in the middle after that, "Replay" is stopped in the middle middle stage (PB=1), and in the case of the right stop, "Watermelon" is stopped in the middle right stage (PB=1).
As a result, the small winning combination 09 wins.
In addition, when it is the middle first stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, and "Bell A" with the largest number of symbols is stopped at the middle middle stage (PB=1).
Further, at the time of the subsequent left stop, the "white BAR" or "red 7" is stopped in the middle left row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" when the two symbols are combined). Furthermore, at the time of the subsequent right stop, "Cherry" or "Blank A" is stopped in the middle right row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" when the two symbols are combined).
Therefore, at the time of the middle first stop, the small combination 44 or 45 is stopped and displayed with a winning rate of "1/4".
Next, when it is the first stop on the right, the pressing order is wrong at this point, and "replay" with the largest number of symbols is stopped in the middle right row (PB=1).
Further, at the time of the subsequent left stop, the "white BAR" or "red 7" is stopped in the middle left row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" when the two symbols are combined). Furthermore, at the time of the subsequent middle stop, the "black bar" or "cherry" is stopped at the middle middle stage (the pull-in rate is "1/2" when the two symbols are combined).
Therefore, at the right first stop, the small combination 28 or 29 is stopped and displayed with a winning rate of "1/4".

(Example 5) Winning D5 condition device (middle 1st correct answer)
As shown in FIG. 24, any one of the small wins 11, 52 and 66 can be won in the game in which the small win D5 condition device is activated.
Also, when the winning D5 condition device is activated,
Push order 1-- (wrong answer): Small role 52 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
Push order -1- (correct answer): Small role 11 (3 cards) (PB = 1)
Push order--1 (wrong answer): Small role 66 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
can win prizes.
Also, the symbol combination for each minor combination is as follows.
Small role 11: "Watermelon" - "Bell A" - "Replay"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "White BAR"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Black BAR"
Small role 66: "White BAR" - "White BAR" - "Bell A"
Small role 66: "White BAR" - "Red 7" - "Bell A"
Small role 66: "Red 7" - "White BAR" - "Bell A"
Small role 66: "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Bell A"
First, when it is the middle first stop (correct pushing order), "Bell A" is stopped at the middle middle stage (PB=1). Further, when the game is stopped after that, the "watermelon" is stopped at the middle middle stage (PB=1), and when the game is stopped right, the "replay" is stopped at the middle right stage (PB=1).
As a result, the small winning combination 11 wins.
Also, if it is the first stop on the left, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, and any one of "Replay", "White BAR", and "Red 7" will be stopped in the middle left row according to the number priority. , here it is determined that "replay" is stopped (PB=1).
Further, during the subsequent middle stop, the "watermelon" is stopped at the middle middle stage (pull-in rate "1/2"). Furthermore, at the time of the subsequent right stop, the "white BAR" or "black BAR" is stopped in the middle right row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" when the two symbols are combined).
Therefore, at the left first stop, the small winning combination 52 is stopped and displayed with a winning rate of "1/4".
Next, when it is the right first stop, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, and "Bell A" with the largest number of symbols is stopped in the middle right row (PB=1).
Further, at the time of the subsequent left stop, the "white BAR" or "red 7" is stopped in the middle left row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" when the two symbols are combined). Furthermore, during the subsequent middle stop, the "white BAR" or "red 7" is stopped at the middle middle stage (the pull-in rate is "1/2" when the two symbols are combined).
Therefore, at the right first stop, the small winning combination 66 is stopped and displayed with a winning rate of "1/4".

(Example 6) Winning E9 condition device (right first correct answer)
As shown in FIG. 25, any one of the small wins 12, 42, 43 and 52 can be won in the game in which the minor win E9 condition device is activated.
Also, when the winning E9 condition device is activated,
Push order 1-- (wrong answer): Small role 52 (1 piece) (winning rate "1/4")
Push order -1- (wrong answer): Small role 42, 43 (1 sheet) (winning rate "1/4")
Push order--1 (correct answer): Small role 12 (3 cards) (PB = 1)
can win prizes.
Also, the symbol combination for each minor combination is as follows.
Small role 12: "Watermelon" - "Bell B" - "Replay"
Small role 42: "Black BAR" - "Replay" - "Cherry"
Small role 42: "Blank A" - "Replay" - "Cherry"
Small role 43: "Black BAR" - "Replay" - "Blank A"
Small role 43: "Blank A" - "Replay" - "Blank A"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "White BAR"
Small role 52: "Replay" - "Watermelon" - "Black BAR"
First, when it is the first stop on the right (correct order of pressing), "Replay" is stopped in the middle right row (PB=1) with priority given to the number of sheets. Further, when the vehicle is stopped after that, "Watermelon" is stopped at the left middle stage (PB=1), and at the time of the middle stop, "Bell B" is stopped at the right middle stage (PB=1).
As a result, the small winning combination 12 wins.
If it is the first stop on the left, the pressing order is incorrect at this point, and either "Replay", "Black BAR", or "Blank A" will be stopped in the middle left row according to the number priority. , here it is determined that "replay" is stopped (PB=1).
Further, during the subsequent middle stop, the "watermelon" is stopped at the middle middle stage (attraction rate is "1/2"). Furthermore, at the time of the subsequent right stop, the "white BAR" or "black BAR" is stopped in the middle right row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" when the two symbols are combined).
Therefore, at the left first stop, the small winning combination 52 wins with a winning rate of "1/4".
Next, when it is the middle first stop, the pressing order is wrong at this point, and "replay", which has the largest number of symbols, is stopped at the middle middle row (PB=1).
Further, at the subsequent left stop, the "black BAR" or "blank A" is stopped in the middle left row (the pull-in rate is "1/2" when the two symbols are combined). Furthermore, at the time of the subsequent right stop, "Cherry" or "Blank A" is stopped in the middle middle stage (the pull-in rate is "1/2" when the two symbols are combined).
Therefore, at the middle first stop, the small winning combination 42 or 43 wins with a winning rate of "1/4".

In non-RT or RT1, there are cases where winning numbers "72" to "75" are won (FIGS. 14 and 16), and when these winning numbers are won, the winning F condition device and the winning G condition device respectively , the winning H condition device, and the winning I condition device operate.
Also, during the RB operation, there are cases where winning numbers "76" to "78" are won (Fig. 18). Winning L condition device operates.
Description of the reel stop control when these condition devices are activated is omitted.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing effect group numbers in the first embodiment.
In the main process, every game, an effect group number corresponding to the winning lottery result (winning number) is selected (in FIG. The sub-control board 80 determines and outputs an effect in the current game based on the received effect group number.
As for the effect group numbers, the feature of the first embodiment is that the prizes A1 to A16, the prizes B1 to B16, and the prizes C1 to C8 all have the same effect group number "8". Therefore, on the side of the sub-control board 80, when the effect group number 8 is received, it can be determined that any one of the prizes A1 to A16, the prizes B1 to B16, and the prizes C1 to C8 has been won in the game this time. , It is not possible to determine the order of pressing the correct answer.

Here, among the production group number "8", the winning prizes A1 to A16 and the winning prizes B1 to B16 all have irregular pushing order, so the number of each winning number and the payout at the correct pushing order Depending on the number of coins, there is a risk that the expected value at the time of irregular pressing may exceed the specified number (number of bets). However, in this embodiment, even if an irregular push is made knowing that the effect group number of the current game is "8", the expected value of the current game is set to be equal to or less than the specified number.
As a result, even if the performance group number transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 is illegally acquired by, for example, a trick, it is configured such that the number of medals exceeding the prescribed number cannot be obtained.

FIG. 28 is a diagram for explaining the expected value when the effect group number is "8" in the first embodiment.
Here, the pressing order 213 is taken as an example of irregular pressing. Although the calculation is omitted, the expected value is the same for all of the pressing orders 213, 231, 312, and 321 in the irregular pressing.
As for forward pressing, the pressing order 123 is taken as an example. Although the calculation is omitted, the expected value for the push order 123 and the expected value for the push order 132 are the same.
First, when one of the prizes A1 to A16 is won, 14 payouts are obtained in the pushing order 213 when the prizes A1 to A4 are awarded. Therefore, in the pressing order 213, when the winnings are A1 to A4, the winning rate is "1/1" and the winning combination is 14 cards, so the expected value is "14 (cards)".
In addition, in the pressing order 213, when the winnings are A5 to A8, the winning rate is "1/2", and the expected value is "0.5 (copies)".
Furthermore, in the pressing order 213, when the winnings are A9 to A16, the winning rate is "1/8" and the winning combination is "1/8", so the expected value is "0.125 (copies)".
The above is the same for winning B1 to B16.
Further, in the pressing order 213, when the winnings are C1 to C8, the winning rate is "1/4", and the expected value is "0.25 (copies)".

Next, in the pressing order 123, when the winnings are A1 to A8, the winning rate is "1/2", and the expected value is "0.5 (copies)".
Furthermore, in the pressing order 123, when the prizes are A9 to A12, the expected value is "1 (piece)" because "PB=1" and the one-card combination wins.
Further, in the pressing order 123, when the prizes are A13 to A14, the winning rate is "1/4" and the winning combination is "1/4", so the expected value is "0.25 (pieces)".
Further, in the pressing order 123, when the prizes are A15 to A16, the winning rate is "3/4" and the winning combination is "3/4", so the expected value is "0.75 (pieces)".
The above is the same for winning B1 to B16.
Further, in the pressing order 123, when the prizes are C1 to C8, "PB=1" and a 3-card combination is won, so the expected value is "3 (cards)".

As described above, in the case of the pushing order of 213, the expected value for winning A1 to A16 and winning B1 to B16 is "3.6875 (sheets)".
Further, in the case of the pressing order of 213, the expected value for winning C1 to C8 is "0.25 (sheets)".
On the other hand, when the pressing order is 123, the expected value for winning A1 to A16 and winning B1 to B16 is "0.625 (sheets)".
Further, in the case of the pressing order of 123, the expected value for winning C1 to C8 is "3 (sheets)".
The winning probabilities of the prizes A1 to A16 (set number "1112") are the same. Furthermore, the odds of winning B1 to B16 (number "1112") are the same. Furthermore, the win probability (number "1113") of winning prizes C1 to C8 is the same.
Therefore, the total number of winning A1 to A16, winning B1 to B16, and winning C1 to C8 is
1112×16+1112×16+1113×8
= 44488
is.
Therefore, the probability of winning prizes A1 to A16 when the effect group number is "8" is
(1112×16)/44488
≈ 0.399928
is.
The probability of winning B1 to B16 when the effect group number is "8" is also "0.399928" as described above.
Also, the probability of winning prizes C1 to C8 when the effect group number is "8" is
(1113×8)/44488
≈ 0.200144
is.

Therefore, the expected value when operating with the pressing order 213 at the effect group number "8" is
0.399928 x 3.6875 + 0.399928 x 3.6875 + 0.200144 x 0.25
≒ 2.9995 (pieces)
, which is less than the specified number "3".
Also, the expected value when operating with the pressing order of 123 at the production group number "8" is
0.399928 x 0.625 + 0.399928 x 0.625 + 0.200144 x 3
≒ 1.1003 (pieces)
, which is less than the specified number "3".
From the above, even if an irregular push is made knowing that the game is the effect group number "8" this time, the expected value cannot exceed the specified number "3".

It should be noted that, as described above, when the effect group number is "8", the expected value for the irregular push is higher than the expected value for the normal push.
However, in the first embodiment, in this game in which the irregular push is performed during non-AT, the sub-bonus (equivalent to AT) lottery is not executed, the sub-bonus lottery performed in the game this time is invalidated, or in order. A sub-bonus lottery with a lower winning probability than when pressed is executed. In other words, the degree of expectation regarding AT in the current game in which irregular pressing is performed during non-AT is relatively lower than the degree of expectation regarding AT in this game in which forward pressing is performed during non-AT. .
In the case of ``invalidate the sub-bonus lottery performed in the current game'', for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, the sub-bonus lottery is executed as usual (because it is not determined at this point whether or not it will be irregularly pressed). ), and invalidating (clearing or discarding) the sub-bonus lottery in the game this time when it is determined that an irregular push has been made at the time of full stop.
Therefore, it is better to play the game by normal pressing during non-AT and according to the pressing order instruction during AT, when playing irregular pressing during non-AT and according to the pressing order instruction during AT. It is configured so that the total ball output performance is higher than that.
Here, the lower the base during non-AT, the higher the instructed character ratio. Therefore, a common bell may be provided in order to reduce the ratio of instructed accessories. However, since the common bell is a winning combination regardless of the pressing order (pressing position), the odds of winning are high when the bell is pressed irregularly.
Therefore, by providing a left-biased bell (push order bell for which the forward push is the correct answer) as in the present embodiment, while lowering the base during non-AT when playing the game with forward push, the ratio of instructed accessories is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the ball-out rate at the time of irregular pressing more than in the case of providing a common bell for suppressing the instruction-containing accessory ratio.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, an SP flag is provided. The SP flag is a flag for determining whether or not an irregular push was made in the previous game. For example, when the current game is completely stopped, the SP flag is turned off once, and then when it is determined that the game is operated by forward pressing, the SP flag is turned on. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is operated by irregular pressing this time, the SP flag remains off.
Then, when the game is shifted to the next game and the SP flag is on, the normal sub-bonus lottery is executed, and when the SP flag is off, the normal sub-bonus lottery is not executed (whether the sub-bonus lottery is not executed). , Although the sub-bonus lottery itself is executed, the result of the sub-bonus lottery is invalidated after that, or a sub-bonus lottery with a lower probability of winning than when pushing forward is executed), and when the next game is completely stopped, the SP flag is temporarily flagged. is turned off, and then the SP flag is turned on when it is determined that the next game is operated by forward pressing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the next game is operated by irregular pressing, the SP flag remains off.
In this way, for example, when a hot effect is output when the start switch 41 is operated (when there is a reasonable degree of expectation for winning the sub-bonus), the forward press is performed, and other than that, when the start switch 41 is operated, for example, the game-specific When the effect of is not output, it is possible to prevent a strategy shot such as an irregular push.

Next, mode lottery in the first embodiment will be described.
As described above, in the first embodiment, a sub-bonus is provided as the same concept as AT. For the sub-bonus, when the sub-bonus starts, a unique symbol combination ("red 7" set) indicating the start of the sub-bonus is stopped and displayed. Then, when shifting to the sub-bonus, similarly to the AT, when winning the pressing order bell (for example, winning prize A to winning prize E described above), the correct pushing order is reported. Then, the sub-bonus is continued until the number of payouts reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300), the sub-bonus ends in the game when the number of payouts reaches the predetermined number, and the game shifts to a non-AT (normal game).
As the mode lottery of the first embodiment,
1) Initial normal mode lottery in the normal section 2) Normal mode lottery executed in the first game of the advantageous section when moving from the normal section to the advantageous section 3) Mode transition lottery executed at the start of the sub-bonus be done.
The degree of expectation for transition to a sub-bonus (expectation for winning, the number of ceiling games, and the degree of expectation for transition to a more advantageous mode) differs for each mode (see FIG. 31(a), which will be described later).

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the initial normal mode lottery in the normal section in the first embodiment, (a) shows a flowchart of normal section lever processing (meaning processing when the start switch 41 is operated), ( b) indicates the lottery number.
The following two stay in the regular section.
First, when the power is turned on and the RWM is initialized (changed in settings), the game section is cleared and becomes a normal section. Therefore, the first game after RWM initialization is a normal section.
Secondly, when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the next game shifts to the normal section. In this embodiment, when the difference number from the start of the advantageous interval exceeds "2400 (pieces)", the advantageous interval ending condition is satisfied, the advantageous interval ends, and the next game becomes the normal interval.
Here, it is known that the advantageous interval ends when the number of games played since the start of the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 games, 3000 games, etc.). In the first embodiment, the advantage section is configured not to end with the number of games played.

In FIG. 29(a), when the normal section is started, it is determined in step S492 whether or not the effect group number corresponding to the winning number of the current game is the effect group number "2". The effect group number "2" corresponds to winning of replay B (winning number "2"). When it is determined that the effect group number is not "2", the process proceeds to step S493, and when it is determined that the effect group number is "2", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the effect group number is "2" (when replay B is won), the advantageous interval transition lottery is not executed, so the advantageous interval is not entered (see FIG. 13). Therefore, when the performance group number is determined to be "2", the following lottery for the initial normal mode is not executed, the next game will also be in the normal section, and the normal section lever process will be executed again.
When proceeding to step S493, it is determined whether or not the current game is non-RT. The main control board 50 stores the current RT information in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and judges from this information. When it is determined that it is non-RT (during 1BB non-inside), the process proceeds to step S495, and when it is determined that it is not non-RT, the process proceeds to step S494.
It should be noted that the transition to RT is assumed to occur at the end of the current game. Therefore, even if 1BB is won in the game this time, it is judged as non-RT in step S493.

Here, it is non-RT after RWM initialization after power-on. After the RWM is initialized after the power is turned on, even if the 1BB was won before the power was turned on, the winning information of the 1BB is cleared, and the RT information is also cleared (thereby the RT state becomes non-RT). ).
In the following description, the non-inside 1BB is sometimes referred to as "first thing in the morning", and the advantageous section shifted to the non-inside 1BB is sometimes referred to as "advantageous section shifted first thing in the morning".
On the other hand, the inside of 1BB may be referred to as "not the first thing in the morning", and the advantageous section transitioning to the inside of 1BB may be referred to as the "advantageous section transitioning other than the first thing in the morning".
In addition, when it is unclear whether or not it is an advantageous section shifted in the first morning, it may be referred to as "uncertain first in the morning".

When it is determined in step S493 that it is not non-RT, and the process proceeds to step S494, it is determined whether or not the effect group number of the current game is "10". The effect group number "10" corresponds to winning of the winning prize E (winning numbers "60" to "71"; see FIG. 16). When it is determined that the effect group number is not "10", the process proceeds to step S495, and when it is determined that the effect group number is "10", the processing according to this flow chart is terminated. This is because, as shown in FIG. 16, when the winning prize E is won in RT1, the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed, so that the next game will not be shifted to the advantageous zone. Therefore, also in this case, the normal section lever process is executed again in the next game. From the above, the normal section lever processing is executed in the next game (does not shift to the advantageous section) when the production group number becomes "2" regardless of non-RT or RT1 (when replay B is won), or first thing in the morning This is when the effect group number becomes "10" (at the time of winning a prize E) in other than (RT1).

When proceeding to step S495, an initial normal mode lottery is executed. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S496, the lottery result is saved (stored), and the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
The initial normal mode lottery in step S495 is performed according to the numbers shown in FIG. 29(b). The denominator of the numerical values shown in FIG. 29(b) is "240", and when the numerical values are "240", the winning probability is "1/1".
First, when the performance group number is "0" (single winning of 1BB) in non-RT, or when the performance group number is "10" (double winning of 1BB and prize E), normal mode 0 is won. .
Here, winning 1BB means that it is determined that the game is not RT (during 1BB non-inside) before the start of the game this time, so it is determined that it is the first thing in the morning.
Similarly, since the initial normal mode lottery is not executed when the performance group number is ``10'' instead of non-RT, the performance group number ``10'' in the current game means non-RT. Therefore, when the performance group number is "10" in the current game, it is confirmed that it is the first thing in the morning.

On the other hand, in non-RT or RT1, normal mode 1 is won when the performance group numbers are "1", "3" to "9", and "11" to "14". In addition, the above production group number has the possibility of winning both when it is first thing in the morning and when it is not the first thing in the morning, and if you win the above production group number, it is an advantageous section regardless of whether it is during 1BB non-internal. , the game of the effect group number is uncertain in the morning.
As described above, normal modes 0 and 1 are selected by lottery when shifting from the next game to the advantageous section in the normal section, and are modes for determining whether it is first thing in the morning. If normal mode 0, first thing in the morning is confirmed. However, in normal mode 1, the first thing in the morning is uncertain.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the normal mode transition process, (a) showing a flowchart, and (b) showing a lottery number.
When the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the lottery in the normal mode is executed in the first game in the advantageous section. The normal mode after the second game in the advantageous section has numbers "2" to "9" as will be described later. Therefore, in the advantageous section, the first game is the normal mode 0 or 1, and the second and subsequent games are any of the numbers "2" to "9".
In (a) of the drawing, when normal mode transition processing is started, it is determined whether the normal mode is 0 or 1 in step S502. If the normal mode is 0 or 1, the process advances to step S503; otherwise, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, in this example, the normal mode transition process for each game is executed during the advantageous section, but since the result in step S502 is "No" except for the first game in the advantageous section, the normal mode lottery in step S503 is not executed.
Then, when it is determined in step S502 that the normal mode is 0 or 1 (it is the first game in the advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S503, and the normal mode lottery is executed. Then, the process advances to step S504, the normal mode determined by lottery is saved (stored), and the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 29(b) shows the normal mode lottery numbers for four types of patterns.
First, "non-RT and normal mode 0" corresponds to the case where the performance group number is "0" in the first morning (single win in 1BB) and 1BB is won in the game. Note that the normal mode lottery is not executed during the 1BB game (normal mode transition processing is not entered). Therefore, "non-RT and normal mode 0" indicates the normal mode lottery in the first game (non-RT) after the end of the 1BB game. This kind of thing can actually happen, but it's a rare case.
In addition, "RT1 and normal mode 0" means that the first thing in the morning is the production group number "0" (1BB single winning) and 1BB does not win, or the first thing in the morning is the production group "10" (1BB and winning E). (In this case, the minor combination included in the winning E wins with priority, so there is no case where 1BB wins), which corresponds to the case of shifting to the advantageous section.
Furthermore, "non-RT and normal mode 1" corresponds to the case where the performance group number becomes other than "0" or "10" in the first morning and the transition to the advantageous section occurs.
Furthermore, "RT1 and normal mode 1" corresponds to a case where the vehicle moves to an advantageous section other than first thing in the morning. It should be noted that, at times other than the first in the morning, the performance group number "0" (single winning of 1BB) will not occur. Furthermore, in cases other than the first thing in the morning, the performance group number becomes "10" and there is no transition to the advantageous section.
Therefore, the transition to the advantageous section other than the first thing in the morning corresponds to the effect group numbers "1", "3" to "9", and "11" to "14" other than the first thing in the morning.

In the normal mode lottery above,
Winning number "0": Heaven B preparation mode Winning number "1": Normal A mode Winning number "2": Normal B mode Winning number "3": Normal C mode Winning number "4": Heaven A mode be elected.
The normal A mode, normal B mode, and normal C mode are modes that are not advantageous to the player (difficult to win the sub-bonus). On the other hand, Heaven B preparation mode and Heaven A mode are modes that are advantageous to the player (easier to win the sub-bonus).

In "non-RT and normal mode 0", "RT1 and normal mode 0", and "non-RT and normal mode 1", the number to transition to heaven B preparation mode is "0", In addition, since the setting number for shifting to Heaven A mode is "1", in most cases the mode does not shift to a mode advantageous to the player.
On the other hand, in "RT1 and normal mode 1", there is a 100% probability that the mode will shift to heaven B preparation mode.
Here, there is no case where the performance group number becomes "0" (single winning of 1BB) other than the first thing in the morning, and when the performance group number becomes "10" other than the first thing in the morning, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed, so the advantageous section. do not move to
Therefore, if the normal mode lottery is executed other than the first thing in the morning, there is a 100% probability that the mode will shift to Heaven B preparation mode (a mode that is advantageous to the player). Since the mode does not shift to a mode advantageous to the player, the ball payout rate of the advantageous section shifted to other than the first thing in the morning is higher than that of the advantageous section shifted to the first thing in the morning.
In other words, it is possible to make the advantageous section shifted to the first thing in the morning (non-internal) more disadvantageous to the player (lower ball payout rate) than the advantageous section shifted to other than the first in the morning (internal), so the setting can be changed. It is possible to prevent the advantageous section in the early morning from becoming excessively advantageous (so-called morning countermeasures). Furthermore, since the mode of preparation for Heaven B is always started in the advantageous section shifted to other than the first in the morning, motivation to play the game can be heightened even after the advantageous section is completed.
Contrary to the above, if it is advantageous for the player to shift to the advantageous section first thing in the morning (by increasing the ball-out rate), it is possible to promote the operation first thing in the morning.

FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the types and characteristics of normal modes "2" to "9".
(a) in the figure shows the characteristics of each normal mode (2 to 9), and (b) in the figure shows the normal mode transition probability (lottery number) at the start of the sub-bonus.
As described above, the normal mode is drawn at the first game in the advantageous section, and after that, the normal mode transition drawing is executed each time the sub-bonus is started.
In the figure (a), the normal modes advantageous to the player are Heaven B preparation mode, Heaven A mode, Heaven B mode, and Heaven C mode. In addition, the heaven B withdrawal mode is advantageous to the player in terms of winning probability of the sub-bonus.
In each normal mode, the ceiling number of games until winning the sub-bonus and the probability of winning the sub-bonus are set. During each normal mode, a lottery for a sub-bonus is performed in each game based on the winning numbers with the winning probability shown in FIG. 31(a). Furthermore, each normal mode has a ceiling game number, and when the ceiling game number is reached without winning the sub-bonus, the winning flag of the sub-bonus is forcibly set (the sub-bonus is won). After the winning of the sub-bonus, the symbol combination corresponding to the sub-bonus ("red 7" aligned) can be stopped and displayed through the premonitory game from "0" to a predetermined number of times. When the symbol combination corresponding to the sub-bonus (“Red 7” aligned) stops, the sub-bonus is executed from the next game.

On the other hand, no matter which normal mode the player stays in, if the winning number "2" (replay B) is won, the sub-bonus is won. When the lottery number "2" is won, the pattern combination corresponding to replay 04, that is, "red 7" matching can be stopped by pressing the stop switch 42 in the reverse order as described above. Therefore, in the game in which the winning number is "2", an instruction to press the stop switch 42 in the opposite direction is indicated to enable the "red 7" alignment to be stopped, and when the "red 7" alignment is stopped and displayed in the game. , start the sub-bonus from the next game.

Here, when the winning number "2" is won and the stop switch 42 is reversely pressed to stop display of "red 7", the game is the main game.
On the other hand, other games that stop and display "red 7" are not real games but pseudo (also referred to as "pseudo") game effects.
Here, the "pseudo-game effect" means a stop for operating a rotation stop device for the reels 31 during rotation until the rotation speed of the reels 31 becomes constant after the rotation of the reels 31 is started. Triggered by the operation of the switch 42, the reels 31 are pseudo-stopped (stopping in this case is also referred to as "temporary stop" or "pseudo-stop"; hereinafter referred to as "temporary stop"), and an arbitrary symbol combination is displayed. It means a performance that makes you feel. The “pseudo-game effect” is also called a “reel effect”.
On the other hand, a game for displaying a symbol combination as a game result (a symbol combination corresponding to the winning lottery result) is called a "real game" in contrast to the above "pseudo game effect".
The symbol combination temporarily stopped by the pseudo-game effect does not display the game result. After the symbol combination is temporarily stopped by the pseudo game effect, the game result is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbol combination by the main game.

Especially in this embodiment, when the sub-bonus is won and the conditions for executing the pseudo-game effect are satisfied (for example, when the number of precursor games is consumed), a maximum of 4 times until the "red 7" matching is temporarily stopped. , to execute a pseudo-game effect.
Also, during the pseudo-game production, it may be possible to inform the player that it is a pseudo-game production, in other words, that it is not the main game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying and confusing the pseudo-game effect and the main game.
Furthermore, when all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped during the pseudo-game effect, the motor 32 is operated so that the symbols move up and down at predetermined time intervals (so as to vibrate vertically) without stopping the reels 31. By driving and controlling (referred to as "swing fluctuation" or "swing fluctuation control"), the player is informed that it is not a stop (main stop) that displays the game result in this game, but a temporary stop in a pseudo-game effect may be notified.
Then, after all the reels 31 are stopped by the pseudo-game effect, when shifting to the main game, when the start switch 41 is operated, random delay processing is performed so that the rotation start timings of the reels 31 are scattered. to

FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-game effect of matching "red 7". This flowchart does not include the main game when the winning number "2" is won and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed by reverse pressing.
First, in step S581, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S582. In step S82, it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting the pseudo-game are satisfied. Here, it means a sub-bonus fixed state (main game state) after the sub-bonus is won and the premonition game count is consumed.
When it is determined that the conditions for starting the pseudo-game are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S583, and when it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated.
In step S583, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the number of consecutive pseudo game effects "N". The initial value of "N" is "0".

Next, proceeding to step S584, the main control board 50 determines whether or not "N" is "4". If it is determined that "N" is not "4", the process proceeds to step S585, and if it is determined that "N" is "4", the process proceeds to step S591.
In step S585, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect to inform the player that the player is aiming for "red 7" by forward pressing. Then, the process proceeds to step S586. At step S586, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated. If it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S587. In step S587, the reel control means 65 executes a temporary stop process for pulling "red 7" into the effective line within a range of maximum four frames.
Next, proceeding to step S588, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 are temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to step S589, and when it is determined that all the reels 31 are not temporarily stopped, the process returns to step S586.

In step S589, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the "red 7" alignment has temporarily stopped on the active line. When it is determined that "red 7" is temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to step S590 to shift to the sub-bonus. On the other hand, when it is determined that "red 7" matching is not temporarily stopped and displayed, "red 7" matching pseudo game effect is repeated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "N" is "4" in step S584, the process proceeds to step S591. In step S591, the reel control means 65 automatically temporarily stops all rotating reels 31, and temporarily stops all "red 7". Here, the reels 31 may be temporarily stopped in order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel 31, or all the reels 31 may be temporarily stopped substantially simultaneously. Then, the process proceeds to step S590 to start the sub-bonus.
Through the above-described pseudo-game production, the player is made to perform "red 7" matching, but when "red 7" matching fails three times in a row, in the fourth pseudo-game production, the player is given a stop switch. Temporary stop of "red 7" alignment is automatically performed without operating 42.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to speedily perform the transition processing to the sub-bonus.

Although not shown, when the winning number "2" is won while the sub-bonus is not in progress, the sub-control board 80 outputs an effect informing the player to aim for "red 7" by pushing backward. Then, when the stop switch 42 is operated by the reverse push, the reel control means 65 executes a stop control process (this game) for drawing "red 7" into the effective line with a maximum of four frames. As described above, in the game in which the winning number "2" is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 04 can be stopped on the active line by pressing the button in the opposite direction. Also, when the "red 7" alignment cannot be stopped by reverse pressing (the player fails in eye pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to replay 01 is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, even in a game in which the winning number "2" is won, if the stop switch 42 is not operated by pressing in the reverse direction, the symbol combination corresponding to replay 01 is stopped and displayed.
When "red 7" alignment cannot be stopped and displayed in the game in which the winning number "2" is won, the "red 7" alignment pseudo game performance (pseudo game) is executed in the next game. However, not limited to this, when it is not possible to stop display of "Red 7" matching in the game winning the winning number "2", the sub-bonus will start from the next game without going through the pseudo-game. good too.
It should be noted that even if the main game state is the sub-bonus confirmed state, the sub-state may be the in-prediction state (the state in which the confirmation screen is not displayed). In such a case, it is arbitrary whether or not it is determined that the conditions for starting the pseudo-game are satisfied. However, in the sub state, since it is a sign, the notification of "red 7" is not executed, but as the main game state, if the sub bonus is confirmed, a pseudo-game is executed, and "red 7" is aimed at in the pseudo game. can be stopped.

Return the description to FIG.
Heaven B preparation mode is a normal mode that is selected with a probability of 100% when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section other than first thing in the morning, as described above.
Then, when the sub-bonus is started under the state of heaven B preparation mode, a normal mode transition lottery is performed, and as shown in FIG. Even after the bonus ends, the game will be in heaven B preparation mode), and will shift to heaven B mode with a probability of 50%. That is, while staying in the heaven B preparation mode, the heaven B preparation mode is maintained or the heaven B mode is entered, which is advantageous for the player.
Also, the normal A mode, normal B mode, and normal C mode are modes disadvantageous to the player. Then, as the normal A mode, normal B mode, and normal C mode are selected, the mode becomes closer to heaven. For example, in the normal A mode, the probability of no transition is the highest, and in the case of the transition, the probability of transition to the normal B mode is the highest. Further, the normal B mode has the highest probability of no transition, and the normal C mode has the highest probability of transition with a transition. Furthermore, there is no case of falling from the normal B mode to the normal A mode. Furthermore, in normal C mode, the probability of transitioning to heaven A mode is the highest, and there is no possibility of falling to normal A mode or normal B mode.
As shown in FIG. 31(b), when switching from the normal A mode to another normal mode, the normal B mode is selected, and when switching from the normal B mode to another normal mode, the normal C mode is selected. Therefore, when staying in the normal C mode, there is a high possibility that the user stays in the normal mode the longest. Of the normal A mode, the normal B mode, and the normal C mode, the normal C mode is the easiest to shift to the Heaven C mode. In other words, the difference counter value is not referred to when shifting to the normal mode, but the normal C mode, in which the player is in a disadvantageous state for a long time, is more likely to shift to the Heaven C mode.

The Heaven A mode is a mode that does not transition (loops) with a probability of 60% (144/240), and transitions to the normal A mode or normal B mode when it escapes from the loop.
Heaven B mode is a mode that does not transition (loops) with a probability of 90% (216/240), and transitions to heaven B pullback mode if the loop is missed.
The heaven B pullback mode has a pullback rate of 20% (48/240) to the heaven B mode, and if it cannot be pulled back, it transitions to the normal A mode or the normal B mode.
Heaven C mode is a mode without transition, and is a mode that is maintained until the end of the advantageous section, that is, until the difference number from the start of the advantageous section exceeds "2400", a so-called finish mode.
In addition, a transition condition to heaven C mode is defined. In a case where the transition to Heaven C mode is won, if the remaining difference number at that time is "1000" or more, the transition is made to Heaven C mode. On the other hand, if the transition to Heaven C mode is won and the remaining difference number at that time is less than "1000", the transition to Heaven A mode is made.

From the above, for example,
1) When the 60% loop is repeated in heaven A mode and the number of differences in the advantageous section exceeds "2400",
2) When maintaining Heaven B preparation mode or transitioning to Heaven B mode and the difference number in the advantageous section exceeds "2400",
3) When transitioning to heaven C mode and the difference number in the advantageous section exceeds "2400", the respective advantageous section ends.
When the advantageous section ends, the next game shifts to the normal section.
After shifting to the normal section, the normal section lever processing shown in FIG. In the case of RT1 and normal mode 1, as shown in FIG. 30, heaven B preparation mode is always won.
When the heaven B preparation mode is entered, the heaven B preparation mode is maintained until the heaven B mode is entered, and after the heaven B mode is entered, the heaven B mode is looped at 90%. As a result, even in the next advantageous section, there is a high possibility that the difference number in the advantageous section will exceed "2400" and the advantageous section will end.
In this way, it is possible to repeat the advantageous section ending with the difference number exceeding "2400" a plurality of times.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing effect processing when the advantageous section is repeated a plurality of times as described above. This processing is processing by the sub-control board 80 .
First, in step S622, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section has started. When it is determined that the advantageous section has started, the process proceeds to step S623.
In step S623, it is determined whether or not the advantageous sections of heaven mode (one of heaven A mode, heaven B preparation mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode) are continuous. Here, when the previous advantageous section ended in any of heaven A mode, heaven B preparation mode, heaven B mode, or heaven C mode, and when the next advantageous section started in heaven B preparation mode. judges that the heaven mode of the advantageous section is continuous. When it is determined that the heaven mode of the advantageous section is continuous, the process proceeds to step S624, and when it is determined that the heaven mode of the advantageous section is not continuous, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S624, the advantageous section continuous counter provided on the sub-control board 80 side is set to "+1". Then, the process proceeds to step S625, and the sub-control board 80 executes the continuous effect of the advantageous section. Here, based on the value of the advantageous interval continuation counter, for example, when the value of the advantageous interval continuation counter is "1" (the number of consecutive advantageous intervals is "2"), the frame lamp among the production lamps 21 is lit in blue. When the value of the advantageous section continuation counter is "2", the frame lamp is lit in yellow, and when the value of the advantageous section continuation counter is "3", the frame lamp is lit in green. . In other words, by looking at the effect of the frame lamp (housing) of the game machine 10, it is possible to roughly grasp how many times the advantageous section heaven mode continues.
Further, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the total number of coins obtained in the heaven mode in the previous advantageous section, and stores the total number of cards obtained. Then, after moving to the next advantageous section, when the heaven mode is selected, the accumulated value from the total number of winnings in the heaven mode in the previous advantageous section is displayed as an image, and the predetermined number of games ( For example, when the sub-bonus is started within 100 games), the heaven mode continues, and the display of the total winning number continues.
It should be noted that during the loop of the heaven mode, the total number of acquired coins may be displayed even when the sub-bonus is not being performed, but the total number of acquired coins may be displayed only during the sub-bonus.

Furthermore, in the case of displaying the total number of obtained images across multiple advantageous sections, a predetermined image (such as an icon) is displayed until the heaven loop is exited, for example, each time the number of obtained images reaches "+2000". (After that, the predetermined image is changed or increased each time it reaches "+2000").
At the end of the advantageous interval, the main control board 50 side clears the parameters relating to the advantageous interval, but the sub-control board 80 side does not clear the parameters relating to the advantageous interval (the total number of cards obtained, etc.).
However, not limited to the above, when crossing over an advantageous section, the total acquired number may not be inherited and may be reset.

After outputting the advantageous section continuous effect in step S625, it is determined in the next step S626 whether or not the advantageous section has ended. When it is determined that the advantageous section has ended, the process returns to step S622, and when it is determined that the advantageous section has not ended, the process proceeds to step S627.
In step S627, it is determined whether or not the heaven mode of the advantageous section has ended. Here, when the heaven mode loop is exited, it is determined that the advantageous section of the heaven mode has ended. When it is determined that the heaven mode of the advantageous section has ended, the process proceeds to step S628, and when it is determined that the heaven mode of the advantageous section has not ended, the process returns to step S625.
In step S628, the continuous effect of the advantageous section is terminated. For example, when the effect of the frame lamp is executed as described above, the effect is terminated. Also, when displaying the total number of coins obtained from the heaven mode in the previous advantageous section, the display is terminated.
Next, the process advances to step S629 to clear the advantageous section continuation counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
As described above, by executing the continuous effect of the advantageous section, it is possible to appeal to the surroundings that the player has obtained a large number of medals. In particular, in the case of a medal-less game machine, which will be described later, the actually obtained medals cannot be seen, so the continuous effect of the advantageous section becomes more effective.
Further, in the example of FIG. 33, the advantageous section continuous effect is ended when the heaven mode is ended, but this is not limiting, and the advantageous zone continuous effect can be continued until, for example, about 100 games are played after the heaven mode is ended. good.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section, in the present embodiment, in most cases the first game of the normal section wins the advantageous section transition lottery, and the next game becomes the advantageous section again. In this case, the advantageous section continuous effect may be executed including the normal section between the advantageous section and the next advantageous section.
When the advantageous section continuous performance is executed also during the normal section, it is possible to inform that the heaven loop continues even in the normal section, so that the player can be prevented from erroneously quitting the game.
On the other hand, it is not necessary to execute the advantageous section continuous effect in the normal section. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the AT lottery is executed even in the normal section.

Next, the complete function in the first embodiment will be explained. "Complete function" corresponds to the stopping function of the gaming machine (to end the game after that on the current day).
In the first embodiment, first, the number of differences in the advantageous section is counted by the difference number counter.
Here, the "difference number in the advantageous section" refers to the difference in the number of sheets when the start time of the advantageous section is set to "0". In other words, the start time of the advantageous interval is used as the reference (“0”) instead of the number of differences (MY) from the minimum value during the advantageous interval. Therefore, when the difference number becomes a negative value during the advantageous section, the negative value is counted. Also, as in the other embodiments, the difference counter does not count the number of games played during the normal section.
For example, the difference number counter is a 2-byte decrement counter. Then, when the number of differences in the advantageous section exceeds "+2400 (sheets)", it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.
Here, as a first example of the difference number counter, "+2415" (sheets) ("096Fh" in hexadecimal) is set as an initial value at the start of the advantageous section, and when the difference number of the current game is negative, , the difference number is added to the difference number counter, and when the difference number in the current game is positive, the difference number is subtracted from the difference number counter.
Specifically, first, "+2415" was set at the start of the advantageous section, and the number of differences in the first game was "-3 (sheets)" (number of bets "3", number of payouts "0"). If so, add "3" to the difference counter to update the difference counter to "+2418". On the other hand, when the difference number in the first game is "+11 (sheets)" (the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "14"), "11" is subtracted from the difference counter and the difference counter is displayed. to "+2404".
Then, when the difference number counter becomes "0", it is determined that the difference number in the advantageous section exceeds "+2400", and the advantageous section ends.
34 and 35, which will be described later, the difference counter value increases as the difference number in the current game increases.

As a second example of the difference counter, the start of the advantageous section is set to "0", and when the difference counter exceeds "+2400" (sheets) (specifically, in hexadecimal, the difference counter is (when the value becomes "0961h" or more), it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied.
In addition, in the difference number counter and the stopping counter shown below, when indicating a hexadecimal number, "h" is added to the numerical value. A decimal number is indicated when no "h" is attached to the numerical value. Also, when the minus sign is not attached to the difference counter value, it indicates that it is plus.
Further, as described above, in the first embodiment, the number of games played during the advantageous interval is not included in the condition for ending the advantageous interval, so the number of games played during the advantageous interval is not counted.
In both the first example and the second example, the difference counter is cleared when the advantageous section ends.

Secondly, in the first embodiment, the stop counter counts MY from when the power is turned on. Here, "MY" is a value when the minimum value is "0", like the difference counter in the other embodiments described above.
The stop counter is initialized to "0000h" when the power is turned on.
And, for example, from power-on,
1st game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", stop counter "0000h"
Second game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "14", stop counter "000Bh"
3rd game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", stop counter "0008h"
4th game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", stop counter "0005h"
5th game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", stop counter "0002h"
6th game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", stop counter "0000h"
:
becomes.
Here, in the first game, the difference number is "-3", so if the difference number "-3" is added to the initial value "0000h" of the stop counter, "FFFDh" is obtained. is corrected to "0000h" each time.
Similarly, since the difference number is "-3" in the sixth game, adding the difference number "-3" to the stop counter "0002h" results in "FFFFh", which is corrected to "0000h".
Then, when the value of the stopping counter after turning on the power reaches "19000" (4A38h), the complete function is activated, the game machine 10 is stopped, and the subsequent game (operation of the day) is terminated. do.
Note that, unlike the difference number counter, the stop counter counts MY even in the normal section.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing transitions of the difference number counter and the stop counter in the first embodiment.
First, the point when the power is turned on and the RWM is initialized corresponds to "A" in the figure. At point "A" in the figure, both the difference counter and the stop counter are "0".
Then, it is assumed that the normal section is started immediately after the power is turned on for the RWM initialization, and the normal section is started, and the transition to the advantageous section is made at the point "B" in the figure. Therefore, at time "B" (at the start of the advantageous section), the difference counter is "0". The difference counter is not updated during the normal interval.

Further, when the difference number decreases from point "B" in the figure and reaches point "C", the difference number counter value at point "C" is "BC". Also, the stop counter value is "0".
Then, after that, when the sub-bonus etc. is executed in the advantageous section and the difference number increases and reaches the "D" point, if the difference number "DB" exceeds "2400", "D ” point, the advantageous interval ends, the next game becomes the normal interval, and when the normal interval satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous interval, the advantageous interval is entered.
Next, when reaching the point "E" in the figure, when the stopping counter value "EC" reaches "19000", the complete function is activated and the gaming machine 10 stops.

Also, in FIG. 34, the dashed-dotted line indicates the case where the number of differences continues to increase after the power is turned on, and the stop counter reaches "19000" in the shortest time.
In the figure, "FA" is "19000".
Here, the minimum game time (the shortest time from the start of rotation of the reels 31 in the current game to the start of rotation in the next game) is set to "4.1" seconds.
On the other hand, the Law Concerning the Regulation of Adult Entertainment Businesses and the Optimization of Business (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "Amusement Business Law", "Amusement Business Law", "Amusement Business Law"), "No. 4 business" is "pachinko""ya" is stipulated. In principle, the Entertainment Business Law does not allow business from 0:00 to 6:00 (Article 13 of the Law). For this reason, the maximum number of hours a day that a pachinko parlor can operate is 18 hours. In addition, the shortest business hours stipulated by the ordinances of each prefecture is 13 hours.
Furthermore, although specific calculations are omitted, based on the above-mentioned number table and condition device, the shortest transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and further to the sub-bonus until the difference counter exceeds "2400" Assuming that the sub-bonus is continued and the difference counter exceeds "2400", the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section, the net increase number per game is set to about "6".
That is, when one game is consumed in "4.1" seconds and the net increase number per game is "6", the net increase number per hour is about "5268". Therefore, it takes about "3.6" hours for MY to reach "19000".
Therefore, the stop counter may reach "19000" within one day's business hours (minimum 13 hours, maximum 18 hours).
In this way, by setting the value of the stop counter at which the completion function is activated and the net increase in the number of sheets per game so that the completion function can be activated during the business hours of the pachinko parlor in one day, It is possible to prevent the gambling spirit of the player from being remarkably aroused.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the relationship between the difference number counter, stop counter, and power ON/OFF. It is assumed that "power off" and "power return" in the graph in FIG. 35 are simple power on/off, and RWM clear (setting change) is not performed.
As shown in FIG. 35, for example, when the stop counter and the difference counter are at predetermined values, the power is turned off and then restored, the stop counter is cleared. Therefore, it starts from "0000h" after recovery from power failure (one-dot chain line in the figure).
In contrast, the difference number counter is not cleared. Therefore, after recovery from power failure, the value before power failure is resumed (solid line in the figure).
In addition, the lower table in FIG. 35 shows the status of the difference number counter and the stopping counter in power on/off without RWM clearing and power on/off with RWM clearing.
As described above, on power on/off without RWM clear, the difference counter is held, but the stop counter is cleared. On the other hand, when the power is turned on/off with RWM clear (for example, when setting is changed), both the difference number counter and the stopping counter are cleared.

The "complete function activation flag" is a flag that turns on when the stop counter reaches "19000" and the complete function is activated. is "00h", and when it is on, it is "FFh".
Furthermore, the "complete function temporary flag" is turned on when the stop counter reaches "19000" but the complete function cannot be activated, for example, in a special game state (accessory is in operation). This flag is composed of, for example, 1-byte data, and is "00h" when off and "FFh" when on.
These complete function operation flag and complete function provisional flag are configured not to be cleared by power on/off without RWM clear.

Therefore, although the details will be described later, for example, when the stop counter reaches "19000" during the special game state, the complete function operation flag remains off, but the complete function provisional flag is turned on. Then, when the power is turned off before the special game state ends and then returns, the complete function temporary flag is returned to the ON state, so when the special game state ends after the power is turned off, complete A function activation flag can be turned on to activate the complete function.
However, when the power is turned on/off with RWM clear (at the time of setting change), both the complete function operation flag and the complete function provisional flag are cleared.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the flow from power-on to main processing, including processing related to the complete function.
First, when the power is turned on in step S511, power-on processing is executed in the next step S512. As one of the power-on processes, there is an initialization process for a predetermined storage area. Here, when the power is turned on without RWM clearing, initialization processing (clearing processing) of the stop counter is executed as one of the initialization processing. On the other hand, the initialization processing of the difference number counter, the complete function activation flag, and the complete function provisional flag is not executed.
On the other hand, when the power is turned on with RWM clear, all of the stop counter, difference counter, complete function operation flag, and complete function provisional flag are initialized.
Next, the process advances to step S513 to perform error processing. During this error processing, processing relating to the complete function is executed as will be described later.

In the next step S515, the main control board 50 executes the input/settlement acceptance process. In the next step S516, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S517.
In step S517, the combination lottery means 61 executes a lottery for a combination (winning number). Then, in the next step S518, the reel control means 65 starts rotating the reels 31. As shown in FIG.
At step S519, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated. The corresponding reel 31 is controlled to stop.
In the next step S521, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped. If so, the process proceeds to step S522. In step S522, the winning determination means 66 determines the winning combination. Then, the process proceeds to step S523, and the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination.
Next, proceeding to step S524, the main control board 50 updates the role ratio monitor (management information display LED 74).
Next, proceeding to step S525, the main control board 50 executes complete function calculation processing. This process is a process for updating the stop counter, etc., and is a process shown in FIG. 38, which will be described later.
Next, proceeding to step S526, the main control board 50 executes a game state update process. Then, the process returns to step S513.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing error processing in step S513 of FIG.
First, in step S531, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is in the special game state (in which the accessory is in operation). This is because, in the present embodiment, the complete function is not activated even if the operation condition (stop condition) of the complete function is satisfied in the special game state. When it is determined that the game is in the special game state, the process proceeds to step S537, and error processing other than the processing related to the complete operation is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the special game state in step S531, the process proceeds to step S532. In step S532, the complete function activation flag is read. Then, in the next step S533, it is determined whether or not the complete function operation flag is "FFh" (on). When it is determined to be "FFh", the process proceeds to step S534, and when it is determined not to be "FFh", the process proceeds to step S537.

At step S534, the main control board 50 notifies the operation of the complete function. In this process, an operation signal of the complete function is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, and the operation of the complete function is notified by the image display device 23 or the like.
Next, proceeding to step S535, the main control board 50 executes automatic settlement processing. When the complete function is activated, it is optional whether or not credited medals are to be automatically settled. If the automatic settlement is to be executed when the complete function is activated, the automatic settlement process is executed in step S535. do. On the other hand, if the automatic settlement is not executed when the complete function is activated, the process of step S535 is not executed.
Next, the process advances to step S536 to output a complete signal to the outside. This terminates error processing. Also, when the process proceeds to step S536, the processes after step S515 in FIG. 36 are not performed. As a result, the operation switches (bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42) are not accepted, and the game cannot proceed.
In this example, the processing related to the activation of the complete function is executed within the error processing of step S513, but the present invention is not limited to this. The processing of steps S531 to S536 in FIG. 37 may be executed.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the complete function calculation process in step S525 of FIG.
First, in step S541, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the complete function provisional flag is on (FFh). If it is determined that the complete function provisional flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S542, and if it is determined to be on, the process proceeds to step S548.
At step S542, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the complete function activation flag is on (FFh). If it is determined that it is on, that is, that the complete function is already operating, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated. This is because when the complete function has already been activated, the stop counter updating process and the like are not executed.
When it is determined in step S542 that the complete function operation flag is not ON and the process proceeds to step S543, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the replay operation is in progress. In the present embodiment, the stop counter is not updated during the replay operation, so when it is determined that the replay operation is in progress, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
When it is determined that the replay is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S544. In step S544, the stop counter is updated based on the number of bets and the number of payouts in the current game.

In the next step S545, it is determined whether or not the stop counter has become less than "0", that is, whether or not a carry has occurred. When it is determined that the stop counter is not less than "0", the process proceeds to step S546, and when it is determined to be less than "0", the process proceeds to step S551.
In step S551, the stop counter value is corrected to "0". As a result, the minimum value of MY becomes "0". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
On the other hand, when proceeding from step S545 to step S546, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop counter value has reached "19000". As described above, when the stop counter value is "4A38h" or more, it is determined that "19000" has been reached. When it is determined that the stop counter has reached "19000", the process proceeds to step S547, and when it is determined that it has not reached "19000", the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In step S547, the complete function provisional flag is turned on (FFh). Next, in step S548, it is determined whether or not the current game is in a special game state (1BB game, RB game, etc.). When the special game state ends in the current game (for example, when it is the final game of the 1BB game), since the special game state has ended at the time of step S525, it is determined that the special game state is not present.
When it is determined that the game is in the special game state, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated. Therefore, in the special game state, when the stop counter reaches "19000", the complete function provisional flag is turned on in step S547, but since step S549 is not passed, the complete function operation flag is not turned on (FFh). Therefore, the complete function does not operate in the special game state.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is not in the special game state in step S548, the process proceeds to step S549. At step S549, the main control board 50 turns on (FFh) the complete function operation flag. Next, in step S550, the complete function provisional flag is turned off (00h). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. When the complete function activation flag is turned on in step S549, the complete function is activated by steps S513 of FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 at the start of the next game.
Further, in the special game state, when the complete function provisional flag is turned on in step S547, the complete function provisional flag remains on (the complete function operation flag is turned off) until the special game state ends, and the special game state is reached. is completed, the complete function operation flag is turned on (step S549), and the complete function provisional flag is turned off (step S550).

Next, image control by the sub-control board 80 regarding the complete function will be described.
FIG. 39 shows images for notifying (advance notification) of the operation of the complete function, where (a) shows a game screen, (b) shows a demonstration screen, and (c) shows a menu screen.
The sub-control board 80 independently counts the stopping counter after the power is turned on. However, not limited to this, the stop counter value may be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 at the end of each game.
If the complete function is suddenly activated when the stop counter reaches "19000", the player will be taken by surprise. Therefore, when the operation of the complete function is approaching, the player is notified of the operation of the complete function.

When the stop counter reaches "18900", in other words, when "100" cards remain until the completion function is activated, the sub-control board 80 announces the activation of the complete function.
As shown in (a), (b), and (c) in the figure, any of the game screen, the demonstration screen, and the menu screen, for example, as in this example, "Remaining 100 sheets until the complete function is activated. ” is displayed.
Further, when the stop counter reaches, for example, "+11" cards in the next game, the notice image of the completion function activation is updated to display "89 cards remaining until the completion function activation". In this way, the advance notice of the complete function activation is made so that the quantitative change until the complete function activation condition (the stop counter reaches "19000") is visually recognized.
In the figure, the region of the preview image of the complete function activation is indicated by a dot pattern, and this dot pattern region represents the foremost layer. Therefore, for example, when there is an area in which a predetermined display on the screen and a preview image of the complete function operation overlap, the preview image of the complete function operation is displayed for the overlapping area, and the predetermined image (back layer) is displayed. not.
Also in other drawings to be described later, the area indicated by the dot pattern indicates the frontmost layer.

In the above example, in the case of activating the complete function when the stop counter reaches "19000", the operation of the complete function is announced when the stop counter reaches "18900".
Here, if the stop counter value reaches "19000" without decreasing after the completion function operation is announced, the stop counter reaches "19000" after reaching "18900". All the while heralds complete function operation.
On the other hand, when the value of the stopping counter decreases after reaching "18900", and the value of the stopping counter reaches a predetermined value, the advance notice of the complete function operation is terminated.
Here, when the stop counter rises and falls with the progress of the game with the threshold value of "18900", the state in which the complete function operation is announced and the state in which the complete function operation is not announced are frequently switched. The preview image may or may not be displayed.
Therefore, in this embodiment, once the completion function operation is announced, the completion function operation announcement is maintained until the stop counter becomes less than a predetermined value ("18850" in this embodiment).

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a transition between a section in which the notice (advance notice) of the complete function operation is given and a section in which the notice is not given. In the figure, the solid line is the section for notifying the operation of the complete function, and the wavy line is the section for not notifying.
In FIG. 40, when the value of the stopping counter reaches "A"(MY1="18900") in the figure, the condition for announcing the operation of the complete function is satisfied.
Then, the game progresses and the value of the stop counter drops below "MY1 (18900)" at the time point "B" in the figure, but the advance notice of the complete function operation continues.
Then, when the value of the stop counter falls below "MY2 (18850)" at the time point "C" in the figure, the advance notice of the complete function operation is ended, and the transition is made to the period where the advance notice is not given.

Once the transition is made to the interval without advance notice, the operation of the complete function will not be advanced until the stop counter reaches "18900" (MY1). In the example of FIG. 40, the stop counter reaches "18900" (MY1) at the time point "D" in the figure, and the period for predicting the operation of the complete function is again shown.
It should be noted that when the stop counter reaches "19000", the completion function is activated, so the advance notice of activation of the complete function is terminated.
In addition, the difference "MY1-MY2" between the stopping counter "MY1", which is the interval for notifying the operation of the complete function, and "MY2", which is the interval for not notifying, is set to "50" in this example. Here, "MY1-MY2" is preferably larger than the maximum difference number ("11" in the first embodiment) in one game. By doing so, it is possible to prevent (frequently) switching between the period in which the complete function operation is announced and the period in which the complete function operation is not announced in one game.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example in which the complete function operation is displayed as an image on the entire surface. In the figure, the display area of the dot pattern is assumed to be the image display area for the complete function operation. Therefore, when an image indicating that the complete function is operating is displayed on the entire surface as in this example, the game screen and the like up to that point cannot be seen at all.
Here, when the complete function is activated, there are cases where automatic settlement is executed and cases where automatic settlement is not executed. When the complete function is activated, the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42 are invalidated, so the game cannot proceed thereafter. However, for gaming machines 10 that permit acceptance of operation of the settlement switch 43, it is possible to operate the settlement switch 43 after the complete function is activated and discharge all of the stored medals to the medal receiving tray. In this case, as shown in FIG.
On the other hand, when the complete function is activated, all of the stored medals are automatically discharged to the medal receiving tray without the player's operation of the payment switch 43 when executing the automatic payment. In this case, as shown in (b) in the figure, a message to that effect is displayed during the automatic settlement.
Further, in the case of a "medal-less gaming machine" which will be described later in an eighteenth embodiment (FIG. 52), operating the counter switch 47 causes the game media (electronic medals) stored in the gaming machine 10 to be transferred to the lending unit. 200. In the case of a medalless game machine, it is necessary to operate the count switch 47 to transmit the game media to the lending unit 200 when the complete function is activated. In this case, as shown in (c) in the figure, a display prompting the user to count is provided.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of image display of complete function operation in a partial area. In the figure, the dot pattern display area is the image display area for the complete function operation.
(a) in the figure is an example in which the complete function operates during the sub-bonus game (AT), for example. Overlay the game screen layer to display the complete function activation image layer. Therefore, in the range where the game image and the image of the complete function actuation overlap, the image of the complete function actuation is displayed on top. The complete function activation image may be of a transparent type so that the game screen can be seen under the complete function activation image.
Further, when the game screen is left as it is and a predetermined time elapses, the screen shifts to a demonstration screen as shown in (b) in the figure. Even when the demonstration screen is displayed, the image of the complete function operation is not erased and continues to be displayed. Furthermore, in the range where the demonstration screen image and the complete function operation image overlap, the complete function operation image is displayed as a layer on the near side.
Furthermore, it is possible to shift to the menu screen even after the complete function is activated. Even when the screen is shifted to the menu screen, the image of the complete function activation continues to be displayed without being erased. Furthermore, in the range where the image of the menu screen and the image of complete function activation overlap, the image of complete function activation is displayed as a layer on the near side.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example when the stop counter reaches "19000" in a special game state (for example, during 1BB game or RB game), (a) shows a time chart, (b) and (c) shows an image display example.
It should be noted that the first embodiment is a game property in which a sub-bonus (AT) can be executed on the premise that 1BB is inside (1BB is not won). On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 43, for example, 1BB or RB (accessory) is won during the game, and the stop counter reaches "19000" when the special game state (during 1BB game or RB game) is reached. example.
In the figure (a), when the special game state is started, the stop counter is less than "18900", the complete function provisional flag is off, and the complete function activation flag is off. First, when the stop counter reaches "18900", the sub-control board 80 displays an image for notifying the operation of the complete function. (b) in the figure shows an image at this time. On the game screen in the special game state, a preview image of complete function operation is superimposed and displayed in a part of the area.
Next, when the stop counter reaches "19000" in the special game state, the complete function provisional flag is turned on. However, since it is in the special game state, the complete function operation flag remains off.
Further, based on the fact that the complete function provisional flag is turned on, the sub-control board 80 displays an image indicating that the complete function is on standby (the complete function will be activated after the special game state ends). . (c) in the figure shows an image at this time. Therefore, when the stop counter reaches "19000", the image display of (b) in the figure changes to the image display of (c) in the figure.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the stop counter has reached "19000" during the special game state (that the game cannot be played any more on the day), so that the special game state ends. It is possible to prevent troubles between the staff of the pachinko parlor and the players when the game machine 10 is stopped later.

When the special game state ends, the complete function operation flag is turned on (the temporary complete function flag is turned off). As a result, the image shown in FIG. 41(c) is switched to the image shown in FIG. 41 or 42(a), for example.
It should be noted that once the stopping counter reaches "19000" in the special game state, the counting of the stopping counter ends, but if the number of acquired medals decreases after that (for example, after the stopping counter reaches "19000" , when it is assumed that the count continues without ending after that, when the count value becomes less than "19000" at the end of the special game state), the complete function temporary flag at the end of the special game state remains on and the complete function activation flag is turned on.
In the example of FIG. 38, when the complete function provisional flag is ON ("Yes" in step S541), step S544 is skipped and the stop counter is not updated. Therefore, in this case, even if the number of acquired medals decreases in the subsequent special game state, the stop counter does not change.
However, the stop counter may be updated even after the complete function provisional flag is turned on. In this case, even if the stop counter is less than "19000" at the end of the special game state, if the complete function provisional flag is once turned on during the special game state, the special game state will be terminated. At the end, the complete function operation flag is turned on, and the game machine 10 is stopped.

In FIG. 43, after the stop counter reaches "19000", the power is turned off before the special game state ends. Sometimes the complete function works. When the stop counter reaches "19000" during the special game state, the complete function operation flag is not turned on, but the complete function provisional flag is turned on. The stop counter is cleared by power on/off, but the complete function provisional flag is not cleared by power on/off. Therefore, after the power is turned on and before the end of the special game state, the complete function provisional flag is on and the complete function operation flag is off. When the special game state ends, the complete function provisional flag is turned off, the complete function operation flag is turned on, and the complete function is activated.
By configuring in this way, even after the stop counter reaches "19000", a situation where the game machine 10 is not stopped (for example, when the stop counter reaches "19000" during a special game state) Even if a power failure or the like occurs in the state reached), the power is turned on after that and the stop counter is cleared, the game machine 10 can be stopped based on the complete function provisional flag and the complete function operation flag. , it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit of the player from being remarkably aroused.

FIG. 44 shows a state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 43(b)) of an advance notice (advance notification) of the operation of the complete function. , the same shall apply hereinafter), a time chart showing an example in which a power failure occurs and the payout process is completed before the power failure process is started.
First, it is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated, the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, and the payout process is performed under the condition that the complete function operation has been announced. Then, it is assumed that power failure occurs immediately before the end of the payout process, and the payout process ends before the power failure process starts.
When the payout process is completed, the stop counter is updated, and as a result of the stop counter reaching "19000", the complete function operation advance notice state is shifted to the complete function operation state. Although the power interruption occurs at about the moment when the advance notice state is switched to the operation state, the operation state is reached before the power interruption processing is started. Therefore, the complete function activation flag is turned on before the power-off process is started.
After the power-off process is completed, the power is turned off.
Next, when power is turned on, power-on processing is executed. When the power-on processing ends, the complete function operating state is restored. As described above, when the power is turned on/off, the stop counter is cleared, but the complete function activation flag is not cleared. Therefore, the value of the complete function operation flag is read during power-on processing, and when the complete function operation flag is on, the complete function operation state is entered.

FIG. 45 is a time chart showing an example in which power interruption occurs during payout processing and power interruption processing is started in a game in which the complete function operation is announced and the complete function is operated after the payout.
FIG. 45 shows Example 1 of (a) and Example 2 of (b). First, Example 1 of (a) will be described.
Suppose that the stop switch 42 is operated, the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, and the payout process is performed in the advance notice state of the complete function operation. Then, it is assumed that the power interruption occurs during the payout process, and the power interruption process is started before the payout process is completed (before all medals are paid out). Therefore, when the power-off processing is completed and the power is turned off, the stop counter has not reached "19000". For this reason, the power is turned off while the complete function operation has been announced. In other words, the complete function activation flag is off when the power is turned off.
It should be noted that when the power is turned off, the payout process up to the middle and the advance notice state of the complete function operation are backed up.

Next, when power is turned on, power-on processing is executed. When the power-on process ends, the continuation of the payout process is executed based on the backup data. In addition, based on the backup data at the time of power failure, it returns to the complete function operation notice state.
When the payout process ends, the stop counter is updated, but the stop counter is cleared by turning off the power. Therefore, even if the next payout process is executed after the power is turned on and the stop counter is updated, the stop counter does not reach "19000". Furthermore, the value of the stop counter has not reached the value (for example, "18900" in the example of FIG. 40) for entering the complete function operation advance notice state. Therefore, after the payout process ends, the complete function activation state is not announced, and the normal state is entered.
Further, Example 2 of (b) in the figure is an example in which the advance notice state of the complete function operation is not backed up when the power is turned off.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, it does not return to the complete function operation notice state. Therefore, when the power-on process ends, the normal state is established.
Note that FIG. 45 shows the advance notice of the operation of the complete function, which applies even if the complete function does not operate after the payout (when the stop counter does not reach "19000").
Further, in the example 2 of (b) in the figure, the complete function operation notice state is backed up when the power is turned off, but the complete function operation notice state may be cleared in the processing when the power is restored. Such processing also applies to FIGS. 46(b), 47(b), and 48(b), which will be described later.

FIG. 46 shows the advance notice state of the operation of the complete function. In the game in which the complete function is activated after the payout, the power is cut off before the last stop switch is released, and the payout process is performed halfway. 4 is a time chart showing an example in which power-off processing is executed at .
FIG. 46 shows Example 1 of (a) and Example 2 of (b), and Example 1 of (a) will be described first.
Suppose that the stop switch 42 is operated, the hand is released from the last stop switch 42, and the payout process is performed in the advance notice state of the complete function operation. Here, it is assumed that power failure occurs before the last stop switch 42 is released. Furthermore, it is assumed that the power-off process is started before all the payout processes are completed (before all the medals are paid out). Therefore, when the power-off process is completed and the power is turned off, the stop counter has not reached "19000". Therefore, the power is turned off while the complete function operation notice state is maintained.
It should be noted that when the power is turned off, the payout process up to the middle and the advance notice state of the complete function operation are backed up.

Next, when the power is turned on and the power-on process is executed, the continuation of the payout process is executed based on the backup data. In addition, based on the backup data at the time of power failure, it returns to the complete function operation notice state.
When the payout process ends, the stop counter is updated, but the stop counter is cleared by turning off the power. Therefore, even if the next payout process is executed after the power is turned on and the stop counter is updated, the stop counter does not reach "19000". Furthermore, the value of the stop counter has not reached the value for the complete function activation warning state. Therefore, after the payout process ends, the complete function activation state is not announced, and the normal state is entered.
Further, Example 2 of (b) in the figure is an example in which the advance notice state of the complete function operation is not backed up when the power is turned off.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, it does not return to the complete function operation notice state. Therefore, when the power-on process ends, the normal state is established.
Note that FIG. 46 shows the advance notice of the operation of the complete function, which applies even if the complete function does not operate after the payout (when the stop counter does not reach "19000").
Moreover, when the example of FIG. 45 and the example of FIG. 46 are compared, the results are the same. In the example of FIG. 45, the power is cut off after the last stop switch 42 is released, and in the example of FIG. 46, the last stop switch 42 is released after the power is cut off.
In both cases, the power-off process is terminated in the middle of the payout process. As a result, after the power is turned on, the continuation of the payout process is performed, and when the complete function operation notice state is backed up, it returns to the complete function operation notice state, but the stop counter is cleared. , then normal state.
The following two methods can be used to update the stop counter when the power is turned on/off.
The first method is to update the stop counter based on the number of payouts and the number of bets in the game.
A second method is to update the stop counter based on the number of coins paid out after the power is turned on.
For example, in a game in which 3 coins are bet and 10 coins are paid out, when 5 out of 10 coins are paid out, the power shutdown process is completed, and then the power is turned on to pay out the remaining coins. ,
When the first method is employed, after the power is turned on, the stop counter is updated by 7 sheets as the difference number.
As a result, even if the power is turned on/off during the payout process, the same difference number as when the power is not turned on/off can be updated, thereby simplifying the process. . However, there are cases where the value of the stop counter updated after the power is turned on does not match the number of coins paid out after the power is turned on.
Also, when the second method is employed, the stop counter is updated by the five cards paid out after the power is turned on.
As a result, the value of the stop counter updated after the power is turned on coincides with the number of sheets paid out after the power is turned on. never.

FIG. 47 shows the advance notice state of the operation of the complete function. In the game in which the complete function is activated after the payout, the last stop switch is released immediately before (T1) or after the power-off process (T2). It is a time chart showing an example of separating.
When the last stop switch is released just before the power-off process is started (T1), and when the last stop switch is released after the power-off process is completed and before the power is turned on (T2). Either way, the result will be the same.
FIG. 46 shows Example 1 of (a) and Example 2 of (b), and Example 1 of (a) will be described first.
Suppose that the last stop switch 42 is released immediately before (T1) or after power-off processing (T2) after the stop switch 42 has been operated in the complete function operation notice state. When the last stop switch 42 is released, the payout process is executed, but the last stop switch 42 must be released immediately before (T1) or after the power-off process (T2). Therefore, the power-off process is completed before the payout process is started.
Therefore, when the power-off process is completed and the power is turned off, the stop counter has not reached "19000". For this reason, the power is turned off while the complete function operation has been announced.
It should be noted that when the power is turned off, the fact that there is a win for a role and the advance notice of the operation of the complete function are backed up.

Next, when the power is turned on and the power-on process is executed, the payout process is executed based on the backup data. In addition, based on the backup data at the time of power failure, it returns to the advance notice state of the complete function operation.
When the payout process ends, the stop counter is updated, but the stop counter is cleared by turning off the power. Therefore, even if the payout process is executed after the power is turned on and the stop counter is updated, the stop counter does not reach "19000". Furthermore, the value of the stop counter has not reached the value for the complete function activation warning state. Therefore, after the payout process ends, the complete function operation notice state does not occur, and the state shifts to the normal state.
Further, Example 2 of (b) in the figure is an example in which the advance notice state of the complete function operation is not backed up when the power is turned off.
Therefore, after the power is turned on, it does not return to the complete function operation notice state. Therefore, when the power-on process ends, the normal state is established.

FIG. 48 is a time chart showing an example in which the final stop switch is released after the power is turned on after the complete function operation has been announced.
Even if the last stop switch 42 is released after the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the operation is the same as the example of FIG. 47 described above.
Specifically, as in (a) example 1, when the advance notice state of the complete function operation is backed up when the power is turned off, the complete function is completed based on the backup data after the power is turned on and before the payout process ends. Returns in the warning state of function activation. Then, after the payout process is completed, the state shifts to the normal state.
On the other hand, as in (b) example 2, when the complete function operation notice state is not backed up when the power is turned off, the normal state is entered after the power is turned on.

FIG. 49 is a time chart showing an example of a case where a power failure occurs under the condition that the complete function operation has been announced during the sub-bonus. In this example, it is assumed that there is no payout process before and after the power is turned off.
In the sub-bonus, since it is in the advance notice state of the complete function activation, the remaining number of sheets until the complete function activates is displayed as an image. For example, the image display is as shown in FIG. 43(b). In addition, the number of obtained coins in the sub-bonus is displayed as an image.
When the power is turned on after the power is turned off while the number remaining until the completion function is activated and the number of cards obtained during the sub-bonus are being displayed, power-on processing is executed. When the power-on process is completed, the stop counter is cleared, so the value of the stop counter does not reach the value for the complete function activation notice state. As a result, the advance notice state of the complete function operation is not entered. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the number of images remaining until the completion function is activated is not displayed.
On the other hand, when the power-on process is completed, the number of coins acquired during the sub-bonus is displayed as an image based on the backup data.
As described above, before the power is turned off, the remaining number of cards until the operation of the complete function and the number of cards obtained during the sub-bonus are displayed as images.

FIG. 50 shows that when an advance notice of operation of the complete function is notified, the complete function is activated after the payout process, and the operation of the complete function is notified, a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement after the payout process. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; (a) shows a time chart, and (b) to (d) show image display contents.
In the figure (a), when the payout process is completed under the condition that the advance notice of the operation of the complete function is given, the stop counter reaches "19000" and the complete function operation flag is turned on. This notifies the operation of the complete function. In the figure (b), "Complete function is in operation, please call a member of staff" is an example of notifying the operation of the complete function.
Also, in this example, as in the example of FIG. 41(b), it is assumed that the payment is automatically made when the complete function is activated. Therefore, when the operation of the complete function is notified, the automatic settlement is started. (b) in the figure is an example of notifying that the complete function has been activated and that automatic payment is in progress.

Next, when a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement, the hopper empty error is notified. (c) in the figure is an example of notifying the operation of the complete function and notifying the occurrence of the hopper empty error.
Then, when the hopper empty error is resolved and the automatic payment is completed, only the operation of the complete function is notified as shown in (d) in the figure.
In the case of (c) in the figure, if priority is given to the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the notification of the hopper empty error may be displayed larger than the notification of the complete function operation. Alternatively, when priority is given to the notification of the complete function operation, the notification of the complete function operation may be displayed larger than the notification of the hopper empty error.

FIG. 51 shows an example of notifying the operation of the complete function after the automatic payment when the advance notice of the operation of the complete function is notified and the complete function is activated after the payout process. Furthermore, it is a figure which shows the example which a hopper empty error generate|occur|produced during the said automatic settlement. (a) shows a time chart, and (b) to (d) show image display contents.
FIG. 51 differs from FIG. 50 in that the operation of the complete function is not notified during the automatic payment after the payout process, but the operation of the complete function is notified after the automatic payment.
In the figure (a), when the payout process is completed under the condition that the advance notice of the operation of the complete function is given, the stop counter reaches "19000", so the complete function operation flag is turned on. Next, since the automatic settlement process is executed before the operation of the complete function is notified, a message to the effect that the automatic settlement is in progress is displayed. (b) in the figure shows the state at this time.

In the example of FIG. 37, when it is determined that the complete function operation flag is ON in step S533, the process proceeds to step S534 to notify the operation of the complete function. Next, the process proceeds to step S535 to execute the automatic settlement process. Thus, this flowchart example is the example of FIG.
On the other hand, in the case of processing as shown in FIG. 51, if it is determined in step S533 in FIG. 37 that the complete function operation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S535 to execute automatic settlement processing. Then, after the automatic settlement process, the process proceeds to step S534 to notify the operation of the complete function.
When a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement, the display changes from "automatic settlement in progress" to "hopper empty error" as shown in (c) in the figure.
Then, when the hopper empty error is resolved and the automatic payment is completed, the operation of the complete function is notified as shown in (d) in the figure.
By constructing in this way, since the operation of the complete function is not notified in the state in which the automatic settlement is not completed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the game by quitting the game in the state in which the automatic settlement is not completed. can be done.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 51, when the payout process ends, the stop counter reaches "19000", so at that point the complete function activation flag is turned on and the complete function is activated. However, the operation of the complete function is not notified during the automatic settlement executed after the payout process.
Here, when the power is turned off during the hopper empty error during automatic settlement, and then the power is turned on and the hopper empty error is canceled, it is notified that automatic settlement is in progress (Complete operation of the function is not notified), and when the automatic settlement process is completed, the operation of the complete function is notified.
As a result, even if a hopper empty error occurs during automatic settlement when the complete function is activated and the power is cut off while the hopper empty error is occurring, the complete function activation flag will be generated after the hopper empty error is cancelled. And since the gaming machine 10 can be stopped based on the complete function provisional flag, it is possible to prevent the gambling spirit of the player from being remarkably stirred up.

Next, power restoration processing in the sub-control board 80 in the first embodiment will be described.
In the first embodiment, the recovery screen from power-off is varied depending on whether or not the game state before power-off was advantageous to the player.
Here, the "game state advantageous to the player" is not limited to during the sub-bonus (AT), but includes the so-called chance zone (CZ) during the main sign of the sub-bonus (AT) and the high probability of winning the AT. may The case of this sign includes both the case where the player is notified of the winning of the sub-bonus (AT) and the case where it is not notified.
However, "advantageous gaming state for the player" does not include mere advantageous sections (when the AT is not won).
Also, although different from the specification of the first embodiment, in the case of the specification of executing the special game by winning the winning special role (shifting to the special game state), the "game state advantageous to the player" Not limited to the game state, it may include the internal state that carries over the winning of the special role. Furthermore, the internal case includes both the case where the winning of the special role is notified and the case where it is not notified.

In this embodiment, when the state is not favorable to the player before the power is turned off, the game standby screen (normal return screen) is displayed after the power is turned off. On the other hand, when the state is advantageous to the player before the power is turned off, a predetermined recovery screen is displayed. As a result, for example, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the hall clerk can determine whether or not the previous day's hall business has ended in a state advantageous to the player (when the power is turned off). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately select whether to change the setting and start the business in a normal state, or to start the business in a state advantageous to the player without changing the setting.
Furthermore, when the complete function activation screen is displayed before the power is turned off, in most cases the game state is advantageous to the player before the power is turned off. However, if the game state is advantageous to the player and the complete function activation screen is displayed before the power is turned off, the complete function will be activated with priority over the predetermined return screen after the power is restored. display the screen. As a result, it is possible to notify the hall clerk that the game cannot be played unless the setting is changed.

The main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information such as the current game state, winning of sub-bonus (AT), winning of special combination, and the like. Based on this information, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the current game state is advantageous to the player. For example, a flag is provided that is turned on when the state is advantageous to the player (including during the above-mentioned main indication and inside), and whether or not the game state is advantageous to the player is stored.
Also, when a predetermined error (selector error, door opening error, etc.) occurs during display of the predetermined recovery screen, the notification of the predetermined error is prioritized, so that the predetermined recovery screen is replaced with an error screen. However, the fact that a predetermined error has occurred may be displayed in part of the predetermined return screen. Alternatively, a part of the error screen may indicate that the predetermined return screen is being displayed. In other words, when displaying that a predetermined error has occurred while the predetermined recovery screen is being displayed, both the predetermined recovery screen and the error screen may be displayed so as to be identifiable.
When the power is turned off while the reels 31 are rotating and the power is restored from the power off, the error screen is not displayed while the reels 31 are rotating, and the error is notified after the reels 31 are completely stopped. However, not limited to this, the error notification may be performed while the reel 31 is rotating.

When the complete function operation screen is displayed, it is not deleted unless the power is turned on/off along with the setting change.
On the other hand, the display of the predetermined return screen ends when the game is started (when the start switch 41 is operated). However, the bet operation alone does not end the game.
When a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on and the predetermined recovery screen is displayed, the display of the predetermined recovery screen is terminated and the display shifts to the demonstration screen.
Let T1 be the time from when the game standby screen is displayed until the transition to the demonstration screen is displayed, and T2 be the time from when the predetermined return screen is displayed until the transition to the demonstration screen is displayed.
T2 > T1
is configured to be

As a result, when the power is turned on in the hall, if the predetermined return screen is returned, the game standby screen (a game screen displayed after the game is completely stopped as the game progresses in one game, It is not a dedicated screen and is a screen different from the demonstration screen.), so the hall clerk can easily notice that the predetermined return screen is being displayed. can.
When a predetermined time elapses without any operation from a predetermined timing (after stopping all the reels 31, after finishing the payout process, etc.) after the end of the game, the demonstration screen is displayed. When the time from the end of the game to the transition to the display of the demonstration screen is T0,
T0≈T1
is.
therefore,
T2 > T0
is.

Further, if a bet operation is performed after the display of the game standby screen or the predetermined return screen shifts to the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the demonstration screen is terminated and the display returns to the game standby screen. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated from the game standby screen, the game start screen (normal effect screen displayed at the start of the game) is displayed.
Further, when a bet operation is performed while the demonstration screen is being displayed and the screen shifts to the game standby screen, the screen does not shift to the demonstration screen even after the passage of time.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of the return screen after power-off in the sub-control board 80 .
First, in step S561, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not it is in the setting change mode. When the power is turned on in the setting change mode, a command indicating the setting change mode is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80, so the setting change mode is entered based on the reception of the command. or not.
When it is determined that the mode is not the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S562, and when it is determined that the mode is the setting change mode, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. In this way, when the setting change mode is set, the setting change mode is entered without displaying a predetermined return screen (a screen specific to the setting change mode is displayed).

When proceeding from step S561 to step S562, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the complete function operation screen was displayed before the power was turned off. When the power is turned off, the information as to whether or not the operation of the complete function is notified is also backed up. When it is determined that the complete function activation screen was not displayed before the power was turned off, the process proceeds to step S563, and when it is determined that it was displayed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S563, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the game state before power-off was advantageous to the player. As described above, based on the information transmitted from the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 stores whether or not the game state is advantageous to the player. When the power is turned off, the information is backed up, and when the power is turned on, the information is read and the game state before the power is turned off is determined. If it is determined that the game state before power-off is advantageous to the player, the process proceeds to step S564, and if it is determined that it is not advantageous to the player, the process proceeds to step S572.

When proceeding to step S564, that is, when the complete function operation screen is not displayed before the power is turned off and the state before the power is turned off is advantageous to the player, the sub-control board 80 displays the predetermined return screen. indicate. Then, the process proceeds to step S565.
In step S565, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not medals have been bet. When it is determined that medals have been bet, the process proceeds to step S576, and when it is determined that medals have not been bet, the process proceeds to step S566.
In step S566, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not time T2 has elapsed since the start of display of the predetermined return screen. When it is determined that the time T2 has passed, the process proceeds to step S567, and when it is determined that the time T2 has not passed, the process returns to step S565.
When proceeding to step S567, the sub-control board 80 ends the display of the predetermined recovery screen and starts displaying the demonstration screen. Next, proceeding to step S568, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not medals have been bet. When it is determined that medals have been bet, the process proceeds to step S569. That is, the demonstration screen continues until medals are bet. When determining that medals have been betted and proceeding to step S569, the sub-control board 80 displays a game standby screen.

After displaying the game standby screen in step S569, the process proceeds to step S570, and the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. In other words, in step S570, it is determined whether or not the game has started. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S571 to display the game start screen. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
On the other hand, after the predetermined return screen is displayed in step S564, it is determined that medals have been bet in step S565, and when proceeding to step S576, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. At the stage of step S576, the predetermined return screen is displayed. When it is determined in step S576 that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S571 to display the game start screen. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S576 that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S577. In step S577, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not time T2 has elapsed since the start of display of the predetermined return screen. When it is determined that the time T2 has passed, the process proceeds to step S578, and when it is determined that the time T2 has not passed, the process returns to step S576.
Proceeding to step S578, the sub-control board 80 ends the display of the predetermined return screen and starts the display of the demonstration screen. Next, proceeding to step S579, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S571 to display the game start screen.

On the other hand, in step S563, it is determined that the game state before power-off is not advantageous to the player, and when the process proceeds to step S572, the sub-control board 80 displays the game standby screen. Next, proceeding to step S573, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not medals have been bet. When it is determined that medals have been bet, the process proceeds to step S575. Also, when it is determined that medals have not been bet, the process proceeds to step S574. At step S574, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the time T1 has elapsed since the start of display of the game standby screen. As described above, "time T1<time T2". When it is determined that the time T1 has not elapsed, the process returns to step S573 to maintain the game standby screen. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time T1 has passed, the process advances to step S567 to display the demonstration screen.
Also, when determining that medals have been bet in step S573 and proceeding to step S575, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S571 to display the game start screen.
It should be noted that if it is determined in step S565 that there is a bet before it is determined in step S566 that the time T2 has elapsed after the predetermined return screen is displayed in step S564, the process proceeds to step S579 (instead of step S576). may In other words, after the betting, the demonstration screen may not be displayed even after the time T2 has passed, and the display of the predetermined return screen may be maintained until the start switch 41 is operated.
Alternatively, after the predetermined return screen is displayed in step S564, the display of the predetermined return screen may be maintained until the bet is placed and the start switch 41 is operated. In other words, after step S564, the process may proceed to step S570, and display of the predetermined return screen may be maintained until the start switch 41 is operated (and the bet is made) in step S570.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, when the sub-bonus is won, the sub-bonus is started after a predetermined number of premonitory games and pseudo-games (“red 7” matching game). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pseudo game may be executed in the next game of the game in which the sub-bonus was won, and the sub-bonus may be entered.
(2) In the above embodiment, the game in which the winning number "2" (replay B) is won is set as the sub-bonus winning game, and "red 7" is aligned by pressing backward.
However, even if the winning number is "1" (replay A), the winning combination includes replay 04, so it may be possible to display "red 7" (replay 04) by pressing backward.
In addition, since the winning number "1" is about "1/7.3", when you win the winning number "1" after winning the sub-bonus, press the reverse button to match "Red 7". When the target effect is output and "red 7" matching is displayed, the next game may be shifted to the sub-bonus.
(3) In the above embodiment, the condition for ending the advantageous interval is that the number of differences in the advantageous interval exceeds "2400". may be terminated. "Predetermined number of times" includes, for example, "3000" games or "4000" games.
In this case, if either the difference number in the advantageous interval exceeds "2400" or the number of games played in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number, the advantageous interval ends. In addition to the fact that the number of differences in the advantageous section exceeds "2400" or the number of games played in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined number of times, any termination condition of the advantageous section (for example, after the end of the AT, or (e.g., when a predetermined number of game media is acquired with AT of ), the advantageous section may be terminated.

(4) When the complete function is activated, it has a specification to execute automatic settlement of credits. Here, for example, when a bet operation is performed at the moment the game ends and the complete function is activated after that, there is a possibility that the number of bets will remain in the gaming machine. Therefore, both the number of credits and the number of bets may be calculated in the automatic settlement when the complete function is activated.
(5) The notice (pre-announcement) image of the complete function activation may be displayed all the time during the game, but may be displayed, for example, when the remaining number of games is reached. For example, when the stop counter reaches "18500", "18600", "18700", "18800", and "18900", a notice (advance notice) corresponding to each number of sheets may be given. .
In addition, in order to thoroughly inform the player, as a specific notice method, for example, the effect lamp 21 is blinked, and an information sound such as "picone" is played once or a predetermined number of times, and furthermore, "complete function For example, the speaker 22 may output a voice such as "There are XX sheets left until the operation."

(6) As with the notice above, the notification of the complete function activation is not limited to image display only, but also a notification sound such as "Picorn", or "Complete function has been activated" or "Complete function has been activated." The game ends today.” may be output from the speaker 22 . Also, the effect lamp 21 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the operation of the complete function.
Further, the notification of the complete function operation can be executed not only on the sub-control board 80 side but also on the main control board 50 side. Specifically, by displaying, for example, "Ed" on the acquired number display LED 78 and the credit amount display LED 76 after automatic settlement, the operation of the complete function may be notified.
(7) The notification of the completion function activation may be continued until the gaming machine 10 is turned off after the notification is started, or may be performed for a certain period of time. In the case of execution for a certain period of time, it is preferable to notify the player without fail by continuing, for example, "10" seconds or longer.
(8) It is preferable that the preview image of the complete function operation be displayed promptly when all the reels 31 are stopped, the payout process is completed, and the stop counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, "18900"). . For example, in the case of displaying after the payout process is completed, the display may be performed in a shorter time than the time required for counting up one medal after the payout process is completed.
On the other hand, when all the reels 31 are stopped, the number of coins to be paid out is determined, and it is determined that the stop counter reaches a predetermined value, the display may be started before the end of the payout process.

(9) When displaying the preview image of the complete function activation, the image is displayed on the foremost layer. Displays a preview image of function activation. In addition, when displaying a preview image of the operation of the complete function during the sub-bonus (AT), it should not interfere with the display of game information such as the number of remaining games and the number of wins.
(10) When the replay is stopped and displayed in a game in which the stop counter reaches "19000", first, the automatic betting process is not executed.
Alternatively, secondly, the automatic betting itself is executed, but the operation of the start switch 41 is invalidated before the completion of the automatic betting process, for example, so that the replay game cannot be performed.
(11) When the complete function temporary flag is turned on in the special game state, regardless of the value of the stop counter at the end of the special game state, the complete function is activated and the specification has an automatic settlement function. perform automatic settlement.
For example, in the case of a special game state in which the combination lottery result may result in a non-winning combination, there is a possibility that the stopping counter value will decrease after the complete function provisional flag is turned on. However, once the complete function provisional flag is turned on in the special game state, the complete function is activated even if the number of sheets is less than the notification of the completion function activation at the end of the special game state. .

(12) As shown in FIG. 50(b), when an error (hopper empty error in this example) occurs during operation of the complete function, an image notifying the operation of the complete function and an image showing the error that has occurred are displayed. are displayed at the same time, the error image is given priority, and the image notifying the operation of the complete function may not be visible while an error is occurring.
(13) In the case of a gaming machine equipped with an image display device 23, the advance notice of activation of the complete function and the notification of activation of the complete function are displayed in the form of an image, and the speaker 22 is used to notify the player by voice.
On the other hand, in the case of a game machine that does not have the image display device 23, the speaker 22 is used to issue an advance notice of operation of the complete function or notify of the operation of the complete function by voice. Furthermore, in conjunction with these, these notifications may be performed by causing the production lamps 21 (frame lamps, etc.) to emit light in a specific pattern.
In addition, in a game machine that does not have the image display device 23, regarding the advance notice of the operation of the complete function,
a) As a first example, during the operation notice, the number of payouts is indicated by the payout number indicator (in the example of FIG. 1, the acquired number display LED 78), and the number of payouts is not displayed during the operation notice.
b) As a second example, it is possible to provide a dedicated lamp for notifying the operation of the complete function.
(14) When the winning combination has a payout at the start of the special game state, and when the stop counter reaches "19000" or more at the start of the special game state, the winning of the winning combination or the special game state. From the start of , when the special game state ends, it is possible to notify that the complete function will be activated.
In addition, when the special game state is started in a situation where the stop counter is likely to be "19000" or more at the end of the special game state, "Complete function will be activated at the end of the special game state" etc. Notification may be performed at the time of winning a special role or at the start of a special game state.
Specifically, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game in which 150 coins are expected to be paid out, when starting the special game under the condition that the completion function is activated with the remaining 100 coins, the special game is started. Sometimes, a notification such as "Complete function will be activated at the end of the special game" is executed.

(15) When the game state is advantageous to the player, but the AT is not in progress, an image (for example, FIG. 94(c)) indicating that the pushing order is not recommended due to irregular pushing is displayed, or a prescribed When the number is 3 and the game is played with a 2-coin game and the power is turned off while the effect is being displayed, when the power is restored from the power-off, the display of the predetermined return screen is prioritized. Then, an image indicating that the recommended pressing order is not followed or an image indicating that the game is played with two pieces may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of an appropriate game method even when power is cut off in a game in which irregular pressing is performed.
On the other hand, contrary to the above, priority may be given to the display of the predetermined recovery screen when the power is recovered from the shutdown. By giving priority to the display of the predetermined return screen, it is possible to hide the fact that the irregular pressing may be disadvantageous to the player, so that the player's desire to play can be prevented from decreasing.
(16) In the final game of the sub-bonus (AT), the power is cut off while at least one reel 31 is rotating, and when the power is restored after the power cut off, both the predetermined return screen and the immersion prevention screen can be identified after the complete stop. may be displayed in
(17) When the power is turned off in a game state that is not advantageous to the player, and when the power is restored from the power interruption, the game standby screen is restored in the above example, but not limited to this, the demonstration screen is displayed after the power is restored from the power interruption. You may

(18) When the power is turned off in a game state advantageous to the player, the power is restored from the power cut off, a predetermined return screen is displayed, and the power is turned off again while the predetermined return screen is being displayed, the following control is performed. mentioned.
a) Display the predetermined return screen for the time T2 again.
b) When the sum of the display time of the predetermined return screen for the first time and the display time of the predetermined return screen for the second time reaches time T2, the display of the predetermined return screen is terminated.
c) When the power is restored from the second power-off, the demonstration screen is displayed instead of the predetermined restoration screen.
(19) In the above example, the display of the predetermined return screen is ended by the operation of the start switch 41 until the time T2 elapses. may migrate.
(20) During the sub-bonus (AT), when the power is turned off while the push order navigation is being displayed (while all the reels 31 are rotating) and the power is restored, the push order navigation is displayed together with a predetermined return screen.

(21) When the power is turned off while the complete function operation screen is displayed and the power is restored from the power interruption, it is preferable to display the complete function operation screen prior to the predetermined return screen. Therefore, in this case, the predetermined recovery screen may not be displayed. However, the complete function activation screen and the predetermined return screen may be displayed at the same time.
(22) In the process of FIG. 159, when there is a bet, the settlement promotion effect is output without transitioning to the blessing effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether or not the number of bets is present after executing the blessing effect, and output the settlement promotion effect while outputting the blessing effect when there is a bet.
(23) In the above embodiment, the example of the sub-bonus is "Red 7", but a plurality of sub-bonuses may be provided. For example, the first sub-bonus started by matching "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Red 7" and the second sub-bonus starting by matching "Red 7" - "Red 7" - "Black BAR" may be provided. Furthermore, when a plurality of types of sub-bonuses are provided, the number of obtained coins may differ for each sub-bonus. For example, the first sub-bonus may end when about "300" coins are paid out (AT "50" game), and the second sub-bonus may end when about "90" coins are paid out (AT "15" game). mentioned.

<Second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, a power switch 11, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided. These configurations are illustrated in FIG. 112 (fifth embodiment), which will be described later.
The door switch 17 , setting key switch 152 , and setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 .

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated when turning on/off the power.
In the following description, turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning on the power", "turning on the power", or "resuming the supply of power".
Also, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the supply of power."

The door switch 17 is a switch for detecting opening of the front door 12 (see FIG. 111 (fifth embodiment) described later), and is attached to the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 .
The front door 12 is normally closed. However, the front door 12 is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are checked, when an error occurs, when medals are supplied, and the like.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on. Thereby, the opening of the front door 12 can be detected.
The door switch 17 is turned on when the front door 12 is closed, and is turned off when the front door 12 is open. Opening may be detected.

The setting key switch 152 is in a setting change state in which setting values can be changed (also referred to as "setting change mode" or "setting change in progress") or in a setting confirmation state in which setting values cannot be changed but can be confirmed ("setting confirmation mode"). Alternatively, it is also referred to as "setting checking".).
By inserting the setting key from the setting key insertion opening 151 and rotating the setting key clockwise by 90 degrees, the setting key switch 152 is turned on (also referred to as "first mode"), and the setting key is turned on from this state. The setting key switch 152 is set to be turned off (also referred to as "second mode") by rotating it counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

A setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that also serves as the setting change switch 153 , the reset switch 153 , and the RWM clear switch 153 .
The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the setting value in the setting change state.
Also, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to return to the state before the error occurrence (to cancel the error state) after removing the error that has occurred.
Furthermore, the RWM clear switch 153 is a switch operated when initializing (clearing) a predetermined storage area in the RWM 53 .

In the following description, the term "setting change (reset) switch 153", the "setting change switch 153", the "reset switch 153", and the "RWM clear switch 153" will be used. have
Various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 are called "operated" when they are on, and "operated" when they are off. There are cases where it is referred to as "not
In this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are integrated. may

FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the configurations of the main CPU 55, ROM 54, and RWM 53 in the second embodiment.
A main CPU 55 , an RWM 53 and a ROM 54 are provided on the main control board 50 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 53, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and a main CPU 55 is provided in this chip. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, and this built-in memory has a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53 . Furthermore, the addresses of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 are consecutive.

The storage area of the ROM 54 has a used area and a non-used area, and the used area and the non-used area each have a control area and a data area.
Here, the "usage area" is a storage area in which information related to progress of the game is stored.
A "control area" is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also called a "program area".
Furthermore, the "data area" is a storage area in which information other than the program is stored, and is a storage area in which data used when the program is executed is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside use area" is a storage area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored. This is a storage area in which programs and the like for fraud prevention are stored.
In addition, the "outside use area" has a control area and a data area like the use area. The control area of the used area may be called "first control area" or "first program area", and the control area outside the used area may be called "second control area" or "second program area".
Furthermore, the program stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the use area is called "first program", and the control area outside the use area (second control area, second program area) The program stored in is sometimes referred to as a "second program".

During the execution of the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54, reference (access) to the data stored in the data area of the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted, but the used area of the ROM 54 is permitted. Reference to data stored in the external data area is prohibited.
Similarly, during the execution of the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the use area of the ROM 54, reference to the data stored in the data area outside the use area of the ROM 54 is permitted. Reference to data stored in the data area of the used area is prohibited.

Like the ROM 54, the storage area of the RWM 53 has a used area and a non-used area, and the used area and the non-used area each have a work area and a stack area.
As shown in FIG. 53, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are used areas, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are unused areas, and addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are used areas. F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are outside the use area.

During the execution of the program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of the ROM 54, the data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 are permitted to be referenced (accessed) and rewritten (overwritten). However, data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced, but prohibited to be rewritten.
Similarly, while the program (second program) stored in the control area outside the use area of the ROM 54 is being executed, the data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced and rewritten. , and RWM 53, reference is permitted, but rewriting is prohibited. This is to prevent the processing from becoming complicated.

In addition, in order to prevent data in the used area of the RWM 53 from being rewritten (overwritten) due to program runaway or the like during execution of a program (second program) outside the used area, the used area of the RWM 53 is An unused area is provided between and outside the used area.
Furthermore, if interrupt processing enters during execution of a program (second program) outside the usage area, there is a possibility that the data in the usage area of the RWM 53 will be rewritten (overwritten) by the interrupt processing. Interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of (second program).

As shown in FIG. 53, the ROM 54 has a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 53, the RWM 53 has an unused area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the non-used area.

Furthermore, among the storage areas of the entire built-in memory, areas other than the ROM 54 and RWM 53 include built-in register areas, unused areas, and the like.
Further, the built-in register area is provided with, for example, A registers to L registers, a transmission register, and the like.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored in the used area of the RWM 53 in the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 53, the addresses of the used area are set in the range from "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)".
Note that the data shown in FIG. 54 is for use in the explanation of the second embodiment, and the data stored in the use area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

Address "F000(H)" is a storage area for set value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, it has set values "1" to "6". Therefore, any value from "0 (H)" to "5 (H)" is stored as the set value data.
Then, the set value display LED 73 displays "N", which is obtained by adding "1" to the set value data, as the set value.

The address "F001(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000(H)". Then, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the set value data (_NB_RANK) is stored at the address "F001 (H)" as the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).

In this embodiment, there are setting values "1" to "6", and "0(D)" to "5(D)" are stored in the address "F000(H)" as setting value data (_NB_RANK). Any value is stored, and any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" is stored as set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" , the value of the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is displayed on the set value display LED 73 as the set value.

Address "F010(H)" is a storage area for credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit amount data is data to be displayed on the credit amount display LED 76 . In this embodiment, any value from "0" to "50(D)" is stored as the credit amount data.
Here, in the present embodiment, a value obtained by converting the credit amount into a decimal number is stored as the credit amount data. For example, when the number of credits to be displayed is "29", the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored at address "F010(H)". As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digit of the credit number ("9" in this example), and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are , is data for displaying the upper digits (“2” in this example) of the number of credits. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of credits is "50 (D)", so the data value to be stored is in the range of "0" to "50".
In this embodiment, the address of the RWM 53 for storing the credit amount data itself is not provided, and the credit amount data is provided as the display data of the credit amount display LED 76 .

The address "F011(H)" is a storage area for acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT). Acquisition number data is data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 . In the acquisition amount data, similarly to the credit amount data described above, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are for displaying the upper digits. Data.
In this embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, the payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored as the winning number data in order to display the payout number corresponding to the winning minor winning combination on the winning number display LED 78.例文帳に追加Specifically, when a small win is won and medals are paid out, the win number data is added as the medals are paid out, and the display of the win number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1 (H)" is stored as the acquisition number data, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "01".

Here, in the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040 (H)" described later, for example, "8 (H)" is stored when an 8-card hand is won, and the payout number data is stored at the time of medal payout ( (including addition to credits) is decremented by "1" according to the number of payouts, such as "8"→"7"→...→"0".
On the other hand, the winning number data stored at the address "F011(H)" is "0"→"1"→"2"→ . . . , "1" is added each time one medal is paid out. Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 also counts up like "0"→"1"→"2"→...→"8".

In addition, in this embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 during the setting change. Therefore, during setting change display data for displaying "88" is stored as acquisition number data. By displaying "88" on the winning number display LED 78, it is possible to recognize from the front side of the game machine that the setting is being changed. Furthermore, by lighting "88" and all segments, it is possible to confirm that there is no segment defect (that there is no segment that cannot be lit).
Since the upper limit of the payout number of medals is 15, it can be understood that when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it is not the display of the payout number.

Furthermore, when the condition for instructing the specified number (the number of medals to bet in the game this time) is satisfied, the number of acquired medals is displayed before the game starts (before betting becomes possible or the start switch 41 is operated). A specified number is instructed (displayed, notified) on the display LED 78 .
In this embodiment, "0A" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 to indicate the prescribed number "2". Therefore, when instructing the specified number, the specified specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data.

Furthermore, when winning a push order bell or the like during AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . Therefore, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, the pressing order instruction number is stored as the acquired number data.
For example, when the pressing order instruction information is displayed in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the pressing order instruction number "A1(H)" is stored as the winning number data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1(H)" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED78.

Also, when a predetermined error occurs, the error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . Therefore, when a predetermined error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as the acquired number data.
For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP", the error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as the acquired number data.

The address "F030(H)" is a storage area for the action status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag for determining whether or not replays and accessories are operating.
For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the activation status flag is set to "1". Also, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed, the D0 bit of the operating state flag is set to "1".

Address "F040(H)" is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data is data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. When a minor winning combination is won, payout number data corresponding to the winning minor winning combination is stored, and medal payout processing is executed. Here, the payout number data is subtracted by "1" each time one medal is paid out ("1" is added to the number of credits or one actual medal is paid out (from the hopper 35)). That is, it has a role as the number of times the payout process is executed. Thus, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0".

The address "F041(H)" is the storage area of the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Similar to the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined. Here, unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not decremented for each medal payout process, and the initially stored value is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the medal payout number update process of the next game. For example, when a small winning combination of 8 payouts is won in the relevant game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and in the next game when the winning combination is not won, the payout number data buffer is stored. "0" is overwritten.

The address "F042(H)" is a storage area for automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet upon winning a replay, and stores "2" or "3" in this embodiment.
Address "F043(H)" is a storage area for bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored.

The address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which the status display LED lighting data is stored.
As shown in FIG. 57(A), which will be described later, in the second embodiment, the display substrate 75 has status display LEDs 79 such as a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, and a put-in display. It has six LEDs, a display LED 79e and a replay display LED 79f.
The state display LED lighting data is data indicating whether or not three of the six LEDs, the game start display LED 79d, the insertion display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f, should be lit.

As shown in FIG. 54, the D0 bit of the status display LED lighting data is assigned to the game start display LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to the insertion display LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to the replay display LED 79f. there is Each bit of the status display LED lighting data matches each bit of the LED display counter 1 in FIG. 61(A), which will be described later.
Then, "1" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on, and "0" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off.
For example, when the game start display LED 79d is turned on and the insertion display LED 79e and replay display LED 79f are turned off, "00000001 (B)" is stored as the state display LED lighting data.

The address "F051(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which of digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated for each interrupt.
Here, "digit" means a display unit (display), and in this embodiment, it is composed of one 7-segment display. Of the digits of this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digits of the credit number (stored number) display LED 76 and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digits of the credit number display LED 76 . Digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78 , digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78 , and digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73 .
As for each bit of the LED display counter 1, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 2 signal, . . . , and the D4 bit to the digit 5 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

In the second embodiment, the LED display counter 1 takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 1 updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 so as to shift the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 to the right by one digit as it progresses from interrupt "1"→"2"→... (for each interrupt). . In addition, in the interrupt following the interrupt "5", the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting it to the right by one digit. Set counter 1 to "00010000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 1 repeats the values "5"→"4"→...→"1"→"5"→"4"→... for each interrupt process. That is, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of the LED display counter 1 is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the second embodiment, five interrupts form one cycle, and digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, the digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) can be lit (digits 1 to 4 are extinguished). At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)", a digit 4 signal is output, and digit 4 (lower digit of acquisition number display LED D78) can be lit (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are extinguished). Become.

The address "F052(H)" is a storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value corresponding to normal operation, setting change operation, or setting confirmation operation.
In the second embodiment, the value "00001111 (B)" is taken because digits 1 to 4 are lit and digit 5 is not lit during normal operation. During setting change and setting confirmation, digit 5 is lit and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000 (B)".

Address "F061(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous section type flag is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section or an advantageous section.
The advantageous section type flag stores "00000000 (B)" in the normal section, and the D0 bit becomes "1" when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section.
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The address "F062(H)" is a storage area for the advantageous section display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit. When the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off, the advantageous section display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section display LED flag is "1".
The advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at any time after transition to the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section).

On the other hand, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on.
Specifically, firstly, there is a case where the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on at the time of transition to the advantageous section, but is turned on afterwards (during the advantageous section).
Secondly, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit when transitioning to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied before the condition for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on once. The advantageous section may end without lighting.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a game state in which the interval Sim is in an advantageous interval and the interval Sim ball-out rate exceeds "1", when the instruction function is activated (when the correct pressing order is notified), the advantageous interval is displayed. LED 77 is lit.
Further, once the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the lighting is maintained during the advantageous section.
Further, during the game end check processing in the final game of the advantageous interval, processing for turning off the advantageous interval display LED 77 is executed. Specifically, when the advantageous interval end condition is satisfied, the advantageous interval display LED flag storage area is initialized (the advantageous interval display LED flag is cleared). As a result, the advantageous section display LED 77 is extinguished in subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, the lighting timing when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit in a game that activates the instruction function is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, after the reel 31 starts rotating, the reel 31 until the rotation reaches a constant speed state).
However, it is not limited to this, and other lighting timings include, for example,
1) Before the start switch 41 is operated 2) After the start switch 41 is operated, when all the reels 31 are in a constant speed state and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted,
3) when at least one reel 31 is stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating;
4) When all reels 31 are stopped,
5) After all the reels 31 have stopped (the relevant game is finished) and before the settlement switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit in a game in which the instruction function is activated, it is necessary to determine the winning combination in the game. .
When the advantageous interval display LED 77 is lit in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the start switch 41 is operated and the lottery for the winning combination is executed. The timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before reaching the constant speed state is the shortest timing.

The address "F063(H)" is the storage area for the advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous interval clear counter is a decrement counter for counting the number of games played during the advantageous interval. The advantageous section clear counter is "0" during the normal section, and is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value when shifting to the advantageous section. Also, the advantageous interval clear counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game not only during the advantageous interval but also during the normal interval. However, the minimum value is "0". Therefore, in the normal section, when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is "0", even if "1" is subtracted, the value after subtraction is "0". Therefore, during the normal section, "1" is subtracted for each game, but "0" is maintained. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section (non-advantageous section).

Further, when the game is shifted to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" as an initial value, so that the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)" in the next game.
Note that the advantageous section clear counter stores an initial value of "1500 (D)" at maximum, and thus consists of 2 bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter, it is an advantageous interval.

The address "F065(H)" is the storage area for the difference number counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference number counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of the number of difference coins during the advantageous interval, and is also called "MY counter".
The difference number counter does not simply store the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets, but stores the "value corresponding to" the accumulated value of the difference number of sheets. For example, when the difference number becomes a value corresponding to a minus value, the value is corrected to "0 (H)". Therefore, "accumulated value of difference number ≠ difference number counter value".
The difference number counter is an increment counter for determining whether or not the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets during the advantageous section exceeds "2400 (D)". Therefore, the difference number counter consists of a 2-byte storage area.

It is sufficient for the difference number counter to count the cumulative value of the difference number of sheets at least during the advantageous interval, and it is not necessary to count during the non-advantageous interval (normal interval).
Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that the game is in the advantageous section, it is necessary to perform a process of determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section for each game. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the update of the difference counter value is executed including during the non-advantageous section (normal section). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated without determining whether or not the game is in the advantageous section every game, so the processing can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the difference number becomes negative in the game this time and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference number becomes the carry-down data, the difference number counter value is updated. However, if the result of the calculation is that the difference counter is the data that is carried down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example (assuming that the difference number counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)" and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)".
Second game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "9", difference counter after calculation "0006 (H)" (no correction)
3rd game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference number counter after calculation "0003 (H)" (no correction)
4th game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "1", difference counter after calculation "0001 (H)" (no correction)
Fifth game: number of bets "3", number of payouts "0", difference counter after calculation "FFFE (H)", difference counter after correction "0 (H)"
is updated as
Even if the difference counter of the previous game is "0 (H)" and the difference counter of the current game is "0 (H)", the difference counter value reflecting the difference of the game is changed again. Since it is a calculated result, such a case also corresponds to "update" of the difference number counter.

As described above, when the post-calculation difference counter value is a value that has undergone a carry-down, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (the initial value "0" is set). A method of determining whether or not a carry-down has occurred will be described later.
By updating the difference counter value in this manner, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses, for example, when the number of payouts is large relative to the number of bets, that is, when the difference number is increasing. On the other hand, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal section, the difference counter value is increased by the number of payouts when a payout based on a winning of a small combination is made, but after that, the number of payouts is increased. falls below the number of bets, it eventually becomes "0".

The address "F067(H)" is a storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag for determining whether or not AT is in progress, and is set to "0" during non-AT and to "1" during AT. The timing at which the AT flag is set to "1" is when the AT lottery is won, and this is executed in step S364 of FIG. 67, which will be described later. The AT flag is turned off at the end of the final game of the AT, for example, in a game end check process (step S415 in FIG. 71), which will be described later. Further, the data cleared (initialized) at the end of the advantageous section includes an AT flag.

The address "F068(H)" is the storage area of the AT game number counter (_CT_ART). The AT game number counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of games during AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous section clear counter, the AT game number counter stops counting (decrementing) after it reaches "0".
It is after the start switch 41 is operated during the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) (step S281 in FIG. 67) that the AT game number counter is updated (decremented) during AT.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the initial value of the number of AT games may exceed "255 (D)", the AT game number counter is composed of a 2-byte counter. When the number of AT games is maximum "255 (D)" or less, the AT game number counter may be composed of a 1-byte counter.
When starting AT (or when shifting to AT preparation), the initial value is set to the AT game number counter. The initial value may be a constant value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when AT is won. Moreover, after determining the initial value, the number of AT games may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT, the number of AT games may be added, and when winning an additional lottery, the number of AT games may be increased. In this case, the increment is added to the AT game number counter.
This AT game number counter is also included in the data cleared at the end of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, since the number-of-games management type AT is exemplified, an AT game number counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of the difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of the AT game number counter. Then, at the start of AT, the initial value of the obtainable difference number is set. Also, when winning the addition, the number of additional winnings is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of the game is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter becomes "0", the AT is terminated.
A 48-byte storage area at addresses "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is a stack area for use.

55 and 56 are diagrams showing addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 in the second embodiment.
Addresses outside the use area are set in the range from "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" as shown in FIG.
The data shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 are used in the explanation of the second embodiment, and the data stored outside the use area of the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The 400 game counter at the address "F210(H)" adds the number of games played at 400 games. This 400 game counter is a counter that cycles from "0" to "399 (D)" and is incremented by "1" each time a game is played. When "1" is added when the value of the 400 game counter is "399 (D)", the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0".

Contrary to the above, "399 (D)" may be set as the initial value of the 400 game counter, and "1" may be subtracted each time the game is played. In this case, when the value of the 400 game counter becomes "0", it is determined that 400 games have been executed. When "1" is subtracted when the value of the 400 game counter is "0", the initial value "399 (D)" is set to the 400 game counter.

The ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)" is for designating to which ring buffer the number of payout medals is added when medals are paid out in the game.
Specifically, at the address "F212(H)", any one of "0" to "14(D)" is stored as the ring buffer number.

Addresses "F213(H)" to "F230(H)" are storage areas of total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. FIG. The total payout ring buffers 0-14 consist of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer consists of 2 bytes. For example, total payout ring buffer 0 consists of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", where address "F213(H)" is the lower digit and address "F214(H)" is the upper digit. In FIGS. 55 and 56, the lowest address numbers are displayed for the storage areas with the number of bytes equal to or greater than "2".

One ring buffer stores the total number of payouts for 400 games. For example, the payout numbers for the 1st game to the 400th game are stored in the addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", and the next payout numbers for the 401st game to the 800th game are stored in the address "F215 ( H)” and “F216(H)”.
Here, whether or not the 400th game has been played is determined by referring to the 400th game counter at the address "F210(H)". Further, it is determined by referring to the ring buffer number of the address "F212(H)" to which ring buffer value the number of medals to be paid out in the game is added (the value is updated).

When the total number of payouts from the 1st game to the 400th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at the addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", the total number from the 5601st game to the 6000th game is stored. The payout number is stored in the total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)". Next, at the end of the 6000th game, the data stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is cleared. is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)".

Each of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 consists of 2 bytes. Assuming that the maximum number of payouts in one game is "15", the maximum number of payouts in 400 games is 6000, so the storage capacity is 2 bytes.
This point also applies to the continuous bonus ring buffers 0 to 14 and the bonus bonus ring buffers 0 to 14, which will be described later.

Further, addresses "F231(H)" to "F24E(H)" are storage areas of the continuous award payout ring buffers 0 to 14. FIG.
Furthermore, the addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are storage areas of the prize payout ring buffers 0 to 14. FIG.

The total number-of-games counter of addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter for storing the number of games played (accumulated), and consists of 3 bytes. Since it is necessary to count "175000 (D)" games as the total number of games played, the total number of games counter is composed of 3 bytes.
The total number of games counter continues counting even after the number of games exceeds "175000 (D)" games, and stops counting when 3 bytes are full ("FFFFFF (H)").

The instructed role product counter of the addresses "F270(H)" to "F272(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the role product is activated and the number of payouts in the game in which the instruction function is activated. Consists of 3 bytes.
The total payout (6000 times) counter of addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of medals paid out during 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out per game in 6,000 games, the total number is 90,000, so it can be counted with 3 bytes. The same applies to the payout (6000 times) counter).

The continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter of the addresses “F276(H)” to “F278(H)” is a counter for counting the number of payouts when the continuous accessory is activated during 6000 games.
The accessory payout (6000 times) counter of addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the accessory is activated during 6000 games.

Then, when there is a payout while the continuous accessory is not operating and the accessory is not operating, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (added), and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout are updated (added). (6000 times) The counter is not updated.
Further, when there is a payout while the continuous accessory is not activated and the accessory is activated, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter are updated, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter is updated. is not updated.
Furthermore, when there is a payout during continuous accessory operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the accessory payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter, and the bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
First, when there is a payout of medals from the first game to the 6000th game, the total payout (6000 times ) counter, continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter, and bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter.
At the end of the 6000th game, the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, the number of payouts in each 400 game number from before "400 × 15-1" game (5999 games) to before "400 × 15-400" game (5600 games) from the game is the total payout (6000 times) counter value, continuous bonus payout (6000 times) counter value, and bonus bonus payout (6000 times) counter value.

For example, when it is the 6000th game, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) value is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Similarly, when the game reaches the 6000th game, the value of the continuous accessory payout ring buffer 0 (F231(H) to F232(H)) is subtracted from the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the continuous bonus payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts at the time of continuous role payout operation from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the continuous role payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous role payout (6000 times) counter.

Furthermore, similarly, when the 6000th game is reached, the value of the award payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the award payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the prize payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts during the operation of the accessory from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to the accessory payout ring buffer 0 and the accessory payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts during the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1" game to "400" game Total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game to "800" game Total payout ring buffer 2: "801" game to "1200" game Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201" game to "1600" game Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601" game to "2000" game Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001" game to "2400" Game item Total payout ring buffer 6: "2401" game item to "2800" game item Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801" game item to "3200" game item Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201" game item to "3600" game item " Game total payout ring buffer 9: "3601" game to "4000" game Total payout ring buffer 10: "4001" game to "4400" game Total payout ring buffer 11: "4401" game to "4800" game total payout ring buffer 12: "4801" game to "5200" game Total payout ring buffer 13: "5201" game to "5600" game Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game to "6000" game

Assuming that the 6000th game is completed, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the number of payouts for each number of games.
Also, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter and the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0-14 match.
Let Σ1 be the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time, and Z1 be the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0.
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1-Z1
perform the operation of
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
perform the operation of
That is, the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the number of payouts for 400 games from 5999 (400×15−1) to 5600 (400×15−400) is changed to the total payout ( 6000 times) A process of subtracting from the value "Σ1" stored in the counter is executed.

Next, a process of clearing the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0 that stores the number of payouts for 400 games from 5999 (400×15−1) games to 5600 (400×15−400) games. to run.
After such calculation, the 6001st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6001st game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6001st game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0, and Add to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming that the 6400th game has been completed, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts for the following number of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: “6001” game to “6400” game Total payout ring buffer 1: “401” game to “800” game :
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game Total payout (6000 times) counter: "401" game to "6000" game, and "6001" game to "6400" game

Similarly to the above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time is Σ2, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2, then:
Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2-Z2
and
and,
total payout ring buffer 1=0
and
After such calculation, the 6401st game is started. When there is a payout from the 6401st game to the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that the accessory did not operate from the 6401st game to the 6800th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1, and Add to the total payout (6000 times) counter. The above processing is repeated.

Also, although the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been described, the same processing as described above is performed when the role product is activated or when the continuous role product is activated.
Specifically, when the role product is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the role product payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the role product payout (6000 times) counter. Execute the process. Incidentally, when the accessory is activated, as described above, one of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, when the continuous accessory is operated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with the continuous accessory payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter. process. In addition, at the time of continuous role product operation, any of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14, any of the role product payout ring buffers 0 to 14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the role product payout (6000 times) counter Also update.

The total payout (cumulative) counter of addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts, and counts the total number of payouts during at least "175000 (D)" games. .
Similarly, the continuous bonus payout (cumulative) counter for the addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of payouts when the continuous bonus is activated. At least "175000 (D)" counts the number of payouts at the time of continuous accessory operation during the game.

Furthermore, in the same way, the bonus payout (total) counter for the addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" is a counter that counts the cumulative number of payouts when the bonus is activated. "175000 (D)" Counts the number of payouts when the accessory is activated during the game.
Note that the three types of payout (6000 times) counters described above subtract the number of payouts from before 5999 games to before 5600 games every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters subtract values. never do.

The three types of payout (cumulative) counters consist of 3 bytes. For example, in 175000 games, assuming that 15 coins were paid out per game, the value is "175000×15=2625000", which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, it can be stored with a storage capacity of 3 bytes.

Accessory state counters of addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" are counters that count the total number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous operation device is activated. Yes, and consists of 3 bytes.
The instructed role ratio data at the address "F288(H)" is the total ratio of the payout number when the role is activated and the payout number in the game in which the instruction function is activated to the total payout number. This is a storage area for storing material ratios.

The continuous role ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F289(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of continuous role operation to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.
The role ratio (6000 times) data at the address "F28A(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role to the total number of payouts during 6000 games.

The continuous role ratio (cumulative) data at the address "F28B(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of continuous role operation to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.
The role ratio (total) data at the address "F28C(H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of operating the role to the total number of payouts in the total number of games played.

Accessory item state ratio data at address "F28D(H)" is the total ratio of the number of games when the accessory is activated and the number of games when the accessory continuous operation device is activated to the total number of games played. This is a storage area for storing state ratios.
The calculation result buffer at the address "F28E(H)" is a storage area for temporarily storing the calculation result during the ratio calculation process.

The count upper limit flag of the address "F28F (H)" is the total number of games counter (addresses "F26D (H)" to "F26F (H)") or the total number of payouts (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C (H)" to This flag is turned on when the storage capacity of "F27E(H)") is the upper limit value (3 bytes full, that is, "FFFFFF(H)").
Of the 1-byte (8-bit) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of games played, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of payouts. The 'D2' to 'D7' bits are unused in the second embodiment.
For example, when the total number-of-games counter reaches the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag becomes "00000001 (B)".

The payout number upper limit buffer at the address "F290 (H)" is 3 bytes full when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter, and if it exceeds 3 bytes full, the value after addition becomes 3 bytes full. is a storage area for storing the value of
For example, when the total payout (cumulative) counter value before payout in the game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the number of payouts in the game is "8 (H)", the counter value is set to "8 (H)". )” will cause overflow. Therefore, in order not to cause overflow of the total payout (cumulative) counter value, a value for becoming full of 3 bytes is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)"+"1(H)"="FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The blinking request flag at the address "F291(H)" is a flag for specifying an object that satisfies the blinking display condition when displaying the identification seg and the ratio seg.
Regarding the instructed accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (total), accessory ratio (total), and accessory state ratio, the total number of games played (the value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "175000". When there is, control is performed so that the identification segment is displayed blinking.
With respect to the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games played (the value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment is displayed blinking. control to

It is desirable that the instructed character ratio, continuous character ratio (cumulative), character ratio (cumulative), and character state ratio are ratios among 175,000 games (in order to reduce variations). is the ratio calculated from the number of games played in less than 175,000 games, a blinking identification seg is displayed to indicate this.
Similarly, the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times) are originally ratios between 6000 times, but when the ratio is calculated based on the number of games played less than 6000 times, To indicate this, the identification segment is displayed blinking.

In addition, when the displayed value of the instructed accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the accessory ratio (6000 times) is '70' or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink. .
Furthermore, when the displayed value of the continuous role product ratio (total) and the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is "60" or more, the ratio segment is controlled to blink.
Furthermore, when the displayed value of the role item status ratio is "50" or more, control is performed so that the ratio seg blinks.

The reason why the slot machine of this embodiment is set as described above is that the instructed role ratio and the role ratio are designed to be less than "70"%, and the continuous role ratio is set to "60". %, and the state ratio of accessories, etc. is designed to be less than "50"%, and when the measured value does not fall within the range of the design value, the ratio seg blinks. to let them know by letting them know.

In addition, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the instructed role product ratio flashing flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) flashing flag, and the D7 bit corresponds to the 175000 times flashing flag.
For example, when the calculated instructed accessory ratio is less than "70", the D0 bit of the flashing request flag is "0", and when it is "70" or more, the D0 bit of the flashing request flag is "1 ”.
Similarly, when the calculated continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is less than "70", the D1 bit of the flash request flag is "0", and when it is "70" or more, the D1 bit of the flash request flag bit becomes "1".

In addition, when the calculated state ratio of the accessory, etc. is less than "50", the D5 bit of the flashing request flag is "0", and when it is "50" or more, the D5 bit of the flashing request flag is "1". ”.
Furthermore, when the total game number counter value is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the flashing request flag is set to "1", and when it is "6000" or more, the D6 bit of the flashing request flag is set to "0". Become.
Furthermore, when the total number of games counter value is less than "175000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1", and when it is "175000" or more, the D7 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0". .

The ratio display number of the address "F292(H)" is a storage area for storing the number corresponding to the ratio displayed in the interrupt process.
When the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process is the instructed accessory ratio, "1" is stored in the ratio display number of the address "F292(H)". Similarly, "2" is stored when the continuous role ratio (6000 times), "3" is stored when the role ratio (6000 times), and "3" is stored when the continuous role ratio (total). stores "4", stores "5" when it is the role product ratio (total), and stores "6" when it is the role product etc. state ratio.

The blinking switching flag at the address "F293(H)" is a flag for determining whether it is lit or extinguished when blinking the identification seg or the ratio seg during the interrupt process.
In this embodiment, when the blinking display is performed, it is set to repeat turning on and off about every 0.3 seconds. For about 0.3 seconds during lighting, the blinking switching flag is "0" (value indicating lighting), and for about 0.3 seconds during lighting, the blinking switching flag is "1" (value indicating lighting). is set to be

The display switching time of address "F294(H)" is a counter that counts about 5 seconds, which is the time to display one ratio, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.
In the present embodiment, the instructed character ratio display (about 5 seconds) → character continuous ratio (6000 times) display (about 5 seconds) → ... → character ratio (cumulative) display (about 5 seconds) → role Item condition ratio display (approximately 5 seconds)→Indicated accessory ratio (approximately 5 seconds)→ . . . are repeatedly displayed.
Therefore, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether or not approximately five seconds have elapsed, that is, whether or not the display ratio switching time has been reached.

The blinking switching time of the address "F296 (H)" is a counter that counts about 0.3 seconds when blinking the identification segment or the ratio segment, as described above. is a counter that is updated to "1".

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte storage area in which LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored.
The LED display counter 2 is a counter for determining which of the digits 6 to 9 is to be lit, and is continuously updated for each interrupt. For each bit of the LED display counter 2, the D0 bit is assigned to the digit 6 signal, the D1 bit to the digit 7 signal, the D2 bit to the digit 8 signal, and the D3 bit to the digit 4 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter 2 is lit.

In the second embodiment, the LED display counter 2 takes a value of "00001000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 2 updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 so as to shift the bit "1" of the LED display counter 2 to the right by one digit as the interrupt proceeds from "1" to "2" to . . . (for each interrupt). . In addition, in the interrupt following the interrupt "4", the LED display counter 2 becomes "00000000 (B)" by shifting it to the right by one digit. Set counter 2 to "00001000 (B)". As a result, the LED display counter 2 repeats the values "4"→"3"→"2"→"1"→"4"→ . That is, four interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the value of the LED display counter 2 is
"N" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00001000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
:
becomes.

In the second embodiment, four interrupts form one cycle, and digits 6 to 9 are dynamically lit. Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)", the digit 9 signal is output. By outputting the digit 9 signal, the digit 9 (lower digit of the ratio segment) can be lit. At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)", a digit 8 signal is output, and digit 8 (ratio segment upper digit) can be lit. Also, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)", a digit 7 signal is output to enable lighting of the digit 7 (identification segment lower digit), and when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)" , a digit 6 signal is output, and the digit 6 (higher order digit of the identification segment) can be lit.

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at the address "F2A0(H)" is a storage area for storing the RWM checksum data calculated by the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) during the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN).
Here, the "RWM checksum data" is also called "complement data", "error detection data", or "error detection information", and is located at addresses "F000(H)" to When added to the data of "F1FF(H)" and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area (excluding "F2A0(H)"), it becomes "0". is a value.
That is, the data of the addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area ("F2A0(H)" are ) is added to the added value of the data of "F2A0(H)", the result is "0". In other words, the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is "0".

The power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at the address "F2A1(H)" is a flag for determining whether or not the power-off processing has been executed normally, and is stored during the power-off processing.
When the power-off processing is executed normally, "55 (H)" is stored as the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF), and when the power-off processing is not executed normally, the power-off processing completed flag is stored. A value other than "55 (H)" is stored as (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at the address "F2A2(H)" is a flag for determining whether the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag are normal. It is stored during processing.
The RWM 53 checksum calculation result is normal (RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" is added to the sum of the data in the RWM 35 use area and outside the use area (excluding "F2A0(H)") is "0") and the power-off processing completion flag is a normal value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). is stored.
On the other hand, when at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is not normal (abnormal), "00 (H)" is set as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). remembered.

Stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at address "F2A3 (H)" is a storage area (save) where the stack pointer of the used area is stored (saved) when a program (second program) outside the used area is executed. buffer).
Here, the "stack area" refers to a storage area of the RWM 53 in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).
A "stack pointer" is used to hold an address that indicates where data is saved (stored) in the stack area.

Then, when executing a program (second program) outside the used area, the stack pointer of the used area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, the program (second program) outside the used area is terminated, and the used area is restored. (first program), the stack pointer of the used area is restored from the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2.例文帳に追加

A 24-byte storage area at addresses "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside the use area.

Next, the initialization of data in the used area of the RWM 53 and data outside the used area will be described.
Data in the use area of the RWM 53 and data outside the use area are maintained without being initialized only by interruption/restart of power supply (power on/off, power switch 11 on/off).
In addition, even when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the use area of the RWM 53 and the data outside the use area are maintained without being initialized.

Further, it is assumed that an operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed, and it is determined that there is a power-off recovery abnormality. In this case, step S2707 of program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62, which will be described later, becomes "Yes", and the flow advances to step S2711 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting change in the power failure recovery failure. Also, since it is a power-off/recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712 of FIG. 62, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.
For this reason, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ”) and the entire range outside the use area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are initialized.
Even when recovering from the unrecoverable error state, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and power failure recovery abnormality is determined.

It is also assumed that an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that power-off recovery is normal. In this case, the step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. the scope is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” are executed.

Therefore, when the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 and the address "F210 ( H)” to “F291(H)” are maintained without being initialized.
In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, the power is turned off when the role product ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the setting change state is entered. When it is determined that the power is restored normally, the management information display LED 74 displays from the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

It is also assumed that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62 is "No", step S2710 is "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2713. the scope is set.
Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ” to “F3FF(H)” are executed.

In other words, the address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. Therefore, for example, when the role ratio (total) data (ratio display number “5”) is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on. Display is started from a given instruction-containing accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”).

Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and it is determined that the recovery from the power failure is normal, an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed. , and the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed in the same range as when it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal.
Therefore, even if you do not have the setting key or do not switch to the setting change state, the same range as when the operation to switch to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal. , the RWM 53 can be initialized.

Also, at the end of the advantageous interval, initialization processing is executed for a predetermined range (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 54) of the use area of the RWM 53 storing data relating to the advantageous interval. be.
Also, even if the advantageous section ends, the address "F292(H)" of the RWM 53 is not initialized. Therefore, for example, when the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), the advantageous section ends and the data relating to the advantageous section is stored. Even if the predetermined range of the RWM 53 used area (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 54) is initialized, the display items displayed on the management information display LED 74 are , Accessory ratio (total) data is followed by Accessory condition ratio data (ratio display number “6”).

It is also assumed that the power is turned off and then turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off, and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. That is, it is assumed that the normal power supply is turned on/off. In this case, since the RWM 53 is not initialized, the data in the RWM 53 used area and data outside the used area at the time of power failure are maintained.
Therefore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch are turned off. When both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off, the power is turned on, and if it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal, the state at the time of power failure is restored. The object ratio (cumulative) data is displayed, and then the accessory state ratio data (ratio display number “6”), which is the display item next to the accessory ratio (cumulative) data, is displayed.

Also, assume that the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off, and it is determined that a power failure recovery error has occurred. In this case, the step S2708 in FIG. 62 becomes "Yes", and the flow advances to step S2801 to execute unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) (unrecoverable error state), so initialization processing of the RWM 53 is not executed. . Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, interrupt processing is prohibited (step S1490 in FIG. 64), and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off ( step S1495 in FIG. 64).
Therefore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch are turned off. When both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off and the power is turned on and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, interrupt processing is prohibited and the outputs of output ports 0 to 7 are turned off. The management information display LED 74 remains off.

Incidentally, for example, in the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8". In this case, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are turned off. "8888" is displayed in the

Further, for example, even if the processing shifts to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, the interrupt processing may not be prohibited, and the output of output ports 0 to 7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 and the reset button are turned off. Even if the power is turned on with both switches (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, the management information display LED 74 first displays the role ratio (cumulative) data, Next, the accessory state ratio data (ratio display number “6”), which is the display item next to the accessory ratio (cumulative) data, is displayed.

FIG. 57(A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 57(B) is a diagram showing the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the second embodiment. be.
As shown in FIG. 57A, in the second embodiment, the display substrate 75 is provided with a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79. FIG.
The credit number display LED 76 consists of digit 1 (upper digit) and digit 2 (lower digit), and the acquired number display LED 78 consists of digit 3 (upper digit) and digit 4 (lower digit). Also, digits 1-4 use a seven-segment display with no dot segments.
Digits 1 to 4 may be constructed using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

As status display LEDs 79, a 1-bet display LED 79a, a 2-bet display LED 79b, a 3-bet display LED 79c, a game start display LED 79d, a throw-in display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f are provided. .
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 57, the advantageous segment display LED 77 is configured using a segment P of digit 4 as shown in FIG.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 57, the set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50 as shown in FIG. Digit 5 also uses a seven-segment display with no dot segments.
Digit 5 may be configured using a 7-segment display with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 57B, the management information display LED 74 includes digit 6 (identification segment upper digit), digit 7 (identification segment lower digit), digit 8 (ratio segment upper digit), and digit 9 (ratio segment lower digit). digits).
Digits 6-9 also use a 7-segment display with dot segments (segment P).
In addition, segment P of digit 7 (identifying segment lower digit) functions as a digit separator LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly distinguish between the information type (identification segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating details of digits and segments in the second embodiment.
In a second embodiment, the digits 1-5 seven-segment display itself consists of segments AG and has no dot segment (segment P).
However, the segment P of the digit 1 constitutes the game start display LED 79d, the segment P of the digit 2 constitutes the input display LED 79e, the segment P of the digit 3 constitutes the replay display LED 79f, and the segment P of the digit 4. constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77 .

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the second embodiment.
In the second embodiment, two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) for outputting digit signals are provided, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) for outputting segment signals are provided. characterized by
In the second embodiment, digits 1-9 are provided.
A segment of digits 1 to 5 is called segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and a segment of digits 6 to 9 is called segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).

In the second embodiment, the output port 3 is an output port for outputting digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals), and the output port 6 is for outputting digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals).
Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the output port 4 is an output port for outputting segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment signals 1A to 1P), and the output port 7 is for outputting segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment signals). 2A to 2P signals).
When lighting digits 1 to 5, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment 1 signal is output from the output port 4. FIG.
When the digits 6 to 9 are lit, the digit signal is output from the output port 6 and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 7 .

Next, the external signal will be explained. The “external signal” is a signal output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hall computer, data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external common terminal board 100 .
As shown in FIG. 59, in the second embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5 . Specifically, the D0 bit (external signal 1) of the output port 5 is assigned a "setting change signal", and the D1 bit (external signal 2) is assigned a "setting confirmation signal". Each signal shown in FIG. 59 is also assigned to the D2 to D5 bits.

The "setting changing signal" is an external signal indicating that the setting is being changed and that the setting has been changed. The signal during setting change is output continuously until the end of one game during the setting change and after the setting change (all reels 31 stop and the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 67). The setting change is performed. When the D0 bit of the output port 5 is "1", the setting changing signal is on (the setting is being changed or one game after the setting is changed). In addition, when the D0 bit is "0", the signal during setting change is off (not during setting change and not before the end of one game after setting change). indicates

The "setting confirmation signal" is an external signal indicating that the setting is being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal is output during setting confirmation. When the D1 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the setting confirmation signal is on (setting is being confirmed), and when the D1 bit is "0", the setting confirmation signal is off. Indicates that there is (not checking the settings).

"Fraud detection signal 1" is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when the door switch 17 is turned on (when the opening of the front door 12 is detected), the fraud detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is ON (the door switch 17 is ON and the front door 12 is open), and the D2 bit is "0". , it indicates that the fraud detection signal 1 is off (the door switch 17 is off and the front door 12 is closed).

“Fraud detection signal 2” is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud, like the fraud detection signal 1. FIG. For example, when a recoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 2 is output. When the D3 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 2 is on (recoverable error state), and when the D3 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 2 is off. (not a recoverable error state).

Like the fraud detection signals 1 and 2, the "fraud detection signal 3" is an external signal indicating that there is a possibility of fraud. For example, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 3 is output. When the D4 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is on (unrecoverable error state), and when the D4 bit is "0", the fraud detection signal 3 is Indicates off (no unrecoverable error condition).

The "security signal" is an external signal indicating that any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is on. When any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signal 1 to 3 is output, the security signal is also output at the same time. When the D5 bit of the output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the security signal is ON (any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signal 1 to 3 is being output), When the D5 bit is "0", it indicates that the security signal is off (none of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 are output).

As described above, the setting changing signal is continuously output until one game ends after the setting is changed. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting changing signal and the setting confirming signal are output. Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the setting change state is ended and medals (game medium, game value) can be betted. At this time, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets is "0", both the setting changing signal and the setting confirming signal are output.
Furthermore, when any one of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signal 1 to 3 is output, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after setting change, the D0, D1 and D5 bits of the output port 5 are turned on ("1"). After that, if the setting confirmation state is terminated before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 and D5 bits of the output port 5 remain on (“1”) and the D1 bit is off (“0”). become. When the first game after the setting change is completed, the D0 bit and the D5 bit of the output port 5 are also turned off ("0").

Next, lighting control of digits 1 to 9 will be described.
Digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) are controlled to be lit by LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 71, which will be described later. Also, the LED display control processing (I_LED_OUT) is processing by the program (first program) of the used area.

On the other hand, the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) is controlled by ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in FIG. 73, which will be described later. Also, the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is processing by a program (second program) outside the use area.
In the second embodiment, the digits 1 to 5 that control lighting by the program in the usage area (first program) and the digits 6 to 9 that control lighting by the program outside the usage area (second program) Separate output ports for use.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the second embodiment.
In the second embodiment, it has digits 1 to 9, the segment of digits 1 to 5 is segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segment of digits 6 to 9 is segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P). .
Segments 1A to 1G of digit 1 form the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 1 forms a game start display LED 79d.
The segments 1A to 1G of the digit 2 constitute the lower digits of the credit amount display LED 76, and the segment 1P of the digit 2 constitutes the insertion display LED 79e.

Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 constitute the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 3 constitutes a replay display LED 79f.
Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 constitute the lower digits of the winning number display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous section display LED 77. FIG.
Also, the segments 1A to 1G of the digit 5 constitute a set value display LED73.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 6 constitute identification segment upper digits of management information display LED 74. FIG.

Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 7 constitute the identification segment lower digits of management information display LED 74, and segment 2P of digit 7 constitutes a digit division display LED.
Segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 constitute the ratio segment upper digits of management information display LED 74. FIG.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 constitute identification segment lower digits of management information display LED 74. FIG.

FIG. 61A is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from the output port 3 in the second embodiment. FIG. 2B is a diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from the output port 6 in the second embodiment. Furthermore, FIG. 2(C) is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the second embodiment.
In this example, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051 (H)" in FIG. 54) is provided in the use area of the RWM 53, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (in FIG. 56) is provided outside the use area of the RWM 53. The address "F297(H)") is provided.

The LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter for outputting a digit 1 signal to a digit 5 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 5 interrupts per cycle.
The LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter for outputting a digit 6 signal to a digit 9 signal for each interrupt, and is a counter with 4 interrupts per cycle.
Thus, in the second embodiment, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided independently.
Also, since one cycle of the LED display counters of the two is different, the lighting timing of digits 1 to 5 and the lighting timing of digits 6 to 9 are different.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating a digit whose lighting is permitted, and is stored at address "F052(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 (see FIG. 54).
As shown in FIG. 61(C), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data corresponding to the digit 1 signal at the D0 bit, the digit 2 signal at the D1 bit, . . . , the digit 5 signal at the D4 bit. be. Each bit of the LED display request flag matches the bit of the output port 3 shown in FIG.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 61(C), digits 1 to 4 can be illuminated (digit 5 is off) during normal operation, and digit 5 can be illuminated (digits 1 to 4 are off during setting change and setting confirmation). lights off). In addition. "Normal" refers to game standby and game play.

Then, in the interrupt process, the value of the LED display counter 1 in the used area and the value of the LED display request flag are ANDed, and the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" is the digit to be lit in this interrupt process. Become.
For example, if the value of the LED display counter 1 of the used area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal)", the AND operation of the two results in "00001000 (B)". (B)", and only the digit 4 signal becomes "1".
Also, during setting change and setting confirmation, for example, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (the LED display counter 1 of the used area is "00010000 (B)"), the segment signal is output from the output port 4, The set value display LED 73 (digit 5) can be lit.

Next, recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors will be described.
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered without turning the power on/off. For recoverable errors, for example,
“HP” error: Medal clogging (retention) error in hopper 35 “HE” error: Medal empty error in hopper 35 “H0” error: Discharge sensor 37 error in hopper 35 “CE” error: Medal retention error in medal selector "CP" error: Illegal medal passing error in the medal selector "CH" error: Error in the path sensor 46 located in the medal selector "C0" error: Error in the insertion sensor 44 located in the medal selector C1" error: medal insertion error "FE" error: sub-tank full "dE" error: front door 12 open
Note that recoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

In step S457 of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 68, which will be described later, the read process of the input port 51 is executed to read the input signals of various switches (start switch 41, etc.) and various sensors (insertion sensor 44, etc.). After that, based on the read input signal, various data (level data, rising data, falling data) are generated and stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. After that, in step S463 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR), an input error check process is executed, and when any recoverable error is detected by referring to the above various data, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is detected. is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address.

In addition, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67), the error detection flag is checked before detecting the operation of the start switch 41 and after all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is "1", it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the progress of the game is stopped, and a recoverable error state is established.
If a recoverable error occurs during the period from when the start switch 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted until all the reels 31 are stopped, all the reels 31 are stopped. The progress of the game may be continued until all the reels 31 are stopped and before executing the medal payout process, and the progress of the game may be stopped and a recoverable error state may be established.
Furthermore, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, error information of the recoverable error that has occurred is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . This error information display (error display) is performed in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG.

Then, when a restorable error occurs, the manager (hall clerk) removes the cause of the restorable error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated, the restorable error state is canceled and the progress of the game is resumed. .
Thus, when a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error is removed and the reset switch 153 is operated without turning on/off the power or operating the setting key switch 152. The recoverable error state can be canceled and the game can be returned to a state in which progress can be made.

On the other hand, an "unrecoverable error" cannot be recovered unless the power is turned off and an operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed. Fatal error. As an unrecoverable error, for example,
"E1" error: when recovery from power failure is not normal (when power failure recovery is abnormal) (when "Yes" in step S2712 in FIG. 62 described later)
"E5" error: When the stop symbol is not normal when the reel 31 is stopped (when a display error occurs)
"E6" error: when the set value is out of the normal range (when a set value error occurs) (when "No" in step S458 of FIG. 68)
"E7" error: when a random number error occurs (when "Yes" in step S460 of FIG. 68)
etc.
Unrecoverable errors are not limited to those described above.

If any unrecoverable error occurs, error information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . For example, when an "E1" error occurs, display an "E" on digit three and a "1" on digit four. The same is displayed for other unrecoverable errors.
Also, it is determined that the recovery from power failure is not normal (power failure recovery error), and the "E1" error is determined by the processing of step S2715 in the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. (processing by the first program)).
Furthermore, when the reel 31 is stopped, it is determined that the stop symbol is not normal (a display error has occurred), and it is determined as an "E5" error because of the processing in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Fig. 67) processing by the program (first program).

On the other hand, it is determined that the set value is out of the normal range (a set value error has occurred) and an "E6" error is determined by the processing of step S458 (out of use area) in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. (second program)).
Similarly, it is determined that the random number value is not normal (a random number error has occurred) and an "E7" error is determined by the processing of step S460 in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. second program)).
When the program in the used area (first program) determines that there is an unrecoverable error, unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 64, which will be described later, is executed.
On the other hand, when it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in the program outside the usage area (second program), unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 72, which will be described later, is executed.

Then, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off and the power switch 11 is turned off), and then the power supply is restarted under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned on ( The power is turned on, and the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, "Yes" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62, and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, when an unrecoverable error occurs, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 69, which will be described later, is not executed, so step S2712 in FIG.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ), and the entire range outside the use area (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)” are initialized. After that, the process advances to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG. 65. If the set value is set again here, the unrecoverable error state is cancelled, and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) of step S248.
In this way, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power is turned off once, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and then the power is turned on to cancel the unrecoverable error state and proceed with the game. can be restored to a state in which

When a recoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 71. However, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. Display control (I_LED_OUT) is also not executed. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the error is displayed by unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 64 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG.
Furthermore, when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the RWM 53 use area and data outside the use area are maintained without being initialized. Data in the entire range outside are initialized.
Data such as an error detection flag stored at a predetermined address in the RWM 53 may be initialized when recovering from a recoverable error state.

FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the second embodiment.
When the power is turned on (the power switch 11 is turned on, or the power supply is restarted), the program start processing in FIG. 62 is executed.
In FIG. 62, when the program is started in step S2701, in the next step S2702, the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. .

Next, proceeding to step S2703, the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing of the RWM 53. FIG.
Specifically, in step S2703, data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area are Add data.
That is, the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area are added.
When the result is "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal, and when the result is not "0", the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is abnormal. is).

In step S2703, it is determined whether or not the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) of the address "F2A1 (H)" of the RWM 53 is "55 (H)". , it is determined that the power-off processing flag is normal, and when it is not "55 (H)", it is determined that the power-off processing flag is not normal (abnormal).
Here, in this embodiment, during power-off processing, a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set to the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 (step S2784 of RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in FIG. 70). . Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether or not the power-off processing completed flag set at the time of power-off processing is a normal value ("55 (H)").

In step S2703, the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 is normal (the result of adding the data in the used area and the data outside the used area of the RWM 35 is "0"), and the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is normal. When it is the value ("55 (H)"), "55 (H)" is stored at the address "F2A2 (H)" of the RWM 53 as the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).
On the other hand, in step S2703, when at least one of the checksum calculation result of the RWM 53 and the power-off processing completion flag is not normal (abnormal), the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is set to "00 (H)". )” in the RWM 53 at the address “F2A2(H)”. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2704.

Proceeding to step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) saved in step S2702. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2705.

Here, the program for program start processing is stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the ROM 54 . That is, the program for program start processing is the first program.
On the other hand, the program for the checksum calculation processing of the RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in a control area (second control area, second program area) outside the use area of the ROM 54 . That is, the program for the checksum calculation process in step S2703 is the second program.

Therefore, in FIG. 62, in the program start processing which is the processing by the program in the usage area (first program), if the process proceeds to step S2703, the checksum calculation of RWM53 which is the processing by the program outside the usage area (second program) is performed. When the process is executed and the checksum calculation process is completed, the process returns to the program start process, which is the process by the program (first program) of the used area.
Also, when the processing by the program in the usage area (first program) shifts to the processing by the program outside the usage area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is used by the RWM 53. After saving to the stack area of the area, the AF register is restored when the processing by the program outside the usage area (second program) is terminated and the processing by the program in the usage area (first program) is returned to.

Proceeding to step S2705, the main control board 50 acquires the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from the address "F2A2(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2706.

Proceeding to step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the door switch signal is on. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is turned on and the door switch signal is turned on. When it is determined that the door switch signal is ON (the front door 12 is open), the process proceeds to the next step S2707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed), the process proceeds to step S2715.

At step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is on. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the setting key switch signal is turned on. When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2708.

Proceeding to step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality. Specifically, when the value of the A register (power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) acquired in step S2705) is "55 (H)", it is determined that there is no power-off recovery abnormality, and the process proceeds to the next step S2709. . On the other hand, when the value of the A register is "00 (H)", it is determined that there is a power failure recovery abnormality, and the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. The specific contents of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets reset determination data. Specifically, "7" is stored in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2710.
Proceeding to step S2710, the main control board 50 determines whether the reset switch signal is on. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, the reset switch 153, and the RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. Then, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the reset switch signal is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S2713. On the other hand, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the reset switch signal is turned off, and the process proceeds to power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. The specific contents of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for abnormal recovery from power failure. In this embodiment, when the power failure recovery is abnormal (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00 (H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is included. The use area and the entire range outside the use area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)") are set as the initialization range. Note that the initialization range is specified by the start address and the number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is similar to step S2708. When it is determined that there is no power failure recovery abnormality, data "7" for determining the setting change state is stored in the D register, the process proceeds to the next step S2713, and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery failure. If not, the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

Proceeding to step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal recovery from power failure. In this embodiment, when the power failure recovery is normal (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55 (H)"), the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 and the use The addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the area are maintained without being initialized (cleared). Therefore, in step S2713, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the RWM 53 used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are initialized. set as As described above, the initialization range is specified by the initial address and the number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2714.

At step S2714, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting can be changed. In the present embodiment, during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 67) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 67) including the rotation of the reel 31, the setting cannot be changed. , the setting change disabled flag is turned on. Then, in step S2714, it is determined whether or not the setting change is permitted by determining whether or not the setting change prohibition flag is ON. If it is determined that the setting cannot be changed (the setting cannot be changed), the process proceeds to the next step S2715, and if it is determined that the setting can be changed, the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.
It should be noted that the setting change may be allowed at all times without setting the setting change prohibition period and therefore without setting the setting change prohibition flag.

Proceeding to step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a power failure recovery abnormality. Specifically, it is similar to step S2708. When it is determined that there is a power failure recovery error, the process proceeds to step S2801 for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP). . The specific contents of the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) and the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721 in FIG.
First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during power-off processing (step S2774 of power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 69). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved during the power-off process is restored.

Proceeding to the next step S 2723 , the main control board 50 executes read processing of the input port 51 . As a result, each data of the input port 51 is updated to the latest data.
In the next step S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off processing completed flag. Then, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) of step S248, and the process according to this flowchart ends.
In this embodiment, the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 68 is started at the timing before proceeding to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) of step S248 after executing the process of step S2724.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
A program for unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is stored in the ROM 54, and a program for unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is stored outside the ROM 54. That is, the program for unrecoverable error handling (C_ERROR_STOP) is the first program, and the program for unrecoverable error handling 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is the second program.

Interrupt processing is prohibited in unrecoverable error processing.
An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot normally occur, and processing based on abnormal data (update of data of RWM 53 based on input signal from input port 51, transmission of control command to sub-control board 80) , control based on the signal output from the output port based on the data of the RWM 53, etc.), interrupt processing is prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing.

Here, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the first program. When the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is started, first, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed in step S1490 to disable interrupts. prohibited.
On the other hand, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the second program. 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is not provided with processing to disable interrupts.

In FIG. 64, proceeding to step S1491, the main control board 50 sets the error display data for the lower digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data ("00001000(B)") for lighting digit 4 (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") in the H register.
Next, proceeding to step S1492, the main control board 50 sets the error display data for the upper digits of the unrecoverable error. This process is a process of storing data for lighting digit 3 (data in which only the digit 3 signal is set to "1") ("00000100(B)") in the D register.

Further, in this step S1492, the main control board 50 stores the segment data ("01111001B") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of the unrecoverable error in the E register.
Before proceeding to unrecoverable error processing, segment data for displaying the lower digits of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, when the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the lower digit (digit 4) is "1", so segment data ("00000110B") for displaying "1" is stored in the L register. is stored.
In the following example, it is assumed that the unrecoverable error 1 this time is an "E1" error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values are, at this point,
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: segment data (“01111001 (B)”) for displaying “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
L register value: segment data (“00000110 (B)”) for displaying “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
becomes.

In the next step S1493, the main control board 50 sets the address of the output port to be cleared and the number of output ports. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared by the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the address and the number of output ports (8 pieces).
In the next step S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the outputs of the output ports 0-7. Specifically, output ports 0 to 7 are turned off (“00000000 (B)”) one by one.

In the next step S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1". For example, when the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)", the address of output port 1 "00F2(H)" is set as the next address.
Next, proceeding to step S1496, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the output ports have been turned off, that is, whether or not the outputs up to the output port 7 have been turned off. When it is determined that the processing has not ended, the process returns to step S1494, and when it is determined that the processing has ended, the process proceeds to step S1497. In this way, the processing of steps S1494 to S1496 is repeated until the outputs of all output ports are turned off, and when it is determined that the outputs of all output ports have been turned off, the process advances to step S1497.

By turning off all the output ports in this way, all active signals output before execution of this process are turned off. As a result, all the LEDs including the digits 1 to 9 (the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, the set value display LED 73, and the management information display LED 74) are extinguished, thereby preventing burn-in of the LEDs.

If an unrecoverable error occurs while the excitation signal for the motor 32 is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the excitation signal for the motor 32 will continue to be output until the unrecoverable error is cancelled. However, by turning off all the output ports, the excitation signal of the motor 32 is turned off, so that the seizure of the motor 32 can be prevented.
Furthermore, if an unrecoverable error occurs while the blocker signal is being output, the blocker 45 will remain on (medals will remain in the hopper) even though the medal detection process will not be executed unless the output port is turned off. 35) will continue, so the medals will be swallowed up. Swallowing can be prevented.

In the next step S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display errors in the upper digits. The output port 3 outputs the data stored in the D register, and the output port 4 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, proceeding to step S1498, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing flickering of the LED. Here, how long to wait depends on the performance of the LED, but for example, it may be set to about "0.1 ms". Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by, for example, the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed. and advances to the next step S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off (“0”) the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4. FIG. This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, proceeding to step S1500, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing LED flickering. This process is for ensuring that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4 are turned off (“0”).

Next, proceeding to step S1501, the main control board 50 switches between the upper digits and the lower digits.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged. This will
<Before replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
E register value: segment data (“01111001 (B)”) for displaying “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
L register value: segment data (“00000110 (B)”) for displaying “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
<After replacement>
D register value: Data for lighting the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)")
E register value: segment data (“00000110 (B)”) for displaying “1” in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error
H register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)")
L register value: Segment data (“01111001 (B)”) for displaying “E” in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error
becomes.

Then, proceeding to step S1502, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to display errors in the lower digits. As in step S1497, output port 3 outputs the D register value, and output port 4 outputs the E register value. As a result, "00001000 (B)" (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1") is output from the output port 3 to light up the digit 4, and from the output port 4, a segment for displaying "1" is output. Data "00000110(B)" is output.

Next, proceeding to step S1503, the main control board 50 executes standby processing for flicker prevention. This process is the same as step S1498.
Next, proceeding to step S1504, the main control board 50 turns off (“0”) the outputs of the output ports 3 and 4 as in step S1499.
In the next step S1505, the main control board 50 executes standby processing for flicker prevention. This process is similar to step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

As a result of the above processing, for example, when an "E1" error occurs, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at predetermined time intervals.
Although the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by the interrupt processing (I_INTR), as described above, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed (prohibited) in the event of an unrecoverable error. As shown, non-recoverable errors are indicated by arithmetic processing using registers and hardware configuration.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 in FIG.
The main control board 50 first initializes the designated address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, sets (designates) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53 in the next step S2733, and proceeds to the next step S2734. When proceeding, it is determined whether or not initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53 . When it is determined that the initialization has not been completed, the process returns to step S2732, and when it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2735. As a result, the processing of steps S2732 to S2734 is repeated until the initialization of all the initialization ranges of the RWM 53 is completed.

As described above, in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62, the initialization range (starting address and number of bytes of the initialization range) of the RWM 53 is set.
In steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), the initialization range of the used area is initialized out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713.
The processing of steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) is executed by the program of the used area (first program). Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the used area initialization range of the initialization range of the RWM 53 .

Then, when it is determined that the initialization has been completed in step S2734, the process proceeds to the next step S2735, and the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area. Let
Proceeding to the next step S2736, the main control board 50 initializes the initialization range outside the use area out of the initialization range of the RWM 53 set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) of FIG. to run.

As described above, in steps S2732 to S2734, initialization of the used area within the initialization range of RWM 53 is executed, but in step S2736, initialization of the area outside the used area within the initialization range of RWM 53 is executed. .
Note that the process of step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the use area. Therefore, in step S2736 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET), initialization is executed only for the initialization range outside the use area of the initialization range of the RWM 53 .
When the initialization of the initialization range outside the use area is completed in step S2736, the process proceeds to the next step S2737, and the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register) in step S2735). ) is restored. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time to reset. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the result in step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62 is "Yes". In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, when "Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 62, "7" in the D register is maintained, and when "No" in step S2710 of FIG. 62, the D register is cleared (stored "0"). . Then, in step S2738 of FIG. 65, it is determined whether or not the D register is "7", and when the D register is "7", it is reset ("Yes" in step S2710 of FIG. 62). and advances to step S2739. On the other hand, when the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not reset time ("No" in step S2710 in FIG. 62), skipping step S2739 and proceeding to step S2740.

Proceeding to step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display at reset. Specifically, "70 (H)" is stored in the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011 (H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "70" can be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2739, and the manager (hall clerk) is informed that it is time to reset. be able to.

Proceeding to the next step S2740, the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether to reset or change settings. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2740. can be determined by

Note that in this embodiment, the interrupt process (I_INTR) of FIG. 68 is started at the timing after executing the process of step S2740 and before proceeding to the process of step S2741. In other words, the process of initializing the initialization range of the RWM 53 (the process of steps S2732 to S2734 and S2736 in FIG. 65) is finished before the interrupt process (I_INTR) starts. By configuring in this manner, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prevented from being executed while the RWM 53 is being initialized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the contents of the RWM 53 from being changed (rewritten or overwritten) by interrupt processing (I_INTR) while the RWM 53 is being initialized.

Proceeding to the next step S2741, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is reset time. Specifically, it is similar to step S2738. When it is determined that it is not reset time, the process proceeds to step S2742, and when it is determined that it is reset time, step S2742 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2743.
When proceeding to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL). The specific contents of this processing will be described later. When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) ends, the process proceeds to the next step S2743.

At step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the waiting time has elapsed. This waiting time is for waiting for transmission of the setting command. When it is determined that the waiting time has passed, the process proceeds to the next step S2744, where the main control board 50 sets the initialization waiting time, and in the next step S2745, waits for 2 bytes (wait process). . The processing of steps S2744 and S2745 is for waiting until the initialization of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 is completed.

When the 2-byte time waiting process is completed, the main control board 50 advances to the next step S2746 to set the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2746. The value can be determined on the sub-control board 80 side.

Proceeding to the next step S2747, the main control board 50 clears (stores "0") the acquisition number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. FIG. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2747.
When the acquisition number data is cleared in step S2747, the process advances to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) in step S248, and the process according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in FIG.
When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is started, first, in step S2751, the main control board 50 acquires the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53, Store in the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2752, the main control board 50 generates set value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, first, the A register value is stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2753.
As described above, in this embodiment, setting values "1" to "6" are provided, and setting value data is managed as "0" to "5". When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as set value data. Therefore, "N" obtained by adding "1" to the set value data "N-1" is used as the set value display data.

Proceeding to step S2753, the main control board 50 saves the generated set value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of the RWM 53 at the address "F001(H)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2754.
At step S2754, the main control board 50 executes an interrupt waiting process. This process is a process of waiting until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) elapses. This is because by waiting for the interrupt processing (I_INTR) to be executed once, it waits for the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 to turn off (“0”).

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned on (“1”). After that, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed even once, the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned off (“0”).
However, after the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is turned on (“1”), the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is looped multiple times before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed. Otherwise, the process of adding "1" to the set value data will be repeatedly executed.
Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the processes of steps S2752 to S2758 are looped multiple times, and the process of adding "1" to the set value data is repeatedly executed. This prevents the product from being lost.
Then, after waiting until one interruption time elapses in step S2754, the process proceeds to the next step S2755.

When the level data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is "0" at the time of the previous interrupt processing, and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the current interrupt processing, , the rising data of the signal of the reset switch 153 becomes "1".
Further, when the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising data of the signal becomes "0".

Similarly, when the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" at the time of the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" at the time of the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The rising edge data of the signal of becomes "0".
Also, when the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1" at the time of the previous interrupt processing and the level data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0" at the time of the current interrupt processing, the reset switch 153 The falling edge data of the signal becomes "1".
Other switches such as the start switch 41 , the stop switch 42 , the setting key switch 152 are similar to the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 .

In step S2755, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time to start checking the settings. This process is a process of determining whether it is the time to confirm the settings or the time to change the settings. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets before the start of the game is "0", "1" is stored in the D register. Then, in step S2755, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether or not the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to confirm the setting, and the process proceeds to step S2760. ), it is determined that it is not the time to check the settings (it is the time to change the settings), and the process advances to step S2756. After determining whether the A register value is "1", the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, since the A register value is stored in the C register in step S2752, the set value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes set value data.
When the power is restored (when the power is turned on and the program start process (M_PRG_START) is started), the registers A to L are set to the initial values ("0").

Proceeding to step S2756, the main control board 50 refers to the rise data of the signal of the start switch 41 stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53. FIG. When the rising data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2759. On the other hand, when the rise data of the signal of the start switch 41 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process proceeds to step S2757.

At step S2757, the main control board 50 refers to the rising data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53. FIG. When the rise data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2758. On the other hand, when the rise data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0", that is, when it is determined that the reset switch 153 is not operated, the process returns to step S2752.

Proceeding to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the set value data. Specifically, "1" is added to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. If "Yes" in step S2757, that is, if it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, "1" is added to the set value data. Note that when the A register value becomes "6" due to the addition, the A register value is rewritten to "0". Then, the process returns to step S2752.

Also, when proceeding to step S2759, the main control board 50 saves the set value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address “F000(H)” of the RWM 53 . As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is set value data. Then, the A register value remains the set value data even when the determination in step S2756 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S2759. Then, in step S2759, the A register value is stored in the RWM 53 at the address "F000(H)". Thereby, the set value data can be saved in the RWM 53 .

Proceeding to the next step S2760, the main control board 50 refers to the fall data of the signal of the setting key switch 152 stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53. FIG. Then, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the falling data of the setting key switch 152 signal becomes "1", that is, until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. becomes "1", that is, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears (sets to "0") the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of the address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Also, when the setting is changed, upon completion of the processing according to this flowchart, the processing advances to step S2743 in FIG.

Here, the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress) will be described.
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on (on), the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0", the setting key switch 152 is turned on, "1" is stored in the D register and the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value does not change), but the current setting value can be confirmed. Also, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is ended, and the medal can be betted state.

More specifically, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 determines whether or not the setting key switch 152 is on before detecting the operation of the start switch 41 . When the door switch 17 is ON (the front door 12 is open) and the number of bets is "0", if it is determined that the setting key switch 152 is ON, the setting change confirmation shown in FIG. Proceed to processing (M_RANK_CTL). Also, steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 66 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on in a state where the bet number is "0" before the start of the game, "1" is set to be stored in the D register. ing. Then, when proceeding to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 66, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is time to start setting confirmation. Specifically, first, the D register value is stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether or not the A register value is "1". When the A register value is "1", it is determined that it is time to start confirming the settings ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2760.

After that, the process of step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. During this time, the current set value continues to be displayed on the set value display LED 73 . When it is determined in step S2760 that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, and the main control board 50 clears (" 0”). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Further, when the processing according to this flowchart is completed at the time of setting confirmation, the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) determines whether or not the setting key switch 152 is turned on (whether to shift to the setting confirmation state). Proceed to next processing.

Thus, in the second embodiment, the same module can execute the setting change process and the setting confirmation process. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created in the same module. Based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.
It should be noted that it is also possible to determine whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state based on information stored in another register instead of the D register. may be used to determine whether the setting change state or the setting confirmation state should be set.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the second embodiment. The main processing is processing for one game. While the game is in progress, the main process is repeated every game.
First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. A stack pointer is an area of the RWM 53 that stores data at the time of power failure (for example, register values, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.). is the process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53 .

In the next step S272, game start set processing is performed. This process is a process of generating, updating, saving, etc. of the operating state flag.
In the next step S273, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are currently bet, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data.
In the next step S274, it is determined whether or not there are bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

When it is determined in step S274 that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276, and when it is determined that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and then proceeds to step S276. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S275, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch is on.
In step S276, management processing of inserted medals is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medals have been cleaned, whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, and the like.

In the next step S277, update processing of soft random numbers is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding "1" each time) a processing random number for processing (computation processing) the random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the combination lottery means 61 . A soft random number is a 16-bit random number with a range from '0' to '65535(D)'. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of an interrupt) to the value before updating may be executed.

At the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number for the game, it is determined "No" in step S278.

In step S279, a process for accepting a start switch is executed. This process is a process of setting a setting change prohibition flag, setting an output request at the start of rotation of the reel 31, and setting the number of times of output for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like. .
In the next step S280, the acquisition number data is cleared. As a result, the acquisition number display LED 78 is caused to display "00" (or be extinguished).

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, and the main control board 50 executes a process of updating the number of AT games. This process is a process of subtracting the number of AT games when a predetermined condition is met during AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT.
Further, during AT, whether or not to add the number of AT games is performed based on the combination lottery result of the combination lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare combination is won, the number of times AT is added to the game may be determined. Therefore, when the AT game number is added and the addition amount is added to the AT game number counter, it is executed after the process of step S282 (illustration is omitted in FIG. 67).
It should be noted that after the start switch reception (step S279), the AT game number counter is updated in step S281, but not limited to this, after the combination lottery process in step S282, after all the reels 31 stop (step S290 onwards) AT game number counter update may be performed.
In addition, in the specifications of the difference number management type AT, when the AT difference number counter is provided, after all the reels 31 are stopped and after the medal payout process due to winning is completed (after step S300), the AT difference number counter update.

In step S282, the combination lottery means 61 executes the lottery for the combination at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. The random number at the time of lottery is obtained in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process of determining whether or not the obtained random number value corresponds to any winning combination is performed using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section shift lottery process. In the present embodiment, an AT lottery is executed together with the advantageous section transition lottery.
Next, the process proceeds to step S284 to set the push order instruction number. This process generates a push order instruction number and displays the push order instruction information when the instruction function is activated in the game (the push order instruction number is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78) during AT. processing.

In the next step S285, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This process executes a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has passed, and proceeds to the next step S286 if the minimum game time has passed.
Here, the RWM 53 is provided with an area for storing the timer value of the minimum game time, and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms×1834≈4099 ms)". In step S279, if it is determined that the minimum game time is "0", the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum game time (timer value). Then, the minimum game time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. When proceeding to step S285 of the next game, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time is "0", and when it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S286.

At step S286, the reel control means 65 drives and controls the motor 32 to start the reel 31 to rotate. Then, when the reel 31 reaches the constant speed state, acceptance of operation of the stop switch 42 is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S287.
In step S287, it is checked whether the reel 31 has been stopped. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined based on the lottery result of the combination and the position of the reel 31. is determined, and the reel 31 is controlled to be stopped at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S287. .

In step S290, the acquisition number data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, by activating the instruction function during AT, there is a case where the push order instruction information (for example, "=1") is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 . In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S290.
It should be noted that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be extinguished. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for extinguishing may be provided as segment data and the data may be output.

In step S291, the display determination of the pattern is performed. Here, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination has stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S292, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. When it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304, and when it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. move on.
Here, since the reel 31 is stopped based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 normally does not stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, when a pattern (kicking pattern) which should not be displayed on the effective line is displayed as a result of the display determination of the pattern, it is determined to be abnormal, and unrecoverable error processing is executed.

When it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S293, the payout number is updated. This process is a process of storing the number of payouts in the game as the number of payout data and the number of payout data buffer.
In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the process advances to step S295 to perform an interrupt waiting process. In the next step S296, interrupt processing is prohibited. The processing of steps S295 and S296 prohibits the interrupt immediately after the interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. Next, the flow advances to step S298 to execute ratio setting processing. This "ratio setting process" is a process of updating various counter values, calculating ratios, etc., in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, when the process proceeds to step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and the interrupt is permitted (restarted) in the next step S300. In this way, when the ratio setting process is executed, the AF register is saved and the interrupt process is prohibited.

The reason why interrupt processing is prohibited during the execution of ratio set processing is that the ratio set processing uses a program stored outside the usage area, and when the program outside the usage area is being executed in the main processing. This is because if an interrupt process is entered in , the program in the used area and the program outside the used area will coexist, and the processing will become complicated.

Next, the process proceeds to step S301 to perform a game end check process. This process is a process of clearing a condition device (winning combination) flag and the like. Then, in step S302, an output request is set at the end of the game, and a control command is set 1 in the next step S303. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended.
When the process of step S303 is completed, the process returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the second embodiment.
In the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 68, step S452 is followed by step S2770, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Then, when it is determined that a power shutdown has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2771, and the main control board 50 executes power shutdown processing (I_POWER_DOWN). On the other hand, when it is determined that power failure has not occurred, step S2771 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S454.

Thus, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR). For this reason, when interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed due to interrupts being disabled, or when interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed because a program (second program) is being executed outside the use area, the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN ) is also not executed. The specific contents of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is completed, the process proceeds to step S454.

Also, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 68, step S455 is followed by step S2821, and the main control board 50 executes LED display control (I_LED_OUT). Thus, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in interrupt processing (I_INTR). The specific contents of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later.
When the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is finished, the process proceeds to step S2765, and the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's use area. Then, the process proceeds to step S2221, and the main control board 50 executes ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

Here, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is processing for controlling the lighting of the credit number display LED 76, the acquired number display LED 78, and the set value display LED 73 (digits 1 to 5). ).
On the other hand, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process for controlling lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), and is executed by a program (second program) outside the use area. The specific contents of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. After completion of the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY), the process proceeds to step S458.

At step S458, the main control board 50 determines whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, the set value data (_NB_RANK) stored at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. Next, a comparison operation is performed between the A register value and "5" ("5" is subtracted from the A register value), and it is determined whether or not the carry flag="1". When the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"), and when the carry flag = "1" determines that the set value data is not within the normal range. If it is determined that it is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S459, and if it is determined that it is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) of step S2811.

Further, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 68, when "No" in step S458 or "Yes" in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2811, and the main control board 50 performs unrecoverable error process 2. Execute (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific contents of the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.
Furthermore, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 68, when "No" in step S460, the process proceeds to step S2766, and the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register ( flag register)). Then, the process proceeds to step S457.

Here, in the interrupt process (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 68, the processes of steps S2221, S458, S459, and S460 are executed by the program outside the usage area (second program).
Then, when the process by the program in the used area (first program) shifts to the process by the program outside the used area (second program), in step S2765 the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is set to When the data is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53, and the processing by the program outside the usage area (second program) is terminated and the processing by the program in the usage area (first program) is returned to, the AF register is cleared in step S2766. bring back.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 in FIG.
When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is started, first, in step S2772, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process is a process of saving various registers to the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53 .

Proceeding to the next step S2773, the main control board 50 clears all the output ports 52. FIG. As a result, the outputs of all the output ports 52 are turned off. For example, when the motor 32 is being driven (while the reel 31 is rotating) or the hopper motor 36 is being driven (while medals are being paid out), Stop driving it.
In the next step S2774, the main control board 50 saves the stack pointer at a predetermined address in the work area of the RWM 53's use area. The stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in FIG.

Proceeding to the next step S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF registers (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area of the RWM 53's use area. Then, proceeding to step S2776, the main control board 50 executes RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET). The specific contents of the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S2777, and the main control board 50 restores the AF register saved in step S2775. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2778.

The RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program (second program) outside the used area.
Then, when the process by the program in the used area (first program) shifts to the process by the program outside the used area (second program), in step S2775 the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is set to When saving to the stack area of the RWM 53 usage area, ending the processing by the program (second program) outside the usage area, and returning to the processing by the program (first program) in the usage area, the AF register is cleared in step S2777. bring back.

Proceeding to step S2778, the main control board 50 prohibits access to the RWM53. Then, proceeding to the next step S2779, the main control board 50 is brought into a reset wait state (loop processing state). Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 in FIG.
When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) in step S2776 is started, the main control board 50 first saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in the work area outside the use area of the RWM 53 in step S2781. In the next step 2782, a stack pointer ("F400(H)") outside the use area is set, and when proceeding to the next step S2783, a plurality of registers are saved in the stack area outside the use area of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2784.

Here, in step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in FIG. 56).
As described above, the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is processing by a program (second program) outside the usage area, so during the execution of the program (second program) outside the usage area, The stack pointer used in (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program (first program) in the used area.
Also, in step S2782, the stack pointer (address "F400(H)") outside the use area is stored in the stack pointer (SP register).
Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved in the stack area outside the use area.

Proceeding to step S2784, the main control board 50 sets a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) to the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. FIG. Here, when power-off processing is executed, "55 (H)" is stored as a power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).
When the power is restored, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared (set to "0") in step S2724 of the power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in FIG. Therefore, after executing the process of step S2724, the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "00(H)". If the power-off process is not executed, the power-off process completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, so the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "00(H)".
Proceeding to the next step S2785, the main control board 50 clears (sets to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) of the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2786.

Proceeding to step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the start address ("F000 (H)") of the used area of the RWM 53 in an addressing register (eg, B register), and proceeding to the next step S2787. , the number of bytes (number of checksum calculations) of the area used by the RWM 53 is set in the register for the number of calculations (for example, the C register), and the process proceeds to the next step S2788. , the initial data (“00000000 (B)”) is set.

Then, proceeding to the next step S2789, the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing of the used area of the RWM 53. FIG.
In this embodiment, the use area of the RWM 53 is set in the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)". The processing of steps S2789 and S2790 is repeated until it is determined that the calculation processing has ended. As a result, the checksum of the used area of the RWM 53 (addresses “F000(H)” to “F1FF(H)”) is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the addressing register (B register) value is subtracted from the checksum calculation register (D register) value. In the next step S2790, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether or not the result is "0". When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation processing of the used area of the RWM 53 has ended, and the process proceeds to step S2791. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the value of the addressing register (B register) is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2789.

Then, when the checksum calculation processing of the used area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process advances to step S2791, and the main control board 50 stores the start address ("F210 (H )”) is set, and in the next step S2792, the number of bytes (the number of checksum calculations) outside the use area of the RWM 53 is set in the register for the number of calculations (C register).

Then, proceeding to the next step S2793, the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the area outside the use area of the RWM 53. FIG.
In this embodiment, the area outside the use area of the RWM 53 is set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", and in the next step S2794, the checksum is calculated up to the address "F3FF(H)" of the RWM 53. The processing of steps S2793 and S2794 is repeated until it is determined that the processing has ended. As a result, the checksum outside the use area of the RWM 53 (addresses “F210(H)” to “F3FF(H)”) is calculated.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the checksum calculation result of the used area of the RWM 53 is stored in the checksum calculation register (D register) at the time when the process proceeds to step S2793. Then, in step S2793, the data indicated by the value of the addressing register (B register) is subtracted from the value of the checksum calculation register (D register). In the next step S2794, the value of the register (C register) for the number of calculations is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether or not the result is "0". When it is determined to be "0", it is determined that the checksum calculation processing outside the use area of the RWM 53 has ended, and the flow advances to step S2795. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", the value of the addressing register (B register) is updated ("1" is added), and the process returns to step S2793.

Thus, in this embodiment, the RWM checksum data (also called complement data, error detection data, or error detection information) is calculated by executing the processing of steps S2785 to S2794.
This RWM checksum data (complement data) is, as described above, the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the address "F210(H)" outside the use area. ∼ "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") is a value that becomes "0" when added to the addition value of the data.

Then, when the checksum calculation processing outside the use area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2795, and the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) in the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53. )do.
Proceeding to the next step S2796, the main control board 50 restores the register saved in step S2783, and restores the stack pointer saved in step S2781 in the next step S2797. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in FIG.
First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (FIG. 59) are turned off. Output port 3 is an output port corresponding to digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal, and output port 4 is an output port corresponding to segment 1A to segment 1P signal. By outputting "00000000 (B)" to these output ports 3 and 4, the output of digits 1 to 5 is temporarily disabled. As a result, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent different LEDs from appearing to light up at the same time (overlaid display) even for a moment (prevention of afterimage).

In the next step S2823, the used area LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (FIGS. 54 and 61A) is updated. Updating the LED display counter 1 is a process of shifting the bit "1" to the right by one digit. This updated value is stored in the RWM 53 at address "F051(H)" (FIG. 54). Then, the process proceeds to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether or not the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". Then, when it is determined to be "00000000(B)", the process proceeds to step S2825. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "00000000(B)", step S2825 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, the LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000 (B)" and stored in the address "F051 (H)" of the RWM 53 (FIG. 54). Then, the process proceeds to step S2826.
In step S2826, the values of the LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in FIG. 54) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in FIG. 54) stored in the RWM 53 are obtained. Here, the value of the LED display counter 1 is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.

The flow then advances to step S2827 to set the segment display confirmation of the digits to be displayed this time. In this process, an AND operation is performed on the A register value (the value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (the value of the LED display counter 1) to create the data of the LED to be lit this time.

for example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 00001111B
After AND operation: 00000000B
becomes.
Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

Next, proceeding to step S2828, it is determined whether or not the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the value of the LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag) is "0". Here, when it is "0", it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2844. On the other hand, if it is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is acquired. When an error occurs, error display data is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address. Then, in step S2829, the error display data is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the B register.
In the next step S2830, LED segment table 2 is set. In this embodiment, an LED segment table 1 storing data for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display and an LED segment table 2 storing data for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display are provided. These are stored in the used area of the ROM 54 . A description of the specific configurations of the LED segment tables 1 and 2 will be omitted. Then, in step S2830, the head address of LED segment table 2 is read and the value is stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S2831, the set value display data (address "F001 (H)" in FIG. 54) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2832, it is determined whether or not there is a set value display request. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D4 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1"("00010000(B)"). When the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a set value display request ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no set value display request ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2833.

In step S2833, credit number data (address "F010(H)" in FIG. 54) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2834, the upper digit offset is acquired. This process executes an operation of dividing the A register value (credit amount data acquired in step S2833) by "10 (decimal number)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder in the C register. It is a process to

In the next step S2835, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit amount. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". When the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2836.

Proceeding to step S2836, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit amount. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2) of the AND-operated value stored in the D register is "1". When the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2842. On the other hand, when the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2837.

In step S2837, acquisition number data (address "F011 (H)" in FIG. 54) is read from the RWM 53 and stored in the A register.
In the next step S2838, it is determined whether or not an error is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the B register value is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2840. On the other hand, when the B register value is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. When proceeding to step S2839, the HL register stores the head address of the LED segment table 2 for displaying numbers on the 7-segment display. display the corresponding alphabetic character. Therefore, in step S2839, the head address of the LED segment table 1 for displaying English characters on the 7-segment display is read, and the value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the head address of LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register instead of the head address of LED segment table 2 set in step S2830.

In the next step S2840, the offset for the upper digits is obtained. At the time when the process proceeds to step S2840, the A register stores the acquisition number data acquired in step S2837, and the B register stores the error display data acquired in step S2829. If an error does not occur, the acquired number data stored in the A register is divided by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register. do. On the other hand, when an error occurs, the error display data stored in the B register is divided by "10 (decimal number)", the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

In the next step S2841, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition number display LED78. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3) of the ANDed value stored in the D register is "1". When the D2 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the obtained number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, when the D2 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the obtained number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2842.

In step S2842, the offset for lower digits is obtained. This process is a process of storing the data stored in the C register in the A register. At the time the process proceeds to step S2842, the A register stores the quotient calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840, and the C register stores the remainder calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (remainder of division) is stored in the A register.

The flow then advances to step S2843 to acquire segment output data. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the head address of the LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830 or the head address of the LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) and the data stored in the A register ( The offset value corresponding to the display data) is added, and the data corresponding to the address after the addition is acquired from the LED segment table 1 or 2 of the ROM 54 and stored in the D register.

The flow then advances to step S2844 to determine whether or not there is a segment P display request.
Specifically, first, the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 (E register value) is “1” (lighting timing of digit 4), and the advantageous section display LED flag (address “F062 (H) of RWM 53 in FIG. )”) is “1”. When the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is "1", it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P ("Yes"), and step Proceed to S2845.
On the other hand, when the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the advantageous section display LED flag is not "1", it is determined that there is no segment P display request ("No"), and step S2845. and proceed to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of the LED display counter 1 is not "1", proceed to the following processing.
An AND operation is performed on the LED display counter 1 (E register value) and the status display LED lighting data (obtained from the address "F044 (H)" of the RWM 53 in FIG. 54), and it is determined whether or not the result of the AND operation is "0". . Then, when the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a request to display segment P ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845. On the other hand, when the AND operation result is "0", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), step S2845 is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S2846.

Proceeding to step S2845, segment P output data is set. Specifically, the segment output data (D register value) acquired in step S2843 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed, and the result of the OR operation is stored in the D register. As a result, the D7 bit (the bit corresponding to segment P) of the segment output data becomes "1".

Then, proceeding to the next step S2846, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment signal is output from the output port 4. Specifically, the data (LED display counter 1) stored in the E register is output from the output port 3 as a digit signal, and the data (segment output data) stored in the D register is output as a segment signal to the output port. Output from 4. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).
As described above, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is processing by the second program. No interrupt prohibition processing is provided after the start of error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). Except for this point, the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 72 is the same as the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG.
In FIG. 72, the same step numbers are assigned to the same processes as in FIG.

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG.
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during interrupt processing (I_INTR). Also, during the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 67) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 67) (during the game), and in the recoverable error state, Since interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, so various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process is started, first, in step S2461, the main control board 50 sets the stack pointer (SP register) to the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3 (H)" in FIG. 56). memorize to
As described above, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is a process performed by a program outside the usage area (second program). 1 program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the used area (first program).

In the next step S2462, the main control board 50 sets a stack pointer outside the use area. This process is a process of storing "F400 (H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the main control board 50 saves the register. This process is a process of saving various registers to a stack area outside the used area.
Next, proceeding to step S2464, the main control board 50 executes flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH). This process is a process shown in FIG. 74, which will be described later, and is a process of updating the flashing request flag (address "F291(H)").

In the next step S2465, the main control board 50 updates the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME). This process is the process shown in FIG. 76, which will be described later, and includes a blinking switching flag (address "F293(H)"), a display switching time (address "F294"), and a blinking switching time (address "F296(H)"). This is the process of updating the
In the next step S2466, the main control board 50 performs ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT). This process is a process shown in FIG. 77, which will be described later, and is a process of actually displaying (lighting up or extinguishing) the ratio in the interrupt process.

Next, proceeding to step S2467, the main control board 50 restores the register. This process is a process of restoring various registers saved in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2461, ie, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, the processing causes the stap pointer to indicate the address of the used area. Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 67) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 67) (during the game), and return Since interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed even in the possible error state, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed.
For this reason, the ratio By display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY), it is possible to sequentially display information types and various ratios related to game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

In addition, in this embodiment, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed regardless of whether the door switch 17 is ON/OFF (opening/closing of the front door 12). That is, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed). It is possible.
Therefore, both when the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and when the door switch 17 is off (the front door 12 is closed), the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is executed. Thus, it is possible to sequentially display various ratios related to information types and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

On the other hand, an unrecoverable error occurs, an unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 64 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 72 is executed, and the game progresses). When it comes to a stopped state), the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited, so the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is not executed. Various ratios related to game results are no longer displayed.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, in an unrecoverable error state, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 64 described above or the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Outputs 0 to 7 are turned off (“00000000 (B)”).

As a result, in an unrecoverable error state, outputs from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are "00000000 (B)". Therefore, all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain extinguished until the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the interrupt process (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain unlit is a mode specific to the unrecoverable error state. You can let us know what happened.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of FIG.
When the flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process is started, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and initial values in step S2481. This process stores "6(H)" in the B register and "0" in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions "6" is a value for determining whether or not to blink the 6 ratio segments.

In the next step S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The flashing/non-applicable item determination value table defines predetermined values for the ratios of the six items. For example, the instructed accessory ratio "70" means that the display is blinked when the instructed accessory ratio is "70" or more.
As shown in FIG. 75, the top address of the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table is "2500 (H)". Therefore, "2500 (H)" is stored in the DE register.

"Non-applicable item" means that the function (performance) corresponding to the item is not provided. For example, in a gaming machine that does not have "RB (first class special role)", the continuous role ratio is not displayed, so when the continuous role ratio is displayed, the ratio segment is lit and displayed with "--".
In the second embodiment, the ratios of all six items are displayed. However, when there is a non-applicable item, "DE ( H)” is stored.

For example, in a gaming machine not equipped with "RB (first class special accessory)", the addresses "2502 (H)" and "2504 (H)" are replaced with "60 (H)" in FIG. , "DE(H)".
In this way, even if the game machine is not equipped with "RB (first class special accessory)", it can be managed simply by correcting a part of the data of the flashing/non-applicable item judgment value table. A control process is provided to enable lighting control of information. Therefore, the control program can be easily used for other products.
Note that the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)".

In the next step S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process is a process of storing the address ("F28D(H)" in FIG. 56) where the role product etc. state ratio data is stored in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S2484, the main control board 50 acquires a blinking or non-corresponding item determination value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data at the address indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the A register value.

In the next step S2485, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is a non-applicable item value. In this processing, "DD(H)" is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is "0" (zero flag="1"), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
That is, when the item is a non-applicable item, as described above, "DE(H)" is stored in the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table, so "1" is subtracted from "DE(H)". After that, if "DD(H)" is further subtracted, it becomes "0", and the zero flag="1".

When a predetermined value other than "DE(H)" is stored as the value corresponding to the non-applicable item, for example, "predetermined value -1 - (predetermined value -1)" is calculated, and the result of the calculation is "0". When (zero flag=“1”), it is judged to be a non-corresponding item value.
In addition, the "predetermined value" may be a value exceeding "70 (H)" in the case of the instructed accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (total), and the accessory ratio (6000 times), and the continuous accessory ratio ( Cumulative total) and continuous role product ratio (6000 times) may be a value exceeding "60 (H)", and in the case of role product condition ratio, a value exceeding "50 (H)" may be used.
If it is determined that the item value is not a non-applicable item value, the process proceeds to the next step S2486.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires ratio data. This process is a process of storing the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, the main control board 50 saves the ratio data or non-applicable item values. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. This process has the following meanings.

If there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 in which the ratio data is stored before the save process.
For example, if "RB (first class special bonus)" is not provided, continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289 (H)") and continuous bonus ratio (cumulative) data (address "F28B(H)") stores "00(H)".

Although the details will be described later, when the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the address. At that time, if "00 (H)" is stored in the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) data, when displaying the continuous role product ratio (6000 times), the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74 is "00" is displayed. In order to prevent this, the value of the A register obtained in step S2485 ("DD(H)" in this embodiment) is stored as ratio data, so that "--" is displayed.
It should be noted that the program processing is incorporated so that this can also be used in common between gaming machines that have non-applicable items and gaming machines that do not have non-applicable items.

In the next step S2488, the main control board 50 performs blinking determination. This process is a process of subtracting the data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. As a result of the operation, when there is a carry-down, the carry flag is set to "1".
Although the details will be described later, when the carry flag is set to "1", it means that the item is lit without blinking when the item is displayed, and when the carry flag is set to "0", It means that when the item is displayed, it lights up in a blinking manner.

Next, proceeding to step S2489, the main control board 50 generates a flashing request flag. This process performs arithmetic processing to rotate-shift the carry flag and the C register value to the left.
Specifically, if the value of the carry flag is "CY" and the value of the C register is "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Calculation is performed as follows.

For example, when the C register value is the initial value "00000000 (B)" as shown in step S2481 and the carry flag = "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000 (B)"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
Calculation is performed as follows.
Therefore, the C register value is "00000001 (B)".
This C register value finally becomes the flashing request flag.
In other words, the process of step S2488 registers information for determining whether or not to blink the ratio segment of the item by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blinking/non-corresponding item determination value table. (storage area).

In the next step S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value in the first blink determination is "F28D(H)" (accessory item state ratio data) as described above. Here, when "1" is subtracted, the HL register value becomes "F28C(H)" (accessory ratio (accumulated) data), which is the second flashing determination target.

In the next step S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/non-corresponding item determination value table. This process is a process of adding "1" to the DE register value. For example, when "2500 (H)" was initially stored as the DE register value, it becomes "2501 (H)" by this processing.
Here, as shown in FIG. 75, the state ratio of the role, etc., the ratio of the role (cumulative), the ratio of the continuous role (cumulative), the ratio of the role (6000 times), the ratio of the continuous role (6000 times), Blinking/non-corresponding item determination values are stored in addresses "2500(H)" to "2505(H)" in order of character ratio.
As a result, a loop processing (step S2484 to S2492) allows the target address to be specified, thereby simplifying the processing.

Next, proceeding to step S2492, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the repetition has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) If the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the iteration has not ended.
Here, since the B register value is set to "6" in the first step S2481, the number of repetitions is "6". If it is determined that the repetition has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2493, and if it is determined that the repetition has not been completed, the process returns to step S2484.
As described above, six items of flashing determination are performed.

When the flashing determination of the 6 items is completed and the process proceeds to step S2493, the main control board 50 acquires the total number of games counter value. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of the lower 2 bytes of the total number-of-games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the HL register.
(2) Store the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter (address "F26D(H)") in the A register.
As described above, the total number-of-games counter consists of 3 bytes, "F26D(H)" is a storage area for storing the first digit, and the value is stored in the L register.
"F26E(H)" is a storage area for storing the second digit, and the value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is a storage area for storing the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "0". This process determines whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". If it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2495, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2496.
At step S2495, the main control board 50 determines whether or not 6000 games have passed. In this process, "6000 (D)" is subtracted from the HL register value (lower 2-byte data of the total number-of-games counter). As a result of the operation, when there is a carry-down, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 6000 games have not passed, and the process proceeds to step S2497.
On the other hand, when it is determined that 6000 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2496.

At step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the blink request flag data. This process is to set the D6 bit of the C register to "1". Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the flashing request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. Therefore, when 6000 games have passed, the process of setting the D6 bit to "1" is executed.

In the next step S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the upper byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more). Here, a process of subtracting "3" from the A register value is performed. If there is no carry-down in this subtraction, the carry flag ≠ "1". Then, when the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number-of-games counter exceeds "2" ("3" or more).

The reason for doing this is that the upper 1 byte is first compared with "3" in order to determine whether or not the number of games has reached 175,000. Here, "175000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, so it is inevitable that the A register value exceeds "2" (the A register value is "3" or more). In general, it can be seen that the value of the total number-of-games counter exceeds "175000 (D)".
At step S2497, when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter exceeds "2", and the process proceeds to step S2500. It is determined that the upper 1 byte of the number-of-games counter does not exceed "2", and the process proceeds to step S2498.

At step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the value of the upper byte of the total number of games counter is "2". In this process, "2" is subtracted from the A register value, and when it is determined that it is not "0", it is determined that the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is not "2". If it is determined that the value of the upper byte of the total number of games counter is not "2", the process proceeds to step S2501, and if it is determined that the value of the upper byte of the total number of games counter is "2", step S2499. proceed to

At step S2499, the main control board 50 determines whether or not 175000 games have been played. Specifically, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and as a result of the operation, when there is a carry flag, the carry flag is set to "1". When the carry flag is "1", it is determined that 175000 games have not passed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175,000 games have not passed, the process proceeds to step S2501.

At step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the blinking request flag data. This process sets the D7 bit of the C register to "1". The D7 bit of the C register corresponds to the D7 bit (175000 game blink flag) of the blink request flag at address "F291(H)" in FIG. Then, the process advances to step S2501.

At step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a flashing request flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "01111111 (B)" in the A register.
(2) An exclusive OR operation (XOR) is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

Before execution of the process of step S2501, "0" is stored in the blinking items (bits) of the data stored in the C register, as described above. For example, when 175000 games have been played, the D7 bit is "1" as described above. In other words, when 175000 games have not been played, it is "0".
Therefore, by inverting the bit of the C register value, a flashing request flag is generated so that the flashing item (bit) becomes "1".

In the next step S2502, the main control board 50 saves the flashing request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing request flag ("F291(H)" in FIG. 56) in the HL register.
(2) Store the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F291(H)" in FIG. 56).
As a result, the blinking item becomes "1" and the non-blinking item becomes "0". In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0", and the flashing request flags related to eight items including whether or not to flash are stored at the address "F291(H)" in FIG. remembered.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
When the ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) process is started, the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address ("F294(H)" in FIG. 56) storing the display switching time in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates between "0" and "2144 (D)" when the display switching time is expressed in decimal notation.

Therefore, if the processing is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time.
Also, when the flag is "0", the process is performed, and when "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
Since interrupt processing is executed every 2.235 ms, the value changes from "0" to "2144 (D)" and the carry flag becomes "1" every approximately 4792 ms.
As a result, the content of the ratio display is switched about every five seconds.

In the next step S2512, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is to determine whether or not the carry flag=“1” in the process of step S2511. When the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
When it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513, and when it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 saves the blink switching time. In this process, "134 (D) (86 (H))" is stored at the address (blink switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (that is, "F296 (H)").
That is, when it is determined that the display switching time has passed, the flashing switching time is saved. A time of "2.235×134=299.49 (ms)" is stored as the flashing switching time.

Next, proceeding to step S2514, the main control board 50 turns off the flashing switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing switching flag ("F293(H)" in FIG. 56) in the HL register.
(2) Store "0" at the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the flashing switching flag is "0", it indicates lighting, and when it is "1", it indicates lighting off.
That is, at the timing when the display switching time has elapsed, the flashing switching flag becomes "0" (lit).

Next, proceeding to step S2515, the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the HL register value.
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 ("F292(H)" in FIG. 56) corresponding to the ratio display number is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that circulates between "0" and "5" for the ratio display number. Therefore, if the processing is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" is stored as the ratio display number. Also, if the process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5", the carry flag is set to "1".

In the next step S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag=“1”, it is determined that the ratio display number is not “0”. In other words, if the process of step S2515 is executed when the ratio display number is "5", the carry flag ≠ "1" (= "0"), and at this time it is determined that the ratio display number is "0". do.

In step S2516, when it is determined that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process proceeds to step S2517, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
At step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process is a process of adding "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292(H)" in FIG. 56). By this processing, when "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number circulates from "1" to "6". Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2512, it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, and when proceeding to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the flashing switching time. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the flashing switching time address ("F296 (H)" in FIG. 56) in the HL register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the subtraction at that address.
This process executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates between "0" and "134 (D)" when the flashing switching time is expressed in decimal notation.
Therefore, if the processing is performed when the flashing switching time is "0", "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the flashing switching time.
Also, when the flag is "0", the relevant processing is performed, and when "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the blink switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, proceeding to step S2519, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the blink switching time has elapsed. This judgment is made by judging whether or not the carry flag is "1", and when the carry flag ≠ "1", it is judged that the flashing switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the flashing switching time has elapsed, the process advances to step S2520, and if it is determined that the flashing switching time has not elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

At step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the flashing switching flag. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the address of the flashing switching flag ("F293 (H)" in FIG. 56) in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the addition result at the address.
This process executes a cyclic addition process that circulates between "0" and "1" for the flashing switching flag. Therefore, if this process is performed when the flashing switching flag is "1", "0" is stored as the flashing switching flag.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
When the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) is started, the main control board 50 first acquires the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in FIG. 56) in step S1471. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and storing it in the D register.

In the next step S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for any of the digits 6-9. Specifically, the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111 (B)" are ANDed. When the result of the AND operation is "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process proceeds to step S1475.
In the second embodiment, the result of the AND operation between the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111(B)" never becomes "0", so the result of step S1472 never becomes "No".

In the next step S1475, the ratio display number (address "F292(H)" in FIG. 56) is obtained. This process acquires the ratio display number, stores it in the A register, and further stores the A register value in the E register.
Here, based on the ratio display number, the number of flashing bit inspections, which will be described later, is determined. For example:
Example 1)
Ratio display number is "1": Acquire the number of blinking bit inspections of the instructed accessory ratio.
Example 2)
Ratio display number is "2": Acquire the number of blinking bit inspections for the continuous role product ratio (6000 times).
Example 3)
If the ratio display number is "5": Acquire the number of flashing bit inspections for the role product ratio (total cumulative total).
Example 4)
Ratio display number is "6": Acquire the number of blinking bit inspections of the state ratio of accessories, etc.
Also, by executing the process of storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the blinking bit inspection frequency table is set. In this process, the HL register stores an address obtained by subtracting "1" from the top address of the blink bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flashing bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
As shown in FIG. 78, a predetermined value is stored for each ratio (for example, the value corresponding to the instructed accessory ratio is "8(H)").
Its top address is "2510(H)". Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

The "blinking bit inspection count" is a value indicating how many bits ahead from the D0 bit in the blinking request flag of the address "F292(H)" to reach the bit to be inspected.
For example, in FIG. 78, "8 (H)" is stored in the instructed accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (total), accessory ratio (total), and accessory state ratio. , is a value for determining whether or not the value of the eighth D7 bit counted from the D0-th bit in the flashing request flag is "1". The D7th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 175000 times, and when the D7th bit is "1", the instructed accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are indicated. (Total), Accessory ratio (Total), and Accessory state ratio identification segs are blinking targets.

Further, in FIG. 78, "7 (H)" is stored in the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) and the role product ratio (6000 times). This is a value for judging whether or not the value of the seventh D6 bit after counting is "1". The D6th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 6000 times. The identification seg with the character ratio (6000 times) is to be blinked.

In the next step S2532, the main control board 50 sets the identification segment blinking bit check count. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250F(H)+3(H)=2512(H) (=HL register value)
7 (H) (=B register value)
becomes.

In other words, "250F(H)" is the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292(H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit check table and store it at that address. It is possible to acquire the data that is stored.
In the above example, "7 (H)", which is the information for determining whether or not to blink the identification seg at the character ratio (6000 times) stored at the address "2512 (H)", is obtained. be done.

Next, proceeding to step S1476, the main control board 50 sets the identification segment offset table. This process is to store the start address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The head address is "2520(H)", and "251F(H)" obtained by subtracting "1" from this address is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1477, the main control board 50 acquires the identification segment offset value. This process is a process of reading from the identification segment offset table using the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as the offset value.
Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(2) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520 (H)" obtained by adding "1 (H)" to "251F (H)" is stored in the HL register and stored at the address. The received data "7A(H)" is stored in the A register. Further, when the ratio display number is "2", "2521(H)" obtained by adding "2(H)" to "251F(H)" is stored in the HL register, and the data stored at the address is is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) (request to display digit 6). Here, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (request to display digit 7). Here, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the ratio segment blinking bit inspection count. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the B register.
Here, the E register stores the ratio display number obtained in step S1475. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, A register, and B register.
The process then advances to step S1480. When the process proceeds to step S1480, there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or the ratio (100 digits), that is, when there is no request to display the identification segment (when displaying the ratio segment). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is obtained.
At this step S1480, the main control board 50 acquires the numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, when the E register value is "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the instructed accessory ratio data is obtained.

Acquisition of specific ratio data is as follows.
(1) Store the value ("F287 (H)") obtained by subtracting "1" from the address ("F288 (H)" in FIG. 56) of the RWM 53 where the instructed bonus ratio data is stored in the HL register. do.
(2) Store the data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value in the HL register.
(3) Store the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
That is, with "F287(H)" as the reference address and the ratio display number as the offset value, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored is calculated (specified), and the data stored at the RWM address is transferred to the register (storage area). can be obtained (stored) in

By this process, the A register stores the instructed role ratio data, continuous role ratio data (6000 times), role ratio data (6000 times), continuous role ratio data (cumulative total), and role ratio data (cumulative total). ), and an offset value for displaying the ratio of any of the state ratios of accessories, etc. is stored. This offset value (A register value) is used when acquiring ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, proceeding to step S1481, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit) (request to display digit 9). This process is to determine whether or not the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of the LED display counter 2) is "1". If there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no request to display it, the process proceeds to step S1482.
When there is no ratio (1-digit) display request in step S1481, it means that there is a ratio (10-digit) display request.

Through the above processing, when there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digits) or (10 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and when there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) or the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483. .
At step S1482, the main control board 50 sets the upper digit offset. This is because the upper digits of the identification seg or the ratio seg are lit when the process proceeds to step S1482. At this point, the A register stores the identified segment offset value (step S1477) or ratio data (step S1480). Here, the following processing is executed.

(1) Replace the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, if the data before the exchange is "0011/1001(B)"("/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits are exchanged. and becomes "1001/0011(B)".
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and "00001111(B)", and the operation result is stored in the A register. This process is a process of masking (setting to "0") the upper 4 bits since the lower 4 bits of the A register are used as an offset value.
Of the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the upper digit offset value, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the lower digit offset value. ing. Therefore, by performing the above process, an offset value for obtaining the segment data of the upper digits is generated.

In the next step S1483, the main control board 50 sets the ratio display segment data table. This process is a process of storing the start address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The head address is "2530(H)", and "2530(H)" is stored in the HL register. A description of the specific configuration of the ratio display segment data table will be omitted.

Next, proceeding to step S1484, the main control board 50 acquires segment output data. In this process, the A register value (offset value) is added to the HL register value (head address of the ratio display segment data table), and the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition is stored in the E register. processing.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; start address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
when
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) ("5" display data)
becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S1485, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when digits 6 to 9 are displayed, segment P (dot) of digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when there is a request to display a ratio (100 digits), it is determined that segment P is to be displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the ratio (10 digits), and the ratio (1000 digits), it is determined that the display of the segment P is not requested.

Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1". determines that there is no display request for segment P. Specifically, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store "00000010 (B)" in the A register.
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and the D register value (the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471).
If it is determined that there is a display request for segment P, the process proceeds to step S1486, and if it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S2534.

At step S1486, the main control board 50 sets the output data corresponding to the segment P. FIG. Since the segment P corresponds to the D7 bit of the 8-bit data, the segment data (E register value) acquired in step S1484 and "10000000 (B)" are ORed, and the operation result is stored in the E register. Remember.

In the next step S2534, the main control board 50 acquires a flashing request flag. This process is a process of storing the data of the flashing request flag (address "F291(H)" in FIG. 56) in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2535, the main control board 50 performs a blinking bit test. This process is a process of shifting the A register to the right by "1" and storing the overflowed result in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag is "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag is "1". Become.

In the next step S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the inspection has ended. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the inspection is completed.
If it is determined that the inspection has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2537, and if it is determined that the inspection has not been completed, the process returns to step S2535.
By the above processing, the value of the flashing request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times that it was first stored in the B register, and the result of the shift and overflow is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blink request flag is "10000000 (B)" (175000 times blink flag of D7th bit is ON) and the B register value is "8 (H)",
First time: "10000000 (B)"→"01000000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 8 - 1 = 7 (H)
Second time: "01000000 (B)"→"00100000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 7-1 = 6 (H)
Third time: "00100000 (B)"→"00010000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6-1 = 5 (H)
Fourth time: "00010000 (B)"→"00001000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5 - 1 = 4 (H)
Fifth time: "00001000 (B)"→"00000100 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4 - 1 = 3 (H)
Sixth time: "00000100 (B)"→"00000010 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (H)
Seventh time: "00000010 (B)"→"00000001 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2-1 = 1 (H)
Eighth time: "00000001 (B)"→"00000000 (B)", carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1 - 1 = 0 (H)
becomes.

At step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the blinking request flag is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has been completed. When it is determined that the flashing request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2538, and when it is determined that the flashing request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.

At step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the flashing switching flag is on. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The data of the flashing switching flag (address "F293(H)" in FIG. 56) is stored in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the flashing switching flag is not on.
If it is determined that the flashing switching flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2539, and if it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.
From steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the flashing request flag is off ("No" in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, so even if the flashing switching flag is on, the light does not turn off.
b) Even if the flashing request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537), if the flashing switching flag is off ("No" in step S2538), the light is turned on.
c) If the flashing request flag is on (“Yes” at step S2537) and the flashing switching flag is on (“Yes” at step S2538), the process advances to step S2539 to turn off the light.

At step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined that the inspection has ended in step S2536. Therefore, this process is a process of setting "0" to the E register. That is, when the blink request flag is on (“1”) and the blink switching flag is on (“1”, i.e., extinguished), the interrupt process extinguishes the display to be illuminated. In order to set the data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)", the process of step S2539 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1487, the main control board 50 outputs the segment signal from the output port 7 and the digit signal from the output port 6 in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) Swap the DE and HL register values.
Here, a digit signal is stored in the D register. A segment signal is stored in the E register. and,
exchange the data stored in the D register with the data stored in the H register,
The data stored in the E register and the data stored in the L register are exchanged.
This will
A digit signal is stored in the H register,
A segment signal is stored in the L register.
(2) output the L register value to output port 7 and the H register value to output port 6;
This completes the processing according to this flowchart.

Next, the operation when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the second embodiment is operated will be described.
When the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be betted, and a recoverable error state occurs (for example, medal selector error ("CE" error)), the reset switch ( Assume that the RWM clear switch 153 is operated to cancel the recoverable error state.
In this case, as described above, even if the recoverable error state is canceled, the data in the use area and outside the use area of the RWM 53 are maintained without being initialized, so the data regarding the advantageous section is also maintained without being initialized. Therefore, the advantageous section display LED 77 is also kept lit.
It should be noted that, when recovering from the recoverable error state, the error-related data such as the error detection flag stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53 may be initialized.

On the other hand, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. , and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated), the power is turned on.
In this case, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, at step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. "No", "Yes" in step S2710, and the process advances to step S2713 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power is restored normally.

Also, since the setting change disabled flag is off because medals can be betted, the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 65, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the use area of the RWM 53 and address "F292(H)" outside the use area ~ "F3FF (H)" initialization processing is executed. As a result, the data relating to the advantageous interval is initialized, and the advantageous interval display LED 77 is extinguished. However, since the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" is maintained without being initialized, the set value is not changed. Furthermore, since it is reset time, the result is "Yes" in step S2741 of FIG. 65, and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped. After that, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) of step S248, and returns to the state where medals can be betted.

In this way, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state occurs, if the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the recoverable error state, It is possible to maintain the game in the advantageous section.
On the other hand, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be betted, and a recoverable error state occurs, the power is turned off once, and then the reset switch 153 is turned on. When the power is turned on in , the recoverable error state can be canceled and the game can be restarted from the normal section instead of the advantageous section.
As a result, it is possible for the administrator (hall clerk) to select whether to maintain the game in the advantageous section or restart the game from the normal section.

Also, for example, assume that the player stops playing the game during the game in the advantageous section (halfway through the game in the advantageous section). In such a case, if the next player starts the game in the middle of the game in the advantageous section, the player becomes too advantageous.
On the other hand, it is not preferable to change the settings during the operation of the hall, as it may arouse the gambling spirit of the players.
In addition, if the operation of the game machine is stopped by turning off the power supply of the game machine during the operation of the hall, the operation rate of the game machine will decrease, which is not preferable in terms of the management of the hall.
Therefore, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit and medals can be betted, the power is turned off once, and then the power is turned on while the reset switch 153 is turned on. As a result, the game can be resumed from the normal section without changing the settings.

Also, in a situation where medals can be betted, the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated). , is turned on.
In this case, it is possible to shift to a setting change state (setting change mode, during setting change), after which the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, medals can be betted. back to a normal situation.

Specifically, in a situation where medals can be bet, the power is turned off, then the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned off (not operated). Under these circumstances, when the power is turned on, "Yes" is determined in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62, and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, since the power failure recovery is not abnormal, the result is "No" in step S2712, and the flow advances to step S2713 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power failure recovery is normal. Furthermore, since it is possible to bet medals, the setting change disabled flag is off, so the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, since it is not reset time, the result is "No" in step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of FIG. Then, since it is not the time to start checking the setting, the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 is repeated until "No" is obtained in step S2755 of the setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) of FIG. 66 and "Yes" is obtained in step S2756. In other words, the setting change state is entered. Thereafter, when the start switch 41 is operated, "Yes" is determined in step S2756, and when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, "Yes" is determined in step S2760, and the setting change state ends. Then, through the processing of steps S2743 to S2747 of FIG. 65, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) of step S248 (FIG. 67), and returns to the state where medals can be betted.

Further, as described above, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67), the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 67) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 67), including during rotation of the reel 31, During this period, the setting change is disabled, and the setting change disabled flag is turned on.
The power is turned off when the setting change disable flag is on, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. 62, the result is "No" in step S2714 of FIG. 62, so that the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 is not performed, and therefore the setting change state is not entered.

On the other hand, when medals can be betted, the setting change disabled flag is off, so the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch is turned on. When the (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned off and the power is turned on, the result is "Yes" in step S2714 of FIG. can be moved to

Also, as described above, when an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed when the power is restored normally, the flow advances to step S2713 in FIG. ” to “F1FF(H)” and addresses “F292(H)” to “F3FF(H)” outside the use area are set. Further, the initialization range of the use area of the RWM 53 includes credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" and bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)".

Therefore, when medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off. After that, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the setting change state is entered. is finished and medals can be betted, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits becomes "0".

Also, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is any one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the power is turned on, and when the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and medals can be bet. In such a situation, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be betted, the bet number is "0", and the credit number is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, the setting change state ends and medals are bet. When the situation becomes possible, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be bet, the bet amount is "0", and the credit amount is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned on and reset. When the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned off and the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet , the number of bets is "0" and the number of credits is also "0".

Also, in a situation where medals can be bet, the power is turned off, then the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on (operated). , is turned on. In this case, it becomes possible to execute the initialization processing of the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and after executing the initialization processing, it becomes possible to bet medals without shifting to the setting change state.

Specifically, the power is turned off under the condition that medals can be bet, and then the power is turned off under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on. When it is turned on, "No" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. The RWM 53 initialization range is set. Also, since the setting change disabled flag is off because medals can be betted, the result is "Yes" in step S2714, and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 65, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the use area of the RWM 53 and address "F292(H)" outside the use area ~ "F3FF (H)" initialization processing is executed.
Also, since it is the time of reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of FIG. 65 is "Yes", skipping the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 and proceeding to step S2743. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. After that, through the processing of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) of step S248, and returns to the state where medals can be betted.

Also, the power is turned off when the setting change prohibition flag is on, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, since the result in step S2714 of FIG. 62 is "No", the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 is not performed, and therefore the initialization process of the RWM 53 is not executed.

On the other hand, in a situation where medals can be betted, the setting change disabled flag is off. Under such a situation, the power is turned off. When the power is turned on under the condition that the RWM clear switch 153 is on, the result of step S2714 in FIG. Processing is performed.

Also, the power is turned off under the condition that medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Then, in step S2713 of FIG. 62, as the initialization range of the RWM 53, the used area addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the addresses outside the used area "F292(H)" to "F3FF (H)" is set. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range that is set when an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state when power is restored normally.

That is, under the condition that the power failure recovery is normal (not the power failure recovery failure), the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. When the power is turned on and when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 is in the same range. Initialization processing is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the setting key switch 152 is not operated, and therefore even if the setting key is not in possession, the same range as when the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed is performed. , RWM 53 can be initialized.
Further, in the present embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed within the same scope as when shifting to the setting change state without shifting to the setting change state.

Therefore, when medals can be bet, the number of bets is one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off. After that, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 is initialized. , when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Also, in a situation where medals can be bet, the number of bets is any one of "1" to "3", and the number of credits is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then medals can be betted. When it becomes, the bet amount becomes "0" and the credit amount also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be betted, the bet number is "0", and the credit number is one of "1" to "50", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch is turned off. 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then medals can be bet. When , the bet amount becomes "0" and the credit amount also becomes "0".

Furthermore, when medals can be bet, the bet amount is "0", and the credit amount is "0", the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off and reset. Even when the power is turned on while the switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed. becomes "0", and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Also, the power is turned off under the condition that medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. Suppose That is, it is assumed that the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, it becomes possible to shift to the setting change state, and after that, the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to the state in which medals can be bet.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), it is determined in step S2707 whether or not the setting key switch signal is on, and then in step S2710 it is determined whether or not the reset switch signal is on. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is on, and then it is determined whether or not the reset switch signal is on.
Therefore, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the result is "Yes" in step S2707, and the process does not proceed to step S2710. That is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the setting key switch 152 has priority. When the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 65, "No" is determined in step S2741, and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, so that the setting change state can be entered.

It is also assumed that the setting value display LED 73 initially displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2") when the setting change state is entered. At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is "M-1", and the value of the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001 (H)" is "M". is.
After that, it is assumed that the setting change switch 153 is operated and the set value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1", and the value of the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001 (H)" is " N”.

Furthermore, it is assumed that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the set value display LED 73 is displaying the set value "N". In this case, since the start switch 41 is not operated, the set value data after change is not saved (stored) in the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53, so the value of "F000 (H)" is "M -1" is maintained. Also, since the start switch 41 is not operated and the setting key switch 152 is not turned off, the power is turned off without ending the setting change state (while the setting change state remains).

After that, assume that the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. In this case, the power is only turned on/off, and the data in the use area and outside the use area of the RWM 53 are maintained without being initialized. return to state. Also, "M-1" is stored in the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53, and "N" is stored in the set value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) of "F001 (H)". Therefore, when the setting change state is restored, the set value display LED 73 displays the set value "N".

On the other hand, it is assumed that the set value display LED 73 first displays the set value "M" (for example, "2") when the setting change state is entered. After that, it is assumed that the setting change switch 153 is operated and the set value "N" (for example, "3") is displayed on the set value display LED 73 . Furthermore, it is assumed that the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the set value display LED 73 is displaying the set value "N". Up to this point, the process is the same as the above case. Next, assume that the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.

In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62 is "No", and step S2710 is "Yes". the scope is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. ~ "F3FF (H)" initialization processing is executed. Therefore, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "M-1".
Also, since it is the time of reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of FIG. 65 is "Yes", skipping the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 and proceeding to step S2743. Therefore, it does not move to the setting change state. After that, through the processing of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) of step S248, and a medal can be betted. At this time, the value of the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is maintained as "M-1", so the set value becomes "M".

Also assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
In this case, in an unrecoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed, and therefore power-down processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed. No data is saved.

Since the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the power is turned on, "No" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62, and the process proceeds to step S2708. Further, since the power-off processing completion flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved, the result is "Yes" in step S2708, and the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state and then turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, , it becomes an unrecoverable error state.

Although the power is turned on under the condition that the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62 does not proceed to step S2710. ) is never executed, nor is the initialization process (M_INI_SET) executed.
Also, during execution of processing by the second program, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed and power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed. When the power is turned on, the power-off processing completion flag is not set, and the RWM checksum data is not saved. ). That is, an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Also, while the non-recoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is being executed by the program (second program) outside the usage area, the power is turned off. When the power is turned on under the condition that the switch 153 is on, the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, the non-recoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program in the used area (first program).

Similarly, during execution of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) by the program in the usage area (first program), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch ) 153 is on, even if the power is turned on, "No" is obtained in step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Therefore, unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed by the program (first program) of the used area.

Also assume that the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off.
In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62 becomes "Yes", and the process advances to step S2711 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting change at power failure recovery failure. Also, since it is a power-off/recovery abnormality, "Yes" is determined in step S2712, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Then, in steps S2732-S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. And the entire range outside the use area (addresses "F210 (H)" to "F3FF (H)" is initialized. Therefore, the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "0", the set value becomes "1".

Also, since it is not reset time, "No" is determined in step S2741 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of FIG.
In this setting change state, it is assumed that the power is turned off without operating the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 . In this case, since interrupt processing (I_INTR) is executed in the setting change state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed.
After that, it is assumed that the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In this case, since it is not a power-off/recovery abnormality, step S2708 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62 is "No". Also, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the result is "Yes" in step S2710. Then, the flow advances to step S2713 to set the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of the setting change when the power is restored normally.

Also, since the setting change disable flag is off, "Yes" is obtained in step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 62, and the process proceeds to initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Furthermore, since it is reset time, "Yes" is obtained in step S2741 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of FIG. 65, and the setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, this time, it does not move to the setting change state. After that, through the processing of steps S2744 to S2747, the process proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) of step S248, and a medal can be betted. At this time, since the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 is "0" as described above, the setting value becomes "1".

Also, in this embodiment, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in step S2771 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 68 . Further, in step S2776 of the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. 69, the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is executed. Then, in the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) of FIG. 70, the processing of steps S2785 to S2794 is executed to calculate the RWM checksum data (complement data), and the calculated RWM checksum data is transferred to the It is stored in the address "F2A0(H)" of the RWM 53 by processing.

As described above, this RWM checksum data consists of the data of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the data of addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area of the RWM 53. H)” (excluding “F2A0(H)”) is a value that becomes “0” when added to the added value of the data.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and the recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR ) can be executed. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted (the power is turned off) in a recoverable error state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) can be executed.
On the other hand, an unrecoverable error occurs, an unrecoverable error state (unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 64 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 72 is executed, and the game progresses). In this state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited as described above. Therefore, if an event occurs in which the power supply is interrupted (the power is turned off) in an unrecoverable error state, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, when the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, by not executing the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN), when the power is turned on after that, the program start processing ( M_PRG_START), it can be determined in step S2708 that there is an abnormality in recovery from power failure, and the process proceeds to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801.
That is, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, the unrecoverable error state occurs again simply by turning on/off the power supply.
When an unrecoverable error state occurs, the power must be turned off once and an operation (turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on) to shift to the setting change state must be performed. It is possible to make it impossible to return to a state in which medals can be betted (a state in which the game can proceed).

Further, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. In step S2708, it is determined that there is a power failure recovery error, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, so the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67) is not performed. It cannot be returned to (a state in which the game can be progressed).

Also, even if a recoverable error occurs and a recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and the progress of the game has stopped), interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, but recovery is not possible. When a possible error occurs and it becomes an unrecoverable error state (the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 64 or the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 72 is executed and the progress of the game is stopped) , interrupt processing (I_INTR) is disabled.
Furthermore, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) for controlling lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) and lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are controlled. The ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

Therefore, in a recoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, so LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, even in the recoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by LED display control (I_LED_OUT), and management information is displayed by ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY). The LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) can sequentially display information types and various ratios related to game results.

On the other hand, in an unrecoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, so neither LED display control (I_LED_OUT) nor ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is executed.
Therefore, during the unrecoverable error state, the above-described unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 64 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. Display error information.

Also, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 64 or the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. .
As a result, during an unrecoverable error state, outputs from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are "00000000 (B)". , all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain extinguished until the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the interrupt process (I_INTR) is restarted.
The fact that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain unlit is a mode specific to the unrecoverable error state. You can let us know what happened.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the outputs of output port 6 (digit 6-9 signal output port) and output port 7 (segment signal output port for digits 6-9) are turned off. By setting it to (“00000000(B)”), all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, the display mode of the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 in the unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8" during an unrecoverable error state. That is, the management information display LED 74 may display "8888".
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a modified example of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to FIG.
In FIG. 79, step numbers different from those in FIG. 72 are underlined, and steps identical to those in FIG. 72 are assigned the same step numbers.
Differences from FIG. 72 will be mainly described below.

In the unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in FIG. 79, step S1505 is followed by step S1506. Output.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000001 (B)" (data in which only digit 6 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals is "1").

Next, proceeding to step S1507, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing flickering of the LED. How long to wait depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to about "0.1 ms", for example. For example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted by the internal system clock. The process advances to step S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 (“00000000 (B)”). This process is for preventing afterimages.
Next, proceeding to step S1509, the main control board 50 executes standby (wait) processing for preventing flickering of the LED. This process is for ensuring that the LEDs are extinguished after the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are turned off.

Proceeding to the next step S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in the digit 7 from the output ports 6 and 7. FIG.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000010 (B)" (data in which only digit 7 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals is "1").
Steps S1511 to S1513 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Proceeding to step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" as the digit 8 from the output ports 6 and 7. FIG.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000100 (B)" (data in which only digit 8 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals is "1").
Steps S1515-S1517 are the same as steps S1507-S1509.

Proceeding to step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data for displaying "8" in the digit 9 from the output ports 6 and 7. FIG.
Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (data in which only digit 9 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (segment 2A to 2G signals). is "1").
Steps S1519 to S1521 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509. After executing the process of step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

In this manner, digits 6 through 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8" during an unrecoverable error state.
The display of all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 becomes "8", which is peculiar to an unrecoverable error state. It is possible to notify that an error state has occurred.

The display of the management information display LED 74 may be "----" instead of "8888". That is, only segments G of digits 6 to 9 may be illuminated.
Also, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be "...". That is, only segments P of digits 6 to 9 may be illuminated.
Furthermore, the display of the management information display LED 74 may be set to "8.8.8.8.". That is, as shown in FIG. 30(a) or (c), all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be illuminated.

(2) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off. By setting it to (“00000000(B)”), all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.
However, in step S1494 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 64 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. may be maintained instead of In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 is as follows.

As described above, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are dynamically lit with four interrupts as one cycle. Therefore, for example, when "7P.65" is displayed in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74, digit 9 "5", digit 8 "6", digit 7 "P." The "7" of the digit 6 are illuminated sequentially. Assume, for example, that digits 6 to 8 of the management information display LED 74 are extinguished and digit 9 is illuminated with "5", and an unrecoverable error state occurs. In this case, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) stops while the signal (digit signal and segment signal) that causes digits 6 to 8 to turn off and digit 9 to light up and display "5" is output from output ports 6 and 7. do.

Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00001000 (B)" (digit 9 signal is "1" and others are "0"), and output port 7 outputs "01101101 (B)" (segment 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the others are "0" data), interrupt processing (I_INTR) is stopped, and then output from output ports 6 and 7 The signal (data) to be rewritten is not performed.
Therefore, the output of the signals (digit signal and segment signal) from the output ports 6 and 7 is maintained until the unrecoverable error state is canceled and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted. remains unlit, and digit 9 remains illuminated with "5".

Similarly, for example, assume that digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is illuminated with "7" and digits 7 to 9 are extinguished, and an unrecoverable error state occurs.
In this case, until the unrecoverable error state is cleared and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted, the signal (digit signal and segment signal) that causes digit 6 to display "7" and digits 7 to 9 to go out. Since the state of being output from the output ports 6 and 7 continues, the digit 6 is illuminated with "7" and the digits 7 to 9 remain extinguished.

Further, for example, assume that the non-recoverable error process 2 is executed by the second program under the condition that the digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is lit and the digits 7 to 9 are not lit. Assume that the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained without being turned off in the unrecoverable error process 2 by the second program. In this case, as described above, the state in which the signal (digit signal and segment signal) causing the digit 6 to light up and the digits 7 to 9 to go out (the digit signal and the segment signal) continues to be output from the output ports 6 and 7. Digit 6 is illuminated with "7", and digits 7-9 remain unlit.

When the power is turned off in this state, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are extinguished. After that, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off, "Yes" is given in step S2708 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. Processing is performed. In this case, the data in the RWM 53 are maintained without being initialized, since the process does not proceed to the initialization process of step S2731. For this reason, data related to lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address “F292 (H)” to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of “F297 (H)” etc.) are also maintained without being initialized.

Here, it is assumed that interrupt processing (I_INTR) is made executable without being prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing by the first program. In this case, lighting control of the management information display LED 74 is performed by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in the interrupt processing (I_INTR). The ratio information immediately before the possible error process 2 is executed, that is, "7P.65" (instruction-containing accessory ratio, ratio display number "1") is displayed.

Further, it is assumed that "7P.65" was displayed, for example, for "2000 ms" in digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 immediately before the unrecoverable error process 2 by the second program was executed. In this case, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed in the non-recoverable error process by the first program, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 show "7P.65" and "4791.84ms". - "2000ms" = displayed for "2791.84ms". After that, the display items after the ratio display number "2" are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).

In this way, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed in the unrecoverable error process by the first program, the display continues from the ratio information immediately before the unrecoverable error process 2 by the second program is executed. is started (restarted).
On the other hand, if the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited in the non-recoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed either. to 9 remain unlit.

In addition, as described above, regarding the instructed accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the accessory state ratio, when the total number of games played is less than “175000”, that Blinks the identification segment. With respect to the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games played is less than "6000", the identification seg is blinked. In addition, when the displayed value of the instructed role product ratio, the role product ratio (accumulated), and the role product ratio (6000 times) is "70" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking. When the displayed value of the continuous role product ratio (accumulated) and the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is "60" or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking. When the displayed value of the state ratio of the role product is "50" or more, the ratio seg blinks. In addition, when the blinking display is performed, lighting and extinguishing are repeated every about 0.3 seconds.

Therefore, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may all go out. For example, under the condition that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are all extinguished, that is, when the output from the output ports 6 and 7 is "00000000 (B)" (off), recovery is impossible. Assume that an error has occurred.
In this case, the outputs from the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained as "00000000 (B)" (off) until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is restarted. All digits 6 to 9 of the display LED 74 remain off.

The display mode of the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 as described above is a display mode peculiar to the non-recoverable error state. It is possible to notify that a possible error state has occurred.

(3) In the above embodiment, the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off on condition that the power failure recovery is normal (not the power failure recovery failure). When the power is turned on (to shift to the setting change state), the setting key switch 152 is off, and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. The initialization process of the RWM 53 was executed in the same range as when it was turned on.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the power is turned on (when transitioning to the setting change state) under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. , the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on.
For example, when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, when the power is turned on, the RWM 53 is initialized in the same range as when the advantageous section ends. conversion processing may be performed.
Specifically, a predetermined range (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in FIG. 54) of the use area of the RWM 53 in which data relating to the advantageous section is stored is initialized. Other ranges (for example, credit amount data (_NB_CREDIT) of address "F010(H)" in FIG. 54, bet amount data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) of "F043(H)", etc.) can be maintained without being initialized. .
In any case, the initialization range when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on and the power is turned on is set to be narrower than the initialization range when shifting to the setting change state. is preferred.

(4) In the above embodiment, it is determined in step S458 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 68 whether or not the setting value is within the normal range. Go to 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, it may be determined whether or not the set value is within the normal range immediately after determining that the start switch 41 is turned on (operated) in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 67).

(5) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned off while staying in the setting change state and then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, the setting change state is entered. The medal was moved to a situation where it was possible to bet without letting
However, this is not the only option. When this occurs, an unrecoverable error state may occur.

Specifically, for example, a setting change state flag is provided, and when the setting change state is entered, the setting change state flag is set in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when the termination condition of the setting change state is satisfied, Clear the configuration change status flag.
Then, when the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on under the condition that the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, in step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. It is determined whether or not the setting change status flag is on. When it is determined that the setting change status flag is ON, the process advances to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 to set the unrecoverable error status.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being set even though the operation for finalizing the setting value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, any value from "0(D)" to "5(D)" is stored at the address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 as the set value data (_NB_RANK). That is, the set value data is managed with "0(D)" to "5(D)".
However, the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 may store any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" as the set value data (_NB_RANK). good. That is, the set value data may be managed as "1(D) to "6(D)".

Then, when shifting to the setting change state, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 is cleared (to "0"), and the setting value is fixed (for example, by pressing the start switch 41). turn on) is performed, any value from "1 (D)" to "6 (D)" is stored as the set value data (_NB_RANK) at the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53. good too.
In this case, when the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, the set value is out of the normal range ( It may be determined that a set value error has occurred), proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811, and enter an unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) are output from the output port 3, and segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segments 1A to 5) are output from the output port 3. 1P signal) is output from output port 4, digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 6, and segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals) are output from output port 6. Output from output port 7.
When lighting digits 1 to 5, the digit signal was output from the output port 3 and the segment 1 signal was output from the output port 4. FIG. When the digits 6 to 9 are lit, the digit signal is output from the output port 6 and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 7 . That is, the output ports to be used are divided into digits 1 to 5 that control lighting by the program in the usage area (first program) and digits 6 to 9 that control lighting by the program outside the usage area (second program). Ta.

However, not limited to this, for example, digits 1 to 5 that control lighting by a program in the usage area (first program) and digits 6 to 9 that control lighting by a program outside the usage area (second program). , the output port may be shared.
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a modification of the output port in the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 80, segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from the output port 3. FIG. Digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digits 1 to 5 signals) are output from output port 2, and digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digits 6 to 9 signals) are output from output port 4. can do.
In this case, during an unrecoverable error state, by turning off the output of output port 4 (the output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) ("00000000 (B)"), digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 can be left off.

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) for outputting digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal is provided in the use area of the RWM 53, and outside the use area of the RWM 53, An LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is provided for outputting digit 6 to digit 9 signals. That is, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided independently. However, it is not limited to this.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a modification of the LED display counter in the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 81, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with 5 interrupts per cycle is provided in the use area of the RWM 53. Based on the value of this LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1), digit 1 signal to digit 5 signal , and digit 6 to digit 9 signals may be output. That is, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 may be used in common.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in FIG. 77, the value of the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is acquired and stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether or not there is a ratio display request. Specifically, the value of the LED display counter 1 stored in the D register and "11110000 (B)" are ANDed. , and when the AND operation result is not "0", it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

Here, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00001000 (B)", "00000100 (B)", "00000010 (B)", or "00000001 (B)", the AND operation result is "0". Therefore, it is determined that there is a ratio display request, and the process proceeds to step S1475.
On the other hand, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the result of the AND operation does not become "0". In this case, since the outputs of the output ports 6 and 7 are maintained, the display mode of the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 is the same as the display mode during the previous interrupt processing. For example, when the digit 6 was lit and displayed as "7" during the previous interrupt processing, the digit 6 is lit and displayed as "7" also during the current interrupt processing.

If it is determined in step S1472 that there is no ratio display request, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) are turned off. ("00000000(B)"), and all the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may be extinguished.

(9) For example, under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off under the condition that the power failure recovery is normal (not the power failure recovery failure). Even if the initialization range of the RWM 53 is changed when the power is turned on and when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. good.
Specifically, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is, for example, the use area. addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" of the area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the use area are set. In this case, the set value data (_NB_RANK) of the address "F000 (H)" of the RWM 53 and the addresses "F210 (H)" to "F291 (H)" outside the use area are not initialized (cleared). maintain.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is, for example, the address "F000(H)". Including the set value data (_NB_RANK), the entire range of the used area (addresses "F000 (H)" to "F1FF (H)"), and the addresses outside the used area "F292 (H)" to "F3FF (H) ” is set. In this case, the addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the use area are maintained without being initialized (cleared). is initialized (cleared). In this case, the set value data (_NB_RANK) is "0", so the set value is "1". As a result, the set value can be changed to "1" simply by shifting to the setting change state.

Also, when the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 Even when the power is turned on under the condition that both are on, both can be allowed to transition to the setting change state.

(10) In the above embodiment, as the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal recovery from power failure, the addresses "F001 (H)" to "F1FF (H)" in the use area of the RWM 53 and the address "F292" outside the use area (H)” to “F3FF (H)” are set.
However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is not limited to the range described above, and can be appropriately set according to the specifications of the slot machine 10 .

For example, the initialization range of the RWM 53 can be varied according to the content of the action state flag (_FL_ACTION) at the address "F030(H)" of the RWM 53 in FIG.
Specifically, for example, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030 (H)" is "1" and 1BB is in operation, address "F030 (H )” action status flag (_FL_ACTION) can be removed.
On the other hand, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of "F030(H)" is "0" and 1BB is not in operation, the address "F030(H)" is activated within the initialization range of RWM53. A status flag (_FL_ACTION) can be included.

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing is prohibited in step S1490 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, interrupt processing may not be prohibited in unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).
Specifically, when "Yes" is determined in step S2708 or S2715 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. good.

Then, even during execution of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 68 can be executed, and LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 and ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 are executed. It may be possible.
As a result, even during execution of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) light up. Control may be executable.

(12) In the above embodiment, the operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed, and when it is determined that the power is restored normally, the address of the RWM 53 is changed. "F292(H)" (ratio display number) is initialized. For this reason, for example, the power is turned off when the role product ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the setting change state is entered. When it is determined that the power is restored normally, the management information display LED 74 displays from the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”), which is the first display item of various ratio information. is started.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if an operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the management information The display LED 74 first displays specific information different from the ratio information such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." The display may start from the ratio data (ratio display number “1”).
As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit, so that it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a fault in the segments and whether or not the signal lines of the segments are broken.
Similarly, when an operation is performed to shift to the setting change state and it is determined that there is a power failure recovery failure, the management information display LED 74 first displays a ratio such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." Specific information different from the information may be displayed, and then the display may be started from the instructed accessory ratio data (ratio display number “1”), which is the first display item of the various ratio information.

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is turned off. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on, the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is also turned on. In any case when the power is turned on in the state where the You can display specific information that is different from

After that, the digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) show the on/off status of various switches when the power is turned on, and whether it was determined that the power failure recovery was normal or that the power failure recovery was abnormal. Display information according to As a result, it is possible to check whether or not all the segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit when the power is turned on, so it is possible to check whether there is a failure in the segment or whether there is a disconnection in the signal line of the segment. be able to.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned off, the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on. When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned on and the reset switch 153 is also turned on, "8888" or "8. 8, 8, 8.”, etc., when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off. may not display the above specific information on the management information display LED 74 .

(14) In the above embodiment, the operation for shifting to the setting change state (turning on the power while the setting key switch 152 is turned on) is performed, and when it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the RWM 53 Initialize the data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of "F297 (H)", etc.) did.
However, not limited to this, when an operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, data (for example, address " F292 (H)" ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) to "F297 (H)" LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2), etc.) may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, when the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”), the power is turned off, and then the operation for shifting to the setting change state. is performed, and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before turning off the power, that is, the character ratio ( Cumulative) data is displayed.

It is also assumed that the role product ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number “5”) is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) immediately before the power is turned off, for example, for “1000 ms”. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 displays the role product ratio (cumulative) data as "4791.84 ms" - "1000 ms". ”=“3791.84 ms”. After that, the display items after the ratio display number "6" are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, when the operation for shifting to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off Display starts (resumes) from the continuation.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal, the management in the RWM 53 Data related to the lighting control of the information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of address "F297 (H)") is initialized. .
However, not limited to this, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the management information in the RWM 53 Data related to the lighting control of the display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) (for example, ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) of address "F292 (H)" to LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of address "F297 (H)") is not initialized may be maintained at

For example, when the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number “2”) is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), the power is turned off, and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off. , and the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off, that is, the continuous character ratio (6000 games) Data is displayed.

Also, it is assumed that the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data (ratio display number “2”) is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) immediately before the power is turned off, for example, for “3000 ms”. . In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted, the management information display LED 74 displays the continuous role ratio (6000 games) data as "4791.84 ms"- "3000 ms" = "1791.84 ms" is displayed. After that, the display items after the ratio display number "3" are sequentially displayed on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY).
In this way, the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is turned on, and it is determined that the recovery from power failure is normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is restarted. When the power is turned off, the display starts (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information immediately before the power is turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, settings cannot be changed during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 67) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 67) (during the game), including when the reels 31 are rotating. , and during this time, turned on the unchangeable flag.
However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the setting change may be allowed at all times without providing a period during which the setting cannot be changed and therefore without setting the setting change disabled flag.

(17) In the above embodiment, it is determined in step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 68 whether or not a power failure has occurred. I_POWER_DOWN), and when it is determined that the power failure has not occurred, the power failure processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in step S2771 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S454.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the occurrence of power shutdown is detected without executing the power shutdown processing (I_POWER_DOWN) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 68, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. A separate interrupt process may be executed, and the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed in this separate interrupt process.
In this case, when the occurrence of power failure is detected during the execution of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. After the end of the I_POWER_DOWN, another interrupt process is started, and the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in this another interrupt process.

(18) In the above embodiment, the slot machine 10 is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as game media, parrots that use game balls, sealed game machines that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical medals (medals as tangible objects) (medal-less game machines), and casino machines. The present invention can be applied.
(19) The second embodiment is not limited to being carried out independently, and can be carried out in combination with the first embodiment as appropriate.

<Third Embodiment>
The third embodiment relates to timer interrupt processing and vector addresses (also called "interrupt vector addresses").
In the third embodiment, terms are used as follows.
(1) "Timer interrupt processing" in the third embodiment is the same as "interrupt processing (I_INTR)" in the second embodiment (FIG. 68). In the following description of the third embodiment, "timer interrupt processing" may be simply abbreviated as "interrupt processing" as necessary.
(2) "Address value" means the numerical value of the address in the built-in memory. For example, in FIG. 83, which will be described later, the "vector address value" is "0004H". In this specification, the term "address" and the term "address" may be used as necessary, but these have the same meaning.

(3) "Address data value" refers to the data value stored at the address. For example, the above-mentioned "vector address" actually consists of 2-byte addresses "0004H" and "0005H". A data value (a 2-byte (16-bit) value) stored in
(4) Add "H" to the address value. "H" indicates "hexa" in hexadecimal. Also, "B" is attached to the bit value stored in the address. "B" indicates a binary "bit".
When indicating a 2-byte bit value (16-bit value), a "/" is added between the upper byte (8-bit) value and the lower byte (8-bit) value. For example, "00000000/00000100B".

(5) On the other hand, a register does not have an address, and the "value (of) a register" refers to the data value stored in the register.
(6) In this embodiment, the storage areas in the built-in memory are called "program area", "data area", "register area", "program management area", "work area", and "stack area". . However, these are not limited to this and may be called "program area", "data area", "register area", "program management area", "work area", and "stack area", respectively.
The "program area" is also called "program code area" or "program code area."

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") in the third embodiment. This one-chip microprocessor is mounted on the main control board 50 in FIG.
82, the chip includes a main CPU 55 (same as in FIG. 1) and a built-in memory. Various hardware other than these two pieces of hardware is provided in the chip, but the description and illustration thereof are omitted.
The built-in memory includes a built-in ROM 54 having an address range of "0000H" to "3FFFH" (16384 bytes) and a built-in RWM 53 having an address range of "F000H" to "F3FFH" (1024 bytes).
The built-in ROM 54 is the same as "ROM 54" in FIG. 1, and the built-in RWM 53 is the same as "RWM 53" in FIG.

Further, the built-in memory includes a function setting register area and a function control register area as built-in memory register areas.
The function setting register area is a register storage area for operation settings including interrupt processing (for example, initial settings for interrupt processing, etc.).
A prescaler register 502 is a register that can set a setting value for selecting a clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501 .
A counter setting register 503 is a built-in register that can set the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 .

The function control register area is a storage area for registers that manage monitoring and control, for example, a storage area for registers that monitor interrupt processing and store random numbers.
The interrupt wait monitor register 301 is a register for storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 is set.
The 8-bit counter 501 is an 8-bit (1-byte) counter value storage area for measuring the timing of interrupt processing.
An interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out.
The built-in memory register area is not limited to the function setting register area and the function control register area shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the main CPU 55 has a CPU register area. This CPU register area is a register area different from the built-in memory register area provided in the built-in memory.
A, B, C, D, E, F, H, and L registers, which are general-purpose registers, are provided in the CPU register area. Note that the F register is a flag register.
The Q register is a register that stores the upper address "F0H" of the work area (see FIG. 84) in the use area of the built-in RWM 53 and is used for instructions. Then, it is used in an instruction to read data whose upper address is "F0H" in the storage area of the built-in RWM 53. FIG.
Furthermore, the I register is a register called an interrupt page address register, which is a register for determining the upper byte value of the vector address, as will be described later in detail.

In the interrupt disable flags (IFF1, IFF2) 302, the IFF1 register is a register for determining permission and prohibition of maskable interrupts. The IFF2 register is a register used for restoring the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt or for restoring by a RETEX instruction after execution of a CALLEX instruction.
In addition to the above registers, various registers such as a Q register and a U register are provided, but illustration and description thereof are omitted in the third embodiment.

Also, the registers, counters, and flags shown in FIG. 82 are examples, and are not limited to those shown in FIG. For example, although the 8-bit counter 501 is provided in the function control register area, it is not limited to this, and can be provided in the CPU register area within the main CPU 55 or can be configured by a circuit. The interrupt flag 504 may also have a function of storing ON/OFF, and may be provided in, for example, the CPU register area instead of the function control register area, or may be configured by a circuit. In addition, the prescaler register 502, the counter setting register 503, and the interrupt wait monitor register 301 can be similarly provided in the CPU register area or another area in the built-in memory, or can be configured by a circuit.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM 54 in FIG.
The area of the built-in ROM 54 is provided with a used area and a non-used area.
The "usage area" is a storage area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored.
In addition, the "area outside the use area" is a storage area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored. This is a storage area in which programs, anti-fraud programs, etc. are stored.
A program area and a data area are provided in the used area and the non-used area in the built-in ROM 54, respectively.
The “program area” is also called a “control area” and is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored.
A "data area" is a storage area in which information other than a program is stored, and is a storage area in which data used when the program is executed is stored.

Here, as shown in parentheses in FIG. 83, the "use area" may be referred to as the "first area". Also, the "outside use area" may be referred to as a "second area".
The program area of the used area may also be referred to as a "first program area" or a "first control area". Also, the data area of the used area may be referred to as a "first data area".
Furthermore, the program stored in the program area of the used area may be referred to as "first program".
Similarly, the program area of the area outside the use area may be called a "second program area" or a "second control area". Also, the data area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second data area".
Furthermore, the program stored in the program area outside the used area may be referred to as a "second program".

As shown in FIG. 83, in this embodiment, there is an unused area (address "11FFH") between the program area and the data area of the used area. It may be arranged so as to be continuous with the data area.
In addition, although there is an unused area (addresses "1DF7H" to "1FFFH") between the used area and the area outside the used area, the unused area is eliminated, and the used area and the area outside the used area are continuous. may be placed.
Furthermore, as for the area outside the used area, the program area and the data area are arranged continuously. You may have
It should be noted that the used area and the non-used area may be defined so as to refer only to the program area and the data area and exclude the unused area. On the other hand, when there is an unused area between the program area and the data area like the used area in FIG. 83, the unused area may be called a used area (or an area outside the used area).

The built-in ROM 54 is provided with a storage area for storing the company name, date, model name (of the gaming machine 10), etc., and a program management area, in addition to the above-described used area, non-used area area, and unused area. there is
In the above, the vector address (0004H) described in detail below is provided in the program area of the used area in this embodiment.
A program code area start/end address (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and an interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) are provided in the program management area.
The program management area has program code area setting addresses (3FD3H to 3FD8H) and an interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), which will be described later.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map within the built-in RWM 53 in FIG.
Similar to the area of the internal ROM 54, the area of the internal RWM 53 is divided into a use area (may be referred to as a "first area") and an area outside the use area (may be referred to as a "second area"). is provided. The concepts of these "use area" and "use area outside" are the same as in the case of the built-in ROM 54. FIG.
Further, the used area and the non-used area in the built-in RWM 53 respectively have a working area, an unused area, and a stack area.
The work area (also referred to as "first work area") and the stack area (also referred to as "first stack area") in the use area are programs stored in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54 (for progress of the game). Related programs) are used (updated, referenced) during execution.

Similarly, the work area (also referred to as a "second work area") and stack area in the area outside the use area is also referred to as a "second stack area". ) is used (updated, (referenced) storage area.
Note that the "stack area" is a storage area in which data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).

Next, the interrupt initialization address will be explained.
First, the "vector address" is an address that stores the start address (head address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) to be executed when a timer interrupt processing factor occurs. In other words, the vector address does not store the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) itself, but is an address that stores the location (starting address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR).
The "interrupt initialization address" is an address that stores data that enables the value of the vector address to be specified. Especially in this embodiment, the vector address cannot be specified only by the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address, and the vector address value is specified based on the value of the I register and the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address. make it possible.

FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining interrupt initialization addresses. In the figure, (A) is a diagram showing the details of the data value of the interrupt initialization address, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt priority order and the interrupt priority order setting value.
As described with reference to FIG. 83, the interrupt initial setting address is provided in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, and its address is "3FDAH" (1 byte) in this embodiment. However, this is an example and is not limited to this.
After the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the data value stored at this interrupt initialization address is read and used to determine the vector address.

In FIG. 85A, the upper 4 bits (A7 bit to A4 bit) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address take a predetermined value as the vector address setting value, and in this embodiment, "0000B". It's becoming This vector address setting value constitutes part of the vector address value, as will be described later.
Although the vector address setting value is set to "0H (0000B)" in this embodiment, it is not limited to this, and various settings such as "8H (1000H)" and "FH (1111B)" are possible. .
Also, in the data value of the interrupt initialization address, the A3 bit and A2 bit are fixed values, and are set to "00B" in this embodiment. Although the details will be described later, this 2-bit value, which is a fixed value, is configured to be checked (in the security mode) when the gaming machine 10 is started, and when the 2-bit value is not "00B" , is configured to be an error.
Also, this fixed value is not limited to "00B", but can be set to various values such as "11B".
Furthermore, the A1 and A0 bits, which are the lower two bits of the data value of the interrupt initialization address, are the interrupt priority setting values.
Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85B, four types of "00B", "01B", "10B", and "11B" are provided as interrupt priority setting values. .

FIG. 85(B) shows the relationship between interrupt priority setting values and interrupt factors.
In this embodiment, there are five types of interrupt factors, "IR0" to "IR5", and the smaller the number at the end, the higher the priority of the interrupt factor. In other words, the "IR0" interrupt factor has the highest interrupt priority, and the "IR5" interrupt factor has the lowest interrupt priority.
The types of interrupts are "PTC0" to "PTC2", "RX0" to "RX1", and "XINT". Here, "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used for timer interrupt processing, and particularly "PTC2" corresponds to timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, "01B" is used as the interrupt priority setting value. As a result, the interrupt priorities are "PTC0", "PTC1", "PTC2", "XINT", "RX0", and "RX1" in descending order of priority.
Further, when "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, the A1 bit and the A0 bit of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address are "01B".
As described above, in this embodiment, the value of the interrupt initialization address is "3FDAH" and the data value of the interrupt initialization address is "00000001B".

FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining vector address values and data values stored at the vector addresses.
FIG. 86A shows vector address values.
In this embodiment, the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the built-in ROM 54 and is 2 bytes.
As for the vector address value, as shown in FIG. 86A, the upper 1-byte value is the I register value, and the lower 1-byte value consists of the vector address set value and the automatically assigned value.

Here, the I register value in this embodiment is "00H". As shown in FIG. 82, the I register is provided in the CPU register area, and is set to "00H" after the game machine 10 is powered on. In other words, immediately after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, each register value provided in the CPU register area is cleared. Thereafter, unless a value other than "00H" is stored in the I register, the I register value remains "00H".
In the present embodiment, no value is set in the I register after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, the I register value remains "00H".
Therefore, the upper 1-byte value of the vector address is "00H".

Next, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A7 to A4 bit values correspond to the A7 to A4 bit values (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH). As shown in FIG. 85A, in the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, the A7-A4 bit value is "0000B", so this value becomes the A7-A4 bit value of the lower byte of the vector address as it is.

Also, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A3-A0 bit values are automatically assigned values.
FIG. 86B is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt factors and automatically assigned values. As shown in FIG. 85B, in this embodiment, "01B" is adopted as the interrupt priority setting value, and the priority of the interrupt factor of PTC2, which is the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) of this embodiment, is "IR2 ”.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86B, the automatically assigned value for the interrupt factor "IR2" and the interrupt "PTC2 (I_INTR)" is "0100B" (04H). This "0100B" is the A3-A0 bit value of the vector address value.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 86(A), the value of the vector address is
"00000000/00000100B" = "0004H"
becomes.
As a result, in FIG. 83, "0004H" becomes the vector address in the storage area of the built-in ROM 54 starting from "0000H".
Since the value of the vector address is 2 bytes as described above, the vector addresses are actually "0004H" and "0005H".

FIG. 86C shows an example of data values of vector addresses. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored from "1134H" in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54. FIG. In other words, the start address of the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is "1134H".
Therefore, the data value of the vector address (0004H) becomes "1134H".
When "1134H" is stored in a 2-byte vector address, the lower byte value "34H" is stored in the first "0004H" and "11H" is stored in the next "0005H".
This will
0004H: 34H (00110100B)
0005H: 11H (00010001B)
is stored.

When the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the main CPU 55 is activated, it is possible to recognize where the vector address is based on the data value and I address value of the interrupt initialization address.
Specifically, first, since the upper 4-bit value of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) is "0000B", the upper 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is "0000B".
In addition, since the value of the interrupt priority setting value, which is the value of the lower 2 bits of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH), is "01B", the lower byte of the vector address corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2) A 4-byte value is assigned to '0100B' by the interrupt controller.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes "00H", so the value of the upper byte of the vector address becomes "00000000B".
As described above, the main CPU 55 determines that the vector address (the address where the start address of "I_INTR" is stored) corresponding to PTC2 (interrupt of timer counter ch2, corresponding to timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment) is set to "0004H".
Therefore, from the data value stored in the vector address, it is possible to recognize at which address the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored (starting address of the timer interrupt processing program).

Note that the process of setting "00H" to the I register is not executed after the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the CPU register area on the main CPU 55 side in FIG. 82 is initialized, so that the I register value becomes "00H" similarly to the other register values.
Also, when the register is initialized after the power is turned on, "F0H" is stored in the Q register. When "F0H" is stored in the Q register, when specifying the higher address "F0H" in the storage area of the built-in RWM 53, the Q register is specified.
Further, in this embodiment, when timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) of PTC 2 is entered, the program (that is, the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR)) is called. In other words, the program code for timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a process from power-on to transition to user mode in this embodiment.
First, before the power is turned on (when the power is off), "XSRST" is "L (low)". Here, "XSRST" indicates the operation status of the main CPU 55, and is "XSRST=L" when the main CPU 55 is not allowed to operate (while the main CPU 55 is stopped). ).
When the power is turned on under this condition, the system reset is released, and when the power supply becomes stable, the main CPU 55 changes from "L (low)" to "H (high)" in terms of the circuit. .

A register in the CPU register area is then initialized to determine if there is a PROM mode request. Here, "PROM mode" means a mode in which data is written in ROM (ROM is burned). When it is determined that there is a request to shift to the PROM mode, it shifts to the PROM mode, and when it is determined that there is no request to shift to the PROM mode, it shifts to the security mode. Game machines installed in the market are configured to determine that there is no request to shift to the PROM mode after the system reset is released.
In the security mode, a security check is performed, and when the security check is determined to be OK, the process shifts to the user mode, and when the security check is determined to be NG, the execution (processing) is stopped.
As a security check in the security mode, the program code area setting address of the program management area, the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), etc. are read. Then, the presence or absence of a setting error in the program management area and self-diagnosis are executed. Also, in this security mode, the data value of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) is read to recognize the vector address value.

Here, the data of the interrupt initialization address is read, and if the value of the fixed value (A3 and A2 bits) in FIG.
If it is determined that the security check is OK in the security mode, then the user mode is entered.
This user mode corresponds to program processing that starts from "0000H" in the program area of the internal ROM 54 used area.
In addition, in FIG. 87, "travel outside designated area" will be described later.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a program starting from "0000H" in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54. As shown in FIG.
Here, in this embodiment, a special call instruction and a normal call instruction are provided as the call instruction by the main CPU 5 .
The special call instruction is called the "RST instruction" and the normal call instruction is called the "CALLF instruction".
The RST instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 1-byte (4-cycle) program. On the other hand, the CALLF instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 2-byte (4-cycle) program. Therefore, since the number of bytes for describing the RST instruction is smaller than the number of bytes for describing the CALLF instruction, using the RST instruction can reduce the program capacity rather than using the CALLF instruction. Therefore, the RST instruction is used to call programs that are frequently called.

Here, the "highly called program" includes, for example, a program that is called many times (multiple times) in one game.
However, "frequently called programs" include, for example, programs that are called at least once in one game, and programs that are likely to be called during a game, although they are not necessarily called at least once in one game. be done.

Also, in this embodiment, addresses that can be called using the RST instruction are limited to predetermined addresses.
Specifically, the "predetermined address" is
0008H
0010H
0018H
0020H
0028H
0030H
0038H
0040H
It consists of eight
It should be noted that these eight addresses are merely examples, and various values (addresses) and number of "predetermined addresses" can be set according to the specifications of the chip.

By storing programs that can be called by the RST instruction at the above eight addresses, the program capacity can be reduced.
On the other hand, as described above, the program area of the used area starts from "0000H", and the power-on program is stored from "0000H". The power-on program corresponds to, for example, "program start processing (M_PRG_START)" shown in FIG. 62 (second embodiment).

Also, as described above, the vector address is "0004H".
Therefore, as shown in FIG.
0000H: Power-on program (start program)
:
0004H: vector address :
0008H: Program 1 called by RST instruction
:
0010H: Program 2 called by RST instruction
:
0018H: Program 3 called by RST instruction
:
0020H: Program 4 called by RST instruction
:
0028H: Program 5 called by RST instruction
:
0030H: Program 6 called by RST instruction
:
0038H: Program 7 called by RST instruction
:
0040H: Program 8 called by RST instruction
:
This is the arrangement of data (including instructions and programs).

Also, a jump instruction requires a capacity of 3 bytes in this embodiment. Therefore, a jump instruction is stored in "0001H" to "0003H", and "0050H", for example, is designated as the jump destination address. After "0050H", the program following "0000H" is stored.
Here, a program including the jump instruction may be called a power-on program, or a program not including the jump instruction may be called a power-on program.
As a result, it is possible to start the power-on program at "0000H", jump to "0050H" with the next jump command of "0001H", and execute the continuation of the power-on program from "0050H".
With this setting, the vector address can be placed at "0004H" while starting the power-on program from "0000H". Furthermore, the RST instruction can be placed at "0008H", "0010H", etc., while starting the power-on program at "0000H".

Incidentally, in the continuation of the power-on program, for example, it is determined whether or not to shift to the setting change mode.
Here, since the voltage is unstable when the power is turned on, the jump instruction may not be executed normally. If the jump instruction is not executed normally, it may take a long time to enter the setting change mode or the setting change mode may not be entered. For this reason, if an operation (for example, a predetermined operation of a setting key) to switch to the setting change mode is performed and the power is turned on, if the switch to the setting change mode is not made within the standard time (T), , it can be determined that the program containing the jump instruction was not executed normally. When the administrator determines that the setting change mode will not be entered by the time (T) as a guideline, the power of the game machine 10 is turned on again. When the power is turned on again, the program starts from the address "0000H" through the security mode again.
Also, it is preferable that the jump command of the power-on program is executed from "0000H" to "0007H". This is to enable use of "0008H" as the RST instruction.

Also, if program 1 called by the RST instruction is stored in "0008H", the program 1 is allocated with a capacity of 8 bytes from "0008H" to "000FH" or a program that can be stored within 8 bytes.
Similarly, when storing the program 2 called by the RST instruction in "0010H", the program 2 is allocated with a capacity of 8 bytes from "0010H" to "0017H", or a program that requires a capacity of 8 bytes or less.

Here, if the program 2 consists of 4 bytes of "0010H" to "0013H", the addresses of "0014H" to "0017H" may be used in any way.
For example, firstly, addresses "0014H" to "0017H" may be set as an unused area ("00000000B" is stored).
Secondly, other programs that can be stored within 4 bytes may be stored in "0014H" to "0017H".
Furthermore, thirdly, a program subsequent to the power-on program starting from "0000H" is stored in "0014H", and a jump instruction (an address where the program subsequent to "0014H" is stored is stored in "0015H" to "0017H"). ) may be stored.

The above is the same for "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H" and "0040H".
For example, when storing program 4 called by the RST instruction in "0020H", if the program 4 has a capacity of 14 bytes from "0020H" to "002DH", the program that calls "0028H" by the RST instruction 5 may be omitted. However, if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it after "0040H" where there is no limit to the program capacity. With this configuration, eight programs can be stored as programs that can be called by the RST instruction.
In addition, when the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, the method of arranging the program is not limited to storing it after "0040H". Then, a jump instruction is stored in "0025H" to "0027H", and the jump instruction jumps to "0040H" and beyond. By doing so, a program that can be called by the RST instruction can be stored in "0028H". By adopting such a method, even if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, eight programs called by the RST instruction can be provided.
In the example of FIG. 88, an instruction to jump to "0050H" is stored in "0001H", and a program following "0000H" is stored after "0050H".

Although the vector address is set to "0004H" in this embodiment, it is not limited to this.
Here, the upper byte of the value of the vector address is the value of the I register. Then, as in this embodiment, after the power is turned on, the I register is initialized as a register of the main CPU 55 without executing the process of setting a specific value to the I register, and the state remains at "00H". The upper byte value of the address is "00H". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when executing processing for setting a specific value in the I register after initializing the I register after power-on, the upper byte value of the vector address can be set to the specific value. .
However, as shown in FIG. 83, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register ranges from "00H" to "11H".
As will be described later, vector addresses are not limited to being provided in the program area of the used area, but can also be provided in the data area of the used area, the program area of the non-used area, and the data area of the non-used area. be.

However, if a process for setting a specific value in the I register is to be executed after initializing the I register after power-on, that much program capacity is required. For example, if the specific value is "02H", it is necessary to provide "LD I, 02H" (an instruction (program) to load "02H" into the I register) after initializing the I register after power-on. If the program requires a capacity of, for example, 2 bytes, that much program storage area is consumed.
On the other hand, when the initialized value "00H" is used as the I register value as in the present embodiment, there is no need to set a specific value in the I register. can save money. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced by setting the upper byte value of the vector address to "00H".

Furthermore, when the I register value is "00H", the value of the vector address is not limited to "0004H". Specifically, the value of the vector address is, for example, "00FEH" and "00FFH" or less, and addresses other than addresses to be called by the RST instruction ("0008H", "0010H", etc. described above). If there is, it can be set arbitrarily. For example, it can be set to "00F4H". If the lower 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is "0100B (4H)", the automatically assigned value of this embodiment shown in FIG. 86B can be used as it is.
When the upper 4-bit value of the lower byte of the vector address is set to "FH" (1111B) as described above, the data value of the interrupt initialization address (3FDAH) in FIG. (Vector address set value) becomes "1111B".

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example when the vector address value is "00F4H". In this case, since "0004H" is not a vector address, the power-on program can be stored in "0000H" to "0004H".
If the jump instruction requires a program capacity of 3 bytes, the jump instruction is arranged in the 3-byte storage area from "0005H" to "0007H", and is called by the RST instruction in "0008H" as in FIG. Program 1 can be stored.

Next, a program called by the RST command, that is, a program called a plurality of times in one game will be described.
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of processing called by the RST instruction, (A), (B), and (C) showing examples 1, 2, and 3, respectively.
Example 1 of FIG. 90(A) is a flow chart showing control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This process corresponds to, for example, the process of step S303 in FIG. 67 (second embodiment), and is a process for setting command data to be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80. FIG.
Furthermore, although not shown, in FIG. 67 (second embodiment), in the game start set processing in step S272, the operating state (whether or not the BB operating symbol is displayed, whether or not the replay operating symbol is displayed, etc.) is set, and control command set 1 is executed.
Similarly, although not shown, in the start switch acceptance process at step S279 in FIG. 67 (second embodiment), an output request at the start of reel rotation is set, and control command set 1 is executed.

In FIG. 90(A), first, in step S151, the main control board 50 executes interrupt prohibition processing. In the next step S152, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) is executed. Then, in step S503, the interrupt processing prohibited in step S151 is canceled (that is, the interrupt is permitted). Interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the control command set 2 by the above processing.
Although detailed processing of the control command set 2 is omitted, this processing is processing for writing control commands. In addition, since interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of control command set 2, malfunction due to execution of interrupt processing during control command write processing can be prevented.

Example 2 of FIG. 90(B) is a flow chart showing the interrupt waiting process (R_INTR_WAIT). This process corresponds to, for example, the process of step S2754 in FIG. 66 (second embodiment) or step S295 in FIG. 67 (second embodiment).
First, in step S161, the main control board 50 acquires an interrupt counter value. This process is a process of storing the interrupt counter value in the A register. A 16-bit (2-byte counter) interrupt counter value is stored at a predetermined address in the working area of the use area of the built-in RWM 53. In step S161, the value stored in the lower 8-bit address is is stored in the A register.
In the next step S162, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the lower 8-bit value of the interrupt counter value has changed. Specifically, the value of the lower 8 bits is subtracted from the value of the A register, and if the result of the operation is not "0" (when the zero flag is "0"), then "Yes" is determined. When it is determined that the value has changed, the processing according to this flow chart ends, and when it is determined that the value has not changed, the processing of step S162 is continued.

Example 3 of FIG. 90(C) is a flow chart showing the countdown (R_CNT_DOWN). This process includes, for example, the process of subtracting the advantageous zone clear counter in step S301 (game end check process) of FIG. 67 (second embodiment), and the timer value It is used for the process of updating the , or the process of updating the number of AT games during the AT game (not shown).
In this process, the counter value is decremented by "1" in step S171, and the process of this flowchart ends.
It should be noted that the three processes shown in FIG. 90 are examples of processes that are called multiple times in one game, and are not limited to these three processes, and many more processes are possible. Then, a program that has a program capacity that can be stored in the above address and that is called many times in one game is set to be called by the RST command.

FIG. 91 is a diagram showing program code area designating addresses and their data values. It should be noted that although it is hereinafter referred to as a "program code area designation address", it may also be referred to as a "program code area setting address".
As shown in FIG. 83, in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, addresses "3FD3H" to "3FD8H" are set as program code area designation addresses.
The main CPU 55 determines that the program code stored within the address range designated in the program code area is normal when executed, and determines that the program code stored outside the address range designated in the program code area is normal. If the program code is executed, it is judged to be abnormal (travel outside the designated area). When the main CPU 55 determines that there is an abnormality (running outside the designated area), the main CPU 55 generates a reset.
In other words, a reset is generated when a program code (instruction) stored outside the specified area is called (instruction fetched).

This is done for the following reasons.
The first reason is that the malicious program code is stored in an area other than the original program area, and the malicious program code is jumped from the original program area to the malicious program code by, for example, a jump instruction, and the malicious program code is executed. Because there is
The second reason is that a runaway may occur when the voltage is unstable immediately after the power is turned on, or a runaway may occur due to heat, and instructions may fly to areas other than the program area. Specifically, for example, when there is an instruction to jump from an A address to a B address, if the instruction is not executed correctly, instructions stored after the B address may not be executed within the design time. In such a case, the power is once turned off and then turned on again (restarted).

FIG. 87 also shows the processing when traveling outside the designated area.
As shown in FIG. 87, when running outside the designated area is detected during execution of the user mode, a reset is generated. In this case, the main CPU 55 initializes the registers, goes through the security mode, and executes the user mode again (executes the program from address "0000H").
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and when travel outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, after initializing the register, the operation may be executed from the user mode without going through the security mode.
In the example of FIG. 87, it is determined whether or not there is a PROM mode request after the register is initialized. You may make it not judge the presence or absence of.
However, when running outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, the initialization of the register is always executed.

FIG. 91A is a diagram showing an address for designating the end address of program code area 1. FIG. "Program code area 1" corresponds to the program area of the used area in FIG. A "program code area 2" to be described later corresponds to the program area outside the use area in FIG.
Here, as shown in FIG. 83, the address range of the program area of the used area is "0000H" to "11FEH". For this reason, in this embodiment, the start address "0000H" is not defined, and only the end address "11FEH" is defined. This eliminates the need for a storage area (2 bytes) for determining the start address "0000H".
If only the end address is defined and the start address is not defined, the main CPU 55 inevitably recognizes the range from the start address to the end address of the built-in memory as the program code area 1 . Since the program code area 1 (the program area of the used area) actually starts from "0000H", there is no problem even if the main CPU 55 recognizes it as described above.

The end address of program code area 1 is stored at addresses "3FD3H" and "3FD4H" (2-byte area) of the program management area. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 91A, the lower byte is stored at address "3FD3H" and the upper byte is stored at address "3FD4H".
Therefore, "FEH" (11111110B) is stored at address "3FD3H", and "11H" (00010001B) is stored at address "3FD4H".

FIG. 91B is a diagram showing an address for designating the start address of program code area 2. In FIG.
The addresses for designating the start address of the program code area 2 are set to "3FD5H" and "3FD6H". As shown in FIG. 83, the address range of the program area of the non-used area is "2000H" to "245DH". Therefore, the start address of the program code area 2 is "2000H".
Therefore, "00H" (000000000B) is stored at address "3FD5H", and "20H" (00100000B) is stored at address "3FD6H".

FIG. 91(C) is a diagram showing an address for designating the end address of the program code area 2. As shown in FIG. Addresses for designating the end address of the program code area 2 are set to "3FD7H" and "3FD8H".
"5DH" (01011101B) is stored at address "3FD7H", and "24H" (00100100B) is stored at address "3FD8H".

As described above, under the condition that the end address of the program code area 1 and the start and end addresses of the program code area 2 are stored in the program management area, the main CPU 55 determines that the program code within these designated address ranges is If it is executed, it is determined to be normal, but if the program code outside the specified address range is executed, it is determined to be abnormal.

Note that it is also possible not to specify the program code area. In this case, "0000H" is stored in all of the program code area 1 end address, the program code area 2 start address, and the program code area 2 end address.
Further, for example, if only the address of the program code area 1 is specified and the address of the program code area 2 is not specified, the end address of the program code area 1 is set to "11FEH" as shown in FIG. The address and end address should be "0000H".

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) Although the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area, it is also possible to provide the vector address in the data area of the use area, for example. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "12H", after the power is turned on, "12H" is stored in the I register.
Also, a vector address may be provided in the program area outside the use area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "20H", after the power is turned on, "20H" is stored in the I register.
Furthermore, a vector address may be provided in the data area outside the use area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "24H", after the power is turned on, "24H" is stored in the I register.
When vector addresses are provided in the data area of the used area, when vector addresses are provided in the program area of the non-used area, and when vector addresses are provided in the data area of the non-used area, vector Simply reading the data value stored in the address results in running outside the designated area, and no reset is applied.

(2) The data value stored in the vector address, that is, the start address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored can be set arbitrarily. Although "1134H" is used in the example of FIG. 86(c), it is not limited to this. Also, the top address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored may be after the vector address or before the vector address.
(3) In the above embodiment, two address ranges are defined as the program code executable range (runnable area) as shown in FIG. may
In determining the executable range of the program code in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM 54, only the end address is defined in the above embodiment, and the start address is not defined. Both can be specified.

(4) In the above embodiment, the addresses storing the programs called by the RST instruction are "0008H", "0010H", "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H", and "0040H" are provided, but the addresses are not limited to these eight addresses. However, it is preferable to set the upper byte of the address storing the program called by the RST instruction to "00H".
By doing so, by providing a module that is called multiple times in one game near the top address (0000H), in the development stage, the module is designed first, and the other modules are designed later ( consideration).

(5) The relationship between the address storing the program called by the RST instruction and the vector address is as follows.
First, as shown in FIG. 88, vector addresses may be placed before all addresses storing programs called by the RST instruction.
Second, as shown in FIG. 89, vector addresses may be placed after all addresses storing programs called by the RST instruction.
Third, between one address (eg, "0020H") storing the program called by the RST instruction and another address (eg, "0028H") storing the program called by the RST instruction (eg, "0026H" and "0027H").

In this case, if the vector address is arranged within the program area (within the range of "0000H" to "00FFH") of the used area, it is not necessary to set the upper byte value of the vector address in the I register after power is turned on. In other words, the program capacity can be reduced by setting the I register value to "00H".
Also, as shown in FIG. 86(B), the A3-A0 bit value in the lower 1 byte of the vector address value is "0100B" in this example. Therefore, at this time, the vector address value becomes "00000000/####0100B"("#" is an arbitrary value of "0" or "1").
Here, the above "####B" (vector address set value) is "0000B" in the example of FIG. 86(A). However, it is not limited to this, and "####B" may be replaced with "1000B (8H)" or "1111B (FH)", for example.
When "####B" is set to "1000B (8H)", the vector address value is "00000000/10000100B", and when "####B" is set to "1111B (FH)", the vector address value is The address value is "00000000/11110100B".

(6) The upper byte value of the vector address value is the I register value and is set to "00H". However, the value of the high-order byte of the vector address may be set to a value other than "00H", for example, "02H", although this is not limited to this, although it partially overlaps with what has been described above. In this case, after the game machine 10 is powered on, the I register is initialized, and then the process of storing "02H" in the I register is executed.
In particular, when the vector address is provided in the program area of the use area in the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register, that is, the upper byte value of the vector address may be in the range of "00H" to "11H".

However, since the I register is initialized (to "00H") each time the gaming machine 10 is powered on, a process of storing "02H", for example, in the I register is executed again after the initialization. . As described above, for example, the program code "LD I, 02H" is provided, and the process of storing "02H" in the I register is executed.
On the other hand, if the value of the upper byte of the vector address is set to "00H" as in this embodiment, the value of the I register becomes "00H". After that, the process of storing the specific value in the I register becomes unnecessary. In other words, there is no need to provide the program code "LD I, 00H". Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced accordingly.

(7) The various modifications shown in the first to third embodiments and the first to third embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate. is.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The fourth embodiment relates to a game machine having biased combinations with different winning combinations (expected number of medals to be won) depending on the operation mode (press order and/or operation timing) of the stop switch 42 .
A "biased combination" has a different winning combination depending on the operation mode of the stop switch 42, and has a unilaterally advantageous pressing order and other pressing order (unilaterally unfavorable pressing order). Then, in a game in which a biased role is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a one-sidedly advantageous pressing order, compared with the case where the stop switch 42 is operated in another pressing order, the number in the game is higher. This is a combination in which the expected value of the number of medals obtained (expected value without considering the expected value related to AT) is high.
The order of pressing the stop switch 42 includes normal pressing (left first stop) and irregular pressing (middle first stop or right first stop). “Normal” corresponds to irregular pressing.

A biased combination is composed of a plurality of types of minor combinations, and winning a biased combination corresponds to multiple winnings of these plurality of types of minor combinations. When a biased combination is won (when a plurality of kinds of minor combinations are won in duplicate), when the stop switch 42 is operated in a one-sidedly advantageous pressing order, the highest payout is achieved by the number-of-pieces priority control (see the first embodiment). A large number of small wins (hereinafter referred to as "high eyes") can be won. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order other than the one-sidedly advantageous pressing order when winning a biased combination, the number priority control (see the first embodiment) is performed to select a small combination other than the minor combination with the highest payout number. A role (hereinafter referred to as “low-rank”) can be won. Incidentally, when the sheet number priority control is executed, generally, a prize is awarded with a higher number "PB=1".
On the other hand, when the number priority control is executed,
a) When the low eye wins with "PB = 1",
b) There is a case where the lowest prize is "PB≠1" or no small winning combination is won (a winning combination is lost).

Furthermore, in the "biased role", the order of pressing the correct answer is not evenly assigned to the order of pressing the six options, and when the winning role of the biased role is won, operating the stop switch 42 by the above-mentioned irregular pressing is advantageous on the one hand. is configured to For this reason, when a biased combination is won, there is a one-sidedly advantageous pushing order (irregular pushing) and a pushing order other than that (one-sidedly disadvantageous pushing order (normal pushing)). In addition, "biased" indicates that the advantageous pushing order is biased toward irregular pushing.
Specifically, in a game in which a biased role is won, the rate of winning a higher prize when the stop switch 42 is operated by normal pressing is defined as "R1 (%)", and the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing. When the percentage of high eyes winning is "R2 (%)",
"R1<R2"
is configured to be
Especially in the fourth embodiment, "R1=0 (%)" is set.

FIG. 92(a) is a diagram showing the type of combination, winning probability, number of payouts for each pressing order of the stop switch 42, etc. in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows. As in the first embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated, a combination lottery is performed by the combination lottery means 61, and the combination shown in FIG. 92 is won with the winning probability shown in the figure. In addition, in FIG. 92, a special combination (bonus combination) is omitted.
In FIG. 92, the biased combination corresponds to biased Bell 1 to biased Bell 4, rare combination A, and rare combination B. In FIG.
Here, as a so-called pushing order bell,
Left center right (123) correct bell Left right center (132) correct bell Middle left right (213) correct bell Middle right left (231) correct bell Right left middle (312) correct bell Right middle left (321) correct bell For example, all bell winning probabilities are set to be the same.
As a result, regardless of the order in which the player completes the game during the game, there is no advantage/disadvantage in the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained based on the winning of each pushing order of the bell.
In other words, the expected value of the number of medals obtained according to the order of pressing the bell is the same between when the game is completed by normal pressing and when the game is completed by irregular pressing.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, there is no case where the normal pressing is the correct pressing order (when a high score is won), and the correct pressing order is limited to irregular pressings.
In other words, when a biased role is won, the order of correct pressing is limited to irregular pressing. When winning the biased role, the prize is not awarded.

The hands that make up the biased bell 1 to biased bell 4 are all a 1-card hand, a 2-card hand, and a 7-card hand. When any one of the biased bells is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order of the irregular pressings, the number-preferred control wins the 7-piece combination of the high bell with "PB=1". . On the other hand, when one of the biased bells is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the incorrect answer, the one-piece or two-piece combination of the low bell is performed by the number-priority control. Win with "PB = 1". Also, when any one of the biased bells is won, if the bells are pressed irregularly but in the order of pressing the wrong answer, the number-preferred control wins the one-piece combination of the low bell with "PB=1".
That is, in this example, when the winning of the biased bell is won, the stop switch 42 will not be missed no matter what order the stop switch 42 is operated.

More specifically, for example, when the biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of middle left and right, a 7-card combination is won with "PB=1". On the other hand, when the biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pushing the wrong answer, middle right left, right left middle, or right middle left, it is configured such that "PB=1" wins a one-piece combination. ing.
On the other hand, when the biased bell 1 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by forward pressing (left-center-right or left-right-center), which is the order of pressing the incorrect answer, "PB=1" results in a one-piece or two-piece combination. Win a prize. It depends on the operation timing of the stop switch 42 which of the 1-card hand and the 2-card hand is won. This is also the case when biased Bell 2 to biased Bell 4 are won.

Similarly, when the biased bell 2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order of middle right left, "PB = 1" will win a 7-piece combination, and the middle left right, right left middle, or right middle left incorrect answer will be won. When the stop switch 42 is operated in order, "PB=1" wins a one-card role.
In addition, when the biased bell 3 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of right, left, middle correct pressing, "PB = 1" will win a 7-piece combination, and the incorrect pressing order of middle left, right, middle right, or right, middle left. When the stop switch 42 is operated with "PB=1", a winning combination of one card is won.
Furthermore, when the biased bell 4 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct order of pressing right, middle, left, "PB = 1" will win a 7-card combination, and pressing the wrong answer, middle left, right, middle right, left, or right, left, middle. When the stop switch 42 is operated in order, "PB=1" wins a one-card role.

Every game, biased bells 1 to 4 are elected with a probability of "4/5" in total. Here, assuming that when the bell is won with a biased bell, the probability of winning is 50% when the 1-symbol combination wins, and the probability of winning the 2-symbol combination is 50%. , the expected number of medals won based on the biased bell is
4/5 x 1/2 x 1 + 4/5 x 1/2 x 2 = 1.2 (sheets)
becomes.
On the other hand, when every game is consumed by irregular pressing, the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained based on the biased bell is
4/5 x 1/4 x 7 + 4/5 x 3/4 x 1 = 2.0 (sheets)
becomes.

Also, the rare role A and the rare role B are types of biased roles. Both the rare combination A and the rare combination B are combinations including a 1-card combination and a 12-card combination.
As shown in FIG. 92, when the rare hand A or rare hand B is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by forward pressing, the pressing order is incorrect. eye) wins.
On the other hand, when the rare combination A or the rare combination B is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing, the pressing order is correct, and "PB=1" wins a 12-card combination (high grade).
Since the winning probability of the total of rare hand A and rare hand B is "1/125", in the case of forward pressing, the expected number of medals to be obtained based on rare hand A and rare hand B is
1/125 x 1 = 0.008 (sheets)
becomes.
On the other hand, in the case of irregular pushing, the expected number of medals to be obtained based on rare hand A and rare hand B is
1/125 x 12 = 0.096 (sheets)
becomes.
As described above, in the game when a biased combination is won, the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained in the game is one-sidedly advantageous for irregular pressings and one-sidedly disadvantageous for regular pressings (FIG. 92(b)).

Common bells, watermelons, and replays are provided as roles other than biased roles.
The common bell does not have the concept of correct pressing order/incorrect pressing order, and no matter in which order the stop switch 42 is operated, a winning combination of 6 is awarded (PB=1).
Watermelon is a small combination that can be won regardless of the order in which the watermelon is pressed when it is won, but it is a combination that can be missed. Therefore, in FIG. 92, "5 cards (when winning)" or "0 cards (when missing)" are displayed. However, depending on the pattern arrangement and the operation timing of the stop switch 42, there may be a difference in the ease of winning, but the explanation of this point is omitted.
The common bell has a winning probability of "1/88" when the payout number is 6.
In addition, the probability of winning the watermelon is "1/200" when the number of payouts is 5 (in the case of no loss). For watermelons, if 50% wins and 50% dropouts, the expected number of medals for the combined total of common bells and watermelons is
6 x 1/88 + 5 x 1/200 x 1/2 ≈ 0.081 (sheets)
is.

From the above, the expected number of medals obtained based on all hands when completing the game by pressing forward is
1.2 + 0.008 + 0.081 = 1.289 (sheets)
becomes.
On the other hand, the expected number of medals obtained based on all hands when the game is digested by irregular pushing is
2.0 + 0.096 + 0.081 = 2.177 (sheets)
becomes.
Therefore, the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained is larger in irregular presses than in regular presses.
Further, in the fourth embodiment, the number of bets (also referred to as “prescribed number”) is “3 (sheets)”. Therefore, the expected number of medals to be obtained per game does not become positive even if the game is completed by irregular pushing every game.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, as in the other embodiments described above, there are normal sections (non-advantageous sections) and advantageous sections. Furthermore, the advantageous section has a non-AT and an AT. Non-AT has non-CZ and CZ (state where AT winning expectation is higher than non-CZ).
In the normal section, the AT lottery (in the following description of the fourth embodiment, the AT lottery including the CZ lottery will be referred to as the AT lottery) is not executed. On the other hand, during the advantageous section and non-AT, AT lottery is executed. The AT lottery can be executed when the rare combination A and the rare combination B (hereinafter, the rare combination A and the rare combination B are simply referred to as "rare combination") are won.
Note that the AT lottery may also be executed when the common bell or watermelon is won, but in the fourth embodiment, the AT lottery can be executed only when the rare combination is won for the sake of simplicity of explanation.

In addition, the winning expectation level of the AT when the stop switch 42 is operated by forward pressing at the time of winning the rare role (also referred to as "winning probability", "winning ratio", "winning expected value", etc.) is set to "P1". , When the winning expectation of the AT when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing when winning the rare hand is "P2",
P1 > P2
is configured to Therefore, since it is not known when a rare role will be won during the game, it is advantageous for the player to complete the game by always pressing forward in order to increase the expectation of winning the AT in the advantageous section and non-AT. becomes (FIG. 92(b)).
Note that the winning expectation "P2" of the AT may be a value exceeding "0" or may be "0". In the fourth embodiment, "P2=0".

Since the AT lottery is performed on the basis that the start switch 41 is operated and a rare combination is won (step S283 in FIG. 102 to be described later), the stop switch 42 is not yet operated at the timing when the AT lottery is executed. do not have.
Therefore, for example, the AT lottery at the time of winning the rare role is performed at the timing of winning the rare role (at the time of operation of the start switch 41), and if the AT is won and the game is an irregular push this time, the game is played this time. (At the end of the current game or at the start of the next game), the winning of the AT concerned is invalidated (the winning of the AT is discarded).

As described above, if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing when winning a biased combination, the expected number of medals to be obtained in the game becomes higher than when the stop switch 42 is operated by regular pressing.
However, as described above, in the advantageous section and non-AT, when the biased hand is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated by normal pressing, the right of AT may be granted, but the stop switch 42 may be given by irregular pressing. When manipulated, it does not grant AT rights.
For this reason, the total ball payout performance (the entire game) including the ball payout in the AT is higher in the normal push than in the irregular push (FIG. 92(b)).
For this reason, in the fourth embodiment, the pressing order of normal pressing (left first stop) is referred to as "recommended pressing order", and the pressing order of irregular pressing (middle first stop or right first stop) is referred to as "non-recommended "Push order" (Fig. 92(b)).
“Recommended” means that if the game is executed in that order in the advantageous section and non-AT, the total expected number of medals (the entire game) will be higher than in other orders.

However, forward pressing is only a "recommendation" and not an "instruction" or the like. In other words, irregular pushing is "not recommended" and not "prohibited" or the like.
In the fourth embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order in the advantageous section and non-AT, a recommended image (which may also be referred to as a "predetermined image" or "specific image") is displayed.
Here, the "recommended image" is an image that informs the player that the forward pressing is the recommended pressing order, in other words, that the forward pressing is the pressing order that is advantageous to the player. Note that the display of the recommended image is a display that notifies the player of the recommended pressing order, and is different from a warning display. When the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing, there is no penalty or disadvantages for the player in the next game and subsequent games. However, in the game in which the stop switch 42 is operated by normal pressing and in the game in which the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing, the AT winning expectation in the game differs as described above.
Therefore, the display of the recommended image is intended to inform the player that the expected number of medals to be obtained in total (the entire game) will decrease if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing. Here, "total (entire game) expected number of medals to be obtained is reduced" means, for example, that the degree of expectation for winning an AT is lowered, or that the expected value for the number of medals to be obtained during an AT when the AT is won is reduced. , the ceiling number of games until winning AT is increased.
In addition, the "recommended image" is, for example, "Left press (forward press) is recommended", "Left press (forward press) is advantageous", "Left press (forward press) is easier to win AT" and other images. However, as the recommended image, there are various images other than the above.

No recommended image is displayed in the game in which the stop switch 42 is pressed forward. On the other hand, in the game in which the stop switch 42 is irregularly pressed in the advantageous section and non-AT, the recommended image is displayed at the time of the first stop. Further, even when the recommended image is displayed, the display is ended at least when the next game starts (when the start switch 41 is operated). However, it is also possible to end the display of the recommended image when the current game is completely stopped or at the timing of the betting operation for the next game. In this case, it is preferable to execute processing for matching the internal control state and the effect image at the timing when the recommended image display ends. By configuring in this way, the period during which the recommended images are displayed is shortened. It is possible to prevent the later operation from deteriorating due to knowing that it is.
Also, a sound for notifying the recommended pressing order may be output together with the recommended image or instead of the recommended image. Appropriate and inappropriate examples of the notification of the recommended pressing order including the display of the recommended image will be given below.
(1) Examples of inappropriate notification of recommended pressing order a) Displaying "prohibition of irregular pressing" is inappropriate as notification of recommended pressing order. This is because the word "prohibited" corresponds to a warning expression. In the gaming machine 10, it is possible to inform the player of the recommended pressing order of the stop switches 42, but since the player decides how to press the stop switches 42, a specific pressing order is required. Forbidding it is inappropriate.

b) Displaying "DANGER" is inappropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is because, like the above "prohibited", it falls under the expression of a warning.
c) Displaying a black and yellow striped pattern, displaying a prohibition mark (indicating a red straight line slanting downward to the right in a red circle), displaying an "X", etc. It is inappropriate as a notification of This is because these images are recognized as warnings, dangers, prohibitions, etc., according to social conventions.
d) The output of a sound similar to a buzzer or alarm is inappropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is because it is recognized as a warning sound or a prohibited sound in socially accepted terms. However, it is of course possible to output a sound such as a buzzer or an alarm when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10 such as a medal selector error or a hopper error.

(2) Appropriate examples for notification of recommended pressing order a) Displaying "Left pressing (forward pressing) is recommended" as described above is optimal for the player (maximizing profit for the player). Since the game method (push order) is notified, it is suitable for notification of the recommended push order.
b) Outputting a stop sound of the reels 31 that is different from the normal one is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. If the sound is generally used as an effect of the game machine 10, it does not correspond to the warning sound.
c) Turning off the backlight of the reels 31 after the full stop is appropriate as notification of the recommended pushing order. This is because, like the above, it is generally used as an effect of the game machine 10 .

d) Darkening the liquid crystal screen is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is for the same reason as c) above. Note that the timing of the blackout may be at the time of the first stop, at the time of the second stop, at the time of the complete stop, or after the complete stop.
e) Not outputting the stop sound of the reels 31 is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is for the same reason as c) above. Note that it is possible to output no stop sound only at the first stop, not output stop sounds at the first and second stops, or not output all stop sounds. In addition, not outputting the winning sound of the winning combination is also appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order.

f) When a continuous effect over multiple games is output, it is appropriate to interrupt the progress of the continuous effect when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is for the same reason as c) above.
g) In the case where the number of remaining games is displayed in the indication, not displaying the remaining number of games by subtraction is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. It should be noted that when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order during the precursor, the subtraction processing of the number of remaining games during the precursor is not executed in terms of internal control. This is because even if it is done in this way, it is merely announcing the fact and does not correspond to a warning or the like.

h) Displaying an image and/or outputting a voice saying "Pressing irregularly" is appropriate as notification of the recommended pressing order. This is because, as with g) above, this is merely an announcement of the fact and does not correspond to a warning or the like.
i) It is appropriate to display an image stating "Forward pressing increases the AT performance and lowers the base. Irregular pressing decreases the AT performance and increases the base." This is for the same reason as g) above.
j) Display related to the number of games after satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, moving to an advantageous section or starting a new cycle related to a lottery such as AT) (for example, after moving to an advantageous section When the number of games played or the number of games remaining until the end of the cycle related to the lottery such as AT), a predetermined game (for example, one game in the advantageous section, one cycle related to the lottery such as AT) It is appropriate to notify the recommended pressing order not to display the addition or subtraction of the display related to the number of games based on the operation in the non-recommended pressing order in the game).
In addition, after shifting to the advantageous section, even if the specified number of games or the specified number of cycles are completed, if the game state is not controlled to an advantageous game state such as AT, the game state is forcibly controlled to an advantageous game state such as AT. A relief function (also referred to as a "ceiling") is known.
When the operation is performed in the non-recommended pressing order in the predetermined game, the internal control does not execute the addition processing (in the case of the increment counter) or the subtraction processing (in the case of the decrement counter) of the number of games related to the relief function. , the advantageous section clear counter is subtracted. The reason is the same as g) above.

FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (example 1) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of pushing (forward pushing) in the advantageous section and during non-AT. In the figure, the time series is in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d).
In this example, it is assumed that the current stage is displayed on the image display device 23 during the advantageous section and non-AT. The stage has a normal stage and a high probability stage, and is set so that when the stage is high probability, the AT winning expectation is higher than when it is normal. In addition, when the player wins the rare role under the condition that the stage is normal, a lottery will be executed to determine whether the stage will be promoted from the normal stage with a high degree of certainty. The following example shows an example when the stage is promoted from normal to high probability.
In (a) of the drawing, a pre-game-start effect is displayed on the image display device 23 before the game starts. Also, the stage at this point is normal.
Then, when the start switch 41 is operated as shown in (b) in the figure and a rare combination is won, the stage promotion suggesting effect is started.

Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the recommended pressing order is confirmed at this point, so the recommended image is not displayed and the left (first) switch is pressed. As a production when the stop switch 42 is operated, a stage promotion suggesting production develops. Note that this example shows an example in which the stage promotion suggesting effect develops when the stop switch 42 is first operated, but when the game starts (while all reels 31 are rotating) and when the left stop switch 42 is operated (when the left reel 31 stops) ) does not have to change the performance.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, when all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, an effect to the effect that the stage promotion is successful is output as an effect after all the reels 31 are stopped. Then, the stage is switched from the usual one to high accuracy.
As described above, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the recommended image is not displayed.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (example 1) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order (irregular pressing) in the example of FIG. In this example, by winning the rare role, the player wins the lottery where the stage is highly likely to be promoted from normal, but the winning is invalidated due to the non-recommended pushing order, and the stage is not promoted with high probability. . In the figure, the time series is in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d)→(e)→(f) (the same applies to FIGS. 95 to 98 below).
In FIG. 94, (a) and (b) are both the same as FIGS. 93(a) and (b). Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the first stop is the non-recommended push order, the main control board 50 transmits the command to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 determines that the first stop is the non-recommended push order based on the received command, the sub-control board 80 displays the recommended image. This recommended image is an image that covers substantially the entire image display area of the image display device 23, and the stage promotion suggesting effect up to that point is hidden by the recommended image and becomes invisible.

Note that the sound output from the speaker 22 after the recommended image is displayed may be the sound corresponding to the effect image up to that point (that is, the same sound as in FIG. 93), or the sound corresponding to the effect image up to that point. may be interrupted to output the audio for the recommended image. As the sound for the recommended image, for example, a sound such as "Left push is recommended" may be output once or repeatedly multiple times. Also, while outputting the sound corresponding to the effect image up to that point, the sound corresponding to the recommended image such as "It is recommended to press the left button" may be superimposed on the sound and output.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, even if all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the recommended image is maintained.
Also, as shown in (e) in the figure, the display of the recommended image is maintained even when a bet operation is performed. Further, when the start switch 41 is operated as shown in (f) in the figure, the display of the recommended image ends at that timing, and the image before the recommended image is displayed returns.
Note that the example of FIG. 94 is an example in which the start switch 41 is operated within 3 seconds from the time of complete stop of (d) in the figure. This is because, as will be described later, when the recommended image is displayed, the demonstration display is executed after 3 seconds have passed since the stoppage. This point is the same for FIGS. 96 and 98 as well.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (example 2) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of pushing (forward pushing) in the advantageous section and during non-AT.
In this example, character images are displayed on the image display device 23 (corresponding to characters A, B, and C in (a) in the figure), and if a rare role is won, a lottery will be held to determine whether a new character will be obtained. to run. Then, when the number of characters reaches a predetermined number (for example, "5"), the game is shifted to CZ or the AT lottery is preferentially treated. The following example shows an example of acquiring a new character D by winning a rare role.
(a) in the figure shows the situation before the start of the game. In this situation, a pre-game effect is output, and characters A, B, and C are image-displayed as characters.
Next, it is assumed that the process proceeds to (b) in the figure, the start switch 41 is played, and the rare combination is won. As a result, the character acquisition effect is started.

Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the first stop operation is performed in the recommended pressing order, the recommended pressing order is confirmed at this point. Character acquisition production develops as a production of. Although this example shows an example in which the character acquisition effect develops when the stop switch 42 is first operated, it is of course possible that the effect does not change between when the game is started and when the game is first stopped.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, when all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, the effect after the stop of all the reels 31 is the effect of newly acquiring the character D (acquisition success effect). is output. Then, in addition to the characters A, B, and C up to now, the newly obtained character D is displayed.
Furthermore, as shown in (e) in the drawing, when a bet operation is performed, the game transitions to the pre-game-start effect. Next, the process proceeds to (f) in the figure, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the game start effect of the game is output.
Thus, no recommended image is displayed when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order. Also, the newly acquired character D is displayed as it is in the next game.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the flow of effects (example 2) when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order (irregular pressing) in the example of FIG. In this example, as in Example 1 above, a winning lottery for a character is won by winning a rare combination, but the winning is invalidated due to the non-recommended pressing order, and the number of characters does not increase.
In FIG. 96, (a) and (b) are both the same as FIG. 95 (a) and (b). Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the first stop is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed, and the effect up to that point is hidden.
Next, as shown in (d) in the figure, even if all the stop switches 42 are operated and all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the recommended image is maintained.
Also, as shown in (e) in the figure, the display of the recommended image is maintained even when a bet operation is performed. Furthermore, when the start switch 41 is operated as shown in (f) in the figure, the display of the recommended image ends at that timing, and the image before winning the rare combination (the image in which the character is not acquired) returns.

97 and 98 are diagrams for explaining the state of the (image) layer when the recommended image is displayed. 98 is a diagram following FIG. 97. FIG.
The examples of FIGS. 97 and 98 correspond to example 1 of FIG.
In FIGS. 97 and 98, both the front layer and the rear layer are not limited to one layer, but actually consist of a plurality of layers.
In this example, the recommended image is output by the front layer, and the normal effect image is output by the back layer.

In the figure, the front layer is transparent before the game starts in (a) and when the start switch is operated in (b). Therefore, the player can see only the effect image of the rear layer.
Next, as shown in (c) in the figure, when the stop switch 42 is operated with the first stop being the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed using the front layer. Also, the recommended image for the front layer makes the rear layer invisible to the player. Further, as shown in (c) in the figure, even when the recommended image is displayed on the front layer, the effect on the back layer is output (displayed) as it is without being stopped. The image of the back layer in FIG. 93(c) corresponds to the effect image in FIG. 93(c).

Next, at (d) in FIG. 98, the recommended image of the front layer is maintained as it is even at the time of full stop. In addition, in the rear layer at this time, the effect of the recommended pressing order progresses, and the stage advancement success effect and the state in which the stage has shifted with high certainty are output. This image corresponds to FIG. 93(d). However, since the back layer cannot be seen by the player while the recommended image is being displayed, the player cannot see the stage advancement success effect.
Next, proceeding to (e) in the drawing, even if a betting operation is performed, the display of the recommended image is maintained. Also, the back layer at this time advances to the effect image at the time of the bet operation. Also, at this point, the high probability state after the stage promotion is displayed.

Next, proceed to (f) in the figure, and when the start switch 41 is operated (at the start of the game), at this point the internal control state (the normal stage is maintained because it was operated in the non-recommended pushing order) and the effect image is executed. This returns the stage to normal. Also, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the recommended image ends and the front layer becomes transparent. As a result, the player can see the image display contents of the rear layer at this time.
If the image display is controlled as described above, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image can be displayed on the front layer without stopping the image display in the recommended pressing order. , can simplify program processing. In addition, during the period when the internal control state and the effect image do not match, the recommended image is displayed on the front layer, and the effect image on the back layer is not visible to the player. There is no misidentification by the person.
Instead of returning the image when the start switch 41 is operated, the image may be returned when the bet operation is performed (timing shown in FIG. 98(e)). Specifically, at the time of the bet operation, the internal control state (that the normal stage is maintained because the operation was performed in the non-recommended pressing order) and the effect image are matched at this point. This returns the stage to normal. On the other hand, when a bet operation is made, the display of the recommended image on the front layer ends, so the player can see the image display content on the back layer at this point.
Further, in the above example, the front layer is provided in advance, and the front layer is transparent during the period when the recommended image is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the front layer is not provided during the period when the recommended image is not displayed, and the front layer is arranged only during the period when the recommended image is displayed.

Next, the relationship between the recommended image, the game state, the game section, and the number of bets will be described.
1. Relationship Between Recommended Image and Game State In the fourth embodiment, a lottery for a special combination (bonus combination) is performed in the non-special game state. When the special combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is stopped and displayed, the game shifts to a special game (becomes a special game state).
In 4th Embodiment, it has 1BB as a special part.
During 1BB operation, RB is continuously operated. During the RB continuous operation, every game, the winning ALL condition device operates. In the game in which the winning ALL condition device is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a winning combination with a predetermined number of payouts is won regardless of the order of pressing the stop switch 42 (there is no advantage/disadvantage depending on the order of pressing the stop switch 42). be done.
Also, during 1BB operation, control is performed so as not to execute the AT lottery.
As described above, there is no recommended pressing order in the game during 1BB operation. Therefore, in the game during 1BB operation, the recommended image is not displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing. In a game during 1BB operation, the player can complete the game in any order of pressing. In addition, the game during 1BB operation (during RB continuous operation) is constructed so that the expected number of medals to be obtained is the same regardless of the pressing order.

Also, during AT, the recommended image is not displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing. During the AT, as a general rule, when a biased combination is won, the correct pressing order is reported, and the player follows the correct pressing order, so irregular pressing is performed in the game. Of course, the recommended image is not displayed in this case.
Also, during the AT, even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing in a game other than the game in which the biased role is won, for example, in the game when the role is not won, the recommended image is not displayed.

2. Relationship Between Recommended Image and Game Section The fourth embodiment has a non-advantageous section (normal section) and an advantageous section, as in the other embodiments described above.
Then, the AT lottery can be executed in the advantageous section, but the AT lottery is not executed in the non-advantageous section. Therefore, in the non-advantageous section, there is no recommended pushing order that is advantageous in the AT lottery. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing during the non-advantageous section, the recommended image is not displayed.
For this reason, when the recommended image is not displayed even if the irregular push is performed in the normal state (special game state or non-AT state), the player is informed that the game is in a non-advantageous section and that the AT lottery is executed. It is possible to suggest that it will not be done.
Although detailed description is omitted in the fourth embodiment, during the non-advantageous section (normal section), a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is executed, and for example, all except when the result of the internal lottery is not won. It is set to win the lottery to move to the advantageous section. Therefore, for example, even if the difference number exceeds 2400 in the advantageous section and the advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is usually one to several games. Therefore, even if the player knows that it is a non-advantageous section (confirms that the advantageous section display LED 78 is turned off) and presses irregularly, the expected value for increasing medals is small and can be ignored. degree.
Contrary to the above, the recommended image may be displayed when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing even in an unadvantageous section. With this configuration, it is possible to make it impossible to determine whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section based on whether or not the recommended image is displayed at the time of irregular pressing. Furthermore, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lit even in an advantageous section, or if a lamp (section indicator) indicating an advantageous section is not provided, the effect can be further exhibited. .

3. Relationship Between Recommended Image and Number of Bets (Prescribed Number) In the fourth embodiment, the game can be executed with either the number of bets “2” or the number of bets “3”.
The number of bets "3" is the number of bets advantageous to the player. In other words, the number of bets “3” is the recommended number of bets.
Let "P1" be the AT winning expectation (winning rate, winning probability) when the game is played with the number of bets "3", and let "P2" be the expectation of AT winning when the game is played with the number of bets "2". when
P1 > P2
is.
In particular, P1>P2×1.5
is.
Therefore, even if the game is completed with the bet number of "2", the AT win expectation will not be more advantageous than when the game is completed with the bet number of "3".
In particular, in the fourth embodiment, when a game is played with the number of bets "2", the AT lottery is not executed regardless of the result of the internal lottery (in the program processing, the AT lottery process is skipped). there is That is, "P2=0".

Furthermore, the winning probability of each role when the game is played with the number of bets “2” is less than “2/3” compared to the probability of winning each role when the game is played with the number of bets “3”. set. As a result, even if the game is completed with the number of bets "2", the expected number of medals to be obtained will not exceed the number of bets.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the AT lottery is not executed regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42 when the number of bets is "2". Even if the switch 42 is operated, the recommended image is not displayed. This is because if the recommended image is displayed without executing the AT lottery, the player may be confused. In addition, when the recommended image is not displayed even if the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing in spite of the advantageous section and non-AT, the player is notified that the number of bets in the game is "2". can make you aware.

Next, demonstration image display (hereinafter simply referred to as “demonstration display”) will be described.
After the complete stop (after the payout process is completed if there is a payout process for medals), the display of the image display device 23 is turned off when the operation to advance the game (bet operation) is not performed even after a predetermined time has passed. There is a case where the performance display at the end of the game shifts to the demonstration display (an example of not shifting to the demonstration display will be described later). The demonstration display is, for example, a promotional video that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the game machine 10, or the like.
In the fourth embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, after the reel 31 is completely stopped, the transition to the demonstration display is performed. The times are set differently.
Specifically, the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, and at a certain timing (at the start of payout, at the end of payout, after the reel 31 is completely stopped, or for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the stoppage of the reel 31). After the lapse of time) until the transition to the demonstration display is defined as "t1", the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of pushing, and the reel 31 is completely stopped or at a certain timing after the complete stop until the transition to the demonstration display. When the time of is "t2",
t1 < t2
is set to

That is, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, transition to the demonstration display occurs earlier than when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order.
The purpose of this setting is to shift from the display of the recommended image to the demonstration display as early as possible so that the operation of the stop switch 42 in the non-recommended pressing order can be made as unnoticeable as possible. When a player selects a gaming machine on which to play a game, if a recommended image is displayed, it can be seen that the stop switch 42 has been operated in the non-recommended pressing order, so some kind of penalty has occurred. This is because there is a risk that the player may mistakenly think that the player is not playing games, and avoid playing games on the game machine.
In addition, as described above, in the game in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, even if the AT lottery target role is won, the AT will not be won (or even if the AT is won, it will be invalid). ), and no penalty will occur in the next game or later after the game in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended push order. However, on the 5th machine (conventional game machine), if an irregular push was performed, the penalty (for the specified game, AT lottery, etc.) would continue even after the next game, so it is the same as the 5th machine. It is not desirable for the display of the recommended image to continue for longer than necessary, because there is a risk of confusion as to whether a penalty has occurred.

In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of pushing and the display shifts to the demonstration display, the demonstration display is canceled by the betting operation (medal insertion operation) and returns to the normal display (game standby effect display).
On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order to shift to the demonstration display, the demonstration display is not canceled by the bet operation (medal insertion operation), and the demonstration display continues. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and the game is started, the display returns to the normal display (game standby effect display).
After the recommended image is displayed, when the time "t2" elapses after the stoppage and the display shifts to the demo display, the demo display layer is placed before the layer that displays the recommended image. . As a result, during the demonstration display, the display of the recommended image is invisible to the player.
Then, even if a betting operation is performed, the display of the recommended image and the demonstration display are maintained. Further, when the start switch 41 is operated, both the recommended image display and the demonstration display are erased, and the normal display layer positioned further behind the recommended image display is displayed.
The examples of FIGS. 94, 96, and 98 show examples in which the display of the recommended image returns to the normal display without transitioning to the demonstration display. In other words, this is an example in which the start switch 41 is operated before the time "t2" has elapsed after a complete stop.

Next, transition to demonstration display will be described using a time chart.
FIG. 99 shows an image display, push button lamp state, and menu (screen) display when a bet operation and a start switch (abbreviated as “start” in FIGS. 99 to 101) are operated after the demonstration display. is a time chart showing a replay non-winning time. In the figure, (a) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the recommended pressing order, and (b) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the non-recommended pressing order.

Although not shown in FIG. 1 , push buttons are connected to the sub-control board 80 . A push button is also called a production button, a chance button, an operation button, an enter button, a sub button, a menu button, or the like.
In addition, a lamp (push button lamp) is provided inside the push button, and is lit when the push button is enabled, and is extinguished when the push button is disabled. there is Thus, the player can determine whether or not the push button is valid by checking whether the push button lamp is illuminated.
The first use of the push button is to display an effect prompting the user to operate the push button, and to develop the effect when the push button operation is detected.
A second method is to display a menu by performing an operation during game standby. In the menu, for example, issuance of a so-called two-dimensional code for My Slot, game flow, payout table, etc. can be displayed. The menu can be displayed when the push button lamp is on, and cannot be displayed when the push button lamp is off.

In FIG. 99(a), it is assumed that the normal effect is displayed at the time of the first bet operation.
Further, during a predetermined period during which the demonstration display during the normal effect is not executed (for example, from the time of bet operation until 5 seconds have elapsed after all stops), it is not possible to shift to the menu. Therefore, the push button lamp is off.
The above state is maintained until five seconds elapse after the game is started (the start switch 41 is operated), all the stop switches 42 are operated, and all the reels 31 are stopped. Note that "5 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as "3 seconds" and "10 seconds" are possible.

Also, although only "Normal effect" is displayed from the start of the game to the end of the game, the content of the effect naturally changes as the game progresses.
When 5 seconds have passed after a complete stop, the push button lamp lights up. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the menu can be displayed (shift to the menu is possible). When the push button is operated while the push button lamp is lit, the menu can be displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the push button is not operated (the menu is not displayed).

Further, when it is determined that 60 seconds have elapsed after the reels 31 have completely stopped, the image display is switched from the normal effect display to the demonstration display. Note that this "60 seconds" is an example, and various settings such as "20 seconds" and "30 seconds" are possible. Generally, however, the demonstration display is after the push button lamp is lit.
Here, in FIG. 99(a), the demonstration display is executed on condition that no bet is made. Therefore, it is assumed that no prizes have been replayed (no automatic bets have been made) and no medals have been inserted in the game.
When a bet operation is performed (or medals are inserted) while the demonstration display is being performed, the demonstration display is ended and the normal presentation is started. In addition, with the transition to the normal effect, the menu display is disabled and the push button lamp is also turned off.

FIG. 99(b) is an example in which the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order unlike FIG. 99(a).
In FIG. 99(b), when, for example, the middle stop switch 42 is operated as the first stop and the non-recommended pressing order is reached, the image display is switched from the normal effect display to the recommended image display at that time. As described above, the recommended image display layer is arranged before the normal effect display layer.
Then, when 3 seconds have passed since the complete stop, the recommended image display is switched to the demonstration display. Note that "3 seconds" is an example, and "5 seconds" or the like may be used. As described above, in the case of the recommended pressing order, the display is switched to the demonstration display 60 seconds after the full stop, but in the non-recommended pressing order, the display is switched to the demonstration display 3 seconds after the full stop. As a result, it is possible to switch to the demo display at an early stage after the full stop in the non-recommended pressing order. There is a high possibility that it is already displayed as a demo. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand that the stop switch 42 was operated in the non-recommended pressing order in the last game of the previous player.

Also, during the recommended pressing order, the demonstration display was changed to the normal effect display by the bet operation. On the other hand, in the non-recommended pressing order, even if a bet operation (a medal insertion operation) is performed, the demonstration display does not transition to the normal effect display (and the recommended image display, which is a layer behind the demonstration display). Therefore, for example, after finishing a game in which the non-recommended pressing order is performed, even if another player inserts medals into this gaming table, the normal effect display (and the recommended image display, which is a layer behind the demo display), is displayed. does not migrate.
Then, when the bet operation is performed and the start switch 41 is operated (when the game is started), the demonstration display (and the recommended image display, which is the layer behind it) ends, and the normal effect state is displayed. transition to

Furthermore, when a small winning combination is won, the winning number is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 (FIG. 1). The display of the acquired number is cleared, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the payout process, or at the start of the demonstration display (after 60 seconds have passed since the game was completely stopped). However, for example, when the biased bell is won, the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, and the 7-card hand is won, the winning number display LED 78 displays "07". Similarly, when the rare combination is won, the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, and the 12-card combination is won, "12" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. - 特許庁

However, when the player ends the game with the game winning 7 or 12, the next player is displayed as "07" or "12" on the winning number display LED 78 of the gaming machine. may be discovered. As a result, there is a risk that the next player will avoid playing games on that gaming machine.
Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the 7-card hand or the 12-card hand is won, and the winning number is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order. It is preferable to clear the winning number displayed on the winning number display LED 78 earlier than the time. For example, in FIG. 99(b), the display of the acquired number display LED 78 may be cleared at the timing of shifting to the demonstration display three seconds after the stoppage.
It should be noted that when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the display of the obtained number display LED 78 may be cleared when a predetermined time has elapsed after the full stop. Alternatively, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the display of the winning number display LED 78 may be maintained until the betting operation of the next game, and the display of the winning number display LED 78 may be cleared by the betting operation.

FIG. 100 is a time chart showing image display, push button lamp states, and menu display when a replay win (during automatic betting) is shown. In the figure, (a) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the recommended pressing order, and (b) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the non-recommended pressing order.
In FIG. 100(a), if an automatic bet is placed based on the win in the replay after the stoppage, the post-betting state is the same as in FIG. 99(a). Even if 60 seconds elapse later, the demo display is not executed. As a result, the push button lamp will not light and the menu cannot be displayed.
On the other hand, in FIG. 100(b), when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order in the first stop, the recommended image is displayed at that point in the same manner as in FIG. 99(b).
Furthermore, when 3 seconds have passed after the complete stop, the recommended image display is shifted to the demonstration display. Therefore, in this respect, the winning replay is different from the recommended pressing order in which the demo display is not performed.
This demonstration display is continued while automatic betting is being performed, and when the start switch 41 is operated (game is started), the demonstration display is shifted to the normal effect display.

FIG. 101 is a time chart showing the image display, the state of the push button lamps, and the menu display when a bet operation (including medal insertion operation) is performed within 3 seconds after a complete stop, and a start operation is performed 60 seconds after the complete stop. is. In the figure, (a) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the recommended pressing order, and (b) is an example of operating the stop switch 42 in the non-recommended pressing order.
In FIG. 101(a), if a bet operation is performed before 3 seconds have elapsed after the stoppage, the post-bet state similar to that shown in FIG. Even if 60 seconds elapse later, the display does not shift to the demonstration display. As a result, the push button lamp does not light up and the menu cannot be displayed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 101(b), when the first stop is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed at that point in the same way as in FIG. 99(b).
Furthermore, even if a betting operation is performed within 3 seconds after the stoppage, the recommended image display is maintained. Next, when 3 seconds have passed after the complete stop, the recommended image display is shifted to the demonstration display. That is, even if a betting operation is performed, the recommended image display is limited to 3 seconds after the complete stop, and when 3 seconds have passed since the complete stop, the recommended image display is switched to the demonstration display. .
As described above, in the recommended pressing order, either the demo display is displayed when 60 seconds have passed since the vehicle stopped completely (Fig. 99(a)), or the normal display is displayed even after 60 seconds have passed since the vehicle has completely stopped. Either the effect display is maintained (FIG. 100(a) or FIG. 101(a)).
On the other hand, in the non-recommended pressing order, the recommended image is displayed at the first stop, and when 3 seconds have passed after the full stop, the demo display is displayed.

As described above, FIGS. 99(b), 100(b), and 101(b) are limited to advantageous sections and non-AT. During the game state, the recommended image is not displayed even if the button is pressed irregularly. For this reason, when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing during a non-advantageous section (normal section), during an AT, or during a special game state, FIGS. Same as a).
Also, as shown in FIG. 99(a), when the recommended pressing order is used (when the replay is not won), the demonstration display is performed after 60 seconds have passed after the complete stop. In some cases, the demo may not be displayed even if the Therefore, the example of FIG. 99(a) does not necessarily mean that the demonstration display is always performed after 60 seconds have passed since the complete stop.
Furthermore, even in a situation where the demonstration is not displayed (a situation in which the menu is not displayed) when the operation is performed in the recommended pressing order, such as during the above-mentioned continuous effect or CZ, if the operation is performed in the non-recommended pressing order. displays a demo after 3 seconds have elapsed after the vehicle stops completely.
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 99(b), 100(b), and 101(b), in the present embodiment, the demonstration display and the recommended image display are terminated by the start operation, and the normal effect display is restored. This is because the effect display contents are switched at the time of the start operation (a new effect command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80). On the other hand, in the case where the effect display content is switched by the bet operation, the bet operation may return to the normal effect display. In this case, an effect command is newly transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 at the time of the bet operation.
In any of the above cases, the demonstration display and the recommended image display are terminated when or after the effect display content matches the internal control state, and the effect display content visible to the player and the internal control state do not match. prevent it from occurring.

Next, transmission of the pressing order instruction number and transmission of the effect group number will be described.
The pushing order instruction number is a number corresponding to a correct pushing order (a pushing order for winning a higher prize) when winning a winning combination having an advantageous pushing order (a biased combination in the fourth embodiment). A combination lottery is performed by the combination lottery means 61, and when a biased combination is won, a pushing order instruction number selecting means 63 (FIG. 1) selects a pressing order instruction number corresponding to the winning biased combination.
When the pushing order of the biased role is 6 choices, the pushing order instruction number is
Left middle right correct answer: Push order instruction number "A1"
Right and left middle correct answer: Push order instruction number "A2"
Middle left and right correct answer: Push order instruction number "A3"
Middle right left correct answer: Push order instruction number "A4"
Right, left, middle correct answer: Push order instruction number "A5"
Right middle left correct answer: Push order instruction number "A6"
and
However, in the fourth embodiment, the order of pressing the correct answer when winning a biased bell is the irregular pressing (four options).
Middle left and right correct answer: Push order instruction number "A1"
Middle right left correct answer: Push order instruction number "A2"
Right, left, middle correct answer: Push order instruction number "A3"
Right middle left correct answer: Push order instruction number "A4"
may be
Also, when a rare combination is won, an arbitrary number may be selected from the pushing order instruction numbers "A1" to "A4". Alternatively, a pressing order instruction number may be provided to indicate an irregular pressing when a rare combination is won.

The main control board 50 selects the pushing order instruction number when a biased role is won during AT (instruction game), and displays the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number on the acquisition number display LED 78 (instruction monitor). Display instructional information. For example, when the pressing order instruction number is "A1", "=1" may be displayed as the pressing order instruction information.
Furthermore, when displaying the pressing order instruction information, the main control board 50 transmits a command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives a command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number, it becomes possible to output information regarding the correct pressing order. In other words, the command corresponding to the pressing order instruction number transmitted by the main control board 50 is a command capable of specifying the correct pressing order. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 displays an image of the correct key pressing order on the image display device 23 .
In the fourth embodiment as well, the main control board 50 can transmit the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section and AT. Therefore, even if a pressing order instruction number is selected by the pressing order instruction number selection means 63 in an advantageous section and other than during AT, the pressing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . It should be noted that it is not necessary to select the push order instruction number except in the advantageous section and during the AT.

On the other hand, the effect group number is a number corresponding to the winning number, as in the first embodiment, and is information for enabling the sub-control board 80 to output the effect corresponding to the winning combination.
A performance group number is selected not only for a game winning a role but also for a game not winning a role.
Further, the effect group number selected in a game in which a winning combination having an advantageous pressing order is won is information indicating that a winning combination having an advantageous pressing order has been won. It is configured so that the order cannot be specified.
The effect group number selection means 64 (FIG. 1) selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning combination and enables transmission to the sub-control board 80 . When receiving the effect group number, the sub-control board 80 can output the effect related to the winning combination based on the information.

Here, the main control board 50 sends the effect group number to the sub-control board 80 as follows.
a) Example 1
In the game other than the game in which the biased role is won, the performance group number is selected and transmitted to the sub-control board 80.例文帳に追加
On the other hand, in the game in which the biased hand is won, the effect group number is not selected and not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.例文帳に追加However, in the game in which the biased hand is won, the effect group number may be selected but not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
b) Example 2
A performance group number is selected and transmitted to a sub-control board 80 regardless of the result of the winning combination lottery (including a game winning a biased winning combination).

The main control board 50 does not transmit the winning number corresponding to the winning combination to the sub control board 80 . Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number of the winning combination. However, since the sub-control board 80 can receive the effect group number, it is possible to output the effect corresponding to the winning combination based on the received effect group number. Further, when the sub-control board 80 is designed not to receive the performance group number when winning the biased role, it can be assumed that the game has won the biased role unless the performance group number is received. It is possible to substantially discriminate the game played.
The main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 when the biased combination is won during the AT, even if the specifications do not transmit the performance group number when the biased combination is won. As a result, the sub-control board 80 can output an effect related to the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number.

It should be noted that, when winning the pressing order bell, the performance group number may be uniformly transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
However, there is a suspicion that transmitting the effect group number to the sub-control board 80 at the time of winning the biased hand may constitute an instruction. This is because the transmission of the performance group number corresponding to the winning of the biased role can be interpreted as the transmission of the instruction information, since the game when the biased role is won has a unilaterally advantageous pushing order. Furthermore, when it is interpreted that the instruction information is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80, the instruction monitor must be displayed, and the medals obtained in the game must be indicated. This is because it is necessary to add to the character ratio (see the first embodiment).
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the above example 1 is adopted, and the effect group number is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 when the biased combination is won. However, as described above, since the performance group number is not transmitted only when the biased combination is won, the sub-control board 80 can guess that the biased combination has been won in the game in which the performance group number is not received.
Here, in the example of FIG. 92, the combined win probability of the biased combination with the number of bets "3" is "101/125", which exceeds "1/2" (half of all games). By increasing the winning probability of the biased hand in this way, the number of games that do not require transmission of the effect group number increases, so the number of commands to be transmitted can be reduced.
On the other hand, by increasing the winning probability of the sum of the biased hands, it is possible to lower the base at the normal time and improve the performance of AT's payout, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Depending on the winning probability of the biased role and the expected value of the number of medals to be won, when transmitting the performance group number when the biased role is won, the order of pressing (also called "stop order") is indicated (lights up the instruction monitor). , There was an idea that it should be included in the instructed role ratio.
However, at the present time, even if the effect group number is sent when a biased role is won, it is possible not to instruct the pushing order (not to light the instruction monitor) and not to include it in the instruction-inclusive role ratio. It is considered that there is a case where the following three conditions are satisfied.
1) Under the condition that the pressing position is random (no "eye pressing"), the expected value (bet number, basically "3").
2) Do not suggest the pressing order or pressing position by directing or the like. For example, an effect using a color that is displayed only in a game in which the player wins the biased role suggests the pressing order, and thus such an effect may not be possible.
3) Under the condition that the player must always play a high score (a method that always wins a low score, such as a one-card role, even if the correct answer is given in order), the same performance group including biased roles. All the expected values for each pressing order when winning a small winning combination to which a number is assigned are equal to or less than a specified number.
By configuring to satisfy the above 1) to 3), even if the production group number is illegally obtained when winning a biased role, the expected number of medals to be obtained when pressing irregularly will be less than the specified number. It is possible to prevent the act of increasing the number of medals. Here, "when winning a small winning combination" means "when winning any of the small winning combinations included in the small winning combination".

The above point will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. 92(a).
First, in the following description,
The pressing order of "left center right" is set to "pressing order 1",
The pressing order of "right and left center" is set to "press order 2",
The pressing order of "middle left and right" is set to "push order 3",
The pressing order of "middle right left" is set to "pressing order 4",
The pressing order of "Right, Left, Middle" is set to "Pressing order 5",
The pressing order of "right-center-left" is assumed to be "pressing order 6".
(see FIG. 92(a)).
Also,
Let "E1" be the expected number of medals to be won in push order 1 based on all roles,
Let "E2" be the expected number of medals to be obtained in push order 2 based on all roles,
Let "E3" be the expected number of medals to be obtained for push order 3 based on all roles,
Let "E4" be the expected number of medals to be obtained for push order 4 based on all roles,
Let "E5" be the expected number of medals to be obtained for push order 5 based on all roles,
Let "E6" be the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained for the pushing order of 6 based on all the roles.
At this time,
E1 = Σ {(number of coins obtained when each winning combination is operated in the order of 1) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
E2 = Σ {(number of coins obtained when each winning combination is operated in the order of 2) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
E3 = Σ {(number of coins obtained when each winning combination is operated in the order of 3) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
E4 = Σ {(Number of wins obtained when each winning combination is operated in the order of 4) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
E5 = Σ {(number of coins obtained when each winning combination is operated in the order of 5) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
E6 = Σ {(Number of wins obtained when each winning combination is operated in the order of 6) x (winning probability of each winning combination)}
is.
and,
E1 ≤ specified number E2 ≤ specified number E3 ≤ specified number E4 ≤ specified number E5 ≤ specified number E6 ≤ specified number It is the condition 1) above.

The expected number of medals obtained based on all roles when the stop switch 42 is operated in a predetermined pressing order is the medal based on all roles when the stop switch 42 is operated in a specific pressing order different from the predetermined pressing order. When there are more than "0.1" sheets or more than the expected value of the obtained number, the predetermined pressing order is a one-sidedly advantageous pressing order, and the specific pressing order is a one-sidedly unfavorable pressing order. I have an idea to
Then, when the expected number of medals to be obtained based on all the combinations differs for each pushing order, each pushing order is classified into either a unilaterally advantageous pushing order or a unilaterally disadvantageous pushing order.
In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the expected number of medals to be obtained (“E1” and “E2”) based on all hands when the game is completed by forward pressing (“Pressing order 1” and “Pressing order 2”) ) is "1.289" medals, and the expected number of medals to be obtained based on all hands ("E3" to "E6 ”) is “2.177” sheets,
2.177-1.289=0.888>0.1
Therefore, "push order 1" and "push order 2" are unilaterally disadvantageous push orders, and "push order 3" to "push order 6" are unilaterally advantageous push orders.

Here, in an actual gaming machine, for example, when "push order 3" is compared with "push order 4" to "push order 6" (push orders that are unilaterally advantageous), medals are obtained based on all roles. There are specifications in which the expected number of sheets is strictly different.
Specifically, for example, when the operation is performed in "push order 3", the pattern related to the special role (bonus role) can be drawn, but in "push order 4" to "push order 6", the pattern related to the special role can be drawn. With specifications that do not draw in, if you operate with "push order 3", a special role may be won and the number of payouts may be "0", while with "push order 4" to "push order 6" When operated, there is a case where the special winning combination does not win and a duplicate winning small winning combination (for example, a single winning combination) wins, and the number of payouts becomes "1".
In such a case, strictly speaking, the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained based on all hands differs between "push order 3" and "push order 4" to "push order 6". Therefore, when the error of this expected value is "0.01" or less, it is regarded as the same "unilaterally advantageous pushing order".
That is, in this example, when the error between "E3" and "E4" to "E6" is "0.01" or less, "press order 3" and "press order 4" to "press order 6" There is no relationship of advantage or disadvantage between

here,
E1=E2=A
E3=B
E4=E5=E6=C
As
BA≧0.1
CA≧0.1
0 < CB ≤ 0.01
, compared to "push order 1" and "push order 2", "push order 3" and "push order 4" to "push order 6" are uniformly "unilaterally advantageous push order". be considered to be Here, the case where the expected value of the number of medals obtained based on all roles differs between pushing orders that are unilaterally advantageous has been explained as an example. The same is true when the expected values are different. In this case, if the error in the expected number of medals to be obtained based on all hands in the unilaterally unfavorable pushing order is "0.01" or less, they are uniformly in the "unilaterally unfavorable pushing order". assume there is.
Strictly speaking, the expected value for the number of medals to be obtained based on all hands may differ even if the pushing orders are unilaterally advantageous (disadvantageous) as described above. , is determined not by "expected value of normal push and expected value of irregular push ≤ prescribed number" but by "expected number of medals obtained for each pushing order based on all hands ≤ prescribed number".
For the same reason, when judging whether or not the above condition 3) is satisfied, the expected number of medals to be obtained for each pressing order when winning a small combination group to which the same production group number is assigned is calculated. calculate.

In order to determine whether or not the above condition 3) is satisfied, when calculating the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained for each push order, in order to always hit a high number, for example, biased bell 1 to biased bell 4 It should be noted that when a game is played in the "push order 1" or "push order 2" at the time of winning, a double-card combination is always obtained.

<Example where it is necessary to indicate the order of pushing and include it in the ratio of accessories including instructions>
A minor role group A composed of a biased Bell 1 to a biased Bell 4 and a minor role group B composed of a rare role A and a rare role B as a minor role group to which the same performance group number including a biased role is assigned. Suppose there is
Here, the ratio of the set numbers of the minor wins of the minor win group A is
Biased Bell 1: Biased Bell 2: Biased Bell 3: Biased Bell 4
= 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/5
= 1:1:1:1
Since
Probability of winning biased Bell 1 when winning small win group A = Probability of winning biased Bell 2 when winning minor win group A = Biased Bell 3 when winning minor win group A = Probability of winning biased bell 4 when winning small win group A = 1/4
becomes.

Therefore, assuming that the expected number of medals to be won in the push order 1 to push order 6 when winning the small win group A is E1(A) to E6(A), respectively,
E1(A)=2×1/4×4=2
E2(A) = 2 x 1/4 x 4 = 2
E3(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
E4(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
E5(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
E6(A) = 7 x 1/4 + 1 x 1/4 x 3 = 2.5
Since all of E1(A) to E6(A) are equal to or less than the specified number (here, "3"), the above condition 3) is satisfied.
On the other hand, the ratio of the number of small wins in the minor win group B is
Rare role A: Rare role B
= 1/250: 1/250
= 1:1
Since
Probability of winning rare role A when winning minor role group B = Probability of winning rare role B when winning minor role group B = 1/2
becomes.

Let E1(B) to E6(B) be the expected number of medals to be won in push order 1 to push order 6 when winning small win group B, respectively.
E1(B)=1×1/2×2=1
E2(B)=1×1/2×2=1
E3(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E4(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E5(B)=12×1/2×2=12
E6(B)=12×1/2×2=12
As a result, E3(B) to E6(B) are larger than the specified number (here, "3").
Therefore, in this example, when transmitting the effect group numbers of the small winning combination group A and the small winning combination group B, when winning the small winning combination group A, the pressing order is not instructed, and the instructed accessory ratio is not included. However, when winning the small winning combination B, it is necessary to instruct the pushing order and include it in the designated winning combination ratio.

<Example of not specifying the order of pushing and not including it in the ratio of accessories including instructions>
This point will be explained with another example.
In FIG. 92(a), a small combination group C ( Suppose there is a biased role group). The ratio of the set numbers of the minor wins of this minor win group C is
Biased bell 1: Biased bell 2: Biased bell 3: Biased bell 4: Rare role A: Rare role B
= 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/5: 1/250: 1/250
= 50:50:50:50:1:1
becomes.
This will
Probability of winning biased bell 1 when winning small win group C = Probability of winning biased bell 2 when winning minor win group C = Biased bell 3 when winning minor win group C = Probability of winning biased bell 4 when winning small win group C = 50/202
becomes,
Probability of winning rare role A when winning minor role group C = Probability of winning rare role B when winning minor role group C = 1/202
becomes.

Therefore, assuming that the expected number of medals to be won in the push order 1 to push order 6 when winning the small win group C is E1(C) to E6(C), respectively,
E1(C)=2×50/202×4+1×1/202×2≈1.990
E2(C)=2×50/202×4+1×1/202×2≈1.990
E3(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≈2.594
E4(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≈2.594
E5(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≈2.594
E6(C)=7×50/202+1×50/202×3+12×1/202×2≈2.594
Therefore, the expected number of medals to be won when winning the small win group C is less than or equal to the specified number ("3" in this case) for all pressing orders, and the above condition 3) is satisfied, so in addition to this If the above conditions 1) and 2) are satisfied, even if the performance group number of the minor role group C is transmitted, the pushing order is not instructed, and it is included in the instructed role ratio. may be omitted.
In this way, the expected value of the number of medals to be obtained when winning a small combination group to which the same production group number including a biased combination is assigned is equal to or less than the prescribed number for all the pressing orders. ) is the condition.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing main processing in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 67 of the second embodiment. In FIG. 102, step numbers of different processes are underlined with respect to FIG.
In the main process of FIG. 102, after the role lottery process is executed in step S282, the pressing order instruction number is set in step S181 based on the result of this lottery, and the effect group number is set in the next step S182. be done. Others are the same as the processing in FIG.
Further, in step S283, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed during a non-advantageous zone, and an AT lottery is executed during an advantageous zone and non-AT. Furthermore, during the AT, an AT addition lottery and an AT continuation lottery are executed. However, when the number of bets in the current game is "2", the lottery is not executed.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing the pressing order instruction number setting process in step S181 in FIG.
In FIG. 103, in step S191, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is in the advantageous section. Here, for example, in FIG. 54 (second embodiment), the value of the advantageous section type flag at address "F061 (H)" is determined. When it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S192, and when it is determined that it is not in the advantageous section, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In the next step S192, the condition device number (small combination and replay condition device number) of the game this time is acquired. When the winning lottery process is executed in step S282 of FIG. 102, a condition device number corresponding to the winning number is generated and stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, so that information is acquired.

Then, in the next step S193, it is determined whether or not a biased combination is won in the game this time. This processing is performed by determining whether or not the conditional device number obtained in step S192 is a conditional device number corresponding to the biased combination. When it is determined that the biased combination is won, the process proceeds to step S194, and when it is determined that the biased combination is not won, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S194, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the current game is a game in which the pushing order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor. When it is determined that the game is for displaying the pressing order instruction information, the process proceeds to step S195, and when it is determined that the game is not for displaying the pressing order instruction information, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S195, a pressing order instruction number is obtained. This process is a process of identifying the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the conditional device number obtained in step S192, based on the conditional device number. Next, the process advances to step S196 to save the obtained push order instruction number in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 .
In the next step S197, the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data of the RWM 53. FIG. This storage area corresponds to, for example, address "F011(H)" in FIG. 54 (second embodiment). When the push order instruction number is stored in the obtained number data, in the LED display control (step S2821, FIG. 71) of the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 68), the push order instruction number corresponding to the pushed order instruction number stored in the obtained number data is displayed. Order information is displayed.
Then, in step S198, an output request for the push order instruction number is set, and in the next step S199, control command set 1 is performed. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 . Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
As described above, the pushing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a game in which a biased combination is won and the pushing order instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing effect group number setting processing in step S182 in FIG. Note that this example is an example in which the effect group number is not selected and not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in a game in which a biased combination is won.
In FIG. 104, in step S201, the condition device number of the current game is acquired. This process is the same process as step S192 in FIG. 103 described above. In the next step S202, it is determined whether or not a biased combination has been won in the game this time. This process is the same as the process of step S193 in FIG. 103 described above. Then, when it is determined that the winning of the biased hand is determined, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the winning of the biased hand is not determined, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, the main control board 50 acquires the effect group number corresponding to the conditional device number of the current game based on the conditional device number acquired in step S201. Next, in step S204, the obtained effect group number is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM53.
Then, in step S205, an effect group number output request is set, and in the next step S206, control command set 1 is performed. These processes are processes for setting control command data for transmitting the effect group number to the sub-control board 80 . Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, in this example, the effect group number is neither saved nor transmitted to the sub-control board 80 when a biased combination is won. On the other hand, in cases other than winning of a biased role (that is, including the case of non-winning of a role), the effect group number is saved and transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Also, the flow of FIG. 104 is executed regardless of whether it is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section.
In this example, since the process of saving the effect group number is not executed when the biased combination is won, it is not necessary to provide the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the biased combination. Alternatively, an effect group number corresponding to the winning of the biased role is prepared, and when the biased role is won, the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the biased role is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, but the effect group is stored in the sub-control board 80. - 特許庁You may choose not to send your number.
However, as described above, when the expected number of medals to be obtained per game is equal to or less than the specified number "3", the interpretation is adopted that even if the effect group number is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, it does not correspond to the instruction. If so, it is also possible to select the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the biased role and transmit it to the sub-control board 80 when the biased role is won. In this case, the process of step S202 becomes unnecessary.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the relationship between the biased hand that is the winning hand and the instruction monitor and image display in the fourth embodiment.
When a biased hand is won during a non-advantageous section, the instruction monitor is not displayed. In particular, the instruction monitor is not displayed even when a rare combination is won. This is because the AT lottery is not executed even if a rare combination is won in the non-advantageous section. Further, since the instruction monitor is not displayed, the image display regarding the pressing order is not performed either.
On the other hand, in the advantageous section, the indication monitor display and the like differ depending on whether the vehicle is non-AT or AT.
Even if a biased bell is won during an advantageous section and non-AT, the indication monitor is off. Also, the image display regarding the pressing order is not performed.
On the other hand, in a game in which a biased bell is won during an advantageous section and AT, the instruction monitor is turned on to display pushing order instruction information corresponding to the biased bell that has been won. Further, the image display device 23 displays the order of pressing the correct answer.

Also, when a rare combination is won during an advantageous section and non-AT, an instruction monitor is turned on to display pushing order instruction information corresponding to forward pushing. Further, the image display device 23 displays an image of "1--" indicating the left first stop as the correct pressing order. Here, when the rare combination is won, the expected number of medals to be obtained in the game is higher when the stop switch 42 is operated by irregular pressing than when the stop switch 42 is pressed normally. However, since forward pressing is more advantageous in terms of the total ball output (FIG. 92(b)), forward pressing corresponding to the advantageous pressing order is reported even for non-AT players.
Also, when winning a rare combination during an advantageous section and AT, an instruction monitor is turned on, and pushing order instruction information corresponding to irregular pushing is displayed. Since the AT lottery is not performed during the AT, an irregular push with a high expected number of medals to be obtained in the game is displayed. Further, the image display device 23 displays images of irregular presses as the order of correct presses. Therefore, when a rare combination is won in an advantageous section, the indication monitor is displayed for both non-AT and AT, and the correct pressing order is displayed on the image display device 23, but the displayed pressing order is different. .

Therefore, in step S194 of FIG. 103, it is judged as "No" when the biased bell is won during the non-AT, but is judged as "Yes" when the rare combination is won during the non-AT. It should be noted that when winning a biased bell or rare combination during AT, it is judged as "Yes".
Furthermore, when a rare combination is won, it is determined "Yes" in step S194, and the process proceeds to step S195, if it is not AT, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to forward pushing is acquired, and if it is AT A pressing order instruction number corresponding to irregular pressing is obtained.

Next, temporary storage processing in the fourth embodiment will be described. Two types of methods (temporary storage processing 1 and temporary storage processing 2) will be described below. In addition, during non-CZ and during CZ (gaming state in which AT winning expectation is higher than non-CZ) described below, both are advantageous sections.
1. Method 1 (temporary storage processing 1)
In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 102, when the start switch 41 is operated, the combination lottery process (step S282) is performed. The lottery for AT shall include the lottery for CZ. And the lottery for AT is not limited to one, and usually a plurality of kinds of lotteries are executed.
The AT lottery may be referred to as "instruction lottery", "ball output performance lottery", or the like.

In the fourth embodiment, as a lottery for AT in non-CZ,
1) AT lottery 2) CZ lottery 3) Stage lottery shall be executed. It should be noted that CZ and AT winning expectations are different for each stage (winning probability is low probability, high probability, etc.).
Also, as a lottery for AT in CZ,
4) AT lottery 5) CZ counter 1 lottery 6) CZ counter 2 lottery shall be executed.
In the fourth embodiment, points are given to the player during the CZ, and the AT lottery is preferentially treated or the AT is determined according to the accumulated points. The lottery for the CZ counter 1 is a lottery for the number of points to be given during the CZ.
Further, in the fourth embodiment, the initial number of games of CZ is set to a predetermined value, and the lottery of the CZ counter 2 is performed as a lottery to determine whether or not the number of games of CZ should be added to the CZ.

In the fourth embodiment, after executing the lottery for AT as described above, the lottery result is temporarily stored, and when the conditions for permanent storage are satisfied, the temporarily stored information is permanently stored.
As temporary storage means, a temporary storage area 1, a temporary storage area 2, and a temporary storage area 3 are provided in the storage area of the RWM 53. FIG.
Then, when the lotteries 1) to 3) described above are executed during the non-CZ, the lottery results are stored in the temporary storage area 1, the temporary storage area 2, and the temporary storage area 3, respectively.
On the other hand, when the lotteries 4) to 6) described above are executed during CZ, the lottery results are stored in the temporary storage area 1, the temporary storage area 2, and the temporary storage area 3, respectively.
In other words, different lottery results are stored in the temporary storage area 1, the temporary storage area 2, and the temporary storage area 3 depending on whether it is in non-CZ or in CZ.

The main control board 50 also transmits the information stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives these information, it can output an effect corresponding to the information.
Here, the sub-control board 80 cannot determine which information is the information stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 only by receiving the information.
On the other hand, the sub-control board 80 can determine whether the current game state is non-CZ or CZ based on other commands transmitted from the main control board 50 .
Therefore, the sub-control board 80 determines whether the received information is the AT lottery result during non-CZ, the CZ lottery, based on whether or not the CZ is in progress and the information stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3. As a result, whether it is a stage lottery result, or whether it is an AT lottery result, a CZ counter 1 lottery result, or a CZ counter 2 lottery result in CZ is determined, and a performance corresponding to each lottery result can be output.

Also, as the main storage area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50,
1) Main storage area for storing AT lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "main storage area 1")
2) Main storage area for storing CZ lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "main storage area 2")
3) Main storage area for storing stage lottery results (hereinafter referred to as "main storage area 3")
4) Main storage area for storing lottery results of CZ counter 1 (hereinafter referred to as "main storage area 4")
5) Main storage area for storing lottery results of CZ counter 2 (hereinafter referred to as "main storage area 5")
are provided respectively.
In the fourth embodiment, when the biased combination is won, the above lotteries 1) to 3) or 4) to 6) are executed, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended order of pressing, the lottery result is reflected, When the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pushing order, the lottery result is cleared (discarded) (not reflected).

106 and 107 are flowcharts showing the temporary storage processing 1 described above. FIG. 107 is a flowchart following FIG. In the flowcharts of FIGS. 106 and 107, it is assumed that the section is an advantageous section and non-AT (a state in which an AT is drawn).
In FIG. 106, at step S312, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S313. Incidentally, when it is determined in step S312 that the start switch 41 has been operated, a winning lottery is executed, but the process is omitted in this flowchart.
In the next step S313, the main control board 50 determines whether the current game is in CZ. If it is determined that it is not in CZ, the process proceeds to step S314, and if it is determined that it is in CZ, the process proceeds to step S320.
In the example shown in FIG. 54 (second embodiment), an AT flag is provided. In addition to this AT flag, a predetermined area of the RWM 53 also contains a flag for determining whether or not the current gaming state is CZ. A CZ flag for is stored (not shown in FIG. 54). Then, based on the value of this CZ flag, it is determined whether or not the current game is in CZ.

In step S314, the main control board 50 draws lots to decide whether or not to execute AT. Then, in step S315, the result of the lottery in step S314 is stored in the temporary storage area 1 (temporary storage).
In the next step S316, the main control board 50 draws lots to decide whether or not to execute CZ. Then, in step S317, the result of the lottery in step S316 is stored in the temporary storage area 2 (temporary storage).
In the next step S318, the main control board 50 executes a stage lottery. Here, in the fourth embodiment, in the advantageous section and non-AT, there are multiple stages with different winning expectations for CZ and AT, and a lottery is performed to determine which stage to stay based on the role lottery result. . For example, there are a stage with a low AT winning expectation, a high AT winning expectation, a high CZ winning expectation, and the like.
Next, proceeding to step S319, the lottery result of step S318 is stored in the temporary storage area 3 (temporary storage). Then, the process proceeds to step S326.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S313 that CZ is in progress and the process proceeds to step S320, the main control board 50 executes an AT lottery. This lottery is the same as the lottery in step S314. Then, in step S321, the lottery result of step S320 is stored in the temporary storage area 1 (temporary storage). This process is also the same as step S315.

In the next step S322, the main control board 50 executes the CZ counter 1 lottery. Next, proceeding to step S323, the lottery result of step S322 is stored in the temporary storage area 2 (temporary storage).
In the next step S324, the main control board 50 executes the CZ counter 2 lottery. Next, proceeding to step S325, the lottery result of step S324 is stored in the temporary storage area 3 (temporary storage). Then, the process proceeds to step S326.

At step S 326 , the main control board 50 transmits the information of the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80 . This process is a process of executing the above-described control command set 1 and the like.
As described above, when the start switch 41 is operated, a lottery for AT is executed, stored in the temporary storage areas 1 to 3, and the result of the lottery is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, so that the sub-control board 80 receives this information. , it is possible to output the effect at the start of the game (before the stop switch 42 is operated).
Next, proceeding to step S327, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the first (first) stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S328. In step S328, the push order information is updated.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, pressing order information is stored in a predetermined area of the RWM 53 . The pressing order information is 1-byte data consisting of "aabbcc00(B)".
"aa": value of the first (first operated) stop switch 42 "bb": value of the second (second operated) stop switch 42 "cc": third (third operated) ) is the value of the stop switch 42.
moreover,
Value corresponding to left stop switch 42: 01 (B)
Value corresponding to middle stop switch 42: 10 (B)
Value corresponding to right stop switch 42: 11 (B)
and
Therefore, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of left, middle, right, the pressing order information is
01000000 (B): Left first stop ↓
01100000 (B): Middle second stop ↓
01101100 (B): When the right third stop is updated in this order.
Therefore, in step S228, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the pushing order information is updated to "01000000 (B)". Alternatively, for example, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the pushing order information is updated to "10000000 (B)".

Next, proceeding to step S329, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated in the recommended pressing order (forward pressing). This judgment is made based on the above-described push order information. Here, "01000000 (B)" is provided as definition data for determining whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated in the recommended pressing order (forward pressing). This definition data has the same value as the pressing order information when the left stop switch 42 is first operated.
Then, the value of the definition data is subtracted from the value of the pushing order information updated in step S328, and it is determined whether or not the result is "0". If the subtraction result becomes "0", it is determined that the left stop switch 42 has been operated first.
In addition to the subtraction, it may be determined whether or not the pushing order information updated in step S328 and the definition data have the same value. ) is performed, and if the result of the calculation is "0", it can be determined that both are the same value.

for example,
Push order information: 01000000 (B) (left stop switch 42 is operated first)
Definition data: 01000000 (B)
, "00000000 (B)" is obtained by "XORing" both. Since the calculation result is “0”, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 is the left stop switch 42 .
on the other hand,
Push order information: 10000000 (B) (the middle stop switch 42 is operated first)
Definition data: 01000000 (B)
, "11000000 (B)" is obtained by "XORing" both. Since the calculation result is not "0", it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 is not the left stop switch 42. FIG.

If it is determined in step S329 that it is the recommended pressing order, the process proceeds to step S331 of FIG. 107, and if it is determined that it is not the recommended pressing order, the process proceeds to step S330.
In step S330, the main control board 50 transmits the first stop information to the sub control board 80, and proceeds to the next step S331. The information to be transmitted here is information corresponding to the operation in the non-recommended pressing order. On the other hand, the main control board 50 does not transmit the first stop information to the sub control board 80 when operated in the recommended pressing order. When receiving the first stop information, the sub-control board 80 can determine that the operation has been performed in the non-recommended pressing order, and therefore controls to display the recommended image.

At step S331, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the second stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the second stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S332.
In step S332, the main control board 50 updates the pressing order information. For example, when the first stop switch 42 is on the left, the pressing order information is "01000000 (B)". update to
On the other hand, for example, when the first stop switch 42 is in the middle position, the pressing order information is "10000000 (B)". )”.

Next, proceeding to step S333, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the third stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the third stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S334.
In step S334, the main control board 50 updates the pressing order information. For example, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of left, center, right, the push order information is updated from "01100000(B)" to "01101100(B)".
On the other hand, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the order of middle, right, left, for example, the push order information is updated from "10110000(B)" to "10110100(B)".

Next, proceeding to step S335, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a biased combination has been won in the game this time. As described in the first embodiment, when a lottery for a winning combination is performed, the lottery result is stored in the "small winning combination and replay condition device number" provided in a predetermined area of the RWM 53, so this data is read. , it is determined whether or not one of the biased roles has been won.
When it is determined in step S335 that the biased hand has been won, the process proceeds to step S336, and when it is determined that the biased role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S345.

At step S336, the main control board 50 generates a first stop reel specific flag. Here, the "first stop reel specific flag" is a flag for determining which reel 31 the first stop reel 31 (synonymous with the first stop switch 42) is. This is a flag for determining whether or not 42 has been operated. Since only the information of the first stop switch 42 is stored in the pressing order information updated at the time of step S328, it is immediately possible to determine which stop switch 42 is the first stop switch 42 (that is, the first reel 31). can be judged. On the other hand, since the pushing order information updated at the time of step S334 includes the information of the three stop switches 42, it is not possible to determine which stop switch 42 is the first stop switch 42 without calculating. Can not. Therefore, a first stop reel identification flag for determining which reel 31 the first stop reel 31 is is generated.

In order to generate the first stop reel specific flag, the values of the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 may be masked with respect to the pushing order information updated at step S334.
For example, if the masking data is "11000000(B)", and the pressing order information "aabbcc00(B)" and the masking data "11000000(B)" are ANDed, the first stop reel identification flag "aa000000" is obtained. (B)” is generated.
In the next step S337, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pressing order of the current game is the recommended pressing order. This determination is the same as step S329. The first stop reel identification flag "aa000000(B)" generated in step S336 and the definition data "01000000(B)" are subjected to "XOR" operation, and if the operation result is "0", it is judged to be the recommended pressing order. If the calculation result is not "0", it is determined that the pushing order is not recommended.

When it is determined in step S337 that the recommended pressing order is followed, the process proceeds to step S338, and when it is determined that the recommended pressing order is not followed, the process proceeds to step S345.
At step S338, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the current game is in CZ, and when it determines that it is not in CZ, it proceeds to step S339, and when it determines that it is in CZ, it proceeds to step S342. .
In step S339, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1 (main storage).
In the next step S340, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the main storage area 2 (main storage).
In the next step S341, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 3 (main storage).
Then, the process proceeds to step S345.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S338 that CZ is in progress and the process proceeds to step S342, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1 (main storage).
In the next step S343, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the main storage area 4 (main storage).
In the next step S344, the main control board 50 stores the information stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 5 (main storage).
Then, the process proceeds to step S345.

In step S 345 , the main control board 50 transmits the information stored in main storage areas 1 to 3 or main storage areas 1 , 4 and 5 to the sub control board 80 . As a result, in a game in which a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the updated information in this storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game. On the other hand, when the biased hand is won and the stop switch 42 is not operated in the recommended order of pressing, the information in the main storage area is not updated, so the same information as the information transmitted in the previous game is sub-set. It is sent to the control board 80 .

Further, the sub-control board 80 judges whether or not the transmitted information of the main storage areas 1 to 3 or the main storage areas 1, 4, and 5 and whether or not the CZ is in progress. It determines what the information is, and controls the output of the presentation based on the result.
Next, proceeding to step S346, the main control board 50 clears the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 (to "0"). In the next step S347, the main control board 50 clears the push order information (sets it to "0"). Furthermore, in the next step S348, the main control board 50 clears the first stop reel identification flag (sets it to "0"). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing another example of temporary storage processing 1 in FIG. In FIG. 108, step numbers that differ from the processing in FIG. 107 are underlined.
Although not shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, whether or not it is the recommended pressing order is performed a plurality of times (for example, about five times) after the process of step S337. Then, if the "XOR" operation of the first stop reel specifying flag and the definition data is performed each time as shown in step S337, the program capacity increases. Therefore, after performing the determination process of step S337, when it is the recommended pressing order, the process proceeds to step S351 to store "0" as the irregular game determination data, and when it is not the recommended pressing order, the process proceeds to step S352 and stores it as the irregular game determination data. "1" is memorized. Then, whether or not it is the recommended pressing order after step S337 is determined by determining whether or not the irregular game determination data is "0". For example, when "1" is subtracted from the irregular game judgment data, and the zero flag becomes "1", it can be judged that the irregular game judgment data (before subtraction) is "1" (not the recommended pushing order). becomes.
As a result, it is possible to simplify and speed up the process of judging whether or not it is the recommended pressing order.
Also, at the end of this process, a process of clearing (setting to "0") the irregular game determination data is executed in step S353.

2. Second method (temporary storage process 2)
In this example, it is assumed that three types of count values A, B, and C are selected as a lottery for AT during an advantageous section and non-AT period. Then, the lottery result of each count value is added to the count value for each game and the previous game.
For example, the count values A, B, and C up to the previous game are
Count value A=X
Count value B=Y
Count value C=Z
and
The lottery results of the count values A, B, and C in this game are
count value A=a
count value B=b
count value C=c
, when the count values A, B, and C in this game are updated,
Count value A=X+a
count value B=Y+b
count value C=Z+c
becomes.

Then, for example, when the count value A reaches the first value, the AT lottery is executed, when the count value B reaches the second value, it is decided to execute the AT, or when the count value C reaches When it reaches the third value, it shifts to CZ.
In addition, the reflection of the lottery result of the count value (addition of each count value) in the game this time is limited to when the biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order. In other cases, the lottery result of the count value in the game this time is not reflected.
Furthermore, unlike the first method, in the second method, the temporary storage area and the main storage area correspond one-to-one. therefore,
Temporary storage area 1 and main storage area 1 for storing count value A
Temporary storage area 2 and main storage area 2 for storing count value B
Temporary storage area 3 and main storage area 3 for storing count value C
Prepare.
Here, the above three types of temporary storage areas and main storage areas are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. area is provided. So in practice,
Temporary storage area 4 and main storage area 4 for storing count value D
Temporary storage area 5 and main storage area 5 for storing count value E
:
Prepare.

109 and 110 are flowcharts showing the second temporary storage process described above. FIG. 110 is a flowchart following FIG.
In FIG. 109, at step S362, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S363. Incidentally, when the start switch 41 is operated, the combination lottery process is executed.
In step S 363 , the main control board 50 copies the value (count value A) of the main storage area 1 to the temporary storage area 1 . In the next step S364, the main control board 50 copies the value of the main storage area 2 (count value B) to the temporary storage area 2. FIG. Furthermore, in the next step S365, the main control board 50 copies the value (count value C) of the main storage area 3 to the temporary storage area 3. FIG.
Therefore, when the start switch 41 is operated, the value of the temporary storage area "N" (N=1, 2, 3) and the value of the main storage area "N" become the same.

At the next step S366, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for the count value A. FIG. The lottery for the count value A, the lottery for the count value B and the lottery for the count value C, which will be described later, are executed based on the combination lottery results.
In the next step S367, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of the count value A to the temporary storage area 1. FIG. For example, when the lottery result of count value A is "a" and the value of temporary storage area 1 is "X", the value of temporary storage area 1 is updated to "X+a".
In the next step S368, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for the count value B. FIG. Next, proceeding to step S369, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of the count value B to the temporary storage area 2. FIG.
In the next step S370, the main control board 50 executes a lottery for the count value C. FIG. Next, proceeding to step S371, the main control board 50 adds the lottery result of the count value C to the temporary storage area 3.

Next, proceeding to step S 372 , the main control board 50 transmits the information of the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80 . This process is a process of executing the above-described control command set 1 and the like.
As described above, when the start switch 41 is operated, the lottery result of the count values A to C is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Based on this information, the sub-control board 80 can be used when the game is started (when the stop switch 42 is It is possible to output the effect before being operated).
Next, proceeding to step S373, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the first (first) stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S374. In step S374, similarly to the temporary storage process 1, the pressing order information ("aa000000 (B)") corresponding to the operation of the first stop switch 42 is stored.

Next, proceeding to step S375 in FIG. 110, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the stop switches 42 have been operated in the recommended pressing order (whether or not the left stop switch 42 has been operated first). This processing is determined based on the above-mentioned push order information. In this process, similarly to the temporary storage process 1, the value of the definition data is subtracted from the value of the push order information, and it is determined whether or not the result is "0".
When it is determined in step S375 that the recommended pressing order is followed, the process proceeds to step S377, and when it is determined that the recommended pressing order is not followed, the process proceeds to step S376.
In step S376, the main control board 50 transmits the first stop information to the sub control board 80, and proceeds to step S377. The information to be transmitted here is information corresponding to the operation in the non-recommended pressing order. When receiving the first stop information, the sub-control board 80 can determine that the operation has been performed in the non-recommended pressing order, and therefore controls to display the recommended image.

At step S377, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the second stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the second stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S378.
In step S378, the main control board 50 updates the pressing order information corresponding to the operation of the second stop switch 42. FIG.
Next, proceeding to step S379, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the third stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined that the third stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S380.
In step S380, the main control board 50 updates the pressing order information corresponding to the operation of the third stop switch .
Next, proceeding to step S381, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a biased combination has been won in the game this time. In the same manner as described above, based on the "minor combination and replay condition device number" stored in the RWM 53, it is determined whether or not any biased combination has been won.
When it is determined in step S381 that the biased hand has been won, the process proceeds to step S382, and when it is determined that the biased role has not been won, the process proceeds to step S387.

At step S382, the main control board 50 generates a first stop reel specific flag. As in the temporary storage process 1, the generation of the first stop reel identification flag is performed by ANDing the pushing order information updated at the time of step S380 and the masking data to generate the first stop reel identification flag " aa000000(B)”.
In the next step S383, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pushing order of the current game is the recommended pushing order. "XOR" operation is performed on the first stop reel specific flag "aa000000 (B)" and the definition data "01000000 (B)". If it is not "0", it is determined that the pushing order is not recommended.
When it is determined that the order of pressing is the recommended order, the process proceeds to step S384, and when it is determined that the order of pressing is not the recommended order, the process proceeds to step S387.
In step S<b>384 , the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary storage area 1 in the main storage area 1 .
In the next step S385, the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary storage area 2 in the main storage area 2. FIG.
In the next step S<b>386 , the main control board 50 stores (reflects) the value stored in the temporary storage area 3 in the main storage area 3 .
Then, the process proceeds to step S387.

At step S 387 , the main control board 50 transmits the values stored in main storage areas 1 to 3 to the sub control board 80 . Thus, in a game in which a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the updated value stored in this storage area is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the end of the game. On the other hand, in a game in which a biased combination is won and the stop switch 42 is not operated in the recommended order of pushing, the information stored in the main storage area is not updated, so the main storage area transmitted in the previous game is not updated. is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
Next, proceeding to step S388, the main control board 50 clears the temporary storage areas 1 to 3 (to "0"). In the next step S389, the main control board 50 clears the push order information (sets it to "0"). Furthermore, in the next step S390, the main control board 50 clears the first stop reel identification flag (sets it to "0"). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

According to the temporary storage process 1 and the temporary storage process 2 described above, the lottery result when the start switch 41 is operated can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 before it is determined whether or not it is the recommended pressing order. On the side of 80, it becomes possible to execute an effect at the start of the game based on these lottery results.
However, it is necessary to provide a storage area for temporary storage.
Also, after the stoppage, it is necessary to determine whether or not a biased combination has been won, and whether or not it is in the recommended pushing order.
Furthermore, in the method of temporary storage processing 1, since the storage area for temporary storage is shared, the storage area for temporary storage can be minimized. However, on the sub-control board 80 side, since it is not possible to determine what the information is just by transmitting the information stored in the temporary storage area, a process for determining what the information is is required.
Further, in the method of the temporary storage process 1, once stored in the temporary storage area, other lottery results cannot be stored in the temporary storage area in the game.
On the other hand, in the method of the temporary storage process 2, the information to be stored can be stored in one-to-one correspondence between the temporary storage and the permanent storage. However, it is necessary to provide as many temporary storage areas and permanent storage areas as the number to be stored.

In the example of FIG. 110, similarly to FIG. 108, when it is determined in step S383 that it is the recommended pressing order (similar to step S351 in FIG. 108), "0" is set to the irregular game determination data. , when it is determined that it is not the recommended pressing order (similar to step S352 in FIG. 108), the irregular game determination data may be set to "1".
In this case, after step S390, the irregular game determination data is cleared (similarly to step S353 in FIG. 108).

Although the fourth embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the non-recommended pressing order (one-sidedly advantageous pressing order) is set to the middle first stop or the right first stop, which are irregular pressings. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the middle first stop or only the right first stop may be used. Furthermore, as the non-recommended pushing order (one-sidedly advantageous pushing order), it is possible to set only the left first stop or the pushing order including the left first stop. For example, the middle first stop is the recommended push order, and the left first stop and right first stop are the non-recommended push order.
Further, the recommended pressing order is not limited to specifying only the first stop. For example, the recommended pressing order may be "left, middle, right". In this case, it is preferable that the recommended image is displayed at the second stop (right) when the operation is made to "center left and right".

(2) In the above embodiment, a recommended image can be displayed in order to inform the player that the push order is not the recommended push order (non-recommended push order). However, the display method for informing the player that the pushing order is not the recommended one is not limited to displaying the recommended image. For example, instead of displaying a new recommended image, the effect image may be changed until then. For example, by darkening the screen (reducing the visibility of the image), the player may be notified that the pressing order for the current game is not the recommended pressing order.
In addition, in the case where the player is notified that it is not the recommended push order by turning the screen dark, if there is a discrepancy between the display content and the internal state, the visibility of the display content may be greatly reduced. Although there is no problem, it is preferable to make the displayed content completely invisible.
In addition, it is also possible to indicate that the recommended pressing order is not the same by making the lighting and blinking patterns of the effect lamps 21 provided in the gaming machine (slot machine 10) unique.
Furthermore, the sound output from the speaker 22 may be used to notify that the recommended pressing order is not followed.

(3) Various settings can be made for the display area of the recommended image. For example, the first method is to display the recommended image so as to cover the entire image display area of the image display device 23 .
Secondly, the recommended image is displayed in a part of the image display area of the image display device 23 .
However, when displaying the recommended image, if there is a discrepancy between the display content and the internal state, it is preferable to display the recommended image so that the display content (the part including the discrepancy display) is hidden. .

(4) In the fourth embodiment, the pressing order of the stop switches 42 is determined at the time of the first stop, and the recommended pressing order is determined when the pressing is normal. However, it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether or not it is the recommended pressing order based on the stop result. In this case, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is not determined.
In addition, when judging whether or not the recommended pushing order is based on the stop roll, the stopping roll differs between the recommended pushing order and the non-recommended pushing order even if the winning combination is the same (same winning flag). The reel 31 is controlled to be stopped as described above.
However, when judging the recommended pushing order based on the stop result, it is difficult to make that judgment unless all the reels 31 are stopped. Therefore, the recommended image is displayed when it is determined that the stop roll is based on the non-recommended pressing order, by looking at the stop roll during the full stop.
Therefore, when the recommended image is displayed at the first stop time, it is preferable to determine whether or not the stop switch 42 is pressed according to the recommended pressing order based on the pressing order.

(5) The biased bell shown in FIG. 92 is essentially a small combination with four options for pressing order. However, it is also possible to further increase the number of choices according to the pressing order and color.
For example, by setting the pressing order to 4 options as described above and further setting the symbol colors of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 to 2 options (the correct symbol color is highlighted), the correct symbol color is selected. 4 options. As a result, the biased bell has "four selections of pressing order x four choices of color = 16 choices in total" (hereinafter referred to as "16-selection biased bell").
In this case, when the 16-choice biased bell is won, when the bell is pressed in the forward direction, the one-card hand is awarded with "PB=1". On the other hand, when a 16-choice biased bell is won, if the order of pressing is correct and the color is correct, a combination of 15 cards can be won with "PB=1".

Furthermore, when the 16-choice biased bell is won, if it is an irregular push and other than the correct order of pushing and the correct color, it can be configured so that one prize is won or lost (0 pieces). mentioned.
Then, when the 16-choice biased bell is won, if an irregular press is made arbitrarily, the 15-card role will be won with a probability of "1/16", and the 1-card role will be won with a probability of "7.5/16". When configured to drop (0) with a probability of "7.5/16", the base can be lowered further than when the biased bell shown in FIG. 92 is adopted, and medals are paid out during AT number can be increased.

(6) In the fourth embodiment, a rare combination having a unilaterally advantageous pressing order is provided, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order when winning the rare combination, an AT lottery is executed. However, it is not limited to this, and the rare role may be played in any order, like the watermelon.
Also, when the biased bell is won, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, an AT lottery is executed (or the AT lottery is given preferential treatment), and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the non-recommended pressing order, the AT. The lottery may not be executed (or the AT lottery may be treated coldly).
(7) In the case of the advantageous section and non-AT, when operating in the recommended pressing order, the number of ceiling games per game and the number of periodic games (described later) are updated, but when operating in the non-recommended pressing order, For example, the number of ceiling games and the number of periodic games are not updated regardless of the winning combination.
Here, the "periodic number of games" means, for example, an AT lottery for each predetermined number of games played (for example, "100").
Incidentally, in the game in which the player wins the combination of any order, the number of ceiling games and the number of periodic games may or may not be updated.

(8) In the case of the advantageous section and non-AT, when the operation is performed in the non-recommended pushing order in the game in which the pushing order does not matter, the recommended image is displayed. Here, when an AT lottery etc. is executed in a game in which the pushing order does not matter, if the operation is performed in a non-recommended pushing order, whether the AT lottery etc. is executed or not (the lottery result of the AT lottery etc. when disabled).
Since the expected value does not change depending on the pressing order, the AT lottery or the like can be executed in the game in which the pressing order does not matter even if the operation is performed in the non-recommended pressing order. It is possible. As a result, even if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order in a game in which the pressing order is won, the result of the AT lottery or the like is reflected in the effect image after the display of the recommended image ends. Therefore, the player will not be discouraged. At the same time, by displaying the recommended image, it is possible to inform the player of the recommended pressing order in the advantageous section and non-AT.
On the other hand, when the operation is performed in the non-recommended pushing order in the game in which the pushing order is won, the display of the recommended image ends when the AT lottery etc. is not executed (the lottery result of the AT lottery etc. is invalidated). Since the results of the AT lottery etc. are not reflected later, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the disadvantage of operating in the non-recommended pressing order, and to call attention to the player. Become.

(9) In the fourth embodiment (including modifications), the slot machine 10 was taken as an example of one of the gaming machines, but it can also be applied to, for example, casino machines and sealed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines). can.
(10) The first to fourth embodiments (including modifications) are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination with other embodiments as appropriate.

<Fifth Embodiment>
The fifth embodiment includes a medal selector 110 for selecting the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47, a chute member 120 for guiding the medals M permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, It relates to a slot machine 10 having a return member 130 for guiding a medal M whose insertion is not permitted by a medal selector 110 to a medal receiving tray 19.例文帳に追加

The fifth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 111 is a side sectional view of the slot machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 112 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.
112, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, a setting change (reset) switch 153, a push button 86, and a cross key 87 are added to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 111, the slot machine 10 has a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front and a front door 12 attached to cover the opening of the cabinet 13 .
The cabinet 13 is configured in a box shape with an open front by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a top plate 13c, a right side plate and a left side plate (not shown).
Furthermore, the front door 12 is attached to the cabinet 13 so as to cover the front opening of the cabinet 13 .

The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, when settings are changed, when settings are checked, when an error occurs, and when medals are supplied.
Specifically, the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 are attached via hinges (not shown).
A locking device (not shown) is provided on the rear surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player).

Furthermore, a door key insertion opening (not shown) is provided on the front surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the locking device. The door key insertion opening is a portion into which a door key for operating the locking device is inserted.
With the front door 12 closed and locked, inserting the door key into the door key insertion slot and turning the door key clockwise in this state unlocks the door. Then, when the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates around the hinge and the front door 12 is opened.

A door switch 17 (FIG. 112) for detecting opening of the front door 12 is provided on the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 . The door switch 17 is turned off when the front door 12 is closed, and is turned on when the front door 12 is opened.
Furthermore, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (FIG. 112).
When the door switch 17 is off, the main control board 50 determines that the front door 12 is closed, and when the door switch 17 is on, the front door 12 is open. It is configured to determine

A display window 18 is provided in the center of the front door 12 . The display window 18 is configured to be positioned in front of the pattern display device 14 when the front door 12 is closed. Through the display window 18, the three reels 31 included in the pattern display device 14 can be viewed.
In addition, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, an adjustment switch 43, a medal slot 47, and the like are provided below the display window 18 on the front surface of the front door 12 (the surface facing the player). there is The medal slot 47 is a part into which the player inserts the medals M when betting or crediting the medals M. As shown in FIG.

Furthermore, a medal payout port 16 and a medal tray 19 for receiving the medals M discharged from the medal payout port 16 are provided at the lower front portion of the front door 12 . The medal payout port 16 is an opening through which the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 and the medals M whose insertion is not permitted by the medal selector 110 pass.
A medal selector for selecting the medals M inserted from the medal slot 47 is provided on the back side of the front door 12 (the side opposite to the side facing the player) at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47. 110 is provided.

Specifically, a selector base 113 (FIG. 113) is fixed at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the rear surface of the front door 12, and the medal selector 110 is detachably attached to the selector base 113. .
The selector base 113 is for detachably holding the medal selector 110, and is formed by bending sheet metal. is fixed with The medal selector 110 is detachably attached to the selector base 113 .

Furthermore, at a position adjacent to the medal selector 110 on the rear surface of the front door 12, a chute member 120 for guiding the medals M permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35 is provided.
Furthermore, at a position corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout port 16 on the back side of the front door 12, the medals M prohibited to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and the medals paid out from the medal payout device 15 are provided. A return member 130 for guiding the medal M to the medal receiving tray 19 is provided.

In addition, a medal payout device 15 is arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 13 (on the bottom plate 13a). The medal dispensing device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing the medals M, a hopper motor 36 (FIG. 112) driven when dispensing the medals M stored in the hopper 35, and the medals dispensed from the hopper 35. A payout sensor 37 (FIG. 112) for detecting M is provided.

The hopper 35 is for storing the medals M. In addition, in the upper part of the hopper 35, a storage receiving port 35a, which is an opening for receiving the medals M guided by the chute member 120, is provided. The storage receiving port 35a opens downward from the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the end on the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121).
As explained in the first embodiment, the payout sensor 37 is composed of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b (FIG. 112) arranged at a predetermined interval.
When the medal M is paid out, a predetermined moving member (not shown) is moved by the medal M, and the movement of the predetermined moving member turns on/off the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b.

112, the hopper motor 36 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52, and the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51. It is electrically connected to the control board 50 .
Then, the main control board 50 drives the hopper motor 36 when the medals M are to be paid out from the medal payout device 15 .
Further, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medals M have been paid out normally based on whether or not the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

In FIG. 111, a power supply unit (not shown) is arranged below the inside of the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The power supply unit includes a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80, etc., a power switch 11 (FIG. 112) that is operated when turning on/off the power, and a setting changer. A setting key switch 152 (FIG. 112) that is operated to shift to a state or a setting confirmation state, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 (FIG. 112) that is operated to change a setting value and to cancel an error. and

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated when turning on/off the power.
Turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning on the power", "turning on the power", or "resuming the supply of power".
Also, turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the supply of power."

The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is operated when transitioning to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or a setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed.
When the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot 151 (Fig. 112) and rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and when the setting key is returned to its original position, the setting key is turned on. Switch 152 is configured to be turned off.

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves both as the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 .
Also, the setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the setting value in the setting change state.
Furthermore, the reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated to cancel the error notification after removing the cause of the error.
In this manner, the setting change (reset) switch 153 functions as the setting change switch 153 in the setting change state, and functions as the reset switch 153 in error notification.

Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "setting change (reset) switch 153", "setting change switch 153", or "reset switch 153".
Further, regarding various switches such as the setting change (reset) switch 153, turning on is referred to as "operating", turning on is referred to as "operating", and turning off is referred to as "operating". This is sometimes referred to as "non-manipulated".
Although the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are used in common in the fifth embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

112, the setting key switch 152 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51. As shown in FIG.
When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on, the setting change state is entered, and when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting confirmation state is entered. It is

Further, when the setting change state is entered, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 mounted on the main control board 50 . Furthermore, in the setting change state, the setting value is changed ("1" is added) each time the setting change switch 153 is operated. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated and then the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state is terminated and the set value display LED 73 is extinguished. After the start switch 41 is operated, even if the setting change switch 153 is operated, the setting value cannot be changed.

Also, the set value is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Each time the setting change switch 153 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is changed and the changed setting value is stored (overwritten) at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
In the setting change state, merely by operating the setting change switch 153, the changed setting value is not stored (overwritten) in the predetermined address of the RWM 53, and the setting value is determined by operating the start switch 41. At this time, The fixed setting value may be stored (overwritten) at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 .
Further, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 although the setting value cannot be changed. When the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state is terminated and the setting value display LED 73 is extinguished.

Next, referring to FIGS. 113 to 121, the medal selector 110, chute member 120 and return member 130 will be described in more detail.
113 is a diagram showing the medal selector 110, the chute member 120, and the return member 130, and is a diagram for explaining the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. FIG.
FIG. 114 is a diagram in which a hopper 35 is added to FIG. 113, and is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the hopper 35. FIG.

FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the thickness of the medal M. FIG.
FIG. 116 is a diagram explaining the relationship between the dimensions of each part of the chute member 120 and the diameter and radius of the medal M. FIG.
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between one medal M that has entered the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and another medal M heading from the medal selector 110 to the chute member 120. FIG.

FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the width of the medal guide passage 121 of the chute member 120 and the dimensions of each part of the screw 127 that fixes the chute member 120. FIG.
FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating an example in which neither the return acceptance opening 131 nor the upper edge 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. FIG.

FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining an example in which a closing member 140 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, and a part of the return acceptance opening 131 is blocked by this closing member 140. is.
FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an example in which part of the return acceptance opening 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 113, the medal selector 110 has a medal passage 111 through which medals inserted from the medal slot 47 pass. The medal passage 111 is formed in a substantially L shape, and in FIG. 113, a vertical portion 111a extending substantially vertically downward from the left side of the upper surface of the medal selector 110 and a gently slanted downward right direction from the lower end of the vertical portion 111a. and an inclined portion 111b that inclines to reach the lower right side surface of the medal selector 110. As shown in FIG. An entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the medal selector 110, and an exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided on the lower right side of the medal selector 110.

When the medal selector 110 is attached to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, the entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is positioned vertically below the medal slot 47. As shown in FIG. The medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is configured to be sent to the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 .
Further, as shown in FIG. 113, a blocker 45 for permitting/not permitting insertion of medals M is provided at an intermediate position of the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111. , an insertion sensor 44 capable of detecting medals M passing through the medal passage 111 is provided on the downstream side of the blocker 45 .

The blocker 45 permits/denies the insertion of medals M, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52 (FIG. 112).
During the game (from the start of rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 stop, and when the winning combination ends, the payout of the medals M corresponding to the winning combination is completed), the main control board 50 controls the number of medals M. Control blocker 45 to disallow entry.

Further, when the prescribed number of medals M have already been betted and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, no more medals M can be betted and credited. Control blocker 45 to disallow entry.
On the other hand, when the game is not played (after the payout of the medals M is completed and before the rotation of the reel 31 is started), the number of bets on the medals M has not reached the specified number, or the number of credits has reached the upper limit. When not reached, the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 so as to permit the medal M to be inserted.

When the insertion of medals M is not permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to remove the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 from the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 and drop it downward. . Also, the medals M dropped downward from the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 are guided by the return member 130, discharged from the medal payout port 16, and stored in the medal tray 19.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, when the insertion of the medals M is permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to guide the medals M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111. . Also, the medal M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b (both collectively referred to as the "insertion sensor 44" hereinafter), and exits the medal passage 111. 111 d, guided by chute member 120 and stored in hopper 35 .

The insertion sensor 44 is for detecting the medal M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, and as shown in FIG. and an input sensor 44b. The input sensor 44a is arranged on the upstream side, and the input sensor 44b is arranged on the downstream side. The input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (FIG. 112).

The medal M guided downstream from the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 is first detected by the upstream insertion sensor 44a and then detected by the downstream insertion sensor 44b.
Specifically, when the medal M is guided to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, first, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side detects the medal M (turns from off to on).
Further, when the medal M flows down the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44b on the downstream side next detects the medal M (turns from off to on).

Further, when the medal M flows down the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44a on the upstream side stops detecting the medal M (turns off from on).
Further, when the medal M flows down the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44b on the downstream side stops detecting the medal M (turns off from on).
Then, the main control board 50 judges whether or not the medal M has normally passed through the medal passage 111 based on whether or not the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range. do.

The chute member 120 guides the medal M that has been permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and is discharged from the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111 to the hopper 35 arranged in the lower part of the inside of the cabinet 13. It is provided at a position adjacent to the medal selector 110 on the rear surface of the door 12 .

Also, the chute member 120 has a medal guiding passage 121 for guiding the medal M from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.
The medal guide passage 121 is gently inclined so that the height gradually decreases from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream) side.

113, the medal M is permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110, passes through the medal passage 111, and is ejected from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111. FIG. Here, the medal selector 110 is attached to the rear surface of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the exit 111d is located near the rear surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. On the other hand, the hopper 35 is positioned closer to the center inside the cabinet 13 as shown in FIG. In other words, the hopper 35 is located on the front side of the exit 111d in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 113 . Therefore, there is a certain distance between the outlet 111d and the hopper 35 . Therefore, the medal guide passage 121 is curved in an arc shape toward the hopper 35 side in order to guide the medals M ejected from the outlet 111d toward the hopper 35 side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, the chute member 120 includes a bottom portion 122 forming the bottom surface of the medal guide passage 121, an inner wall portion 123 forming the inner side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121, and an arc-shaped and an outer wall portion 124 forming an outer side surface of the medal guide passage 121 . The upper portion of the medal guide passage 121 is open.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 116, the chute member 120 is positioned at a position corresponding to the middle of the medal guide passage 121 on the bottom surface portion 122 so that the hopper 35 (downstream) side is higher than the medal selector 110 (upstream) side. It has a stepped portion 125 with a low height.

As described above, the medal guide passage 121 is formed in an arcuately curved shape. Therefore, the medal M moves on the bottom surface portion 122 of the medal guide passage 121 from the upstream side toward the downstream side, and contacts the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124 in the middle of the medal guide passage 121. , its speed slows down.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116, a stepped portion 125 whose height is lower on the downstream side than on the upstream side is provided at a position corresponding to the middle of the medal guide passage 121 on the bottom portion 122 . Then, the medal M moving from the upstream side to the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121 is dropped at the stepped portion 125 . Thereby, the medal M decelerated by contacting the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124 can be accelerated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, a fixing portion 126 is provided in the vicinity of the end portion on the medal selector 110 side of the outer wall portion 124 of the chute member 120 . The fixing portion 126 is for fixing the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12 and protrudes upward from the upper end of the outer wall portion 124 . Further, the fixed portion 126 is provided with a screw hole (not shown) penetrating from the front side to the back side thereof. Furthermore, a screw hole passing through the fixing portion 126 is provided above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124 .

The chute member 120 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 by screws 127 passed through the screw holes of the fixing portion 126 . Further, when the chute member 120 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127 , the screw 127 is positioned above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124 .

Here, as shown in FIG. 115, the thickness of the medal M is defined as "T".
Also, as shown in FIG. 116, the diameter of the medal M is "D", and the radius of the medal M is "R". Further, the height of the step portion 125 is "H1", the height of the inner wall portion 123 is "H2", and the height of the outer wall portion 124 is "H3".
Further, as shown in FIG. 118, the width of the medal guide passage 121 (the distance between the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124) is defined as "L1", the total length of the screw 127 is defined as "L2", and the diameter of the screw head is defined as Let it be "L3".

The width “L1” of the medal guide passage 121, the thickness “T” of the medal M, and the diameter “D” of the medal M are configured to satisfy “L1>T” and “L1<D”. there is That is, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is wider (larger) than the thickness "T" of the medal M and narrower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M.
As a result, the medal M is moved on the bottom surface portion 122 of the medal guide passage 121 in a raised state.

Further, the height “H2” of the inner wall portion 123, the height “H3” of the outer wall portion 124, and the diameter “D” of the medal M are set so as to satisfy “H2<D” and “H3<D”. It is configured. That is, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 is lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M, and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 is also lower than the diameter "D" of the medal M ( small).
As a result, the medal M moves on the bottom surface portion 122 of the medal guide passage 121 in a state in which the upper portion of the medal M protrudes above the upper ends of the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124 .

Furthermore, with respect to the height "H1" of the stepped portion 125, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the radius "R" of the medal M, "H1<H2" , and satisfy “H1<H3” and “H1<R”. That is, the height "H1" of the stepped portion 125 is lower (smaller) than the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the height "H1" of the medal M. Lower (smaller) than the radius "R".
As a result, when the medal M falls on the stepped portion 125, it is prevented from jumping out of the medal guide passage 121 by overcoming the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124.例文帳に追加

The height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 may be configured to satisfy "H2=H3" or "H2<H3". , or may be configured to satisfy "H2>H3".
That is, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 may be equal to the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, or may be higher (larger) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124. , may be lower (smaller) than the height “H3” of the outer wall portion 124 .

Further, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the total length "L2" of the screw 127, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head are configured to satisfy "L1<L2" and "L1<L3". . That is, the total length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head is thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121.
As a result, even if the screw 127 is removed from the rear surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 can be prevented from entering the medal guide passage 121, so that the passage of the medal M is not hindered. .
Moreover, it is configured to satisfy “L2>L3”. That is, the overall length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the diameter "L3" of the screw head. As a result, chute member 120 can be firmly fixed to the rear surface of front door 12 with screw 127 .

A locking portion (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of chute member 120 . This locking portion is for locking the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12 . Then, the chute member 120 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127 passed through the screw hole of the fixing portion 126 while the sheet member 120 is locked to the rear surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion. Therefore, even if the screw 127 is removed, the chute member 120 does not separate from the rear surface of the front door 12 and fall.

In addition, the medal slot 47 has a medal placing portion (not shown) on which a plurality of medals M can be placed in an aligned state. In the fifth embodiment, ten medals M can be placed on the medal placing portion in a state of being aligned. Then, a plurality of medals M placed on the medal placement portion in an aligned state can be continuously inserted from the medal insertion port 47 .

Further, when the thickness of the medal M is "T", the width of the medal guiding passage 121 is "L1", and the number of medals M that can be placed on the medal placing portion is "M", "L1< (M÷2)×T” is satisfied. That is, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is narrower than the thickness "(M/2)×T" of the medals M that are half the number of medals that can be placed on the medal placement portion of the medal slot 47. (small).

The return member 130 guides the medals M disallowed to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and the medals M dispensed from the medal dispensing device 15 to the medal receiving tray 19. It is provided at a position corresponding to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout port 16 on the back side.
When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, a medal return passage 132 and a medal payout passage 134 are formed between the back surface of the front door 12 and the return member 130, as shown in FIG. be done.

The medal return path 132 is a path for guiding the medals M whose insertion is prohibited by the medal selector 110 to the medal payout port 16 .
Furthermore, the medal payout passage 134 is a passage for guiding the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16 .
Note that the medal return path 132 and the medal payout path 134 are joined in the middle to form one path.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, a return receiving port 131 is provided on the upper portion of the return member 130 . The return acceptance port 131 is an opening for receiving medals M that have been disallowed to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and dropped out of the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45, and are the entrance of the medal return passage 132. It is an opening that becomes, and is configured to be positioned vertically below the blocker 45 of the medal selector 110 .
The medal selector 110 disapproves the insertion of the medal M, and the medal M that falls out of the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 passes through the return acceptance opening 131, is guided by the medal return passage 132, and is guided by the medal return passage 132. It passes through the payout port 16 and is stored in the medal receiving tray 19. - 特許庁

In addition, a payout receiving port 133 is provided at a position below the center of the return member 130 and on the right side in FIG. 113 . The payout acceptance port 133 is an opening for receiving the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15, and is an opening serving as an entrance to the medal payout passage 134, and the medal payout is performed with the front door 12 closed. It is configured to be positioned in front of the device 15 .
After passing through a payout receiving port 133, the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 are guided by a medal payout passage 134, pass through a medal payout port 16, and are stored in a medal tray 19.例文帳に追加

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, the peripheral edge portion of the return receiving opening 131 in the upper portion of the return member 130 is referred to as "upper edge portion 135". That is, the upper edge portion 135 is a portion corresponding to the peripheral edge of the return acceptance opening 131 . When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 113, a gap 112 is provided between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. As shown in FIG. An upper edge portion 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 . Accordingly, the return receiving port 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 115, the thickness of the medal M is "T", the interval of the gap 112 is "W", and the width of the upper edge portion 135 is "B".
The thickness “T” of the medal M and the interval “W” of the gap 112 are configured to satisfy “W>T”. That is, the interval "W" of the gap 112 is greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 117, the medal M can be inserted into the gap 112. As shown in FIG.
More specifically, it is configured to satisfy “W≈2×T”. That is, the interval "W" of the gap 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, “two” medals M can be inserted into the clearance 112 .

In the fifth embodiment, a selector base 113 (FIG. 113) is fixed at a position corresponding to the medal slot 47 on the rear surface of the front door 12, and the medal selector 110 is detachably attached to the selector base 113. It is
113, between the right side of the medal selector 110 (the side where the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided) and the upstream end of the chute member 120, the right side of the selector base 113 section is placed. The gap 112 is provided between the right side of the selector base 113 and the upstream end of the chute member 120 .

The selector base 113 is formed by bending sheet metal, and the thickness of the sheet metal forming the selector base 113 is 0.8 mm to 1.0 mm.
Furthermore, the thickness "T" of the medal M is set to "1.6" mm, and the interval "W" of the gap 12 is set to "3.2" mm.
Therefore, the distance from the right side of the medal selector 110 (the side where the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided) to the upstream end of the chute member 120 is 4.0 mm to 4.2 mm. ” mm.

Further, an upper edge portion 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, and the thickness "T" of the medal M, the interval "W" of the gap 112, and the width "B" of the upper edge portion 135 are: It is configured to satisfy “B>T” and “B>W”. That is, the width “B” of the upper edge 135 is greater than the thickness “T” of the medal M and greater than the spacing “W” of the gap 112 . Additionally, the upper edge 135 is configured to be substantially horizontal. Therefore, the medal M inserted in the gap 112 can be placed on the upper edge portion 135 .

For example, a hall clerk may insert a medal M into the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 during maintenance of the medal selector 110 . At this time, since the medal M is placed on the upper edge portion 135 , the medal M can be held in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 .
However, there is a case where the hall clerk forgets that the medal M is left in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and closes the front door 12 . In this case, the medal M falls from the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 due to the impact when the front door 12 is closed.

At this time, the upper edge portion 135 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, and the return acceptance opening 131 is not arranged, so that the medal M falling from the gap 112 does not fall into the return acceptance opening 131. . Therefore, the medal M falling from the gap 112 does not reach the medal tray 19 through the medal return passage 132 and the medal payout port 16.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from giving the player the medals M put in the gap 112 for the maintenance of the medal selector 110.例文帳に追加

Further, as shown in FIG. 114, the gap 112 is arranged above the storage receiving port 35a of the hopper 35. As shown in FIG. That is, the storage receiving port 35 a of the hopper 35 opens at a position lower than the gap 112 . As a result, the medals M falling from the gap 112 when the front door 12 is closed can be dropped into the storage receiving opening 35a and stored in the hopper 35.例文帳に追加

Further, as described above, since the interval "W" of the gap 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, when "one" medal M is inserted into the gap 112, , and the medal M, there is no possibility that "one" medal M cannot be taken out from the gap 112.例文帳に追加
Then, when the front door 12 is closed with the "1" medal M in the gap 112, the "1" medal M falls from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time and enters the storage receiving port 35a. It drops and is stored in the hopper 35 .

Furthermore, if the interval "W" of the gap 112 is slightly wider (larger) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, when "2" medals M are inserted into the gap 112, this "2" There is no possibility that the medals M cannot be taken out from the clearance 112.例文帳に追加
When the front door 12 is closed with the "2" medals M in the gap 112, the same operation is performed when the front door 12 is closed with the "1" medal M in the gap 112. , it falls from the gap 112 due to the impact when the front door 12 is closed, falls into the storage receiving port 35a, and is stored in the hopper 35. - 特許庁

Conversely, when the interval “W” of the gap 112 is slightly narrower (smaller) than twice the thickness “T” of the medal M, “two” medals M are pushed into the gap 112 . In this case, the "2" medals M that have been pushed in cannot be taken out from the gap 112. - 特許庁
However, if the front door 12 is closed while the "2" medals M are pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may remain in the gap 112 in some cases.

Here, as shown in FIG. 117, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 is inserted into the gap 112 so as to block the exit 111d of the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110. stay in. Therefore, when one medal M remains in the gap 112, another medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. It hits one medal M in the gap 112 and stops.

Further, when another medal M passing through the medal passage 111 hits the one medal M in the gap 112, the upper end of the one medal M in the gap 112 is positioned at the center of the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111. located higher. Therefore, another medal M passing through the medal passage 111 does not climb over one medal M in the gap 112.例文帳に追加
Therefore, when one medal M enters the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. - 特許庁

In addition, although it is not possible to directly detect that the medal M remains in the gap 112, as described above, when one medal M remains in the gap 112, it is inserted from the medal slot 47. Another medal M hits one medal M in the gap 112 and stops. At this time, another medal M stays near the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, so that the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on.

Further, when the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error in which the medals M are clogged (stagnation) in the medal selector 110 is detected, and notifies that effect. Thereby, it is possible to indirectly detect that the medal M remains in the gap 112 . Error detection and notification will be described later.

Further, when the chute member 120 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127 , the return receiving port 131 is not arranged vertically below the screw 127 .
Therefore, even if the screw 127 is removed from the rear surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 does not drop into the return receiving opening 131. - 特許庁Therefore, the loosened screw 127 does not reach the medal tray 19 through the medal return passage 132 and the medal payout port 16. - 特許庁

Further, as shown in FIG. 112, the medal selector 110 is provided with a passage sensor 46. As shown in FIG. The path sensor 46 is a sensor provided for determining whether or not there is an error that the medals M are jammed (accumulated), or whether there is an act of cheating. Although not shown in FIG. 113, the passage sensor 46 is provided on the vertical portion 111a of the medal passage 111. As shown in FIG. That is, the passage sensor 46 is provided upstream of the blocker 45 in the token passage 111 .

Therefore, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the path sensor 46 first. Further, the path sensor 46 detects medals inserted from the medal slot 47 regardless of whether the blocker 45 permits (on state) or prohibits (off state) the insertion of medals M. M can be detected.

In addition, although not shown in FIGS. 111 to 121, the shoot member 120 has a shoot sensor in the middle of the medal guide passage 121. As shown in FIG. The shoot sensor, like the path sensor 46, is a sensor provided for determining whether or not there is an error in which the medals M are jammed (accumulated), or whether there is a hoax. Since the chute member 120 guides the medals M permitted to be thrown by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, the chute sensor is provided downstream of the throw-in sensor 44a and the throw-in sensor 44b.

Also, the passage sensor 46 and the shoot sensor are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 .
Both the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor may be provided, either one of them may be provided, or neither of them may be provided.

Next, error detection, error notification, and cancellation of error notification in the fifth embodiment will be described.
For example, when the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 generates an error in which medals M are clogged (stayed) in the medal selector 110 (hereinafter referred to as "selector retention error"). ) is detected, and a notification indicating a selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as "selector retention notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a selector retention error (for example, "CE") on the acquired number display LED 78 as the selector retention notification.

Further, when detecting a selector retention error, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as a “selector retention command”) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stay command, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like perform selector stay notification. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice saying “Please call a staff member” from the speaker 22 and displays the words “selector error” on the image display device 23 as the selector stay notification.

Further, for example, when the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b are not turned on in this order (the medal M does not pass normally), the main control board 50 generates an error that the medal M does not pass normally (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "selector passage error") is detected, and notification indicating the selector passage error (hereinafter referred to as "selector passage error notification") is executed.

As described above, when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is guided to the downstream side of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, first, the insertion sensor 44a is turned on, and then the insertion sensor 44b is turned on. It goes from off to on, then the on sensor 44a goes from on to off, and finally the on sensor 44b goes from on to off.
When the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b are turned on/off in the above order, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally, and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b are turned on/off in the above order. If it is not turned off, it is determined that a selector passage error has been detected.

Further, when the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the number of bets or the number of credits of the medal M.
On the other hand, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passage error, it displays a code indicating the selector passage error (for example, "CP") on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector passage error notification.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector passing error, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating the selector passing error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passing error command") to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passage error command, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like execute the selector passage error notification. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice saying "Please call a staff member" from the speaker 22 and displays the characters "Selector error" on the image display device 23 as the selector passing error notification. .

It should be noted that it may be determined that a selector passing error (or a selector backflow error) has been detected when the closing sensor 44b is turned on from off while the closing sensor 44a is in the off state.
Also, the closing sensor 44b is turned on from off, then the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off, then the closing sensor 44b is turned off from on, and finally the closing sensor 44a is turned off from on. It may be determined that a selector passage error (or a selector backflow error) is detected when the condition becomes true.

Further, when the path sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time after detecting the medal M, and when the medal M is no longer detected after the predetermined time has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M passes normally. judge that it did.
On the other hand, when the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the detection of the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Further, when the passage sensor 46 stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time elapses after detecting the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has been detected.

Further, when the shot sensor continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time after detecting the medal M, and when the medal M is no longer detected after the predetermined time has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M passes normally. judge that it did.
On the other hand, when the shoot sensor continues to detect medals M even after a predetermined time has passed since the detection of medals M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected.
Further, when the shoot sensor stops detecting the medal M before a predetermined time elapses after detecting the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has been detected.

The main control board 50 also has an input monitoring counter (not shown).
When the blocker 45 is in the ON state (a state in which the passage of the medal M is permitted), the insertion monitoring counter is incremented by "1" when the medal M normally passes through the path sensor 46, and the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. and a counter that is decremented by "1" when it normally passes through the input sensor 44b. For this reason, the input monitoring counter repeats "1" and "0" during normal operation.
When the blocker 45 is in an OFF state (a state in which passage of the medal M is not permitted), the insertion monitoring counter does not add "1" even if the medal M passes the passage sensor 46. FIG.
Further, the insertion monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from an OFF state (a state in which passage of the medals M is not permitted) to an ON state (a state in which the passage of the medals M is permitted).

The main control board 50 adds "1" to the input monitoring counter when the medal M normally passes the path sensor 46 while the blocker 45 is in the ON state, and the medal M is detected by the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b. is passed normally, the input monitor counter is decremented by "1".
When the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the path sensor 46 does not detect the passing of the medals M, and only the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detect the passage of the medals M, the insertion monitoring counter is set to " −1”, and the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected.

Also, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the path sensor 46 detects the passage of the medal M, but the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not detect the passage of the medal M. is detected, the input monitoring counter becomes "2", and the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has been detected.

In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the insertion monitoring counter is incremented by "1" when the medal M passes the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally, and the medal M passes the shoot sensor normally. It may be a counter that is decremented by "1" from time to time.
That is, when the blocker 45 is on and the medal M normally passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the insertion monitoring counter, and the medal M shoots. When passing through the sensor normally, "1" may be subtracted from the input monitoring counter.

Then, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detected the passage of the medal M, but the shoot sensor did not detect the passage of the medal M, and then the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b. detects the passage of medals M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "2", and the main control board 50 may determine that an insertion monitoring error has been detected.
In addition, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state, when only the shoot sensor detects the passage of the medal M without the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b detecting the passage of the medal M, the insertion monitoring counter is set to "-". 1”, and the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected.

The normal value of the input monitoring counter is not limited to "0" to "1". That is, the main control board 50 determines that an input monitoring error has occurred not only when the input monitoring counter has become "2" or "-1". For example, the main control board 50 may determine that a loading monitoring error has been detected when the loading monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "3" or more or a predetermined value of "-2" or less. .

Further, when the input signal from the path sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b are used to add/subtract the input monitoring counter, the main control board 50 switches the blocker 45 from the off state to the on state. Clear the input monitor counter when
However, the main control board 50 changes the blocker 45 from the OFF state to the ON state when adding/subtracting the input monitoring counter with the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the shoot sensor. When doing so, the input monitoring counter may or may not be cleared.
In other words, when the input signal from the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b and the input signal from the shoot sensor are added/subtracted, the input monitoring counter is set to: It may be cleared or may not be cleared.

Alternatively, a throwing monitoring counter for the path sensor 46 and a throwing monitoring counter for the chute sensor may be provided separately.
That is, as the input monitoring counter, a first input monitoring counter and a second input monitoring counter can be provided.
The first input monitoring counter is a counter that adds/subtracts the input signal from the path sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b.
Furthermore, the second input monitoring counter is a counter that adds/subtracts the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the shoot sensor.

That is, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M passes through the path sensor 46 normally, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the first insertion monitoring counter, and the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. And when it passes through the insertion sensor 44b normally, the first insertion monitoring counter is decremented by "1".
Then, the main control board 50 detects a loading monitoring error when the first loading monitoring counter is not a normal value (for example, when it becomes a predetermined value less than "-1" or a predetermined value greater than "2"). judge that it did.

Further, when the blocker 45 is in the ON state and the medal M normally passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the second insertion monitoring counter, passes the chute sensor normally, the second injection monitoring counter is decremented by "1".
Then, the main control board 50 detects a loading monitoring error when the second loading monitoring counter is no longer normal (for example, when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less or a predetermined value of "2" or more). judge that it did.

Further, for example, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the main control board 50 generates an error that the medals M are not stored in the hopper 35. (hereinafter referred to as "hopper empty error") is detected, and notification indicating the hopper empty error (hereinafter referred to as "hopper empty notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a hopper empty error (for example, "HE") on the acquired number display LED 78 (FIG. 112) as the hopper empty notification.

Further, when detecting a hopper empty error, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating hopper empty (hereinafter referred to as an “empty command”) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the empty command, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like perform hopper empty notification. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice saying “Please call the staff” from the speaker 22 as the hopper empty notification, and displays the characters “Hopper empty” on the image display device 23 .

Further, for example, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b remain on, the main control board 50 detects an error that the medals M are jammed in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as "hopper jam error"). It is determined that the hopper jam error has occurred, and a notification indicating a hopper jam error (hereinafter referred to as "hopper jam notification") is executed. Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a hopper jam error (for example, "HP") on the obtained number display LED 78 as the hopper jam notification.

Further, when detecting a hopper jam error, the main control board 50 transmits a command indicating a hopper jam (hereinafter referred to as “hopper jam command”) to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, the hopper jam notification is performed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice saying “Please call the staff” from the speaker 22 and displays the characters “Hopper Jam” on the image display device 23 as the hopper jam notification.

When detecting the various errors described above, the main control board 50 stops the progress of the game until the various error reports are released.
When the above-described various error factors are eliminated, the main control board 50 no longer detects various errors. is not detected), and continues until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). Then, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 cancel various error reports.

For example, when the selector retention error occurs, the factor of the selector retention error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medals M that are stuck (stayed) in the medal selector 110 . After that, by operating the reset switch 153, the selector retention notification can be canceled.
When the selector passage error occurs, the cause of the selector passage error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medals M in the medal selector 110, as in the case of the selector retention error. Thereafter, by operating the reset switch 153, the notification of the selector passage error can be canceled.

Further, when the hopper empty error occurs, the front door 12 is opened and the hopper 35 is replenished with medals M, thereby eliminating the cause of the hopper empty error. Thereafter, by operating the reset switch 153, the hopper empty notification can be canceled.
After replenishing the hopper 35 with medals M, the hopper empty notification can be canceled by turning the door key counterclockwise by about 45 degrees to turn on the release switch.

Furthermore, when a hopper jam error occurs, the cause of the hopper jam error can be eliminated by opening the front door 12 and removing the medals M jammed in the hopper 35.例文帳に追加Thereafter, by operating the reset switch 153, the hopper jam notification can be canceled.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened (hereinafter referred to as "door opening") by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 notifies that the front door 12 is open (hereinafter referred to as "door opening"). , called “door open notification”). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code (for example, “dE”) indicating the opening of the front door 12 on the acquisition number display LED 78 as the door opening notification.
Further, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 issues a command indicating opening of the front door 12 (hereinafter referred to as "door opening command"). It is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .

Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door opening command, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like perform door opening notification. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, the sound "the door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the characters "door open" on the image display device 23 as the door open notification.

A release switch (not shown) for releasing the door open notification is provided near the locking device on the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player). When the door key is inserted into the door key insertion opening and turned counterclockwise by about 45 degrees in this state, the release switch is turned on from off. That is, when the door key is turned about 45 degrees in the direction opposite to that for unlocking the front door 12, the release switch is turned on from off.
As described above, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot and the door key is turned clockwise by 90 degrees in this state, the door is unlocked. Then, when the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates about the hinge and the front door 12 is opened.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off. Continue until the switch turns from off to on.
While the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. In this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) by about 45 degrees. , when the release switch is turned on from off, the door opening notification is released.

Thus, the operation of turning the door key in the direction opposite to the direction of unlocking the front door 12 is the operation for canceling the door open notification.
Further, when the door opening notification is canceled, the main control board 50 displays the number of acquisitions before displaying "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78 .
Further, when the release switch is turned on from off, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a command indicating the release of the door open notification (hereinafter referred to as "notification cancellation command").
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command, it terminates the door opening notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 122 to 132, operation modes at the time of error detection, error notification, and error cancellation in the fifth embodiment will be described.
FIGS. 122 to 129 are time charts showing operation modes during error detection and error cancellation in the fifth embodiment.
FIG. 122 is a time chart showing how the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the selector retention error and when the release switch is operated after the front door 12 is closed.

In FIG. 122, when a selector retention error occurs at the timing of "X11", the main control board 50 detects the selector retention error. Also, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 execute selector retention notification.
Specifically, at timing "X11" in FIG. It is determined that a retention error has been detected. Then, the main control board 50 displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification.

Further, when the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, it transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stay command, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice saying "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector stay notification, and outputs a "selector stay error" to the image display device 23. Display characters.

After that, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X12" in FIG. 122, the main control board 50 determines that the opening of the front door 12 (door opening) has been detected.
Specifically, at timing "X12" in FIG. 122, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 (door opening). judge that it did. However, even if the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification during execution of the selector stay notification, and continues the selector stay notification.

Further, when detecting that the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 transmits a door open command indicating opening of the front door 12 to the sub control board 80 .
However, the sub-control board 80 does not execute the door open notification during execution of the selector stay notification and continues the selector stay notification even if the door open command is received.

After that, at the timing of "X13" in FIG. 122, when the medals M jammed in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 are removed, that is, when the cause of the selector retention error is removed, the main control board 50 detects the selector retention error. is no longer detected. However, once the selector retention notification is executed, it is not canceled only by removing the cause of the selector retention error (the selector retention error is no longer detected), and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). continue until

After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X14" in FIG. 122, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, at timing "X14" in FIG. 122, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on even if the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the selector retention notification. When the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification, this time the acquisition number display LED 78 executes the door opening notification. Specifically, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 (door open).
Further, when the selector stay notification is released, the sub-control board 80 executes the door open notification by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice "the door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the characters "the door is open" on the image display device 23 as the door open notification.

After that, when the front door 12 is closed at the timing of "X15" in FIG. 122, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects the opening of the front door 12 . However, once the door open notification is executed, it is not canceled only by closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17, and continues until the cancellation switch is operated (turned on).

122, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the acquired number before displaying the error code on the acquired number display LED 78 , and transmits to the sub control board 80 a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification.
Then, when receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door opening notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

FIG. 123 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error.
In FIG. 123, when the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M at the timing of "X21" and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, the main control board 50 displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and also transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 .
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stay command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as the selector stay notification, and displays the characters "selector stay error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

123, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open.
However, even if the opening of the front door 12 is detected, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification during execution of the selector stay notification, and continues the selector stay notification.
When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 transmits a door open command indicating that the front door 12 is opened to the sub control board 80 .
However, the sub-control board 80 does not execute the door open notification during execution of the selector stay notification and continues the selector stay notification even if the door open command is received.

After that, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M, and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, that is, the cause of the selector retention error is removed. When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a state where it has not been done, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
However, in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", but after that, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".

Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in FIG. Release the notification, and control to execute the door open notification this time. After that, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 123, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the selector stay notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open at the timing of "X23" in FIG. , and thereafter, at the timing of "X24", control is performed to switch the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "dE" to "CE". Further, the main control board 50 transmits a selector stay command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X24" in FIG.

In addition, when receiving the error cancellation command at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stay notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. After that, when the selector stay command is received at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 123, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the selector stay notification again.

123, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open" at the timing of "X23" in FIG. to switch the display from "selector retention error" to "door open". After that, at the timing of "X24", the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "the door is open" to "please call the staff", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " Control to switch to "selector retention error".

Various errors such as selector retention error, selector passing error, hopper empty error, and hopper jam error are managed (detected, notified, and canceled) by the main control board 50. Door opening is managed by the main control board 50. , and the sub-control board 80 manages (detects, notifies, cancels).
Further, the door open notification may be canceled (finished) under the condition that a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening, or when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. and when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off (from off to on or from off to on). It is canceled (finished) under the condition that the

Furthermore, regarding the door open notification, code display such as "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, voice output such as "door is open" from the speaker 22, and "door open" to the image display device 23 , and outputting audio such as "the door is open" from the speaker 22 and displaying characters such as "the door is open" on the image display device 23. a case where only voice output such as "the door is open" from the speaker 22 is executed;

Furthermore, in FIG. 123, after temporarily canceling the selector retention notification at the timing of "X23" and before re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing of "X24", depending on the contents of the processing executed, from "X23" When the time required to reach "X24" is extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms), which cannot be recognized by human perception, and when it is relatively long (for example, 3 seconds to 5 seconds), which is recognizable by human perception. have
For this reason, depending on the combination of the various cases described above, in the period from once releasing the selector retention notification at the timing of "X23" in FIG. Various modes of operation are possible.

That is, in FIG. 123, the door open notification is executed during the period from when the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". There are cases where the open notification is not executed.
Also, in FIG. 123, when the door open notification is executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and before the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", the door When the execution of the door open notification can be recognized visually and audibly by humans, and when the execution of the door open notification cannot be recognized visually or audibly by humans, or even if it can be recognized, it will be momentary. have

Furthermore, in FIG. 123, when the door open notification is not executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and before the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", When it is possible to visually and audibly recognize that the selector retention notification has been canceled and then re-executed, and when the selector retention notification has been canceled and then re-executed can be visually and audibly recognized by humans. There are times when it is impossible or even if it can be recognized, it is only for a moment.

For example, the door opening is managed by the main control board 50, and the operation of the release switch with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off is set as a condition for releasing (ending) the door open notification. As an open notification, code display such as "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78, voice output such as "door is open" from the speaker 22, and character display such as "door open" on the image display device 23. There are three cases to run.

In this case, in FIG. 123, the door open notification can be executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and before the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24".
In addition, in FIG. 123, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing of "X23" to re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing of "X24" is recognizable by human perception. In the case of a relatively long time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds), when the door opening notification is executed between "X23" and "X24", the door opening notification can be recognized visually and audibly by humans. .

On the other hand, in FIG. 123, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification at the timing of "X23" to re-executing the selector retention notification at the timing of "X24" is to the extent that human perception cannot perceive it. is extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms), even if the door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X23", it is difficult for human beings to perceive this door open notification visually or audibly. be.
However, even if the time required from "X23" to "X24" is so short that it cannot be recognized by human perception, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and the timing of "X24" is canceled. Re-execution of selector stay notification in , may be recognizable by human auditory sense.

That is, when the selector stay notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice "Please call the staff" output from the speaker 22 is interrupted in the middle, and the selector stay notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". When doing so, the voice of "Please call the staff" is output from the beginning. For this reason, it sounds like, for example, "Please call the attendant, please call the attendant."
When an alarm sound such as "boo" or "beep" is output from the speaker 22 as the selector retention notification, it is not possible for the human sense of hearing to recognize that the selector retention notification has been canceled and then re-executed. Or, even if you can recognize it, it will only be for a moment.

Further, for example, the door opening is managed by the sub-control board 80, and the fact that a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the detection of the door opening is set as a cancellation (end) condition for the door opening notification, and the door opening notification is: There are two cases of executing voice output such as "the door is open" from the speaker 22 and character display such as "the door is open" on the image display device 23. FIG.
In this case, if the selector retention notification is to be canceled and re-executed before the predetermined time elapses from the detection of the door opening, the selector retention notification must be canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. , the door open notification can be executed until the selector stay notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".

On the other hand, since the door open notification is not executed after the predetermined time has passed since the detection of the door opening, when the selector retention notification is once canceled and executed again after the predetermined time has passed since the detection of the door opening, In FIG. 123, the door open notification is not performed during the period from when the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" until the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24".

Also, in FIG. 123, when the door open notification is not executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and before the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", " There is a time when the time required from "X23" to "X24" is relatively long (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) to the extent that it can be recognized by human perception.
In this case, between "X23" and "X24", the acquisition number display LED 78 displays the acquisition number before "CE" is displayed, and the speaker 22 outputs the voice "Please call the staff". Then, the image display device 23 displays a screen (for example, a game screen or a game standby screen) before displaying the characters "selector error". These displays between "X23" and "X24" can be recognized visually and audibly by humans. Therefore, it is possible for a person to visually and audibly recognize that the selector stay notification is once canceled and then re-executed.

Also, in FIG. 123, when the door open notification is not executed after the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and before the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24", " The time required from "X23" to "X24" is sometimes extremely short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) to the extent that it cannot be recognized by human perception.
In this case, it is difficult for humans to visually and audibly recognize the display on the acquired number display LED 78 and the image display device 23 and the sound from the speaker 22 between "X23" and "X24". .

However, when the selector stay notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is interrupted, and the selector stay notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". When outputting the voice "Please call the staff" from the beginning, for example, it sounds like "Please call the staff... please call the staff", so the selector stay notification is canceled once. Re-execution later can be recognized by human hearing.

Also, in FIG. 123, the following patterns (1) to (6) are conceivable as patterns of processing to be executed between "X23" and "X24".
(1) In the same interrupt process (Fig. 47), the pattern of temporarily canceling the selector retention notification and then re-executing the selector retention notification (2) In one interrupt process, once canceling the selector retention notification, then Pattern for re-executing selector retention notification in interrupt processing

(3) When the selector retention notification is once canceled in one interrupt process, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, the selector retention notification is canceled once and then the selector retention notification is restarted. A pattern in which interrupt processing is required multiple times before execution, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. In the case of re-executing the notification, a pattern in which interrupt processing is required multiple times from the temporary release of the selector retention notification to the re-execution of the selector retention notification, during which the door open notification is performed.

(5) When the selector retention notification is once canceled in one interrupt process, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt process, the selector retention notification is canceled once and then the selector retention notification is restarted. A pattern in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) elapses before execution, and the door open notification is not executed during this period. In the interrupt process, when the selector retention notification is executed again, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 5 seconds) is required between once canceling the selector retention notification and re-executing the selector retention notification. Pattern that requires progress and executes door open notification during that time

First, the pattern (1) in which the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled and the selector retention notification is executed again in the same interrupt processing will be described.
In this case, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the read processing (step S457) of the input port 51, the main control board 50 controls various switches (reset switch 153, etc.) and various sensors (input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b). etc.). Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the above various data, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on. If so, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
After that, when proceeding to error processing (not shown) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag and executes selector retention notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Further, the cancellation of the selector retention notification and the second selector retention notification are executed by the same interrupt processing. Furthermore, interrupt processing is performed every 2.235 ms. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector retention notification to the execution of the selector retention notification again is less than the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms).

Therefore, in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", and then the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". It is difficult for humans to visually and audibly recognize the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 and the image display device 23 and the sound from the speaker 22 .

However, when the selector stay notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is interrupted, and the selector stay notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". When outputting the voice "Please call the staff" from the beginning, for example, it sounds like "Please call the staff... please call the staff", so the selector stay notification is canceled once. Re-execution later can be recognized by human hearing.

Next, a pattern will be described in which the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled in the above (2) one interrupt process, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the next interrupt process.
In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when proceeding to read processing (step S457) of the input port 51 in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. load. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, as in the pattern (1) above, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and inputs When it is determined that the sensor 44a and the closing sensor 44b remain ON, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 is on in the main process (FIG. 67) at a timing before the process (step S278), or when all the reels 31 are Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after the determination processing (step S289) as to whether or not the motor has stopped. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case as well, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
However, unlike the pattern (1) above, in the first interrupt processing, the notification of selector retention is canceled, and in the main processing executed after that, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. be done. Then, selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector retention notification to the execution of the selector retention notification again is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms). Become.

Also in this case, in FIG. It is difficult for humans to visually and audibly perceive the display on the obtained number display LED 78 and the image display device 23 and the sound from the speaker 22 during this period.

However, when the selector stay notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is interrupted, and the selector stay notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". When outputting the voice "Please call the staff" from the beginning, for example, it sounds like "Please call the staff... please call the staff", so the selector stay notification is canceled once. Re-execution later can be recognized by human hearing.

Next, in the above (3) one interrupt process, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, and in the subsequent interrupt process, the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern will be described in which interrupt processing is required a plurality of times until the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when proceeding to read processing (step S457) of the input port 51 in the interrupt processing (FIG. 47), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. load. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, unlike the pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 is on in the main process (FIG. 67) at a timing before the process (step S278), or when all the reels 31 are Error processing (not shown) is executed at a timing after the determination processing (step S289) as to whether or not the motor has stopped. At this time, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention error state by referring to the error flag storage area.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after releasing the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 displays the acquired number display LED 78 as "CE Display the number of acquisitions before displaying ".
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

After that, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the next interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on. When it is determined that the state remains as it is, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case as well, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Also, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once released, and in the main processing executed after that, the selector retention error state is once released. After that, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, the acquired number before "CE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 is displayed, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, the selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main process executed thereafter, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. After that, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, the selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector retention notification to the execution of the selector retention notification again is the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms×3=6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms×4= 8.94 ms).
Therefore, in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", and then the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". It is difficult for humans to visually and audibly recognize the display on the number display LED 78 and the image display device 23 and the sound from the speaker 22 .

However, when the selector stay notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the voice output from the speaker 22 saying "Please call the staff" is interrupted, and the selector stay notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". When outputting the voice "Please call the staff" from the beginning, for example, it sounds like "Please call the staff... please call the staff", so the selector stay notification is canceled once. Re-execution later can be recognized by human hearing.

Next, in the above (4) one interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, and in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern will be described in which interrupt processing is required a plurality of times until the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when proceeding to read processing (step S457) of the input port 51 in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. load. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, unlike the pattern (1) above, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and 17 is turned on, it is determined that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and an error flag indicating door opening is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, opens the door, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after the door is opened in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as the door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the door opening command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

After that, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the next interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on. When it is determined that the state remains as it is, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, the door open notification is cancelled, and an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the selector stay notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector stay notification is executed again.
In addition, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the release of the selector retention notification and the detection of the door opening are executed, and in the main processing executed thereafter, the game progresses with the door open. error handling is performed. After that, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, the door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, the release of the door open notification and the detection of the selector retention error are executed. Further, in the main process executed after that, an error process for stopping the progress of the game is executed as a selector retention error state. After that, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, the selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector retention notification to the execution of the selector retention notification again is the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms×3=6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms×4= 8.94 ms).
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Even if you can, it's only for a moment. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is cancelled, and the selector stay notification is executed again.

Next, in the above (5) one interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, and in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern will be described in which a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) elapses before the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when proceeding to read processing (step S457) of the input port 51 in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. load. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
After that, unlike the pattern (1) above, when proceeding to timer setting processing (not shown) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 measures the elapsed time after the selector retention notification is cancelled. set a timer to

Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention error state by referring to the error flag storage area.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after releasing the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 displays the acquired number display LED 78 as "CE Display the number of acquisitions before displaying ".
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects that a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed after releasing the selector retention notification. or not.
When it is determined that the predetermined time has passed since the selector retention notification was released, and it is determined in the input error check process (step S463) that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are still on, The main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
In addition, in one interrupt process, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, and a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the selector retention notification is canceled is set. In the main processing executed after that, the selector retention error state is temporarily released. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the acquired number before displaying "CE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and an error cancellation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When it is determined that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the release of the selector retention notification in the subsequent interrupt processing, a selector retention error is detected. In the main process executed after that, an error process for stopping the progress of the game is executed as a selector retention error state. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector stay notification is executed and the selector stay command is sent to the sub-control board 80 .

For this reason, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) from once canceling the selector retention notification to executing the selector retention notification again.
Also, in FIG. 123, the sub-control board 80 does not display an image until the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". The screen (for example, game screen or game standby screen) before displaying the characters of "selector error" is displayed on the device 23 without displaying the characters of "selector error".

Therefore, in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification was canceled during the period from when the selector retention notification was once canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification was re-executed at the timing of "X24." can be recognized by human sight and hearing.
It should be noted that the condition is not that a predetermined period of time elapses between once canceling the selector retention notification and re-executing the selector retention notification. The condition may be that it is turned off from on.
In this case as well, in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification is canceled during the period from when the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24." This can be made recognizable by human vision and hearing.

In addition, when the selector retention notification is once canceled in the above (5) one interrupt processing, and the selector retention notification is executed again in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is once canceled and then the selector retention notification is executed. The following example is conceivable as a pattern in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) elapses before the notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

First, in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the read process (step S457) of the input port 51, the main control board 50 reads the input signals of various switches and various sensors. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 temporarily cancels the selector retention error state by referring to the error flag storage area.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after releasing the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 displays the acquired number display LED 78 as "CE Display the number of acquisitions before displaying ".
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 68), when it is determined in the input error check processing (step S463) that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. Then, an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to timer set processing (not shown) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after setting the selector retention error state in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 sets the selector retention error state to Sets a timer to measure elapsed time.
In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector retention error state. to judge whether

Then, when it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since the selector retention error state, the main control board 50 proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), and the main control board 50 outputs a code "CE" indicating a selector retention error as a selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 .
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".

Also, in one interrupt process, the notification of selector retention is temporarily released, and in the main process executed thereafter, the selector retention error state is once released. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the acquired number before displaying "CE" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, and an error cancellation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. When a selector retention error is detected in the interrupt processing to be executed thereafter, in the main processing to be executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state, and in the interrupt processing to be executed thereafter, selector retention Sets a timer that measures the elapsed time since the error state. Then, when it is determined in the subsequent interrupt processing that a predetermined time has passed since the selector stay error state, the selector stay notification is executed and the selector stay command is sent to the sub-control board 80 .

For this reason, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) from once canceling the selector retention notification to executing the selector retention notification again.
Also, in FIG. 123, the sub-control board 80 is set to the image display device 23 during the period from when the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled at the timing of "X23" until the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24". , the screen (for example, game screen or game standby screen) before displaying the characters of "selector error" is displayed without displaying the characters of "selector error".

Furthermore, in FIG. 123, the sub-control board 80 outputs " The voice "Please call the staff" is not output, and the voice before the voice "Please call the staff" is output.
Therefore, in FIG. 123, the fact that the selector retention notification is canceled during the period from when the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24" is It is recognizable by human sight and hearing.

Finally, in the above (6) one interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, and in the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector retention notification is executed again. A pattern in which a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) elapses before the stay notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time will be described.

In this case, as in pattern (1) above, when proceeding to read processing (step S457) of the input port 51 in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 receives input signals from various switches and various sensors. load. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

After that, unlike the pattern (1) above, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and 17 is turned on, it is determined that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and an error flag indicating door opening is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
Thereafter, in interrupt processing (FIG. 68), when proceeding to timer setting processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects opening of the front door 12 and stores an error flag indicating door opening. Sets a timer to measure elapsed time.

Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, opens the door, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after the door is opened in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as the door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the door opening command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 and stores an error flag indicating the opening of the door. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has passed.
Then, when it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the front door 12 was detected and the error flag indicating door opening was stored, the input error check process (step S463) performs the closing sensor 44a and closing sensor 44a. 44b remains on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. FIG.

Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the selector stay notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled and the selector stay notification is executed again.
In addition, in one interrupt process, the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled, the door opening is detected, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time after the door opening is detected. In the main process executed after that, an error process is executed to stop the progress of the game as the door is opened. In the interrupt processing executed after that, the door opening notification is executed, and the door opening command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Furthermore, when it is determined that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the detection of the door opening in the subsequent interrupt processing, the door opening notification is canceled and the selector retention error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, an error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector retention error state. In the subsequent interrupt processing, the selector stay notification is executed and the selector stay command is sent to the sub-control board 80 .

For this reason, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) from once canceling the selector retention notification to executing the selector retention notification again.
Also, in FIG. 123, the sub-control board 80 does not display an image until the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" and the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X24". The characters "door open" are displayed on the device 23 without displaying the characters "selector error".

Therefore, in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification was canceled during the period from when the selector retention notification was once canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification was re-executed at the timing of "X24." , and that the door opening notification has been executed can be recognized visually and audibly by humans.
It should be noted that the condition is not that a predetermined period of time elapses between once canceling the selector retention notification and re-executing the selector retention notification. The condition may be that it is turned off from on.
In this case as well, in FIG. 123, the selector retention notification is canceled during the period from when the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23" to when the selector retention notification is re-executed at the timing of "X24." It is possible to visually and audibly recognize that the door has been opened and that the door opening notification has been executed.

In addition, it detects the opening of the front door 12, measures the elapsed time after storing an error flag indicating door opening, and until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) elapses, the door opening notification is continued. During this period, even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated, the door opening notification can be prevented from being released. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify that the front door 12 is opened.

The same applies when an error such as a selector retention error is detected. That is, an error such as a selector retention error is detected, and the elapsed time after an error flag indicating the error is stored is measured. During this period, even if the reset switch 153 or the release switch is operated, the error notification such as the selector retention notification can be prevented from being canceled. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify that an error such as a selector retention error has been detected.

Here, in FIG. 123, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error has been described by taking the selector retention error as an example. When the hopper jam error occurs, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

For example, in FIG. 123, when the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven at the timing of "X21", the main control board 50 reports a hopper empty error. is detected.
When the main control board 50 detects the hopper empty error, the main control board 50 displays "HE" indicating the hopper empty error on the acquired number display LED 78 as the hopper empty notification, and sends an empty command indicating the hopper empty error to the sub control board 80. Send to

Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the empty command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as the hopper empty notification, and displays the characters "Hopper empty" on the image display device 23. .
After that, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X22" in FIG. 123 and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.

However, during execution of the hopper empty notification, the main control board 50 continues the hopper empty notification without executing the door open notification even if door opening is detected.
Further, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub-control board 80 when the door opening is detected.
However, while the hopper empty notification is being executed, the sub-control board 80 continues the hopper empty notification without executing the door open notification even if the door open command is received.

After that, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the reset switch 153 is operated ( ON), the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the hopper empty notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, in FIG. 123, although the hopper empty notification is once canceled at the timing of "X23", the hopper empty notification is executed again at the timing of "X24".
Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing “X23” in FIG. Release the notification, and control to execute the door open notification this time. After that, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 123, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper empty notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the obtained number display LED 78 from "HE" indicating the hopper empty error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 at the timing of "X23" in FIG. , and thereafter, at the timing of "X24", control is performed to switch the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "dE" to "HE". Further, the main control board 50 transmits an empty command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X24" in FIG.

Also, when receiving an error cancellation command at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper empty notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. After that, when the empty command is received at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 123, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the hopper empty notification again.

123, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open" at the timing of "X23" in FIG. display is switched from "Hopper empty" to "Door open". After that, at the timing of "X24", the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "the door is open" to "please call the staff", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " Control to switch to "hopper empty".

If the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even after a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has passed despite the hopper motor 36 being driven, the main control board 50 It is determined that a hopper empty error has been detected, and "HE" indicating a hopper empty error is displayed on the obtained number display LED 78 as a hopper empty notification. After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated even when the hopper 35 is not replenished with medals M (the cause of the hopper empty error is removed), the main control board 50 cancels the hopper empty notification, The hopper motor 36 is driven again. However, since the hopper 35 is not replenished with medals M, the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turned on/off even after a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has passed since the hopper motor 36 was driven again. Therefore, the main control board 50 executes the hopper empty notification again. Therefore, it takes about 3 to 5 seconds from when the hopper empty notification is released to when it is re-executed.

Further, when the closing sensor 44a and the closing sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and acquires "CE" indicating a selector retention error as a selector retention notification. It is displayed on the number display LED 78 . After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated even when the medal selector 110 is still filled with medals M (the cause of the selector retention error is not removed), the main control board 50 notifies the selector retention. is canceled once. However, since the medal selector 110 is still filled with medals M, the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, so the main control board 50 executes the selector retention notification again. At this time, the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification to re-executing it is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms×2=4.47 ms).

In this way, the time required from once canceling the hopper empty notification to re-executing it is about 3 to 5 seconds, whereas the time required from once canceling the selector retention notification to re-executing it. is about the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms×2=4.47 ms).
Therefore, the time required to re-execute the hopper empty notification once canceled is longer than the time required to re-execute the selector retention notification once released.

Further, for example, at the timing of "X21" in FIG. 123, when the closing sensor 44b is turned on from off and then when the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off, the main control board 50 generates a selector passing error. is detected.
When detecting a selector passing error, the main control board 50 displays "CP" indicating a selector passing error on the obtained number display LED 78 as a selector passing error notification, and sub-controls a selector passing error command indicating a selector passing error. Send to board 80 .

Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passage error command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice message "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a selector passage error notification, and displays the characters "selector error" on the image display device 23. display.
After that, when the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X22" in FIG. 123 and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects the opening of the door.
However, the main control board 50 continues the selector passage error notification without executing the door opening notification even if the door opening is detected while the selector passage error notification is being performed.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub-control board 80 when the door opening is detected.
However, even if the door opening command is received, the sub-control board 80 does not execute the door opening notification and continues the selector passage error notification during execution of the selector passage error notification.

After that, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the condition where the cause of the selector passage error is not removed When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a state where the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on), the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector passing error notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
Here, although the notification of the selector passage error is canceled, since the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected this time, and states "X24 ”, the selector stay notification is executed.

Specifically, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the condition in which the factor of the selector passage error is not removed (the closing sensor 44b is turned on from off, and then the closing sensor 44a is turned on from off). Therefore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the closing sensor 44a and the closing sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification and notifies the door opening. to run.
Since the closing sensor 44a and the closing sensor 44b remain on after that, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected this time, and at the timing of "X24" in FIG. The door open notification is canceled and the selector stay notification is executed.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "CP" indicating the selector passage error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 at the timing of "X23" in FIG. to control.
After that, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 from "dE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open, to "CE", which indicates a selector retention error, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. to control.
Further, the main control board 50 transmits a selector stay command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X24" in FIG.

Also, when receiving the error cancellation command at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector passage error notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time.
After that, at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 123, when the selector stay command is received, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the selector stay notification this time.

123, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open" at the timing of "X23" in FIG. to switch the display from "selector error" to "door open".
After that, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "The door is open" to "Please call the staff" at the timing of "X24" in FIG. to switch the display from "door open" to "selector error".

In this way, when a selector passage error is detected, a selector passage error notification is executed. After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector passage error has not been removed, the selector passage error is canceled, This time, there is a case where selector retention error is detected and selector retention notification is executed.
As described above, when a selector retention error is detected, the selector retention notification is executed. After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is temporarily issued. After canceling, there is also a case where the selector retention notification is executed again.
That is, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the same error notification is executed before and after the reset switch 153 is operated, and different error notification is performed before and after the reset switch 153 is operated. and when it is executed.

In FIG. 123, the selector passing error notification is canceled at the timing of "X23", but there is a case where the door opening notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, at the timing of "X24", there is a case where the selector stay notification is executed this time.
For example, in the same interrupt processing (FIG. 68), when reading the input port 51 (step S457 in FIG. 68), input error check (step S463 in FIG. 68), and error processing (not shown) are executed. , the door open notification is not executed.

Specifically, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the read processing (step S457) of the input port 51, the main control board 50 controls various switches (reset switch 153, etc.) and various sensors (throw-in sensor 44a and throw-in sensor 44a). sensor 44b, etc.) is read. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the above various data, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on. If so, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
After that, when proceeding to error processing (not shown) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag and executes selector retention notification.
Thereafter, in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464), the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area and transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, the selector passage error notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door opening notification, at the timing of "X24", the selector retention notification is executed this time.
Also, the cancellation of the selector passage error notification and the selector retention notification are executed by the same interrupt processing. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector retention notification is less than the time (2.235 ms) for one interrupt.

Also, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), reading of the input port 51 (step S457 in FIG. 68) and input error check (step S463 in FIG. 68) are executed, and then in the main processing (FIG. 67) executed, Door open notification is not executed even when error processing (not shown) is executed.

Specifically, in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the read process (step S457) of the input port 51, the main control board 50 reads the input signals of various switches and various sensors. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the above various data, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on. If so, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected, and an error flag indicating the selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case as well, the selector retention notification is canceled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door opening notification, at the timing of "X24", the selector retention notification is executed this time.
Also, in one interrupt process, the selector passage error notification is canceled, in the main process executed after that, the progress of the game is stopped as a selector retention error state, and in the interrupt process executed after that, the selector retention notification is issued this time. to run. Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector retention notification is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms×2=4.47 ms). .

In addition, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the selector passage error notification is canceled and the door opening notification is executed. Even if it is a moment, it has a case. Then, at the timing of "X24", there is a case where the door open notification is canceled and the selector stay notification is executed this time.
A plurality of times of interrupt processing may be required from the execution of reading of the input port 51 and input error check in the interrupt processing to the execution of error processing in the main processing. In such a case, the door opening notification is executed, but the execution of the door opening notification cannot be recognized visually or audibly by human beings, or even if it can be recognized, it is only for a moment.

Specifically, in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the read process (step S457) of the input port 51, the main control board 50 reads the input signals of various switches and various sensors. Various types of data such as level data, rise data, and fall data are generated based on the read input signal, and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . At this time, when determining that the reset switch 153 has been turned on from off, the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification.

After that, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68), when proceeding to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and when it determines that the door switch 17 is on. determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the opening of the door in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .
Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, opens the door, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after the door is opened in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 indicates that the door is open as the door open notification. The code "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the door opening command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

After that, when proceeding to the input error check process (step S463) in the next interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b are turned on. When it is determined that the state remains as it is, it is determined that a selector retention error has been detected. Then, the door open notification is cancelled, and an error flag indicating a selector retention error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 .

Thereafter, in the main processing (FIG. 67), the main control board 50 performs the timing before the determination processing (step S278) of whether or not the start switch 41 is on, or the determination processing of whether all the reels 31 have stopped ( At a timing after step S289), error processing (not shown) is executed. At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the storage area of the error flag, sets the selector retention error state, and stops the progress of the game.

After that, when proceeding to LED display control (step S2821) in the interrupt processing (FIG. 68) after the selector retention error state is set in the error processing during the main processing, the main control board 50 outputs the selector retention error as selector retention notification. is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
After that, when proceeding to the control command transmission process (step S464) in the interrupt process (FIG. 68), the main control board 50 transmits the selector retention command to the sub control board 80. FIG.

In this case, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the selector passage error notification is cancelled, and the door open notification is executed. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled, and the selector stay notification is executed this time.
In addition, in the "Z"-th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, cancellation of the selector passage error notification and detection of the door opening are executed. Error handling is performed to stop progress. After that, in the "Z+1"th interrupt process, the door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt process, the release of the door open notification and the detection of the selector retention error are executed. Further, in the main process executed after that, an error process for stopping the progress of the game is executed as a selector retention error state. After that, in the "Z+3"th interrupt process, the selector retention notification is executed.

Therefore, the time required from the release of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector retention notification is the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms×3=6.705 ms) to the time for 4 interrupts (2.235 ms×4=8 .94 ms). In the meantime, the door opening notification is executed.
Therefore, at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 123, the selector passage error notification is canceled and the door opening notification is executed, but the execution of the door opening notification cannot or could not be recognized visually or audibly by humans. It's just a moment. Then, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification is canceled, and the selector stay notification is executed this time.

Further, the sub-control board 80 stores an error history in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 83, and can display the stored error history when requested to display the error history.
In the fifth embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation state.
Specifically, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the game is on standby (before the game is started), and the number of bets is "0", the setting confirmation state is entered.

Further, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting values are displayed on the setting value display LED 73 and the menu screen for the administrator is displayed on the image display device 23 .
Furthermore, the menu screen for the administrator has an item of "error history".
While the menu screen for the administrator is being displayed, the cross key (FIG. 112) is operated to select the item "error history", and in this state the push button 86 is operated (turned on) to turn on the image display device. 23, an error history screen is displayed.

In addition, on the error history screen, an error code indicating the type of error (for example, "CE", "CP", "dE", etc.) and an error notification time (for example, "September 17, 2021 15:35:25 seconds” etc.) is displayed.
Here, for example, at timing "X21" in FIG. Assume that the door open notification is canceled at the timing and the selector stay notification is executed again.
In this case, for example
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 be.

Further, for example, in FIG. 123, at the timing of "X21", the selector retention notification is executed, and at the timing of "X23", the selector retention notification is canceled once, but the door open notification is not executed, and then the door is opened. Assume that the selector stay notification is performed again at the timing of "X24" without the release notification being performed.
In this case, for example
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45.

Further, for example, in FIG. 123, at the timing of "X21", selector retention notification is executed, and at the timing of "X23", medals M are stuck in the medal selector 110 (the factor of the selector retention error is removed). not yet), and the reset switch 153 is continuously operated a plurality of times (for example, "3" times). In this case, the cancellation and re-execution of the selector retention notification may be repeated a plurality of times (for example, "three" times).
Also in this case, for example
“CE” occurred September 17, 2021 15:35:25 “CE” canceled September 17, 2021 15:35:25 “CE” occurred September 17, 2021 15:35:25 “CE” Canceled September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" occurred September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" canceled September 17, 2021 15:35:25 can do.

Note that even if the reset switch 153 is operated multiple times in succession and the selector retention notification is canceled and re-executed multiple times in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, these histories will be deleted. Instead of storing and displaying, the history may be stored and displayed only when the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector retention notification is canceled in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has been removed.

Further, for example, in FIG. 123, at the timing of "X21", the selector passage error notification is executed, and at the timing of "X23", the selector passage error notification is temporarily canceled, the door open notification is executed, and "X24" is executed. It is assumed that the door open notification is canceled at the timing of , and the selector stay notification is executed this time.
In this case, for example
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 "CP" September 17, 2021 15:36:45 be.

Also, for example, in FIG. 123, at the timing of "X21", the selector passage error notification is executed, and at the timing of "X23", the selector passage error notification is temporarily canceled, but the door open notification is not executed, and then , the door open notification is not executed, and the selector stay notification is executed at the timing of "X24".
In this case, for example
"CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CP" September 17, 2021 15:36:45

The push button 86 is also referred to as a sub-button 86, a performance button 86, a performance switch 86, etc., and is operated when progressing (developing) the performance.
The cross key 87 is also called a selection switch 87 or the like, and is operated to move the cursor position on a menu screen or the like.
The push button 86 and cross key 87 are electrically connected to the sub control means 80 via the input port 81 .
Also, the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning on/off the power or setting change processing. Unless a serious error (unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, the error history is not erased.

Thus, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification can be executed, and in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, an operation for canceling the predetermined error notification, that is, the reset switch When the operation of 153 is performed, after canceling the predetermined error notification once, the predetermined error notification can be executed again.
As a result, it is possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and to inform the user that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

FIG. 124 shows when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the selector retention error, and when the release switch is pressed while the front door 12 is open. It is a time chart which shows the operation|movement mode when operating.
In FIG. 124, when the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M at the timing of "X31" and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, the main control board 50 displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and also transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 .
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stay command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as the selector stay notification, and displays the characters "selector stay error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

After that, at the timing of "X32" in FIG. 124, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects door opening.
However, the main control board 50 continues the selector stay notification without executing the door open notification even if the door opening is detected while the selector stay notification is being executed.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub-control board 80 when the door opening is detected.
However, the sub-control board 80 does not execute the door open notification during execution of the selector stay notification and continues the selector stay notification even if the door open command is received.

After that, at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 124, the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M, and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, that is, the cause of the selector retention error is removed. When the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a state where it has not been done, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.
However, in FIG. 124, the selector retention notification is once canceled at the timing of "X33", but after that, the selector retention notification is executed again at the timing of "X34".

Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X33" in FIG. Release the notification, and control to execute the door open notification this time. After that, at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 124, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the selector stay notification again.

124, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open. , and thereafter, at the timing of "X34", the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is controlled to switch from "dE" to "CE". Further, the main control board 50 transmits a selector retention command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X34" in FIG.

In addition, when receiving an error cancellation command at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 124, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stay notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. After that, when the selector stay command is received at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 124, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the selector stay notification again.

124, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open" at the timing of "X33" in FIG. to switch the display from "selector retention error" to "door open". After that, at the timing of "X34", the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "the door is open" to "please call the staff", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " Control to switch to "selector retention error".

After that, at the timing of "X35" in FIG. 124, when the medals M jammed in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 are removed, that is, when the cause of the selector retention error is removed, the main control board 50 detects the selector retention error. is no longer detected. However, simply removing the cause of the selector retention error (stopping the detection of the selector retention error) does not cancel the selector retention notification.

After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 124, the main control board 50 cancels the selector retention notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, at timing "X36" in FIG. 124, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on even if the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector retention notification is cancelled. , the main control board 50 executes the door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to switch from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open.

At the timing of "X36" in FIG. 124, when the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stay notification, it executes the door open notification. That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the voice output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open", and also changes the display on the image display device 23 from "Selector retention error" to " Control to switch to "door open".

After that, at the timing of "X37" in FIG. 124, with the front door 12 left open, that is, with the door switch 17 still on, the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is turned on. is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 continues to execute the door opening notification without releasing it.

Further, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 is turned on), the main control board 50 issues a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door opening notification. is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 is turned on), the sub-control board 80 continues without canceling the door opening notification. and run.

Here, in FIG. 124, the operations when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error and when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error have been described, taking the selector retention error as an example. However, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, or when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error, also in the case of a selector passing error, a hopper empty error, or a hopper jam error. behaves in the same way as the selector stuck error.

For example, at the timing of "X31" in FIG. 124, when the dispensing sensor 37a remains off and the dispensing sensor 37b remains on, the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error. to decide.
When the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, the main control board 50 displays "HP" indicating a hopper jam error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a hopper jam notification, and issues a hopper jam command indicating a hopper jam error to the sub control board. 80.
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the sound "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as a hopper jam notification, and displays the characters "hopper jam error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

After that, at the timing of "X32" in FIG. 124, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects door opening.
However, during execution of the hopper jam notification, the main control board 50 continues the hopper jam notification without executing the door opening notification even if door opening is detected.
Further, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub-control board 80 when the door opening is detected.
However, while the hopper jam notification is being performed, the sub-control board 80 continues the hopper jam notification without executing the door open notification even if the door opening command is received.

After that, at the timing of “X33” in FIG. 124, the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on ), the main control board 50 controls to release the hopper jam notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 controls to cancel the hopper jam notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, in FIG. 124, although the hopper jam notification is once canceled at the timing of "X33", the hopper jam notification is executed again at the timing of "X34".
Specifically, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X33" in FIG. Release the notification, and control to execute the door open notification this time. After that, at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 124, the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and controls to execute the hopper jam notification again.

That is, the main control board 50 switches the display of the obtained number display LED 78 from "HP" indicating the hopper jam error to "dE" indicating the opening of the front door 12 at the timing of "X33" in FIG. , and thereafter, at the timing of "X34", control is performed to switch the display of the acquired number display LED 78 from "dE" to "HP". Further, the main control board 50 transmits a hopper jam command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing of "X34" in FIG.

Also, when receiving an error cancellation command at the timing of "X33" in FIG. 124, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper jam notification and controls to execute the door open notification this time. After that, when the hopper jam command is received at the timing of "X34" in FIG. 124, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and performs control to execute the hopper jam notification again.

124, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open" at the timing of "X33" in FIG. display is switched from "hopper jam error" to "door open". After that, at the timing of "X34", the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "the door is open" to "please call the staff", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to " Control to switch to "hopper jam error".

After that, when the medals M jammed in the hopper 35 are removed at the timing of "X35" in FIG. 124, that is, when the cause of the hopper jam error is removed, the main control board 50 stops detecting the hopper jam error. . However, simply removing the cause of the hopper jam error (disabling detection of the hopper jam error) does not cancel the hopper jam notification.

After that, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 124, the main control board 50 controls to cancel the hopper jam notification.
Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 controls to cancel the hopper jam notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

However, at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 124, even if the reset switch 153 is operated to cancel the hopper jam notification, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. , the main control board 50 controls to execute the door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the obtained number display LED 78 to switch from "HP" indicating a hopper jam error to "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open.

Further, at the timing of "X36" in FIG. 124, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper jam notification, and then controls to execute the door open notification. That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call the staff" to "The door is open", and also changes the display on the image display device 23 from "Hopper jam error" to " Control to switch to "door open".

After that, at the timing of "X37" in FIG. 124, with the front door 12 left open, that is, with the door switch 17 still on, the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is turned on. is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 continues to execute the door opening notification without releasing it.

Further, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 is turned on), the main control board 50 issues a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door opening notification. is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80.
Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (the door switch 17 is turned on), the sub-control board 80 continues without canceling the door opening notification. and run.

Thus, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification can be executed, and in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, an operation for canceling the predetermined error notification, that is, the reset switch When the operation of 153 is performed, after canceling the predetermined error notification once, the predetermined error notification can be executed again.
As a result, it is possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and to inform the user that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

In addition, when the opening of the front door 12 (door opening) is detected, the door open notification can be executed, and when the front door 12 is opened, the release switch for canceling the door open notification is operated (turned on). ), the execution can be continued without canceling the door open notification.
As a result, even though the front door 12 remains open, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity without giving any notification.

In addition, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on to execute the door opening notification. It may be configured to execute opening notification.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may detect that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can be opened.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17 and the front door 12 can be opened, the front door 12 is opened. It may be configured to perform the door open notification even when the door is closed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, the door key is turned counterclockwise to operate (turn on) the release switch, the main control board 50 is configured to release the door open notification. be able to.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17 and the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the front door 12 is closed, a door open command indicating opening of the front door 12 may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
The sub-control board 80 may be configured to notify the door opening by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc. when the door opening command is received, even if the front door 12 is closed. .

That is, when it is detected that the front door 12 is opened or can be opened, the door open notification can be executed, and when the front door 12 is opened or can be opened, the door open notification is generated. It may be configured such that even if an operation for releasing (operation of the release switch) is performed, the door open notification can be continuously executed without being released.
As a result, even though the front door 12 is open or can be opened, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity without giving any notification.

FIG. 125 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error. and the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. .

In FIG. 125, selector retention detection ON/OFF, door opening detection ON/OFF, selector retention notification ON/OFF, door opening notification ON/OFF, reset switch 153 ON/OFF, and release switch ON/OFF. About OFF, it is the same as that of FIG.
Also, the timings of "X41", "X42", "X43" and "X44" in FIG. 125 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. .

In FIG. 125, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed at the timing of "X43", the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. After that, at the timing of "X44", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again.
Then, the time from "X43" to "X44" is the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification becomes executable again.

Also, in FIG. 125, assuming that the medal M is inserted from the medal slot 47 at the timing just before "X43" and the medal M is detected by the insertion sensor 44a at the timing "X43", then, At the timing of "X45", the medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.
The time from "X43" to "X45" is the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b. .

Further, ``when the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a'' means that the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and passes through the blocker 45. is permitted to pass through, the entry sensor 44a is approached, and the entry sensor 44a turns on from off.
Furthermore, "when the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b" means that the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and passes through the blocker. 45, passes through the input sensor 44a, passes through the input sensor 44b, and is the moment when the input sensor 44b is turned off.

Here, when the medal M drops from the medal slot 47 at an initial speed of "0", passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b in this order, shall be detected by these. It is also assumed that the blocker 45 permits the medal M to pass.
That is, the medal M is released from the hand at the position of the medal insertion slot 47 without gaining momentum, passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is permitted to pass through the blocker 45, and passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor. 44b in order, and at this time, detection is made by the introduction sensor 44a and the introduction sensor 44b.

The fifth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T2". That is, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is the time from when the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. It is configured to be shorter than the time "T2" until it is no longer detected by 44b.

For example, it is assumed that the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) and a medal M is inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 in order to confirm whether or not the selector retention error has been cancelled. Then, at the timing of "X43" in FIG. 125, it is assumed that the medal M inserted from the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a at the same time when the selector retention notification is released. At this time, if the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, the selector retention notification is executed again at timing "X44" in FIG. The inserted medal M is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

Therefore, the medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 does not normally pass through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b. It is possible to prevent the processing of adding "1" to the number of bets or the number of credits.
In FIG. 125, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been described by taking the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 126 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error. It shows the relationship between the time "T1" until the digit 5 is lit and the time "T3" from when the digit 5 is lit until when the digit 1 is lit.

Also in the fifth embodiment, digits 1 to 5 are provided in the same manner as in the second embodiment.
Digit 1 corresponds to the upper digits of the credit amount (stored amount) display LED 76 , and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digits of the credit amount display LED 76 . Digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78 , and digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78 . Furthermore, digit 5 corresponds to set value display LED 73 .

Also, the address "F051(H)" shown in FIG. 54 of the second embodiment is a 1-byte storage area in which the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for determining which digit among digits 1 to 5 is to be lit, and is continuously updated for each interrupt.
Each bit of the LED display counter 1 is assigned to the D0 bit for the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit for the digit 2 signal, the D2 bit for the digit 3 signal, the D3 bit for the digit 4 signal, and the D4 bit for the digit 5 signal. . Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting control of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit "1" in the LED display counter 1 is lit.

The LED display counter 1 takes a value of "00010000 (B)" as an initial value. Then, the LED display counter 1 updates the bit "1" of the LED display counter 1 by right-shifting it by one digit for each interrupt. In the next interrupt when the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)", the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000000 (B)" by right-shifting by one digit. Initialize the counter 1 and set the value of the LED display counter 1 to "00010000 (B)". As a result, one cycle of the LED display counter 1 is five interrupts.

From the above, the value of the LED display counter 1 is
"N" interrupt: 00010000 (B)
"N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
"N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B)
"N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B)
"N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B)
"N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialization; same value as "N" interrupt)
"N+6" interrupt: 00001000 (B)
:
becomes.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the second embodiment, digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit with five interrupts forming one cycle.
Specifically, when the value of the LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)", the digit 5 signal is output. By outputting the digit 5 signal, digit 5 (set value display LED 73) can be lit (digit 1 to digit 4 are turned off).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00001000 (B)".At this time, the digit 4 signal is output, and the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) can be lit (digit 1 to digit 3 and digit 5 are extinguished).

At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100 (B)". At this time, the digit 3 signal is output, and the digit 3 (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78) can be lit (digit 1, digit 2, and digits 4 and 5 are extinguished).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010 (B)". At this time, the digit 2 signal is output, and the digit 2 (lower digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digit 1 and digit 3 to digit 5 are extinguished).
At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)". At this time, the digit 1 signal is output, and the digit 1 (upper digit of the credit number display LED 76) can be lit (digit 2 to digit 5 is turned off).

In FIG. 126, ON/OFF of selector retention detection, ON/OFF of door open detection, ON/OFF of selector retention notification, ON/OFF of door opening notification, ON/OFF of reset switch 153, and ON/OFF of release switch. About OFF, it is the same as that of FIG.
Also, the timings of "X51", "X52", "X53" and "X54" in FIG. 126 respectively correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. .

In FIG. 126, at timing "X53", when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. After that, at the timing of "X54", the main control board 50 executes the selector retention notification again.
Then, the time from "X53" to "X54" is the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification becomes executable again.

Also, in FIG. 126, assuming that digit 5 (set value display LED 73) lights up at timing "X53", then digit 1 (higher digit of credit number display LED 76) lights up at timing "X55". .
The time from "X53" to "X55" is the time "T3" from lighting digit 5 (set value display LED 73) to lighting digit 1 (upper digit of credit number display LED 76).

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, dynamic lighting control for sequentially lighting digits 5 to 1 is executed for each interrupt. Also, from lighting digit 5 to lighting digit 1, there are 4 interrupts. Thus, time "T3" is the time of 4 interrupts (2.235ms x 4 = 8.94ms).
The fifth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T3". That is, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is the time from when digit 5 (set value display LED 73) is turned on to when digit 1 (higher order of credit number display LED 76) is turned on. digit) is set to be shorter than "T3".

Here, at the timing of "X53" in FIG. 126, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, the main control board 50 notifies the selector retention. Once released, it is controlled to execute the door opening notification. At this time, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating opening of the front door 12 (door open). After that, at the timing of "X54", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again. At this time, the main control board 50 controls to switch the display of the obtained number display LED 78 from "dE" to "CE". Assuming that digit 5 (set value display LED 73) lights up at timing "X53", then digit 1 (higher digit of credit number display LED 76) lights up at timing "X55". That is, between "X53" and "X55", digit 5 to digit 1 light up once.

Therefore, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from "CE" to "dE" at the timing of "X53", and then the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from "dE" to "CE" at the timing of "X54". However, between "X53" and "X54", "dE" lights up only once or "dE" does not light up in the acquired number display LED 78 once. Therefore, since it is difficult for the human eye to confirm that "dE" is lit in the acquired number display LED 78, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that the cause of the selector retention error has been removed.
In FIG. 126, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been described by taking the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 127 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error. The relationship between the time "T1" until the power supply is cut off and the design value "T4" of the period from the time when the event (power cutoff) occurs to when the power supply cutoff event is detected is shown.

In FIG. 127, selector retention detection ON/OFF, door open detection ON/OFF, selector retention notification ON/OFF, door opening notification ON/OFF, reset switch 153 ON/OFF, and release switch ON/OFF. About OFF, it is the same as that of FIG.
Also, the timings of "X61", "X62", "X63" and "X64" in FIG. 127 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22", "X23" and "X24" in FIG. .

In FIG. 127, at timing "X63", when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. After that, at the timing of "X64", the main control board 50 controls to execute the selector retention notification again.
The time from 'X63' to 'X64' is the time 'T1' from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification becomes executable again.

Also, in FIG. 127, assuming that an event (power cutoff) occurs at the timing of "X63", the power supply is interrupted at the timing of "X65". It is detected, and power-off processing is executed at the timing of "X66".
Then, the time from "X63" to "X65" is the design value of the period from when the power supply cutoff event (power cutoff) occurs to when the power supply cutoff event is detected. It is "T4".
Also, the time from "X65" to "X66" is the time "T5" from when an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted is detected until the power shutdown process is executed.

Also, in FIG. 127, when an event (power failure) occurs in which the supply of power to the slot machine 10 is interrupted (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, the breaker voltage drop, power outage, etc.).
In FIG. 127, the voltage level when the power is on is "V0". Also, let "V1" be the voltage level (power interruption detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the supply of power is interrupted. The slot machine 10 operates normally when the power supply voltage is at the voltage level "V0". Also, when the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1", it becomes possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is interrupted.

FIG. 127 shows an example in which an event (power cutoff) in which the supply of power is interrupted occurs at the timing of "X63". When a power failure occurs at the timing of "X63", the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1" at the timing of "X65". Also, the time from "X63" to "X65" is "T4". That is, when power failure occurs, the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at time "T4".

In addition, the period from the occurrence of an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted until the detection of the event in which the supply of power is interrupted is 20 interrupt times (2.235 ms x 20 = 44 .7 ms) or longer.
Note that the period from the occurrence of an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted until the detection of the event in which the supply of power is interrupted is not limited to the 20 interrupt time, and the voltage monitoring device ( It can be appropriately set according to the performance of the power interruption detection circuit) and the main CPU 55 .

A voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) is provided on the main control board 50 . When the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power-off detection level "V1", a power-off detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and power-off is detected by detecting whether or not the signal has been input. detect.

Further, when the power supply voltage further drops from the power-off detection level "V1" and becomes less than the driving limit voltage level of the main CPU 55, the main CPU 55 cannot be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 cannot be guaranteed).
Since the main control board 50 cannot execute the power-off processing when the power supply voltage becomes less than the drive limit voltage level, when the power-off occurs at the timing of "X63", the power supply will be cut off by the timing of "X66". It is set so that disconnection processing can be terminated.

The detection of power failure is executed in the interrupt processing executed every 2.235 ms. However, when it is detected that the power supply voltage is below the power failure detection level "V1" for two consecutive interrupts, the next interrupt processing is executed. Execute power off processing with . Therefore, in FIG. 127, the timing of "X65" is the timing at which it is detected that the power supply voltage is equal to or lower than the power interruption detection level "V1" two times in a row by interrupt processing. Then, the main control board 50 executes power-off processing in the next interrupt processing (timing of "X66" in FIG. 127).

The main control board 50 backs up data in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 in power-off processing. After that, when the power supply is restarted (the power is turned on, the power is turned on, and the power is restored from the power interruption), the main control means 50 executes the power restoration process, and the backed-up data is transferred to the RWM 53. Restore to a predetermined storage area. As a result, when the power is recovered from the power failure, the state at the time of the power failure detection can be restored.

Also, in FIG. 127, the timing (“X63” timing) at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated, and the selector Timing (timing of "X64") to execute stay notification.
Furthermore, in FIG. 127, the timing at which an event (power failure) occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted and the timing at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed are shown. are matching.

The fifth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1<T4". In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is the time when the power supply is cut off from the time when the power supply is interrupted (power cutoff). It is configured to be shorter than the design value "T4" of the period until the time when an event to be interrupted is detected.

In FIG. 127, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X63" while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. control to execute the door open notification. It is also assumed that an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is cut off occurs substantially simultaneously with the operation (turning on) of the reset switch 153 . In this case, at the timing of "X64" in FIG. X66", the power-off process is executed.

For this reason, in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, when an event in which the supply of power is cut off (power off) occurs substantially simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153, the power off is detected. before the power-off process is executed. Therefore, in the power-off process, the data indicating that the selector retention notification is being executed can be backed up, so that the selector retention notification is executed when the power supply is resumed (recovered from the power-off). be able to.
In FIG. 127, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been described by taking the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

FIG. 130 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the power supply is interrupted while the door open notification is being given, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, and then the power supply is resumed. is.
In FIG. 130, when the power supply is interrupted means, for example, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, and the like.

When the front door 12 is opened at the timing of "X91" in FIG. 130, the main control board 50 determines that door opening has been detected.
Specifically, at timing "X91" in FIG. 130, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 determines that door opening has been detected. Further, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is opened, the main control board 50 performs door opening notification. Specifically, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 as the door opening notification.

Further, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80 when the door opening is detected. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it executes the door open notification. Specifically, as the door open notification, the speaker 22 outputs a voice saying "the door is open", and the image display device 23 displays the characters "door open".

After that, at the timing of "X92" in FIG. , the door open notification is also stopped. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute power-off processing. As a result, data in predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are backed up.
After that, at the timing of "X93" in FIG. 130, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off.

After that, when the power supply is restarted at the timing of "X94" in FIG. 130, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 respectively execute power-off recovery processing. As a result, the data backed up during the power-off process is restored to the predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 . As a result, the state is restored to the state at the time when the power failure was detected. At this time, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, but the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 respectively perform door opening notification.

After that, at the timing of "X95" in FIG. 130, when the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control The board 50 cancels the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the acquired number before displaying "dE" on the acquired number display LED 78, and transmits to the sub-control board 80 a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification.
Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command, it cancels the door opening notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on to execute the door opening notification. It may be configured to execute opening notification.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12, and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to unlock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may detect that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can be opened. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door opening notification may be performed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while the power is supplied, the door opening notification can be executed. Further, when the power supply is interrupted during execution of the door open notification, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification is issued. be executable.

Here, the front door 12 is opened by a fraudulent act, the power supply is cut off by a fraudulent act while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off. may attempt to conceal wrongdoing. Even in such a case, when the supply of power is resumed, the above-described configuration makes it possible to notify that the door is open even if the front door 12 is closed, thereby preventing fraudulent acts such as those described above. can do.

Fig. 131 shows a state in which the power supply is interrupted during the door open notification, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted. ) is a time chart showing an operation mode when the supply of power is restarted.
In FIG. 131 as well, similarly to FIG. 130, when the power supply is interrupted, it means, for example, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, and the like.

In FIG. 131, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X101", the main control board 50 determines that door opening has been detected. Then, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 as the door opening notification.
Further, when detecting that the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs the sound of "the door is open" from the speaker 22 as the door open notification, and displays the characters "door open" on the image display device 23. do.

After that, when the power supply is interrupted at the timing of "X102" in FIG. 131, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 do not operate, so the door opening notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 respectively execute power-off processing and back up data in predetermined storage areas.
After that, at the timing of "X103" in FIG. 131, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off.

After that, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when the front door 12 is unlocked) at the timing of "X104" in Fig. 131 . This state continues until the timing of "X105" in FIG.
After that, at the timing of "X105" in FIG. 131, the power supply is resumed while the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked). At this time, since the door key is turned counterclockwise, the release switch is turned on when the power supply is resumed. Therefore, the main control board 50 does not issue the door open notification. Further, the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification. Then, the sub-control board 80 receives the notification cancellation command and does not execute the door open notification.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, instead of executing the door opening notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 has become openable. , the door opening notification may be executed.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion opening of the front door 12, and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to unlock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect this. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door opening notification may be performed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while the power is supplied, the door opening notification can be executed. Also, when the power supply is interrupted while the door open notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, the door key is turned counterclockwise (unlocked). When the power supply is restarted in the state where the switch is operated), it is possible to prevent the door open notification from being executed.

When the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off while the door open notification is being executed, and the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) in this state, the door is unlocked. Although the switch is turned on and the door open notification is canceled, for example, it may be configured as follows.

During execution of the door open notification, the front door 12 is closed to turn off the door switch 17, and in this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) to turn off the release switch. Then, the door open notification may be canceled by returning the door key to its original position and turning the release switch from ON to OFF.
In this case, the operation of turning the door key in the direction opposite to that for unlocking the front door 12 and then returning the door key to its original position is the operation for canceling the door open notification.

FIG. 132 shows that the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) to turn the release switch from OFF to ON, and then the door key is returned to its original position to turn the release switch from ON to ON. 4 is a time chart showing an operation mode in a case where the door open notification is canceled when the switch is turned off;

In FIG. 132, similarly to FIG. 131, the power supply is interrupted during the door open notification, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, and then the door key is turned left. The power supply is restarted (with the release switch operated).
Also in FIG. 132, similarly to FIGS. 130 and 131, when the power supply is interrupted, for example, when the power plug is pulled out of the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc. means

In FIG. 132, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X111", the main control board 50 determines that the opening of the front door 12 (door opening) has been detected. Then, "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 as door opening notification.
Further, when detecting that the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 transmits a door opening command to the sub control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs the voice "door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the characters "door open" on the image display device 23. do.

After that, when the power supply is interrupted at the timing of "X112" in FIG. 132, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 do not operate, so the door open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 respectively execute power-off processing and back up data in predetermined storage areas.

After that, at the timing of "X113" in FIG. 132, the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is cut off.
After that, the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite direction to unlocking the front door 12) at the timing of "X114" in FIG. This state continues until the timing of "X116" in FIG.

After that, at the timing of "X115" in FIG. 132, the power supply is resumed while the door key is turned counterclockwise (opposite to when the front door 12 is unlocked). At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute power-off recovery processing. As a result, the data backed up during the power-off process is restored to the predetermined storage areas in the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 . As a result, the state is restored to the state at the time when the power failure was detected. At this time, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, but the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 respectively perform door opening notification.

Also, since the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when the front door 12 is unlocked), the release switch is turned on when the power supply is resumed, but the release switch is turned on. Since the door open notification is not canceled only by doing so, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 each continue without canceling the door open notification.

After that, when the door key is returned to the original position at the timing of "X116" in FIG. 132 and the release switch is turned off from on, the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the acquired number before displaying "dE" on the acquired number display LED 78, and transmits to the sub-control board 80 a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door open notification.
Then, when receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door opening notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like.

Further, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, instead of executing the door opening notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 has become openable. , the door opening notification may be executed.
That is, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12, and the door key is turned clockwise in this state to unlock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may be configured to detect this. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door opening notification may be performed even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened while the power is supplied, the door opening notification can be executed. Also, when the power supply is interrupted during execution of the door open notification, and then the front door 12 is closed while the power supply is interrupted, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the front door 12 is locked). When the power supply is restarted while the door is turned in the direction opposite to the direction when the door is released, the door open notification can be executed. After that, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch is turned off from on, the door open notification is released.

As a result, the front door 12 can be opened by a fraudulent act, the power supply can be cut off by a fraudulent act while the door opening notification is being executed, and then the front door 12 can be closed while the power supply is cut off. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to hide a fraudulent act, when the power supply is resumed, the door open notification can be executed even if the front door is closed, so the fraudulent act as described above can be prevented. can.

Although the fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the fifth embodiment, the door switch 17 is turned off when the front door 12 is closed, and is turned on when the front door 12 is opened. is not limited to
For example, when the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned on, and when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned off. Opening may be detected.

(2) In the fifth embodiment, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, the notification indicating the opening of the front door 12 (door open notification) is executed. Not exclusively.
For example, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion opening of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state, the door is unlocked. At this time, the door switch 17 detects the unlocking. can be

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17, the door open notification is performed even if the front door 12 is closed. may
Further, the main control board 50 can display, for example, "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78 as the door opening notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17, the front door 12 is opened even if the front door 12 is closed. (door open command) may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 .
When the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, the door open notification may be performed by the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 even if the front door 12 is closed.
In addition, the sub-control board 80 can output, for example, a voice saying "the door is open" from the speaker 22 or display the characters "door open" on the image display device 23 as door opening notification. .

(3) In the fifth embodiment, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 indicate that the front door 12 is open. Although the notification (door open notification) was performed, the present invention is not limited to this.
When the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 executes the door opening notification, but the sub control board 80 does not execute the door opening notification. good.

Further, when the opening of the front door 12 is detected by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification, and only the sub control board 80 executes the door open notification. may
In this case, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened by turning on the door switch 17, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification, but the command indicating the opening of the front door 12 (door open command). ) may be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door opening command, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like can perform door opening notification.

(4) Although the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 in the fifth embodiment, it may be electrically connected to the sub control board 80 .
When the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the sub-control board 80, the speaker 22, the image display device 23, and the like can notify the door opening.

Also, in the slot machine 10 , commands are transmitted in one direction from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 . Therefore, when the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 and the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the sub-control board 80, the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the main control board 50. It cannot be detected, and the door open command cannot be received from the sub-control board 80 either. Therefore, even if the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 does not execute the door opening notification, and does not stop the progress of the game as the door is opened. In other words, even when the front door 12 is open, the main control board 50 allows the game to progress.

(5) In the fifth embodiment, while the door open notification is being executed, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off. ) to turn the release switch from OFF to ON to release the door open notification, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, during execution of the door open notification, the front door 12 is closed to turn off the door switch 17, and in this state, the door key is turned counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when unlocking the front door 12), and the release switch is turned off. is turned on from off, the door key is returned to its original position, and the release switch is turned off from on to cancel the door open notification.

In this case, simply turning the door key counterclockwise (in the direction opposite to when unlocking the front door 12) to turn the release switch from OFF to ON continues the door open notification without canceling it.
Then, the operation of turning the door key in the direction opposite to that for unlocking the front door 12 and then returning the door key to its original position is the operation for canceling the door open notification.

(6) In the fifth embodiment, by arranging the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, the return acceptance opening 131 is not arranged. Configured, but not limited to.
For example, as shown in FIG. 119, by arranging the return acceptance opening 131 and the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 on the left side of the gap 112 vertically below the gap 112, the return acceptance opening 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112. It may be configured not to. In this case, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is also not arranged vertically below the gap 112 .

Further, even if the upper edge portion 135 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, when the interval "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, "1" "1" medal M can be kept in the gap 112 by pushing the medal M into the gap 112. - 特許庁In this case, the “one” inserted medal M will not be unable to be taken out from the gap 112 .

Then, when the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, "1" medal M may pop out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. At this time, since the return receiving port 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, the "one" medal M jumping out of the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving port 131, and the storage receiving port 35a. It can be made to fall inside and be stored in the hopper 35 .

Further, even if the upper edge portion 135 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, when the interval "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, " By pushing "2" medals M into the gap 112, "2" medals can be made to stay in the gap 112.例文帳に追加In this case, the “2” medals M that have been pushed in cannot be taken out from the gap 112 .

Further, when the front door 12 is closed while "2" medals M are pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may pop out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. Then, similarly to when the front door 12 is closed with the "1" medal M pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M jumping out of the gap 112 do not fall into the return acceptance opening 131. Instead, it can drop into the storage receiving port 35 a and be stored in the hopper 35 .

(7) In the fifth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but this is not restrictive.
For example, as shown in FIG. 120, a closing member 140 may be provided vertically below the gap 112 to block the portion of the return acceptance opening 131 corresponding to the vertically below the gap 112 . That is, the closing member 140 may close the part of the return receiving opening 131 corresponding to the vertically lower part of the gap 112 . Also, the closing member 140 can be configured to be substantially horizontal.

In this case, the medal M placed in the gap 112 can be placed on the covering member 140. - 特許庁When the front door 12 is closed with the medal M in the gap 112, the medal M drops from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. At this time, since the part of the return acceptance opening 131 corresponding to the vertically lower part of the gap 112 is blocked by the closing member 140, the medal M falling from the gap 112 does not fall into the return acceptance opening 131. It can drop into the storage receiving port 35 a and be stored in the hopper 35 .

(8) In the fifth embodiment, the return acceptance opening 131 is not arranged vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but this is not the only option. A portion of return receptacle 131 may be positioned vertically below gap 112 as shown.
Further, even if a part of the return acceptance port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, when the gap "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, "1" By pushing one medal M into the gap 112, "one" medal M can be kept in the gap 112. - 特許庁In this case, the “one” inserted medal M will not be unable to be taken out from the gap 112 .

Then, when the front door 12 is closed while "1" medal M is pushed into the gap 112, "1" medal M may pop out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. At this time, since a part of the return acceptance port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112 , the “one” medal M jumping out of the gap 112 falls into the return acceptance port 131 and the medal return path 132 . , and through the medal payout port 16 to be guided to the medal receiving tray 19. - 特許庁

Further, even if a part of the return acceptance port 131 is arranged vertically below the gap 112, for example, when the gap "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, By pushing "2" medals M into the gap 112, "2" medals can be made to stay in the gap 112. - 特許庁In this case, the “2” medals M that have been pushed in cannot be taken out from the gap 112 .

Further, when the front door 12 is closed while "2" medals M are pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M may pop out from the gap 112 due to the impact at that time. Then, in the same manner as when the front door 12 is closed with the "1" medal M pushed into the gap 112, the "2" medals M jumping out of the gap 112 fall into the return acceptance opening 131, It can be guided to the medal tray 19 through the medal return passage 132 and the medal payout port 16. - 特許庁

(9) In the fifth embodiment, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the length "L2" of the screw 127, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 are "L1<L2" and "L1<L3". configured to satisfy That is, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is made longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 is also made thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121. ), but not limited to this.

For example, it may be configured to satisfy “L1<L2” and “L1>L3”. That is, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding passage 121, but the width "L3" of the screw 127 is thinner (smaller) than the width "L1" of the medal guiding passage 121. ).
As a result, when the screw 127 is removed from the rear surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 can enter the medal guide passage 121, so that the removed screw 127 can be prevented from being lost. .

As described above, the chute member 120 is provided at a predetermined position with a locking portion for locking the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12 . Then, the chute member 120 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127 passed through the screw hole of the fixing portion 126 while the sheet member 120 is locked to the rear surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion. Therefore, even if the screw 127 is removed, the chute member 120 does not separate from the rear surface of the front door 12 and fall.

(10) In the fifth embodiment, when one medal M enters the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120, but this is not the only option. Alternatively, even when one medal M enters the gap 112, another medal M may pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.例文帳に追加
As a result, when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M inserted in the gap 112, even if one medal M remains in the gap 112, other medals M are directed from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. Since it does not interfere with the passage of the game, it is possible not to interfere with the progress of the game.

(11) In the fifth embodiment, five digits (display units) of digit 1 to digit 5 are provided, and dynamic lighting control is executed to sequentially light digits 5 to 1 with 5 interrupts as one cycle.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, four digits digit 1 to digit 4 may be provided, and digits 4 to 1 may be sequentially lit by dynamic lighting control with four interrupts as one cycle.
That is, the number of digits (indicators) is not limited to five, and can be set appropriately as required. Also, the period of the dynamic lighting control is not limited to 5 interrupts, and can be appropriately set according to the number of digits or the like.

(12) In the fifth embodiment, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again, and the event that the power supply is cut off (power failure) occurred. Regarding the design value "T4" of the period from time to time when the event that the supply of the power is interrupted is detected, "T1<T4" is satisfied, but conversely, "T1>T4" is satisfied. can be configured to

FIG. 128 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and the selector retention notification can be executed again after the selector retention notification is canceled once. The relationship between the time "T1" until the power supply is cut off and the design value "T4" of the period from the time when the event (power cutoff) occurs to when the power supply cutoff event is detected is shown.

In FIG. 128, selector retention detection ON/OFF, door opening detection ON/OFF, selector retention notification ON/OFF, door opening notification ON/OFF, reset switch 153 ON/OFF, and release switch ON/OFF. About OFF, it is the same as that of FIG.
Also, the timings of "X71", "X72" and "X73" in FIG. 128 correspond to the timings of "X21", "X22" and "X23" in FIG.

In FIG. 128, at timing "X73", when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. . After that, if an event (power cutoff) in which the supply of power is interrupted does not occur, the main control board 50 can execute the selector retention notification again at the timing of "X76".
The time from 'X73' to 'X76' is the time 'T1' from when the selector retention notification is once canceled until the selector retention notification becomes executable again.

Also, in FIG. 128, assuming that an event (power cutoff) occurs at the timing of "X73", the power supply is interrupted at the timing of "X74". It is detected, and power-off processing is executed at the timing of "X75".
Then, the time from "X73" to "X74" is the design value of the period from when the power supply cutoff event (power cutoff) occurs to when the power supply cutoff event is detected. It is "T4".
Also, the time from "X74" to "X75" is the time "T5" from when an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted is detected until the power shutdown process is executed.

128 also shows voltage levels when an event (power failure) occurs in which the supply of power to the slot machine 10 is interrupted, as in FIG.
In FIG. 128, the voltage level when the power is on is "V0". Also, let "V1" be the voltage level (power interruption detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the supply of power is interrupted.

Also, FIG. 128 shows an example in which an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted occurs at the timing of "X73". When power failure occurs at the timing of "X73", the power supply voltage drops to the voltage level "V1" at the timing of "X74". Also, the time from "X73" to "X74" is "T4".
Furthermore, if the power supply voltage falls below the drive limit voltage level, the power shutdown process cannot be executed. It is set to terminate disconnection processing.

Also, in FIG. 128, the timing (“X73” timing) at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, and the power supply after the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled. It also shows the timing (timing of "X76") at which the selector retention notification can be executed again if an event (power failure) that interrupts the supply does not occur.
Further, in FIG. 128, the timing at which an event (power failure) occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted and the timing at which the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed are shown. are matching.

And it is configured to satisfy "T1>T4". In other words, the design value "T4" for the period from when the power supply cutoff event (power cutoff) occurs to when the power supply cutoff event is detected is determined by canceling the selector retention notification once. After that, if an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted does not occur, the time until the selector retention notification can be executed again is set to be shorter than "T1".

In FIG. 128, at timing "X73", when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the main control board 50 once cancels the selector retention notification. to execute the door open notification. It is also assumed that an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is cut off occurs substantially simultaneously with the operation (turning on) of the reset switch 153 . In this case, at the timing of "X74" in FIG. 128, an event that the supply of power is interrupted is detected, and thereafter, at the timing of "X75", power-off processing is executed. After that, if an event (power failure) in which the supply of power is interrupted does not occur, the selector retention notification can be executed again at the timing of "X76" in FIG.

Therefore, in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, when an event (power failure) occurs in which the supply of power is interrupted (power off) substantially simultaneously with the operation (turning on) of the reset switch 153, the selector retention notification is issued. Once released, after that, before executing the selector retention notification again, the power cutoff is detected and the power cutoff processing is executed. Therefore, in power-off processing, data indicating the execution of selector retention notification is not backed up, so when power supply is resumed (returned from power-off), selector retention notification can be prevented from being executed.

In FIG. 128, at the timing of "X75", the door open notification is executed instead of the selector stay notification. Therefore, in the power-off process, the data indicating that the door-open notification is being executed is backed up, so when the power supply is resumed (recovered from the power-off), the door-open notification is executed.
Also, in FIG. 128, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error has been described by taking the selector retention error as an example. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

(13) In the fifth embodiment, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is once canceled, and then again without any operation. Although the selector stay notification is executed, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. When the release switch is operated in a situation where the door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, the door open notification may be canceled and the selector retention notification may be executed again. .

FIG. 129 shows when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, and when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error is removed. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an operation mode when the release switch is operated in a state in which it is not
In FIG. 129, when the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is jammed with medals M at timing "X81" and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error. I judge.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector retention error, the main control board 50 displays "CE" indicating a selector retention error on the acquired number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification, and transmits a selector retention command to the sub control board 80 .
Further, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stay command, the sub-control board 80 outputs the voice "Please call the staff" from the speaker 22 as the selector stay notification, and displays the characters "selector stay error" on the image display device 23. indicate.

After that, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X82" in FIG. During the period, the selector stay notification is continued without executing the door open notification.
Further, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 transmits a door open command indicating that the front door 12 is opened to the sub control board 80 . However, the sub-control board 80 continues the selector stay notification without executing the door open notification even if the door open command is received while the selector stay notification is being executed.

After that, at the timing of "X83" in FIG. 129, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, the main control board 50 cancels the selector stay notification and executes the door opening notification. Specifically, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from "CE" indicating a selector retention error to "dE" indicating that the front door 12 is open.

Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits an error cancellation command to the sub control board 80 . Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it cancels the selector retention notification and executes the door open notification. Specifically, the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "please call the staff" to "the door is open", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "selector stay error" to "door open". switch to

After that, at the timing of "X84" in FIG. 129, when the front door 12 is closed while the factor of the selector retention error is not removed, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects the opening of the front door 12 . However, the door open notification is not canceled even if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and continues until the cancel switch is operated (turned on).

After that, at the timing of "X85" in FIG. 129, the door key is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) under the condition that the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error is not removed, and the unlocking is performed. When the switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification and executes the selector stay notification. Specifically, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is switched from "dE", which indicates a selector retention error, to "CE", which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Further, when the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 transmits to the sub-control board 80 a notification cancellation command indicating cancellation of the door opening notification. Then, when receiving the notification cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and executes the selector stay notification. Specifically, the voice output from the speaker 22 is switched from "the door is open" to "please call the staff", and the display on the image display device 23 is changed from "door open" to "selector retention error". switch to

Here, in FIG. 129, using the selector retention error as an example, when the front door 12 is opened and the reset switch 153 is operated in a state where the cause of the error has not been removed, and when the front door 12 is closed and The operation when the release switch is operated while the cause of the error has not been removed has been described.
However, not limited to this, when the reset switch 153 is operated while the front door 12 is open and the cause of the error is not removed, such as when the selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error occurs. , and when the release switch is operated in a state in which the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the error is not removed, the operation is the same as when the selector retention error occurs.

Further, in FIG. 129, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on to notify that the door is open. When detected, it may be configured to execute door open notification.
Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock, the front door 12 becomes openable. The door switch 17 may detect that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can be opened.

When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is unlocked by turning on the door switch 17 and the front door 12 can be opened, the front door 12 is opened. The door open notification may be performed even when the door is closed.
In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, the door key is turned counterclockwise to operate (turn on) the release switch, the main control board 50 is configured to release the door open notification. be able to.

Thus, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification can be executed. After that, when it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or can be opened, and the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, an operation for canceling the predetermined error notification (pressing the reset switch 153) is performed. operation) is performed, the door opening notification can be executed after the predetermined error notification is once canceled. After that, when an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of the release switch) is performed in a situation where the front door 12 is closed or locked and the predetermined error factor has not been eliminated, the door open notification is performed. is released, the predetermined error notification can be made again.

As a result, it is possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 functions normally, and to inform the user that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.
In addition, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the predetermined error has not been removed, the predetermined error notification is canceled and the door open notification is executed. Since the fact that the front door 12 is open can be notified again, fraud can be prevented.

(14) In the fifth embodiment, processes related to error detection, error notification execution, and error notification cancellation are executed in interrupt processing.
Then, in the same interrupt processing, there is a case where the error notification is once canceled and the error notification is executed again.
In the example shown in FIG. 123, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled and the door is opened. performed the notification. After that, at the timing of "X24", the door open notification was canceled, and the selector stay notification was executed again.

However, in the same interrupt process, there is a case where the selector retention notification is canceled and then the selector retention notification is executed again. In this case, the door open notification is not executed.
In this way, the selector retention notification is canceled according to the order of error detection, error notification execution, and error notification cancellation in the interrupt process, and then the selector retention notification is executed again without executing the door open notification. There are cases where

Also, in one interrupt process, only one of error detection, error notification execution, and error notification cancellation may be executed. In such a case, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed, the selector retention notification is canceled, the door opening notification is executed, and then, There is a case where the door open notification is canceled and the selector stay notification is executed again.

(15) In the fifth embodiment, when the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is substantially horizontal.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined so that the height gradually decreases from the near side toward the far side in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 113 . That is, the upper edge portion 135 may be slanted so that the front side is higher and the back side is lower in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG.

In this case, when the medal M is placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, the medal M is subjected to a force that tends to slide toward the depth side in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. work. In other words, a force acts on the medal M to make it slide toward the back side of the front door 12 . Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge portion 135 can easily stay in the gap 112 . Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed with the medal M inserted in the gap 112, even if the front door 12 is closed, the medal M is unlikely to fall out of the gap 112. - 特許庁

While one medal M remains in the gap 112, another medal M inserted from the medal slot 47 hits the one medal M in the gap 112 and stops. At this time, since other medals M stay in the medal passage 111, the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, and the selector retention notification is performed. It is possible to indirectly detect that

Contrary to the above, the upper edge portion 135 may be inclined so that the height gradually decreases from the back side toward the front side in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 113 . That is, the upper edge portion 135 may be slanted so that the height on the back side is high and the height on the front side is low in the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 113 .

In this case, when the medal M is placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge portion 135, the medal M is subjected to a force that tends to slide toward the near side in the direction perpendicular to the paper plane of FIG. work. That is, the medal M is subjected to a force that tends to slide in the direction opposite to the back surface of the front door 12 (toward the inside of the cabinet 13). Therefore, the medal M put in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge portion 135 easily slides down from the gap 112 toward the inside of the cabinet 13 . Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge portion 135 is less likely to remain in the gap 112 .

(16) In the fifth embodiment, the upper opening of the hopper 35 is the storage receiving port 35a. The storage receiving port 35a is provided below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the end on the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121).
However, for example, the upper edge of the side wall of the hopper 35 may be arranged above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). That is, the upper opening of the hopper 35 may be arranged above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).

In this case, for example, at a predetermined position of the side wall of the hopper 35, a concave portion is provided by notching downward from the upper end of the side wall of the hopper 35. As shown in FIG. In addition, the lower end of this concave portion is arranged below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the end on the downstream side of the medal guide passage 121). This concave portion can be used as the storage receiving opening 35a for receiving the medals M guided by the chute member 120. As shown in FIG.

In this case, when the front door 12 is closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) faces the recess serving as the storage receiving port 35a. .
Also, when the front door 12 is closed, the vicinity of the hopper 35 side end of the chute member 120 (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) is inserted into the recess serving as the storage receiving port 35a. You may do so.

(17) The various modifications shown in the first to fifth embodiments and the first to fifth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate. is.

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment relates to error detection. In the sixth embodiment, after detecting an error, the error cannot be cleared until a predetermined condition is satisfied.
In the following description, "error" corresponds to "recoverable error" and does not include "unrecoverable error".
A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered by removing the cause of the error without turning on/off the power.
In the following, hopper error, selector error, and door open error are exemplified as errors.
Hopper errors include, for example,
"HP" error: Medal clogging (accumulation) error in hopper 35 "HE" error: Medal empty error in hopper 35 "H0" error: Discharge sensor 37 of hopper 35 abnormal.
Note that the above errors do not mean all hopper errors.

The "HP" error is, for example, after the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b detects medals (the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b is turned on), and if the payout sensor 37a and/or 37b is turned off even after a predetermined period of time has passed. This error occurs when there is no power supply (when the power supply is always on).
The "HE" error is an error when the hopper motor 36 is driven and the payout process is executed, but the payout sensors 37a and/or 37b do not detect medals (the payout sensors 37a and/or 37b are off). be. Specifically, it is an error when the hopper 35 runs out of medals.
The "H0" error is generated when the on/off timings of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are not within the range of the reference value. This is an error when it is not within the specified time.

Also, as a selector error, for example,
"CE" error: Medal retention error in the medal selector "CP" error: Illegal passage of medals in the medal selector error "CH" error: Error in the path sensor 46 located in the medal selector "C0" error: In the medal selector "C1" error: Medal abnormal insertion error of the insertion sensor 44 arranged in.
Note that the above errors do not mean all selector errors.
A "CE" error occurs when the insertion sensor 44b located downstream of the two insertion sensors 44a and 44b is turned on (after medals are detected), and the insertion sensor 44b is turned off even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is an error when it does not become
A "CP" error is, for example, an error in which the closing sensor 44a is turned off without turning on the closing sensor 44b after the closing sensor 44a is turned on.

A "CH" error is an error when an abnormality of the path sensor 46 is detected. For example, the error occurs when the passage sensor 46 does not turn off even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the passage sensor 46 has detected a medal (the passage sensor 46 has turned on).
A "C1" error is an error when an abnormality in passage time of the path sensor 46 or the entry sensor 44a or 44b is detected.

Furthermore, a door open error is referred to as a "dE" error and is an error that is detected when the front door 12 is opened. The error is canceled by closing the front door 12 and turning the door key in a predetermined direction to perform an error canceling operation (described later).
When hereinafter referred to as a hopper error, it may refer to any of the above hopper errors or any other hopper errors.
Similarly, when a selector error is referred to hereinafter, it is assumed to be an error relating to any of the selectors described above, or any error relating to selectors other than those described above.

Errors such as "HP" and "CE" are displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (error display on the main side). For example, when the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 before the error occurrence is "*0"("*" indicates that it is turned off), when the "HP" error occurs, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "*0". Switch to "HP". Then, when the "HP" error is cleared, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 returns from "HP" to "*0".
Also, when an error occurs, a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it displays an image corresponding to the received error command on the image display device 23, outputs a sound corresponding to the error from the speaker 22, and turns the effect lamp 21 into an error. Light up with the corresponding color.
Then, when the error is cleared, a command to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the error cancellation command, it returns the states of the image display device 23, the speaker 22, and the effect lamp 21 to the states before the error occurred.

In the following example, the selector error, which is the second error, occurs while the hopper error, which is the first error, occurs (FIG. 133). 134 shows a case where a hopper error, which is an error, occurs (FIG. 134).
Here, it is almost impossible for a selector error and a hopper error to occur simultaneously during a game. Specifically, this is because the medal payout process cannot actually be executed when a selector error occurs.
Further, when a hopper error occurs, the blocker 45 is turned off, so even if medals are inserted, the medals do not reach the positions of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b. Therefore, it is practically impossible for a selector error to occur when a hopper error occurs.

However, for example, firstly, when a medal is inserted while a hopper error (for example, "HE" error) is occurring, it passes through the blocker 45 for some reason (for example, when a problem occurs in driving the blocker 45, etc.), and the insertion sensor 44a and 44b. In addition, when a medal insertion action is performed while a hopper error is occurring, abnormal insertion of medals may be detected.
Secondly, there is a case where the hopper goto act is performed while the selector error is occurring and the payout sensor 37 is detected to be abnormal.
Thus, there is a possibility that a selector error may occur while a hopper error is occurring, or a hopper error may occur while a selector error is occurring.
Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, error notification is controlled including the above events.

Next, the flow from error detection to notification will be described using the flowchart shown in the second embodiment.
In the main processing (M_MAIN) of FIG. 67, when it is determined in step S274 that medals have been inserted, the main control board 50 proceeds to step S276 and executes medal management. In this process, the presence or absence of a selector error is determined based on the detections of the path sensor 46 and the entry sensors 44a and 44b. Specifically, in step S463 (input error check) of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 68, it is determined whether or not a selector error is detected for each interrupt process.
When the main control board 50 detects a selector error, it transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 can notify the selector error.

Further, when the main control board 50 determines in the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. 67 that the minor win has been won, it executes the medal payout process in step S294. Alternatively, when the main control board 50 determines that the settlement switch 43 has been operated in medal management in step S276, the main control board 50 shifts to settlement processing and executes medal payout processing for stored medals.
During the medal payout process, the payout sensors 37a and 37b determine whether or not there is a hopper error. Specifically, in step S463 (input error check) of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in FIG. 687, it is determined whether or not a medal hopper error has been detected for each interrupt process.

When detecting a hopper error, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, the sub-control board 80 can notify the hopper error.
Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during error detection or error notification and it is necessary to back up the data related to the error, the power failure processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in FIG. Then, backup processing of the data related to the error is executed.
Then, when the power is turned on, at any timing in the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of FIG. 63, the data related to the backup error is read, and the state before the power interruption is restored.

FIG. 133 is a time chart showing Example 1 of error notification in the sixth embodiment, in which the first error detection state, the first error notification state, the second error detection state, and the second error notification state, respectively. is shown.
In Example 1 of FIG. 133, the first error is a hopper error and the second error is a selector error. However, it is not limited to this error.
Error reporting is performed by both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 .
The main control board 50 gives an error notification by means of the acquired number display LED 78 . For example, when the medal retention error described above is detected, the obtained number display LED 78 is segmentally displayed as "CE". Also, the sub-control board 80 performs error notification by means of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23. FIG. “BGM” of the error notification shown in the following example corresponds to the output of the error notification sound by the sub-control board 80 .

First, it is assumed that when the cause of the first error has occurred, no other error has occurred. When the cause of the first error occurs, the main control board 50 detects the first error. In this example, it is assumed that the timing at which the cause of the first error occurs and the timing at which the first error is detected are the same (no time lag). In practice, when an error factor occurs, the error is detected (determined that an error has occurred) by the interrupt processing that is executed afterward, so the maximum interrupt time (for example, "2.235" ms) is one. However, the time lag is ignored here.

As described above, when the main control board 50 detects the first error, the main control board 50 transmits an error command related to the first error to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command related to the first error, it notifies the first error.
On the other hand, after the first error is detected, the main control board 50 performs control so as not to enable the first error canceling operation for a predetermined period of time. Here, it is possible to remove the cause of the first error even within the predetermined period. However, even if the cause of the first error is removed within the predetermined period, the resetting operation of the first error is disabled until the predetermined period elapses. It is of course possible to eliminate the cause of the first error even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.
Therefore, the notification of the first error is executed for at least a predetermined period. The BGM related to the error is configured to make one loop within this predetermined period. In other words, at least one loop of BGM is performed as notification of the first error. The sub-control board 80 stores sound source data for outputting BGM, and reproduction of this sound source data from the beginning to the end corresponds to "one loop" of BGM.
If the first error cancellation operation is not executed even after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the notification of the first error continues, and the BGM shifts to the second loop.

Here, the start time of the "predetermined period" is "predetermined timing after detection of the first error". The "predetermined timing after detecting the first error" means that when the main control board 50 detects the first error, when the main control board 50 sets the error state, and when the main control board 50 issues an error command. is transmitted to the sub-control board 80, and when the sub-control board 80 starts error notification. In this embodiment, the "predetermined timing after detecting the first error" is assumed to be "when the first error is detected".
As described above, in the sixth embodiment, "when the first error is detected" means "when the cause of the first error occurs" and "a predetermined timing after detecting the first error". is.
After a predetermined period of time has passed, when the first error is canceled, the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a of the front door 12 and turned 45 degrees counterclockwise. This is done by turning on a reset sensor 175 (FIG. 147) provided inside.
It should be noted that the error cancellation operation is not limited to turning the door key DK counterclockwise, and various methods can be used. For example, pressing the reset switch 153 shown in FIG. 112 may be used as the error cancellation operation.

When the reset sensor 175 detects that it is on, it is determined whether or not the detected first error factor has been removed. When it is determined that the predetermined period has passed and the cause of the first error has been eliminated, the notification of the first error on the main control board 50 side ends. Also, a command indicating that the first error has been cleared is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it terminates the notification of the first error. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cause of the first error has not been removed even though the reset sensor 175 is turned on, the main control board 50 continues to report the first error. Also, the error cancellation command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . As a result, the notification of the first error is continued on the sub-control board 80 side as well.

Further, even when it is determined that the reset sensor 175 is turned on and the cause of the first error has been removed, if the predetermined period has not elapsed, the main control board 50 returns to the first error. Continue reporting errors. Also, the error cancellation command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . As a result, the notification of the first error is continued on the sub-control board 80 side as well.
It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the predetermined period of time has elapsed is made, for example, as follows. First, at the start timing of the predetermined period, a timer value corresponding to the predetermined period is set in the RWM 53, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt processing. Then, it is determined whether or not the timer value has become "0" for each interrupt process, and when it is determined that the timer value is not "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed, and the timer value is set to "0". , it is determined that the predetermined period has passed.

In the example of FIG. 133, after the cause of the first error is removed, the first error cancellation operation (the operation of turning the door key DK) is performed before the predetermined period elapses. is invalid, and the notification of the first error cannot be terminated.
When the first error cancellation operation is performed again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the cancellation operation becomes effective, so the main control board 50 sends a command to the sub-control board 80 to the effect that the first error has been canceled. Send. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it terminates the notification of the first error.

Further, Example 1 in FIG. 133 shows an example in which the cause of the second error occurs during the predetermined period. In this example 1, no other error is detected during the predetermined period. Therefore, although the cause of the second error occurs before the predetermined period elapses, the second error is not detected during the predetermined period.
As a control method in this way, it is possible to prevent the main process from proceeding to the second error detection process for a predetermined period of time.
In this example 1, the second error (selector error) is not detected during the predetermined period, but other errors may be detectable.
After the predetermined period of the first error has passed, the main control board 50 detects the second error and issues a command to that effect to the sub control board 80 . As a result, the sub-control board 80 notifies the second error. Therefore, the notification of the second error is performed substantially simultaneously with the end of the predetermined period corresponding to the first error (the predetermined period corresponding to the second error starts).
In this way, in this embodiment, the notification of the first error and the notification of the second error are not redundantly executed. Therefore, after the notification of the first error ends, the notification of the second error starts. It goes without saying that the second error is detected before the notification of the second error is started.
Further, when the notification of the second error is started, a predetermined period from the start of the notification of the second error becomes an invalid period of the cancellation operation of the second error. Therefore, this point is the same as the case of the first error. Therefore, the second error cannot be canceled (notification of the second error terminated) during the predetermined period.

As with the first error notification, the second error notification is configured such that the BGM makes one loop in a predetermined period. For this reason, at least one BGM is configured to loop by reporting the second error.
After a predetermined period of time has passed, the second error can be cleared. The operation of canceling the second error is an operation of turning the door key DK counterclockwise by 45 degrees, like the operation of canceling the first error.
When the cause of the second error is removed and the second error canceling operation is performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the canceling operation becomes effective. The error notification is ended, and a command indicating that the second error has been cleared is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 . When the sub-control board 80 receives the command, it terminates the notification of the second error.

As described above, when the first error occurs, the notification of the first error is performed at least for a predetermined period. Further, when the second error occurs, the notification of the second error is performed at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the second error occurs after the occurrence of the first error and before the notification of the first error ends, the notification period (predetermined period) of the first error is not shortened.
As for the first error, since the first error is detected substantially at the same time as the cause of the first error occurs, the error log (history) in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 stores the error when the first error was detected. is stored as the date and time of occurrence of the first error.
On the other hand, for the second error, the time of detection of the second error is stored as the date and time of occurrence of the second error. Therefore, strictly speaking, there may be a discrepancy between the date and time when the second error actually occurred and the date and time of occurrence (actually detection date and time) stored in the RWM 53 .

FIG. 134 is a time chart showing Example 2 of error notification. Example 2 differs from Example 1 in FIG. 133 in that the second error is detected even during the predetermined period of the first error. Also, in Example 2, the first error is a selector error and the second error is a hopper error. However, it is not limited to these errors.
In FIG. 134, if the cause of the second error occurs within a predetermined period after the detection of the first error, the second error is detected even during the predetermined period. However, the notification of the second error is not performed overlapping with the notification of the first error. When the cause of the first error is removed, the predetermined period of time for the first error elapses, and the operation to cancel the first error is performed, the notification of the first error is terminated. When the notification of the first error ends, the notification of the already detected second error is started. When the notification of the second error is started, a predetermined period of time is started again as the notification period of the second error, and the canceling operation of the second error is disabled until the predetermined period of time elapses. When the cause of the second error is removed, the predetermined period ends, and the second error is canceled, the notification of the second error is terminated.
As described above, when the first error occurs, the notification of the first error is performed at least for a predetermined period. Further, when the second error occurs, the notification of the second error is performed at least for a predetermined period. Therefore, even if the second error occurs after the first error occurs, the notification period (predetermined period) of the first error is not shortened.

FIG. 135 is a time chart showing Example 3 of error notification. In example 3, the first error is either a hopper error or a selector error. Alternatively, it may be a recoverable error other than these two errors.
Example 3 of FIG. 135 shows an example in which the front door 12 is opened within a predetermined period of time after the first error is detected, and a door opening error (hereinafter simply referred to as "door error") is detected.
In the sixth embodiment, a door error can be detected and notified even during a predetermined period. Further, the door error can be canceled at any time (even during a predetermined period), and when the front door 12 is closed and the cancellation operation is performed, the door error notification ends at that point. In other words, unlike the first error and the like, the door error is not an error that is reported over a predetermined period of time once it occurs.
When the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on, and the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is opened. When the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened, the main control board 50 notifies the main side of the error (displays "dE") and transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 80 . Upon receiving the command, the sub-control board 80 notifies of a door error.
When the selector error or hopper error described above occurs, the hall clerk opens the front door 12 in order to eliminate the cause of the error. becomes.

In Example 3 of FIG. 135, when the front door 12 is opened within a predetermined period after the detection of the first error, the door error is immediately detected regardless of whether it is still within the predetermined period. Furthermore, when a door error is detected, a door error notification is immediately made. Therefore, the notification of the first error and the notification of the door error are redundantly performed. For example, the BGM corresponding to the notification of the first error and the door error sound (for example, an alarm sound or a sound of repeating "the door is open") are output in duplicate.
Here, while the door error is being notified, the notification volume of the first error may be made lower than normal. Alternatively, while the door error is being notified, the notification of the first error may be made only by the image and the sound output may be eliminated. Furthermore, the notification of the first error may be interrupted while the door error is being notified.

When the front door 12 is closed and a door error cancellation operation is performed, it is determined whether the front door 12 is closed regardless of whether it is within a predetermined period of time, and the front door 12 is closed ( When it is determined that the door error has been cleared, the door error notification ends. Therefore, only the notification of the first error continues.
As in the above example, the first error cannot be canceled until a predetermined period of time has passed, and can be canceled by performing the first error canceling operation after the predetermined period of time has passed.
Although not shown in FIG. 135, when the front door 12 is closed after a predetermined period of the first error has elapsed and after the cause of the first error has been removed, and the door error cancellation operation is performed, the door error is notified and Both notification of the first error may be ended. In this case, the operation for canceling the door error also serves as the operation for canceling the first error.

FIG. 136 is a time chart showing Example 4 in which a power shutdown (an event that cuts off the supply of power) occurs while the first error is occurring.
In this example, it is assumed that "predetermined period=time t1+time t2", and that the first error is detected, the predetermined period starts, and then the power is turned off when time t1 elapses.
When the first error is detected, the notification of the first error is performed. However, when the power supply is interrupted, the supply of power is eventually stopped, so the notification of the first error is also interrupted.
Here, in the present embodiment, data indicating that the time t1 of the predetermined time has passed is stored as backup data in the RWM 53 at the time of power-off processing.
When the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the state before the power is turned off is restored (regardless of whether an error was detected before the power was turned off). When an error is detected before the power is turned off, after the power restoration process shown in FIG. 42 is completed, the data related to the time t1 backed up when the power is turned off is read, and the notification of the first error is resumed at a predetermined timing. be.

Then, after the power is restored from the power-off, the resetting operation of the first error is disabled until the time t2 elapses. As a result, it is possible to secure the notification period (predetermined period) of the first error, in other words, the invalid period of canceling the operation of the first error. By doing so, even if the power is cut off due to, for example, cheating after the first error is detected, the first error notification can be performed after recovery from the power cut, and the power cut occurs. A predetermined period can be secured before and after.
When the notification of the first error is resumed after recovery from power failure, the first error cannot be canceled until time t2 has elapsed since the notification was resumed. After time t2 has passed, the first error can be cleared if the cause of the first error is removed.

Example 5 of FIG. 137 is a time chart showing an example of power failure during the occurrence of the first error, and is a modification of FIG.
In this example, if a power failure occurs when time t1 has elapsed during the predetermined period, data relating to time t1 is not backed up.
After recovery from power failure, on the condition that the cause of the first error is removed, even if the notification time of the first error after recovery from power failure is less than time t2, the first error will not occur. Notification can be canceled. In this manner, although the notification of the first error is resumed after recovery from the power failure, the predetermined time period before and after the power failure may not be secured.
In the case of such control, for example, "0" is stored in the RWM 53 as a timer value corresponding to the remaining time of the predetermined period when power is restored. Therefore, if the cause of the first error has been removed after recovery from power failure, the notification of the first error can be terminated as soon as the operation for canceling the first error is performed.

Next, various occurrence situations of selector errors and hopper errors, and specific examples of notification modes in such cases will be described. In the following description, selector error 1 is an error due to the reverse flow of medals. For example, when the insertion sensor 44b (downstream side) detects medals first and then the insertion sensor 44a (upstream side) detects medals, it is determined that the medals have reversed flow, and a selector error 1 occurs.
Selector error 2 is an error due to the accumulation of medals. For example, the insertion sensors 44a and/or 44b are switched from off to on to off as the medal passes, and this corresponds to the case where the on state continues for a predetermined time.
In the following example, selector error 1 occurs first, and then selector error 2 occurs immediately thereafter.

Here, when backflow of medals occurs (including illegal insertion of medals due to cheating), selector error 1 (backflow) occurs due to detection of an abnormality in the insertion sensor 44. However, when backflow of medals occurs, Medal jamming usually occurs in the medal selector. Therefore, the cause of the selector error 1 is eliminated by removing the medal jam that has occurred.
Similarly, when selector error 2 (stagnation) occurs, medals are clogged in the medal selector, and the cause of selector error 2 is eliminated by removing the clogged medals.
Also, if the hopper error is, for example, a hopper empty error, the cause of the hopper error is eliminated by replenishing the hopper with medals. Also, if the hopper error is, for example, medal clogging at the hopper outlet, the cause of the hopper error is eliminated by removing the clogged medals.
Furthermore, if the hopper error is, for example, an abnormality in the payout sensor 37a (including illegal payout due to fraud), there is no operation to remove the cause of the hopper error. , the presence or absence of an abnormality in the payout sensor 37 is determined.

In the example below, the cause of the error is removed at the time the error cancellation operation is performed, regardless of whether it is during the error unrecoverable period (equivalent to the above-mentioned "predetermined time"). (The error has not occurred).
Furthermore, the "error cancellation operation" corresponds to an operation of turning the door key DK counterclockwise by 45 degrees (however, as described above, an operation such as turning on the reset switch 153 may also be used).

FIG. 138(a) is a time chart showing Example 6 of error notification.
In this example, selector error 1 first occurs, and selector error 2 occurs immediately thereafter. In this case, notification of selector error 1 is executed based on selector error 1 that occurs first. When the notification of selector error 1 is started, the notification of selector error 1 does not end even if the selector error cancellation operation is executed during the "(error) uncancellable period 1"("5seconds" in this example).
Furthermore, an example in which selector error 1 is being reported and a cause of a hopper error is occurring during uncancellable period 1 is shown. As described above, the progress of the game is suspended after the occurrence of the selector error, so medals are not paid out. Therefore, it is difficult to assume that a hopper error will occur. In such a case, a hopper error will occur.

As described above, selector error 1, selector seller 2, and hopper error overlap during notification of selector error 1 (during unreleasable period 1).
When the factor of the selector error is removed during the first uncancellable period 1 and the selector error canceling operation is performed, the canceling operation is invalid and the notification of the selector error 1 does not end.
Next, when the selector error cancellation operation is executed when 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the notification of the selector error 1, the operation is effective, so the notification of the selector error 1 ends.
It should be noted that the error cancellation operation executed after 5 seconds of the uncancellable period may be performed any time after 5 seconds have elapsed (the same applies to other uncancellable periods).
When the selector error cancellation operation (effective) is executed and the notification of the selector error 1 is finished, the notification is switched to the notification of the selector error 2 next. The unreleasable period 2 for announcing the selector error 2 is also continued again for "five seconds". Therefore, even if 5 seconds or more have passed since the factor of selector error 2 occurred and the factor of selector error 2 has been removed, selector error 2 will not be notified until the unreleasable period 2 ends. cannot be terminated.

If the selector error cancellation operation is executed after 5 seconds have passed since the start of the notification of the selector error 2, the operation is effective, so the notification of the selector error 2 ends. When the notification of the selector error 2 ends, the notification is switched to the hopper error. The unreleasable period 3 for notifying the hopper error is also continued again for "5 seconds". Therefore, even if five seconds or more have passed since the cause of the hopper error occurred and the cause of the hopper error has been removed, the notification of the hopper error cannot be terminated until the unreleasable period 3 ends. .
If the hopper error canceling operation is executed after 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the hopper error notification, the operation is effective, so the hopper error notification ends.
As described above, even if three errors occur at the same time, error notification is performed for "five seconds" for each error, and the period for each "five seconds" is a non-cancellable period.

FIG. 138(b) is a time chart showing a modification of (a).
The example of FIG. 138(b) shows the case where the canceling operation of the selector error is executed after "20 seconds" have elapsed since the first notification of the selector error 1 in FIG. 138(a).
In this case, since "20" seconds have passed since selector error 1 was reported, the selector error cancellation operation has passed the first cancellation impossible period 1 ("5 seconds"). Therefore, the termination of the notification of selector error 1 by the error cancellation operation is the same as in FIG. 138(a).
However, no matter how many seconds elapse after the unreleasable period 1 elapses before the error is cleared, the other unreleasable periods (unreleasable period 2 and 3) may be canceled or other unreleasable periods may be canceled. The periods (non-cancellable period 2 and non-cancellable period 3) will not be shortened.
Therefore, even if the selector error is canceled after "20" seconds have passed since the notification of selector error 1, the notification of selector error 1 ends, but the notification of selector error 2 is started next. Since the notification of the selector error 2 has a cancellation impossible period 2 of "5 seconds", even if the selector error cancellation operation is performed during this cancellation impossible period 2, it is invalid. If the canceling operation of the selector error is executed after "five seconds" of the canceling impossible period 2 has elapsed, the canceling operation becomes valid and the notification of the selector error 2 ends. However, after that, the hopper error notification is executed.

FIG. 139 is a time chart showing Example 7 of error notification.
In example 7, if multiple errors occur within the initial unreleasable period of "5 seconds", the unresolvable period continues beyond 5 seconds.
In the example of FIG. 139, the cause of the hopper error occurs first, and the hopper error notification is performed. Next, selector error 1 (reverse flow) and selector error 2 (stagnation) occur before "5 seconds" have passed since the hopper error notification.
In this case, the hopper error notification cannot be terminated even if the hopper error cancellation operation is executed after "5 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the hopper error notification. In Example 7, the hopper error canceling operation becomes valid when 10 seconds have passed since the hopper error notification.
In this example 7, the period until the hopper error cancellation operation becomes effective is set to "10 seconds", but it is not limited to this, and may be set to "15 seconds". Assuming "15 seconds", "Hopper error notification uncancellable period (5 seconds) + Selector error 1 notification uncancellable period (5 seconds) + Selector error 2 notification uncancellable period (5 seconds)" equal to

Also, when 10 seconds have passed since the hopper error was reported, removing all factors of the hopper error, selector error 1, and selector error 2, and then executing the error cancellation operation, the hopper error End the notification. Furthermore, after the notification of the hopper error is completed, the notification of the selector error 1 and the notification of the selector error 2 are not executed.
As in Example 7, when other errors cumulatively occur during the first error notification period, and when a sufficient error notification period is secured, if the first error cancellation operation is executed, The normal state may be restored without executing other error notification. It goes without saying that all the causes of the error must be eliminated when the error cancellation operation is executed and the error notification is terminated.

FIG. 140 is a time chart showing Example 8 of error notification.
In this example 8, the cause of the hopper error first occurs, and after the hopper error is reported, selector error 1 (backflow) and selector error 2 (stagnation) occur within the first unreleasable period 1 (5 seconds). This is an example of what happened. That is, the error occurrence situation is the same as in Example 7 of FIG.
In this example, the first unreleasable period 1 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to the hopper error, and even if the hopper error releasing operation is executed during this unreleasable period 1, the notification of the hopper error does not end.
When the hopper error canceling operation is performed after the uncancellable period 1 elapses, the canceling operation becomes effective and the notification of the hopper error ends. When the notification of the hopper error ends, the next selector error 1 is notified (cannot be canceled period 2 (5 seconds)).

The non-cancellable period 2 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to the selector error 1, and even if the selector error canceling operation is executed during this non-cancellable period 2, the notification of the selector error 1 does not end.
When the canceling operation of the selector error is performed after the elapse of the uncancellable period 2, the canceling operation becomes effective, and the notification of the selector error 1 ends. When the notification of selector error 1 is completed, the next selector error 2 notification (cancellable period 3 (5 seconds)) shifts to the notification.
The non-cancellable period 3 (5 seconds) is a period corresponding to the selector error 2, and even if the selector error canceling operation is executed during this non-cancellable period 3, the notification of the selector error 2 does not end.
When the canceling operation of the selector error is performed after the elapse of the uncancellable period 3, the canceling operation becomes valid and the notification of the selector error 2 is terminated.

Next, when the notification of the selector error 2 is completed, the notification of the hopper error is executed again (second time). No hopper error has occurred at this point. The hopper error that occurred first is alerted by re-notifying the hopper error.
The notification of the second hopper error continues for the unreleasable period 4 (5 seconds). Even if the error cancellation operation is executed during the cancellation impossible period 4, the notification of the second hopper error does not end. When the error canceling operation is performed after the elapse of the uncancellable period 4, the canceling operation becomes valid, and the notification of the second hopper error ends. When the notification of the second hopper error is completed, the operation returns to normal.
As described above, although no error has occurred at that time (although the cause of the error has been removed), the first error may be notified again for alerting the user.

Example 9 of FIG. 141 is a time chart showing a situation in which errors occur in the order of hopper error, selector error 1, and selector error 2, similar to FIG.
In Example 9 of FIG. 141, the cause of the hopper error first occurs, and the hopper error is reported. This is an example.
If all error factors are removed within the unreleasable period 1, and the hopper error is released after the unreleasable period 1 has elapsed, the notification of the hopper error ends and the notification of the next selector error 1 is started. Start. That is, although the cause of the selector error has been removed at this point, based on the occurrence of selector error 1, selector error 1 is reported regardless of whether or not the cause of the selector error has been removed at that point. and continues the notification until the non-cancellable period 2 elapses. Until the unrecoverable period 2 elapses, even if the error clearing operation is executed, it becomes invalid.

After the unrecoverable period 2 elapses, when the error is canceled, the notification of the selector error 1 ends and the notification of the next selector error 2 is started. As in the above, the cause of the selector error has been removed at this point, but based on the occurrence of selector error 2, regardless of whether or not the cause of the selector error has been removed at that point, the selector error 2, and continue the notification until the unreleasable period 3 elapses. Until the unrecoverable period 3 elapses, even if the error clearing operation is executed, it becomes invalid.
After the unrecoverable period 3 elapses, when the error is canceled, the notification of the selector error 2 is terminated and the normal state is restored.
In this way, regardless of whether or not the cause of the error has been removed at that time, the error notification having the unremovable period may be performed in the order of the errors that have occurred.

Although the sixth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the example of FIG. 136, it is possible to continue reporting the first error again for a predetermined period after recovery from power failure. That is, during the predetermined period after recovery from power failure, the resetting operation of the first error is disabled.
As a method of controlling in this way, for example, when power interruption is detected and power interruption processing is started, data corresponding to the entire time of a predetermined period is backed up.
Furthermore, in this case, it is possible to notify again for a predetermined period of time after recovery from power failure. It may also be possible to terminate the notification of the first error.

(2) In the example of FIG. 136, when the power is turned off after the predetermined time has passed since the detection of the first error and before the first error cancellation operation is executed, the following control is performed. It is possible to
A first method is not to report the first error after recovery from power failure. This is because the notification of the first error has already been executed for a predetermined period of time before the power is turned off.
As a second method, after the power is restored from the power failure, the notification of the first error is resumed. , the first error notification may be terminated even if the first error canceling operation is not performed.
Furthermore, as a third method, similar to the example in FIG. may be terminated.

(3) In Example 1 of FIG. 133, after detecting the first error, the second error is not detected until a predetermined time elapses. Further, in Example 2 of FIG. 134, after detecting the first error, the second error is detected even before the predetermined time has passed.
As a method other than these, for example, once the first error is detected, the first error may not be detected until a predetermined period of time elapses. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it may be determined whether or not the cause of the first error has been eliminated.
In this case, if the cause of the first error is not removed, the notification of the first error is continued. Further, even if the cause of the first error has been removed after a predetermined period of time has passed, the notification of the first error is continued if the cancellation operation of the first error is not executed.
On the other hand, when the cause of the first error has been removed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed and the first error canceling operation has been performed, the notification of the first error is terminated.

For example, it is assumed that a fraudulent act has been committed against the hopper and an illegal payment has been made. When a hopper error is detected based on the first fraudulent payout, the hopper error is reported. Next, it is assumed that the second fraudulent payout is performed during the notification of the hopper error. In this case, the second fraudulent payout may or may not be detected.
Before the predetermined period elapses, even if an error cancellation operation is performed, the operation is invalid, and the notification of the hopper error does not end. Next, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, when the error cancellation operation is executed, the notification of the hopper error is terminated and the normal state is restored. In other words, after the error cancellation operation is executed, the notification of the hopper error corresponding to the second fraudulent payout is not executed again.
It is also possible to control as described above.

(4) When the cause of the first error has been removed, the notification of the first error has ended, and no other error has been detected, the game can be played immediately.
Further, when the cause of the first error has been removed, the notification of the first error has ended, and no other error has been detected, the setting confirmation state can be entered. When the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated clockwise by 90 degrees (FIG. 150 to be described later) during game standby, the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 66 can be performed. be.
(5) In the above embodiment, the specific "predetermined period" can be set in various ways. If the "predetermined period" is set to a relatively short period, it may be set to about "5 seconds", for example. On the other hand, when the period is set to be longer, for example, it is set to about "60 seconds".

<Seventh embodiment>
The seventh embodiment relates to a door key (including a setting key to be compared with the door key).
In the seventh embodiment (the same applies to other embodiments), the clockwise (also referred to as "right") and counterclockwise (also referred to as "counterclockwise") rotations of the door key DK and the setting key CK are It represents the direction of rotation as viewed from the key side.
142 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10. FIG. A door key insertion opening 160a is provided near the right edge of the front door 12 (on the side of the right side plate 13d) near the lower side of the medal insertion opening 47 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the player side. The front door 12 can be opened by inserting a later-described door key DK into the door key insertion opening 160a and rotating it clockwise by 45 degrees. When the front door 12 is opened, the cabinet 13 is opened with the left side of the front door 12 as an axis in FIG.

143 shows the door key DK and the door key cylinder 160. FIG.
143, (a) is a front view showing the door cylinder 160, and (b) is a side view showing a state in which the door key DK is inserted from the door key insertion opening 160a of the door cylinder 160. FIG. In FIG. 4B, the door key DK is illustrated with a solid line, and the door key cylinder 160 is illustrated with a two-dot chain line.
As shown in FIG. 143(a), the door key cylinder 160 includes an outer cylinder 161 and an inner cylinder 162 housed therein. An outer cylinder 161 of the door key cylinder 160 is fixed to the front door 12 , and an inner cylinder 162 is rotatable with respect to the outer cylinder 161 .

The inner cylinder 162 has a door key insertion opening 160a for inserting the door key DK at its central portion. In addition, two grooves 161a are provided on the inner cylinder 162 side of the outer cylinder 161 .
On the other hand, the door key DK has two protrusions DK1, and when the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, the two protrusions DK1 enter the two grooves 161a respectively. The total length L11 of the door key cylinder 160 is longer than the length of the keyway DK2 (the portion where the key groove is formed) of the door key DK. When the groove shape of the keyway DK2 of the door key DK and the internal shape of the door key cylinder 160 are fitted when the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a (the door key DK matching the internal shape of the door key cylinder 160 is inserted). ), the door key DK can be rotated, and the inner cylinder 162 can be rotated.

A cam 171 is connected to the tip of the door key cylinder 160, as shown in FIG. 143(b). When the door key DK is inserted and the inner cylinder 162 is rotated, the cam 171 is also rotatable in conjunction with the inner cylinder 162 . Details of the cam 171 will be described later (FIG. 146, etc.).

FIG. 144 is a front view showing the door key insertion opening 160a and the positional relationship of the inserted door key DK. In FIG. 144, the door key DK is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.
The state of FIG. 144(b) is a so-called initial state (the state shown in FIG. 143(a)) and shows the position of the inner cylinder 162 when the door key DK is not inserted. In this state, the door key insertion opening 160a (the space into which the door key DK of the inner cylinder 162 is inserted) extends vertically in the figure. In the state shown in FIG. 144(b) with the front door 12 closed, the front door 12 is locked with respect to the cabinet 13 regardless of whether or not the door key DK is inserted. The front door 12 is closed (cannot be opened).

On the other hand, in FIG. 144, the state of (a) shows a state in which the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees with respect to the state of (b). This state indicates the direction of the door key DK to be operated when canceling the error that has occurred in the slot machine 10 .
As described above, when a hopper error, selector error, or the like occurs and the hall clerk removes these error factors, the error notification continues and the state before the error occurrence is restored. do not. After removing the cause of the error, the front door 12 is closed, the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, and the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise to obtain the state shown in FIG. 144(a). In other words, in the sixth embodiment, "error cancellation operation" corresponds to turning the door key DK to the position shown in FIG. 144(a).
As a result, the reset sensor 175, which will be described later, detects the error cancellation operation. When the error cancellation operation is detected, it is determined whether or not the error factor has been eliminated, and when it is determined that the error factor has not been eliminated, the error is not canceled and the error notification continues. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cause of the error has been removed, the error notification is terminated and the state before the error detection is restored.

When the door key DK is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a in the state of FIG. 144(b) and the keyway DK2 of the door key DK enters the inner cylinder 162 as shown in FIG. DK1 enters the groove 161a of the outer cylinder 161. As shown in FIG. In this state, when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise by 45 degrees as shown in FIG. Moving. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull out the door key DK in the state shown in FIG. 144(a), the projection DK1 abuts against the outer cylinder 161 and the door key DK cannot be pulled out. The door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a can be pulled out only when the position shown in FIG.
Further, the movable range when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise is 45 degrees. Therefore, the structure is such that the door key DK cannot be rotated counterclockwise beyond the position shown in FIG. 144(a). An attempt to rotate the door key DK counterclockwise beyond the position shown in FIG. 144(a) is restricted by a stopper (not shown).

Further, when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 144(b), rotational torque is generated in the door key DK. After the door key DK is rotated to the position shown in FIG. 144(a), when the hand is released from the door key DK (when the force acting on the door key DK is removed), a force is applied to the inner cylinder 162 to return it to the initial position. . Therefore, after the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 144(b) to the state shown in FIG. 144(a), the state shown in FIG. 144(b) is obtained by releasing the door key DK. return. The state shown in FIG. 144(a) can be returned to the state shown in FIG. 144(b) by rotating it clockwise while holding the door key DK.

When the door key DK is released after the state shown in FIG. 144(a), the state shown in FIG. 144(b) is restored, but the inner cylinder 162 does not rotate clockwise any more. This is because rotational torque is required to rotate the inner cylinder 162 clockwise. Therefore, even if the force acting on the door key DK is removed in the state shown in FIG. 144(a), the door key DK will almost overrun in the direction shown in FIG. 144(c) from the state shown in FIG. do not.
As a result, for example, a hopper empty error occurs, and the hall clerk opens the front door 12, refills the hopper 35 with medals (removes the cause of the hopper empty error), closes the front door 12, and turns the door key DK counterclockwise. To prevent a front door 12 from being opened unintentionally because the door key DK is not rotated to the opening position of the front door 12 even if the releasing operation is performed by turning the door key DK and releasing the hand from the door key DK at that position. can be done.

The state of FIG. 144(c) shows a state in which the door key DK is rotated clockwise by 45 degrees from the state of FIG. 144(b). When the door key DK is turned to the state shown in FIG. 144(b), the front door 12 can be opened.
The clockwise movable range of the door key DK is also 45 degrees, and the state of FIG. 144(c) is the limit. That is, the door key DK is prevented from rotating clockwise from the state of FIG. 144(c). An attempt to rotate the door key DK clockwise beyond the position shown in FIG. 144(c) is restricted by a stopper (not shown).
In the state of FIG. 144(c), similarly to the state of FIG. 144(a), the protrusion DK1 of the door key DK moves to a position inside the outer cylinder 161 where the groove 161a is not formed. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull out the door key DK in the state shown in FIG. 144(c), the protrusion DK1 abuts against the outer cylinder 161 and the door key DK cannot be pulled out. The door key DK inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a can be pulled out only when it is returned to the position shown in FIG. 144(b).

144(b) to the state shown in FIG. 144(c) while the front door 12 is closed, if the door key DK is released, the state shown in FIG. 144(b) is reached. , but the inner cylinder 162 does not rotate counterclockwise any further. This is because rotational torque is required to rotate the inner cylinder 162 counterclockwise. Therefore, even if the force acting on the door key DK is removed in the state shown in FIG. 144(c), the door key DK will almost overrun in the direction shown in FIG. do not.
As a result, even if the hall clerk opens the front door 12 and releases the door key DK before confirming the contents of the error, the door key DK does not turn to the error release operation position, so the error is released unintentionally. It is possible to prevent the error from being lost (the content of the error cannot be confirmed).
Further, when the door key DK is turned from the state shown in FIG. 144(b) to the state shown in FIG. 144(c) to open the front door 12 and then released from the door key DK, the state shown in FIG. 144(b) is obtained. The state may be returned to, or the state shown in FIG. 144(c) may be maintained. 144(c), the state shown in FIG. 144(c) can be returned to the state shown in FIG. 144(b) by releasing the door key DK. . If the door key DK is automatically returned in this manner, the working efficiency of the hall clerk can be improved.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 149, which will be described later, after the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise to open the front door 12, the door key DK has a locking mechanism that maintains the state shown in FIG. 144(c). It is also possible to provide This locking mechanism (Fig. 149) will be described later.

FIG. 145(a) is a front view for explaining various dimensions of the door key cylinder 160, and FIG. 145(b) is a plan view and a side view showing the dimensions of the power plug.
As shown in FIG. 145(a), the longitudinal length (excluding the groove 161a) of the door key insertion opening 160a is L14, and the lateral length (width) of the door key insertion opening 160a is L13.
Also, as shown in FIG. 145(a), the distance from the center of the door key insertion opening 160a to the side plate 13d is defined as L12.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145(b), in the power plug PP, the length of the blade PP3 is L15, and the thickness is L16. Also, the distance (center-to-center distance) between the two blades PP3 is L17. Furthermore, the width of the blade PP3 is defined as L18.
Here, when the power plug PP is type A defined by "JIS C 8303",
L15: 17±1.3 (mm)
L16: 1.5±0.13 (mm)
L17: 12.7±0.13 (mm)
L18: 6.35±0.25 (mm)
is.
In the following description, it is assumed that the power plug PP is type A of "JIS C 8303".

Here, focusing on one blade PP3,
Width L18 of plug blade PP3<longitudinal length L14 of door key insertion opening 160a
The thickness L16 of the plug blade PP3 < the length L13 in the lateral direction of the door key insertion opening 160a
Then, the plug blade PP3 can enter the door key insertion opening 160a.
If it were possible for the plug blade PP3 to enter the door key insertion slot 160a, there is a risk that the plug blade PP3 of the power plug PP would be used to cheat.
Therefore, the distance L17 between the plug blades of the power plug PP and the distance L12 between the door key insertion opening 160a and the side plate 13d are
L17<L12
and
As a result, even if one of the plug blades PP3 of the power plug PP is to be inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, the other plug blade PP3 abuts against the front door 12. cannot be inserted into

Secondly, if the depth of the door key insertion opening 160a (L11 in FIG. 143(b)) is sufficiently longer than the length L15 of the blade PP3, even if the depth of the door key insertion opening 160a is longer than that of the blade PP3. Since it is thought that the inner cylinder 161 cannot be rotated even if it is inserted into the inner cylinder 161, such a configuration is preferable.
Thirdly, the relationship between the width L13 of the door key insertion opening 160a and the thickness L16 of the blade PP3 is
L13<L16
If it is,
and/or
The relationship between the longitudinal length L14 of the door key insertion opening 160a and the width L18 of the blade PP3 is
L14<L18
In this case, the plug blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a, so it is preferable to configure in such a manner.
moreover,
If "L13<L16" and/or "L14<L18" are set, it is possible to prevent the cheating without setting "L17<L12" (even if "L17>L12").
If the blade PP3 cannot be inserted into the door key insertion slot 160a, for example, when the actual machine is purchased and played at home, the blade PP3 may accidentally stick into the door key insertion slot 160a and the door key may be lost. It is possible to prevent an accident such as breaking while entering the insertion port 160a.

Next, a locking device operated by door key cylinder 160 will be described.
FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram for explaining the locking device 170 in the seventh embodiment, and is a front view seen from the inside of the front door 12 toward the outside (player's side).
As shown in FIG. 143(b), the cam 171 is connected to the tip of the inner cylinder 162 of the door key cylinder 160, and rotates simultaneously when the door key DK and the inner cylinder 162 rotate. Since FIG. 146 is a view of the front door 12 viewed from the back side, when the door key DK is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the outside as shown in FIG. Rotate clockwise. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 144(c), when the door key DK is rotated clockwise as viewed from the outside, the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise in FIG.

FIG. 146 shows the state in which the front door 12 is closed, and the position of the cam 171 in FIG. 146 is the position shown in FIG. 144(b). At this position, an engaging member (not shown) provided on the cabinet 13 side engages with the cam 171, and the front door 12 is closed (locked) with respect to the cabinet 13. It is
The cam 171 has two protrusions 171a and 171b. In this example, protrusions 171a and 171b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees.
The locking device 170 includes moving members 172 and 173 configured to be vertically movable in the figure. A coil spring 176 is connected to the moving member 172 via a hook 172c.
Similarly, the moving member 173 is connected to a coil spring 177 via a hook 173b and to a coil spring 178 via a hook 173c.

Furthermore, the moving member 172 is supported by a predetermined member (not shown). Then, when the moving member 172 moves upward in the drawing, the coil spring 176 is stretched and elastic force acts on the coil spring 176 .
Similarly, the moving member 173 is supported by a predetermined member (not shown). Then, when the moving member 173 moves downward in the drawing, the coil springs 177 and 178 are stretched and elastic force acts on the coil springs 177 and 178 .
The moving member 172 is provided with a driven portion 172a extending toward the cam 171, and the tip of the driven portion 172a and the projection 171b of the cam 171 are in contact. The downward movement of the moving member 172 in the drawing is restricted by the contact between the driven portion 172a and the projection 171b.

Further, the moving member 173 is provided with a driven portion 173a extending toward the cam 171, and the tip of the driven portion 173a and the projection 171a of the cam 171 are in contact with each other. The upward movement of the moving member 173 in the drawing is restricted by the contact between the driven portion 173a and the projection 171a.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 146, the length of the moving member 173 in the vertical direction in the drawing is formed longer than the length of the moving member 172 in the vertical direction in the drawing. That is, the moving member 173 is larger than the moving member 172 . Therefore, the weight of the moving member 173 is heavier than the weight of the moving member 172 .

Here, all the coil springs 176, 177 and 178 shall have the same shape (same performance). For this reason, let F1 be the elastic force of the coil spring 176 when the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure, and F2 be the elastic forces of the coil springs 177 and 178 when the moving member 173 moves downward in the figure. When
2×F1≈F2
is configured to be
With the above configuration, the force for moving the moving member 173 downward in the drawing is greater than the force for moving the moving member 172 upward in the drawing, even including the influence of gravity. is configured to be
With this configuration, when the door key DK is turned clockwise with the front door 12 closed, a larger force (rotational torque) is required than when it is turned counterclockwise. This prevents the front door 12 from being easily opened even if an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a and attempts to open the front door 12, for example. On the other hand, turning the door key DK counterclockwise does not require a large amount of force, so the hall clerk can easily perform an error canceling operation.

At the position shown in FIG. 146, almost no tensile force acts on the coil spring 176 . Therefore, even if the contact between the driven portion 172a and the protrusion 171b is released, the moving member 172 is configured not to move further downward in the drawing from the position shown in FIG.
At the position shown in FIG. 146, almost no tensile force acts on the coil springs 177 and 178 . Therefore, even if the contact between the driven portion 173a and the projection 171a is released, the moving member 173 is configured not to move further upward in the drawing from the position shown in FIG.
Also, the projection 171 a of the cam 171 is in contact with the driven portion 174 .
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the driven portion 174 is configured to be vertically movable in the figure. When the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise and the tip of the projection 171a moves downward, the driven portion 174 can move downward while being in contact with the projection 171a.

The moving member 172 is provided with a detection piece 172b. On the other hand, a reset sensor 175 is attached to the locking device 170 . At the position shown in FIG. 146, the reset sensor 155 is detecting the detection piece 172b. The state in which the reset sensor 175 detects the detection piece 172b is defined as "off".
On the other hand, when the moving member 172 moves upward in the drawing, the detection piece 172b is no longer detected by the reset sensor 175 . Thereby, the reset sensor 175 detects "ON".

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a state when the cam 171 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG.
In the state shown in FIG. 144(b), the door key DK is inserted and rotated clockwise 45 degrees. When the state shown in FIG. 144(c) is reached, the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise 45 degrees in FIG. Then, the state shown in FIG. 147 is obtained. Therefore, the state of FIG. 147 is a state in which the front door 12 can be opened.
When the cam 171 rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees, the driven portion 174 in contact with the protrusion 171a moves downward while maintaining contact with the protrusion 171a. Further, the driven portion 173a moves downward while maintaining the contact state with the protrusion 171a. As a result, the moving member 173 moves downward in the drawing, and the coil springs 177 and 178 are stretched, so that the cam 171 is subjected to rotational torque to rotate clockwise (to return to its original position). This rotational torque is the elastic force of the coil springs 177 and 178 .
On the other hand, the contact state between the projection 171b of the cam 171 and the driven portion 172a is released. The moving member 172 maintains the position shown in FIG. 146 even after the contact state with the protrusion 171b is released. Therefore, the detection piece 172b remains detected by the reset sensor 175 (off state). Also, since the moving member 172 does not move, no elastic force acts on the coil spring 176 .

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the state when the cam 171 is rotated clockwise by 45 degrees from the state shown in FIG.
In the state shown in FIG. 144(b), the door key DK inserted into the door key insertion opening 160a is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise to bring the state shown in FIG. 144(a). It rotates and becomes the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the state in FIG. 148 is the state at the time of the error cancellation operation.
When the cam 171 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 146, the abutment state between the projection 171a and the driven portion 174 is released, but the driven portion 174 remains at the uppermost position. Therefore, the driven portion 174 does not move downward even when the contact state with the projection 171a is released.

Further, when the cam 171 rotates clockwise, the driven portion 172a is moved upward in the drawing by the projection 171b. As a result, the moving member 172 moves upward in the figure. When the moving member 172 is moved upward in the drawing, the coil spring 176 is stretched, so that the cam 171 is subjected to rotational torque to rotate counterclockwise (to return to its original position). This rotational torque is the elastic force of the coil spring 176 .
Since the driven portion 173a and the cam 171 are not in contact with each other, the position of the driven portion 173a does not change even if the cam 171 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 146 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the position of the moving member 173 does not change.
Further, when the state shown in FIG. 146 changes to the state shown in FIG. 148, the detection piece 172a is no longer detected by the reset sensor 175. As a result, the reset sensor 175 is turned on, and it is determined that the error cancellation operation has been performed.

In FIG. 149, the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees clockwise (the state of FIG. 144(c)), the front door 12 is opened, and then the door key DK is locked at that position (the state rotated 45 degrees clockwise). It is a front view which shows a structure.
149(a) shows the state of FIGS. 144(b) and 146 (before the door key DK is rotated, that is, before the moving member 173 moves downward), and (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 144(c) and FIG. 147 (the state after the door key DK has been rotated clockwise by 45 degrees and the moving member 173 has moved downward).
In FIG. 149, a fixing member 179 is a member fixed to the front door 12 side. Therefore, the moving member 173 moves vertically with respect to the fixed member 179 .
As shown in FIG. 149, the moving member 173 is formed with an opening 173d. A substantially cylindrical stopper 173e protrudes from the opening 173d toward the front in the figure. The stopper 173e is attached movably within the opening 173d.

In the state of FIG. 149(a), the fixing member 179 and the opening 173d are positioned at a height where they partially overlap in the vertical direction. Therefore, the stopper 173e is in contact with the right outer edge of the fixing member 179 in the figure.
Then, when the moving member 173 moves downward from the state of FIG. 149(a) and enters the state of FIG. 149(b), the opening 173d is positioned below the fixed member 179. Then, when the front door 12 is opened, the stopper 173e moves leftward in the figure and comes into contact with the lower outer edge of the fixing member 179. As shown in FIG. As a result, the force with which the moving member 173 tries to return upward is regulated. Therefore, even if the door key DK is turned clockwise by 45 degrees, the moving member 173 cannot move upward, so the door key DK does not automatically return. In other words, after the door key is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the state shown in FIG. The state of FIG. 144(c) is maintained.
Then, when the front door 12 is closed, the position of the stopper 173e is returned to the right, and the moving member 173 is allowed to move upward. As a result, the moving member 173 returns to the state shown in FIG. 149(a), and the door key DK automatically returns from the state shown in FIG. 144(c) to the state shown in FIG. 144(b).

Even if the door key DK is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 144(b), the front door 12 will not be opened, so the lock shown in FIG. 149 will not be applied. Therefore, when the door key DK is released in the state shown in FIG. 144(a), the state automatically returns to the state shown in FIG. 144(b).
Further, in this embodiment, the lock shown in FIG. 149 is applied when the front door 12 is opened. Therefore, when the door key DK is turned from the state shown in FIG. 144(b) to the state shown in FIG. 144(c) without opening the front door 12 and then released, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 144(b).

Next, the setting key CK will be described for comparison with the door key DK described above.
FIG. 150 shows the setting key CK and the setting key cylinder 154. FIG. 4A is a side view showing a state in which the setting key CK is inserted from the setting key insertion opening 151, and FIG. 4B is a state in which the setting key CK is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees. is a side view showing. In FIG. 150, the setting key cylinder 154 is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.
The setting key insertion opening 151 is mounted on the main control board 50 as shown in FIG. When the setting key CK is inserted from the setting key insertion opening 151 as shown in FIG. 150(a) and rotated 90 degrees clockwise as shown in FIG. It turns on, and it becomes a state in which the setting can be changed or the setting value can be confirmed.
The movable range of the setting key CK is from the state shown in FIG. 150(a) (rotation angle of 0 degrees) to the state shown in FIG. 150(b) (clockwise rotation angle of 90 degrees).
Further, unlike the locking device 170, even if the setting key CK is released after being rotated 90 degrees as shown in (b) in the figure, the setting key CK does not return to the state shown in (a) in the figure.
Further, the rotational torque is substantially constant in the rotational movable range of the setting key CK, and the rotational torque hardly changes according to the rotational angle of the setting key CK.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the relationship between the rotation angle of each key and the rotation torque corresponding to the rotation angle for the door key DK and the setting key CK. In the example of FIG. 151, the front door 12 is not opened (the lock shown in FIG. 149 is not applied) after the door key DK is rotated clockwise by 45 degrees.
As described above, the door key DK has a movable range of "-45 degrees" to "+45 degrees". Further, as described above, the rotational torque when rotating clockwise is greater than the rotational torque when rotating counterclockwise.

On the other hand, the setting key CK has a movable range from "0 degrees" to "+90 degrees". Further, unlike the door key DK, the setting key CK has a substantially constant rotation angle and acting torque. In this example, the rotational torque of the setting key CK is smaller than the rotational torque (T1) when the rotational angle of the door key DK is "0 degree", but it is not limited to this. The rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque "T1" when the rotational angle of the door key DK is "0 degree". Furthermore, the rotational torque of the setting key CK is greater than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "-45 degrees" and is smaller than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "+45 degrees". You may Alternatively, the rotational torque of the setting key CK may be greater than the rotational torque when the door key DK is rotated to "+45 degrees".

Although the seventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, when the front door 12 is open, the door key DK maintains the position shown in FIG. 144(c) and does not return to the position shown in FIG. 144(b), but the present invention is not limited to this. .
For example, if the structure shown in FIG. 149 is eliminated and the front door 12 is opened with the door key DK rotated 45 degrees clockwise, when the door key DK is released, the elastic force of the coil springs 177 and 178 causes the cam 171 to move. may be returned to the initial position, thereby returning the door key DK to the position shown in FIG. 144(b). If the door key DK returns to the position shown in FIG. 144(b), the door key DK can be pulled out even while the front door 12 is open.

(2) The shape of the door key DK shown in the seventh embodiment is an example, and is not limited to this. For example, the door key DK without the protrusion DK1 may be used. In this case, the door key DK can be pulled out even when the door key DK is rotated.
(3) The configuration of the locking device 170 shown in the seventh embodiment is not limited to that illustrated. For example, it may be designed so that the rotational torque is the same when the door key DK is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise. Also, the rotatable range of the door key DK is not limited to "-45 degrees" to "+45 degrees". It is also possible to

(4) Both the maximum amount of clockwise rotation and the maximum amount of counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK can be set arbitrarily. In the above embodiment, the door key DK is rotatable by a maximum of 45 degrees clockwise and a maximum of 45 degrees counterclockwise.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be some difference between the maximum amount of clockwise rotation and the amount of counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK.
On the other hand, it is also possible to provide a sufficient difference between the maximum amount of clockwise rotation and the maximum amount of counterclockwise rotation of the door key DK. For example, it is possible to set the maximum amount of clockwise rotation to "+60 degrees" and the maximum amount of rotation to counterclockwise to "-30 degrees".
Alternatively, conversely, it is also possible to set the maximum amount of clockwise rotation to "+30 degrees" and the maximum amount of rotation to counterclockwise to "-60 degrees".

(5) The rotational torque (force required to rotate) when rotating the door key DK may be set to be the same for clockwise and counterclockwise rotations, or may be set differently.
For example, first, if the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise by "+45 degrees" is "T1" and the rotational torque when rotating it counterclockwise by "-45 degrees" is "T2", Any of "T1≈T2", "T1>T2", and "T1<T2" may be used.

Further, the rotational torque for rotating the door key DK clockwise (to the open side of the front door 12) may be the same or different depending on whether the front door 12 is closed or opened. For example, the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise when the front door 12 is closed may be greater than the rotational torque when rotating the door key DK clockwise when the front door 12 is open.
In particular, when the door key DK is rotated clockwise in the closed state of the front door 12, a force for unlocking is required, so the rotational torque increases. On the other hand, even if the door key DK is rotated clockwise while the front door 12 is in the open state, the force for unlocking does not act, so the rotational torque is smaller than the above case.

Further, whether or not the front door 12 is open and the clockwise/counterclockwise rotational torque of the door key DK can be set variously.
in particular,
a) With the front door 12 closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK≅ the counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK b) With the front door 12 closed, the clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK>Door key DK Counterclockwise rotational torque c) With the front door 12 closed, the clockwise rotational torque of the door key DK<Counterclockwise rotational torque of the door key DK d) With the front door 12 open, the clockwise rotational torque of the door key DK Rotational torque≈Counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK e) With the front door 12 open, clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK>Counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK f) With the front door 12 open, The clockwise rotation torque of the door key DK<counterclockwise rotation torque of the door key DK may be satisfied.

<Eighth embodiment>
The eighth embodiment is an invention relating to cuts and branches of effects.
The terms used in the eighth embodiment have the following meanings.
“Production stage” refers to a background production image that is displayed over a plurality of games. In this embodiment, the term “image” includes both “moving image (video)” and “still image”.
The performance stage is determined by a lottery or the like based on the game state, the winning combination, the number of games played, and the like. During the game, it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to execute the change of the production stage, for example, every game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is decided to change the performance stage, the performance stage is changed during the current game or from the end of the current game to the start of the next game.
The display of the effect stage is started in response to an operation by the player (for example, a bet operation, an operation of the start switch 41, etc.), similar to the event described later. The production stage continues to be displayed until the next production stage is switched.
As production stages, for example, a normal stage, an omen stage, a CZ stage, an AT stage, and the like are provided.
Here, the "precursor stage" is a stage for inciting whether or not to shift to AT. It should be noted that the portents include the main portent in the case of shifting to AT and the gaseous portent that does not shift to AT.
Also, the “CZ (chance zone) stage” is a stage in which the degree of expectation for shifting to AT (winning) is higher than in non-CZ. In other words, the CZ stage is a stage that is more advantageous to the player than the normal stage (a stage that easily shifts to a state that is advantageous to the player).
And when we say "normal stage", we do not include the premonitory stage and the CZ stage.
In addition, the term "AT stage" refers to a normal stage during AT, and does not include an AT-specialized zone stage or a sub-bonus stage during AT. The normal stage during AT is the stage with the highest staying ratio during AT.

An “event” is an effect triggered by an operation by a player, specifically, a bet operation (insertion of medals or operation of the bet switch 40), operation of the start switch 41, or operation of the stop switch 42. , a newly output effect, or a different effect than before. An event is the minimum unit of production, and by combining events, various productions such as one-shot production and continuous production described later are configured.
As described above, during the game, one of the production stages is selected and the background production is displayed. Then, when an effect in the current game is selected, an event determined by the effect is output at a predetermined trigger. In this case, the event is displayed as an image superimposed on the background production (production stage).
For example, as shown in FIG. 154, which will be described later, when the effect number 01 is selected, no event occurs or one or a plurality of events are determined to be output in response to a predetermined operation. For example, when the event "0101" is selected, the event "0101" is output when the start switch 41 is operated.

A "cut" is the minimum unit of continuous (uninterrupted) moving images, and is also called a "shot". For example, if there is a moving image of an appearing character A speaking, then the screen is switched to an appearing character B, and there is a moving image of an appearing character B speaking, the moving image of the appearing character A speaking a word is a break. If not, it will be one cut, and when the next appearance character B is switched, it will be another cut.
Therefore, if there is one cut as a continuous moving image of the appearing character A and then one cut as a continuous moving image of the appearing character B, there are a total of two cuts.
On the other hand, when the angle of the appearing character A is switched in the middle of the moving image in which the appearing character A speaks, and the moving image in which the appearing character A speaks continues, the angle is switched with the one cut before the angle is switched. The latter one cut makes a total of two cuts.
On the other hand, for example, a vertically long moving image that is panned up from the bottom is a continuous (unbroken) moving image, and is therefore one cut.
An event may consist of one cut or may consist of a plurality of cuts.
Also, in moving images, a series of cuts (one cut or a set of two or more cuts) at a certain location may be referred to as a "scene". Therefore, one event can also be called one scene.

In this embodiment, "branch" refers to switching from an event up to that point to a new event. This causes a cut or scene to switch.
Also, the "number of branches" means the total number of effects to be divided when the effects are divided.
For example, when only event A can be output in a certain operation opportunity, and no other event is output (for example, at the start of production 15 in FIG. , when only event "1501" is output), the number of branches is set to "1".
Also, if event A has been output until then, and a certain operation trigger switches to either event B or event C (for example, in FIG. or "1504" is output), the number of branches at this operation trigger is set to "2".
Furthermore, when there is a case where no event is output and a case where event A is output in a certain operation opportunity (for example, in FIG. ” is output), the number of branches at the operation trigger is set to “2”.
Furthermore, if event A has been output until then and there is no event to be newly output at a certain operation opportunity (for example, in FIG. displays the number of branches as "-".

In addition, from the viewpoint of how many games the performance continues, there are a single performance and a continuous performance.
"Single-shot effect" refers to an effect that is completed in one game. For example, it is output from the time of operation of the start switch 41 to the time of full stop (further, from the time of full stop to the time of bet operation, or from the time of full stop to the time of operation of the start switch 41 of the next game), and to the next game It is a production that does not carry over the production.
Furthermore, the "chance up pattern" is an effect that is output in a single effect or a continuous effect, and is output as the game progresses or triggered by a predetermined operation, and the expectation level is higher than before. point to Here, in the "expectation level", the expectation level related to winning a special role (bonus), shifting to CZ (chance zone), winning AT, shifting to AT specialized zone, winning sub-bonus during AT, etc. included.
In addition, "fixed effect" is a effect that is output in a single-shot effect, and the result is confirmed at the time the effect is output (special role, AT, confirmation of sub-bonus during AT, confirmation of winning to CZ It refers to production (premium production) that means confirmation of transition, confirmation of transition to AT specialized zone, etc.). As will be described later, during the continuous effect, there is a case where a "successful effect" is output, which means that a result that is advantageous to the player is fixed. It is output in continuous production.

On the other hand, "continuous effect" refers to a series of effects that are output in a plurality of times (at least two times or more), unlike the above-mentioned "single-shot effect". The continuous effect has an "introduction effect" (an effect indicating that the continuous effect is about to start) as an effect to be output first. However, the introduction performance may be omitted and the game may be started from the first game of the continuous performance.
Further, as the final game of the continuous production (game for notifying the result), there are a "failure production", a "success production", and a "reversal production".
As a result, the continuous production is a production that announces the winning of a special role (bonus), the shift to CZ (chance zone), the winning of AT, the shifting to AT specialized zone, the winning of sub-bonus during AT, etc. , "Failure effect" means not winning a special role, not moving to CZ, not winning AT, not moving to an AT specialized zone, not winning a sub-bonus during AT It is a performance that announces etc.
On the other hand, "successful production" means winning a special role, moving to CZ, winning AT, moving to an AT specialized zone, winning a sub-bonus during AT It is a performance to announce that
In addition, even in the above-described one-shot effect, there are cases where a failure effect or a success effect is output to indicate the end of the effect.

In addition, the "reversal effect" is when the bet operation for the next game is performed after the "failure effect" is output in the final game of the continuous effect, or when the start switch 41 for the next game is operated. As a trigger, it is a production that switches from a "failure production" to a "success production".
In the continuous performance, when the reverse performance is not output in the next game after the failure performance is output, the game in which the failure performance is output becomes the final game of the continuous performance.
On the other hand, after the failure performance is output, when the reverse performance is output in the next game, the game in which the reverse performance is output becomes the final game of the continuous performance.

The "ending effect" is a effect that is output when it is confirmed that the AT has completed the run, and continues until the game ends when the AT ends. It should be noted that "complete the AT" means to continue until the parameters (the number of games played, the number of payouts, and the number of difference) in the AT exceed the upper limit (or reach the upper limit). Specifically, for example, this corresponds to a case where the difference counter value continues until it exceeds an upper limit value (for example, "2400").

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an effect stage in the eighth embodiment. Since the production stages in FIG. 152 are examples, they are not limited to these 12 stages. In addition, in FIG. 152, the number of cuts in each production stage is displayed.
The normal stage 0 is an effect stage that is selected only in the non-advantageous section. In this way, a production stage unique to the non-advantageous section may be provided, but it is also possible to share the production stage (for example, normal stage 1) in the advantageous section.
Normal stages 1 to 5 are provided as production stages selected during the normal period of the advantageous section. The “advantageous interval (normal)” is non-AT and does not include during the premonition or during the CZ. CZ stage 1 is selected during CZ, and precursor stage 1 is selected during precursor.

Also, an AT stage 1 is provided as a performance stage in the advantageous section AT. A plurality of types of performance stages may be provided in the advantageous section AT. In addition, the "advantageous section AT" does not include the (additional) specialized zone in the advantageous section AT or the sub-bonus state in the advantageous section AT. AT specialized stages 1 and 2 are provided as production stages in a specialized zone in the advantageous section AT, and an AT SB stage is provided as a production stage in the sub-bonus in the advantageous section AT.
As shown in FIG. 152, the number of production stages (5) selected in the normal advantageous section (non-AT) is provided more than the number of production stages (1) selected in the advantageous section AT. . This is to prevent the player from getting bored by increasing the variation of the effect during the normal period of the advantageous section.

FIG. 152 also shows the image capacity of the production stage. C1 (MB) is the image capacity of the production stage (normal stage 0) used in the non-advantageous section, and C2 (MB) is the total image capacity of the production stages (normal stages 1 to 5) used in the normal (non-AT) advantageous section. , When the image capacity of the production stage (AT stage 1) used in the advantageous section AT is C3 (MB),
C1<C3<C2
is.
In the non-advantageous section, the rate of stay is extremely low and, for example, an AT lottery is not performed, so the image capacity of the effect is the smallest.
In addition, since the number of production stages in the normal (non-AT) advantageous section is larger than the number of production stages in the AT advantageous section, the image capacity is proportionally larger.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of production stages during the advantageous section AT may be increased. Furthermore, the number of production stages during the advantageous section AT may be larger than the number of production stages during the normal advantageous section (non-AT).
Then, each image capacity is
C1<C2<C3
may be

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing types of effects in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 153 exemplifies only a part of the effects, and the effects shown in FIG. 153 do not mean all the effects.
The effect is, every game, lottery, etc. depending on whether it is an advantageous section, whether it is a winning hand of the game this time, whether it is during CZ, whether it is a sign, whether it is during AT, etc. One of the production numbers is selected with .
Effects 01 to 18 are effects that are normally selected in the advantageous section.
Further, effects 14 to 18 are effects selected in a continuous effect. When the continuous performance is selected, the performance 14 is selected first, and it is notified that the continuous performance is started from the next game. Then, in the first game, the second game, and the third game of the continuous production in the next game, the production 15, the production 16, and the production 17 are selected, respectively. Furthermore, when a failure effect (described later) is selected in the third game of the continuous effect and the state is shifted to an advantageous state for the player, the effect 18 (reverse effect) is selected as the fourth game of the continuous effect. be done.
When the AT starts, the performance 21 is selected to notify the start of the AT, and when the AT ends, the performance 25 is selected to notify the end of the AT.

Figures 154 to 157 are diagrams showing event names, cut numbers, and branch numbers by extracting several effects from Figure 153 .
154 to 157,
Production 01 (Normal anticipation production) (Fig. 154)
Production 03 (Normal anticipation production) (Fig. 154)
Production 14 (continuous production (introduction)) (Fig. 154)
Production 15 (continuous production (first game)) (Fig. 155)
Production 16 (continuous production (second game)) (Fig. 155)
Production 17 (continuous production (third game)) (Fig. 155)
Production 18 (continuous production (reverse)) (Fig. 156)
Production 20 (fixed production) (Fig. 156)
Production 21 (AT start production) (Fig. 156)
Production 22 (AT normal production) (Fig. 156)
Production 23 (AT additional production) (Fig. 157)
Production 24 (AT expectation production) (Fig. 157)
Production 25 (AT end production) (Fig. 157)
is exemplified.

First, in FIG. 154, the event, the number of cuts, and the number of branches corresponding to the effect will be described, taking the effect 01 (normal anticipation effect) as an example.
In the eighth embodiment, the event name is indicated by a 4-digit number, the upper 2 digits of the 4 digits represent the production number, and the lower 2 digits indicate the event number during the production from "01". ing.
In the case where the effect is normal in the advantageous section and not the continuous effect (effect 01 to effect 13 in FIG. 153), there is a case where "no event" is selected. The production 01 has seven types of events "0101" to "0107".

"No event" may be selected for all operation triggers. For example, at the start (when the start switch 41 is operated or when the reels 31 start rotating), there are cases where "no event" is selected and event "0101" is selected. Similarly, at the time of one stop (when the first stop switch 42 is operated or when the first reel 31 is stopped), "no event", event "0102", "0103", "0104" or "0106" There is a case where either is selected.
Further, for example, the event "0102" corresponds to 1st stop, 2nd stop (when the second stop switch 42 is operated, or when the second reel 31 is stopped), and 3rd stop (when the third stop switch 42 is operated, or when the third When the reel 31 is stopped), it may be selected by any of the operation triggers. In the case of an event that has the possibility of being selected with a plurality of operation triggers, when it is selected with any of the operation triggers, the same event is not selected redundantly in the game. For example, if the event "0102" is selected during the first stop, the event "0102" will not be selected during the second or third stop. Moreover, the production 01 does not have an event to be selected after the full stop.
From the above, when the effect 01 is selected in the game this time, for example,
At the start: Event "0101"
1 stop: event "0104"
2nd stop: No event 3rd stop: Event "0102"
After a total stop: No event Events are output in such a flow.

In addition, when the effect 01 is selected in the game this time, there is a case where an event is selected with all the operation triggers.
for example,
At the start: Event "0101"
1 stop: event "0104"
2 stops: Event "0102"
3 stops: event "0105"
This is the case.
Furthermore, in contrast to this, when the effect 01 is selected in the game this time, there is a case where the event is not selected in all the operation triggers.
for example,
At start: no event At 1st stop: no event At 2nd stop: no event At 3rd stop: no event This is the case.
In this case, since one of the performance stages is selected, the game is in a state where only the background image is output.

Note that when an event that can be output with a plurality of operation triggers is provided, the same event may be output with a plurality of operation triggers. For example, after the event "0102" is output at the first stop, the event "0102" is output at the third stop as well.

Also, the number of cuts for each of the events "0101" to "0107" is "1". Therefore, even if any event in the effect 01 is selected, a continuous moving image without a break is output at least until the next operation opportunity.
However, the number of cuts is finite, and the length (time) is predetermined. For example, assume that the playback time of event "0101" is "T1". Assume that event "0101" is selected at the start.
In this case, if the first stop switch 42 is not operated until the time "T1" has passed after the start switch 41 is operated, one cut of the event "0101" is output to the end, and then the one cut is output. It will be in a stopped state at the final image of .
It is also assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated after the start switch 41 is operated and before the time "T1" elapses, but no event is selected during the first stop. Then, assuming that time "T1" has passed two stops before, one cut of event "0101" is output to the end between one stop after and two stops before, and then the final image of the one cut It will be in a stopped state.
Furthermore, it is assumed that the first stop switch 42 is operated after the start switch 41 is operated and before the time "T1" elapses, and the event "0102" is selected at the first stop. In this case, switching from event "0101" to "0102" is triggered by the first stop. That is, even if one cut of the event "0101" has not been output to the end, the output of one cut of the event "0101" is stopped at the first stop, and the one cut of the event "0102" is output. Start.

Moreover, the branches of the production 01 are as follows.
First, at the start, there is a case where there is no event or the event "0101" is selected, so the number of branches at the start is "2".
Similarly, during one stop, there may be no event or event "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106" may be selected, so the number of branches during one stop is "5". ”. In other words, at one stop, there is no event, and one of the five events "0102", "0103", "0104", or "0106" is branched.
Further, similarly, as shown in FIG. 154, the number of branches is "2" for two stops, and the number of branches is "6" for three stops.

Effect 03 is, like effect 01, a selectable effect in the normal time (non-AT) of the advantageous section. As described above, there is a case where "no event" is selected in the case where the effect is the normal time of the advantageous section and not the continuous effect.
Also, as shown in event "0307", the number of cuts in one event is not limited to "1", but may be "2" or more.
In addition, there is an operation opportunity in which an event is not selected, such as the 2nd stop of production 03 .

As shown in production 03, the average number of cuts for events with 3 stoppages (meaning the average value for all productions; the same shall apply hereinafter) is higher than the average number of cuts for events with 1 stop and 2 stoppages. set to increase. Taking production 03 as an example,
Average number of event cuts during one stop: 1
Average number of event cuts at 3 stops: 1.2
is.
As the average value of the number of cuts of the event for each operation trigger,
a) The average value of the number of cuts for the event at 3 stops is the largest,
b) the average number of cuts for the event at the start is equal to or less than the average number of cuts for the event at the three stops;
c) The average number of cuts for events during one stop and two stops is less than the average number of cuts for events during three stops.
Furthermore, even if single-shot effects and continuous effects are combined, the average value of the number of cuts for events during 3 stops is the average number of cuts for events during 1 stop and 2 stops as effects executed in one game. more than value.

The reason for this is that the 3rd stop is the timing at which the player's operations required for one game are completed, so that the player can concentrate on the production (the event can be fully shown). be.
Also, even if the number of event cuts is increased at the end of the game, the tempo of the game is not deteriorated, and the event that the player wants to see is not erroneously skipped in the flow of operations by the player. It's for.
It is not necessarily the case that the duration (duration) of one event is long if the number of cuts is large.

Furthermore, the average value of the number of branches of the production at the operation opportunity (excluding after all stops; the same applies hereinafter) is
a) The average value of the number of branches in the production at 3 stops is the largest,
b) The average value of the number of branches in the performance at the start is equal to or less than the average value of the number of branches in the performance at the 3 stops,
c) The average value of the number of branches in the effects during the 1st stop and the 2nd stop is less than the average value of the number of branches in the effects during the 3rd stop,
d) The average value of the number of branches in the performance at two stops is the smallest.
In production 01, the number of branches at the time of 3 stops is the largest (number of branches "6"), and in production 03, the number of branches at the time of start and at the time of 3 stops is the largest (number of branches "6").
Moreover, both the effects 01 and 03 have the smallest number of branches in the effect at the time of two stops (for example, in the case of effect 03, the number of branches in the effect at the time of two stops is "1").
Furthermore, when single-shot effects and continuous effects are combined, the average value of the number of branches for the effects at the 3rd stop is the average number of branches for the effects at the 1st and 2nd stops as the effects executed in one game. more than value.
However, as for the effects executed in one game of the continuous effects, the average value of the number of branches in the effects during the 1st stop and the 2nd stop is larger than the average value of the number of branches in the effects during the 3rd stop.

In production 14 to production 18, which are continuous productions, unlike the production at normal time, if there is an event provided at the operation opportunity, the event is always output at the operation opportunity. Further, when there are a plurality of events provided with the operation trigger, one of the events is output at the operation trigger. Therefore, if at least one event is defined for a certain operation trigger, it will not be "no event".
For example, in production 14, event "1401" is always selected at the start. At the 1st stop and the 2nd stop, no event is selected because there is no defined event, and at the 3rd stop, either the event "1402" or "1403" is selected.
In production 15, the number of branches at the start is "1", the number of branches at one stop is "2", and the number of branches at three stops is "1". In production 15, event "1501" is always selected at the start. Moreover, either event "1502" or "1504" is selected at the time of one stop. Here, event "1504" is a chance up pattern. Therefore, at the first stop, the chance up pattern may or may not be output. Furthermore, the event "1503" is always output at the third stop.

Also, the chance-up pattern of event "1504" is an event that can be selected during one stop. All of the chance up patterns in this embodiment are events that can be selected at the time of one stop, and are not selected with other operation triggers. However, not limited to this, the chance up pattern may be selectable with other operation triggers.
However, it is preferable that the chance-up pattern be output early during one game. Therefore, it is preferable to set the chance-up pattern to be more likely to be selected at the time of one stop (or at the start) rather than at the time of three stops. This is to give the player a sense of anticipation early in one game. In addition, in both the one-time performance and the continuous performance, the chance-up pattern is more likely to appear in the 1st stop than in the 2nd or 3rd stop.
Therefore, in the continuous effect, the number of branches for one stop is set larger than the number of branches for two or three stops. This is because it is possible to surprise the player more easily and increase the expectation for the success of the performance.
Although the chance-up pattern may be selected in the second game and the third game of the following continuous effect, it is configured to be selected with the first stop as a trigger.

Effect 16 is a effect output in the second game of the continuous effect (the next game after the game in which effect 15 is output), and the number of cuts for all events is "1". Event "1604" is a chance up pattern like event "1504".
Similarly to the effect 15, when the second and subsequent games of the continuous effect have an event determined by the operation opportunity, one of the events is selected and output. Therefore, in production 16, the event at the start is always "1601", the event at the 1st stop is either "1602" or "1604", there is no event at the 2nd stop, and the event at the 3rd stop is is "1603".

An effect 17 is an effect output in the third game of the continuous effect. The number of cuts of each event of the production 17 is relatively larger than the number of cuts of the events selected in the first game and the second game of the continuous production. The cut number average value of the event selected in the first game (effect 15) of the continuous effect is "1.25", and the cut number average value of the event selected in the second game (effect 16) of the continuous effect is While the value is "1.0", the cut number average value of the event selected in the third game (effect 17) of the continuous effect is "1.83".
Incidentally, since the continuous effect of the present embodiment continues for three games in principle, the effect 17 is the effect of the final game. However, the ending of the continuous effect is an ending that is advantageous to the player (when winning some kind of lottery, transitioning to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.), and the third game of the continuous effect ( When the event "1704" (failure) is selected in the effect 17), as an exception, the process shifts to the fourth game of the continuous effect, and the event "1801" of the effect 18 is output. Therefore, only in this case, the continuous effect continues for four games.

Since the third game of the continuous effect is positioned as the final game of the continuous effect in principle, either event "1704" meaning "failure" or event "1705" meaning success occurs after the total stop. selected and output. For example, in continuous production, some kind of mission production is output, and if the mission can be achieved, it will be "success", and if the mission cannot be achieved, it will be "failure".
For example, if CZ is won, AT is won, or special role is won, event "1705", which is "success", is selected in principle. On the other hand, for example, when CZ is not won, AT is not won, or special role is not won, event "1704", which is "failure", is selected.

However, for example, if you win CZ, if you win AT, or if you win a special role, with a predetermined probability (for example, 20%), the event "1705 ' is selected, and event "1801" of production 18 is selected in the next game.
Here, the cut number of event "1704" corresponding to failure is "2", but the cut number of event "1705" corresponding to success is "4". This is because it is possible to create a feeling of anticipation for awarding a privilege by increasing the movement of the production at the time of success.

Further, the probability of selecting the chance-up pattern of the event "1706" during one stop when the event "1704 (failure)" is selected after the complete stop is defined as "X1", and the event "1705 (success)" after the complete stop is assumed to be "X1". When the probability that the chance up pattern of the event "1706" is selected during one stop when is selected is "X2",
"X1<X2"
is.
In other words, when the chance-up pattern is selected, the expected value of "success" is set to be high.

Effect 18 is a effect in which event "1801" is output at the start. The number of cuts for this event is "4", which is a large number for one event. In the above example, this corresponds to an effect in which a mission is “failed” once, but is “successful” when challenged again (for example, the character is revived).
Although the continuous effect is shown above, the effect similar to the continuous effect is output from the start of the CZ to the end of the CZ, for example. In the final game of CZ, a success or failure event is output.

An effect 20 is selected when outputting a fixed effect in normal times. In production 20, one cut of event "2001" is selected at the start and continued until a complete stop. However, the event is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the time of the first stop, the time of the second stop, or the time of the third stop, and the fixed effect may be output.
This fixed effect is a so-called premium effect, and when a normal effect is being performed, this time the game (1 game) without going through an omen or a continuous effect, winning a special role, winning CZ, or This is selected when notifying the winning of an AT or the like.
The reason why the event "2001" of the fixed effect is made up of one cut is to draw attention to the fixed effect by intentionally reducing the number of cuts of the fixed effect.

Effects 21 to 25 are effects selected during AT.
The effect 21 corresponds to an AT start effect. The number of cuts of the event "2101" selected here is "3" and is selected at the start. However, the event is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the time of 1st stop, 2nd stop, or 3rd stop, and the AT start effect may be output.
On the other hand, the number of event cuts in the AT end effect (effect 25), which will be described later, is "1". This is because, in the AT start scene, the number of cuts is increased (many movements are produced) to liven up the AT start and create a sense of anticipation. On the other hand, when the AT ends, the number of cuts is intentionally reduced to give the effect of fading out the AT.

The production 22 is an AT normal production. During the AT, different events are selected and always output at every game, at the start, at the first stop, at the second stop, and at the third stop. However, not limited to this, even during AT, when a winning combination is not won or when a replay is won, a specific event may not be output in all operation opportunities.
On the other hand, when the pressing order bell is won during AT, the correct pressing order is reported at the start, and a specific event is selected and output at the first stop, second stop, and third stop.
The production 23 is an additional production during AT. Many types of events are provided as extra effects during the AT, so that the effects can be diversified.
As for the effect 24, an event is output for each operation opportunity in the anticipation effect during AT (for example, the effect output when winning a winning combination for the additional lottery).
As shown in productions 22 to 24, the average value of the number of event cuts output at the start and the 3rd stop is output at the 1st stop and the 2nd stop, similarly to the normal production. more than the average number of cuts for events
Effect 25 is an AT end effect. An event with the number of cuts "1" is selected at the start. However, the event is not limited to this, and the event may be selected at the time of one stop, the time of the second stop, the time of the third stop, or after a full stop, and the AT end effect may be output. In the presentation 25, one of the events is determined by lottery or the like according to the game results during the AT.

In the above description, it is determined by lottery or the like which event is selected when an effect is selected, but a combination pattern of events may be selected. For example, the pattern of the combination of events that can occur for each effect is stored, and the effect to be output in the current game at the start (for example, effect 01, etc.) and the pattern of the event combination in the effect are determined and determined. It is also possible to output an effect according to the pattern.

Although the eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the above embodiment, the number of cuts and the number of branches in each effect have been mainly explained, but the volume of the effect can be configured as follows.
First, when one of the production stages shown in FIG. 152 is selected, background music peculiar to the production stage (background music, hereinafter simply referred to as "BGM") is selected and output.
Then, for example, when effect 20 (fixed effect) is selected and event "2001" is output, the volume of BGM corresponding to event "2001" is greater than the volume of general BGM on the effect stage at that time. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to emphasize the fixed effect and draw the player's attention.
However, the volume of the BGM output at the time of error detection is higher than the volume of the BGM related to all effects. By configuring in this way, it is possible to call attention to the surroundings when an error is detected, and to make the hall clerk easily aware of the occurrence of the error.

Further, for example, in the third game of the continuous effect (the game in which the effect 17 is selected), when the event "1705 (success)" is output after the complete stop, the BGM is changed. Here, assuming that a change in the BGM is one of the productions that signify "success", the BGM may be changed at the start of the output of the event "1705", or the BGM may be changed before the start of the output of the event "1705". , may suggest the output of event “1705”.
Also, the tempo (song speed) of the BGM of the event "1705 (success)" is faster than the tempo of the BGM of the event "1704 (failure)". Furthermore, the BGM volume of the event "1705 (success)" is higher than the BGM volume of the event "1704 (failure)".

Furthermore, in AT, the tempo of the BGM of the event "2101" of the effect 21 (AT start effect) is faster than the tempo of the BGM of the event "2501" or "2502" of the effect 25 (AT end effect).
Also, the volume of the BGM of the event "2101" of the effect 21 (AT start effect) is higher than the volume of the BGM of the event "2501" or "2502" of the effect 25 (AT end effect).
As described above, at the start of AT, the tempo of the BGM is increased and the volume is increased, thereby making the start of AT exciting and creating a sense of anticipation.

(2) Further, regarding the color of the effect image, for example, the following configuration can be mentioned.
First, in production 17, the average value of the brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in the event “1705 (success)” is higher than the average value of the brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed in the event “1704 (failure)”. expensive. This is to create a feeling of anticipation for the provision of the privilege by making the performance at the time of success bright.
On the other hand, for example, the normal stage has a low-probability stage, a normal stage, and a high-probability stage with different expected winning values for AT and CZ. , lower than the average values of brightness and saturation of images that can be displayed on the normal stage or the low-probability stage. For example, a high-probability stage may be an image with a night motif, a normal stage may be an image with an evening motif, and a low-probability stage may be an image with a daytime motif.

And when developing from a high-accuracy stage to a continuous production, rather than developing from a low-accuracy stage to a continuous production, the brightness and saturation of the image that can be displayed during the continuous production are relatively low. It may be configured to facilitate development. By doing so, it is possible to match the brightness/chroma during the continuous production with the stage (brightness/chroma) before the continuous production.
In addition, even in the effects that are normally output, the average values of the brightness and saturation of the images that can be displayed in the effects with a high degree of expectation for winning CZ, AT, and special roles (so-called hot effects) are displayed in other effects. Lower than the average brightness and saturation of the resulting image. If the brightness/saturation and the winning expectation are related in this way, it is possible for the player to guess the winning expectation from the brightness/saturation of the game this time, in other words, to suggest the winning expectation. It becomes possible.
However, the brightness and saturation of UI images such as stay stages, characters, and game information (credit count) are constant throughout the game (irrespective of the degree of expectation for winning CZ, AT, special role, etc.).

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described.
The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment relates to a medalless gaming machine (also called "smart slot").
In the ninth embodiment, terms have the following meanings.
The “game media (game value)” in the medalless gaming machine is “electronic information (electronic medals, electronic game media)”. In the following explanation, it is simply referred to as "game medium".
“Lending” refers to transferring a game medium from the lending unit 200 to a gaming machine and crediting it to the gaming machine.
“Credit” means accumulation of game media in a gaming machine. In general coin-operated gaming machines, the upper limit of the number of stored game media is "50", but in medal-less gaming machines, for example, "16384" can be stored as the upper limit.
In particular, "credits" in a medal-less game machine specifically means storage (of electronic medals and electronic game media) in the game media count control board 100 (more specifically, game media count storage means 103a), which will be described later. corresponds to The "game medium number control board 100" is also referred to as the "game medal number control board 100".
Therefore, the “credited game media” in the medalless gaming machine corresponds to the game media stored in the game medium number control board 100 or the game medals stored in the game medal number control board 100 .
A “bet” is a bet on game media to play a game. When the bet switch 40 is operated, a predetermined number (for example, "3") of the credited game media is betted. This point is the same as the medal game machine.

"Settlement" is different from settlement in a coin-operated gaming machine, and refers to returning the betted game media to credit. That is, the number of betted game media is set to "0" (the number of bets is set to "0").
“Counting” refers to returning the game media credited to the gaming machine to the lending unit 200 .
“Return” means storing the game media stored in the lending unit 200 in a card or the like (storage medium such as a magnetic card or an IC card) and ejecting the card or the like from the lending unit 200 .

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a block diagram of the gaming machine 10 (slot machine) in the ninth embodiment. As described above, the gaming machine 10 in the ninth embodiment is a medalless gaming machine.
158, unlike the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (FIG. 1), the gaming machine 10 of the ninth embodiment is provided with a medal slot 47 and a medal selector (passage sensor 46, blocker 45, insertion sensor 44). Not done.
Also, the medal payout device (hopper 35, hopper motor 36, payout sensor 37) is not provided.
The main control board 50 corresponds to the main control board 50 in the first embodiment (FIG. 1).
Also, the bet number display unit 77 is a two-digit LED that displays the current bet number.
The given number display section 78 corresponds to the acquired number display LED 78 in the first embodiment.

The game media number control board 100 is a board for managing the number of game media credited to the gaming machine 10 .
The game media count control board 100 includes a second main control board (means), a payout control board (means), a medal count control board (means), a medal count display control board (means), or a game media count display control board (means). ), etc. Like the main control board 50, the game medium number control board 100 is required to have security to prevent fraud. (Access to game media number control board 100) is difficult.
The game media number control board 100 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, the counter switch 48, the game medium number display board 107, the lending unit 200, and the like via the input port 101 or the output port 102. FIG.

Like the main control board 50, the game medium number control board 100 comprises an independent RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105. FIG. These RWM 103, ROM 104 and CPU 105 may be built in one chip.
The RWM 103 is storage means for temporarily storing data and the like taken in when the CPU 105 manages the number of game media (the number of credits). The RWM 103 is provided with game medium number storage means 103a for storing the number of game mediums. When game media are lent out from the lending unit 200, the number of game media stored in the game media number storage means 103a is updated (added). Further, when game media are provided by winning a small winning combination, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated (added).

When the bet switch 40 is operated to start a game, the number of game media corresponding to the number of bets (for example, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the number of bets is "3") is stored. The game medium (data) of means 103a is updated (subtracted).
Furthermore, the ROM 104 stores a program for managing the number of credits, various data, and the like.
Further, the CPU 105 is a CPU (an IC having a calculation function) provided on the game medium count control board 100, and executes programs and performs calculations necessary for managing the number of game media.

When the main control board 50 is regarded as one of the main control boards, the game medium number control board 100 is another one of the main control boards. Therefore, the RWM 53, ROM 54, and CPU 55 of the main control board 50 are indicated as (first main control) RWM 53, (first main control) ROM 54, and (first main control) CPU 55, respectively.
The RWM 103, ROM 104, and CPU 105 of the game medium number control board 100 are indicated as (second main control) RWM 103, (second main control) ROM 14, and (second main control) CPU 105, respectively.
In the ninth embodiment, the main control board 50 and the game medium number control board 100 are configured as separate bodies, but it is also possible to configure them as one main control board. However, even in this case, the first main control RWM 53, the first main control ROM 54, the first main control CPU 55, the second main control RWM 103, the second main control ROM 104, and the second main control CPU 105 are provided on one control board. will be
Also, the sub-control board 80 corresponds to the sub-control board 80 of the first embodiment (FIG. 1). The RWM 83, ROM 84, and CPU 85 of the sub-control board 80 are indicated as (sub-control) RWM 83, (sub-control) ROM 84, and (sub-control) CPU 85, respectively.

A game medium number display board 107 is electrically connected to the game medium number control board 100 . On this game medium number display board 107, a game medium number display portion 107a is mounted. The game medium number display section 107a displays the number of game mediums stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, and is composed of, for example, a five-digit LED.
For example, it is assumed that "100" is stored as the game medium number in the game medium number storage means 103a. In this case, "100" is displayed in the game medium number display section 107a.

When the 3-bet switch 40 b is operated to start a game, for example, the bet operation signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game media number control board 100 . The game medium number control board 100 determines whether or not the bet can be made based on the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. A bet signal is transmitted to the substrate 50 . When receiving the bet signal, the main control board 50 executes bet processing and stores the bet number in the bet number storage means 53a. When the bet number stored in the bet number storage means 53a is updated from "0" to "3", the display (lower digit) of the bet number display section 77 is also updated from "0" to "3".

On the other hand, when the game medium number control board 100 receives a bet operation signal from the main control board 50 and determines that a bet is possible, it updates the game medium number stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. In this example, for example, when the game medium number stored in the game medium number storage means 103a before betting is "100", it is updated to "97" when "3" is betted. Then, the display of the number of game media display section 107a is also updated from "100" to "97".

Further, when the settlement switch 43A is operated, the bet game media are returned to credit (in other words, the bet number becomes "0").
In a situation where the bet number is stored in the bet number storage means 53a and the bet number is displayed in the bet number display section 77, the settlement switch 43A is operated before the start switch 41 is operated (before the game is started). If you do, return the number of bets to credits.
For example, in a situation where "3" is stored in the bet number storage means 53a and "97" is stored in the game media number storage means 103a, when the settlement switch 43A is operated, the bet number storage means 53a The stored bet number is updated from "3" to "0". As a result, the display of the bet number display portion 77 is updated from "3" to "0".

Further, a settlement signal (a signal corresponding to returning the bet number “3”) is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game media number control board 100 based on the operation of the settlement switch 43A. When the game medium number control board 100 receives this settlement signal, it updates the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a from "97" to "100". As a result, the display of the number of game media display section 107a is updated from "97" to "100".

In this way, the settlement switch 43A is used to return the betted game media to credit (set the number of bets to "0"). Therefore, even if the settlement switch 43A is operated, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is not subtracted.
Further, even if the settlement switch 43A is operated in a situation where the bet number is not stored in the bet number storage means 53a, the bet number stored in the bet number storage means 53a remains "0" and the game is played. The number of game media stored in the medium count storage means 103a remains unchanged.

A game is started by operating the start switch 41 under the condition that game media are betted. Next, the reel 31 is stopped by operating the stop switch 42 . Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped and displayed, the game medium is provided. This point is the same as in the first embodiment.
When the game media are given, the main control board 50 stores the number of given game media in the given number storage means 53b. Further, the main control board 50 transmits a given number (payout number) signal to the game medium number control board 100 . When receiving the given number signal, the game medium number control board 100 adds the number of game media corresponding to the given number signal to the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. For example, the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "97" before the end of the game, and when the given number is "14", it is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. The number of game media currently in play is updated to “111”. Further, the display of the game medium number display section 107a is also updated from "97" to "111".

Further, after the given number is stored in the given number storage means 53b, when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated (at the start of the game), or when all the reels 31 of the next game are stopped, etc., the given number storage means Clear the grant number stored in 53b. When the given number stored in the given number storage means 53b is cleared, the display of the given number display section 78 is also updated to "0".

Furthermore, the game media count control board 100 is provided with a total game media count clear switch 106 . When the total game medium number clear switch 106 is operated, the (total) game medium number stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100 can be cleared ("0" is stored). . When the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is cleared, the number of game media displayed in the game medium number display section 107a is also updated to "0".
Here, the total number of game media clear switch 106 is activated by turning off the power of the gaming machine 10 and turning on the power of the gaming machine 10 with the total number of game media clear switch 106 turned on (game media The number of game media stored in the number control board 100 is cleared). Therefore, even if the total number of game media clear switch 106 is operated during game standby after the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the number of game media is not cleared.
The information cleared by operating the total game medium number clear switch 106 is only the total number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, and other information is not cleared.

For example, when the number of bets stored in the bet number storage means 53a is "3" and the number of game media stored in the number of game media storage means 103a is "1000", the total number of game media clear switch is pressed. When 106 is operated, the bet number stored in the bet number storage means 53a remains "3", but the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a becomes "0". In other words, the operation of the total number of game media clear switch 106 does not clear the bet number stored in the bet number storage means 53a.
Furthermore, in the example of the ninth embodiment, the game media number control board 100 is equipped with a role ratio monitor 74 (management information display LED 74 in the first embodiment (FIG. 1)). However, the role ratio monitor 74 may be mounted on the main control board 50 as in the first embodiment.

A lending unit (also referred to as a “management device” or “CR unit”) 200 is a device for lending and withdrawing game media, is provided for each gaming machine, and is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine. be done. In the hall, the lending unit 200 is sometimes called a sand because it is arranged between the gaming machines. Also, a "gaming system" is composed of a gaming machine and the lending unit 200 corresponding to the gaming machine.
Through communication between the lending unit 200 and the game medium number control board 100, game media can be transferred (rented) from the lending unit 200 to the game medium number control board 100. It is possible to credit to the control board 100 .
Furthermore, it is possible to return the game media credited to the gaming machine 10 (the game media stored in the game media number storage means 103 a ) to the lending unit 200 .
The lending unit 200 includes a lending switch 202 , a return switch 203 , a lendable game medium number display section 204 , and a lendable game medium number storage means 206 .

The lendable game medium number storage means 206 stores the number of game media that can be lent from the lending unit 200 to the gaming machine 10, and is composed of, for example, an RWM provided inside the lending unit 200. . The number of lendable game media stored in the lendable game medium number storage means 206 is displayed on the lendable game medium number display section 204 . The rentable game media number display portion 204 is composed of, for example, 3-digit 7-segs.
When bills are inserted into the lending unit 200, the points corresponding to the inserted bills (for example, if 1,000 yen is inserted, the points are "50") are stored in the lendable game medium number storage means 206, and the number of lendable game media is stored. It is displayed on the medium number display section 204 .
The lending switch 202 is a switch operated when lending a game medium to the gaming machine 10 . When lendable game media are stored in the lendable game medium number storage means 206, for example, each time the lending switch 202 is pressed, the count is "50" (if the lendable count is less than "50"). , game media are lent out equivalent to the total number of points that can be lent out.

When game media are rented from the lending unit 200, the information is transmitted to the game medium number control board 100, and the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is updated. Furthermore, the display of the number of game media by the game media count display unit 107a is also updated. For example, when the number of credits is "10" and "50" game media are lent from the lending unit 200, The displayed number of game media is updated from "10" to "60".

On the other hand, when the player quits the game or when the number of game media displayed in the game medium number display section 107a (the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a) becomes excessive, The counting switch 48 is operated to transfer all or part of the game media from the gaming machine 10 to the renting unit 200 .
Although the details will be described later, when the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a reaches "15000" or more, an effect for promoting counting is output. Especially in this embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of game media that can be stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is set to "16384", the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is the upper limit value. It is recommended that at least some of the game media be returned to the lending unit 200 when "16384" is approaching.
Further, when the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a reaches "15000" or more, the game can be progressed and the count can be made, but the game media can be rented from the lending unit 200. is not allowed.

When the count switch 48 is operated, the game media stored in the game media number storage means 103 a are transmitted to the lending unit 200 via the connection terminal plate 180 . For example, in a situation where the number of game media "1000" is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, the count switch 48 is operated once, and the information "50" is transmitted to the connection terminal board 180 as the count value. Then, the information "50" is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as the count value. After the transmission of the count value, "950" is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. When the game media are returned as described above, the number of game media stored in the lendable game media count storage means 206 is increased by "50" on the lending unit 200 side.
The number of game media transmitted to the lending unit 200 is different depending on how long the count switch 48 is pressed. For example, when the counting switch 48 is pressed for a short time (for example, less than 0.5 seconds), the number of game media “1” is transmitted to the lending unit 200 . Also, when the count switch 48 is pressed for a long time (for example, for "0.5" seconds or more), the number of game media "50" is transmitted to the lending unit 200 for one long press. By repeatedly pressing the count switch 48 for a long time, the number of game media is sent to the lending unit 200 by 50.
Specifically, the gaming machine 10 transmits a gaming machine information notification and a counting notification to the lending unit 200 , and then the lending unit 200 transmits a lending notification to the gaming machine 10 . When the gaming machine 10 receives the lending notification, the gaming machine 10 transmits a lending reception result response to the lending unit 200 . The gaming machine 10 transmits so that the time from transmission of the gaming machine information notification to transmission of the next gaming machine information notification is 300 ms.
The counting notification includes the number of medals to be counted. When the operation of the count switch 48 is accepted, the number of medals counted ("1" or "50") is transmitted at the timing of the count notification.

In addition, in a situation where "1000" is displayed in the game medium number display section 107a before the count switch 48 is operated, when information "50" is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as the count value, the game The display of the medium number display section 107a is updated to "950".
Furthermore, when the player quits the game, after transmitting the total number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103 a to the lending unit 200 , the return switch 203 of the lending unit 200 is operated. When the return switch 203 is operated, the total number of game media stored in the lendable game medium number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200 is stored in a card or the like, and the card or the like is ejected from the lending unit 200 . Here, the number of game media may be converted into points and stored in a card or the like.
Even if the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100 is "1" or more, the rentable game medium number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200 does not store the number of game media. When the number of game media stored (the number of game media that can be rented out) is "0", no card or the like is ejected even if the return switch 203 is operated.
On the other hand, the number of game media "1" or more is stored in the game medium number storage means 103a of the game medium number control board 100, and the game stored in the lendable game medium number storage means 206 of the lending unit 200 When the number of media is "1" or more, when the return switch 203 is operated, the total number of game media stored in the lentable game medium number storage means 206 is stored in a card or the like, and the card or the like is ejected.

Therefore, in the above case, by operating the counting switch 48, the game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a are sent to the lending unit 200, and the game media are stored in the lendable game medium number storage means 206. do. After that, when the return switch 203 is operated, the game media stored in the rentable game medium number storage means 206 are stored in a card or the like and ejected from the rent unit 200 . When the game media stored in the lendable game medium number storage means 206 are stored in a card or the like, the lendable game medium number stored in the lendable game medium number storage means 206 is updated to "0".

The hall computer 220 is a computer for data collection for hall business. For example, the number of games played on the day, the number of in (insertions), the number of outs (given), the number of differences, MY, the number of accessory operations, the number of loans, etc. are totaled.
In addition, since the lending unit 200 is electrically connected to the hall computer 220, the lending unit 200 transmits to the hall computer 220 one-way information regarding the lending and withdrawal of game media.
The management computer 230 is a computer for transmitting information to the outside (for example, an external center outside the hall). Note that the management computer 230 is also installed in the hall, like the hall computer 220 .
In the ninth embodiment, the hall computer 220 and the management computer 230 are provided separately, but they may be integrated into one computer.

In the medalless game machine having the above configuration, as described above, when the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a reaches "15000" or more, an effect for promoting counting is output.
Furthermore, when one player has played a game and the difference obtained by subtracting the number of rentals from the count value is "15000" or more, a blessing effect is output.
However, in order to output the blessing effect when the player ends the game, the blessing effect is not output only by counting a part of the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a. In this way, the blessing effect is output under the condition that the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is counted to be "0".
In order to output the blessing performance when the player ends the game, the blessing performance is not output during the sub-bonus (AT) or the special game state even if the count is executed.

FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing a count-related effect in the ninth embodiment.
First, in step S601, the game media number control board 100 determines whether or not the counting switch 48 has been operated.
When it is determined that the counting switch 48 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S602, and the game medium number control board 100 executes counting processing. Then, in the next step S603, the game media number control board 100 stores (updates) the count value.
Next, proceeding to step S604, the game medium number control board 100 determines whether or not the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a has become "0", that is, whether or not all game media have been counted. to judge. When it is determined that the number of game media is "0", the process proceeds to step S605, and when it is determined that the number of game media is not "0", the process proceeds to step S610.
In step S605, the game media number control board 100 determines whether or not the number of bets is "0". For example, after the bet switch 40 is operated and the number of bets is subtracted from the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a, it is determined that the game has not started and the settlement switch 43A has not been operated. If so, it is determined that the number of bets is not "0". When it is determined that the number of bets is "0", the process proceeds to step S606, and when it is determined that the number of bets is not "0", the process proceeds to step S613.

In step S613, the game media count control board 100 requests the sub control board 80 to output a settlement promotion effect. This is because there is a high possibility that the player will forget to count the number of bets since all the game media have been counted but the number of bets remains. Then, proceeding to step S614, the game media number control board 100 determines whether or not the settlement switch 43A has been operated (whether or not settlement processing has been executed). As described above, when the settlement switch 43A is operated, the settlement signal is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the game medium number control board 100. Therefore, when the settlement signal is received, it is determined that there is settlement. When it is determined that there is no settlement, the process returns to step S613, and when it is determined that there is a settlement, the process returns to step S601. When the settlement process is executed, the game media that have been bet are returned to the game media number storage means 103a, so that the operation of the count switch 48 is waited for again.
In step S605, it is determined that the number of bets is "0", and when proceeding to step S606, the game media number control board 100 calculates the difference between the count value and the number of loans.

Next, proceeding to step S607, the game media number control board 100 determines whether or not the number of differences is "15000" or more. When it is determined that the difference number is "15000" or more, the process proceeds to step S608, and when it is determined that the difference number is not "15000" or more, the process proceeds to step S610.
In step S608, the game media count control board 100 determines whether or not it is in the normal state. Here, "normal state" corresponds to not being in the sub-bonus (AT). In addition, when it is the specification which wins the special part and executes the special game, it corresponds to not being in the special game state. This is because the process proceeds to step S609 under the condition that the state is normal. In other words, if the sub-bonus is intermediate, it can be inferred that the player will not quit the game yet. This is for outputting the blessing effect when the player ends the game.
The game media number control board 100 receives information indicating that the sub-bonus (AT) is in progress or a special game state from the main control board 50, stores it, and uses it for determination in step S608.

When it is determined in step S608 that the state is normal, the process proceeds to step S609, and when it is determined that the state is not normal, the process proceeds to step S610.
In step S609, the game media count control board 100 requests the sub control board 80 to output a blessing effect. Then, the process proceeds to step S610. This congratulatory effect is one of premium effects for a large amount of wins, since the player's differential number is "15000" or more.
In step S610, the game media number control board 100 requests the sub control board 80 to output an attention calling effect. This attention-calling performance is output after counting, and is to output a message that the player should not forget to take out the cards or the like storing the counted game media from the lending unit 200.例文帳に追加Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S601 that the count switch 48 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S611, and the game medium number control board 100 determines that the number of game media stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "15000". It is determined whether or not the above is satisfied. When it is determined that the number of game media is "15000" or more, the process proceeds to step S612, and when it is determined that the number of game media is not "15000" or more, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S612, the game media count control board 100 requests the sub control board 80 to output a counting promotion effect. As described above, since the upper limit of the number of game media that can be stored in the game medium number storage means 103a is "16384", when the number reaches "15000" or more, the player is informed that the count should be made as soon as possible. .

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, after the sub-bonus is completed, the game shifts to a pull-back zone (also referred to as "pull-back section" or "pull-back CZ") in which the sub-bonus can be pulled back. Incidentally, in the tenth embodiment, "AT" is a "sub-bonus" as in the first embodiment.
The game section includes a normal section and an advantageous section as in the other embodiments.
In addition, as game state, information game state and non-information game state are provided.
"Informing game state" means a game state in which the correct pushing order can be notified when the pushing order bell is won. The "reporting game state" includes a game state in which the correct pressing order is reported in all games in which the pressing order bell is won, and a game state in which the correct pressing order is reported in some games in which the pressing order bell is won. .
And, the sub-bonus (AT) is in the information game state.
On the other hand, the "non-reporting game state" refers to a game state in which the correct pressing order is not reported in a game in which the pressing order bell is won. The advantageous section has the time of the information game state and the time of the non-information game state, but the normal section is always the non-information game state.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, a main game state is provided as a concept different from the game state.
The "main game state" includes the normal section, the first game of the advantageous section (transition preparation state), non-AT and non-CZ (so-called normal state), non-AT and CZ, sub-bonus normal, sub-bonus specialized zone, sub- Equipped with a bonus ED (ending), a withdrawal zone, etc. A number is assigned to each main game state, and the current main game state number is stored in the RWM53. For example, the main game state number of the normal section is set to "0".
The "withdrawal zone" of the tenth embodiment is the main game state to which the sub-bonus is completed, but this withdrawal zone may be either an information game state or a non-information game state.
"CZ (chance zone)" refers to a state in which the probability of winning a sub-bonus is higher than in the normal state. The pullback zone in the present embodiment is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the sub-bonus is higher than that of the non-CZ, so it can be said to be one of the CZs.
In addition, CZ may be either the information game state or the non-information game state.

In the tenth embodiment, the symbol arrangement of the reels 31, the winning combination, the winning number, the winning probability (number table), and the condition device are the same as in the first embodiment (FIGS. 1 to 26).
In the tenth embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games played in the advantageous interval is set to "4000", and the upper limit of the difference in the advantageous interval is set to "0" at the start of the advantageous interval as in the first embodiment. Assume that it is "+2400". When the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches "4000" or when the number of differences in the advantageous section exceeds "2400", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, when the heaven B mode was entered, the heaven B mode was looped at 90%, and the heaven B pullback mode was entered at 10%. Then, in the heaven B mode, the transition to the heaven B mode is made (pulled back) at 20%.
In contrast, in the tenth embodiment, after the sub-bonus ends, the game is always shifted to the pull-back zone, and the pull-back lottery for the sub-bonus is performed in the pull-back zone.

In the state before transitioning to the sub-bonus, a lottery for obtaining a predetermined icon (hereinafter simply referred to as "icon") (for example, a treasure chest, shield, spear, etc., imitating the shape of something) is executed. An icon acquisition lottery is executed in each game with a winning probability corresponding to a winning number (result of winning lottery).
In addition, the player is not notified that the icon acquisition lottery has been executed or even if the icon acquisition lottery is won, before the transition to the sub-bonus. However, it suggests that the icon acquisition lottery was executed or that the icon acquisition lottery was won (the expectation that the icon acquisition lottery was executed or the expectation that the icon acquisition lottery was won It is possible to output a rendition (meaning high).
The number of icons may increase due to the icon acquisition lottery before the transition of the sub-bonus, but the number of icons will not decrease.

Then, when the sub-bonus is started, the number of icons obtained so far is displayed as an image to notify the player. When the number of icons acquired before the transition of the sub-bonus is 4 or less, the initial value of the number of icons at the start of the sub-bonus is set to 5. In other words, the minimum number of icons at the start of the sub-bonus is five. Also, when the number of icons acquired before the transition of the sub-bonus is 6 or more, the initial value of the number of icons at the start of the sub-bonus is set to that number (6 or more).
Also, during the sub-bonus, an icon acquisition lottery is executed according to the winning number. Note that the number of icons will not decrease during the sub-bonus. When an icon is obtained during the sub-bonus, the number of icons displayed may be increased each time. Instead, the player may be notified of the number of icons acquired during the sub-bonus at the end of the sub-bonus.

When the sub-bonus ends, the player moves to the pullback zone except when the ending is reached (when the advantageous section is completed), but after the sub-bonus ends, the player may move to the pullback zone after passing through a predetermined main game state. .
When the pullback zone ends without winning the pullback lottery for the sub-bonus in the pullback zone, the state shifts to the normal state (non-AT and non-CZ). On the other hand, when the pull-back lottery for the sub-bonus is won in the pull-back zone, the game shifts to the sub-bonus. Here, when the sub-bonus pull-back lottery is won in the pull-back zone, the pull-back zone may be ended at that time. Alternatively, even when the sub-bonus pull-back lottery is won in the pull-back zone, the pull-back zone is continued (internally, the pull-back lottery is not executed, but the pull-back lottery is shown to be executed as an effect), The player may be notified of whether or not the pull-back lottery has been won at the end of the performance of the pull-back zone.

Also, an icon is image-displayed in the withdrawal zone. As mentioned above, the minimum number of icons at the start of the withdrawal zone is 5, and the number of icons exceeds 5 when icons are acquired before transitioning to the sub-bonus and during the sub-bonus.
FIG. 160 is a diagram showing changes in the number of icons in the withdrawal zone. In the example of FIG. 160, the number of icons before the first game of the withdrawal zone is "8".
A pull-back lottery in the pull-back zone is executed when the number of icons before the game is "1" or more. When the number of icons is "1" before the game of the pullback zone, the pullback zone ends with the game.
In the withdrawal zone, an effect is executed to reduce the number of icons by "1" from the start of the game (when the start switch 41 is operated) to the time of complete stop (when all the reels 31 are stopped).
As shown in FIG. 160, for example, when the number of icons is "8" before a game is played, a pull-back lottery is performed in the game, and the number of icons becomes "7" when the game is completely stopped.
In this embodiment, pull-back lottery is executed every game in the pull-back zone. In other words, the pull-back lottery is executed regardless of which winning number is won. The winning probability of the pull-back lottery for each winning number is set in advance. For example, when the winning number "1" (replay A) is won, the pull-back lottery is won with a probability of "1/50", and when the winning number "72" (winning prize F) is won, "1/2" ” to determine that you will win the pullback lottery.

Furthermore, in the game where the number of icons changes from "5" to "4", the advantageous section continuation determination is executed at the same time as the pullback lottery.
In the tenth embodiment, the following a) to d) are executed as the advantageous section continuation determination.
a) It is determined whether or not the current game is non-RT (non-internal). When the game is non-RT this time, it is determined to continue the advantageous section.
b) It is determined whether the value of the progress counter is less than "2500".
Here, the "progress counter" is the game (in other words, the number of games in the advantageous interval) excluding the irregularly pushed game (the game played with the SP flag described later at "0") among the games in the advantageous interval. Of these, the counter counts the number of games played with the SP flag set to "1", which will be described later.

The progress counter is an increment counter which is set to an initial value of "1" at the start of the advantageous section and adds "1" when the game is played with the SP flag being "1".
Then, when the progress counter is less than "2500 (D)", it is determined to continue the advantageous section. Here, in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of times of playing the advantageous section is "4000". Therefore, when the progress counter is "2500" or more, even if the advantageous section is continued from that time point, the remaining number of games is less than "1500", and a sufficient number of games cannot be secured in the subsequent advantageous section. Therefore, when the progress counter is "2500" or more, the advantageous section is not continued.
Further, for example, in the case of a medal-less gaming machine (also referred to as "smart slot", "smart pachislot", or "sumasuslot") in the ninth embodiment, there is a specification that does not have an upper limit number of games in an advantageous section. . In such a case, the progress counter becomes unnecessary, and the advantageous section continuation determination based on the value of the progress counter is not executed.

c) When the difference counter is equal to or greater than "2915 (D)", it is determined that the advantageous section is to be continued.
The difference number counter in the tenth embodiment is the same as the difference number counter in the first embodiment. To explain again, the difference number counter in the tenth embodiment counts the difference number when the start time of the advantageous section is set to "0" (in other words, it is not the "MY counter"). Therefore, when the difference number becomes a negative value during the advantageous section, the negative value is counted. Note that the difference number counter does not count the difference number during the normal section.
Further, the difference number counter is set to "2415 (D)" as an initial value at the start of the advantageous section, and when the difference number of the current game is negative, the difference number is added to the difference number counter, A method of subtracting the difference number from a difference number counter when the difference number is positive can be used.

For example, after setting "2415" at the start of the advantageous section, when the difference number in the first game of the advantageous section is "-3" (bet number "3", payout number "0"), the difference counter Add "3" to update the difference number counter to "2418". On the other hand, when the difference number in the first game of the advantageous section is "+11" (the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "14"), "11" is subtracted from the difference counter and the difference counter is reset. Update to "2404".
When the difference number counter becomes less than "15", it is determined that the difference number in the advantageous section exceeds "2400", and the advantageous section ends.
The reason why the advantageous section is determined to continue when the difference counter is "2915" or more is that the player keeps "2900" as the difference number until the difference counter becomes "0". This is because it is possible to obtain enough medals. In other words, when the number of differences that can be obtained in the advantageous section is small (when the conditions for ending the advantageous section are approaching), the advantageous section is terminated, so the expectation (sub It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a sufficient difference can be obtained with the bonus.
However, the above value of "2915" is an example, and may be more or less than "2915".
In addition, the number of differences in the advantageous section does not exceed "2400". ”.

d) If the lottery for continuation of the advantageous section is won, it will be determined that the advantageous section will be continued. In the advantageous section continuation lottery, a lottery is executed so as to win with a preset probability, for example, a probability of 25%, and when the lottery is won, it is determined that the advantageous section is continued.

In the game in which the number of icons is changed from "5" to "4", the advantageous section continuation determination as described above is executed. Then, when it is determined to continue the advantageous section, the next game remains the advantageous section, but when it is not determined to continue the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends in the game this time, and the normal section in the next game ( non-advantageous section).
FIG. 160 shows the number of remaining games in the pullback zone both when the advantageous interval continues and when the advantageous interval ends after the game in which the number of icons changes from "5" to "4".
When the advantageous interval continues, the remaining number of games in the withdrawal zone before the start of the next game of the game for which the advantageous interval continuation determination is executed is "4", and when the game is completely stopped, the remaining number of games in the withdrawal zone is "3". ”. In this way, when the final game of the withdrawal zone is reached, the remaining number of games in the withdrawal zone before the start of the game becomes "1", and when the game is completely stopped, the remaining number of games in the withdrawal zone becomes "0". . When the number of remaining games in the pullback zone becomes "0", the pullback zone ends with the relevant game, and the next game is a normal state (non-AT and non-CZ) game.

In addition, when the pull-back lottery is won in any of the games in the pull-back zone, the player is notified that the pull-back lottery has been won in the game or the next game of the game, and then the sub-bonus is started. do.
Furthermore, in the pull-back zone, when the pull-back lottery is won when the number of games remaining in the pull-back zone is "1" or more, the player is notified that the pull-back lottery has been won, the pull-back zone is terminated, and the sub- You can move to bonus.
Alternatively, when the pull-back lottery is won when the number of remaining games in the pull-back zone is "1" or more, the pull-back lottery is not performed internally, but the player is notified that the pull-back lottery has been won at that time. , the effect (fake) pullback zone is continued until the game where the number of icons becomes "0", and the pullback lottery is won in the game where the number of icons becomes "0" or the next game. Players may be notified.
If the number of icons (remaining number of games in the withdrawal zone) is "6" or more and you win the withdrawal lottery, at the start of the sub-bonus, the remaining number of games in the withdrawal zone (value of "6" or more) take over.
On the other hand, when the pull-back lottery is won when the number of icons (remaining number of games in the pull-back zone) is "5" or less, the remaining number of games in the pull-back zone is set to "5" at the start of the sub-bonus.

On the other hand, when it is determined not to continue the advantageous section as a result of the advantageous section continuation determination in the game where the number of icons is changed from "5" to "4"("*1" in FIG. 160), the next game is a normal section (non-advantageous section). However, in terms of production, the same state as the pullback zone up to that point is maintained.
However, when transitioning from the advantageous section to the normal section, as will be described later, in the RWM 53, all data affecting the performance related to the instruction function are cleared. cleared. Therefore, before the start of the next game (normal section), the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone is "0"("*2" in FIG. 160). In this case, since the game section is the normal section, the main game state is not the withdrawal zone. However, in terms of presentation, the same state as the pullback zone is maintained so that the player does not know that the zone has shifted to the normal section. Note that the number of icons on the image display before the start of the first game in the normal section is "4".
Furthermore, in the first game of this normal section, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a pullback lottery is executed (“*5” in FIG. 160).
Here, "when a predetermined condition is satisfied" means that
a) The transition to the advantageous section has been decided in the normal section (the next game is the advantageous section)
b) This is a case where both of the following conditions are satisfied: winning a winning number other than winning number “1” (replay A). If these conditions are met, a pullback lottery is executed.

Here, "the transition to the advantageous section is not determined in the normal section" is the winning number "2" (replay B) or the winning numbers "60" to "71" ( This is the time of winning the prizes E1 to E12). Otherwise, the transition to the advantageous section is decided.
Then, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, the main game state becomes the "transition preparation state", and the next game becomes the first game in the advantageous section.
On the other hand, when the transition to the advantageous section is not determined in the normal section, the next game will also be the normal section.
Further, when replay A is won in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is determined, but the pullback lottery is not executed. In this case, the main game state becomes the "transition preparation state" in the same manner as described above, and the next game becomes the first game in the advantageous section.

As described above, when it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section and when a winning number other than the winning number "1" (replay A) is won, a pullback lottery is executed. Also, the number of icons on the image display changes from "4" before the game to "3" when the game is completely stopped. Further, the remaining number of games in the withdrawal zone before the start of the game is "0", but when the game is completely stopped, "3" is set as the remaining number of games in the withdrawal zone ("*3" in FIG. 160). .
Also, in the normal section, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, but when the winning number "1" (replay A) is won, the withdrawal lottery is not executed. However, on the image display, an effect as if a pullback lottery was executed is output (the same effect as when winning a winning number other than the winning number "1" is output), and the number of icons on the image display is It changes from "4" before the game to "3" when the game is completely stopped.
Furthermore, if the winning number "2" or "60" to "71" is won in the normal section and the transition to the advantageous section is not decided (if it is the normal section of the next game), the image display outputs an effect indicating that the pullback lottery has not been executed, and does not decrease the number of icons. Therefore, in this case, even in the next game (normal section), the number of icons before the game is "4", and the above-described processing in the normal section is executed again.

When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, the next game becomes the advantageous section (the main game state is "transition preparation state").
Here, the example of FIG. 160 shows an example in which the transition to the advantageous section is determined in the first game of the normal section. When the transition to the advantageous section is determined in the normal section, as described above, when the game is completely stopped, "3" is set as the remaining number of games in the pullback zone. The number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone is "3"("*4" in FIG. 160).
However, not limited to the above, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone when the game is completely stopped remains "0", and the next game (1 in the advantageous section "3" may be set as the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone before the start of the game item). Alternatively, the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone may be set to "2" at the start of the first game in the advantageous section, and the remaining number of games in the withdrawal zone may not be subtracted when the game is completely stopped.
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, and when it shifts to the advantageous section, the number of icons in the game (the first game of the advantageous section) is set to "3" in the same way as when the advantageous section continues in the determination of the continuation of the advantageous section. ” to “2” (the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone changes from “3” to “2”). Furthermore, in the next game, the number of icons will change from "2" to "1" (the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone will change from "2" to "1"), and in the next game, the number of icons will change from "1" to "0". (the number of remaining games in the pullback zone changes from "1" to "0"), and the pullback zone ends. Once the pullback zone is over, transition to normal state (non-AT and non-CZ).
As described above, in the pullback zone, the number of icons and the number of remaining games in the pullback zone are the same, except for the normal section.
Even if the advantageous section ends during the pullback zone and shifts to the normal section, the effect of the pullback zone continues to be executed (in other words, the pullback zone is temporarily terminated internally, but , the withdrawal zone is continued in terms of production), so it is possible to perform a production that does not feel uncomfortable at the break between the advantageous section and the next advantageous section (the end of the advantageous section, the transition to the normal section, and the normal section) It is possible to make it impossible to know that the section has moved to the advantageous section.)
Also, when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section, the data related to the advantageous section of the RWM 53 is initialized (the data related to the advantageous section does not remain), but the normal section and the advantageous section transitioning from the normal section However, pull-back lotteries can be performed for the number of icons displayed as images.

Also, when the difference in the advantageous section exceeds "+2400" during the sub-bonus (when the advantageous section is completed), the lottery for the sub-bonus is as follows.
First, when it is confirmed that the difference number of the advantageous section exceeds "+2400" during the sub-bonus, the main game state becomes the sub-bonus (ED), and the ending effect is output at a predetermined timing. The ending production continues until the end of the sub-bonus. Also, in this ending effect, icons are not displayed as images. Then, when the difference number exceeds "+2400" (satisfying the termination condition of the advantageous section) and the sub-bonus ends, the next game becomes the normal section. At the end of the sub-bonus, the data of the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone is also cleared by the initialization processing of the RWM 53 . Therefore, after the sub-bonus ends, the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone is "0" in the normal section, which is the next game.

After completing the sub-bonus (after the ending effect), an effect different from the effect of the withdrawal zone (for example, an effect suggesting that the expectation of winning the sub-bonus is high; hereinafter referred to as "predetermined effect") is output. do. After the sub-bonus is completed, a predetermined effect different from the effect of the pullback zone is output to increase the variation of the effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.
However, even in a game with a predetermined effect after completing the sub-bonus and shifting to the normal section, the same pull-back lottery for the sub-bonus as the game after finishing the advantageous section in the pull-back zone and shifting to the normal section is executed. be. Therefore, the winning probability of the pullback lottery in the game of the predetermined effect is the same as the winning probability of the pullback lottery after the advantageous section ends in the pullback zone and the transition to the normal section.
Specifically, in the normal section game (the first game of the predetermined effect) after completing the sub-bonus, the transition to the advantageous section is determined in the same manner as in the normal section game during the pullback zone effect. And, when a winning number other than the winning number "1" (replay A) is won, a sub-bonus withdrawal lottery is executed. In this case, the number of remaining games (corresponding to the number of games in the withdrawal zone) of the game with the predetermined effect changes from "4" to "3". Then, the next game is the first game in the advantageous section (transition preparation state).
Further, when the winning number "1" (replay A) is won even though the transition to the advantageous section is decided, the pullback lottery is not executed. However, the number of remaining games of the game with the predetermined effect is changed from "4" to "3". Then, the next game is the first game in the advantageous section (transition preparation state).
On the other hand, when it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, the remaining number of games of the game with the predetermined effect remains "4", the next game will also be the normal section, and the above-mentioned lottery for the normal section will be repeated. be
When the game with the predetermined effect shifts to the advantageous section, the pull-back lottery is executed until the number of remaining games of the game with the predetermined effect becomes "0".

After completing the sub-bonus (after the ending effect), instead of shifting to a game with a predetermined effect, it shifts to a game that outputs the above-described pullback zone effect, and during the "4" game, a pullback lottery is performed. may be executed. In this case, in the normal section after completing the sub-bonus, the effect of the withdrawal zone is output, and "4" icons are displayed. Therefore, in FIG. 160, the determination of continuation of the advantageous section is the same as when the advantageous section ends.

Furthermore, there is a case where the pull-back lottery is executed even in the game after the setting change (first thing in the morning).
The game section after the setting change (first thing in the morning) is a normal section and is not in the middle of the day.
Therefore, in the first game in the normal section after the setting change (first thing in the morning), the same processing as in the above-described normal section is executed. That is, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the game and when a winning number other than the winning number "1" is won, a pull-back lottery is executed. Then, the next game becomes the first game (transition preparation state) of the advantageous section.
Further, in the game, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, but when the winning number "1" is won, the pull-back lottery is not executed. Then, the next game becomes the first game (transition preparation state) of the advantageous section.

Furthermore, when the transition to the advantageous section is not determined in the game, the next game will also be the normal section, and the above-described processing in the normal section will be repeated.
Further, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, and when the transition to the advantageous section is made, it is judged whether or not the player is inside the game in the first game of the advantageous section. When the first game in the advantageous section is inside, the number of remaining games in the pullback zone is set to "3", and as in the example of FIG. When the pull-back lottery is won on the way, the pull-back lottery is executed until the relevant game).
On the other hand, when the first game in the advantageous section is not inside, the state shifts to the normal state. That is, the number of remaining games in the pullback zone is not set, and the pullback lottery is not executed.
Therefore, after changing the setting (first thing in the morning), if you win 1BB in the game before moving to the advantageous section, the pull-back lottery will be executed in the subsequent advantageous section, but when you shift to the advantageous section without winning 1BB , the pullback lottery is not executed. Note that the pullback lottery is not executed not only after the setting change (first thing in the morning), but also when moving to the advantageous section while not inside.

In the pullback lottery described above, the pullback lottery in the advantageous section is executed for all winning numbers as described above. Specifically, it is determined that even the game with the winning number “1” (replay A win) wins the pullback lottery with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, the pull-back lottery in the normal section is executed when a winning number other than "1" is obtained as described above and a shift to the advantageous section is determined.
Therefore, assuming that the pull-back lottery winning probability assigned to each winning number is the same, the pull-back lottery winning probability in the normal section is higher than the pull-back lottery winning probability in the advantageous section. The winning probability is lowered by the winning probability assigned to the number "1". However, not limited to this, the winning probability of the pullback lottery for each winning number may be different between the normal section and the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in the pull-back lottery in the normal section, the pull-back lottery may also be executed when the winning number "1" is won. However, if the winning probability of the pullback lottery is the same in the advantageous section and the normal section, the ball payout rate will be high. lower than the odds of winning. Specifically, in order to lower the winning probability of the pullback lottery in the normal section, the pullback lottery is not executed when the winning number "1" is won. However, the probability of winning the pullback lottery when the pullback lottery is executed in the normal section is the same as the winning probability of the pullback lottery in the advantageous section.
The probability of winning the winning number “1” is about “1/7.3” because the number is “8943” as shown in FIGS. 13 and 15 .
As described above, even if the winning number "1" is won in the pull-back lottery in the normal section, even if the pull-back lottery is executed, it is not decided to move to the advantageous section in the game. Since the pullback lottery is not executed in , strictly speaking, the probability of winning the pullback lottery in the normal section is lower than the winning probability of the pullback lottery in the advantageous section.
However, if the pull-back lottery is executed even when the winning number "1" is won in the pull-back lottery in the normal section, the probability of winning the pull-back lottery and the advantageous section when the transition to the advantageous section is decided in the normal section Since the winning probability of the pull-back lottery is the same as the winning probability of the pull-back lottery in the normal section, the winning probability of the pulling-back lottery in the normal section can be made substantially the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged even when the game shifts to the normal section during the withdrawal zone.

Further, after the sub-bonus is finished, an output for prevention of immersion is performed at a predetermined timing.
Here, "output to prevent addiction" means, for example, displaying an image on the image display device 23, such as "Pachinko/pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. Beware of addiction." In addition, not only the image display, but also voice output such as "Pachinko/Pachislot is a game to be enjoyed moderately. Be careful not to get addicted to it." Only image display, only sound, both image display and sound may be performed, but it is understood that it is preferable to perform at least image display.
Furthermore, an output for prevention of immersion is generally executed when a predetermined number or more of medals have been paid out.

In this embodiment, after the sub-bonus ends, the sub-bonus is shifted to the pull-back zone, and the sub-bonus is restarted when winning the pull-back lottery in the pull-back zone. For this reason, for example, after executing the addiction prevention output after the end of the sub-bonus, if the pull-back lottery is won in the withdrawal zone and the sub-bonus is started again, the addiction prevention output is executed and the sub-bonus starts immediately. may be
Therefore, in this embodiment, after the end of the sub-bonus, the addiction prevention is not output, and after the end of the pullback zone (when the number of icons becomes "0" and the number of remaining pullback games becomes "0"), pullback is performed. Output addiction prevention along with the end screen of the zone.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to output an immersion prevention display together with the sub-bonus end screen when the sub-bonus ends.

Next, the flow of pullback lottery processing will be described based on a flowchart.
FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing the pullback lottery process for the pullback zone. This process is executed when the number of icons before the game is "8" to "5", "3" (if the advantageous section is continued), or "2" to "1" in FIG. .
Since the processing in FIG. 161 is processing in the pullback zone, the number of remaining games in the pullback zone before the game is "1" or more. In addition, since the withdrawal lottery process is performed based on the winning combination lottery result, it is at the start of the game and after the winning combination lottery.
In step S701, the main control board 50 executes a pull-back lottery based on the winning combination lottery result. Next, proceeding to step S702, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone. The number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone is stored in a predetermined area (address) of the RWM 53 .

Next, proceeding to step S703, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pullback lottery in step S701 has been won. If it is determined that the prize has not been won, the process proceeds to step S704, and if it is determined that the prize has been won, the process proceeds to step S708.
When it is determined that the pullback lottery has not been won and the process proceeds to step S704, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the number of remaining games in the pullback zone is "4". When it is determined that the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone is "4", the process proceeds to step S705, and when it is determined not to be "4", the process proceeds to step S706.
In step S705, the main control board 50 determines whether or not to continue the advantageous section. This process is the process shown in FIG. 162, which will be described later. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S704 that the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone is not "4" and the process proceeds to step S706, the main control board 50 determines whether the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone is "0". . When it is determined that the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone is not "0", the processing according to this flow chart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remaining games in the pullback zone is "0", the process proceeds to step S707, the main control board 50 changes the main game state from the pullback zone to non-AT (and non-CZ), and the present flowchart. end the processing by Data relating to the main game state are stored in a predetermined area (address) of the RWM 53 .
Further, when it is determined in step S703 that the pullback lottery has been won and the process proceeds to step S708, the main control board 50 turns on the sub-bonus shift flag. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
It should be noted that when the sub-bonus shift flag is turned on in step S708, it shifts to a pseudo-game through the processing of FIG. 169, which will be described later.

FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section continuation determination in step S705 of FIG.
First, in step S721, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the current game is non-RT (non-internal). When it is determined that it is non-RT, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that it is not non-RT, the process proceeds to step S722.
At step S722, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the progress counter is less than "2500". When the progress counter is less than "2500", the processing according to this flow chart is ended, and when it is not less than "2500", the process proceeds to step S723.
At step S723, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference number counter is less than "2915". When the difference number counter is less than "2915", the process proceeds to step S724, and when it is not less than "2915", the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In step S724, the main control board 50 executes an advantageous section continuation lottery. As described above, it is determined that the probability of winning is, for example, 25%. Then, when it is determined that the advantageous section continuation lottery has been won, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the winning has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S726.
In step S726, the main control board 50 controls to end the advantageous section. Specifically, "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
The advantageous interval clear counter stores a predetermined value ("4000 (D)" in this embodiment) at the start of the advantageous interval, and subtracts "1" at the end of each game. When it is determined that the value after the subtraction of "1" is "0", it is determined that the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are satisfied, and the advantageous interval ending process (the predetermined range initialization process of the RWM 53) is executed.

As described above, the advantageous section continuation judgment is
a) Not non-RT b) The progress counter is not less than "2500" c) The difference counter is less than "2915" d) Not winning the continuation lottery for the advantageous section It is determined that the section is not continued (end).
The progress counter threshold "2500" and the difference counter threshold "2915" are examples, and are not limited to these values, and various settings can be made according to the specifications of the gaming machine.
Further, the advantageous section continuation lottery in step S724 may be executed as in the present embodiment, but it is also possible not to execute it.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing pullback lottery processing in the normal section.
As shown in FIG. 160, in a game where the number of remaining games in the pullback zone is changed from "5" to "4", the advantageous interval continuation determination is performed as described above, and when it is decided to end the advantageous interval, the next game is executed. The game becomes a normal section, and this process is executed.
In addition, when the advantageous section is completed by the number of differences in the advantageous section exceeding "+2400" during the sub-bonus and the normal section starts from the next game, this process is executed in the normal section.
Furthermore, in the normal section after the setting change (first thing in the morning), this process is executed.

First, in step S741, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the current game.
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, when it is inside, except when winning number "2" (replay B) and winning numbers "60" to "71" (winning prize E1 to winning prize E12) , decide to move to the advantageous section.
Here, after the sub-bonus ends, when it is determined that the advantageous section will end in the advantageous section continuation judgment and shifts to the normal section, or when the advantageous section is completed (satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section) and shifts to the normal section At that time, it can be said that it is almost inside. The winning number of 1BB when it is not inside is "7564" (the winning probability is about "1/8.7") as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, so without winning 1BB ( This is because it is rare to finish the sub-bonus or complete the advantageous section while remaining non-internal.
In addition, in the first embodiment, it is not decided to move to the advantageous section when winning the winning numbers "60" to "71" in the internal mode, but it is decided to move to the advantageous section as in the non-internal mode. may
Also, as shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, in the case of a non-internal normal section after the setting change (first thing in the morning), except when the winning number "2" (replay B) is won, the advantageous section Decide to move.

If it is decided in step S741 to shift to the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S742, and if it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the processing according to this flowchart ends. In addition, when it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, that is, when the next game is also in the normal section, the next game is also executed in this process.
In step S742, the main control board 50 determines whether or not replay A (winning number "1") has been won. When it is determined that replay A has been won, the process proceeds to step S745, and when it is determined that replay A has not been won, the process proceeds to step S743.
In step S743, the main control board 50 executes a pullback lottery. Then, in the next step S744, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pullback lottery has been won. When it is determined that the pullback lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S745, and when it is determined that the pullback lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S746.

At step S745, the main control board 50 changes the main game state to the transition preparation state. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. That is, when it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the main game state is changed from the normal section to the advantageous section preparation state regardless of the combination lottery result or pullback lottery result.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S744 that the pullback lottery has been won and the process proceeds to step S746, the main control board 50 turns on the sub-bonus shift flag and ends the processing according to this flowchart.

FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing pull-back lottery processing in the transition preparation state. When proceeding to step S745 in FIG. 163, this process is executed in the next game.
In step S761, the main control board 50 determines whether it is inside. In addition, in the first game of the advantageous section after the setting change (first thing in the morning), there is a case where the game is not inside, and in this case, it is determined that the game is not inside at step S761. On the other hand, it can be said that the player is almost inside when the transition preparation state is reached after the sub-bonus ends. Therefore, in this case, it is judged to be inside.
When it is judged that the inside is inside in step S761, the process proceeds to step S763, and when it is judged that the inside is not inside, the process proceeds to step S762.

In step S762, the main control board 50 changes the main game state from the shift preparation state to the normal state (non-AT and non-CZ). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the game is inside in step S761 and the process proceeds to step S763, the main control board 50 sets the remaining number of games in the withdrawal zone to "3". As a result, as shown in FIG. 160, the number of games remaining in the pullback zone before the game after the end of the advantageous section is "3", which coincides with the number of icons "3"("*4" in FIG. 160). .
Then, in the next step S764, the main control board 50 executes a pullback lottery. In the next step S765, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone. Therefore, the number of remaining games in the pullback zone at this point is "2".
At the next step S766, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pullback lottery at step S764 has been won. When it is determined that the pullback lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S767, and when it is determined that the pullback lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S768.

At step S767, the main control board 50 changes the main game state from the transition preparation state to the withdrawal zone. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the pullback lottery has been won and the process proceeds to step S768, the main control board 50 turns on the sub-bonus shift flag. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In the pulling-back lottery process in the transition preparation state, when the number of remaining games in the pulling-back zone becomes "2" after the end of this process and the main game state becomes the pulling-back zone in step S767, the process of FIG. 161 is executed for the next game. be.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing advantageous section clear counter management processing.
As shown in FIG. 67 (second embodiment), a game end check process is performed in step S301 in the main process executed for each game. As one of the game end check processes, the advantageous zone clear counter management process of FIG. 165 is executed.
In FIG. 165, in step S781, the main control board 50 subtracts "1" from the advantageous section clear counter. Next, proceeding to step S782, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction (before the process of step S781) is "0". If it is determined that the value before subtraction is "0", the process proceeds to step S783, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S786. It should be noted that the advantageous section clear counter before the subtraction is "0" corresponds to the non-advantageous section (normal section).

At step S783, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the main game state number is "0". In this embodiment, the main game state is set to "0" in the normal section, and the main game state number is set to "1" or more in the advantageous section. For example, when a lottery is held in the normal section and the winning number that determines the transition to the advantageous section is won, the main game state number is a predetermined number from "0" to "1" or more before the processing of step S783. can be rewritten to Therefore, the determination of "Yes" in step S782 and "No" in step S783 is when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is determined in the current game.

When it is determined that the main game state number is not "0" in step S783, the process proceeds to step S784, and when it is determined that the main game state number is "0" time) terminates the processing according to this flow chart.
In step S784, the main control board 50 stores "4000" in the advantageous section clear counter. The advantageous interval clear counter is decremented by "1" in step S781 every game, and when it becomes "0" after the subtraction, it is determined that the advantageous interval end condition is satisfied.
Next, proceeding to step S785, the main control board 50 stores "2415" in the difference number counter, and ends the processing according to this flowchart.
As described above, when the difference number of the game is "+x", "x" is subtracted from the difference counter, and when the difference number of the game is "-y", the difference counter is set to "y" is added. Then, when the difference counter becomes less than "15", it is determined that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (step S790, which will be described later).

When it is determined in step S782 that the advantageous section clear counter is not "0" before subtraction and the process proceeds to step S786, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the advantageous section clear counter before subtraction is "1". do. If it is determined to be "1" before subtraction, the process proceeds to step S791, and if it is determined not to be "1", the process proceeds to step S787.
At step S787, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a replay pattern (replay) is displayed in the current game. This is because the difference counter is not updated when the replay operation pattern is displayed. When it is determined that the replay operation symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S790, and when it is determined that the regame operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S788.
At step S788, the main control board 50 subtracts the number of payouts from the difference number counter. In the next step S789, the main control board 50 adds a prescribed number (bet number) to the difference number counter.
In the next step S790, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the difference counter is less than "15". When it is determined that the difference counter is less than "15", the process proceeds to step S791, and when it is determined that it is not less than "15", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S791, the main control board 50 saves "0" in (storage areas of) all RWMs 53 that affect performance related to instruction generation (clear processing). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

All the storage areas of the RWM 53 that affect the performance related to instruction generation include, specifically, an advantageous section type flag ("_NB_ADV_KND" in FIG. 54), an advantageous section clear counter, a difference number counter, and a progress counter. , the main game state number, the number of remaining games in the withdrawal zone, and the sub-bonus shift flag.
In addition, storage areas related to sub-bonus (AT), such as AT flag ("_FL_AT_KND" in FIG. 54), AT game number counter ("_CT_ART" in FIG. 54), and the like.
Furthermore, if a section indicator (in FIG. 58, an advantageous section display LED 77 constituted by a segment P of digit 4) is provided, an advantageous section LED display flag (in FIG. 54, "_FL_ADV_LED").

As described above, when it is determined not to continue the advantageous interval in the advantageous interval continuation determination of FIG. 162, "1" is stored in the advantageous interval clear counter in step S726. In this case, since it is determined in step S786 in FIG. 165 that the advantageous section clear counter is "1" before subtraction, the process proceeds to step S791 and the RWM 53 is cleared. Therefore, the next game will be the normal section.

Next, display of recommended images in the tenth embodiment will be described.
In the tenth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 94, etc.), a recommended image (an image that informs the player that the forward push is the advantageous push order (recommended push order) for the player under a predetermined condition) ).
The display conditions for the recommended images are as follows.
(1) A recommended image is displayed at the time of irregular pressing (when the stop switch 42 operated first is the middle or right stop switch 42).
(2) The recommended image is displayed in the game in the advantageous section, and is not displayed in the game in the normal section (even if it is pressed irregularly).
(3) Recommended images are displayed in games other than sub-bonuses, and are not displayed in games during sub-bonuses.
For example, when the correct pressing order in which the first stop is left is reported during the sub-bonus, even if the first stop is middle or right (irregular pressing) due to an operation error of the player, the recommended image is displayed. do not.
In addition, even if irregular pressing is performed in a game in which the correct pressing order is not notified during the sub-bonus (for example, when winning a replay), the recommended image is not displayed.
Furthermore, for example, in the CZ (including the pullback zone), when the correct pressing order is displayed when the pressing order bell is won, the recommended image is not displayed even if the irregular pressing is performed in the game. Here, for example, when the winning numbers "40" to "47" (winning prize C, pressing order correct left) were won, the first stop on the left was announced as the correct pressing order, but the first stop was changed to the middle due to a player's operation error. Or even if it is on the right, the recommended image is not displayed.
On the other hand, during the CZ (including the pullback zone), if an irregular push is made in a game in which the correct push order is not displayed, the recommended image may or may not be displayed.

(4) The recommended image can be displayed in the games of the winning numbers "8" to "71" (winning A to winning E) when the bell is won in the pressing order. However, the recommended image may be displayed only for the winning numbers "8" to "39" (winning A and winning B) that allow a high-level bell to be won in irregular pressing. Alternatively, on the contrary, the recommended image may be displayed regardless of the winning number. Furthermore, although not provided in this embodiment, the recommended image may be displayed even when the winning combination is not won.
(5) If it is a predetermined game in the advantageous section (a game during a sub-bonus or a game other than a sub-bonus and a game other than the game in which the correct pushing order was notified), regardless of the winning lottery result, irregular A recommended image may be displayed when pressed.
(6) The specified number in the tenth embodiment is limited to "3" as in the first embodiment. However, for example, in the case of a specification in which a game can be played with either the prescribed number of "2" or "3" and it is more advantageous for the player to play the game with the prescribed number of "3", the prescribed number of "3" A recommended image can be displayed when a game is played, and the recommended image is not displayed when a game is played with the specified number "2".

(7) The recommended image display start timing is when the first stop switch 42 (middle or right stop switch 42) is operated. The recommended image is displayed on the entire surface of the image display device 23 . Therefore, during the display of the recommended image, the effect image during the game cannot be seen. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the recommended image may be displayed only in a part of the image display area of the image display device 23 so that part of the effect image can be seen.
Furthermore, the display end timing of the recommended image is when the start switch 41 is operated in the next game, and the display of the recommended image does not end when betting in the next game (when the bet switch 40 is operated or medals are inserted). . In this way, even if there is a discrepancy between the performance display and the internally managed data due to the irregular pressing, the discrepancy can be hidden with the recommended image. Specifically, for example, when the number of games up to the ceiling is displayed as an image, if the number of games up to the ceiling is not updated when an irregular push is performed, the number of games displayed as an image by the irregular push and the internal game There is a discrepancy between the number of times However, if the recommended image is displayed from the time of the first stop to the time of operating the start switch 41 of the next game, it is possible to obscure the fact that the number of games up to the ceiling is not updated. In addition to this, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, for example, contradictions in rendering can be hidden by recommended images.
However, if a predetermined command relating to effects is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 at the time of betting, the display of the recommended image may be ended at the time of betting. In particular, when a bet command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 and the game image is switched with the bet as a trigger, the display of the recommended image may be terminated at the time of the bet (however, the recommended image may simply be displayed on the front layer of the game image). (This does not include the case of erasing the demonstration image.)

In addition, from the complete stop (when the payout process is completed if there is payout of medals), betting (effective operation of the bet switch 40 and insertion of medals) and button operation to display the menu screen are performed. A demonstration image is displayed when a predetermined time elapses without execution.
Then, under the condition that the recommended image is not displayed, the demonstration image is displayed after "30" seconds have passed since the complete stop.
On the other hand, under the condition that the recommended image is displayed, the demonstration image is displayed after "4" seconds have elapsed from the complete stop.
The reason why the display of the demonstration image is started early in the situation where the recommended image is displayed is as follows.
For example, even if the player presses irregularly in the last game and ends the game while the recommended image is displayed, the demonstration image is displayed after "4" seconds (the display of the recommended image ends). Therefore, when other players look at the gaming machine, the demonstration image is displayed and the recommended image is not displayed. can be

Also, the demonstration image is displayed at the end of the settlement process regardless of the elapsed time from the full stop. This is performed regardless of whether or not the recommended image is displayed during the full stop. However, under conditions where the recommended image is not displayed, during continuous effects, during sub-bonus, during CZ, etc. There is a case where the demonstration image is not displayed even after the processing is finished.
Here, when the number of credits is small, the settlement process is completed within "4" seconds from when the settlement switch 43 is operated. Therefore, when the settlement switch 43 is operated immediately after the complete stoppage, the settlement processing is completed before "4" seconds elapse from the complete stoppage. In this case, the demonstration image is displayed at the end of the settlement process even before "4" seconds have elapsed since the vehicle stopped completely. After that, even if "4" seconds have passed since the complete stop, no processing for newly starting the display of the demonstration image is performed.
On the other hand, when "4" seconds have elapsed since the vehicle stopped completely, the settlement process may be in progress. In this case, the demonstration image is displayed when "4" seconds have elapsed from the full stop even during the settlement process. After that, even if the settlement process is completed, the process of newly starting the display of the demonstration image is not performed.

Furthermore, in the situation where the recommended image is displayed, after the demonstration image is displayed after "4" seconds have passed since the complete stop, the display of the demonstration image is maintained as it is even after "30" seconds have passed since the complete stop. be done. In other words, no processing for newly starting the display of the demonstration image is performed.
Furthermore, in the situation where the recommended image is not displayed, the post-stop payment processing is executed, and after the demonstration image is displayed in less than "30" seconds from the stoppage, after "30" seconds have passed since the stoppage Also, no processing for newly starting the display of the demonstration image is performed.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, even if the timing at which "30" seconds have elapsed since the vehicle stopped is during settlement processing under a situation where the recommended image is not displayed, the demonstration image is not displayed during the settlement processing. Instead, the demonstration image is displayed after the settlement process is completed.

Further, after the recommended image is displayed, when the demonstration image is displayed after "4" seconds have passed since the stoppage, the bet operation (effective operation of the bet switch 40 or insertion of medals) is performed. display of the demonstration image is maintained. Then, when the start switch 41 is operated, the display of the demonstration image ends and the game start image is displayed.
On the other hand, when the demonstration image is displayed after "30" seconds have elapsed since the stoppage without the recommended image being displayed, a bet operation (effective operation of the bet switch 40 or insertion of medals) is performed. When pressed, a game standby image is displayed. Thereafter, when the start switch 41 is operated, the game standby image is shifted to a game start image (effect image).
Here, the "game standby image" corresponds to the image displayed at the end of the previous game.
Also, the "game start image" corresponds to an image corresponding to the effect of the game this time (for example, the effect corresponding to the winning combination lottery result of the game this time).

In addition, after a complete stop, when the menu screen can be displayed (for example, after a predetermined period of time has passed), the recommended image is not displayed and the menu button is operated before the demonstration image is displayed. At times, a menu screen (see FIG. 39) can be displayed.
On the other hand, when the recommended image is displayed, the menu screen is not displayed even if the menu button is operated before the demonstration image is displayed.
Furthermore, after the complete stop, under the condition that the menu screen can be displayed (for example, after a predetermined time has passed), the recommended image is not displayed, and "30" seconds have passed since the complete stop, and the demonstration image is displayed. When the menu button is operated after is displayed, the menu screen can be displayed.
On the other hand, the recommended image is displayed, "4" seconds have passed since the full stop, and after the demonstration image is displayed, the menu screen is not displayed even if the menu button is operated.

Next, the flow of processing for displaying a recommended image and displaying a demonstration image will be described with reference to flowcharts.
166 and 167 are flowcharts showing the flow of demonstration image processing. FIG. 167 is a flowchart following FIG.
In FIG. 166, in step S801, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section and non-AT (non-sub-bonus). In other words, when the current game is in the normal section or during AT (sub-bonus), the recommended image is not displayed. If it is determined that it is an advantageous section and non-AT, the process proceeds to step S802, and if it is determined that it is not an advantageous section and non-AT, the process proceeds to step S822 (FIG. 167).

In the next step S802, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the winning order of pressing the bell has been won in the game this time. In this process, the recommended image is displayed on the condition that the player wins the pressing order bell. However, it is not limited to this, and as described above, it is also possible to display a recommended image regardless of the combination lottery result (winning number). In this case, the process of step S802 is unnecessary.
If it is determined in step S802 that the pressing order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S803, and if it is determined that the pressing order bell has not been won, the process proceeds to step S822.
In step S803, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pressing order notification (navigation) has been executed. For example, even if the AT is not in progress, the recommended image is not displayed when the pushing order notification is executed during the CZ. If it is determined that the pressing order notification has been performed, the process proceeds to step S822, and if it is determined that the pressing order notification has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S804.
In the next step S804, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is irregular pressing (first stop is middle or right). If it is determined that it is an irregular push, the process proceeds to step S805, and if it is determined that it is not an irregular press, the process proceeds to step S822.

At step S805, the sub-control board 80 displays a recommended image. In the next step S806, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and when it determines that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S807. At step S807, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated. When it is determined that the adjustment switch 43 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S808, and when it is determined that the adjustment switch 43 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S816.
In step S808, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated while the player is on the bed. Therefore, it does not include the case where the bet is only made or the case where the start switch 41 is operated without being bet. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated while the bet is placed, the process proceeds to step S813, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated while the bet is placed, the process proceeds to step S809. When the main control board 50 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated while the player is on the bed, the main control board 50 transmits the command to the sub-control board 80 .

In step S809, it is determined whether or not "4" seconds have elapsed since the vehicle stopped completely. Note that this determination may be made by either the main control board 50 or the sub-control board 80 (the same applies to the determination as to whether or not "4" seconds have elapsed, as described below). For example, when the sub-control board 80 determines, it receives the command from the main control board 50 at the time of full stop, and starts timer measurement after receiving the command. When it is determined that "4" seconds have not elapsed, the process returns to step S807, and when it is determined that "4" seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S810. When the main control board 50 determines whether or not "4" seconds have passed, the command is sent to the sub-control board 80 when the main control board 50 determines that "4" seconds have passed. .

At step S810, the sub-control board 80 displays a demonstration image. Then, proceeding to step S811, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated. When it is determined that the settlement switch 43 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S812, and the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated while the player is on the bed. When it is determined in step S812 that the start switch 41 has not been operated in the bet state, the process returns to step S811, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated in the bet state, the process proceeds to step S813. At step S813, the sub-control board 80 terminates the display of the demonstration image and displays the game start image. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

On the other hand, when determining that the settlement switch 43 has been operated in step S811 and proceeding to step S814, the main control board 50 starts settlement processing. Then, in the next step S815, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement process has ended, and when it is determined that the settlement process has ended, the process according to this flowchart ends. After the demonstration image is displayed in step S810, the display of the demonstration image is maintained even if the settlement process ends in step S815.
Also, as described above, when the demonstration image is displayed (step S810 or S821) after the recommended image is displayed (step S805), the menu screen is not displayed even if the menu button is operated. If the demonstration image is displayed after displaying the recommended image, the operation of the menu button is disabled.

Further, when it is determined in step S807 that the settlement switch 43 has been operated and the process proceeds to step S816, the main control board 50 starts settlement processing. The process then advances to step S817 to determine whether or not "4" seconds have elapsed. When it is determined that "4" seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S818, and when it is determined that "4" seconds have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S819. At step S818, the sub-control board 80 displays a demonstration image. Then, the process proceeds to step S819. In step S819, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement process has ended. When it is determined that the settlement process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S820, and when it is determined that the settlement process has not been completed, the process returns to step S817.

In step S820, the sub-control board 80 determines whether or not the demonstration image is being displayed. When it is determined that the demonstration image is being displayed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the demonstration image is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S821, and the sub-control board 80 displays the demonstration image. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
In the above, if the demonstration image is not displayed at the end of the settlement process, the demonstration image is displayed upon completion of the settlement process.
On the other hand, when "4" seconds have elapsed after the start of the settlement process before the end of the settlement process, the demonstration image is displayed (during the settlement process) when "4" seconds have elapsed. Then, at the end of the settlement process after that, the process of displaying the demonstration image again is not executed.

Also, when proceeding from steps S801 to S804 to step S822 in FIG. 167, the recommended image is not displayed. In step S822, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and when it determines that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S823. At step S823, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated. When it is determined that the settlement switch 43 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S824, and when it is determined that the settlement switch 43 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S832.
In step S832, the main control board 50 starts settlement processing. In the next step S833, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement process has been completed, and when it is determined that the settlement process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S834.
At step S834, the sub-control board 80 displays a demonstration image. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends. Note that commands to start and end the settlement process are transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 .

On the other hand, when proceeding from step S823 to step S824, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a bet has been placed (whether or not the bet switch 40 has been operated while credits are available, or whether or not the inserted medals have been received normally). ). When it is determined that a bet has been placed, the process proceeds to step S829, and when it is determined that the bet has not been placed, the process proceeds to step S825. When the main control board 50 determines that a bet has been made, it transmits the command to the sub-control board 80 .

In step S825, it is determined whether or not "30" seconds have elapsed since the vehicle stopped completely. Note that the determination here may be made by the main control board 50 or the sub control board 80 . For example, when the sub-control board 80 determines, it receives the command from the main control board 50 at the time of full stop, and starts timer measurement after receiving the command. When it is determined that "30" seconds have not elapsed, the process returns to step S823, and when it is determined that "30" seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S826. When determining whether or not "30" seconds have passed, the main control board 50 transmits the command to the sub-control board 80 when it determines that "30" seconds have passed. .
At step S826, the sub-control board 80 displays a demonstration image. Then, proceeding to step S827, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated. When it is determined that the settlement switch 43 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S828, and when it is determined that the settlement switch 43 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S835 to start settlement processing. Then, in the next step S836, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the settlement process has ended, and when it is determined that the settlement process has ended, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Further, when proceeding from step S827 to step S828, the main control board 50 determines whether or not a bet has been made. When it is determined in step S828 that a bet has been made, the process proceeds to step S829, and when it is determined that a bet has not been placed, the process returns to step S827.
At step S829, the sub-control board 80 terminates the display of the demonstration image and displays the game standby image.
Next, proceeding to step S830, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S831, and the sub-control board 80 displays a game start image. Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
Although not shown in this flowchart, when the menu button is operated after the demonstration image is displayed in step S826 or S834 in the game in which the recommended image is not displayed, the menu screen is displayed.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 167, when the settlement process is started before "30" seconds have elapsed since the vehicle stopped completely, it is not determined whether "30" seconds have elapsed during the settlement process. However, it is not limited to this, and it may be determined whether or not "30" seconds have elapsed during the settlement process. Then, when it is determined that "30" seconds have passed during the settlement process, the demonstration image may be displayed even during the settlement process. In this case, it is determined whether or not the demonstration image is being displayed when the settlement process is completed, and the demonstration image is displayed when it is determined that the demonstration image is not being displayed.
In a game in which a recommended image is displayed, even if a small winning combination or a replay pattern combination is stopped and displayed, a winning sound is not output, and a back lamp effect at the time of winning is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to emphasize that the game was not played in the recommended pressing order in the game.
Also, as will be described later, when a game is not played in the recommended order of pressing, a so-called penalty may be given in the next game. Also in this game, for example, when a small winning combination or a replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the winning sound may not be output and the back lamp effect at the time of winning may not be executed.

Next, the SP flag in the tenth embodiment will be explained. The tenth embodiment has an SP flag as in the first embodiment. The SP flag in the tenth embodiment will be described below, although the description partially overlaps with the first embodiment.
As described in the first embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated and an effect with a high expectation of winning the sub-bonus is output, it is pressed forward, and in other cases, it is pressed irregularly to win the sub-bonus. It is necessary to prevent penalties in games with a high degree of expectation, and to prevent strategy attacks such as increasing the expected value of the number of payouts in a game in which the degree of expectation for winning a sub-bonus is not high.
Therefore, when irregular pressing is performed in a game other than the sub-bonus and the pressing order is not notified, the SP flag is set to " 0” (off).

Then, when the SP flag is "0" at the start of the game, the lottery relating to the balls to be put out is disadvantageous. Here, "disadvantageous lottery related to ball output" means not performing lottery related to sub-bonus or CZ, or making the winning probability of these (than when the SP flag is "1") lower probability. etc. However, regardless of whether the SP flag is "0" or "1", the combination lottery probability (the value in the number table) does not change.
In a game in which the SP flag is "0", the lottery relating to the ball output is disadvantageous, but when the irregular push is not performed in the game, the SP flag becomes "1" at the end of the game. As a result, in the next game of the game, the lottery relating to the ball to be put out becomes a normal lottery.
Further, in the game with the SP flag of "0", a specific effect corresponding to the winning combination lottery result is not output. For example, the production is prevented from developing from when the start switch 41 is operated to when the machine is completely stopped. Specifically, at the start of the game, a lottery for the effect in the game is executed based on the winning lottery result or the like, but the lottery for the effect is not executed.

Alternatively, an effect peculiar to a game in which the SP flag is "0" (for example, an effect with a low degree of expectation for the winning combination lottery result) may be provided, and the peculiar effect may be output. If the peculiar effect is output, the player can recognize that the current game is a game with an SP flag of "0". Alternatively, when the SP flag is "0", an effect of a certain stage in the normal state (non-AT, non-CZ) may be executed.
Furthermore, when the freeze lottery is executed at the start of the game, the freeze lottery is not executed in the game in which the SP flag is "0".
On the other hand, even if the SP flag is "0" in the game, only in a predetermined situation (for example, during CZ), the performance when the SP flag is "0" is not output, and the performance up to that point is continued. You may

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the SP flag is set to "0" under the condition that the bell is won in the pressing order and the irregular pressing is performed in a game other than the sub-bonus in which the pressing order is not notified. However, the SP flag may be set to "0" when irregular pressing is performed in a game in which the pressing order is not notified regardless of the combination lottery result.
Even in games other than the sub-bonus, the pressing order may be notified during the CZ, and even if the irregular pressing is performed in the game in which the pressing order is notified during the CZ, the SP flag is "1". be.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the specified number is "3", but for example, in a gaming machine with specifications that allow the game to be played with the specified number of either "2" or "3", a game was played with the specified number of "2". When the game is more disadvantageous than when the game is played with the specified number of "3", even if the game is played with the specified number of "2" and an irregular push is performed, the SP flag update process is not executed (SP flag does not pass updates).

Further, it is arbitrary whether or not the SP flag is set to "0" when irregular pressing is performed in the normal section. As described above, the recommended image is not displayed even if irregular pressing is performed in the normal section. Correspondingly, the SP flag may not be updated even if irregular pressing is performed in the normal section. Alternatively, the SP flag may be set to "0" even though the recommended image is not displayed even if an irregular press is made in the normal section.
It should be noted that the progress counter described above is not updated in the game in which the SP flag is "0".

Next, the flow of SP flag processing will be described based on a flowchart. FIG. 168 is a flow chart showing control processing of the SP flag.
In step S851, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S852. In the next step S852, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the SP flag is "1". When it is determined that the SP flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S853, and when it is determined that the SP flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S855.
In step S853, the main control board 50 executes normal processing. Here, "normal processing" means that disadvantageous processing is not executed. Next, proceeding to step S854, the sub-control board 80 executes the normal effect. Here, "normal effect" means that when the SP flag is "0", a specific effect is not executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S857.
The sub-control board 80 may store the SP flag value independently of the main control board 50 . Alternatively, the main control board 50 may transmit a command indicating the value of the SP flag to the sub control board 80 after determining whether or not the SP flag is "1" in step S852.

On the other hand, in step S855, the main control board 50 executes a predetermined process. Here, the "predetermined process" corresponds to a process (cold treatment) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal process in step S853. for example,
a) Does not perform any processing related to the instruction function (specifically, lottery for sub-bonus, CZ, etc., update of the ceiling counter, etc.) b) Performs only a part of the processing related to the instruction function c) Instruction function d) disfavoring some of the processing, etc. related to the instruction function.
It should be noted that, as described above, the combination lottery (lottery for winning numbers) is the same in steps S853 and S855.
Next, proceeding to step S856, the sub-control board 80 outputs a predetermined effect. Here, the "predetermined effect" is, for example,
a) Do not execute the special effects of this game corresponding to the role lottery results (for example, the effects suggesting the winning of a rare role with a high expectation of AT winning).
b) Do not output effects that suggest expectations of sub-bonus, CZ, and freeze,
c) outputting an effect corresponding to the SP flag being "0";
Then, the process proceeds to step S857.

In step S857, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section and non-AT (non-sub-bonus). If it is determined that it is an advantageous section and non-AT, the process proceeds to step S858, and if it is determined that it is not an advantageous section and non-AT, the process proceeds to step S862.
In the next step S858, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the bell for pushing order has been won in the game this time. If it is determined that the pressing order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S859, and if it is determined that the pressing order bell has not been won, the process proceeds to step S862.
In step S859, the main control board 50 determines whether or not notification of the pressing order has been performed. This is because, for example, even if it is non-AT, there is a case where the pressing order notification is executed during CZ. When it is determined that the pressing order notification has been performed, the process proceeds to step S862, and when it is determined that the pressing order notification has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S860.

In step S860, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pressing order of the stop switch 42 in the current game is irregular pressing (first stop is middle or right). If it is determined that it is an irregular press, the process proceeds to step S861, and if it is determined that it is not an irregular press, the process proceeds to step S862.
At step S861, the main control board 50 sets the anomaly flag to "1". Therefore, the irregular flag is a flag that becomes "1" when the pushing order bell is won in an advantageous zone and non-AT game and the irregular pushing is performed in a game in which the pushing order notification is not executed. Next, proceeding to step S862, the sub-control board 80 displays a recommended image as in step S805 of FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S864.
On the other hand, in step S863, the main control board 50 sets the anomaly flag to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S864.

In step S864, the main control board 50 determines whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and when it determines that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S865. At step S865, the main control board 50 sets the SP flag to "0". Before the process of step S865, the SP flag is uniformly set to "0" regardless of whether the SP flag is "0" or "1". Next, proceeding to step S866, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the anomaly flag is "1". When it is determined that the anomaly flag is "1", the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the anomaly flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S867. At step S867, the main control board 50 sets the SP flag to "1". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.
From the above, when the pushing order bell is won in the advantageous section and non-AT game, and the irregular pushing is performed in the game where the pushing order notification is not executed, the SP flag becomes "0", otherwise the SP flag is becomes "1".
Then, when the game is shifted to the next game, when the SP flag is "1", the processing of steps S853 and S854 (normal processing and normal effect) is executed, and when the SP flag is "0", steps S855 and S856 are executed. Processing (predetermined processing and predetermined effect) is executed.

Next, the processing at the start of the sub-bonus in the tenth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, a pseudo-game is executed at the time of transition to the sub-bonus, and "red 7" matching is stopped and displayed. Similarly, in the tenth embodiment, "Red 7" is displayed stopped by a pseudo-game at the time of transition to the sub-bonus.
However, when shifting to the sub-bonus while the first flag in the morning is on, the sub-bonus is shifted to by stop-displaying 7 replays.
Here, "7 replay" refers to a replay in which "red 7" can be stopped in the middle line when the stop switch 42 is reversely pressed (right, middle, left order) (in FIG. 4, the combination number "008"). (equivalent to replay 4 of ).

As shown in FIG. 29, when the effect group number is "0" or "10" in the normal section lever process, the initial normal mode lottery results in "normal mode 0 (fixed first thing in the morning)". In this case, the first morning flag is turned on ("1").
Further, when the first game in the morning is uncertain in the initial normal mode lottery, if the first game in the advantageous section is not inside, the first morning flag is turned on.
Then, when shifting to the sub-bonus, the first morning flag is referred to, and when the first morning flag is on, 7 replays are stopped and displayed to shift to the pseudo game.
On the other hand, when the first flag in the morning is off, it shifts to a pseudo-game (without stop-displaying 7 replays).
The pseudo-game of the tenth embodiment is the same as in FIG. 32 (first embodiment).

7 Replay can be stopped and displayed when the stop switch 42 is reversely pressed when the conditional device including Replay 04 is activated.
As shown in FIG. 19, the conditional devices including replay 04 are minor wins and replay conditional device numbers "1" and "2". In the tenth embodiment, 7 replays can be stopped and displayed when these conditional devices are activated, that is, when the winning number is "1" (replay A) or the winning number is "2" (replay B).
When the transition to the sub-bonus is decided and the first flag in the morning is on, the game with the winning number "1" or "2" should be aimed at "red 7" by pushing backward (hereinafter referred to as " 7 replay navigation”) is announced.
When 7 replays are stopped and displayed in this game, it is possible to shift to a sub-bonus. Also, when 7 replays are stopped and displayed in this game, the first morning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, if 7 replays cannot be stop-displayed in the game in which the winning number '1' or '2' is won, even if other replays are stop-displayed, the sub-bonus is not entered in the next game.

Furthermore, when it is decided to shift to a sub-bonus, the first morning flag is on, and 7 replays cannot be stopped in the game in which 7 replay navigation is displayed, then replay "1" or Even if you win "2", 7 replay navigation will not be displayed. Furthermore, if 7 replay navigation cannot be stopped and displayed in a game in which 7 replay navigation is displayed, then 7 replay navigation is displayed in a game where the winning number is "1" or "2" (7 replay navigation is not displayed). Even if the replay is stopped and displayed, it will not shift to the sub-bonus.
If it is decided to shift to the sub-bonus, the first flag in the morning is on, and it is not possible to stop and display 7 replays in the game where 7 replay navigation is displayed, the winning number "8" ~ An image for selecting the pressing order (hereinafter referred to as a "pressing order selection image") is displayed in a game in which "39" (any of winning group A or winning group B) is won.
In addition, it is not limited to winning the winning numbers "8" to "39", but the winning numbers "40" to "47" (any of the winning group C) (either) may be included.

Here, the 'selection of pressing order' is to allow the player to select the order of pressing, and determine that a predetermined pressing order is correct, and that pressing orders other than the predetermined pressing order are incorrect. "Push order selection" is also referred to as "push order guess" or "push order guess".
In this embodiment, when a winning push order bell is won, the player is made to select the first push order, and the first push order (first push order) selected by the player is the correct push order for the winning push order bell. When it matches the first stop, it is determined that the selection of the pressing order is correct. Specifically, for example, in a game in which winning A1 (correct pressing order 213) is won, if the first stop is the middle first stop, the pressing order selection correct answer is given, and the second stop is irrelevant.

More specifically, for example, firstly, when either winning group A or winning group B (pressing order bell for which the irregular pressing is the correct pressing order) is won, when the pressing order selection image is displayed, "X?? ” is displayed as an image.
Here, "x" indicates that it is not the first stop. Therefore, when the image is displayed as "x??", the first stop is either the middle or the right, so there are two options (correct answer rate of 50%).
Alternatively, there may be an image displayed as "???" when either winning group A or winning group B is won. Since the first stop in this case is either left, middle or right, there are three choices (correct answer rate 33.3%).

Secondly, when the pressing order selection image is displayed when either winning group C or winning group D (the pressing order bell whose pressing order is correct to the left, middle, or right) is won, "X ?”, “?x?”, or “?x”. The order of pushing the bell in the winning group C or winning group D originally has three options, but if one of the first stops is set to "x", there are two options (correct answer rate of 50%).
Alternatively, in the same manner as described above, when either the winning group C or the winning group D is won, an image of "???" may be displayed and 3 choices (correct answer rate 33.3%) may be provided.
Then, when the push order bell is won, a push order selection image is displayed, and when the correct answer is given to the push order selection for the first stop (that is, the first stop is correct and the second stop is incorrect, or the first to third stops are correct) When it becomes either), it moves to a pseudo-game (FIG. 32). Furthermore, it becomes possible to shift to a sub-bonus through this pseudo-game. In addition, when shifting to a pseudo-game, the first flag in the morning is turned off.
In this way, in the game of selecting the pressing order, it is sufficient to select the pressing order for the first stop correctly, and when either the winning group A or the winning group B is won, the high-level bell is not limited to winning. .

However, the pressing order for winning the high-level bell when either winning group A or winning group B is won may be set in order of correct pressing. For example, if "X?" is displayed when winning prize A1 (correct answer order 213) is won, the original 6 options become 4 options (correct answer rate 25%).
Alternatively, if "???" is displayed when the winning group A or winning group B is won, the original 6 options are obtained.
Although the above-mentioned push order selection image is displayed on the image display device 23, a dedicated number is displayed on the so-called instruction monitor.
Also, in a game in which the pressing order selection image is displayed, the recommended image is not displayed even if irregular pressing is performed.

Furthermore, in the case of displaying the pressing order selection image corresponding to the winning combination, the image to be displayed may be selected by lottery from among the pre-stored images.
For example, if there are two pressing order selection images "x?" However, in such a case, the pressing order bell (winning group C and winning group D) for which the first stop left is the correct answer is included.
Similarly, if there are two pressing order selection images "?x?"

Next, the flow of processing before shifting to the sub-bonus will be described based on a flowchart. FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing when it is decided to shift to the sub-bonus.
At step S881, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the sub-bonus shift flag is on.
The sub-bonus transition flag is
a) When winning a sub-bonus in a non-AT,
b) When the pull-back lottery is won in the pull-back zone after the end of the sub-bonus (step S708 in FIG. 161, FIG. 768 in FIG. 164),
c) When winning the pullback lottery in the normal section (step S746 in FIG. 163)
turn on at

When it is determined that the sub-bonus transition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S882, and when it is determined that the sub-bonus transition flag is not on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
At step S882, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the first morning flag is on. If it is determined that the first morning flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S883, and if it is determined that the first morning flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S897. If it progresses to step S897, it will shift to a pseudo-game. This pseudo-game corresponds to the red 7-matched pseudo-game effect shown in FIG. 32 (first embodiment).
That is, if the first flag in the morning is not turned on, the process shifts to a pseudo-game without executing 7 replay navigation, which will be described later.

In step S883, the main control board 50 determines whether or not 7 replays (replay A or replay B) have been won. When it is determined that 7 replays have been won, the process proceeds to step S884, and when it is determined that 7 replays have not been won, the process proceeds to step S891.
In step S884, the main control board 50 determines whether the 7 replay navigation flag is on. Here, the "7 replay navigation flag" is a flag that is turned on when 7 replay navigation is executed. In this embodiment, 7 replay navigation is executed only once, so when 7 replay navigation is executed for the first time, 7 replay navigation is turned on. to
When it is determined that the 7 replay navigation flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S885, and when it is determined that the 7 replay navigation flag is on, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S885, the sub-control board 80 executes 7 replay navigation. When the conditions for 7 replay navigation are satisfied, the main control board 50 transmits a command to that effect to the sub control board 80 . Then, proceeding to step S886, the main control board 50 turns on the 7 replay navigation flag.

In the next step S887, the main control board 50 determines whether or not 7 replays are stopped. If it is determined that 7 replays have been stop-displayed, the process advances to step S888, and if it is determined that 7 replays have not been stop-displayed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S888, the main control board 50 turns off the first morning flag. Next, proceeding to step S889, the main control board 50 turns off the sub-bonus shift flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S890 to shift to the sub-bonus.

When it is determined in step S883 that 7 replays have not been won and the process proceeds to step S891, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the pushing order bell has been won. When it is determined that the pressing order bell has not been won, the processing according to this flow chart is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing order bell is won, the process proceeds to step S892. At step S892, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the 7 replay navigation flag is on. When it is determined that the 7 replay navigation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S893, and when it is determined that it is not ON, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S893, the sub-control board 80 displays the pushing order selection image corresponding to the winning pushing order bell. Next, proceeding to step S894, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the first pressing order is correct. For example, if winning A1 is won in the game this time and the first stop is middle, it is determined that the first pressing order is correct, and if the first stop is left or right, it is determined that the first pressing order is incorrect. When it is determined that the first pressing order is correct, the process advances to step S895, and when it is determined that the first pressing order is incorrect, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
At step S895, the main control board 50 turns off the first morning flag. Next, proceeding to step S896, the main control board 50 turns off the sub-bonus shift flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S897 and shifts to a pseudo-game (FIG. 32).
In the above, when the first morning flag is turned off in step S888 or S895, when the sub-bonus shift flag is turned on next time, it is judged "No" in step S882, so 7 replay navigation is not executed. Move to pseudo-game.

Further, as shown in steps S891 and S892, even if the pressing order bell is won, the pressing order selection image is not displayed unless the 7 replay navigation flag is turned on. Therefore, the push order selection image will not be displayed before 7 replay navigation. The push order selection image is limited to when 7 Replay Navi is displayed and 7 Replay could not be stop-displayed. However, when the pressing order bell is won before the 7 replay navigation is displayed (in some games or all games when the pressing order bell is won), the correct pressing order may be displayed and medals may be increased. .
Although not shown in the flowchart, after turning on the 7 replay navigation flag, the 7 replay navigation flag may be turned off when shifting to a sub-bonus or a pseudo game. However, even if the 7 replay navigation flag remains on, when the sub-bonus transition flag is turned on next time, the first morning flag is off, so the processing from step S883 onwards will not proceed. It does not matter if the replay navigation flag remains on.

Although the tenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the following various modifications are possible.
(1) The withdrawal zone after the end of the sub-bonus may be in the information game state. However, when it is decided to end the advantageous section in the pullback zone and shift to the normal section, the normal section becomes a non-notification game state. Furthermore, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined in the normal section, the withdrawal zone in the subsequent advantageous section is set to the information game state.
Further, when the pullback zone is set to the information game state, the recommended image is not displayed even if irregular pressing is performed in the pullback zone.
(2) In the example of FIG. 162, the advantageous section continuation determination in the pullback zone is such that the advantageous section ends when the four conditions of steps S721, S722, S723, and S725 are satisfied. Any condition may be set for the determination. For example, only two conditions of steps S722 and S723 may be used.
(3) In FIG. 166, the recommended image is displayed when the bell is won in the order of pressing. ) may display recommended images.

(4) In the above embodiment, the demonstration image is displayed after "4" seconds have passed since the full stop (at the time of irregular pressing) or after "30" seconds have passed since the full stop (at the time of normal pressing). However, when the recommended image is not displayed (at the time of forward pressing), the demonstration image may not be displayed in a predetermined situation such as during a continuous effect or during a sub-bonus. Alternatively, if the end of the continuous effect is successful (sub-bonus won), the demonstration image is not displayed during the continuous effect, and if the end of the continuous effect is unsuccessful (sub-bonus not won), the continuous effect is in progress. A demonstration image may be displayed on the .
On the other hand, when the recommended image is displayed (at the time of irregular pressing), the demonstration image is displayed at a predetermined timing after the complete stop, regardless of whether it is in a predetermined situation such as during a continuous effect or during a sub-bonus. may be displayed.
Furthermore, when the game is played normally, the demonstration image may not be displayed after the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the recommended image is displayed when the irregular push is made regardless of the combination lottery result, the demonstration image may be displayed even after the replay symbol combination is stopped and displayed.
(5) As shown in FIG. 169, after the 7 replays could not be stop-displayed, when the pressing order selection image was displayed and the first pressing order was correct, a pseudo-game was started. However, not limited to this, the sub-bonus may be started without going through the pseudo-game.

(6) When 7 replay navigation is displayed and 7 replay could not be stopped, until the sub-bonus starts, the number of medals will remain the same until the sub-bonus starts. Sometimes, the order of pressing correct answers may be notified (this period is hereinafter referred to as the "status quo period"). Notification of the correct pushing order for maintaining the current state of the difference during the status quo period includes, for example, reporting the correct pushing order at a rate of once every three times when winning the pushing order bell. .
In addition, when the correct key press order for maintaining the current state of the difference number is notified during the status quo period, even if the stop switch 42 is operated according to the notification, the sub-bonus does not occur (in step S894 in FIG. 169, " Yes”). Also, the recommended image is not displayed in the game.
Furthermore, during the period from when the sub-bonus shift flag is turned on to when the sub-bonus starts, a predetermined lottery related to the sub-bonus (additional lottery for the number of games played or A lottery to decide whether to move to a zone, etc.) may be executed. In this case, during the status quo period, the winning probability (expected value) of the predetermined lottery for the sub-bonus may be lowered, or the predetermined lottery for the sub-bonus may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from making a strategic move such as entering the status quo period without stop-displaying 7 replays and receiving a predetermined lottery for the sub-bonus.

(7) In the tenth embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the sub-bonus, 7 replays are stopped and displayed only when the first flag in the morning is on. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be as follows.
a) When it is decided to shift to the sub-bonus, 7 replay navigation may be displayed and 7 replay may be stopped and displayed each time.
b) When it is decided to shift to the sub-bonus, 7 replay navigation is displayed and 7 replay is stopped, even if it is decided to shift to the next sub-bonus, 7 replay navigation is displayed. display, and stop displaying 7 replays. Then, when 7 replay navigation is displayed and 7 replay cannot be stopped and displayed, from the next time onwards, when it is decided to shift to the sub-bonus, the pseudo game is started without displaying 7 replay navigation. may migrate.

c) When it is decided to shift to a sub-bonus, whether to display 7 replay navigation and stop displaying 7 replay each time, or shift to pseudo-game without displaying 7 replay navigation, It may be determined by lottery or the like.
d) In a game in which the symbol combination of 7 replays is to be stopped and displayed, if the winning number "1" or "2" is won, the 7 replay navigation is displayed and the 7 replay is stopped displayed, and the winning number " 1” or “2” is not won, a pseudo-game may be executed in the relevant game, and the symbol combination of 7 replays may be stopped and displayed.
In any of the above a) to d), if the 7 replay navigation cannot be displayed and the 7 replay cannot be stopped, the pressing order will be selected when the pressing order bell is won in the subsequent game. Display an image.
In addition, after the 7 replay navigation is displayed and the 7 replay cannot be stopped and displayed, and before winning the push order bell (before the push order selection image is displayed), when the 7 replay is won again, 7 Replay Navi may be displayed again. Then, when 7 replays are stopped and displayed, the sub-bonus may be started.
Similarly, after the 7 replay navigation was displayed and the 7 replay could not be stopped and displayed, the push order bell was won and the push order selection image was displayed, but the push order selection was not correct. 7 replay navigation may be displayed again when winning the 7 replay again before winning the push order bell. Then, when 7 replays are stopped and displayed, the sub-bonus may be started.
As described above, after the 7 replay navigation is displayed and the 7 replay cannot be stopped and displayed, the pressing order selection image is displayed in the game in which the pressing order bell is won, and the 7 replay is displayed in the game in which the 7 replay is won. Display replay navigation. Then, when the pressing order selection image is displayed and the pressing order selection is correct, it shifts to a pseudo-game (it may shift directly to a sub-bonus), and when 7 replay navigation is displayed and 7 replay is stopped. may shift to a sub-bonus.

(8) Since the first morning flag is turned on when the setting is changed, 7 replay navigation is always displayed in the first sub-bonus. In other words, when 7 replay navigation is displayed in the first sub-bonus, the setting has been changed. Therefore, in order to make it impossible to know whether or not the setting has been changed, whether the 7 replay navigation is always displayed or the 7 replay navigation is displayed when shifting to the first sub-bonus after the power is turned on regardless of whether the setting has been changed or not. If it is determined by lottery, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether or not the setting has been changed.
(9) In the example of FIG. 169, when the first push order is not correct in the game in which the push order selection image is displayed, the transition to the sub-bonus never ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first pressing order is not correctly answered in the game in which the first pressing order selection image is displayed, a transition to a sub-bonus may be made if a predetermined condition is satisfied thereafter.
For example, when the number of times the push order selection image is displayed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) have passed since the first game in which 7 replay navigation was displayed , 7 Replay may not be stop-displayed, and even if the first stop correct answer is not obtained when the push order selection image is displayed, the transition to the sub-bonus may be made.

(10) The demonstration image was displayed after "4" seconds (when the recommended image was displayed) or "30" seconds (when the recommended image was not displayed) after the full stop. It may be after "4" seconds or "30" seconds have passed since the end of the process. That is, it may be after "4" seconds or "30" seconds have elapsed from the predetermined timing after the complete stop.
Note that "4" seconds and "30" seconds are examples, and are not limited to these times.
However, the relationship between the time "T1" from when the recommended image is displayed until the demonstration image is displayed and the time "T2" from when the recommended image is not displayed to when the demonstration image is displayed is "T1<T2 ” is preferred. By doing so, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the recommended pressing order, the time until the demonstration image is displayed can be shortened, so that the display of the recommended image can be terminated early.
Further, "at the time of complete stop" means when the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted, when the reel 31 is stopped (when the rotation speed of the motor 32 becomes "0"), when the four-phase excitation of the motor 32 is completed, or the like. Whether or not the timing is used as a reference is arbitrary, and any of these timings is included in the "at the time of total stop".

(11) In the example of FIG. 166, under the condition that the recommended image is displayed, if the settlement process is started before "4" seconds have passed since the vehicle stopped completely, "4" seconds have passed since the vehicle stopped completely. A demonstration image was displayed when the settlement process was completed even before the settlement process was completed. However, without being limited to this, if "4" seconds have not elapsed since the vehicle stopped at the end of the payment processing under the situation where the recommended image is displayed, wait until "4" seconds have elapsed since the vehicle stopped completely. demonstration images may be displayed. As a result, even if the adjustment switch 43 is operated immediately after the full stop, the recommended image can be displayed until "4" seconds have passed since the full stop, so that the recommended image cannot be erased immediately after the game ends. can be done.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167, when the settlement switch 43 is operated before the elapse of "30" seconds under the condition that the recommended image is not displayed, the demonstration image is displayed at the end of the settlement processing. Therefore, during the settlement process, it is not determined whether or not "30" seconds have elapsed since the vehicle stopped completely. However, it is judged whether or not "30" seconds have passed since the vehicle stopped even during the settlement process, and when it is judged that "30" seconds have passed since the vehicle stopped completely, a demonstration image is displayed even during the settlement process. You may
(12) The tenth embodiment is not limited to being carried out alone, but can be carried out in combination with other embodiments.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
The eleventh embodiment relates to a management information display LED 74. FIG. In addition, in the description of the eleventh embodiment, the management information display LED 74 is referred to as a "role ratio monitor 74". Role ratio monitor 74 is also referred to as ratio indicator 74 . Furthermore, the ratio indicator of the slot machine and the performance indicator of the pachinko game machine may be generically referred to simply as "the indicator (or the "predetermined indicator")".
The structure of the role ratio monitor 74 is the same as that shown in FIG. Each digit (LED) is made up of segments AG and P as shown in FIG. Here, as shown in FIGS. 58, 60 and 61, the segment P of digit 7 is used as a digit indicator LED, and the segment P of digits 6, 8 and 9 is unused ("-" ). When displaying a ratio, these three segments P of digit 6, digit 8 and digit 9 are not illuminated. (including segment P) may be lit.
When the identification segment is displayed as "AB", it means that the display of digit 6 is "A" and the display of digit 7 is "B". Further, when the ratio segment is displayed as "12", it indicates that the display of digit 8 is "1" and the display of digit 9 is "2".
Furthermore, when "A."
Similarly, when "A."

In addition, although not adopted in the eleventh embodiment, for example, during the setting change state (mode) or the setting confirmation state (mode), the ratio is not displayed on the role ratio monitor 74, and the setting change mode or setting A predetermined pattern may be displayed to indicate the confirmation mode. However, during the confirmation of the setting, the ratio may be displayed in the same manner as during the game. The predetermined pattern may be, for example, displaying "1.2.3.4." .

FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 170 illustrates only the configuration necessary for explanation in the eleventh embodiment. In other words, FIG. 170 does not show all the structures within the chip.
In FIG. 170, the main CPU 55, built-in memory, and arithmetic circuit (APU) 57 are displayed as the configuration of the chip. The built-in memory of the chip includes ROM 54, RWM 53, and built-in memory register 56, as in FIGS. 82 to 84 (third embodiment).
Although the description in FIG. 83 (third embodiment) is repeated, the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 each have a use area and a non-use area.
The "usage area" is a storage area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as "first area".
Further, "outside the use area" is a storage area in which information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored. This is a storage area in which a program, etc. for Hereinafter, it is also called a “second area”.

A program area (first program area and second program area) and a data area (first data area and second data area) are provided in the first area and second area of the built-in ROM 54, respectively. . The “program area” is also called a “control area” and is a storage area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored.
Note that "program" may refer to instructions. Furthermore, a "program" may refer to a thing composed of a plurality of instructions (a so-called module).
A "data area" is a storage area in which information other than a program is stored, and is a storage area in which data used when the program is executed is stored.
Further, the storage area of the RWM 53 has a first area and a second area like the storage area of the ROM 54, and the first area and the second area are work areas (first work area and second work area, respectively). work area) and stack areas (first stack area and second stack area).

In the eleventh embodiment, the internal memory register 56 includes a function setting register 56a and a function control register 56b (similar to FIG. 82 (third embodiment)). As shown in FIG. 170, the storage area of the function setting register 56a has addresses "FE00h" to "FEFFh", and the storage area of the function control register 56b has addresses "FF00h" to "FFCh".
Further, an arithmetic circuit (APU) 57 is used for ratio calculation and the like.
In the eleventh embodiment, a register bank 0 and a register bank 1 are provided in the built-in register 55a of the main CPU 55 (synonymous with CPU register area in FIG. 82). Each register bank includes main registers (front registers) and sub-registers (back registers). The main registers include general purpose registers.
In the following description, sub-registers will be omitted, and the term "register" will refer to the main register.

Each register of register bank 0 is a register used when executing the first program (for example, game start set processing in step S272 during the main processing of FIG. 180, which will be described later). Similarly, each register of register bank 1 is a register used when executing the second program (for example, the ratio setting process in step S910 during the main process of FIG. 180).
Therefore, when executing the first program, the registers in register bank 0 are used and the registers in register bank 1 are not used.
Similarly, when executing the second program, registers in register bank 1 are used and registers in register bank 0 are not used.

The A register, F register, etc. are provided in both register bank 0 and register bank 1, respectively. In other words, the A register of register bank 0 and the A register of register bank 1 are different registers.
The A register is an accumulator. The F register is a flag register. The B, C, D, E, H, and L registers are general purpose registers.
The IX and IY registers are index registers and are used, for example, when specifying addresses.
The SP register is the stack pointer register. The SP register is a register that specifies to which address data should be saved to the stack area, and to specify which address data should be returned to when returning data from the stack area.
Specifically, the SP register of register bank 0 designates the address of the first stack area (range of "F1D0h" to "F1FFh"). Similarly, the SP register of register bank 1 specifies the address of the second stack area (range of "F3E8h" to "F3FFh").

In addition to register banks 0 and 1, there are I, R, PC and IFF registers.
The I register is an interrupt register and is used when executing interrupt processing.
The R register is a refresh register and used for refreshing the RWM 53 .
The PC register is a program counter and is a register that holds the currently executing address in memory.

The IFF register is an interrupt enable register. The IFF register consists of an IFF1 register for determining whether to enable or disable a maskable interrupt (INT), and an IFF2 register for restoring IFF1 after processing a non-maskable interrupt (NMI). The IFF2 register is used not only for returning from non-maskable interrupt processing, but also for returning by a RETEX instruction (described later) after execution of a CALLEX instruction (described later).
When a nonmarkable interrupt is accepted or the CALLEX instruction is executed, the IFF1 register is cleared (set to a value (“0”) that disables interrupt processing), maskable interrupts are disabled, and the IFF2 register is in the current state (nonmarkable (whether the interrupt was disabled or enabled when the interrupt was accepted or when the CALLEX instruction was executed). Also, by executing the RET instruction or RETEX instruction, the IFF2 register value is moved to the IFF1 register, and the maskable interrupt acceptance state is restored to the previous state.

The initial value "F200h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 0 by the instruction "LD SP, F200h", which is one of the instructions in the first program area after power-on (see below in FIG. 178, step S901).
Next, when some program is executed and data is stacked in "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" of the first stack area, the SP register value of register bank 0 is updated to "F1FEh".
Next, when calling the data stored in "F1FFh" and "F1FEh" in the first stack area, some program (return instruction, etc.) is executed. Then, the data stored in "F1FEh" and "F1FFh" are called by this instruction. For example, the return addresses are stored in "F1FEh" and "F1FFh" by the CALL instruction stored in the first program area, and the instruction (the program in the first program area) called by the CALL instruction is executed. After that, the RET instruction returns to the instruction after CALL (returns to the program of the program counter stored in the first stack area (the program at the return address)), and the SP register value of register bank 0 changes from "F1FEh" to "F200h". ” is updated. Also, for example, the return address is stored in "F1FEh" and "F1FFh" by the CALLEX instruction stored in the first program area, and the instruction (program in the second program area) called by the CALLEX instruction is executed. After that, after switching the register bank to register bank 0 by the RETEX instruction, the register bank The SP register value of 0 is updated from 'F1FEh' to 'F200h'.

The same applies to the second stack area.
The initial value "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1 by the instruction "LD SP, F400h", which is one of the instructions of the program in the second program area after power-on (see FIG. 179 to be described later). step S903).
Next, when some program is executed and data is stacked in "F3FFh" and "F3FEh" of the second stack area, the SP register value of register bank 1 is updated to "F3FEh".
Furthermore, when calling the data stored in "F3FFh" and "F3FEh" of the second stack area, some program is executed. Then, the data stored in "F3FFh" and "F3FEh" are called by this instruction. For example, the return address is stored in "F3FFh" and "F3FEh" by the CALL instruction stored in the second program area, and the instruction (the program in the second program area) called by the CALL instruction is executed. After that, the RET instruction returns to the instruction after the CALL instruction (returns to the program of the program counter stored in the second stack area (the program at the return address)), and the SP register value of register bank 1 changes from "F3FEh" to " F400h”.

The CALLEX instruction described above is an instruction included in the first program (for register bank 0) and not included in the second program (for register bank 1).
The RETEX instruction is an instruction that is not included in the first program (for register bank 0) and is included in the second program (for register bank 1).
The CALLEX instruction is one of call instructions.
First, when the instruction "CALLEX mn" is executed,
(1) Save the return address stored in the program counter to the first stack area, update the stack pointer of register bank 0,
(2) disabling non-maskable interrupts (NMI) and maskable interrupts (INT) regardless of whether interrupts are enabled or disabled at that time;
(3) Switch the register bank to "1",
(4) Call to the address specified by "mn" (call (store "mn" in the program counter))
carry out
In the eleventh embodiment, the second program can be executed by executing the CALLEX instruction when executing the second program from the first program.

Also, the RETEX instruction is an instruction corresponding to the conventional return instruction.
The RETEX instruction is
(1) Set the non-maskable interrupt (NMI) and maskable interrupt (INT) to the state before the CALLEX instruction,
(2) switch the register bank to "0",
(3) Restore the return address stored in the first stack area indicated by the stack pointer of register bank 0 to the program counter, and update the stack pointer of register bank 0;
That is, return (RET) (state before CALLEX, in other words, return to the instruction following CALLEX (program at return address))
carry out
This makes the first program executable.
When the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt enabled state is set by the RETEX instruction. On the other hand, when the state at the time of the CALLEX instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is set by the RETEX instruction.

A conventional general call/return instruction calls a program by a call instruction, executes the program, and then returns after the call instruction by a return instruction.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the CALLEX instruction calls the program, executes the program, and then returns after the CALLEX instruction by the RETEX instruction.
By using the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction as described above, when executing the program in the second program area, or when executing the program in the first program area from the program in the second program area, an independent interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction) and interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) become unnecessary.
If register banks 0 and 1 are provided and the register banks are switched by the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction, a single register bank is provided as in the conventional case to transfer the program from the first program area to the second program area. When executing a program or when executing a program in the first program area from a program in the second program area, independent register save instructions and register restore instructions are not required. Therefore, pressure on the capacity of the ROM area and complexity of instructions stored in the ROM area can be reduced.

FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing the arithmetic circuit (APU) 57 in FIG. 170. As shown in FIG.
The arithmetic circuit 57 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit capable of executing four arithmetic operations, and a multiplicand setting register, a multiplier setting register, a dividend setting register, and a divisor setting register for storing data used for calculation.
It also has a multiplication result register, a division result register, and a remainder result register for storing the calculation results.
In the following description, these multiplicand setting register, multiplier setting register, multiplication result register, dividend setting register, divisor setting register, division result register, and remainder result register are collectively referred to as "multiplication and division registers". As shown in FIG. 170, the multiplication/division register is provided as part of the function control register 56b.
When a value (data) is stored (input) in the multiplicand setting register, multiplier setting register, dividend setting register, or divisor setting register through the internal bus, the operation result is transferred to the multiplication result register, division Stored (output) in the result register and remainder result register. The main CPU 55 can acquire the values (data) stored in the multiplication result register, division result register, and remainder result register through the internal bus.

For example, when values are stored in both the multiplicand setting register and the multiplier setting register, the multiplication circuit may perform an operation (multiplication). When a value is input to , multiplication is performed by the multiplication circuit using the value of the multiplicand setting register and the value of the multiplier setting register at that time, and the multiplication result is stored in the multiplication result register.
For example, when executing a multiplication of "2×3", if "2" is stored in the multiplicand setting register and "3" is stored in the multiplier setting register, the values "2" and "3" are multiplied. It is input to the circuit and "6" is output to the multiplication result register.
Similarly, when performing a division of "7/3", "7" is stored in the dividend setting register, and "3" is stored in the divisor setting register, values "7" and "3" are stored. is input to the division circuit, "2" (quotient) is output to the division result register, and "1" (remainder) is output to the remainder result register.

Further, the division circuit of the eleventh embodiment is configured so that "FFFFFFFFh" is stored in the division result register (4 bytes) when "0" is stored in the divisor setting register. Division by zero in computer programs is considered an error, or the division by zero is positive infinity if the dividend is positive, and the division by zero is negative infinity if the dividend is negative. It has been known. However, in the eleventh embodiment, processing is performed as described above.
Especially in the eleventh embodiment, when calculating the ratio, if the ratio is normal, "0" to "100 (D)" are stored in the division result register value. Here, "100(D)" is "64h". Therefore, when the value of the least significant byte is "FFh", it can be determined that the calculated ratio is an abnormal value.

In the eleventh embodiment, only the quotient of the division result is used and the remainder is not used, so the remainder result register is not necessarily required in such an example. However, in the future, a remainder result register is provided in preparation for the case where the remainder of the division result is used due to a specification change (for example, when a value obtained by rounding the remainder is used as the quotient). Therefore, at least in the eleventh embodiment, even if a value is output to the remainder result register, the remainder result register value is not read (the remainder result register value is not used), and the division result register (that is, the "quotient" ) values only.

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing the structure of a multiplication/division register.
First, the multiplicand setting register and the multiplier setting register each consist of 2 bytes (16 bits). For example, the addresses of the multiplicand setting register are "FF0Bh" and "FF0Ch", the values of the lower bits 0 to 7 are stored in one byte of "FF0Bh", and the values of the upper bits 8 to 15 are stored in one byte of "FF0Ch". The bit number is stored. The multiplier setting register is similarly composed of 2 bytes.
The address of the multiplication result register is ``FF0Fh'' to ``FF12h''. The bit number is stored. Similarly, the 23rd to 16th bits are stored in one byte of "FF11h", and the most significant 24th to 31st bits are stored in one byte of "FF12h".
Therefore, "2 bytes (multiplicand)×2 bytes (multiplier)=4 bytes (multiplication result)" is obtained.
The dividend setting register, the divisor setting register, the division result register, and the remainder result register each have a 4-byte storage area in the same manner as the above multiplication result register. Value is stored.
Therefore, "4 bytes (dividend)/4 bytes (divisor)=4 bytes (quotient of division result)+4 bytes (residue of division result)".

An initial value is stored in each multiplication/division register when power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 172, the division result register stores an initial value "FFh". That is, "FFh" is stored in each of the addresses "FF1Bh" to "FF1Eh".
An initial value "00h" is stored in the multiplication and division registers other than the division result register. Therefore, "00h" is stored at each of these addresses.

FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a process from power-on to transition to user mode in the eleventh embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 87 of the third embodiment.
As described above, after the power is turned on, the built-in register in the main CPU 55 is initialized and the security mode is passed. If the security check is OK, the user mode is entered. (FIG. 178) is executed.
In this case, in the eleventh embodiment, after the security check is executed in the security mode, the multiplication/division register is initialized before shifting to the user mode.
However, the multiplication/division register may be initialized before the transition to the user mode, for example, before execution of the security mode.
Note that the first instruction (program) after the power is turned on is stored at the user mode address "0000h". The first instruction after power on is the instruction in the first program area.

Next, the ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. In addition, although the description partially overlaps with the above-described second embodiment, it will be described again. In addition, the eleventh embodiment is the same as the second embodiment unless otherwise specified.
FIG. 174 is a diagram showing display specifications of the role ratio monitor 74. As shown in FIG. Six ratios are cyclically displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 in the display order. In the eleventh embodiment, it is assumed that the instructed accessory ratio is displayed, and the advantageous section ratio is not displayed.
In the figure, the "abbreviation" corresponds to the symbol displayed in the identifying segment (digits 6 and 7).
When the total number of games played is less than the reference number of games, the display of the identification seg is blinked, and when the total number of games is equal to or greater than the reference number of games, the identification seg is lit.
Also, when the ratio is equal to or greater than the threshold, the display of the ratio segment (digits 8 and 9) blinks, and when the ratio is less than the threshold, the display of the ratio segment is lit.
Furthermore, among the six ratios, the state ratio of accessories etc. is updated every game. As described above, the advantageous interval ratio is not calculated in this embodiment, but if the advantageous interval ratio is calculated and displayed, it is updated every game.
On the other hand, the ratios other than the role item state ratio are updated every 400 games.
In this way, the total number of times played, which is the denominator of the accessory state ratio and the advantageous section ratio, is updated by one each time a game is played. In other words, since the state ratio of accessories and the like and the ratio of advantageous section fluctuate by playing the game once, they are updated every game.
On the other hand, the instructed accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), accessory ratio (6000 times), continuous accessory ratio (cumulative), and accessory ratio (cumulative) are the denominators and The total number of payouts, etc. may not be updated. In other words, there is a case where the symbol combination in which no game medium is given stops and the game ends. For this reason, these ratios are not updated for each game, but are updated for each predetermined specified number of games. This prevents unnecessary processing.

FIG. 175 shows two data tables as data tables provided in the second area of the ROM 54. FIG. The data table of the second area is a data table storing data for displaying the role ratio monitor 74, and includes an identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) and a ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA). However, it is not limited to these two data tables.
Although not shown in the eleventh embodiment, the first area of the ROM 54 is provided with various data tables. The data table of the first area is used when symbols and numbers are displayed on the credit number display LED 76 and the earned number display LED 78 during execution of the first program. For example, symbols and numbers for displaying the type of error when an error occurs, numbers for displaying the number of credits, bets or payouts, and the order of pressing when activating the instruction function. Symbols and numbers are included.
On the other hand, when displaying the ratio and the like on the role ratio monitor 74 using the second program, the data table stored in the second area of the ROM 54 is used.

In FIG. 175, the start address of the identification segment offset table is "2520h", and the start address of the ratio display segment data table is "2530h". In the figure, "DEFB" indicates storage of 1-byte (8-bit) data in assembler language.
In the identification segment offset table, the display offset data of "7P" indicating the identification segment of the instructed accessory ratio is "7Ah" as shown in FIG. , where "A" indicates the offset value for the lower digit (digit 7). Furthermore, the offset value here indicates the offset value from the head address (2530h) of the ratio display segment data table.
Therefore, the offset value "7" designates the segment data stored at the address "2537h", that is, the "7" display data. Similarly, the offset value "A" would designate the segment data stored at address "253Ah", ie, the "P." display data.
Here, in the ratio display segment data table, for example, the "H." display data is "11110110B". That is, in FIG. 58, segments B, C, E, F, G, and P are set to "1 (on; lit)", and segments A and D are set to "0 (off, extinguished)", resulting in "H." display.

176 and 177 are diagrams showing the outside of the use area (second area) of the RWM 53 in the eleventh embodiment.
In the eleventh embodiment, the storage areas shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 (second embodiment) are applied as they are.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, instead of the storage area shown in FIG. 56, storage areas shown in FIGS. 176 and 177 are provided (partially including the same storage area).
First, in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 56, a 1-byte storage area is provided at the address "F291h" as the flashing request flag.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 177, the blinking request flag is divided into an identification segment blinking request flag (“F298h”) and a ratio segment blinking request flag (“F299h”). A storage area for
The reason is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 174, there are six types of ratios displayed by the ratio segment, and the ratio blinks when each of the ratios is equal to or greater than the threshold value. Therefore, 6 bits are required as a flag for determining whether or not each ratio should be blinked.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the total number of games played is less than "6000", the character ratio (6000 times) and the continuous character ratio (6000 times) are displayed blinking, and the other four ratios are displayed in total. When the number of games played is less than "175000", it is displayed blinking. Therefore, two bits are required as a flag for determining whether the total number of games played is less than "6000" and whether it is less than "175000".
Therefore, 6 bits are required as a flag to indicate whether or not to flash the ratio, and 2 bits are required as a flag to indicate whether or not to flash the display of the identification segment.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, when the total number of games played is less than "17500", the character ratio (total) and the continuous character ratio (total) are blinked. Therefore, 3 bits are required to determine whether the total number of games is less than "6000", "17500", and "175000". Therefore, 6 bits are required as a flag for indicating whether or not to flash the ratio, so the total number of bits is 9 bits, which cannot be accommodated in 1-byte data. Therefore, the blinking request flag is stored separately into the identification segment blinking request flag (“F298h”) and the ratio segment blinking request flag (“F299h”).

The ratio display number at address “F292h” is a storage area for storing numbers corresponding to ratios to be displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 .
In FIG. 56 of the second embodiment, when the ratio displayed in the interrupt processing is the instructed role product ratio, "1" is stored in the ratio display number, and when it is the continuous role product ratio (6000 times), the ratio "2" is stored as the display number, and "6" is stored as the ratio display number when it is the state ratio of the character, etc.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the initial value of the ratio display number when the power is turned on is set to "00h", and "00h" corresponds to the instructed accessory ratio. Therefore, "05h" corresponds to the role product etc. state ratio.

In addition, in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 56, a 2-byte storage area is provided for the display switching time of the addresses "F294h" and "F295h" in order to count the number of interrupts "2144".
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the display switching counter at the address "F294h" is a ring counter that cycles from "0" to "15(D)" and is a 1-byte storage area.
The display switching counter is updated by "1" when the blinking switching time of the address "F296h" counts the number of interrupts "134". Therefore, one cycle of the display switching counter corresponds to "134×16=2144" interrupts.
With this configuration, the display switching counter (corresponding to the display switching time in the second embodiment) can be configured from 1 byte, so that the storage area for 1 byte can be saved. It becomes possible to use the 1-byte portion for other storage areas.

The test display flag at address "F29Ah" stores an initial value "FFh" when the power is turned on. When the test display flag value is "FFh", the test pattern is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74, When the value is “00h”, the ratio information is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 .
Here, the above values "FFh" and "00h" are examples, and the initial value may be a value other than "FFh". Similarly, the value for displaying the ratio information on the role ratio monitor 74 may be a value other than "00h". In other words, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether to display the test pattern or the ratio information according to the value of the test display flag.
Although the details will be described later, the test pattern blinks all segments A to G and P of all digits 6 to 9 of the role ratio monitor 74 (when lit, "8.8.8.8." is displayed. ) pattern.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, segments P (segment 2P) of digits 6, 8 and 9 are indicated as "-" in FIGS. does not turn on, but blinks while the test pattern is being displayed. As described above, when the pattern indicating that the settings are being changed or confirmed is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74, at least one segment P of the digits 6 to 9 may be lit or blinked.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) in the eleventh embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 62 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 178, the same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG. Differences from FIG. 62 of the second embodiment will be mainly described below.
When the program starts, first, in step S901, the SP register of register bank 0 is set to an initial value. At power-on, the SP register value in register bank 0 is "0". Here, "F200h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 0 by the instruction "LD SP, F200h".

The value "F200h" stored here is a value obtained by adding "1" to the last address of the first stack area, as shown in FIG. When the SP register value of register bank 0 is "F200h", it indicates that data is stored (stacked) in "F1FFh".
Secondly, in step S901, "CALLEX 2100h" is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the start address of the test pattern display setting in the next step S902 is "2100h". Then, the process proceeds to step S902.
Here, the test pattern display setting and RWM checksum calculation in step S902 are executed by the second program. When the second program is executed, it is called by the CALLEX instruction and returns to the first program by the RETEX instruction as described above. Then, when the second program is executed, the register bank is switched. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the AF register save processing in step S2702 and the AF register restoration processing in step S2704 in FIG. 62 are unnecessary.

In step S902, first, test pattern display setting is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 179, which will be described later, and is a process of initializing predetermined parameters relating to the display of the test pattern. Here, the test pattern display setting has a case of initializing the parameter to "0" and a case of initializing the parameter to a predetermined value other than "0"("FFh" in the eleventh embodiment). Therefore, the initial value setting range in the test pattern display setting is excluded from the calculation range in the RWM checksum calculation in subsequent processing.
In the test pattern display setting, since the test display flag is set to "FFh" as described later, the test pattern is set to be displayed immediately after the power is turned on.
The initial value setting range in the test pattern display setting process is also excluded from the initial range set at the start of setting change in steps S2711 and S2713.
When the test pattern display setting is completed, the JP instruction that jumps to the next address "2000h" is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the start address of the RWM checksum calculation instruction is "2000h". Then, the RWM check calculation is performed.
Furthermore, when the RWM checksum calculation ends, RETEX is executed, and the program after the CALLEX instruction (step S2705) is returned to.

Also, when proceeding to the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721, as shown in FIG. 63, the interrupt process (FIG. 184 to be described later) is started at the timing after step S2724. When the interrupt process is started, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed at step S960 in FIG. is executed.
As described above, at step S902 in the program start processing, the test pattern display setting is set to display the test pattern, so the test pattern is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 immediately after the power is turned on. Although the details will be described later, the test pattern is displayed for about 5 seconds. In the interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not about 5 seconds have passed since the test pattern was displayed. When it is determined that about 5 seconds have passed, the display of the test pattern is ended and the ratio is displayed. .

FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing test pattern display setting (S_TEST_SET) in step S902 of FIG.
First, in step S903, the SP register of register bank 1 is set to an initial value since the second program is started first after the power is turned on. At power-on, the SP register value of register bank 1 is "0". Here, "F400h" is stored in the SP register of register bank 1 by the instruction "LD SP, F400h".
The value "F400h" stored here is a value obtained by adding "1" to the last address "F3FFh" of the second stack area, as shown in FIG. When the SP register value of register bank 1 is "F400h", it indicates that data is stored (stacked) in "F3FFh".

In the next step S904, the RWM for test pattern display is initialized. In the eleventh embodiment, the data (parameters) to be initialized are the ratio display number, the display switching counter, the flashing switching time, the LED display counter 2, and the test display flag, as shown in FIG. The test display flag is set to "FFh" as an initial value. The initial values of the other four data are "00h". After setting these initial values, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
The ratio display number is set to the initial value "00h". As a result, the ratio display after turning on the power is executed from the instructed accessory ratio (total) as shown in FIG.
Also, the display switching counter is set to the initial value "00h". As a result, the same display continues for about 5 seconds.
Furthermore, the blink switching time is set to the initial value "00h".

Furthermore, the LED display counter 2 is set to the initial value "00h". Although the details will be described later, when the LED display counter 2 is "00h", the initialization processing of the LED display counter 2 is executed and becomes "00001000B". As a result, the target digit for dynamic lighting is designated as digit 6 (see address "F297h" in FIG. 177).
Also, the test display flag is set to the initial value "FFh". Here, the test display flag has a value of "FFh" or "00h". When the test display flag is "FFh", it means to display the test pattern on the role ratio monitor 74. When the test display flag is "00h", it means to display the ratio information on the role ratio monitor 74. Point.
As described above, when the program start processing is executed after the power is turned on, the predetermined data of the RWM for test pattern display is initialized.

FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) in the eleventh embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 67 in the second embodiment. The same step numbers are given to the same processes as in FIG.
In the eleventh embodiment, since the stack pointer is set in the program start process, the process of step S271 in FIG. 67 is unnecessary.
Also, as described above, when the second program is executed, the register bank is switched to 1, so the AF register save in step S297 before the ratio setting process in step S298 in FIG. 67 (corresponding to step S910 in FIG. 180). , and AF register return in step S299 after the ratio setting process is unnecessary.
Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, when executing the ratio setting process of step S910, interrupts are prohibited by the CALLEX instruction, so a unique interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction) as in step S296 of FIG. 67 is unnecessary. Similarly, after the ratio setting process, the interrupt prohibited by the RETEX instruction for returning to the first program is permitted, so a unique interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) such as step S300 in FIG. 67 is unnecessary. .

The reason why the process waits for an interrupt in step S295 when executing the ratio setting process in step S910 is as follows.
In step S295, wait for an interrupt is executed, and immediately after the interrupt processing is started, a CALLEX instruction is executed for ratio setting processing. Execution of the CALLEX instruction inhibits interrupt processing as described above. After completion of the ratio setting process, the RETEX instruction is executed to permit interrupt processing.
Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the ratio setting process (ratio calculation of six items) is performed in a time shorter than the interrupt period of "2.235 ms", specifically for example, in a time of about "0.5" ms. configured to terminate.

If the ratio setting process is executed at an interrupt timing after "2" ms have elapsed since the start of the interrupt process, the next interrupt timing will come while the ratio setting process is being executed. However, since interrupt processing is prohibited during the ratio setting process, interrupt processing cannot be executed at the next interrupt timing. The interrupt processing of the incoming interrupt timing is executed.
In this way, if the interrupt processing cannot be executed when the interrupt cycle arrives, for example, the LED display control in step S2821 in FIG. ms) is not executed. As a result, for example, after an interrupt process is executed, if the next interrupt process is executed after a certain period ("2.235" ms) has passed, the digits 1 to 4 will appear dark for a moment. There is a risk of giving to the player.
Further, while interrupts are disabled, the power-off process cannot be executed in step S2771 in FIG.
On the other hand, if the ratio setting process is started after waiting for an interrupt, the next interrupt cycle will arrive after about "2.235" ms has elapsed from the start of the ratio setting process. Then, when the next interrupt period arrives, the ratio setting process is completed, so when the next interrupt period arrives, the interrupt is permitted and the interrupt process can be executed.

In FIG. 180, although an error is detected in the range enclosed by the chain double-dashed line, error notification and game progress stop processing are not executed.
Since the interrupt process is executed even during the period from the start switch acceptance process of step S279 until all the reels 31 stop (step S289), the error check in the interrupt process (the step of FIG. S463) is being executed, when an error occurs, the error is detected, and the type of the detected error is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 . With this configuration, it is possible to smoothly progress the game while preventing fraudulent acts of illegally obtaining game media by intentionally causing an error.
However, even if an error occurs, the progress of the game is not stopped until all the reels 31 stop after the start switch acceptance process, and the progress of the game is stopped after all the reels 31 stop. Instead of such a configuration, when an error occurs during the period from the start switch acceptance process to the stop of all the reels 31, the error is reported and the progress of the game is stopped even during that time. It may be configured to

FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the rate setting process (S_RATE_SET) in step S910 of FIG.
First, in step S911, the upper address of the RWM 53 is set in the Q register of the register bank 1. FIG. This process is a process of storing "F2h" in the Q register. This processing is performed because the addresses of the RWM 53 used in the ratio setting processing are all addresses starting with "F2h" (see FIGS. 55 and 176), so updating the address of the RWM 53, etc., and reading processing commands are executed. This is because it can be simplified.

In the next step S912, a counter upper limit check is performed. This process is a process of storing "F28Fh", which is the address of the RWM 53 storing the count upper limit flag, in a predetermined register (for example, the HL register).
Next, proceeding to step S913, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games upper limit flag is on. This determination is made by determining whether or not the D0 bit of the data (count upper limit flag) stored at the address (F28Fh) indicated by the HL register value is "1". Determine that the flag is on. When it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S916, and when it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S914. That is, when it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is ON, the total number-of-games count in step S914 and the number-of-accessories-and-the-games count in step S915 are not executed.
In step S914, the total number of games played is counted. This process is a process of adding "1" to the total number of games counter of the address "F26Dh".
In step S915, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in which a continuous accessory is activated or a game in which an accessory is activated. When it is determined that it is a game in which a continuous accessory or accessory has been activated, "1" is added to the accessory state counter at address "F285h".

In the next step S916, the total number of payouts is counted. This process is a process of adding the number of payouts to the total payout (6000 times) counter at the address "F273h" and the total payout (total) counter at the address "F27Ch".
In the next step S917, the number of payouts of the accessory is counted. In this process, when the payout in the current game is the payout in the role product activated game, the number of payouts is stored in the role product payout (6000 times) counter at address “F279h” and the role product payout (total) counter at address “F282h”. This is a process of adding .
In the next step S918, the continuous accessory payout number count is executed. In this process, when the payout in the current game is the payout in the game in which the continuous accessory has been activated, the continuous accessory payout (6000 times) counter at address "F276h" and the continuous accessory payout (accumulated total) at address "F27Fh" ) is the process of adding the number of payouts to the counter.
Furthermore, in the next step S919, the instructed accessory payout number count is executed. This process is a process of adding the number of payouts to the instructed accessory counter at the address "F270h" when the payout in the current game is the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated or in the game in which the accessory is activated.

Next, the process advances to step S920 to update the 400 game counter. This process is a process of adding "1" to the 400 game counter at address "F210h" (FIG. 55).
The 400 game counter is a counter that cycles from "0" to "399(D)". Therefore, when "399 (D)" is stored in the 400 game counter, adding "1" results in "0". Note that the 400 game counter may be subtracted.
Next, the process advances to step S921 to execute the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) (FIG. 182). This process is a process of calculating the six ratios described above and storing the calculation results in predetermined addresses of the RWM 53 (specifically, addresses "F288h" to "F28Dh" in FIG. 176).
The flow then advances to step S922 to execute ring buffer update. This process determines whether or not 400 games have passed since the previous update of the ring buffer number, and updates the ring buffer number when it is determined that it has passed.
Then, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 182 is a flow chart showing the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in step S921 of FIG.
First, in step S931, a ratio calculation table is set. Details of the ratio calculation table will be omitted, but the ratio calculation table includes a payout counter and game number counter (dividend value and divisor value) used for ratio calculation, and ratio data for storing calculation results. This is a table for specifying the address of the RWM 53, etc., and the process of setting this table. The next step S932 is a process of moving to the head address of the ratio calculation table used for calculating the next ratio. The RWM 53 has a storage area of 6 bytes for calculating one ratio, and the update process here is a process of moving the address of the ratio calculation table by 6 bytes.
In the next step S933, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the ratios of the six items has been completed. When it is determined that the calculation of the ratio has been completed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the calculation of the ratio has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S934.

In step S934, it is determined whether or not the ratio is calculated for each game. As shown in FIG. 174, in the eleventh embodiment, the state ratio of the character, etc. is calculated every game, and the other five items are calculated every 400 games. Therefore, when the ratio to be calculated next is the condition ratio of the role product, etc., it is determined to be "Yes", and when it is another ratio, it is determined to be "No". When it is the ratio calculated every game (accessory state ratio), the process proceeds to step S936, and when it is not the ratio calculated every game, the process proceeds to step S935.
In step S935, it is determined whether or not 400 games have passed. Here, when the 400 game counter value stored at the address "F210h" in FIG. 55 is the value after 400 games have passed, the determination is "Yes". If it is determined in step S935 that 400 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S936, and if it is determined that 400 games have not passed, the process returns to step S932.
It should be noted that the 400 game counter is not initialized when the power is turned on/off in the normal state or when the setting change mode is entered in the normal state. On the other hand, when an unrecoverable error occurs and the power is turned off, then the power is turned on, the setting change mode is entered, and the RWM initialization process is executed, the 400 game counter is cleared.
The above also applies to the counters and flags of the role ratio monitor, such as the count upper limit flag.

At step S936, it is determined whether or not the total number of games played or the total number of payouts has exceeded the upper limit. If the upper limit is exceeded, the calculation of the ratio is not executed, so it is determined that the calculation is not being executed. Specifically, in FIG. 176, when the D0 or D1 bit in the count upper limit flag of the address "F28Fh" is "1", it is determined that the upper limit is exceeded. When the upper limit is exceeded, it is judged that the calculation is not being executed, and the process returns to step S932. On the other hand, when the upper limit is not exceeded, it is determined that the calculation is being executed, and the process proceeds to step S937.

Proceeding to step S937, the address of the RWM 53, which is the dividend, is set in the register. In the next step S938, 100 times the dividend is set. This process is a process of setting "100 (D) (64h)" in a predetermined register.
In the next step S939, a process of writing "100 (D)" set in step S937 to the multiplicand setting register is executed. In other words, by storing "100(D)" in the multiplicand setting register and setting the dividend in the multiplier setting register, the process of multiplying the dividend by 100 is executed. This is because the ratio is calculated in percentage by dividing the value obtained by multiplying the dividend by 100 by the divisor.
The process of multiplying the dividend by 100 is divided into the process of multiplying the lower 2 bytes of the dividend by 100 and the process of multiplying the upper 1 byte of the dividend by 100.
Therefore, in the next step S940, the lower 2 bytes of the dividend are obtained. This process is a process of setting the value of the lower 2 bytes of the dividend RWM address acquired in step S937 to the register. Then, in the next step S941, the value obtained in step S940 (value of the lower 2 bytes of the dividend) is written in the multiplier setting register. As a result, the value of the lower two bytes of the dividend is written to the multiplier setting register, and "100 (D)" is written to the multiplicand setting register. A value obtained by multiplying the value of the lower 2 bytes by 100 is written.

Next, the process advances to step S942 to acquire the value of the upper 1 byte of the dividend. This process is a process of setting the upper 1-byte value of the dividend RWM address acquired in step S937 in a register.
In the next step S943, the value of the upper 1 byte of the dividend is multiplied by 100. In other words, in the process of multiplying the upper 1 byte of the dividend by 100, the 100-fold value is calculated on the program without entering values into the multiplier setting register, the multiplicand setting register, and the multiplication result register (without using the multiplication circuit). do. Note that a multiplication circuit may be used to calculate a 100-fold value.
Then, the process advances to step S944 to write the value to be the dividend in the dividend setting register. Here, the following processing is executed.
1) As described above, the multiplication result register (4 bytes) stores the value obtained by multiplying the value of the lower 2 bytes of the dividend by 100. Obtain the value of the lower 2 bytes of the multiplication result register, Write to the lower 2 bytes of the dividend setting register.
2) Get the value of the upper two bytes of the multiplication result register. This value corresponds to the carried portion of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the lower two bytes of the dividend by 100. Therefore, this carry is added to "the value obtained by multiplying the value of the upper 1 byte of the dividend by 100" calculated in step S943.
3) Write the "value obtained by multiplying the value of the upper 1 byte of the dividend by 100 (after carry addition)" calculated in 2) above into the dividend setting register.
As described above, a value obtained by multiplying the dividend by 100 is written in the dividend setting register.
Next, in step S945, the address of the RWM 53, which is the divisor, is set in the register. Then, in the next step S946, the data (divisor) stored at the address set in step S945 is written in the divisor setting register. As a result, the dividend is written to the dividend setting register, the divisor is written to the divisor setting register, and the division result is written to the division result register.

Here, the processing of steps S938 to S946 will be described using specific numerical values. In addition, in the following specific numerical values, decimal numerical values are written in parentheses.
In this example,
Dividend: 249F0h (150000)
Divisor: 493E0h (300000)
shall be
In step S939, "64h (100)" is written in the multiplicand setting register.
Next, in step S941, the lower 2-byte value "49F0h (18928)" of the dividend is written in the multiplier setting register.
Therefore,
Multiplicand setting register value: 64h (100)
Multiplier setting register value: 49F0h (18928)
Multiplication result register value: 001CE1C0h (1892800)
becomes.
In the next step S942, "2h", which is the upper 1 byte of the dividend, is set in the register,
Next, in step S943, "2h", which is the upper byte of the dividend, is multiplied by "64h (100)". The multiplication result is "C8h(200)".

In step S944, the following processing is executed.
1) Write the lower 2-byte value "E1C0h (57792)" of the multiplication result register into the lower 2 bytes of the dividend setting register.
2) Add the multiplication result "C8h (200)" obtained in step S943 to the upper 2-byte value "001Ch (28)" of the multiplication result register.
001Ch(28)+C8h(200)=00E4h(228)
3) Write "00E4h (228)" to the upper two bytes of the dividend setting register.
This will
Dividend setting register value: 00E4E1C0h (15000000)
Thus, the value of the dividend setting register is the value obtained by multiplying the dividend (150000) by 100.

In step S946, a 3-byte value (0493E0h (300000)) is written in the divisor setting register.
1st byte of divisor setting register: E0h
Second byte of divisor setting register: 93h
3rd byte of divisor setting register: 04h
This will
Dividend setting register value: 00E4E1C0h (15000000)
Divisor setting register value: 0493E0h (300000)
Division result register value: 32h (50)
Remainder result register value: 00h
becomes.

Returning to the description of FIG.
In step S947, the address of the RWM 53 of ratio data is obtained. This process is a process of acquiring the address of the RWM 53 that stores the ratio (division result) calculated this time. Next, in step S948, the value stored in the division result register is read. Here, the division result register consists of 4 bytes, but what is actually read is the lowest 1-byte value. This is because the ratio, which is the result of division, ranges from "0" to "64h (100(D))" if it is a normal value, so it is sufficient to read the value of the least significant 1 byte.
In the next step S949, the least significant 1-byte value (the value of "FF1Bh" in FIG. 172) of the value (4-byte value) stored in the division result register is acquired, and the value is "FFh". determine whether there is
Here, as described above, when the value stored in the divisor setting register is "0", regardless of the value stored in the dividend setting register (even if the value of the dividend setting register is "0"). ), the division circuit is configured so that the value of the division result register is "FFFFFFFFh". Therefore, when the least significant byte of the division result register value is "FFh", it can be inferred that the value stored in the divisor register is "0".
Another example where the value of the division result register is "FFFFFFFFh" is
(1) After the power is turned on, even though an instruction to set a value in the dividend setting register and divisor setting register is executed, the correct operation is not executed and the division result register remains at the initial value. ,
(2) When "FFFFFFFFh" is stored in the dividend setting register and "1h" is stored in the divisor setting register due to noise or the like,
etc.

When it is determined in step S949 that the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is "FFh", the process returns to step S932 to proceed to calculation of the next ratio. In other words, when the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is "FFh" (when the divisor is "0"), the ratio is not updated (step S953 is not executed). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is not "FFh", the process proceeds to step S950. At step S950, "99 (D) (63h)" is set as the division result. In the next step S951, it is determined whether or not the division result register value is "100 (D) (64h)". In this case as well, the determination is made based only on the value of the least significant 1 byte of the division result register. When it is judged to be "100 (D)", the process proceeds to step S953, and "99 (D)" set in step S950 is stored in the RWM 53 as ratio data. Then, the process returns to step S933. In other words, when the division result is "100(D)", "99(D)(63h)" is stored in the RWM 53 as the ratio data.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S951 that the division result is not "100 (D)", the process advances to step S952 to set the value stored in the division result register (lowest 1 byte value of the division result register). do. Then, in the next step S953, the value is saved (stored) in the RWM 53 as ratio data. Specifically, when the ratio data is the instructed role product ratio data, it is stored at the address "F288h", and when the ratio data is the continuous role product ratio data (6000 times), it is stored at the address "F289h", When the ratio data is role product ratio (6000 times) data, it is stored at address "F28Ah", and when the ratio data is continuous role product ratio (total) data, it is stored at address "F28Bh", When the ratio data is item ratio (accumulated) data, it is stored at address "F28Ch", and when the ratio data is role item state ratio data, it is stored at address "F28Dh".
After that, the process returns to step S933. Therefore, when it is judged that the division result is not "100 (D)", the initially set "99 (D)" is not used.

In the above ratio data storage method, if the value of the lowest byte of the division result register is not "FFh" and is not "100 (D) (64h)", the lowest byte of the division result register is A 1-byte value is stored in RWM 53 as ratio data.
Therefore, when the lowest 1-byte value of the division result register is "101(D)(65h)" to "254(D)(FEh)", the value is stored in the RWM 53 as ratio data. Even if a value exceeding "100 (D)" is stored in the RWM 53 as the ratio data, when the ratio is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 based on the ratio data, the identification segment is normal. display.
For example, when "101(D)(65h)" is stored as ratio data in the RWM 53, dividing "101(D)(65h)" by "10(D)(Ah)" yields a quotient of "10(D) )(Ah)” and the remainder is “1”. The remainder "1" becomes the offset value of the lower digits of the ratio. In the ratio display segment data table of FIG. 175, when the offset value is "1" from the start address "2530h", "1" display data is selected.
Further, regarding the quotient "10(D)(Ah)", the value "00001010B" obtained by ANDing the quotient "10(D)(Ah)" = "00001010(B)" and "00001111(B)", that is, " 10” is the offset value of the upper digit. Therefore, in the ratio display segment data table of FIG. 175, when the offset value is "10" from the start address "2530h", the "P." display data is selected.
Therefore, when "101 (D) (65h)" is stored as the ratio data in the RWM 53, the ratio is displayed as "P.0".
As a result, if the ratio of the display target is, for example, the instructed role ratio, the role ratio monitor 74 displays "7P.P.0".
Similarly, if it is an advantageous section ratio, it will be displayed as "7U.P.0", if it is a continuous role ratio (6000 times), it will be displayed as "6y.P.0", and if it is a role ratio (6000 times) If there is, it will be displayed as "7y.P.0", if it is the role ratio (cumulative) it will be displayed as "6A.P.0", if it is the role ratio (cumulative) it will be displayed as "7A.P.0" If it is the state ratio of the role item, etc., "5H.P.0" is displayed.

Similarly to the above, when "110(D)" is stored as the ratio data in the RWM 53, the ratio is displayed as "y.0".
As a result, if the ratio of the display target is, for example, the instructed role ratio, the role ratio monitor 74 displays “7P.y.0”.
Similarly, if it is an advantageous section ratio, it is displayed as "7U.y.0", if it is a continuous role ratio (6000 times), it is displayed as "6y.y.0", and in the role ratio (6000 times) If there is, it will be displayed as "7y.y.0", if it is the role ratio (total), it will be displayed as "6A.y.0", and if it is the role ratio (total), it will be displayed as "7A.y.0" is displayed, and if it is the state ratio of accessories, etc., "5H.y.0" is displayed.
Further, when "120(D)" is stored as the ratio data in the RWM 53, the ratio is displayed as "A.0".
As a result, if the ratio of the display target is, for example, the instructed role ratio, the role ratio monitor 74 displays “7P.A.0”.
Similarly, if it is an advantageous section ratio, it is displayed as "7U.A.0", if it is a continuous role ratio (6000 times), it is displayed as "6y.A.0", and in the role ratio (6000 times) If there is, it will be displayed as "7y.A.0", if it is the role ratio (total), it will be displayed as "6A.A.0", and if it is the role ratio (cumulative), it will be displayed as "7A.A.0" is displayed, and if it is the state ratio of the role item, etc., "5H.A.0" is displayed.
Furthermore, when "130(D)" is stored as the ratio data in the RWM 53, the ratio is displayed as "H.0".
As a result, if the ratio of the display target is, for example, the instructed role ratio, the role ratio monitor 74 displays "7P.H.0".
Similarly, if it is an advantageous section ratio, it will be displayed as "7U.H.0", if it is a continuous role ratio (6000 times), it will be displayed as "6y.H.0", and if it is a role ratio (6000 times) If there is, it will be displayed as "7y.H.0", if it is the role ratio (total), it will be displayed as "6A.H.0", and if it is the role ratio (cumulative), it will be displayed as "7A.H.0" If it is the state ratio of the role item, etc., "5H.H.0" is displayed.
Next, when "140(D)" is stored as the ratio data in the RWM 53, the upper digit offset value is "14". The address "253Eh" corresponding to the offset value "14" from is not present in the ratio display segment data table. In this case, some other data stored at address "253Eh" is displayed as the high-order digits of the ratio.
For example, when the display based on some data is "??", the role ratio monitor 74 displays "7P.?"
Similarly, if it is an advantageous section ratio, it will be displayed as "7U.?""7y.?" is displayed, "6A.?" If the ratio is equal, "5H.?" is displayed.
When "150(D)" is stored as the ratio data in the RWM 53, similarly to the above, the address "253Fh" corresponding to the offset value "15" from the top address "2530h" is stored in the ratio display segment data table. not exist. In this case, some other data stored at address "253Fh" is displayed as the high order digits of the ratio. In this case, the display mode displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 is the same as described above.

Next, when "160(D)" is stored as the ratio data in the RWM 53, dividing "160(D)" by "10" results in a quotient of "16" and a remainder of "0". The value "00000000(B)" obtained by ANDing the quotients "16(D)""00010000(B)" and "00001111(B)" is the upper digit offset value. Therefore, since the upper digits are displayed as "0", the ratio is displayed as "00" when the ratio data is "160(D)".
As a result, if the ratio of the display target is, for example, the instructed role ratio, the role ratio monitor 74 displays "7P.00".
Similarly, if it is an advantageous section ratio, it will be displayed as “7U.00”, if it is a continuous role ratio (6000 times), it will be displayed as “6y.00”, and if it is a role ratio (6000 times), it will be displayed as “7y 00", if it is the role ratio (total), it will be displayed as "6A.00", if it is the role ratio (cumulative), it will be displayed as "7A.00", and if it is the state ratio of the role For example, "5H.00" is displayed.
Similarly,
Ratio data "170 (D)": Display ratio "10" Ratio data "180 (D)": Display ratio "20" Ratio data "190 (D)": Display ratio "30" Ratio data "200 ( D)”: display ratio “40” Ratio data “210 (D)”: display ratio “50” Ratio data “220 (D)”: display ratio “60” Ratio data “230 (D)”: ratio Display as "70" Ratio data "240(D)": Display as ratio "80" Ratio data "250(D)": Display as ratio "90" Ratio data "254(D)": Display as ratio "94" becomes.
In this case, the display mode displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 is the same as described above.
In addition, if the ratio data exceeds "100 (D)", the instructed accessory ratio, advantageous section ratio, continuous accessory ratio (6000 times), accessory ratio (6000 times), accessory ratio (total), role Since both the item ratio (accumulated) and the accessory state ratio exceed the threshold values, the ratio display blinks.
Therefore, for example, when the ratio data is "200 (D)", the ratio is displayed as "40", but since "40" is displayed blinking, it can be determined that an abnormal value is displayed.
As a result, if the ratio of the display target is, for example, the designated role ratio, "7P.40" is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74, and "40" blinks.
Similarly, if it is the advantageous section ratio, "7U.40" is displayed, and "40" is displayed blinking. Also, if it is the continuous role product ratio (6000 times), "6y.40" is displayed, and "40" is blinking. Furthermore, if the character ratio is 6000 times, "7y.40" is displayed, and "40" is displayed blinking. Furthermore, if it is the role product ratio (total), "6A.40" is displayed, and "40" is displayed blinking. Also, if it is the role product ratio (cumulative), "7A.40" is displayed, and "40" is blinking. Furthermore, if it is the state ratio of the accessory, etc., "5H.40" is displayed, and "40" blinks.
In the above case, when the identification seg also satisfies the blinking condition of the reference number of games, not only the ratio seg but also the identification seg blinks.

Since the division result is normally within the range of "0" to "100 (D)", if the division result is a normal value, all three bytes except the least significant byte of the division result register are " 0”. Therefore, it should be sufficient to read only the lowest 1-byte value of the division result register.
However, even if the three bytes of the division result register, excluding the least significant byte, are values other than "0", the ratio may be displayed normally. Examples are given below.
(Example 1)
Assume that the divisor is "1" and the dividend is "5592405(D)".
In this case, the quotient (division result) is "5592405(D)"="555555h". Therefore, when the lowest 1-byte value of the division result register is obtained, "55h"="85(D)".
Therefore, the ratio in this case is displayed as "85". However, when the ratio is "85", the threshold value is exceeded regardless of the ratio of the six items, so the display is blinking.
(Example 2)
Assume that the divisor is "1" and the dividend is "5592335 (D)".
In this case, the quotient (division result) is "5592335 (D)"="55550Fh". Therefore, when the lowest 1-byte value of the division result register is obtained, "0Fh"="15(D)".
In this way, the division result itself exceeds the ratio threshold for any ratio of the six items, so it is subject to blinking display. Since the value is less than the value, the display is lit.
As described above, when the least significant 1-byte value of the division result register is obtained, a ratio within the range of design values may be displayed.

Since it is a rare case that the above occurs, it is usually sufficient to acquire only the lowest 1-byte value of the division result register.
However, it is also possible to acquire the value of 3 bytes other than the least significant byte of the division result register and determine whether or not it is "0".
For example, when the value of 3 bytes other than the least significant byte of the division result register is "000000", it is determined that the value of the least significant 1 byte of the division result register is a normal value.
On the other hand, when the value of the three bytes other than the lowest byte of the division result register is a value other than "000000", it is determined that the value of the lowest one byte of the division result register is an abnormal value.
And when it is judged to be an abnormal value,
1) Do not save the ratio data in the RWM 53 2) Save in the RWM 53 a value that can be identified as an abnormal value as the ratio data 3) Display the ratio in a manner that can be identified as an abnormal value (for example 4) Storing a correction value (for example, "99(D)") in the RWM 53 as the ratio data.

Since the above ratio calculation processing is the second program, no interrupt processing is executed during the ratio calculation processing.
In other words, no interrupt process is executed during the process of setting the values of the multiplicand setting register and the multiplier setting register and the process of storing the multiplier result in the multiplication result register.
Similarly, the processing of setting the values of the dividend setting register and the divisor setting register, the processing of storing the quotient and the remainder in the division result register and the remainder result register, and the values of the division result register and the remainder result register are read and sent to the RWM 53. Interrupt processing is not executed until the data is saved.
On the other hand, if interrupt processing is not executed, power-off processing (step S2771 in FIG. 184) is not executed. Therefore, until the value is stored in the multiplication/division register and the values of the division result register and the remainder result register are stored in the RWM 53, the power interruption process is not executed.
For example, after setting a value (assuming this value is "A") in the dividend setting register and setting a value (assuming this value is "B") in the divisor setting register, the value stored in the division result register is If power-off processing is executed before the acquisition, the value of the division result register after the value corresponding to the quotient of "A/B" is stored in the division result register cannot be acquired. , for example, "FFh", which is the initial value of the division result register. In other words, even if the condition for updating the RWM 53 (for example, execution of "400" games played) is satisfied, the RWM 53 may not be updated when the power-off process is executed.
However, since the power interruption process is not executed until the value is stored in the multiplication/division register and the values of the division result register and the remainder result register are saved in the RWM 53, such a situation can be prevented. can do.

The time from when the divisor is stored in the divisor setting register in step S946 to when the division result is stored in the division result register is "4" SLCK (system clock) in the eleventh embodiment. Since the system clock in the eleventh embodiment is "16" MHz, "4" SLCK corresponds to approximately "0.25" microseconds.
On the other hand, the "ratio data RWM address acquisition" of step S947 is composed of a plurality of instructions, and the processing of step S947 is configured to take about "6" SCLKs.
Therefore, when the value of the division result register is read in step S948 after the divisor is stored in the divisor setting register in step S946, the division result is already stored in the division result register. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide standby processing (for example, loop processing for elapse of "4" SCLK) after the processing of step S946 until the processing of step S948 is executed.

183 is a flowchart showing a modification of FIG. 182. FIG. In the example of FIG. 182, when the ratio exceeds "100%", for example, when it is "101%", "P.0" is displayed.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 183, when the ratio data is "100 (D) (64h)" or more and "254 (D) (FEh)" or less, "99% (63h)" is RWM53 stored in
In FIG. 183, in step S949, it is determined whether or not the least significant 1-byte value of the division result register is "FFh", and if it is "FFh", the process returns to step S933. This point is the same as the example in FIG.
In step S950, after "99(D)(63h)" is set as the ratio data, in the next step S954, the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is set to "63h(99(D))". to determine whether it exceeds When it is determined that it exceeds "63h (99(D))", the process advances to step S953 to set "99(D)" as the ratio data. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lowest 1-byte value of the division result register does not exceed "63h (99(D))", the lowest 1-byte value of the division result register value is saved as ratio data.
In this way, it is first determined in step S949 whether or not the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is "FFh". By determining, it is practically possible to determine whether the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is within the range of "64h" to "FEh", thereby simplifying the processing. be able to.

This will
1) When the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is "FFh", the ratio data is not updated (RWM 53 is not updated).
2) When the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is "99(D)" or less, the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is stored in the RWM 53 as ratio data.
3) When the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is within the range of "100 (D)" to "254 (D)", "99 (D)" is stored in RWM 53 as the ratio data. .
Note that when "99 (D)" is stored as the ratio data, it is displayed blinking because it exceeds the threshold regardless of the ratio of the six items.

As described above, when the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is "FFh", the ratio data stored in the RWM 53 is not updated, and the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is "FFh". FFh", the ratio data stored in the RWM 53 is updated.
For example, it is assumed that "40 (D)" is newly stored as instructed accessory ratio data. As a result, "40" is displayed in the ratio segment on the role ratio monitor 74 when the instructed role product ratio is displayed. Until 400 games have passed, "40" is displayed in the ratio segment when displaying the instructed accessory ratio. After 400 games have passed, it is assumed that "Yes" is obtained in step S935 of the ratio calculation process (FIG. 182 or FIG. 183), and the value of the least significant 1 byte of the division result register is "FFh" when the calculation is executed. In this case, since the instructed role ratio data is not updated, "40" is displayed in the ratio segment when displaying the instructed role ratio until 400 games have passed since that time ( The ratio segment displays the same value as the previously displayed ratio). On the other hand, if the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is not "FFh", the ratio data of the RWM 53 is updated, and the ratio segment of that ratio is displayed based on the latest ratio data. It should be noted that the ratio data may be updated to the same value as the previous ratio data. In this case, the display of the ratio segment itself is the same as the previous time.
Examples of instructed role ratio data have been given above. The same applies to the data and the condition ratio data of accessories and the like.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the eleventh embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 68 in the second embodiment.
In the interrupt process, the processes of steps S960 to S460 are executed by the second program. Others are processing in the first program.
In the eleventh embodiment, since the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction are used in the same manner as described above, AF register saving when moving from the first program to the second program and AF register restoring when moving from the second program to the first program are becomes unnecessary.
Since duplicate interrupts are prohibited in step S452 when transitioning to interrupt processing, interrupts are not prohibited again when transitioning to the second program.
In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S960 is a process shown in FIG. 185 to be described later.

FIG. 185 is a flow chart showing ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) executed in interrupt processing.
Preparation for ratio display is a process during interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt process can be executed even in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, during the game (from the operation of the start switch 41 until all the reels 31 stop and the payout process ends), and in the recoverable error state. Therefore, the ratio information can be displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 even in these states. Note that, as described above, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, specific displays other than the ratio information may be displayed.
On the other hand, since interrupt processing is not executed while an unrecoverable error is occurring, ratio information is not displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 .

When an unrecoverable error occurs, in step S1494 of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 64 or unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 00000000 (B)”).
As a result, the outputs from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) become "00000000 (B)", so recovery is impossible. Digits 6 to 9 of the role ratio monitor 74 are all turned off until the error state is canceled and the interrupt process is restarted.
Digits 6-9 of the role ratio monitor 74 all remain unlit, which is unique to non-recoverable error conditions. As a result, the manager (hall clerk) can know that there is an unrecoverable error state by seeing that the role ratio monitor 74 is completely turned off.

In FIG. 185, in step S961, flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 186 to be described later, and is a process of updating the identification segment blinking request flag at address "F298h" and the ratio segment blinking request flag at address "F299h" in FIG.
In the next step S962, a ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 187 to be described later, and is a process of updating the flashing switching flag at address "F293h", the display switching counter at address "F294h", and the flashing switching time at address "F296h".
In the next step S963, ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is performed. This processing is processing shown in FIG. 188 to be described later, and is processing for actually displaying (lighting or extinguishing) the ratio information during the interrupt processing.
Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S961 of FIG.
First, in step S971, the number of repetitions and data for a flashing request flag are set. This process stores "6h" in the B register as the repeat count. The number of repetitions "6" means that it is repeatedly determined whether or not to blink for 6 ratio segments.
In addition, "00000000B" is stored in the C register as the initial value of the flashing request flag data.

In the next step S972, the address of the flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table is set. This process is to store the start address "2500h" of the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) shown in FIG. 75 in the DE register.
"Non-applicable item" means that the function (performance) corresponding to the item is not provided. However, in the eleventh embodiment, since the ratios of all six items are displayed, there are no unapplicable items.
In the next step S973, the address of the ratio data RWM 53 is set. This process is a process of storing the address (“F28Dh” in FIG. 176) where the role product state ratio data is stored in the HL register.
Next, the process advances to step S974 to acquire a flashing or non-corresponding item determination value. Here, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value (50h) stored at the address value "2500h" indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S975, it is determined whether or not it is a non-applicable item value. In this process, "DDh" is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is "0" (zero flag="1"), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
If it is a non-applicable item, "DEh" is stored in the flashing/non-applicable item determination value table. As a result, the zero flag becomes "1".
As shown in FIG. 75, since the ratios of all six items are calculated and displayed in the eleventh embodiment as well, "DEh" is not stored at any address in the flashing/non-corresponding item determination value table.
If it is determined not to be a non-applicable item value, the process proceeds to the next step S976, and if it is determined to be a non-applicable item value, the process skips step S976 and proceeds to step S977.
Therefore, steps S974 and S975 are unnecessary in the case of the eleventh embodiment.

In step S976, ratio data is obtained. This process is a process of storing in the A register the value (here, the role item state ratio) stored at the address (F28Dh) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S977, the ratio data or non-applicable item values are saved. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value.
This process has the following meanings.
If there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 in which the ratio data is stored before the save process.
For example, if "RB (first class special bonus)" is not provided, continuous bonus ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289h") and continuous bonus ratio (total) data (address "F28Bh") is stored with "0".
At that time, if "0" is stored in the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) data, "00" is displayed when the continuous role product ratio (6000 times) is displayed. In order to prevent this, the value of the A register acquired in step S975 ("DDh" if the item is not applicable) is stored as ratio data.

In the case of a non-applicable item, "--" is displayed as a ratio, but in the eleventh embodiment, since all the ratios of six items are displayed, there is no non-applicable item. Therefore, the "-" display data is not provided in the ratio display segment data table shown in FIG. If there is a non-applicable item, for example, segment data "01000000B" for displaying "-" at address "253Eh" should be stored.
By constructing the program as shown in FIG. 186, it is possible to use a common program between a gaming machine having non-applicable items and a gaming machine having no non-applicable items.

In the next step S978, blink determination is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the value of the address indicated by the DE register value (ratio threshold) from the A register value (ratio). As a result of the operation, when there is a carry-down, the carry flag becomes "1".
For example, when the value of the role product etc. state ratio is "40", the value (threshold value of the role product etc. state ratio) stored at the address "2500h" is "50". When 50” is subtracted, the carry flag becomes “1”. On the other hand, when the value of the role item state ratio is "60", the carry flag is "0" when "50" is subtracted from "60". Therefore, when the carry flag is "1", it means that the item is displayed in the lighting mode (less than the threshold value), and when the carry flag is "0", the item is displayed. Time means that it is in a blinking mode (beyond the threshold).

Next, the process advances to step S979 to update the blinking request flag data. Specifically, arithmetic processing is performed to rotate-shift the carry flag and the C register value to the left.
For example, if the carry flag value is "CY" and the C register value is "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
"CY", C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0"
of,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Calculation is performed as follows.
Here, when the C register value is the initial value "00000000B" as shown in step S971 and the carry flag is "1" in step S978,
"1", C register value "00000000B"
of,
"0", C register value "00000001B"
Calculation is performed as follows.
In the next step S980, the RWM address of the next ratio data is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
For example, the HL register value in the first flashing determination is "F28Dh" (accessory item state ratio data) as described above. Here, when "1" is subtracted, the HL register value becomes "F28Ch" (accessory ratio (accumulated) data) which is the second flashing determination target.
In the next step S981, the address of the next blinking/non-corresponding item determination value table is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the DE register value. Since the DE register value initially stores "2500h", it becomes "2501h" by this processing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 75, the next address is the address in which the threshold value of the role product ratio (total) is stored.

Next, the process advances to step S982 to determine whether or not the repetition has ended. Here, the following processing is executed. Here, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value is "0", it is determined that the repetition has been completed. When it is determined that the repetition has been completed, the process proceeds to step S983, and when it is determined that the repetition has not been completed, the process returns to step S974.
As described above, six items of flashing determination are performed.
Assuming that the C register values after the six items of flashing determination are "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0",
D7:0
D6:0
D5: blinking determination data (0 or 1) of state ratio of accessories, etc.
D4: Blinking determination data (0 or 1) of character ratio (cumulative)
D3: Blinking determination data (0 or 1) of continuous accessory ratio (cumulative)
D2: Blinking determination data (0 or 1) of the role ratio (6000 times)
D1: Blinking determination data (0 or 1) of continuous role ratio (6000 times)
D0: Blinking determination data (0 or 1) of the instructed accessory ratio
becomes.

When the blinking determination of six items is completed and the process proceeds to step S983, a ratio-segment blinking request flag is generated. Here, the following processing is executed.
1) Store "00111111B" in the A register.
(2) An exclusive OR operation (XOR) is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
Before execution of the process of step S983, "0" is stored in the blinking items (bits) of the data stored in the C register, as described above. For example, when the instructed role-product ratio is less than "70%", the D0 bit is "1", and when the instructed role-product ratio is "70%" or more, the D0 bit is "0". there is
Therefore, by inverting the bit value of the C register value, the ratio segment blinking request flag is generated so that the blinking item (bit) becomes "1".
Then, in the next step S984, the ratio segment blinking request flag generated in step S983 is saved. This process is a process of storing the C register value at the address "F299h".

As a result, the blinking item becomes "1" and the non-blinking item becomes "0". In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0", and the ratio-segment blinking request flag regarding six items including whether to blink is stored at address "F299h".

In the next step S985, the total number-of-games counter value is obtained. Here, the following processing is executed.
1) Store the value of the lower 2 bytes of the total number-of-games counter (address "F26Dh") in the HL register.
2) Store the value of the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter (address "F26Dh") in the A register.
As described above, the total number-of-games counter consists of 3 bytes, "F26Dh" is a storage area for storing the first digit, and the value is stored in the L register.
"F26Eh" is a storage area for storing the second digit, and the value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26Fh" is a storage area for storing the third digit, and its value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S986, it is determined whether or not the upper 1 byte of the total number of games counter is "0". This process is a process of determining whether or not the A register value is "0". If it is determined that the A register value is "0", the process proceeds to step S987, and if it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S989.
In step S987, it is determined whether or not 6000 games have passed. This processing compares the HL register value (lower 2-byte value of the total number-of-games counter) with "6000 (D)". When it is determined that the number of games is 6000 or more, the process proceeds to step S988, and when it is determined that the number of games is not 6000 or more, the process proceeds to step S991.
In step S988, it is determined whether or not the number of games is 17500 or more. This process compares the HL register value (lower 2-byte value of the total number-of-games counter) with "17500 (D)". When it is determined that the number of games is 17,500 or more, the process proceeds to step S989, and when it is determined that the number of games is not 17,500 or more, the process proceeds to step S990.

In step S989, the flash request flag data (17500 times) is updated. This process is to set the D1 bit of the C register to "1". Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the identification segment flashing request flag at address "F298h" in FIG. Therefore, when 17500 games have passed, the D1 bit is set to "1".
Also, in the next step S990, the flashing request flag data (6000 times) is updated. This process is to set the D0 bit of the C register to "1".
As described above, the C register value is not updated when 6000 games have not passed. Also, when 6000 games have passed but 17500 games have not passed, only the D0 bit of the C register is updated. Furthermore, when 6000 games have passed and 17500 games have passed, the D0 and D1 bits of the C register are updated.
It should be noted that when it is determined "Yes" in step S986, since the value of the lower two bytes of the total number of games exceeds "FFFFh" (65535 (D)), 6000 games have passed, and , 17500 games have passed.

In the next step S991, it is determined whether or not the upper 1-byte value of the total number of games counter exceeds "2"("3" or more). In step S985, since the upper 1-byte value of the total number-of-games counter is stored in the A register, it is determined whether or not the A register value exceeds "2". Here, since "175000(D)" is "2AB98h", the A register value exceeding "2" means that the total number of games counter value exceeds "175000(D)".
In step S991, when it is determined that the upper 1-byte value of the total number of games counter exceeds "2", the process proceeds to step S994, and when it is determined not to exceed "2", the process proceeds to step S992.
In step S992, it is determined whether or not the upper 1-byte value of the total number-of-games counter is "2". Here, since the total number-of-games counter value "20000h" corresponds to "131072(D)", when the upper 1-byte value of the total number-of-games counter is not "2", "175000" games have not been exceeded.

When determining that the upper byte value of the total number of games counter is "2", the process proceeds to step S993, and when determining that it is not "2", the process proceeds to step S995.
In step S993, it is determined whether or not the total number-of-games counter value has passed "175000" games. Here, since "175000 (D)" is "2AB98h", it is determined whether or not the HL register (the lower 2-byte value of the total number of games counter stored in step S985) is greater than or equal to "AB98h". determines whether or not "175000" games have passed.
When it is determined that "175000" games have been completed, the process proceeds to step S994, and when it is determined that "175000" games have not been completed, the process proceeds to step S995.
In step S994, a process of setting the D2 bit of the C register to "1" is executed.
From the above, when the total number of games played has passed "175000" games, the D2 bit of the C register is updated to "1", and when the total number of games played has not passed "175000" games, the D2 bit of the C register is updated to "1". Bits are not updated.

In the next step S995, an identification segment flashing request flag is generated.
Here, the following processing is executed.
1) Store "00000111B" in the A register.
(2) An exclusive OR operation (XOR) is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

Before execution of the process of step S995, "0" is stored in the blinking items (bits) of the data stored in the C register. For example, when "175000" games have been played, the D2 bit is "1".
Therefore, by inverting the bit of the C register value, the identification segment flashing request flag is generated so that the flashing item (bit) becomes "1".
In the next step S996, the identification segment blinking request flag generated in step S995 is saved. This process is a process of storing the C register value at the address "F298h".
As a result, the blinking item is "1" and the non-blinking item is "0".
Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S962 of FIG.
In FIG. 187, in step S1001, the blink switching time is updated. This process subtracts "1" from the value stored at address "F296h" in FIG. This blinking switching time executes a cyclic subtraction process that circulates from "0" to "134 (D)". Therefore, if the processing is performed when the flashing switching time is "0", "134 (D)" (86h) is stored as the flashing switching time. When the flag is "0", the process is performed, and when "134 (D)" is stored as the blink switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".
In the next step S1002, it is determined whether or not the blink switching time has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the blink switching time has elapsed by determining whether or not the carry flag has become "1" in the process of step S1001. If it is determined that the flashing switching time has passed, the process proceeds to step S1003, and if it is determined that the flashing switching time has not passed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
Here, the ratio display timer update is performed for each interrupt process, and the interrupt process is performed every "2.235" ms. Therefore, the time for one cycle of the blink switching time is "2.235 ms×134=approximately 300 ms".

In the next step S1003, the flashing switching flag is updated. In this process, when the value of the flashing switch flag of the address "F293h" is "0", it is updated to "1", and when it is "1", it is updated to "0".
In the next step S1004, the display switching counter value is updated. This process is a process of adding "1" to the value of the address "F294h". The display switching counter is a counter that cycles in the order of "0"→"1"→..→"15"→"0"→"1"→. When the display switching counter is "15", adding "1" results in "0".
In the next step S1005, it is determined whether or not to execute display switching. Here, when the display switching counter changes from "15" to "0", it is determined that display switching is to be executed. When it is determined in step S1005 that the display switching is to be executed, the process advances to step S1006.
In this way, it is judged that display switching is to be executed in step S1005 when "Yes" is obtained in step S1002 at approximately "300" ms intervals and the display switching counter changes from "15" to "0". Therefore, the display is switched every "approximately 300 ms×16=approximately 4800 ms".

In the next step S1006, it is determined whether or not the test display flag is on. This process determines that the test display flag is ON when the value of the address "F29Ah" is "FFh". When it is determined that the test display flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1008, and when it is determined that the test display flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1007.
In step S1007, the ratio display number is updated. This process is a process of adding "1" to the value of the address "F292h". It should be noted that the ratio display number is subjected to a cyclic addition process that circulates between "0" and "5". Therefore, if the processing is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" is stored as the ratio display number.
Note that when it is determined in step S1006 that the test display flag is ON, step S1007 is skipped, so the ratio display number is not updated.
In the next step S1008, the test display flag is turned off. This process is to set the value stored in the address "F29Ah" to "00h". Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

As described above, the ratio display number is updated approximately every "4800" ms, so the ratios of the six items are cyclically displayed every approximately "4.8" seconds.
Also, as described above, after the power is turned on, "FFh" is stored as the initial value of the test display flag (FIG. 179).
On the other hand, when the number of interrupt processes after power-on reaches "2144" (about "4.8" seconds after the first interrupt process), it is determined "Yes" in step S1005, and the test display flag is turned off. Therefore, since the test display flag is on until about "4.8" seconds have elapsed after the power is turned on, the test pattern is displayed.
Then, when about "4.8" seconds have passed after the power is turned on, the test display flag is turned off, and the ratio is displayed from the next interrupt processing. In this case, since the initial value of the ratio display number is "0", the indicated accessory ratio is displayed.

As is clear from the above, the same data of the RWM 53 is used for the flashing switching flag, the display switching counter, and the flashing switching time when the test pattern is displayed and when the ratio information is displayed. Since the data of the RWM 53 is shared between the display of the test pattern and the display of the ratio information, the area of the RWM 53 can be reduced.
Also, the flashing cycle during test pattern display is the same as the flashing cycle during ratio display. As a result, a natural display can be shown to the manager of the role ratio monitor 74 (for example, the person in charge of the hall) who sees both the display of the test pattern and the display of the ratio information.
From steps S1002 and S1003, the flashing switching flag alternately stores "00h (lighting)" and "01h (lighting out)" in the address "F293h" of the RWM 53 every "0.3" seconds. be.

FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S963 of FIG.
In FIG. 188, in step S1021, the output port is turned off. This processing is processing to turn off output port 6 (digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (digits 6 to 9 segment signals) in FIG. By outputting "00000000B" to these output ports 6 and 7, output of digits 6 to 9 is temporarily disabled. As a result, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is possible to prevent different LEDs from appearing to light up at the same time (overlaid display) even for a moment (prevention of afterimage).
In the next step S1022, the LED display counter 2 is updated. In this process, the value of the LED display counter 2 at the address "F297h" is shifted right by one bit. For example, when the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00000010B", it becomes "00000001B" after updating.

Next, proceeding to step S1023, it is determined whether or not the value of the LED display counter 2 has become "0". For example, when the value of the LED display counter 2 up to that point was "00000001B", it becomes "00000000B" after the update, so it is determined that it has become "0".
When it is determined that the value of the LED display counter 2 has become "0", the process proceeds to step S1024, and when it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1025.
In step S1024, the value of LED display counter 2 is initialized. This process is a process of storing "1" in the D3th bit of the LED display counter 2 . As a result, the value of the LED display counter 2 becomes "00001000B". Then, the process proceeds to step S1025. This is because, as described above, the LED display counter 2 uses only the lower 4 bits.
In step S1025, all lighting data is set. 59, the data (digit data) output from the output port 6 is set to "00001111B" and the data (segment data) output from the output port 7 is set to "11111111B". At this time, the lighting data of the output port is not output.
That is, if these data are temporarily output, the role ratio monitor 74 will display "8.8.8.8.". In other words, it becomes the data for displaying the test pattern.

Next, proceeding to step S1026, it is determined whether or not the test display flag of the address "F29Ah" is on (FFh). When it is determined that the test display flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1050, and when it is determined that the test display flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1027.
In the next step S1027, the ratio display number of the address "F292h" is obtained. For the ratio display number obtained here, the number of blinking bit inspections is determined thereafter. Specifically, it is as follows.
The ratio display number is "0": Acquires the number of flashing bit inspections for the instructed accessory ratio.
Ratio display number is "1": Acquire the number of blinking bit inspections for the continuous accessory ratio (6000 times).
:
If the ratio display number is "5": Acquire the number of blinking bit inspections for the state ratio of accessories, etc. (total total).

In the next step S1028, the address of the blinking bit inspection frequency table is set. FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a flashing bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the eleventh embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 78 in the second embodiment. The top address of the blink bit inspection count table is "2510h". Then, in step S1028, this leading address "2510h" is set as the address of the blinking bit inspection frequency table.
Here, as in the second embodiment, the "blinking bit inspection count" means that, in the identification segment blinking request flag of the address "F298h", by how many bits ahead from the D0 bit, the bit to be inspected is reached. A value that indicates whether to
For example, in FIG. 189, "2h" is stored in the address corresponding to the instructed role product ratio and the role product state ratio, which is D0 in the identification segment flashing request flag of address "F298h". This is a value for judging whether or not the value of the second D2 bit counted from the th bit is "1". The D2-th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached "175000", and when the D2-th bit is "1", the instructed role ratio and the role Identification segs with equal state ratios are subject to blinking (FIG. 174).

Similarly, "0h" is stored in the continuous role ratio (6000 times) and the role ratio (6000 times). is a value for determining whether the value of the D0 bit of is "1". The D0th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached "6000", and when the D0th bit is "1", the consecutive role ratio (6000 times) And the identification seg of the character ratio (6000 times) is to be blinked (FIG. 174).
Furthermore, "1h" is stored in the continuous role ratio (total) and the role ratio (total). is a value for determining whether the value of is "1". The D1-th bit is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached "17500". The identification seg of the character ratio (cumulative total) is to be blinked (Fig. 174).

In the next step S1029, the identification segment blink bit check count is set. Here, the process acquires a value obtained by adding the ratio display number acquired in step S1027 to the top address "2510h" of the blinking bit inspection frequency table set in step S1028.
For example, when the ratio display number is "0" (instruction included role ratio),
2510h + 0h = 2510h
As a result, the value "2h" stored at the address "2510h" is obtained.
Also, for example, when the ratio display number is "4" (accessory ratio (total)),
2510h+4h=2514h
As a result, the value "1h" stored at the address "2514h" is obtained.
In other words, "2510h" is the reference address, and the value stored in the ratio display number (address "F292h") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit check table and obtain the value stored at that address. do.

In the next step S1030, the identification segment flashing request flag is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data of the identification segment flashing request flag at the address "F298h" in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S1031 to set the identification segment offset table. This process is a process of storing the top address "2520h" of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) shown in FIG.
In the next step S1032, an identification segment offset value is acquired. This process is a process of reading the corresponding value from the identification segment offset table using the ratio display number acquired in step S1027 as the offset value.
Specifically, for example, when the ratio display number is "1" (continuous character ratio (6000 times)), the value "6Bh" stored at the address "2521h" obtained by adding "1h" to "2520h" ” is obtained.

In the next step S1033, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display one digit of the identification display (that is, digit 7, which is the lower digit of the identification segment). When the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00000100B", it is determined that there is a request to display a 1-digit identification display. If it is determined that there is a request to display a 1-digit identification display, the process proceeds to step S1044, and if it is determined that there is no request to display a 1-digit identification display, the process proceeds to step S1034.
In step S1034, the identified segment offset is updated. This process executes the process of swapping the upper data and lower data with the swap command for the identified segment offset value (eg, "6Bh" in the above example) acquired in step S1032. Therefore, when the value before replacement is "6Bh", it becomes "B6h" after replacement. The reason for doing this is that only the lower 4 bits of the identifying segment offset value are used.

Next, in step S1035, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display two digits of the identification display (that is, digit 6, which is the upper digit of the identification segment). When the value of the LED display counter 2 is "00001000B", it is determined that there is a request to display a two-digit identification display. If it is determined that there is a request to display two digits of identification, the process proceeds to step S1044, and if it is determined that there is no request to display two digits of identification, the process proceeds to step S1036. It should be noted that "No" in step S1033 and "No" in step S1035 correspond to when there is a request to display ratio segments (except for display of a test display pattern, etc.).

In step S1036, the ratio segment blink bit check count is set. Since the ratio has a total of 6 items, "6" is stored in the B register as the number of inspections.
In the next step S1037, a ratio segment blinking request flag is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data of the ratio segment flashing request flag at address "F299h" in the A register.
Next, the process advances to step S1038 to acquire ratio data. This process acquires a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number acquired in step S1027. For example, when the ratio display number is the instructed role product ratio of "0", the instructed role product ratio data of the address "F288h" is acquired.
In the next step S1039, "-" display data is obtained. As described above, the ratio of accessories not installed in the gaming machine is indicated by "-". However, in this embodiment, since all the accessories corresponding to the ratios of the six items are loaded, there is no case where the ratio is displayed with "-". Therefore, step S1039 is unnecessary in the eleventh embodiment. However, if the program is configured in this way, it will be possible to use this program even for gaming machines that do not support all six ratios.

In the next step S1040, it is determined whether the ratio displayed this time is a non-applicable item. If it is determined that the item is not a non-applicable item, the process advances to step S1041, and if it is determined to be a non-applicable item, the process advances to step S1052. As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, since the ratios of all six items are displayed, there are no non-applicable items.
In the next step S1041, ratio display data is calculated. This process performs an operation of dividing the ratio data acquired in step S1038 by "10(D)(Ah)". The quotient and remainder obtained by this processing are stored in respective predetermined registers. For example, when the ratio data is "59(D)(3Bh)", when divided by "10(D)(Ah)", the quotient is "5h" and the remainder is "9h". Assuming that the register is the D register and the remainder storage register is the E register, "5h" is stored in the D register and "9h" is stored in the E register.

In the next step S1042, it is determined whether or not there is a request to display a one-digit ratio display. This processing determines whether or not the D0 bit in the LED display counter 2 at the address "F297h" is "1". judge there is. If it is determined that there is a request to display a 1-digit ratio display, the process proceeds to step S1043, and if it is determined that there is no request to display a 1-digit ratio display, the process proceeds to step S1044.
In the next step S1043, one-digit ratio display data is set. This process is a process of setting the E register value described above as 1-digit display data.
The flow then advances to step S1044 to set a ratio display offset. The process proceeds to step S1044 when it is determined in step S1033 that a 1-digit identification display is requested, when it is determined in step S1035 that a 2-digit identification display is requested, and in step S1042 a 1-digit ratio display is displayed. This is when it is determined that it is not a request (it is a request to display two digits of the ratio display). When proceeding from step S1033 to step S1044, the lower 4-bit value of the identification segment offset acquired in step S1032 is set as the ratio display offset. Also, when the process proceeds from step S1035 to step S1044, the lower 4-bit value of the identification segment offset updated in step S1034 is set as the ratio display offset. Furthermore, when proceeding from step S1042 to step S1044, the D register value (the quotient value when the ratio data is divided by "10(D)") is set as the ratio display offset.

The flow then advances to step S1045 to set a ratio display segment data table. This process is the process of setting the head address "2530h" of the ratio display segment data table in FIG.
Next, the process advances to step S1046 to acquire segment data. This process is a process of adding the offset value set in step S1044 to the start address "2530h" of the ratio display segment data table set in step S1045.
For example, when the offset value set in step S1044 is "9",
2530h + 9h = 2539h
As a result, "9" display data (01101111B) is obtained.

Next, the flow advances to step S1047 to check for blinking bits. This processing is processing for determining whether or not to blink the identification seg or ratio seg to be displayed this time.
At this time, the A register stores the value of the identification segment blinking request flag or ratio segment blinking request flag. Furthermore, the value of the number of inspections is stored in the B register.
Then, in step S1047, the A register is shifted to the right by "1", and the result of the shift and overflow is stored in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag is "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag is "1". ”.
In the next step S1048, it is determined whether or not the inspection is finished. Here, the following processing is executed. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the B register value, and when it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the inspection is finished.
When it is determined that the inspection has been completed, the process proceeds to step S1049, and when it is determined that the inspection has not been completed, the process returns to step S1047.
By the above processing, the value of the identification segment blinking request flag or ratio segment blinking request flag is right-shifted by the number of times stored in the B register, and the result of the shift and overflow is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the identification segment request flag is "00000100B" (D2 bit is ON) and the B register value is "3h",
First time: "00000100B"→"00000010B", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3h - 1h = 2h
Second time: "00000010B"→"00000001B", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2h - 1h = 1h
3rd time: "00000001B"→"00000000B", carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1h - 1h = 0h
becomes.
Next, proceeding to step S1049, it is determined whether or not the flashing request flag is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S1047 that the inspection has been completed. When it is determined that the flashing request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1050, and when it is determined that the flashing request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1052.

In step S1050, it is determined whether or not the flashing switching flag of the address "F293h" is on. When it is determined that the flashing switching flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1051, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S1052.
In step S1051, the segment data are cleared. That is, when the blink request flag is on (“1”) and the blink switching flag is on (“1”, i.e., extinguished), the interrupt process extinguishes the display to be illuminated. Set the data to "00000000B". Then, the process proceeds to step S1052.
In step S1052, in order to output the digit signal and the segment signal, the digit signal is output from output port 6 (FIG. 59) and the segment signal is output from output port 7 (FIG. 59). Then, the processing according to this flow chart ends.

In the above ratio display processing, for the first approximately "5" seconds after the power is turned on, "Yes" is determined in step S1026, so that all lighting data set in step S1025 can be output. Also, in step S1050, the segment data is cleared when the flashing switching flag is off. Therefore, the test pattern is a display that repeats lighting and extinguishing at intervals of about “0.3” seconds for about “5” seconds (until “Yes” is determined in step S1005 of FIG. 187).
Also, the ratio information is sequentially switched and displayed approximately every "5" seconds (every time "Yes" is determined in step S1005 of FIG. 187) (step S1007 of FIG. 187).
Then, when the total number of games played is less than the reference number of games (see FIG. 174) (in FIG. 188, when it is judged as "Yes" in step S1049), the identification seg is displayed blinking. The flashing display is a display in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated every about "0.3" seconds, similarly to the above.
Furthermore, the display of the ratio segment blinks when the ratio is equal to or greater than the threshold value (see FIG. 174) (in FIG. 188, when "Yes" is determined in step S1049). The flashing display is a display in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated every about "0.3" seconds, similarly to the above.

Next, the relationship between the power-on after the occurrence of a recoverable error or an unrecoverable error and the display of the test pattern will be described.
As described above, recoverable errors are errors that can be recovered without turning on/off the power, such as hopper error, medal selector error, door (front door 12) open error, and the like.
In the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of FIG. 184, the read processing of the input port 51 is executed in step S457, and then the input error check is executed in step S463. In the input error check, when any recoverable error is detected based on the data of the input port, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address.

In addition, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 180), the error detection flag is set at the timing before detection of the operation of the start switch 41 (before step S278) and after all the reels 31 stop (after step S289). When any of the bits is "1", the progress of the game is stopped, and the content of the error is displayed, for example, on the winning number display LED78.
In other words, after the start switch 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are bet, until all the reels 31 are stopped (between steps S279 to S289. In FIG. ), the progress of the game is continued until all the reels 31 are stopped, the progress of the game is stopped after all the reels 31 are stopped, and the recoverable error is detected. indicate.
When a restorable error occurs, the cause of the restorable error is removed by an administrator (hall clerk), and when a reset switch is operated, the restorable error state is released and the progress of the game is resumed.

Interrupt processing is executed even during the occurrence of a recoverable error. Therefore, the display by the role ratio monitor 74 is executed even during the occurrence of the recoverable error.
Here, when a recoverable error occurs, the power is turned off without removing the cause of the recoverable error, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings (without shifting to the setting change mode). In the program start process of FIG. 178, the process advances to the power return process of step S2721, after which the interrupt process is executed. As a result, as described above, the role ratio monitor 74 displays the test pattern for about 5 seconds, and then the ratio is displayed.
On the other hand, when the interrupt process is started, the input error check (step S463 in FIG. 184) is executed as described above, so recoverable errors that have not been removed are detected again. Therefore, after the power is turned on, it becomes a recoverable error state (at this time, the role ratio monitor 74 is in a state where the ratio is displayed after the test pattern is displayed).

On the other hand, if an unrecoverable error occurs immediately after power-on (step S2801 in FIG. 178), unrecoverable error processing shown in FIG. 64 is executed. Here, as shown in step S1490 of FIG. 64, interrupt processing is prohibited.
On the other hand, if an unrecoverable error occurs during interrupt processing (step S2811 in FIG. 184), unrecoverable error processing 2 shown in FIG. 72 is executed. Here, in the interrupt processing, the processing of step S960 and steps S458 to S460 is processing by the second program. Interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the second program. In other words, no interrupt process is executed during the unrecoverable error process 2 .
By the way, when the power is turned off normally, the power off is detected in the interrupt processing (step S2771 in FIG. 184). Then, when shifting to the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) shown in FIG. 69, the RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) is executed in step S2776. This process is the process shown in FIG. In the RWM checksum set shown in FIG. 70, the power-off processing completion flag is set in step S2784. This process is a process of storing "55h" in the address "F2A2h" in FIG. Also, in FIG. 70, the RWM checksum data is saved in step S2795. This process is a process of storing the RWM checksum data in the address "F2A0h" in FIG.

After that, when the power is turned on, the power-off restoration data (the value of the power-off processing completed flag set in the above step S2784) is obtained in step S2705 of FIG. 178 . Then, in step S2708, it is determined whether or not the power-off processing completion flag is "55h". Also, in step S2708, it is determined whether or not the RWM checksum data stored in the RWM 53 during the power-off process matches the RWM checksum data calculated in step S902. When it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is "55h" and the RWM checksum data match, it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. On the other hand, if the power-off processing completion flag is a value other than "55h" or if the RWM checksum data do not match, it is determined that the power-off recovery is abnormal. When it is determined in step S2708 that the power-off restoration is normal, and the process proceeds to power-off restoration processing in step S2721, the power-off processing completed flag is cleared ("00h" is stored) in step S2724 of FIG.
In this way, when the power is turned off normally in the interrupt process, "55h" is set as the power-off processing completed flag. If so, it is determined that the power failure was normal, and if the power failure recovery data is not "55h", it is determined that the power failure was abnormal.

If the power is turned off while an unrecoverable error (step S2801 in FIG. 178) or an unrecoverable error 2 (step S2811 in FIG. 184) is occurring as described above, 184 is not executed because the interrupt processing is not executed. Therefore, the power-off processing completed flag shown in step S2784 of FIG. 70 is not set. Also, since power-off processing is not executed, RWM checksum data is not saved in step S2795 of FIG.
Therefore, when the power is turned on next time, it is determined in step S2708 in FIG. Since interrupt processing is not executed when unrecoverable error processing is executed, test patterns and ratios are not displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 .

Next, the relationship between the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode and the test pattern display will be described.
When the setting key switch 152 (FIG. 112) is turned on and the power is turned on, and the result of FIG. Then, in step S2742 in FIG. 65, the setting change confirmation process (setting change mode or setting confirmation mode) of FIG. 66 is entered.
Here, in FIG. 65, since the interrupt process starts at the timing after step S2740, the display of the test pattern starts almost simultaneously with the shift to the setting change confirmation process. Then, when "5" seconds have passed after shifting to the setting change confirmation process, the display of the test pattern ends and shifts to the ratio display.

It should be noted that the setting confirmation mode can also be shifted to during game standby after the power is turned on. In FIG. 180, when the ON signal of the setting key switch is detected while waiting for medal insertion in step S275, the process proceeds to setting change confirmation processing (in this case, setting confirmation processing) in FIG.
Here, the ratio display mode before shifting to the setting confirmation mode and the ratio display mode during the setting confirmation mode are the same. In other words, the display of the role ratio monitor 74 before and after shifting to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the display of the role ratio monitor 74 when not shifting to the setting confirmation mode.
This point will be specifically described.
As an example, currently
Directed role ratio: 50%
Continuous role ratio (6000 times): 30%
Role ratio (6000 times): 40%
:
Accessory etc. condition ratio: 20%
Suppose that
Then, "5H.20" is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74, and when the game standby state shifts to the setting confirmation mode after about "3" seconds have elapsed from the start of the display, the setting confirmation mode is entered. After about "2" seconds have elapsed, the display on the role ratio monitor 74 switches from "5H.20" to "7P.50". When about "5" seconds have elapsed after the display of the role ratio monitor 74 has become "7P.50", the display of the role ratio monitor 74 is switched from "7P.50" to "6y.30".
Next, after the display of the role ratio monitor 74 becomes "6y.30", when about "1" seconds have elapsed, the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and when the state is shifted to the game standby state, approximately "4" is displayed in the game standby state. seconds, "6y.30" is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74, after which the display switches to "7y.40".

Further, when the game machine is in the medal insertion waiting state, the display of the test pattern after the power is turned on is normally finished, and the ratio display is being performed. However, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the test pattern may be displayed again. In the case of processing in this manner, for example, when "Yes" is determined in step S2755 in FIG. 66, "FFh" is stored in the test display flag. As a result, in the subsequent interrupt processing, it is determined "Yes" in step S1026 of the ratio display processing of FIG. 188, so the test pattern is displayed, and after the display of the test pattern is finished, the display is switched to the ratio display.
Furthermore, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, if the determination is "Yes" in step S2755 in FIG. 00h"). As a result, the test pattern can be displayed for about "5" seconds when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode.
Furthermore, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the value of the ratio display number may be maintained, or the value of the ratio display number may be changed to "00h" when "Yes" is determined in step S2755 in FIG. You can remember.
When the value of the ratio display number is maintained, the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and after the test pattern is displayed, the first displayed ratio is the ratio immediately before shifting to the setting confirmation mode.
On the other hand, when "00h" is stored in the ratio display number when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, after shifting to the setting confirmation mode and displaying the test pattern, the display order is "1". The display starts from the included function ratio.

Although the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) The role ratio monitor 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, but is not limited to this and can be mounted on another control board other than the main control board 50. FIG.
(2) The value stored as ratio data and the value displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 do not necessarily match. For example, when the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is "100 (D)", "100 (D)" is saved in the RWM 53, but "99" is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74. good.
In the case of such control, steps S950 and S951 in FIG. 182 are unnecessary.
188, if the ratio data stored in the RWM 53 is "64h (100(D))", the ratio display of the address "2539h" in FIG. Get segment data.
Furthermore, in this case, if the gaming machine 10 is a medalless gaming machine shown in the ninth embodiment (Fig. 158), "64h (100 (D))" stored in the RWM 53 is transmitted to the lending unit 200 as the ratio data. do.

(3) When the value of the least significant byte of the division result register is "101 (D)" or more (including when it is 255 (D) (FFh)), save "0" in the RWM 53 ( It is also possible to update the ratio data). As a result, “00” is displayed on the role ratio monitor 74 .
Furthermore, in this case, the medalless gaming machine transmits "0" stored in the RWM 53 to the lending unit 200 as the ratio data.
(4) In the eleventh embodiment, it is not determined whether the divisor is "0". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the divisor is "0" is determined before executing the division, and when the divisor is "0", "0" is not stored in the divisor setting register. good too.
(5) In the eleventh embodiment, when acquiring the value of the division result register, regardless of the value of 3 bytes other than the lowest 1 byte of the division result register (hereinafter referred to as "upper 3 bytes") , obtained the lowest 1-byte value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the division result (least significant 1-byte value) may not be stored in the RWM 53 when the value of the upper 3 bytes of the division result register is obtained and is not "0". This is because the division result ranges from "0" to "100(D)", so if the value of the upper 3 bytes is not "0", it can be determined that the division result is an abnormal value.

(6) The order of setting the multiplier setting register and the multiplicand setting register (the order of storing the values) may be such that the multiplicand setting register is set after setting the multiplier setting register, or conversely, after setting the multiplicand setting register, It may be set by a multiplier setting register.
Similarly, the divisor setting register and the dividend setting register may be set after the divisor setting register is set, and conversely, after the dividend setting register is set, the divisor setting register is set. good.
(7) When the power is turned off while an unrecoverable error has occurred, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on, the initialization process of step S2731 in FIG. 65), and interrupt processing occurs at the timing between steps S2740 and S2741 in FIG. Therefore, if the unrecoverable error is eliminated, the role ratio monitor 74 first displays the test pattern, and then displays the ratio.

(8) As for the test pattern, in the eleventh embodiment, "8.8.8.8." However, a test pattern that can determine whether all segments of each digit 6-9 can be lit and extinguished is preferred.
For example, "*.8.8.8."("*" indicates that segments A to G are turned off) is lit for "1.25" seconds →"8.*.8.8. ” lit for 1.25 seconds → 8.8.*.8. lit for 1.25 seconds → 8.8.8.* lit for 1.25 seconds (displayed for a total of “5” seconds).
Alternatively, contrary to the above, "8.*.*.*." is lit for "1.25" seconds → "*.8.*.*." is lit for "1.25" seconds → "*. .*.8.*.” is illuminated for “1.25” seconds →“*.*.*.8.” is illuminated for “1.25” seconds.

(9) In the eleventh embodiment, the display switching counter and flashing switching time of the RWM 53 are shared between the test pattern display and the ratio display. As a result, the blinking mode of repeating lighting and extinguishing at intervals of about "0.3" seconds and the mode of switching the display in about 5 seconds (ending the display of the test pattern) are the same.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display switching counter peculiar to the display of test patterns may be provided. For example, a display switching counter 2 for test patterns is provided, and a ring counter circulating from "0" to "30(D)" is used. Then, when the display switching counter 2 becomes "0" (when "Yes" in step S1005 of FIG. 187), it is possible to end the display of the test pattern and start the ratio display. By doing so, it is possible to display the test pattern for about "10" seconds after the power is turned on.

(10) In the eleventh embodiment, the ratio display number of the RWM 53 is initialized after power-on (FIG. 179). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the ratio display number of the RWM 53 may be configured so as not to be initialized after the power is turned on. With this configuration, after the power is turned on, the ratio display on the role ratio monitor 74 can be restarted from the ratio display number that was displayed when the power was turned off last time. For example, when "3h" is stored in the ratio display number, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on normally without changing the settings, the test pattern is displayed for about "5" seconds. After that, the continuous role product ratio (total) corresponding to the ratio display number "3h" is displayed.
However, even with the above specifications, the ratio display number of the RWM 53 is initialized by the initialization process (FIG. 65) when the power is turned on with the setting change switch turned on. As a result, after the test pattern is displayed, the ratio display is started from the instructed accessory ratio.

(11) In the eleventh embodiment, the test pattern is displayed blinking, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the test pattern may be lit. In the case of displaying the test pattern by lighting, it is possible to proceed to step S1052 (do not proceed to steps S1050 and S1051) when "Yes" is determined in step S1026 in FIG.
(12) After the power is turned on and the test pattern is displayed for about "3" seconds, the power is turned off, and when the power is turned on after that, the test pattern may be displayed for the remaining "2" seconds, Alternatively, the test pattern may be displayed again for about "5" seconds.
If the test pattern is to be displayed only for the remaining "2" seconds, the display switching counter should not be initialized when the power is turned on. On the other hand, if the test pattern is to be displayed again for about "5" seconds, the display switching counter may be initialized when the power is turned on (furthermore, the flashing switching time may be initialized).
(13) The values of various flags and counters shown in the eleventh embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the values described above, and can be determined as appropriate.

(14) The eleventh embodiment is not limited to conventional slot machines. The present invention can also be applied to medalless gaming machines (smart pachislot machines) and casino machines.
Furthermore, the feature of the role ratio monitor 74 of the eleventh embodiment can be applied not only to the slot machine but also to the performance indicator of the pachinko game machine.
(15) The eleventh embodiment is not limited to being carried out alone, and can be carried out in combination with at least part of the first to tenth embodiments as appropriate.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
The twelfth embodiment relates to program instructions, interrupt processing, and the like.
First, the jump instruction in the twelfth embodiment will be explained. In the twelfth embodiment, after starting the user program (program start (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 191, which will be described later), at least a plurality of times ( two or more jump instructions). A jump instruction is an instruction that specifies an address that is one byte or more away from the current address and jumps to that address. Jump instructions include a jump instruction that always (unconditionally and uniformly) jumps to a specific address, and a jump instruction that jumps to a specific address when a condition is met (or not met).
190 is a diagram showing an example of a jump instruction in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 190 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 88 (third embodiment).
In the twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87 (third embodiment), when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the user mode is activated through system reset release, register initialization, PROM mode request, and security mode. transition to The start address of the user mode program is "0000H", which corresponds to the start address of step S900 of program start (M_PRG_START) in FIG.

In the example of FIG. 190, as in FIG. 88, the address "0004H" is the vector address. Furthermore, eight addresses of addresses "0008H", "0010H", ..., "0040H" are the top addresses of each program called by the RST instruction.
For this reason, a jump instruction is placed at address "0001H", and is configured to always jump to address "0050H" first. Jump instructions include, for example, "JP instruction" and "JR instruction". It is also assumed that the jump instruction in the example of FIG. 190 requires 3 bytes. Therefore, jump instructions can be placed at addresses "0001H" to "0003H".

Next, when proceeding to address "0050H", the continuation of the power-on program is started. Then, at address "006FH", a jump instruction is arranged to jump to address "0090H" if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied. On the other hand, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied, the process proceeds to the next address "0070H" (the top address of the setting change program).
Furthermore, the address "0080H" is the end program of the setting change program. After the setting change program ends, if no abnormality is detected, the process proceeds to address "0081H". At the address "0081H", a jump instruction to jump to the address "0090H" (head program of the power restoration process) is arranged when the condition for transition to the power restoration process is satisfied. A program starting from address "0090H" is a program for power recovery processing. Note that even if no abnormality is detected without going through the setting change program, the program jumps from address "006FH" to address "0090H" and the program for power restoration processing is executed.
Address "009FH" is the end program of the power recovery process, and a jump instruction that always jumps to address "00B0H" is arranged at the next address "00A0H". At the address "00B0H", the top program of the main process (M_MAIN) is provided.

As described above, a plurality of jump instructions are arranged from the top address "0000H" of the user program to the top address "00B0H" of the normal game processing (main processing) program. As a result, even if an illegal program is embedded between the top address "0000H" of the user program and the top address "00B0H" of the normal game processing program (even if it is designed to pass through the illegal program) ), it is possible to make it difficult for the malicious program to pass through by issuing a jump instruction multiple times, thereby enhancing security.
Also, even if an illegal program is embedded between the start address of the user program and the start address of the normal game processing program, it will be jumped to a completely different place by a jump instruction, so the program should be stopped at that point. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent behavior (especially, it is possible to know before the opening of the hall).
On the other hand, if there is no jump instruction between the start address of the user program and the start address of the normal game processing program, if an illegal program is embedded in the middle of the jump instruction, the illegal program program may be executed.

The above example will be explained more specifically.
FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing program start processing (M_PRG_START) in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 191 is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 178 (eleventh embodiment). The flowchart in FIG. 191 clarifies some jump instructions with respect to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the jump instructions shown in FIG. 191 do not explicitly indicate all jump instructions in the program start processing.
First, step S900 is a program that starts from address "0000H", but since a jump instruction is provided at the next address "0001H" as described above, jump from step S900 to step S901 by the jump instruction. is configured to
Further, when the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied in step S2707 ("Yes" in step S2707), a jump instruction is provided to jump to step S2711.
Furthermore, when "Yes" in step S2712 or "Yes" in step S2714, a jump instruction is provided to jump to step S2731 (initialization processing).

Further, when "No" in step S2710 or "No" in step S2715, a jump command is provided to jump to step S2721 (power return processing).
Further, a jump instruction is provided to jump to step S2801 (unrecoverable error processing) when "Yes" in step S2708 or "Yes" in step S2715.
In this way, jump instructions are provided in the process of proceeding from the program start process to the setting change mode, power failure recovery process, initialization process, or unrecoverable error process.
Further, when proceeding to the power restoration process of step S2721, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. 63. In FIG. 63, after step S2724, the process is configured to jump to step S248 (main process) by a jump instruction.

Next, a call instruction in the twelfth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 192(a) is a diagram showing the types and addresses of areas of the ROM 54 in the twelfth embodiment. The storage area of the ROM 54 in the twelfth embodiment is the same as the storage area in FIG. 83 (third embodiment).
As storage areas of the ROM 54, it has a first area (used area) and a second area (area outside the used area). The first area (usage area) is a storage area in which information (data, program) related to the progress of the game is stored. In addition, the second area (area outside the use area) is a storage area for storing information unrelated to the progress of the game. Programs and the like for fraud prevention are stored.

In the twelfth embodiment, the range of the first area is "0000H" to "1FFFH", and the range of the second area is "2000H" to "3EFFH".
Further, the range of addresses "0000H" to "11FFH" in the first area is called a third area. Furthermore, the range of addresses "0008H" to "0040H" in the third area is called a fourth area. Therefore, the third area is entirely included in the first area. Also, the fourth area is entirely included in the first area, and the fourth area is entirely included in the third area.
Furthermore, the first region does not include the second region. Similarly, the second region does not include the first region. Furthermore, the second area does not include the third area or the fourth area.

The call instructions of the twelfth embodiment include a CALL instruction, a CALLF instruction, and an RST instruction.
First, the (head) addresses of programs (modules) that can be called by the RST instruction are predetermined, and There are eight of "0038H" and "0040H". In addition, although eight are used in this embodiment, the number is not limited to this.
A RST instruction is an instruction that can be represented as a one-byte program. On the other hand, the CALLF instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 2-byte program. Furthermore, the CALL instruction is an instruction that can be represented as a 3-byte program.
Therefore, the number of bytes for describing the RST instruction is smaller than the number of bytes for describing the CALLF and CALL instructions. can be reduced. Accordingly, programs (modules) that are frequently called are arranged in the fourth area from the above-described eight leading addresses, and are called using the RST instruction.
Even within the fourth area, addresses other than the above eight addresses, such as "0009H", cannot be called by the RST instruction.
Also, of course, the addresses after the address "0041H" cannot be called using the RST instruction.

Since the addresses that can be called with the RST instruction are limited to the above eight addresses, the size of one module is from the address that can be called with the RST instruction to the address before the next address that can be called with the RST instruction. must be of a size that can be stored in For example, when the program of the first module is stored from address "0008H", it must be composed within 8 bytes from "0008H" to "000FH".
Thus, the average storage capacity of one module stored in the fourth area is smaller than the average storage capacity of one module stored in the third area (excluding the fourth area). Therefore, the average processing speed when executing one module stored in the fourth area is the average processing speed when executing one module stored in the third area (excluding the fourth area). faster than

Furthermore, since the number of bytes (2 bytes) for describing the CALLF instruction is smaller than the number of bytes (3 bytes) for describing the CALL instruction, using the CALLF instruction rather than using the CALL instruction reduces the program capacity. can be reduced.
The addresses of programs (modules) that can be called using the CALLF instruction are the addresses in the range of the third area, that is, the addresses in the range of "0000H" to "11FFH". Therefore, when calling the address of the program (module) stored in the third area, the CALLF instruction is used in preference to the CALL instruction.
On the other hand, addresses "1200H" to "1FFFH" in the first area cannot be called using the RST instruction or the CALLF instruction. In the first area, addresses "1200H" to "1FFFH" are called using the CALL instruction.

Also, the range of addresses "2000H" to "3EFFH", which is the second area, can be called by the CALL instruction. On the other hand, the range of addresses "2000H" to "3EFFH", which is the second area, is configured so that it cannot be called using the RST instruction or the CALLF instruction.

When calling the program in the second area from the first area, the "CALLEX" instruction can be used, and when returning from the program in the second area to the program in the first area, the "RETEX" instruction can be used. can be used (as in the third embodiment and the eleventh embodiment).
In other words, the "CALLEX" instruction can be used in the first region but not in the second region. Also, the "CALLEX" instruction can call the program in the second area, but does not call the program in the first area (including the third and fourth areas).
Furthermore, the "RETEX" instruction can be used in the second area, but cannot be used in the first area (including the third and fourth areas). Furthermore, the return address of the "RETEX" instruction can specify the address of the first area, but cannot specify the address of the second area.

Further, as in FIG. 170 (eleventh embodiment), register bank 0 and register bank 1 are provided as register banks.
Each register of register bank 0 is a register used when executing the program of the first area. Similarly, each register in register bank 1 is a register used when executing the program of the second region.
Therefore, when executing the program of the first area, the registers of register bank 0 are used and the registers of register bank 1 are not used.
Similarly, when executing a program in the second region, registers in register bank 1 are used and registers in register bank 0 are not used.

Here, the "DI" instruction is given as a general instruction of the interrupt prohibition instruction. Also, the "EI" instruction is an instruction for enabling an interrupt after executing the "DI" instruction.
After the "DI" instruction is executed, interrupts are disabled. Also, when the "EI" instruction is executed, the interrupt is enabled. A program after the "EI" instruction includes, for example, the "RET" instruction. In this case, interrupt processing can be executed after the "RET" instruction is executed. In other words, even if the "EI" instruction is executed, the interrupt processing is not executed until the next "RET" instruction is executed. As a result, the instruction after "EI" can be reliably executed.

On the other hand, when the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, regardless of whether the interrupt is enabled or disabled at that time, the interrupt is disabled, the register bank is switched to register bank 1, and the specified address to execute the call.
In the twelfth embodiment, the program in the second area can be executed by executing the "CALLEX" instruction when executing the program in the second area from the program in the first area.
A "RETEX" instruction is an instruction corresponding to a conventional return instruction. The "RETEX" instruction restores the interrupt state to the state before the "CALLEX" instruction, switches the register bank to register bank 0, and restores the state before the "CALLEX" instruction, in other words, the instruction following the "CALLEX" instruction (return address program). This makes the program in the first area executable.
Therefore, when the state at the time of the "CALLEX" instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt enabled state is set by the "RETEX" instruction. On the other hand, when the state at the time of the "CALLEX" instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the "RETEX" instruction also causes the interrupt disabled state.

FIG. 192(b) is a diagram showing data in an empty area. Note that this empty area is an example, and does not mean that the addresses shown in the figure are always empty areas. Similarly, addresses other than those shown in the figure may be empty areas.
In the example of FIG. 192(b), addresses "000FH", "003EH", and "003FH" are empty areas in the fourth area. In the third area, addresses "11FEH" and "11FFH" are empty areas. Furthermore, in the first area, addresses "1FFEH" and "1FFFH" are empty areas. Furthermore, in the second area, addresses "3EFEH" and "3EFFH" are empty areas.
Normally, the initial state of the storage area of the ROM 54 is "FFH", and the empty area in which the program is not written remains "FFH".
As shown in FIG. 192(b), the empty area value of the third, first, and second areas excluding the fourth area is "FFH". In other words, the empty areas of the third area, the first area, and the second area excluding the fourth area are left at the initial value "FFH".
On the other hand, "00H" is stored in the empty area of the fourth area. Therefore, even if a malicious program is stored in the empty area of the fourth area, it can be easily found. This is because the dump list can be output to confirm that the data in the fourth area is "00H". Therefore, when a value other than "00H" is stored in the empty area of the fourth area, it can be determined that an illegal program or the like may be stored.

Next, the average processing speed of the program (main processing and interrupt processing) will be described.
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing the average processing time of programs in each state. Each time shown in FIG. 193 (and FIGS. 194 to 198 to be described later) (interrupt processing time I1 to I5, main loop processing time M11 to M51, main loop interrupt disabled time M12 to M52, first area processing time M13 to M53, The second area processing time M14 to M54, interrupt disabled processing time I61, interruptible processing time I62, first area processing time I63, second area processing time I64, interrupt time interval T) are all average values, A theoretical value or an actual measured value (in the case of an actual measured value, an average value of multiple times) is shown.
In FIG. 193, in any of the states "1" to "5", the main process and the interrupt process "6." ). Furthermore, the program has a first area program and a second area program.
Here, it is necessary to design the program so that the main loop processing is repeated at least a plurality of times (twice or more) between one interrupt processing and the next interrupt processing. This is because, for example, if there is a process that obtains a random number during the main loop process, there is a risk of fraud if the main loop process is performed only once.
As shown in FIG. 193, it is assumed that the interrupt time interval (interrupt period) T in the twelfth embodiment is "1.18 ms". On the other hand, the time required for one interrupt process is "0.0899" ms to "0.0915" ms depending on the state. Therefore, after one interrupt process is started, the one interrupt process is completed before the next interrupt process is started.

In FIG. 193, when the interrupt processing time is "0.0899" ms in "1. During game standby (no bet)", the time from the end of the interrupt processing until the next interrupt processing is executed is ,
T(“1.18” ms)−I1(“0.0899” ms)=“1.0901” ms
becomes.
Also, if the main loop process is repeated twice,
M11 (“0.0195” ms)×2=“0.039” ms
becomes.
Therefore,
T−I1>M11×2
is.
This makes it possible to repeat the main loop process a plurality of times between one interrupt process and the next interrupt process.

Furthermore, the main loop processing time during game standby (no bet) has an interrupt prohibition time "M12" (interrupt wait processing time).
therefore,
T1-I1-M12=“1.0893”ms>M11×2
is necessary.
Furthermore, in the main loop processing, it is desirable to execute more game-related processing (program processing in the first area) than non-game-related processing (program processing in the second area).
M13 (“0.0175” ms)>M14 (“0.0020” ms)
is preferably
It should be noted that the processing time "M14" of the program in the second area during the main loop processing during the game standby time (no bet) is the error-related processing time (step S1072 in FIG. 194(b) to be described later).
Also, if there is processing of the program in the second area during the main loop processing,
T1-I1-M12-M14=“1.0873”ms>M11×2
It is necessary to be

194(a) and (b) are flowcharts showing main loop processing during game standby (no bet), and FIG. 194(c) is a flowchart showing interrupt processing during game standby (no bet). .
It should be noted that the main processing and interrupt processing described below show only the minimum processing necessary for explaining the twelfth embodiment, and do not show all the processing.
In FIG. 194(a), during game standby (no bet), the processing from step S1061 to step S1064 is looped.

First, in step S1061, error-related processing is executed. This process is the process shown in FIG. 194(b), and is the process of detecting whether or not an error has occurred. Concretely, the path sensor 46, the input sensor 44, the hopper 35 are turned on/off, the output sensor 37 is checked for errors, and the like.
In the next step S1062, settlement processing is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated. Signal input processing from the settlement switch 43 is executed by interrupt processing. When the settlement switch 43 is operated, the rise data of the settlement switch 43 becomes "1". In step S1062, it is determined whether or not the rise data of the adjustment switch 43 is "1". When it is determined that the rise data of the settlement switch 43 is "1", it is determined that the settlement switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S1063, medal insertion related processing is executed. This process corresponds to the medal management process of step S276 in FIG. Specifically, when it is determined whether or not the start-up data of the input sensor 44 is "1" or whether the start-up data of the bed switch 40 is "1" and is judged to be "1". performs the betting process. Signal input processing of the insertion sensor 44 and signal input processing of the bet switch 40 are executed by interrupt processing.
Then, in step S1064, it is determined whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. This process is a process of determining whether or not the rise data of the start switch 41 is "1". Signal input processing of the start switch 41 is executed by interrupt processing.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process (omission) is performed after the start switch 41 has been operated, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S1061. In this manner, steps S1061 to S1064 are looped during game standby before medals are inserted.

Also, most of the processing of steps S1061 to S1064 is processing of the program stored in the first area. Part of the error-related processing in step S1061 (abnormal value calculation processing in step S1072 to be described later) is processing of the program stored in the second area. As described above, the program for the fraud detection processing that is not related to the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
FIG. 194(b) is a flowchart showing error-related processing in step S1061. First, in step S1071, interrupt prohibition processing is executed. This processing corresponds to the "DI" instruction as described above. Next, the process advances to step S1072 to execute abnormal value calculation processing. A program for the abnormal value calculation process is stored in the second area. This process is a process of counting the residence time of the input sensor 44 and the payout sensor 37, and the like.

When the abnormal value calculation process ends, the process advances to step S1073 to execute the interrupt permission process. This process is a process for canceling the interrupt prohibition executed in step S1071, and corresponds to the "EI" instruction. In this way, the abnormal value calculation process in step S1072 is executed while prohibiting the interrupt process, thereby preventing the abnormal value from being updated due to the interrupt process being executed during the abnormal value calculation process. Next, the process advances to step S1074 to perform abnormal value detection processing. This process is a process of determining whether the value calculated in step S1072 is an abnormal value. When it is determined to be an abnormal value, a process for detecting an abnormal value, such as stopping the game, is executed. Other processing of the error-related processing is omitted.

FIG. 194(c) is a flow chart showing interrupt processing executed during the main loop processing during game standby (no bet), and is a simplified representation of the processing shown in FIG.
First, in step S1201, interrupt prohibition processing is executed. This process corresponds to the "DI" instruction. In the next step S1202, signal input processing is executed. This process corresponds to the input port read process in step S457 in FIG. 184, and is a process of reading input signals from various switches (start switch 41, etc.) and various sensors (insertion sensor 44, etc.). After that, based on the read input signal, various data (level data, rising data, falling data) are generated and stored in the RWM 53 at a predetermined address.
In the next step S1203, timer update processing is executed. This processing corresponds to timer measurement in step S455 in FIG. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, updating of a timer value for judging whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed can be mentioned.

The signal output processing in the next step S1204 corresponds to the port output processing in step S462 in FIG. This process outputs signals from the motor 32, the hopper motor 36, the blocker 45, and the like. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1205 to issue an interrupt permission command. This processing corresponds to the "EI" instruction.
As described above, in interrupt processing, signal input, timer update, and signal output, which are program processing in the first area, are executed while interrupt processing is prohibited. Also, after the interrupt permission processing in step S1205, the process advances to step S1206 to execute error check processing. This process corresponds to the input error check (process for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in various sensors) in step S463 in FIG. Next, the process advances to step S1207 to execute role ratio monitor processing. This process corresponds to the ratio display preparation in step S960 in FIG. Then, the interrupt processing ends.

In the game standby state (no bet), the main loop processing time “M11” (processing time of steps S1061 to S1064) doubled “M11×2” is the interrupt interval “T” (“1.18 ms) minus the interrupt processing time "I1" (the processing time of steps S1201 to SS1207), which is shorter than the time "TI1".
Also, considering the interrupt prohibition time "M12" (processing time of steps S1071 to S1073) of the main loop processing, "M11×2" is shorter than "TI1-M12".
Furthermore, the processing time "M13" of the program in the first area of the main loop processing (the processing time of steps S1061 (steps S1071, S1073, S1074), S1062, S1063, and S1064) corresponds to the program in the second area of the main loop processing. is longer than the processing time "M14" (processing time of step S1072).
Furthermore, “M11×2” is a shorter time than “T1-I1-M12-M14”.
Further, the processing time "I61" (processing time of steps S1201 to S1205) (the time from executing the "DI" instruction to executing the "EI"instruction; the same shall apply hereinafter) is interruptible processing. This time is longer than the time "I62" (the processing time of steps S1206 and S1207).

FIGS. 195(a) and (b) are flowcharts showing main loop processing and interrupt processing after betting and before starting a game.
In FIG. 195(a), unlike in FIG. 194(a), it is after betting (after the prescribed number of coins have been inserted), so the medal insertion-related processing in step S1063 in FIG. 194(a) is not executed. In the main process in this state, the processes of steps S1061, S1062 and S1064 are looped until the operation of the start switch 41 is detected. The processing of these steps S1061, S1062 and S1064 is the same as in FIG. 194(a).
The error-related processing in step S1061 is also the same as in FIG. 194(b).
Furthermore, in the interruption process of FIG. 195(c), the lamp lighting process in step S1207 corresponds to the process of dynamic lighting of the bed lamp 40 and the game start display LED 79d, and corresponds to the LED display control of FIG. Others are the same as in FIG. 194(c).

In the above state after the bet and before the start of the game, "M21×2" obtained by doubling the main loop processing time "M21" (the processing time of steps S1061, S1062, and S1064) is the interrupt processing time from the interrupt interval "T". The time is shorter than the time "T-I2" obtained by subtracting "I2".
Also, taking into account the interrupt prohibition time "M22" of the main loop processing, "M21×2" is shorter than "TI2-M22".
Furthermore, the processing time "M23" of the program in the first area of the main loop processing (the processing time of steps S1061 (steps S1071, S1073, S1074), S1062, and S1064) corresponds to the processing of the program in the second area of the main loop processing. This time is longer than the time "M24" (the processing time of step S1072).
Furthermore, "M21×2" is a shorter time than "TI2-M22-M24".
Further, the interrupt-disabled processing time "I61" (the processing time of steps S1201 to S1207) is longer than the interruptable processing time "I62" (the processing time of steps S1206 to S1207).

FIGS. 196(a) and (b) are flowcharts showing main loop processing and interrupt processing after the reel 31 starts rotating, after the reel 31 reaches a constant speed, and before the reel 31 stops.
When the start switch 41 is operated, a random number for a winning combination is obtained and a winning combination is determined. On the other hand, the rotation of the reels 31 is started based on the operation of the start switch 41, and when the rotation of the reels 31 reaches a constant speed, the process of creating a stop table based on the determined winning combination and the operated stop switch 42 is performed. conduct. The stop position creation process in step S1091 corresponds to this process. Next, in step S1092, it is determined whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated. The main loop processing of steps S1091 and S1092 is executed until it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated. For example, when the left stop switch is first operated, the left reel 31 is stopped, and after returning to step S1091, stop positions for the middle and right reels 31 are created. Similarly, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated next time, the stop processing of the middle reel 31 is executed, and after returning to step S1091, the stop position for the right reel 31 is created.
Also, in the interrupt processing executed during this main loop processing, the processing of step S1208 is different from that of FIG. 194(c). The program processing of the first area is executed when the interrupt is disabled by the interrupt disable instruction, and the excitation-related processing of step S1208 is executed during the program processing. This processing corresponds to the excitation processing of the motor 33 for rotating the reel 31 at a constant speed (switching of driving pulses of the motor, etc.).

In the above state during constant rotation of the reel and before the reel stops, "M31×2" obtained by doubling the main loop processing time "M31" (processing time of steps S1091 and S1092) is the interrupt processing from the interrupt interval "T". The time is shorter than the time "TI3" obtained by subtracting the time "I3".
Also, in consideration of the interrupt inhibition time "M32" (actually "0" ms) of the main loop processing, "M31×2" is shorter than "TI3-M32".
Furthermore, the processing time "M33" (the processing time of steps S1091 and S1092) of the program in the first area of the main loop process is the processing time "M42" of the program in the second area of the main loop process (actually "0 ” ms).
Furthermore, “M31×2” has a shorter time than “TI3-M32-M34”.
In addition, the interrupt-disabled processing time "I61" (the processing time of steps S1201 to S1205) is longer than the interruptable processing time "I62" (the processing time of steps S1206 to S1207).

FIGS. 197(a) and 197(b) are flow charts showing main loop processing and interrupt processing during reel constant speed rotation and before all reels are stopped.
After the stop table creation process in step S1091, it continues to determine whether or not the stop switch 42 has been operated in step S1092. This process is a process of determining whether or not the rising data of any stop switch 42 corresponding to the rotating reel 31 is "1". Signal input processing from the stop switch 42 is executed by interrupt processing.
When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process advances to step S1093 to execute stop-related processing. This process is a process of creating a flag for determining which reel 31 to stop, decelerating the reel 31, and stopping and displaying symbols according to the stop table created in the stop position creation process. Next, in step S1094, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to symbol determination processing (not shown), and when it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S1091. Thus, steps S1091 to S1094 are looped.
Also, the interrupt processing executed during this main loop processing differs from the interrupt processing in FIG. 196(b) in the stop-related processing in step S1209. This process is a process for executing switching of the drive state (constant speed, deceleration, stop) of the reel 31, and the like.

In the above state during constant rotation of the reels and before all the reels are stopped, "M41×2" obtained by doubling the main loop processing time "M41" (processing time of steps S1091 to S1094) is interrupted from the interrupt interval "T". This time is shorter than the time "T-I4" obtained by subtracting the processing time "I4".
Also, in consideration of the interrupt inhibition time "M42" (actually "0" ms) of the main loop processing, "M41×2" is shorter than "TI4-M42".
Furthermore, the processing time "M43" of the program in the first area of the main loop processing (the processing time of steps S1092 to S1094) is the processing time "M42" of the program in the second area of the main loop processing (actually "0 ” ms).
Furthermore, “M41×2” has a shorter time than “TI4-M42-M44”.
In addition, the interrupt-disabled processing time "I61" (the processing time of steps S1201 to S1205) is longer than the interruptable processing time "I62" (the processing time of steps S1206 to S1207).

FIGS. 198(a) and (b) are flowcharts showing main loop processing during payout processing after all reels are stopped, and FIG. 198(c) is a flowchart showing interrupt processing in that state.
In (a) of the drawing, after all the reels 31 have stopped, payout-related processing is executed in step S1111. This process is a process of judging the symbols stopped and displaying, and calculating (determining) the number of payouts corresponding to the combination of symbols stopped and displayed.
In the next step S1112, storage device addition processing is executed. This process is a process of adding credits when the number of credits is less than the upper limit ("50"). Next, proceeding to step S1113, it is determined whether or not the payout has been completed. When it is determined that the payout has been completed (the payout process for all payouts has been completed), this flow chart is terminated, and when it is determined that the payout has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S1114. In step S1114, it is determined whether or not the number of storage devices has reached the maximum (whether or not the number of credits has reached "50"). When it is determined that the storage device has reached the maximum, the process proceeds to step S1115, and when it is determined that the storage device is not the maximum, the process returns to step S1112 to execute addition to the storage device.
In step S1115, a payout device process is executed. This process is a process of driving the hopper motor 36 and actually paying out medals. Next, the process advances to step S1116 to determine whether or not the payout has been completed (whether or not the payout processing for the total number of payouts has been completed). When it is determined that the payout has been completed, this flow chart is ended, and when it is determined that the payout has not been completed, the process returns to step S1115 to execute the payout device process.

FIG. 198(b) is a flow chart showing the dispensing device processing in step S1115. The payout process of step S1121 is a process of driving the hopper motor 36 and paying out one medal. Next, the process advances to step S1122 to execute interrupt prohibition processing (“DI” instruction). In step S1122, a payout sensor 37 abnormality detection process is executed. This process is a process of monitoring the timing at which the payout sensor 37 passes medals and determining whether or not it is within the design range. After this process, the process advances to step S1124 to execute an interrupt enable instruction (“EI” instruction). In this way, the payout sensor abnormality process is executed while prohibiting the interrupt process. This is to prevent the input signal of the payout sensor 37 from changing during the payout sensor abnormality process.
Also, the interrupt process executed during this main loop process differs from the interrupt process of FIG. 194(c) in the payout-related process of step S1210. This processing corresponds to excitation of the hopper motor 36 and the like.

In the state of payout processing after all the reels are stopped, "M51×2" obtained by doubling the main loop processing time "M51" (processing time of steps S1112 to S1116) is calculated from the interrupt interval "T" to the interrupt processing time " This time is shorter than the time "T-I5" obtained by subtracting "I5".
Also, taking into consideration the interrupt prohibition time "M52" (the processing time of steps S1122 to S1124) of the main loop processing, "M51×2" is shorter than "TI5-M52".
Furthermore, the processing time "M53" of the program in the first area of the main loop processing (the processing time of steps S1112 to S1116) is the processing time "M54" of the program in the second area of the main loop processing (actually "0 ” ms).
Furthermore, “M51×2” has a shorter time than “TI5-M52-M54”.
In addition, the interrupt-disabled processing time "I61" (the processing time of steps S1201 to S1205) is longer than the interruptable processing time "I62" (the processing time of steps S1206 to S1207).

Next, efficiency improvement of program processing time in the twelfth embodiment will be described.
In the example described above, an interrupt disable instruction (“DI” instruction) and an interrupt enable instruction (“EI” instruction) were used in interrupt processing. On the other hand, in the example shown below, the interrupt disable instruction (“DI” instruction) and the interrupt enable instruction (“EI” instruction) are not used in interrupt processing. Both the disable interrupt instruction (“DI” instruction) and the enable interrupt instruction (“EI” instruction) are programs that require several bytes. Therefore, if these instructions are not used, the storage capacity of interrupt processing can be reduced. Also, by not using the interrupt disable instruction (“DI” instruction) and the interrupt enable instruction (“EI” instruction), the interrupt processing time can be shortened (interrupt processing can be speeded up).

FIG. 199(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of processing from insertion of medals to winning combination lottery in the main process, and FIG. 199(b) is a flow chart showing interrupt processing executed during this main process.
After the specified number of medals have been inserted in step S1131, it is determined in the next step S1132 whether or not the adjustment switch 43 has been operated. Next, in step S1133, it is determined whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S1132, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1134.
After the prescribed number of medals have been inserted, the shortest processing time of the main loop processing for determining whether the checkout switch 43 has been operated and whether the start switch 41 has been operated is "T1" (theoretical value or actual measurement value). and the maximum processing time is "T2" (theoretical value or actual measurement value). It is also assumed that the program capacity of this main loop process is "P1".
If it is determined in step S1133 that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process advances to step S1134 to execute an interrupt prohibition instruction (“DI” instruction). Next, in step S1135, the combination lottery means (internal lottery means) 61 acquires a random number for the combination lottery. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1135 to execute an interrupt enable instruction (“EI” instruction). In this way, when acquiring the random number for the combination lottery, the interrupt process is prohibited and executed.
After the interrupt permission command, the process proceeds to step S1137, and a combination lottery (winning determination) is executed based on the acquired random number.

Here, when it is determined whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated, the interrupt is permitted (in other words, the interrupt prohibition instruction is not used). On the other hand, when the random number for winning lottery is acquired, the interruption is prohibited by using the interrupt prohibition instruction.
Further, the processing time "T3" (theoretical value or actual measurement value) required for steps S1134 to S1136 is shorter than the processing times "T1" and "T2" described above. Also, the program capacity "P2" in steps S1134 to S1136 is smaller than the program capacity "P1".

Also, as shown in FIG. 199(b), the interrupt processing in this example (the same applies to FIGS. 200(b) to 207(b) below) specifies that the interrupt disable instruction (“DI”) is not used. Characterized by Specifically, the signal input (acquisition) processing of the start switch 41 and others is executed in a state in which the interrupt prohibition instruction is not used. By not using the interrupt disable instruction (and the subsequent interrupt enable instruction (“EI” instruction)), the interrupt processing time can be secured, the interrupt processing program capacity can be reduced, and the interrupt processing time can be shortened. . If the interrupt processing time can be shortened, it is possible to reduce the possibility of so-called processing failure (the arrival of the next interrupt processing timing before all the processing in one interrupt processing is completed).
In the interrupt process, after the signal input process of the start switch 41 or the like in step S1301, the timer update process is executed in step S1302. Although not shown, since a plurality of types of timers are provided, the timer update processing time in step S1302 is longer than the signal input processing in step S1301. Therefore, by executing the signal input processing first, the intervals between the signal input processing (signal acquisition intervals) can be kept as constant as possible.

FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the main processing from the start of rotation of the reel 31 to the operation of the stop switch 42, and the interrupt processing executed during that time.
In the main process of FIG. 199(a), after the winning combination lottery is executed in step S1137, the process proceeds to the process of FIG. 200(a). An acceleration flag, a constant speed flag, a deceleration flag, and a stop flag are set for the reel 31 according to the drive state. Here, when setting the acceleration flag, interrupt processing is prohibited. Therefore, in step S1141, an interrupt disable instruction (“DI” instruction) is executed. Next, in step S1142, the reel rotation acceleration state (acceleration flag) is set. After that, the process advances to step S1143 to execute an interrupt permission instruction (“EI” instruction).

Further, when the acceleration of the reel 31 is completed, the constant speed flag is set next. In step S1144, the reel 31 is set to rotate at a constant speed (constant speed flag). At the time when the process of setting the constant speed state of the reel 31 is executed, the interrupt prohibition instruction is not executed. That is, the constant speed flag is set in the interrupt enabled state.
Next, a determination is made as to whether or not the index of the reel 31 has been passed. Determination of whether or not the index has passed (whether or not an index signal has been input) is executed while prohibiting interrupt processing. Therefore, an interrupt prohibition instruction (“DI” instruction) is executed in step S1145, and index passage determination is executed in the next step S1146. It should be noted that this index pass judgment is made at once for all the reels 31 . Thereafter, an interrupt enable instruction (“EI” instruction) is executed in step S1147.

In step S1148, it is determined whether the stop switch 42 has been operated. When it is determined in step S1148 that the stop switch 42 has not been operated, the process returns to step S1145, and when it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1149.
When it is determined that the stop switch 42 has been operated, a stop acceptance set is executed in step S1150. This process is a process of determining at which position the reel 31 should be stopped and storing the stop position. Also, the stop acceptance set in step S1150 is executed while prohibiting interrupt processing. Therefore, when proceeding from step S1148 to step S1149, an interrupt prohibition instruction (“DI” instruction) is executed, and then stop acceptance set is executed in step S1150. After that, in step S1151, an interrupt permission instruction (“EI” instruction) is executed.

Furthermore, in the next step S1152, a stop table is set (selected). Further, in the next step S1153, the rotation deceleration state (deceleration flag) of the reel 31 is set. At the time when the processing for setting the deceleration state of the reel 31 is executed, the interrupt prohibition instruction is not executed. That is, the deceleration flag is set in the interrupt enabled state.
As described above, each process of setting the constant speed state of the reel 31 (step S1144) and setting the deceleration state (step S1153) is executed in a state in which interrupt processing is permitted. On the other hand, the setting of the acceleration state of the reel 31 (step S1142), the index passage determination (step S1146), and the stop acceptance setting (step S1150) are executed in the interrupt disabled state using the interrupt disable instruction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 200(b), in the interrupt processing from the start of rotation of the reel 31 to the operation of the stop switch 42, the index signal input processing and the stop signal input processing in step S1303, and the Timer update processing is executed, but these processing are executed without using interrupt disable instructions.

Next, the relationship between each main process and interrupt process and the ON/OFF state of various LEDs (game start display LED 79d, insertion display LED 79e, and replay display LED 79f in FIG. 57A) will be described.
In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, as described in FIGS. 54 and 59 to 61 (second embodiment), the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) of the use area is provided, and for the segments 1A to 1G and 1P , "5" interrupt cycle dynamic lighting is executed.
Also, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the game start display LED 79d, the insertion display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f are assigned to the segment 1P, and each interrupt process (interrupt cycle T=“1.18”) ms), in LED display control (I_LED_OUT), a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment signal is output from output port 4 (see step S2846 in FIG. 71). As shown in FIG. 59, the "D7" bit (segment 1P signal) of the output port 4 corresponds to the turn-on/off signal of the game start display LED 79d, the insertion display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 54 (second embodiment), in the use area of the RWM 53, a storage area for status display LED lighting data is provided at an address "F044H", and a game start display LED 79d is provided at the "D0" bit. , and the lighting data storage area of the input display LED 79e is assigned to the "D1" bit, and the lighting data storage area of the replay display LED 79f is assigned to the "D2" bit.

FIGS. 201(a) and 201(b) are flow charts showing the flow of main processing from when the specified number of medals are inserted to immediately after the start switch is operated, and the flow of interrupt processing between the processing.
In the figure (a), after the specified number of medals have been inserted in step S1161, it is continued to determine whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated in step S1162. At the time of determining whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated, the interrupt prohibition instruction has not been executed and the interrupt is permitted. On the other hand, when the specified number of medals is inserted in step S1161, the game start display LED 79d is lit up after that.
When a specified number of medals are inserted, a process of setting the "D0" bit in the state display lighting data of the address "F044H" in FIG. 54 to "1" (game start display LED lighting preparation set) is executed. After that, at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001B", a signal with the "D7" bit being "1" (segment 1P lighting signal) is output from the output port 4. FIG. As a result, after that, the game start display LED 79d is turned on.
It should be noted that when a signal indicating that the "D7" bit is "1" is output from the output port 4 in step S2846 of FIG. As time passes, the light-off state is gradually switched to the light-on state. For example, it takes about several milliseconds from the light-off state to the light-on state.

When the start switch 41 is operated in step S1162, the process advances to step S1163, and a turn off preparation setting process for the game start display LED 79d is executed. This process is to set the "D0" bit in the status display lighting data at the address "F044H" in FIG. 54 to "0".
The determination of whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated (step S1162) and the turn off preparation setting process of the game start display LED 79d (step S1163) are executed in a state where the interrupt prohibition command is not executed, that is, in the interrupt permission state. be done.
Also, after the game start display LED 79d turn off preparation set process is executed, the interrupt process is executed, and at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001B", the "D7" bit is output from the output port 4. is "0" (segment 1P turn-off signal) is output. After that, the game start display LED 79d is turned off. Therefore, immediately after the process of step S1163 is completed, the game start display LED 79d is still kept on.
Furthermore, after executing the game start display LED 79d extinguishing preparation set processing of step S1163, the process proceeds to step S1164, an interrupt prohibition instruction ("DI" instruction) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S1165 to accelerate the reel rotation state (acceleration flag ). Thereafter, an interrupt enable instruction (“EI”) is executed in step S1166.
In this way, the game start display LED 79d extinguishing preparation setting process is executed before the reel rotation acceleration state setting process.

Further, as shown in FIG. 201(b), in the interrupt processing executed during execution of the main processing, each processing is executed in a state where the interrupt prohibition instruction (“DI” instruction) is not executed. Then, at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001B", as shown in step S1305, a turn-off signal output process for the game start display LED is executed. In this process, a signal whose "D7" bit is "0" (segment 1P turn-off signal) is output from the output port 4 . After that, the game start display LED 79d is turned off. Therefore, at the end of the interrupt process in which step S1305 is executed, the game start display LED 79d can be visually turned on, and then the game start display LED 79d is turned off.

FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b) are flowcharts showing the flow of main processing and the flow of interrupt processing between the processing when the settlement switch 43 is operated after the specified number of medals have been inserted. .
In the figure (a), after the specified number of medals have been inserted in step S1161, until the start switch 41 is operated, it is continuously determined in step S1167 whether or not the adjustment switch 43 has been operated. Further, when it is determined in step S1167 that the settlement switch 43 has been operated, the game start display LED 79d is turned off after that, and the game start display LED 79d is turned off.

If it is determined in step S1167 that the settlement switch 43 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1168, in which processing to set the "D0" bit in the state display lighting data of address "F044H" in FIG. 54 to "0" (game start display LED extinguishing preparation set) is executed.
The determination of whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated (step S1167), and the game start display LED 79d extinguishing preparation set process (step S1168) are executed in a state in which an interrupt prohibition command is not executed, that is, in an interrupt permission state. be done.
Then, after the game start display LED 79d is ready for turning off, the process proceeds to step S1169, and the settlement process is executed.
After the turn-off preparation set process of the game start display LED 79d, at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001B", the signal "D7" bit is "0" from the output port 4 (segment 1P turn-off signal ) is output. As a result, after that, the game start display LED 79d is turned off. Therefore, immediately after the process of step S1168 is completed, the game start display LED 79d still remains lit.
It should be noted that, until then, when a signal indicating that the "D7" bit is "1" has been output from the output port 4, after the game start display LED 79d is set to turn off preparation, "D7" is output from the output port 4. When a signal whose bit is "0" is output, the game start display LED 79d does not turn off visually at that moment, but gradually switches from the on state to the off state as time elapses. For example, it takes about several milliseconds from the lit state to the extinguished state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 202(b), in the interrupt processing executed during execution of the main processing, each processing is executed in a state where the interrupt prohibition instruction (“DI” instruction) is not executed. When the rise signal of the settlement switch 43 becomes "1" in step S1306, it is determined in step S1167 that the settlement switch 43 has been operated in the main processing after the end of the interrupt processing. After that, the interrupt process is executed, and at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001B", as shown in step S1307, the turn-off signal output process for the game start display LED is executed. In this process, a signal whose "D7" bit is "0" (segment 1P turn-off signal) is output from the output port 4 . After that, the game start display LED 79d is turned off. Therefore, at the end of the interruption process in which step S1307 is executed, the game start display LED 79d can be visually turned on, and thereafter the game start display LED 79d is turned off.

FIGS. 203(a) and 203(b) show the flow of main processing when an abnormal state (recoverable error state) occurs after the specified number of medals have been inserted, and the flow of interrupt processing between the processings. It is a flow chart showing.
In (a) of the drawing, it is assumed that an abnormal state has occurred after a specified number of medals have been inserted in step S1161. Here, it is assumed that the game start display LED 79 is in a lighting state when the abnormal state occurs.
After the specified number of medals have been inserted in step S1161 and before the start switch 41 is operated, it is continuously determined in step S1171 whether or not an abnormal state has been detected. When it is determined that an abnormal state has been detected, the process proceeds to step S1172.
In step S1172, a turn-off preparation setting process for the game start display LED 79d is executed. This process is to set the "D0" bit in the status display lighting data at the address "F044H" in FIG. 54 to "0".

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the above abnormal state has occurred (step S1171) and the game start display LED 79d extinguishing preparation set process (step S1172) are performed in a state where the interrupt prohibition command is not executed, that is, in the interrupt permission state. executed.
Further, after the game start display LED 79d turn off preparation set process of step S1172, the process proceeds to step S1173 to execute the game stop set process at the time of abnormal state detection.
Further, after the game start display LED 79d is set to turn off preparation, the interrupt process is executed, and at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001B", the "D7" bit is output from the output port 4. is "0" (segment 1P turn-off signal) is output. After that, the game start display LED 79d is turned off. Therefore, immediately after the process of step S1172 is completed, the game start display LED 79d is still kept on.

Further, as shown in FIG. 203(b), in the interrupt processing executed during execution of the main processing, each processing is executed in a state where the interrupt prohibition instruction (“DI” instruction) is not executed. Then, at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001B", as shown in step S1308, a turn-off signal output process for the game start display LED is executed. In this process, a signal whose "D7" bit is "0" (segment 1P turn-off signal) is output from the output port 4 . After that, the game start display LED 79d is turned off. Therefore, at the end of the interruption process in which step S1308 is executed, the game start display LED 79d can be visually turned on, and thereafter the game start display LED 79d is turned off. After the signal with the "D7" bit being "0" is output from the output port 4, the lighting state is gradually switched to the extinguishing state with the lapse of time. For example, it takes about several milliseconds from the lit state to the extinguished state.

FIGS. 204(a) and (b) are flow charts showing the flow of main processing and the flow of interrupt processing in the case where replay operation symbols (symbol combination corresponding to replay) are stopped and displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the replay is won at the start of the game, and the replay operation symbol is stopped.
At step S1181, it continues to be determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S1182, and winning determination processing is executed. In this process, it is determined that the replay operation pattern has stopped.
Next, the process advances to step S1183 to set lighting preparation processing for the replay display LED 79f. This process is to set the "D2" bit in the status indication lighting data at the address "F044H" in FIG. 54 to "1".

Note that the lighting preparation setting process for the replay display LED 79f is executed in a state in which the interrupt prohibition instruction is not executed, that is, in an interrupt enable state.
Also, after the lighting preparation set processing for the replay display LED 79f is executed, the interrupt processing is executed, and at the timing of the interrupt processing when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100B" (see FIG. 61(A)), the output A signal (segment 1P lighting signal) whose “D7” bit is “1” is output from the port 4 . After that, the replay display LED 79f is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the process of step S1183 is completed, the replay display LED 79f is still off.
Then, after the replay display LED 79f lighting preparation setting process of step S1183, the process proceeds to step S1184 to determine whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated. When it is determined that the settlement switch 43 has been operated, the flow advances to step S1169 to execute settlement processing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 204(b), in the interrupt processing executed during execution of the main processing, each processing is executed in a state where the interrupt prohibition instruction (“DI” instruction) is not executed. Then, at the timing of the interrupt processing when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100B", as shown in step S1310, the lighting signal output processing for the replay display LED 79f is executed. In this process, a signal (segment 1P lighting signal) whose “D7” bit is “1” is output from the output port 4 . After that, the replay display LED 79f is turned on. Therefore, at the end of the interrupt process in which step S1310 is executed, the replay display LED 79f is in a state of being visually extinguished, and thereafter the replay display LED 79f is in a lighting state. Here, when a signal in which the "D7" bit is "1" is output from the output port 4, the lighting of the replay display LED 79f does not become visible at that moment, but gradually turns off as time passes. Switch to lit state. For example, it takes about several milliseconds from the off state to the on state.
Further, in step S1309, signal input processing of the settlement switch 43 is executed. When the rise data of the settlement switch 43 is "1", it is determined that the settlement switch 43 has been operated in step S1184.

FIGS. 205(a) and (b) are flow charts showing the flow of the main processing in the next game of the game in which the replay operation symbol is stopped and displayed, and the flow of the interruption processing therebetween. In this example, it is assumed that a replay is not won in the next game of the game in which the replay operation symbols are stop-displayed (replay operation symbols are not stop-displayed).
At step S1181, it continues to be determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S1182, and winning determination processing is executed. In this process, it is determined that the replay operation pattern is not displayed stop.
Next, the process advances to step S1185 to set a turn-off preparation process for the replay display LED 79f. This process is to set the "D2" bit in the status display lighting data at the address "F044H" in FIG. 54 to "0".
Here, the extinguishing preparation setting process for the replay display LED 79f in step S1185 is executed in a state where the interrupt prohibition instruction is not executed, that is, in the interrupt enable state.
Further, after the replay display LED 79f extinguishing preparation set process is executed, the interrupt process is executed, and at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100B", the "D7" bit is output from the output port 4. A signal of "0" (segment 1P turn-off signal) is output. After that, the replay display LED 79f is turned off. Therefore, immediately after the process of step S1185 is completed, the replay display LED 79f is still lit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 205(b), in the interrupt processing executed during execution of the main processing, each processing is executed in a state where the interrupt prohibition instruction (“DI” instruction) is not executed. Then, at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100B", as shown in step S1312, a turn-off signal output process for the replay display LED 79f is executed. In this process, a signal whose "D7" bit is "0" (segment 1P turn-off signal) is output from the output port 4 . After that, the replay display LED 79f is turned off. Therefore, at the end of the interrupt process that executed step S1312, the replay display LED 79f is still visually lit, and then the replay display LED 79f is turned off. Here, when a signal in which the "D7" bit is "0" is output from the output port 4, the extinguishing of the replay display LED 79f does not become visually visible at that moment, but gradually from the lit state with the passage of time. Switches to the off state. For example, it takes about several milliseconds from the lit state to the extinguished state.

FIGS. 206(a) and (b) are flow charts showing the flow of the main processing in the process of executing the lighting processing of the insertion display LED 79e after all the reels 31 are stopped, and the flow of the interruption processing therebetween.
At step S1181, it continues to be determined whether or not all reels 31 have stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S1182, and winning determination processing is executed. It should be noted that the replay operation pattern is not stopped and displayed here.
Next, in step S1186, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated. When it is determined that the settlement switch 43 has been operated, the processing shifts to settlement processing. After determining whether or not the settlement switch 43 has been operated, the process advances to step S1187 to set lighting preparation processing for the input display LED 79e. This process is to set the "D1" bit in the status display lighting data at the address "F044H" in FIG. 54 to "1".
The lighting preparation setting process for the input display LED 79e is executed in a state in which an interrupt prohibition instruction is not executed, that is, in an interrupt permission state.
In addition, at the timing of the interrupt process (see FIG. 61A) when the interrupt process is executed and the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010B" after the lighting preparation setting process for the input display LED 79e is executed, the output A signal (segment 1P lighting signal) whose “D7” bit is “1” is output from the port 4 . After that, the input display LED 79e is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the process of step S1187 is completed, the input display LED 79e is still in the off state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 206(b), in the interrupt processing executed during execution of the main processing, each processing is executed in a state where the interrupt prohibition instruction (“DI” instruction) is not executed. Then, at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010B", as shown in step S1314, the lighting signal output process for the input display LED 79e is executed. In this process, a signal (segment 1P lighting signal) whose “D7” bit is “1” is output from the output port 4 . After that, the input display LED 79e is turned on. Therefore, at the end of the interrupt process in which step S1314 is executed, the input display LED 79e is visually extinguished, and then the input display LED 79e is lit. Here, when a signal whose "D7" bit is "1" is output from the output port 4, the lighting of the input display LED 79e does not become visible at that moment. Switch to lit state. For example, it takes about several milliseconds from the light-off state to the light-on state.
Further, in step S1313, signal input processing for the settlement switch 43 is executed. When the rise data of the settlement switch 43 is "1", it is determined that the settlement switch 43 has been operated in step S1186.

FIGS. 207(a) and (b) are flow charts showing the flow of main processing and the flow of interrupt processing in the process of executing the turn-off processing of the insertion display LED 79e after the specified number of medals have been inserted. .
In (a) of the drawing, after the specified number of medals are inserted in step S1161, the process proceeds to step S1188, and a turn off preparation setting process for the insertion display LED 79e is executed. This process is to set the "D1" bit in the status display lighting data at the address "F044H" in FIG. 54 to "0". Also, the turn-off preparation setting process for the input display LED 79e is executed in a state where the interrupt prohibition instruction is not executed, that is, in the interrupt enable state.
Furthermore, at the interrupt processing timing (see FIG. 61A) when the interrupt processing is executed after the turn-off preparation setting processing for the input display LED 79e is executed and the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010B", A signal (segment 1P turn-off signal) whose “D7” bit is “0” is output from the output port 4 . After that, the input display LED 79e is turned off. Therefore, immediately after the process of step S1187 is completed, the input display LED 79e still maintains the lighting state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 207(b), in the interrupt processing executed during execution of the main processing, each processing is executed in a state where the interrupt prohibition instruction (“DI” instruction) is not executed. Then, at the timing of the interrupt process when the LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010B", as shown in step S1316, a turn-off signal output process for the input display LED is executed. In this process, a signal whose "D7" bit is "0" (segment 1P turn-off signal) is output from the output port 4 . After that, the input display LED 79e is turned off. Therefore, at the end of the interrupt process in which step S1316 is executed, the input display LED 79e can be turned on visually, and then the input display LED 79e is turned off. Here, when a signal whose "D7" bit is "0" is output from the output port 4, it is not possible to visually turn off the input display LED 79e at that moment, but gradually from the lighting state with the passage of time. Switches to the off state. For example, it takes about several milliseconds from the lit state to the extinguished state.

Although the twelfth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In FIGS. 190 and 191, a plurality of jump instructions are used from the start program of the user mode to the start of the normal game processing (main processing). Just do it. Of course, even if the jump instruction is used only once, it is possible to limit the operation of the fraudulent program more than when no jump instruction is used from the start program of the user mode to the start of normal game processing. . However, by using the jump instruction multiple times from the start program of the user mode to the start of the normal game processing, it is possible to make it more difficult for the fraudulent program to operate.
(2) In FIG. 192(a), the "CALLF" instruction may be used to call any address in the third area, but the "CALL" instruction may also be used.
Also, when calling the program in the second area from the first area, the "CALLEX" instruction may be used, but the "CALL" instruction may also be used. If the "CALL" instruction is used to call the program in the second area, the "RET" instruction is used to return to the program in the first area.

(3) In FIG. 192(b), "00H" is stored in all the empty areas of the fourth area, but "00H" can be stored only in a part of the range where the malicious program cannot be embedded. is.
On the other hand, it is also possible to store "00H" in at least some of the areas (the third area, the first area, and the second area) other than the fourth area as well, for addresses at which malicious programs may be embedded. .
(4) The average processing time shown in FIG. 193 (theoretical value or average value of actually measured values) is an example, and is not limited to this. For example, in the twelfth embodiment, the interrupt time interval "T" was set to "1.18" ms, but as shown in the second embodiment, it may be a time other than "1.18" ms. In this case, the interrupt processing time may differ from the processing time shown in FIG. different.

(5) In FIG. 193, the first area processing time and the second area processing time are examples. For example, in the state of "game standby (no bet)", the second area processing time is "error-related processing time", but not limited to this, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, other second area processing time Alternatively, there may be cases where the second area processing time does not include the "error-related processing time". The same applies to other states.
Further, for example, in the state of "constant reel speed and before reel stop", the second area processing time (M34) is set to "0" ms. It is possible that time has some meaning.
(6) In the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 194 to 207, the processing is omitted by describing "(omitted)" and "hereinafter omitted", but it does not mean that the processing is not omitted where these descriptions are not provided. do not have. For example, in FIG. 194(a), it is not meant that there is no other processing between steps S1062 and S1063. Of course, it is possible that there are no other processes between the processes.

(7) The game start display LED 79d, the insertion display LED 79e, and the replay display LED 79f have shown an example in which dynamic lighting is performed for each "5" interrupt, but the dynamic lighting for each interrupt can be set arbitrarily. It is also possible to make these status display LEDs 79 statically lit instead of dynamically lit.
In this case, for example, in FIG. 204, when the lighting preparation processing set for the replay display LED 79f is executed in step S1183, the lighting signal output processing is executed in step S1310 in the first interrupt processing thereafter. However, even in this case, the lighting of the replay display LED 79f does not become visible immediately after the lighting signal output processing is executed in step S1310. state.

(8) The twelfth embodiment is not limited to conventional slot machines. The present invention can also be applied to medalless gaming machines (smart pachislot machines) and casino machines.
Furthermore, the inventions relating to jump instructions shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, the inventions relating to call instructions shown in FIG. It can also be applied to aircraft.
(9) The twelfth embodiment is not limited to being carried out independently, and can be carried out in combination with at least part of the first to eleventh embodiments.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
The thirteenth embodiment relates to operations when the harness is disconnected and restored.
The thirteenth embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings and the like.
FIG. 208 is a block diagram showing the outline of control of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 209 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG.
210 is a front view of the inside of the cabinet 13 of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 211 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. In the drawing, only the cabinet 13, the reel base 13g, the main control board 50, the sub control board 80, the motor drive board 34, and the image display device 23 are hatched.
Furthermore, FIG. 212 is an explanatory diagram showing the electrical connection of the main control board 50, the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42, and FIG. FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram showing electrical connections among the main control board 50, the lamp control board 510, and the stop switch lamp 511. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 208, the slot machine 10 includes a main control board 50 that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board 80 that controls the output of effects.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52 , and the sub control board 80 has an input port 81 and an output port 82 .
The input port 51 and the input port 81 are connection units to which signals from the input peripheral device are input, and the output port 52 and the output port 82 are connection units for transmitting signals to the output peripheral device. be.
In FIG. 208, input peripherals are indicated by arrows pointing from the peripherals to the main control board 50 or the sub control board 80, and output peripherals are indicated from the main control board 50 or the sub control board 80 to the main control board 50 or the sub control board 80. It is indicated by an arrow pointing to the peripheral device.

As shown in FIG. 208, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, the reel sensor 33, etc. via the input port 51, and the output port 52. , the motor 32, the stop switch lamp 511, and the like are electrically connected.
The start switch 41 is a switch that is operated when starting to rotate the “3” (left/middle/right) reels 31 .
The stop switch 42 is provided corresponding to each of the "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31, and is a switch operated to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel.
The reel sensors 33 are provided corresponding to the “3” (left/middle/right) reels 31 and are sensors for detecting the positions of the corresponding reels 31 .

The motors 32 are provided corresponding to the “3” (left/middle/right) reels 31 and are for rotating the corresponding reels 31 .
The stop switch lamps 511 are provided corresponding to the “three” (left/middle/right) stop switches 42, respectively, and are lamps that indicate the operation acceptance status of the corresponding stop switches 42. FIG.
The game peripherals connected to the main control board 50 are not limited to these.
Further, the main control board 50 and the game peripheral device can be directly connected without interposing another control board (relay board), or can be connected through another control board.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 208, the sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to a push button 86 and a cross key 87 via an input port 81, and an effect lamp via an output port 82. 21, a speaker 22, an image display device 23, and the like are electrically connected.
The push button 86 is also referred to as a sub-button, effect button, effect switch, etc., and is used to advance (develop) the effect, display the menu screen, and determine the item selected on the menu screen. It is a switch that is operated in the following manner.
The cross key 87 is also called a selection button, a selection switch, or the like, and is a switch used for effects, etc., and is operated when selecting a character or when selecting an item on a menu screen. is.

The effect lamp 21 is made up of, for example, an LED, and lights or blinks in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
The image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, or the like, and displays various effect images, game information, and the like.
Note that the peripheral devices for presentation connected to the sub-control board 80 are not limited to these.
Further, the sub-control board 80 and the performance peripheral device can be directly connected without passing through another control board (relay board), or can be connected through another control board.

The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and information (control commands) necessary for outputting effects can be transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 in one direction. It is
Then, the sub-control board 80 determines at what timing and what kind of effect to output based on the control command received from the main control board 50, and according to the determination, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and controls the output of the image display device 23 and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 209 to 211, in the thirteenth embodiment, the slot machine 10 has a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an open front side, and a front door 12 capable of opening and closing the cabinet 13 .
The cabinet 13 has a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a top plate 13c, a right side plate 13e, a left side plate 13f, and the like, and has a box shape with an open front side.
A reel base 13g is provided at an intermediate position in the vertical direction inside the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG. The reel base 13g is supported by a back plate 13b, a right side plate 13e, and a left side plate 13f.

In addition, on the bottom plate 13a inside the cabinet 13, a power supply unit 11a, a medal payout device 15, and the like are arranged.
The power supply unit 11a includes a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, and the like, and a power switch 11 (Fig. 208) that is operated to turn on/off the power. I have it.
The medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 (Fig. 208) driven when paying out the medals stored in the hopper 35, and a payout detecting the medals paid out from the hopper 35. and a sensor 37 (Fig. 208).

A pattern display device 14 is arranged on the reel base 13g inside the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG.
The symbol display device 14 is also called a "reel unit 14" and has a box-shaped reel case 601 with an open front side. "3" reel brackets 604 (Fig. 232) are fixed inside the reel case 601, motors 32 (Fig. 232) are fixed to the respective reel brackets 604, and rotation shafts 32a (Fig. 232) of the respective motors 32 are fixed. ) are fixed to the reels 31 respectively. In addition to the motor 32, each reel bracket 604 is fixed with a reel sensor 33 (FIG. 208), a back lamp unit, and the like.

A motor board case 34 a containing the motor drive board 34 is fixed to the upper surface of the reel case 601 . That is, the motor board case 34a is fixed to the upper surface of the reel case 601, and the motor drive board 34 is housed inside the motor board case 34a.
When the motor board case 34a containing the motor drive board 34 is fixed to the upper surface of the reel case 601, the reel unit 14 may include the motor drive board 34 and the motor board case 34a. That is, when the reel case 601 and the motor board case 34a housing the motor drive board 34 are integrated, the reel unit 14 may include the motor drive board 34 and the motor board case 34a. In this case, the upper end of the reel unit 14 means the upper surface of the motor board case 34a.
In addition, the motor board case 34a housing the motor drive board 34 may not be fixed to the upper surface of the reel case 601. FIG. In this case, the upper end of the reel unit 14 means the upper surface of the reel case 601 .

The motor drive board 34 is a control board that controls driving of the motor 32 that rotates the reel 31 and the hopper motor 36 that rotates the hopper disk.
The motor board case 34 a is a case that houses the motor drive board 34 . The motor board case 34a is made of transparent resin. Therefore, the motor drive board 34 housed inside the motor board case 34a can be visually recognized from the outside of the motor board case 34a.
A boss is provided at a predetermined position inside the motor board case 34a. The motor drive board 34 is screwed to this boss. Thereby, the motor drive board 34 is fixed inside the motor board case 34a.

A main board case 50a containing a main control board 50 is fixed above the pattern display device 14 inside the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG.
Specifically, the main board case 50a is fixed at a position corresponding to the upper side of the pattern display device 14 on the front surface of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 (the inner surface of the cabinet 13). , the main control board 50 is housed.
Here, in the control board, the surface on which electronic components such as CPU, RAM, ROM, connectors, etc. are mounted is called the "component surface", and the surface opposite to the component surface is the surface on which the legs of the electronic components are soldered. The surface to be soldered is called the "solder surface".
When the main board case 50a housing the main control board 50 is fixed to the front surface of the back plate 13b, the component side of the main control board 50 faces forward and the solder side of the main control board 50 faces rearward.

A main CPU 55 , a setting key cylinder 150 , a setting change (reset) switch 153 and the like are mounted on the component side of the main control board 50 .
The main board case 50 a is a case that houses the main control board 50 . The main board case 50a is made of transparent resin. Therefore, the main control board 50 housed inside the main board case 50a can be visually recognized from the outside of the main board case 50a.
A boss is provided at a predetermined position inside the main substrate case 50a. The main control board 50 is screwed to this boss. Thereby, the main control board 50 is fixed inside the main board case 50a.

The front door 12 can open and close the cabinet 13 so as to cover the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 .
Specifically, the left side of the front door 12 is attached to the front end of the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 via a hinge 520 (Fig. 237). By rotating the front door 12 around the hinge 520, the opening on the front side of the cabinet 13 can be opened and closed.
A locking device (not shown) is provided on the right side of the front door 12 (the side opposite to the hinge 520).
Furthermore, a door key insertion opening (not shown) is provided at a position corresponding to the locking device on the front surface (the surface facing the player) of the front door 12 . The door key insertion opening is a portion into which a door key DK for operating the locking device is inserted.

When the front door 12 is closed and locked, inserting the door key DK into the door key insertion opening and turning the door key DK clockwise unlocks the door. When the front door 12 is pulled in the unlocked state, the front door 12 rotates about the hinge 520 and the front door 12 is opened.
Also, as shown in FIG. 209, a transparent display window 18 is provided in the center of the front door 12 . The display window 18 is located in front of the pattern display device 14 when the front door 12 is closed. That is, the pattern display device 14 is arranged behind the display window 18 with the front door 12 closed. The player can visually recognize the symbols displayed on each reel 31 of the symbol display device 14 through the display window 18 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 209, a control panel 12c is provided below the display window 18 on the front surface of the front door 12 (the surface facing the player).
The control panel 12c protrudes forward from the front surface of the front door 12. As shown in FIG. A 3-bet switch 40b, a push button 86, a cross key 87, and the like are arranged on the upper surface of the control panel 12c, and a start switch 41 and "3" (left/middle /Right) A stop switch 42 and the like are arranged.
Stop switch lamps 511 are arranged inside the operation bodies of the “3” (left/middle/right) stop switches 42, respectively.

In addition, an image display device 23 is provided on the upper part of the front surface of the front door 12 (the surface facing the player), and the rear surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player), the cabinet 13 A sub-board case 80a containing a sub-control board 80 is fixed to the upper portion of the inner surface.
Specifically, a sub-board case 80a is fixed on the rear surface of the front door 12, above the pattern display device 14 and at a position corresponding to the back side of the image display device 23. , the sub-control board 80 is housed.
The sub-board case 80 a is a case that houses the sub-control board 80 . The sub-board case 80a is made of transparent resin. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 housed inside the sub-board case 80a can be visually recognized from the outside of the sub-board case 80a.

A boss is provided at a predetermined position inside the sub-board case 80a. The sub-control board 80 is screwed to this boss. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 is fixed inside the sub-board case 80a.
When the sub-board case 80a housing the sub-control board 80 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 and the front door 12 is closed, the component surface of the sub-control board 80 faces rearward. solder side faces forward.
When the front door 12 is closed, the main board case 50a containing the main control board 50 and the sub board case 80a containing the sub control board 80 are arranged to face each other.

Next, electrical connection of the main control board 50, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42 will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 212, the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 are electrically connected by a harness HN01. That is, the harness HN01 is a harness that electrically connects the main control board 50 and the start switch 41, and is also called a "start switch harness".
The harness HN01 is composed of "three" lead wires LW01.
Further, harness HN01 connector terminals are provided at both ends of the harness HN01. That is, the "three" lead wires LW01 forming the harness HN01 are grouped into the harness HN01 connector terminal.

Further, the main control board 50 is provided with a connector CN01 to which the harness HN01 connector terminal is connected, and the start switch 41 is also provided with a connector CN01 to which the harness HN01 connector terminal is connected.
When one harness HN01 connector terminal is connected to the connector CN01 of the main control board 50 and the other harness HN01 connector terminal is connected to the connector CN01 of the start switch 41, the main control board 50 and the start switch are connected. 41 are electrically connected.
Although the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 are directly connected by the harness HN01 in FIG. 212, they can be connected via another control board (relay board).

The start switch 41 has a lever-shaped operating body and an optical sensor that detects the movement of the lever-shaped operating body. Also, the optical sensor has a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion that detects light emitted from the light-emitting portion. On the other hand, a detection piece is provided at the tip of the lever-shaped operating body.
The detecting piece is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion when the lever-shaped operating body is not operated (not pushed down). At this time, the light emitted from the light-emitting portion is blocked by the detection piece and does not reach the light-receiving portion, and the start switch 41 is turned off.
When the lever-shaped operating body is operated (depressed), the detection piece is not positioned between the light emitting section and the light receiving section. At this time, the light emitted from the light-emitting portion reaches the light-receiving portion, and the start switch 41 is turned on.

In addition, of the “3” lead wires LW01 constituting the harness HN01, “1” lead wire LW01 is used for the light emitting portion, and the other “1” lead wire LW01 is used for the light receiving portion. and the remaining "1" lead wire LW01 is for GND.
When the lever-shaped operation body is not operated, the detection piece is not positioned between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part. It may be configured such that the detection piece is positioned between. In this case, the start switch 41 is turned off when the light emitted from the light emitting portion reaches the light receiving portion. Further, when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion stops reaching the light-receiving portion, the start switch 41 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 212, the main control board 50 and the “3” (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are electrically connected by a harness HN02. That is, the harness HN02 is a harness that electrically connects the main control board 50 and the "3" stop switches 42, and is also called a "stop switch harness".
The harness HN02 is composed of "9" lead wires LW02.
Furthermore, the “9” lead wires LW02 forming the harness HN02 are divided into “3” pieces each, and are branched into “3” pieces. Of the "9" lead wires LW02, "3" lead wires LW02 are used for the left stop switch 42, and the other "3" lead wires LW02 are used for the middle stop switch 42. , and the remaining “3” lead wires LW02 are used for the right stop switch 42 .

Further, harness HN02 connector terminals are provided at both ends of the harness HN02.
That is, on the main control board 50 side, the "nine" lead wires LW02 forming the harness HN02 are grouped into the harness HN02 connector terminal.
Further, on the left stop switch 42 side, of the "9" lead wires LW02 forming the harness HN02, the "3" lead wires LW02 for the left stop switch 42 are grouped into the harness HN02 connector terminal. there is
Furthermore, on the side of the middle stop switch 42, among the "9" lead wires LW02 forming the harness HN02, the "3" lead wires LW02 for the middle stop switch 42 are grouped into the harness HN02 connector terminal. ing.
Furthermore, on the side of the right stop switch 42, of the "9" lead wires LW02 that constitute the harness HN02, "3" lead wires LW02 for the right stop switch 42 are grouped together at the harness HN02 connector terminal. there is

Further, the main control board 50 is provided with a connector CN02 to which the harness HN02 connector terminal is connected, and each stop switch 42 is also provided with a connector CN02 to which the harness HN02 connector terminal is connected. .
One harness HN02 connector terminal is connected to the connector CN02 of the main control board 50, and the other "3" harness HN02 connector terminals are connected to the connectors CN02 of the "3" stop switches 42, respectively. Then, the main control board 50 and the "3" stop switches 42 are electrically connected.
Although the main control board 50 and the "3" stop switches 42 are directly connected by the harness HN02 in FIG. 212, they can be connected via another control board (relay board).

Each stop switch 42 has a push button-like operating body and an optical sensor that detects the movement of the push button-like operating body. The optical sensor has a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion that detects light emitted from the light-emitting portion. On the other hand, a detection piece is provided on the back surface of the push button-shaped operating body.
The detection piece is positioned between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion when the push-button-shaped operating body is not operated (not pressed). At this time, the light emitted from the light-emitting portion is blocked by the detection piece and does not reach the light-receiving portion, and the stop switch 42 is turned off.
It is configured such that the detection piece is not positioned between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion when the push-button-like operating body is operated (pushed). At this time, the light emitted from the light-emitting portion reaches the light-receiving portion, and the stop switch 42 is turned on.

Of the "3" lead wires LW02 for the left stop switch 42, "1" lead wire LW02 is used for the light emitting part, and the other "1" lead wire LW02 is used for the light receiving part. , and the remaining "1" lead wire LW02 is for GND. The same applies to the “3” lead wires LW02 for the middle stop switch 42 and the “3” lead wires LW02 for the right stop switch 42 .
Note that when the push-button-shaped operation body is not operated, the detection piece is not positioned between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part. It may be configured such that the detection piece is positioned between the part. In this case, the stop switch 42 is turned off when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion reaches the light-receiving portion. Also, when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion stops reaching the light-receiving portion, the stop switch 42 is turned on.

212, the main control board 50 includes a starting operation detection LED 501, a left stop operation detection LED 502, a middle stop operation detection LED 503, a right stop operation detection LED 504, a left reel sensor LED 505, a middle reel sensor LED 506, and a right reel sensor LED 506. A reel sensor LED 507 and a power LED 508 are provided.
The starting operation detection LED 501 is an LED that lights up when the start switch 41 is turned on.
When the lever-shaped operating body of the start switch 41 is not operated (not pushed down), the start switch 41 is turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 turns off the starting operation detection LED 501 .
In addition, when the lever-like operating body of the start switch 41 is operated (depressed), the start switch 41 is turned on. At this time, the main control board 50 lights the starting operation detection LED 501 .

The left stop operation detection LED 502 is an LED that lights up when the left stop switch 42 is turned on.
When the push button-like operation body of the left stop switch 42 is not operated (not pushed), the left stop switch 42 is turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 turns off the left stop operation detection LED 502 .
In addition, when the push button-shaped operation body of the left stop switch 42 is operated (depressed), the left stop switch 42 is turned on. At this time, the main control board 50 lights the left stop operation detection LED 502 .

The middle stop operation detection LED 503 is an LED that lights up when the middle stop switch 42 is turned on.
When the push button-like operation body of the middle stop switch 42 is not operated, the middle stop switch 42 is turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 turns off the middle stop operation detection LED 503 .
Further, when the push button-like operation body of the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the middle stop switch 42 is turned on. At this time, the main control board 50 lights the intermediate stop operation detection LED 503 .

A right stop operation detection LED 504 is an LED that lights up when the right stop switch 42 is turned on.
The right stop switch 42 is in an off state when the push button-shaped operating body of the right stop switch 42 is not operated. At this time, the main control board 50 turns off the right stop operation detection LED 504 .
In addition, when the push button-shaped operation body of the right stop switch 42 is operated, the right stop switch 42 is turned on. At this time, the main control board 50 lights the right stop operation detection LED 504 .

The left reel sensor LED 505 is an LED that lights up when the left reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the left reel 31).
When the index of the left reel 31 is not positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the left reel sensor 33, the left reel sensor 33 is turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 turns off the left reel sensor LED 505 .
Further, when the index of the left reel 31 is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the left reel sensor 33, the left reel sensor 33 is turned on. At this time, the main control board 50 lights the left reel sensor LED 505 .

The middle reel sensor LED 506 is an LED that lights up when the middle reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the middle reel 31).
When the index of the middle reel 31 is not positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the middle reel sensor 33, the middle reel sensor 33 is turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 turns off the middle reel sensor LED 506 .
Further, when the index of the middle reel 31 is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the middle reel sensor 33, the middle reel sensor 33 is turned on. At this time, the main control board 50 lights the middle reel sensor LED 506 .

The right reel sensor LED 507 is an LED that lights up when the right reel sensor 33 is turned on (detects the index of the right reel 31).
When the index of the right reel 31 is not positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the right reel sensor 33, the right reel sensor 33 is turned off. At this time, the main control board 50 turns off the right reel sensor LED 507 .
Further, when the index of the right reel 31 is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the right reel sensor 33, the right reel sensor 33 is turned on. At this time, the main control board 50 lights the right reel sensor LED 507 .
A power LED 508 is an LED that lights when the power is on.
The main control board 50 turns on the power LED 508 when the power is on, and turns off the power LED 508 when the power is off.

Next, electrical connection of the main control board 50, the motor drive board 34, the motor 32, and the reel sensor 33 will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 213, the motor drive board 34 and the “3” (left/middle/right) motors 32 are electrically connected by harnesses HN03. That is, the harness HN03 is a harness that electrically connects the motor drive board 34 and the "3" motors 32, and is also called a "motor harness".
The harness HN03 is composed of "12" lead wires LW03.
Furthermore, the “12” lead wires LW03 forming the harness HN03 are divided into “4” each and branched into “3”. Of the 12 lead wires LW03, 4 lead wires LW03 are used for the left motor 32, the other 4 lead wires LW03 are used for the middle motor 32, and the remaining 4 lead wires LW03 are used for the middle motor 32. '4' lead wires LW03 are for the right motor 32. As shown in FIG.

Further, harness HN03 connector terminals are provided at both ends of the harness HN03.
That is, on the motor drive board 34 side, the "12" lead wires LW03 forming the harness HN03 are grouped into the harness HN03 connector terminal.
Further, on the left motor 32 side, of the "12" lead wires LW03 forming the harness HN03, "4" lead wires LW03 for the left motor 32 are grouped into the harness HN03 connector terminal.
Furthermore, on the middle motor 32 side, among the "12" lead wires LW03 that constitute the harness HN03, the "4" lead wires LW03 for the middle motor 32 are grouped into the harness HN03 connector terminal. .
Furthermore, on the right motor 32 side, of the "12" lead wires LW03 forming the harness HN03, "4" lead wires LW03 for the right motor 32 are grouped into the harness HN03 connector terminal.

Further, the motor drive board 34 is provided with a connector CN03 to which the harness HN03 connector terminal is connected, and each motor 32 is also provided with a connector CN03 to which the harness HN03 connector terminal is connected.
One harness HN03 connector terminal is connected to the connector CN03 of the motor drive board 34, and the other "3" harness HN03 connector terminals are connected to the connector CN03 of the "3" motors 32, respectively. Then, the motor drive board 34 and the "3" motors 32 are electrically connected.
In FIG. 213, the motor drive board 34 and the "3" motors 32 are directly connected by the harness HN03, but they can be connected via another control board (relay board).

Each motor 32 is a four-phase stepping motor, and by switching the current-flowing phase (for example, sequentially switching from 1.2-phase excitation to 2.3-phase excitation), the rotating shaft 32a is rotated at a constant angle. It rotates one by one. When stopping the rotation of the rotary shaft 32a of the motor 32, for example, the four-phase excitation state is set.
Also, the “4” lead wires LW03 for the left motor 32 correspond to the 1st to 4th phases of the left motor 32, respectively. The same applies to the "4" lead wires LW03 for the middle motor 32 and the "4" lead wires LW03 for the right motor 32.

As shown in FIG. 213, the motor drive board 34 and the “3” (left/middle/right) reel sensors 33 are electrically connected by a harness HN04. That is, the harness HN04 is a harness that electrically connects the motor drive board 34 and the "3" reel sensors 33, and is also called a "reel sensor harness".
The harness HN04 is composed of "9" lead wires LW04.
Furthermore, the “9” lead wires LW04 forming the harness HN04 are divided into “3” pieces each, and are branched into “3” pieces. Of the "9" lead wires LW04, "3" lead wires LW04 are used for the left reel sensor 33, and the other "3" lead wires LW04 are used for the middle reel sensor 33. , and the remaining “3” lead wires LW04 are used for the right reel sensor 33 .

Further, harness HN04 connector terminals are provided at both ends of the harness HN04.
That is, on the motor drive board 34 side, the "nine" lead wires LW04 forming the harness HN04 are grouped into the harness HN04 connector terminal.
Further, on the left reel sensor 33 side, of the "9" lead wires LW04 constituting the harness HN04, the "3" lead wires LW04 for the left reel sensor 33 are grouped into the harness HN04 connector terminal. there is
Furthermore, on the side of the middle reel sensor 33, out of the "9" lead wires LW04 forming the harness HN04, the "3" lead wires LW04 for the middle reel sensor 33 are grouped into the harness HN04 connector terminal. ing.
Further, on the right reel sensor 33 side, of the "9" lead wires LW04 that constitute the harness HN04, the "3" lead wires LW04 for the right reel sensor 33 are grouped into the harness HN04 connector terminal. there is

Further, the motor drive board 34 is provided with a connector CN04 to which the harness HN04 connector terminal is connected, and each reel sensor 33 is also provided with a connector CN04 to which the harness HN04 connector terminal is connected. .
One harness HN04 connector terminal is connected to the connector CN04 of the motor drive board 34, and the other "3" harness HN04 connector terminals are connected to the connectors CN04 of the "3" reel sensors 33, respectively. Then, the motor drive board 34 and the "3" reel sensors 33 are electrically connected.
In FIG. 213, the motor drive board 34 and the "3" reel sensors 33 are directly connected by the harness HN04, but they can be connected via another control board (relay board).

Each reel sensor 33 is configured using an optical sensor having a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion that detects light emitted from the light-emitting portion.
In addition, each reel 31 is provided with an index, and when each reel 31 rotates, the index of each reel 31 passes between the corresponding light-emitting portion and light-receiving portion of the reel sensor 33 .
When the index of each reel 31 is not located between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the corresponding reel sensor 33, each reel sensor 33 is turned off.
Further, when the index of each reel 31 is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the corresponding reel sensor 33, each reel sensor 33 is turned on.

Of the "3" lead wires LW04 for the left reel sensor 33, "1" lead wire LW04 is used for the light emitting part, and the other "1" lead wire LW04 is used for the light receiving part. , and the remaining "1" lead wire LW04 is for GND. The same applies to the "3" lead wires LW04 for the middle reel sensor 33 and the "3" lead wires LW04 for the right reel sensor 33.

As shown in FIG. 213, the main control board 50 and the motor drive board 34 are electrically connected by a harness HN05. That is, the harness HN05 is a harness that electrically connects the main control board 50 and the motor drive board 34, and is also called a "motor drive board harness".
Harness HN05 connector terminals are provided at both ends of the harness HN05.
Further, the main control board 50 is provided with a connector CN05 to which the harness HN05 connector terminals are connected, and the motor drive board 34 is also provided with a connector CN05 to which the harness HN05 connector terminals are connected.

When one harness HN05 connector terminal is connected to the connector CN05 of the main control board 50 and the other harness HN05 connector terminal is connected to the connector CN05 of the motor drive board 34, the main control board 50 and the motor are connected. It is electrically connected to the drive substrate 34 .
In FIG. 213, the main control board 50 and the "3" motors 32 are connected via the motor drive board 34, and the main control board 50 and the "3" reel sensors 33 are also connected. Although they are connected via the motor drive board 34, the main control board 50 and the "3" motors 32 are directly connected by harnesses without the motor drive board 34, and the main control board 50 and the "3" motors are connected directly. '' reel sensors 33 can be directly connected by a harness.

Further, as shown in FIG. 213, the main control board 50 and the back lamp board are electrically connected by a harness HN06.
Inside each reel 31, a back lamp is provided for illuminating the symbols displayed on each reel 31 from inside the reel 31. - 特許庁The back lamp substrate constitutes a back lamp.
In addition, in FIG. 213, illustration of the back lamp substrate is omitted.

Next, electrical connection of the main control board 50, the lamp control board 510, and the stop switch lamp 511 will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 214, the lamp control board 510 and the “3” (left/middle/right) stop switch lamps 511 are electrically connected by a harness HN07. That is, the harness HN07 is a harness that electrically connects the lamp control board 510 and the "3" stop switch lamps 511, and is also called a "stop switch lamp harness".
Also, the harness HN07 is composed of "12" lead wires LW07.
Furthermore, the “12” lead wires LW07 forming the harness HN07 are divided into “4” each and branched into “3”. Of the "12" lead wires LW07, "4" lead wires LW07 are for the left stop switch lamp 511, and the other "4" lead wires LW07 are for the middle stop switch lamp 511. , and the remaining “4” lead wires LW07 are used for the right stop switch lamp 511 .

Further, harness HN07 connector terminals are provided at both ends of the harness HN07.
That is, on the lamp control board 510 side, the “12” lead wires LW07 constituting the harness HN07 are grouped into the harness HN07 connector terminal.
Further, on the left stop switch lamp 511 side, among the "12" lead wires LW07 constituting the harness HN07, the "4" lead wires LW07 for the left stop switch lamp 511 are grouped into the harness HN07 connector terminal. It is

Furthermore, on the middle stop switch lamp 511 side, among the "12" lead wires LW07 that constitute the harness HN07, the "4" lead wires LW07 for the middle stop switch lamp 511 are connected to the harness HN07 connector terminals. summarized.
Furthermore, on the right stop switch lamp 511 side, among the "12" lead wires LW07 constituting the harness HN07, the "4" lead wires LW07 for the right stop switch lamp 511 are grouped into the harness HN07 connector terminal. It is

The lamp control board 510 is provided with a connector CN07 to which the harness HN07 connector terminal is connected, and each stop switch lamp 511 is also provided with a connector CN07 to which the harness HN07 connector terminal is connected. there is
One harness HN07 connector terminal is connected to the connector CN07 of the lamp control board 510, and the other "3" harness HN07 connector terminals are connected to the connectors CN07 of the "3" stop switch lamps 511, respectively. When connected, the lamp control board 510 and the “3” stop switch lamps 511 are electrically connected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 214, the main control board 50 and the lamp control board 510 are electrically connected by a harness HN08. That is, the harness HN08 is a harness that electrically connects the main control board 50 and the lamp control board 510, and is also called a "lamp control board harness".
Harness HN08 connector terminals are provided at both ends of the harness HN08.
Further, the main control board 50 is provided with a connector CN08 to which the harness HN08 connector terminal is connected, and the lamp control board 510 is also provided with a connector CN08 to which the harness HN08 connector terminal is connected.

When one harness HN08 connector terminal is connected to the connector CN08 of the main control board 50 and the other harness HN08 connector terminal is connected to the connector CN08 of the lamp control board 510, the main control board 50 and the lamp are connected. It is electrically connected to the control board 510 .
In FIG. 214, the main control board 50 and the “3” stop switch lamps 511 are connected via the lamp control board 510. The "3" stop switch lamps 511 can also be directly connected with a harness.

A stop switch lamp 511 is a lamp that indicates whether the operation of the stop switch 42 is accepted.
Here, as the "operation acceptance status", there are a "operation acceptance valid state" and an "operation acceptance invalid state".
In addition, the “state in which operation acceptance is enabled” is also referred to as “state in which operation can be accepted” or “operation acceptance permitted state”.
Furthermore, the "state in which operation reception is disabled" is also referred to as a "state in which operation reception is not permitted" or an "operation reception disallowed state".

When the switch operation reception is valid and the switch operation (ON) is detected, the processing corresponding to the switch operation is executed. ) is detected, the process corresponding to the switch operation is not executed.
Specifically, when the stop switch 42 is operated (turned on) in a state in which the reception of the operation of the stop switch 42 is valid, the main control board 50 responds by starting stop control of the corresponding motor 32. Stop control of the reel 31 is started.
On the other hand, in a state where the reception of the operation of the stop switch 42 is invalid, even if the operation (ON) of the stop switch 42 is detected while the reel 31 is rotating, the main control board 50 accepts the operation of the stop switch 42. Therefore, the driving of the motor 32 is not stopped, and therefore the rotation of the reel 31 is not stopped.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the operation bodies of the "three" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are push button-shaped and translucent. A stop switch lamp 511 is arranged inside the operation body of each stop switch 42 .
Specifically, the left stop switch lamp 511 is arranged inside the operating body of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch lamp 511 is arranged inside the operating body of the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is operated. A right stop switch lamp 511 is arranged inside the operating body.
As a result, when each stop switch lamp 511 lights up, the operating body of the corresponding stop switch 42 appears to shine.

When the operation (ON) of the start switch 41 is detected with a specified number of medals bet, the main control board 50 drives the "3" (left/middle/right) motors 32 to 3″ (left/middle/right) reels 31 start spinning.
After that, the rotation speed of each reel 31 is gradually accelerated, and when the rotation of each reel 31 reaches a constant speed state (also referred to as “constant speed rotation”), the main control board 50 causes each stop switch 42 to operate. Enable reception. As a result, the rotation of each reel 31 can be stopped (stopped).
Then, when the reception of the operation of the stop switch 42 is valid, the main control board 50 lights the stop switch lamp 511 in blue.
Specifically, the main control board 50 lights the left stop switch lamp 511 in blue when the reception of the operation of the left stop switch 42 is valid. The same applies to the middle stop switch lamp 511 and the right stop switch lamp 511 .

Further, when the reel 31 is stopped or during acceleration (before reaching a constant speed state), the main control board 50 disables reception of operation of the stop switch 42 .
Furthermore, when the rotation of the reel 31 reaches a constant speed state and the operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is valid, when the operation (ON) of the stop switch 42 is detected, the main control board 50 turns on the corresponding motor 32. By starting the stop control, the stop control of the corresponding reel 31 is started. At this time, the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 42 is disabled.
When the operation reception of the stop switch 42 is in an invalid state, the main control board 50 lights the stop switch lamp 511 in red.

Specifically, when the rotation of the left reel 31 reaches a constant speed state and the operation reception of the left stop switch 42 is valid, when the operation (ON) of the left stop switch 42 is detected, the main control board 50 By starting the stop control of the left motor 32, the stop control of the left reel 31 is started. At this time, the reception of the operation of the left stop switch 42 is disabled. The same applies to the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 .
Then, the sub-control board 80 lights the left stop switch lamp 511 in red when the reception of the operation of the left stop switch 42 is disabled. The same applies to the middle stop switch lamp 511 and the right stop switch lamp 511 .

Here, processing in the main control board 50 when the power supply is cut off and when the power supply is restarted will be described.
"Cut off power supply" is also referred to as power cut, power cut, power off, and the like.
"Restarting power supply" is also referred to as power-on, power-on, power recovery, power failure recovery, power failure recovery, and the like.
For example, when the power switch 11 is turned off, the power supply is cut off, and when the power switch 11 is turned on, the power supply is restarted.
Also, for example, the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure, and the power supply is resumed when the power failure is restored.

A voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) (not shown) is provided on the main control board 50 . When the voltage monitoring device detects that the power supply voltage has fallen below the power interruption detection level, a power interruption detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51 (FIG. 208).
Further, the main control board 50 detects whether or not a power-off detection signal has been input in the interrupt process (FIG. 68) executed every "2.235" ms. When the input of the power-off detection signal is detected two times in succession, the power-off processing (step S2771 in FIG. 68, FIG. 69) is executed in the next interrupt processing.

Also, in the power-off process (FIG. 69), the main control board 50 saves various registers to the stack area of the RWM 53 (step S2772 in FIG. 69).
Furthermore, the main control board 50 turns off the output of all bits in the output port 52 (FIG. 211) in the power-off process (FIG. 69) (step S2773 in FIG. 69). As a result, for example, when the motor 32 (Fig. 208) is being driven (during rotation of the reel 31) or the hopper motor 36 (Fig. 208) is being driven (during payout of medals), the driving is stopped. Stop.

Further, in the power-off process (FIG. 69), the main control board 50 stores (saves) the stack pointer at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 (step S2774 in FIG. 69).
Further, in the power-off process (FIG. 69), the main control board 50 calculates the checksum of a predetermined range of the RWM 53, and calculates the RWM checksum data (complement data) that becomes "0" when added to the calculated checksum. Then, the calculated RWM checksum data is stored (saved) at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 (step S2776 in FIG. 69, FIG. 70).

Further, the main control board 50 is configured to maintain (retain) the data stored in the RWM 53 even when the power supply is interrupted (power outage).
Then, when the power supply is restarted, the main control means 50 executes the program start processing (FIG. 62) and the power recovery processing (step S2721 in FIG. 62, FIG. 63).
In addition, in the program start processing (FIG. 62), the main control board 50 calculates the checksum of the RWM 53 in the same range as during the power-off processing, and stores (saves) the calculated checksum during the power-off processing. It is determined whether or not the RWM checksum data is added to "0". If it is "0", it is determined that the data in the RWM 53 is normal, and if it is not "0", it is determined that the data in the RWM 53 is not normal (abnormal) (step S2703 in FIG. 62).

Furthermore, in the power restoration process (FIG. 63), the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer stored (saved) during the power-off process (step S2722 in FIG. 63).
In this way, the main control board 50 maintains (holds) the data stored in the RWM 53 even during a power failure, and when the power supply is resumed, the data in the RWM 53 is normal (power failure). It is determined whether or not the data in the RWM 53 are the same before and after . When it is determined that the data in the RWM 53 is normal, the stack pointer stored (saved) during the power-off process is restored. As a result, when the power supply is restarted, the state when the power supply is cut off (the power cutoff is detected) is restored.

Here, when the supply of power is interrupted while the reel 31 is rotating at a constant speed and then the supply of power is resumed, the following will occur.
As described above, when the main control board 50 detects power failure, it turns off the output of all bits in the output port 52, so the drive signal for the motor 32 for rotating the reel 31 is also turned off. As a result, the driving of the motor 32 stops, and the rotation of the reel 31 stops.

After that, when the power supply is restarted, the state when the power supply is cut off (the power cutoff is detected) is restored. As a result, from the output port 52, the same drive signal for the motor 32 as when the supply of power is interrupted (power shutdown is detected) is output.
Here, the drive signal for the motor 32 when the supply of power is interrupted (detection of power interruption) is a signal for maintaining a constant speed state.
However, even if a drive signal for maintaining a constant speed state is output to the stopped motor 32 from the beginning, the motor 32 cannot be driven because the rotational torque is weak.

Therefore, since the reel 31 does not rotate, the reel sensor 33 (FIG. 208) does not detect the index of the reel 31 (the index does not turn off the reel sensor 33).
Further, when the main control board 50 determines that the reel sensor 33 does not detect the index for a certain period of time despite outputting a drive signal for driving the motor 32 at a constant speed, the reel 31 rotates. Acceleration processing of the motor 32 is executed by judging that the motor 32 is not in step (out-of-step is detected). As a result, the rotation speed of the reel 31 is gradually accelerated, and the rotation of the reel 31 can be returned to the constant speed state.

Therefore, for example, when the power supply is interrupted while the "three" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and then the power supply is resumed, the rotation of each reel 31 is kept constant. It can be returned to the fast state.
Further, for example, when the left reel 31 is stopped and the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the power supply is interrupted and then the power supply is resumed, the left reel 31 The rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 can be returned to the constant speed state while being stopped.

Next, based on FIGS. 215 to 224, operations when the electrical connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut and when the electrical connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored. explain.
FIG. 215 is a time chart showing the state when the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is recovered while all the stop switches 42 are off while all the reels 31 are rotating.
At the timing of "X01" in FIG. 215, the power is on. In addition, "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, the 3-bet switch 40b, the start switch 41, and the "3" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are all in the off state. Furthermore, the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is in a state of electrically connecting the main control board 50 and the “3” stop switches 42 .

After that, at the timing of "X02" in FIG. 215, a contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side due to vibration or the like, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is cut off.
From "X02" to "X07" in FIG. 215, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is disconnected.

Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off at the timing of "X02" in FIG. No notification is given. That is, it does not judge that an error has occurred (an error has been detected), and does not notify that an error has occurred (an error has been detected). Therefore, the main control board 50 does not stop the progress of the game.
After that, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X03" in FIG. 215, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" (prescribed number) medals.
It is assumed that at the time of "X03" in FIG. 215, "3" or more medals are credited (stored).
Also, instead of operating (turning on) the 3-bet switch 40b at the timing of "X03" in FIG. In this case as well, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" medals (the specified number).

After that, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) at timing "X04" in FIG. Start. After that, at the timing of "X06" in FIG. 215, the rotation of "3" reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).
At the timing of "X04" in FIG. 215, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is cut off, and "3" (specified number) medals are betted. is.

After that, at the timing of "X07" in FIG. 215, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is restored.
At the timing of "X07" in FIG. 215, "3" reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and "3" stop switches 42 are all kept off.
Then, at the timing of "X07" in FIG. 215, when the electrical connection of all the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored, the main control board 50 determines an error. Therefore, the constant speed rotation of the "3" reels 31 is maintained without stopping the progress of the game.

At the timing of "X02" in FIG. 215, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the left stop switch 42 side, and the "9" lead wires constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). Suppose that the electrical connection of "3" lead wires LW02 for the left stop switch 42 among LW02 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X07" in FIG. 215, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the left stop switch 42 side due to vibration or the like is resolved, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. Assume that the electrical connection of line LW02 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.

At the timing of "X02" in FIG. 215, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting part among the "3" lead wires LW02 for the left stop switch 42, and the main control board Assume that electrical connection between 50 and stop switch 42 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X07" in FIG. 215, the contact failure in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the left stop switch 42 is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all the "9" wires constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. Suppose that the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.
That is, at the timing of "X02" in FIG. 215, the electrical connection of a part of the lead wire LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off, and at the timing of "X07" in FIG. When the electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 forming (harness HN02) is restored, the same operation as described above is performed.

In this way, when the slot machine 10 is powered on and the reels 31 are stopped, at least one of the nine lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is turned on. "Even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
In addition, in a state where the electrical connection of at least "1" lead wire LW02 out of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected, and a prescribed number of medals are bet. When the start switch 41 is operated in this state, the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Furthermore, when the electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored during rotation of the reel 31, the rotation of the reel 31 is maintained without performing error determination or error notification. do.
When the start switch 41 is operated in this state, even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed. When the electrical connection is restored, the rotation of the reel 31 is maintained without error determination or error notification.
As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the stop switch harness (harness HN02) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.
In other words, even if the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected due to poor contact, the system operates in the same manner as when the electrical connection is not disconnected without error determination or error notification. . Therefore, the player can be prevented from noticing that the electrical connection has been cut off, and the game can be immediately resumed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. can be done.

FIG. 216 is a time chart showing the state when the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored with the left stop switch 42 turned on while all the reels 31 are rotating.
At the timing of “X21” in FIG. 216, the power is on. Also, "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, the 3-bet switch 40b, the start switch 41, and the "3" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are all in the off state. Furthermore, the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is in a state of electrically connecting the main control board 50 and the “3” stop switches 42 .

After that, at the timing of "X22" in FIG. 216, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurs at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is cut off.
From "X22" to "X28" in FIG. 216, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is cut off.

Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off at the timing of "X22" in FIG. No notification is given and progress of the game is not stopped.
After that, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 216, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" (prescribed number) medals.
It is assumed that at the time of "X23" in FIG. 216, "3" or more medals are credited (stored).
Also, instead of operating (turning on) the 3-bet switch 40b at the timing of "X23" in FIG. In this case as well, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" (prescribed number) medals.

After that, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) at timing "X24" in FIG. Start. After that, at the timing of "X26" in FIG. 216, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).
It should be noted that at the timing of "X24" in FIG. 216, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is cut off, and "3" (specified number) medals are betted. is.

After that, at the timing of "X27" in FIG. 216, the left stop switch 42 is turned on. Specifically, by pushing the push button-like operation body of the left stop switch 42, the detecting piece is not positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion.
Here, "putting the switch in an ON state" means a state in which the operating body of the switch is being operated. may or may not be detected by
That is, when the electrical connection of the harness of the switch is disconnected, even if the operating body of the switch is operated, this fact is not detected by the main control board 50, but the switch is in the ON state.
At the timing of "X27" in FIG. 216, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off, so the push button-like operation body of the left stop switch 42 is turned off. Even if the left stop switch 42 is turned on by pressing the , this is not detected by the main control board 50 .

After that, at the timing of “X28” in FIG. 216, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all “9” leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are removed. The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is restored.
At the timing of "X28" in FIG. 216, "3" reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42 is on, but the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are off. remains in the state of

When the electrical connection of all the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored at the timing of "X28" in FIG. The rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped, and the constant speed rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is maintained without stopping the progress of the game.
That is, at the timing of "X28" in FIG. 216, the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are kept in the OFF state, and the left stop switch 42 is kept in the ON state, and all components of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are turned on. When the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is restored, the main control board 50 detects that the left stop switch 42 is on.
Therefore, the rotation of the left reel 31 stops while the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

At the timing of "X22" in FIG. 216, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurred at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the left stop switch 42 side, and the "9" lead wires constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). Suppose that the electrical connection of "3" lead wires LW02 for the left stop switch 42 among LW02 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X28" in FIG. 216, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the left stop switch 42 side due to vibration or the like is resolved, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. Assume that the electrical connection of line LW02 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.

At the timing of "X22" in FIG. 216, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting part among the "3" lead wires LW02 for the left stop switch 42, and the main control board Assume that electrical connection between 50 and stop switch 42 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X28" in FIG. 216, the contact failure in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the left stop switch 42 is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all the "9" wires constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. Suppose that the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.
That is, at the timing of "X22" in FIG. 216, the electrical connection of a part of the lead wire LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off, and at the timing of "X28" in FIG. Even when the electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 forming (harness HN02) is restored, the same operation as described above is performed.

In this way, when the slot machine 10 is powered on and the reels 31 are stopped, at least one of the nine lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is turned on. "Even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
In addition, in a state where the electrical connection of at least "1" lead wire LW02 out of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected, and a prescribed number of medals are bet. When the start switch 41 is operated in this state, the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Furthermore, when the electrical connection of all lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored while the left stop switch 42 is on while the reel 31 is rotating, the error determination and error notification are performed. The rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped, and the rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is maintained.
When the start switch 41 is operated in this state, the reel 31 starts rotating and the left stop switch 42 is operated. is on and the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is restored, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped without error determination or error notification, thereby giving the player a feeling of discomfort or discomfort. can be prevented.
In other words, even if the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected due to poor contact, the system operates in the same manner as when the electrical connection is not disconnected without error determination or error notification. . Therefore, the player can be prevented from noticing that the electrical connection has been cut off, and the game can be immediately resumed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. can be done.

At the timing of "X22" in FIG. 216, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurred in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the side of the middle stop switch 42, and a part of the lead wire LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) was broken. Assume that the electrical connection is cut off. In this case, when the left stop switch 42 is operated (turned on) at the timing "X27" in FIG. Therefore, when the electrical connection of all lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored at the timing of "X28" in FIG. Before that, the left reel 31 stops rotating.

FIG. 216 shows the state in which the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored with the left stop switch 42 turned on, but the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored with the middle stop switch 42 turned on. ) is restored, and when the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored while the right stop switch 42 is on.
For example, at the timing of "X22" in FIG. 216, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, or contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the middle stop switch 42 side. Alternatively, it is assumed that a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the middle stop switch 42 .

Then, at the timing of "X28" in FIG. 216, the left stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 remain in the OFF state, and the middle stop switch 42 remains in the ON state. Suppose that the electrical connection of all the constituent lead wires LW02 is restored.
In this case, since the main control board 50 detects that the middle stop switch 42 is on, the rotation of the middle reel 31 stops while the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

At the timing of "X22" in FIG. 216, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, or contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the right stop switch 42 side. Alternatively, it is assumed that a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the right stop switch 42 .

Then, at the timing of "X28" in FIG. 216, the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 remain in the OFF state, and the right stop switch 42 remains in the ON state. Suppose that the electrical connection of all the constituent lead wires LW02 is restored.
In this case, since the main control board 50 detects that the right stop switch 42 is on, the rotation of the right reel 31 stops while the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

FIG. 217 is a time chart showing a state when all the stop switches 42 are ON while all the reels 31 are rotating and the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored.
At the timing of "X141" in FIG. 217, the power is on. Also, "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, the 3-bet switch 40b, the start switch 41, and the "3" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are all in the off state. Furthermore, the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is in a state of electrically connecting the main control board 50 and the “3” stop switches 42 .

After that, at the timing of "X142" in FIG. 217, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurs at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is cut off.
It should be noted that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is disconnected from "X142" to "X148" in FIG.
Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off at the timing of "X142" in FIG. No notification is given and progress of the game is not stopped.

After that, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X143" in FIG. 217, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" (prescribed number) medals.
It is assumed that "3" or more medals have been credited (stored) at the time of "X143" in Fig. 217 .
Also, at the timing of "X143" in FIG. In this case as well, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" (prescribed number) medals.

After that, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X144" in FIG. Start. After that, at the timing of “X146” in FIG. 217, the rotation of “3” reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).
It should be noted that at the timing of "X144" in FIG. 217, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is cut off, and "3" (specified number) medals are betted. is.
After that, at the timing of "X147" in FIG. 217, all the "3" stop switches 42 are turned on by pushing the push button-shaped operating bodies of all the "3" stop switches 42. FIG.

After that, at the timing of "X148" in FIG. 217, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is restored.
At the timing of "X148" in FIG. 217, "3" reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and all "3" stop switches 42 are on.
Then, at the timing of "X148" in FIG. 217, when the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is restored by all of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). , the main control board 50 does not perform error determination or error notification, stops the rotation of the left reel 31, and maintains the constant speed rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 without stopping the progress of the game.

Here, at the timing of "X148" in FIG. 217, all the "three" stop switches 42 are turned on, and all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) connect the main control board 50 and the stop switch. When the electrical connection with the switch 42 is restored, the ON state of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is detected simultaneously.
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the order of priority of which reel 31 to stop rotating when a plurality of stop switches 42 are simultaneously detected to be on is determined in advance. The left reel 31 has the first priority, the middle reel 31 has the second priority, and the right reel 31 has the third priority.
Therefore, when all the "three" stop switches 42 are detected to be on at the same time, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped while the rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is maintained.
Therefore, at the timing of "X149" to "X150" in FIG. 217, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped while the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

At the timing of "X142" in FIG. 217, among the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02), other than the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting part of the left stop switch 42, due to vibration or the like. Suppose that the electrical connection of "8" lead wires LW02 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X148" in FIG. 217, it is assumed that the electrical connection of all the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored due to vibration or the like. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.
That is, at the timing of "X142" in FIG. 217, the electrical connection of a part of the lead wire LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off due to vibration or the like, and at the timing of "X148" in FIG. Even when the electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored due to vibration or the like, the same operation as described above is performed.

In this way, when the slot machine 10 is powered on and the reels 31 are stopped, at least one of the nine lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is turned on. "Even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
In addition, in a state where the electrical connection of at least "1" lead wire LW02 out of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected, and a prescribed number of medals are bet. When the start switch 41 is operated in this state, the rotation of the reel 31 is started.

Furthermore, when the electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored with all the "3" stop switches 42 turned on while the reel 31 is rotating, The rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped and the rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is maintained without performing error determination or error notification.
As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the stop switch harness (harness HN02) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.
In other words, even if the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected due to poor contact, the system operates in the same manner as when the electrical connection is not disconnected without error determination or error notification. . Therefore, the player can be prevented from noticing that the electrical connection has been cut off, and the game can be immediately resumed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. can be done.

At the timing of "X148" in FIG. 217, when "two" pieces of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are turned on, the main control is performed by all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). When the electrical connection between the board 50 and the stop switch 42 is restored, "two" ONs of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are detected simultaneously.
When it is detected that a plurality of stop switches 42 are turned on at the same time, the priority of which reel 31 to stop rotating is determined in the order left → middle → right. When the turn-on of the stop switch 42 is detected at the same time, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped while the rotation of the middle reel 31 is maintained.
Therefore, at the timing of "X149" to "X150" in FIG. 217, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped while the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

Also, at the timing of "X148" in FIG. 217, when "two" pieces of the left stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are turned on, the main control is performed by all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). When the electrical connection between the board 50 and the stop switch 42 is restored, "two" ONs of the left stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are detected simultaneously.
In this case, at the timing of "X149" to "X150" in FIG. 217, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped while the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

At the timing of "X148" in FIG. 217, when "two" pieces of the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are turned on, the main control is performed by all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). When the electrical connection between the substrate 50 and the stop switch 42 is restored, "two" ONs of the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are detected simultaneously.
In this case, at the timing of "X149" to "X150" in FIG. 217, the rotation of the middle reel 31 is stopped while the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.
It should be noted that the priority of which reel 31 to stop rotating when a plurality of stop switches 42 are simultaneously detected to be turned on is not limited to the order of left→middle→right. For example, the order of priority can be set in the order of left->right->middle or in the order of middle->right->left.

FIG. 218 is a time chart showing the state when the power is turned off while all the reels 31 are rotating, and after the power is restored, the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored with the left stop switch 42 turned on.
At the timing of "X161" in FIG. 218, the power is on. Also, "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, the 3-bet switch 40b, the start switch 41, and the "3" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are all in the off state. Furthermore, the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is in a state of electrically connecting the main control board 50 and the “3” stop switches 42 .

After that, at the timing of "X162" in FIG. 218, a contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side due to vibration or the like, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is cut off.
From "X162" to "X176" in FIG. 218, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is cut off.

Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off at the timing of "X162" in FIG. No notification is given and progress of the game is not stopped.
After that, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X163" in FIG. 218, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" (prescribed number) medals.
It is assumed that "3" or more medals have been credited (stored) at the time of "X163" in Fig. 218 .
Also, instead of operating (turning on) the 3-bet switch 40b at the timing of "X163" in FIG. In this case as well, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" medals (the prescribed number).

After that, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) at timing "X164" in FIG. Start. After that, at the timing of “X166” in FIG. 218, the rotation of “3” reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).
At the timing of "X164" in FIG. 218, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is cut off, and "3" (specified number) medals are betted. is.

After that, at the timing of "X168" in FIG. 218, if the power supply is interrupted due to equipment failure or the like, the driving signals to the "3" motors 32 are interrupted, so the "3" reels 31 are decelerated. starts, and at the timing of “X169” in FIG. 218, the rotation of “3” reels 31 stops.
After that, at the timing of “X171” in FIG. 218, the left stop switch 42 is turned on by pushing the push button-like operating body of the left stop switch 42 .
Here, at the timing of "X171" in FIG. Even if the left stop switch 42 is turned on by depressing the push button-like operating body of the stop switch 42 , this is not detected by the main control board 50 .

After that, at the timing of "X172" in FIG. 218, when the power supply is restored due to the elimination of the equipment failure, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 resumes at the timing of "X173" in FIG. At the timing of "X174" in FIG. 218, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).
In addition, at timings "X172" to "X175" in FIG. 218, the power is on, and the left stop switch 42 is also on. , the main control board 50 does not detect that the left stop switch 42 is on.

After that, at the timing of "X176" in FIG. 218, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is restored.
At the timing of "X176" in FIG. 218, the "3" reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, the left stop switch 42 is on, but the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are off. remains in the state of

Then, at the timing of "X176" in FIG. 218, when the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is restored by all of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). , the main control board 50 does not perform error determination or error notification, stops the rotation of the left reel 31, and maintains the constant speed rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 without stopping the progress of the game.
That is, at the timing of "X176" in FIG. 218, the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are kept in the OFF state, and the left stop switch 42 is kept in the ON state, and all components of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are turned on. When the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the lead wire LW02 is restored, the main control board 50 detects that the left stop switch 42 is on.
Therefore, the rotation of the left reel 31 stops while the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

At the timing of "X162" in FIG. 218, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurred in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the left stop switch 42 side, and the "9" lead wires constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the "3" lead wires LW02 for the left stop switch 42 among the LW02 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X176" in FIG. 218, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the left stop switch 42 side due to vibration or the like is resolved, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.

At the timing of "X162" in FIG. 218, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting part among the "3" lead wires LW02 for the left stop switch 42, and the left stop switch is closed. Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion 42 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X176" in FIG. 218, the contact failure in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the left stop switch 42 is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all the "9" wires constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the lead wire LW02 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.
That is, at timing "X162" in FIG. Even when the electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored due to vibration or the like, the same operation as described above is performed.

In this way, when the slot machine 10 is powered on and the reels 31 are stopped, at least one of the nine lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is turned on. "Even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
In addition, in a state where the electrical connection of at least "1" lead wire LW02 out of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected, and a prescribed number of medals are bet. In this state, when the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation of "3" reels 31 is started.

Furthermore, when the power supply is interrupted while the reels 31 of "3" are rotating and the power is restored while the left stop switch 42 is on, the error judgment and the error notification are not performed, and the "3" reels are stopped. , and the rotation of any reel 31 is maintained without being stopped.
Furthermore, while the left stop switch 42 was kept on during the rotation of the "3" reels 31, the electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) was restored. In this case, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped and the rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is maintained without performing error determination or error notification.
As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the stop switch harness (harness HN02) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.
In other words, even if the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected due to poor contact, the system operates in the same manner as when the electrical connection is not disconnected without error determination or error notification. . Therefore, the player can be prevented from noticing that the electrical connection has been cut off, and the game can be immediately resumed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. can be done.

At the timing of "X162" in FIG. 218, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurred in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the side of the middle stop switch 42, and part of the lead wire LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) was broken. Assume that the electrical connection is cut off. In this case, the left stop switch 42 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X171" in FIG. When the power is restored, the main control board 50 detects that the left stop switch 42 is on, so the rotation of the left reel 31 stops. Therefore, when the electrical connection of all lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored at the timing of "X176" in FIG. Before that, the left reel 31 stops rotating.

FIG. 218 shows the state in which the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is recovered with the left stop switch 42 turned on. ) is restored, and when the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored while the right stop switch 42 is on.
For example, at the timing of "X162" in FIG. 218, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, or contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the middle stop switch 42 side. Alternatively, it is assumed that a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the middle stop switch 42 .

At the timing of "X171" in FIG. 218, the middle stop switch 42 is turned on, and at the timing of "X172" in FIG. X176", while the middle stop switch 42 remains on, the electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 forming the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored due to vibration or the like.
In this case, since the main control board 50 detects that the middle stop switch 42 is on at the timing of "X176" in FIG. , the rotation of the middle reel 31 stops.

Also, at the timing of "X162" in FIG. 218, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, or contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the right stop switch 42 side. Alternatively, it is assumed that a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the right stop switch 42 .
Then, at the timing of "X171" in FIG. 218, the right stop switch 42 is turned on, and at the timing of "X172" in FIG. X176", while the right stop switch 42 remains on, electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 forming the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored due to vibration or the like.
In this case, since the main control board 50 detects that the right stop switch 42 is on at the timing of "X176" in FIG. , the rotation of the right reel 31 stops.

FIG. 219 is a time chart showing the state when the power is turned off while all the reels 31 are rotating, and after the power is restored, the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored with all the stop switches 42 turned on. .
At the timing of "X281" in FIG. 219, the power is on. Also, "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, the 3-bet switch 40b, the start switch 41, and the "3" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are all in the off state. Furthermore, the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is in a state of electrically connecting the main control board 50 and the “3” stop switches 42 .

After that, at the timing of "X282" in FIG. 219, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurs at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is cut off.
From "X282" to "X296" in FIG. 219, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is cut off.
Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off at the timing of "X282" in FIG. No notification is given and progress of the game is not stopped.

After that, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X283" in FIG. 219, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" (prescribed number) medals.
It is assumed that at the time of "X283" in FIG. 219, "3" or more medals are credited (stored).
Also, instead of operating (turning on) the 3-bet switch 40b at the timing of "X283" in FIG. In this case as well, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" medals (the specified number).

After that, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X284" in FIG. Start. After that, at the timing of “X286” in FIG. 219, the rotation of “3” reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).
In addition, at the timing of "X284" in FIG. 219, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is disconnected, and "3" medals (the specified number) are betted. is.

After that, at the timing of “X288” in FIG. 219, if the power supply is cut off due to equipment failure or the like, the driving signals to the “3” motors 32 are interrupted, so the “3” reels 31 are decelerated. starts, and at the timing of “X289” in FIG. 219, the rotation of “3” reels 31 stops.
After that, at the timing of “X291” in FIG. 219, by pushing the push button-shaped operating bodies of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the The right stop switch 42 is turned on.

After that, at the timing of “X292” in FIG. 219, when the power supply is restored due to the elimination of the equipment failure, the rotation of the “3” reels 31 resumes at the timing of “X293” in FIG. At the timing of "X294" in FIG. 219, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).
After that, at the timing of "X296" in FIG. 219, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is restored.
At the timing of "X296" in FIG. 219, the "3" reels 31 are rotating at a constant speed, and the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 42, and right stop switch 42 are on.

Then, at the timing of "X296" in FIG. 219, when the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is restored by all of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). , the main control board 50 does not perform error determination or error notification, stops the rotation of the left reel 31, and maintains the constant speed rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 without stopping the progress of the game.
Here, at the timing of "X296" in FIG. 219, the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are turned on, and all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are turned on. When the electrical connection is restored, the ON state of the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 is detected simultaneously.

And, as described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when a plurality of stop switches 42 are simultaneously detected to be turned on, the priority of which reel 31 to stop rotating is determined in the order of left → middle → right. Therefore, when it is detected that the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are turned on at the same time, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped while the rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is maintained. Stop.
Therefore, at the timing of "X297" to "X298" in FIG. 219, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped while the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

At the timing of "X282" in FIG. Suppose that "6" lead wires LW02 other than the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the middle stop switch 42 and the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the right stop switch 42 are disconnected. Then, at the timing of "X296" in FIG. 219, it is assumed that the electrical connection of all "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored due to vibration or the like. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.
That is, at the timing of "X282" in FIG. 219, the electrical connection of a part of the lead wire LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off due to vibration or the like, and at the timing of "X296" in FIG. Even when the electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored due to vibration or the like, the same operation as described above is performed.

In this way, when the slot machine 10 is powered on and the reels 31 are stopped, at least one of the nine lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is turned on. "Even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
In addition, in a state where the electrical connection of at least "1" lead wire LW02 out of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected, and a prescribed number of medals are bet. In this state, when the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation of "3" reels 31 is started.

Furthermore, when the power is cut off while the "3" reels 31 are rotating, and the power is restored with the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 turned on, an error judgment is also made. The rotation of "3" reels 31 is resumed without any error notification, and the rotation of any reel 31 is maintained without being stopped.
Furthermore, while the "3" reels 31 are rotating, while the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are kept on, all of the stop switch harnesses (harnesses HN02) When the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is recovered, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped and the rotation of the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 is maintained without performing error judgment or error notification.
As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the stop switch harness (harness HN02) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.
In other words, even if the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected due to poor contact, the system operates in the same manner as when the electrical connection is not disconnected without error determination or error notification. . Therefore, the player can be prevented from noticing that the electrical connection has been cut off, and the game can be immediately resumed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. can be done.

At the timing of "X296" in FIG. 219, when "two" of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are turned on, the main control is performed by all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). When the electrical connection between the board 50 and the stop switch 42 is restored, "two" ONs of the left stop switch 42 and the middle stop switch 42 are detected simultaneously.
When it is detected that a plurality of stop switches 42 are turned on at the same time, the priority of which reel 31 to stop rotating is determined in the order left → middle → right. When the turn-on of the stop switch 42 is detected at the same time, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped while the rotation of the middle reel 31 is maintained.
Therefore, at the timing of "X297" to "X298" in FIG. 219, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped while the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

Further, at the timing of "X296" in FIG. 219, when "two" pieces of the left stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are turned on, the main control is performed by all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). When the electrical connection between the substrate 50 and the stop switch 42 is restored, "two" ONs of the left stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are detected simultaneously.
In this case, at the timing of "X297" to "X298" in FIG. 219, the rotation of the left reel 31 is stopped while the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

Also, at the timing of "X296" in FIG. 219, when "two" pieces of the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are turned on, the main control is performed by all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). When the electrical connection between the board 50 and the stop switch 42 is restored, "two" ONs of the middle stop switch 42 and the right stop switch 42 are detected at the same time.
In this case, at the timing of "X297" to "X298" in FIG. 219, the rotation of the middle reel 31 is stopped while the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 keep rotating at a constant speed.

In FIG. 220, the power is turned off while all the reels 31 are rotating, the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored with the left stop switch 42 turned on while the power is turned off, and then all the stop switches 42 are turned off. 5 is a time chart showing a state when power is restored in an off state;
At the timing of "X301" in FIG. 220, the power is on. Also, "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, the 3-bet switch 40b, the start switch 41, and the "3" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are all in the off state. Furthermore, the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is in a state of electrically connecting the main control board 50 and the “3” stop switches 42 .

After that, at the timing of "X302" in FIG. 220, a contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side due to vibration or the like, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is cut off.
From "X302" to "X313" in FIG. 220, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is cut off.

Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off at the timing of "X302" in FIG. No notification is given and progress of the game is not stopped.
After that, when the 3 bet switch 40b is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X303" in FIG.
It is assumed that at the time of "X303" in FIG. 220, "3" or more medals are credited (stored).
Also, at the timing of “X303” in FIG. 220, instead of operating (turning on) the 3-bet switch 40b, “3” (predetermined number) medals may be inserted from the medal slot 47. FIG. In this case as well, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" medals (the prescribed number).

After that, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X304" in FIG. Start. After that, at the timing of "X306" in FIG. 220, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).
It should be noted that at the timing of "X304" in FIG. 220, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is cut off, and "3" (specified number) medals are betted. is.

After that, at the timing of "X308" in FIG. 220, if the power supply is interrupted due to equipment failure or the like, the driving signals to the "3" motors 32 are interrupted, so the "3" reels 31 are decelerated. is started, and at the timing of "X309" in FIG. 220, the rotation of "3" reels 31 is stopped.
After that, at the timing of “X311” in FIG. 220, the left stop switch 42 is turned on by pushing the push button-like operating body of the left stop switch 42 .
Here, at the timing of "X311" in FIG. Even if the left stop switch 42 is turned on by depressing the push button-like operating body of the stop switch 42 , this is not detected by the main control board 50 .

After that, at the timing of "X313" in FIG. 220, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are removed. The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is restored.
Here, at the timing of "X313" in FIG. 220, since the power is off, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is made while the left stop switch 42 is on. Even if the normal connection is restored, the main control board 50 does not detect that the left stop switch 42 is on.

After that, at the timing of “X315” in FIG. 220, the left stop switch 42 is turned off by stopping the operation of the push button-like operation body of the left stop switch 42 .
After that, at the timing of "X317" in FIG. 220, when the power supply is restored by resolving the malfunction of the equipment, at the timing of "X318" in FIG. The rotation of the reels 31 resumes, and the rotation of the "3" reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation) at the timing of "X319" in FIG.
220, the power is on, and all of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are used to connect the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 to each other. However, all the stop switches 42 are off. Therefore, since the main control board 50 does not detect that any of the stop switches 42 are turned on, none of the reels 31 are stopped and the constant speed rotation is maintained.

At the timing of "X302" in FIG. 220, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the left stop switch 42 side, and the "9" lead wires constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the "3" lead wires LW02 for the left stop switch 42 among the LW02 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X313" in FIG. 220, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the left stop switch 42 side due to vibration or the like is resolved, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.

At the timing of "X302" in FIG. 220, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting part among the "3" lead wires LW02 for the left stop switch 42, and the left stop switch is closed. Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion 42 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X313" in FIG. 220, the contact failure in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the left stop switch 42 is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all the "9" wires constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are released. Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the lead wire LW02 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.
That is, at the timing of "X302" in FIG. 220, the electrical connection of a part of the lead wire LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off due to vibration or the like, and at the timing of "X313" in FIG. Even when the electrical connection of all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored due to vibration or the like, the same operation as described above is performed.

In this way, when the slot machine 10 is powered on and the reels 31 are stopped, at least one of the nine lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is turned on. "Even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
In addition, in a state where the electrical connection of at least "1" lead wire LW02 out of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected, and a prescribed number of medals are bet. When the start switch 41 is operated in this state, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 is started.

Furthermore, when the power is cut off during the rotation of the “3” reels 31, and the left stop switch 42 is turned on during the power cut, all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are turned on. When the electrical connection between the control board 50 and the stop switches 42 is restored, and then the power is restored with all the stop switches 42 turned off, the error judgment and error notification are not performed, and "3" The rotation of the reels 31 is restarted, and constant speed rotation is maintained without stopping any of the reels 31. - 特許庁
As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the stop switch harness (harness HN02) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.
In other words, even if the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected due to poor contact, the system operates in the same manner as when the electrical connection is not disconnected without error determination or error notification. . Therefore, the player can be prevented from noticing that the electrical connection has been cut off, and the game can be immediately resumed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. can be done.

Note that FIG. 220 shows the state in which the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored with the left stop switch 42 turned on, but the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored with the middle stop switch 42 turned on. ) is restored, and when the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored while the right stop switch 42 is on.
For example, at the timing of "X302" in FIG. 220, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, or contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the middle stop switch 42 side. Alternatively, it is assumed that a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the middle stop switch 42 .

Then, at the timing of "X311" in FIG. 220, the middle stop switch 42 is turned on, and at the timing of "X313" in FIG. 220, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switches 42 is restored, and the power is restored with all the stop switches 42 turned off at the timing of "X317" in FIG.
In this case, the rotation of the “3” reels 31 is resumed without error determination or error notification, and constant speed rotation is maintained without stopping any of the reels 31 .
As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the stop switch harness (harness HN02) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

At the timing of "X302" in FIG. 220, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, or contact failure occurs in the harness HN02 connector terminal on the right stop switch 42 side. Alternatively, it is assumed that a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the right stop switch 42 .
Then, at the timing of "X311" in FIG. 220, the right stop switch 42 is turned on, and at the timing of "X313" in FIG. 220, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switches 42 is restored, and the power is restored with all the stop switches 42 turned off at the timing of "X317" in FIG.
In this case, the rotation of the “3” reels 31 is resumed without error determination or error notification, and constant speed rotation is maintained without stopping any of the reels 31 .
As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the stop switch harness (harness HN02) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

In FIG. 221, the power is turned off while all the reels 31 are rotating, and the connection of the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored in a state where all the stop switches 42 are on while the power is turned off. 4 is a time chart showing a state when the power is restored while the is off.
At the timing of "X421" in FIG. 221, the power is on. Also, "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, the 3-bet switch 40b, the start switch 41, and the "3" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are all in the off state. Furthermore, the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is in a state of electrically connecting the main control board 50 and the “3” stop switches 42 .

After that, at the timing of "X422" in FIG. 221, a contact failure occurs at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side due to vibration or the like, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is cut off.
It should be noted that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is disconnected from "X422" to "X433" in FIG.

Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off at the timing of "X422" in FIG. No notification is given and progress of the game is not stopped.
After that, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X423" in FIG. 221, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" medals (prescribed number).
It is assumed that "3" or more medals have been credited (stored) at the time of "X423" in Fig. 221 .
Also, at the timing of "X423" in FIG. In this case as well, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" (prescribed number) medals.

After that, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) at timing "X424" in FIG. Start. After that, at the timing of "X426" in FIG. 221, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).
At the timing of "X424" in FIG. 221, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is disconnected, and "3" medals (prescribed number) are betted. is.

After that, at the timing of "X428" in FIG. 221, if the power supply is interrupted due to equipment failure or the like, the driving signals to the "3" motors 32 are interrupted, so the "3" reels 31 decelerate. is started, and at the timing of "X429" in FIG. 221, the rotation of "3" reels 31 is stopped.
After that, at the timing of “X431” in FIG. 221, all the stop switches 42 are turned on by pushing the push button-like operating bodies of all the stop switches 42 .
Here, at timing "X431" in FIG. Even if all of the stop switches 42 are turned on by pushing the push button-shaped operation body of the stop switch 42, the main control board 50 controls the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42. is not detected.

After that, at the timing of "X433" in FIG. 221, the contact failure at the harness HN02 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all "9" leads constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are removed. The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the line LW02 is restored.
Here, at the timing of "X433" in FIG. 221, since the power is off, all of the stop switches 42 are on, and the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switches 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is stopped. Even if the physical connection is restored, the main control board 50 does not detect that the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are turned on.

After that, at the timing of “X435” in FIG. 221, all the stop switches 42 are turned off by stopping the operation of the push button-like operation bodies of all the stop switches 42 .
After that, at the timing of "X437" in FIG. 221, when the power supply is restored by resolving the malfunction of the equipment, at the timing of "X438" in FIG. The rotation of the reels 31 restarts, and the rotation of the "3" reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation) at the timing of "X439" in FIG.
221, the power supply is on, and all of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) are connected to the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42. After the timing "X437" in FIG. However, since all the stop switches 42 are off, the main control board 50 does not detect that the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 42, and the right stop switch 42 are on. Therefore, the constant speed rotation is maintained without stopping any reel 31 .

At the timing of “X422” in FIG. 221, due to vibration or the like, “3” of the “9” lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) for the middle stop switch 42 are Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is cut off by the LW02.
Alternatively, suppose that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 via the lead wire LW02 for the light emitting portion of the middle stop switch 42 is cut off due to vibration or the like at the timing of "X422" in FIG.

Furthermore, at the timing of “X433” in FIG. 221, due to vibration or the like, electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 is established by all of the “9” lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02). is recovered.
Then, at the timing of "X422" in FIG. 221, the electrical connection by a part of the lead wire LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is cut off due to vibration or the like, and at the timing of "X433" in FIG. Even when the electrical connection by all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored due to vibration or the like, the same operation as described above is performed.

In this way, when the slot machine 10 is powered on and the reels 31 are stopped, at least one of the nine lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is turned on. "Even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW02 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
In addition, in a state where the electrical connection of at least "1" lead wire LW02 out of the "9" lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is disconnected, and a prescribed number of medals are bet. When the start switch 41 is operated in this state, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 is started.

Furthermore, power supply interruption occurs during rotation of "3" reels 31, and all the lead wires LW02 constituting the stop switch harness (harness HN02) with all the stop switches 42 turned on during the power interruption. When the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the stop switches 42 is restored, and then the power is restored with all the stop switches 42 turned off, "3" The rotation of the reels 31 is resumed, and the constant speed rotation is maintained without stopping any of the reels 31. - 特許庁
As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the stop switch harness (harness HN02) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

FIG. 222 is a time chart showing a state in which the connection of the start switch harness (harness HN01) is recovered in a state where the specified number of medals are betted and the start switch 41 is on while all the reels 31 are stopped. .
At the timing of "X441" in FIG. 222, the power is on. Also, "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, the 3-bet switch 40b, the start switch 41, and the "3" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are all in the off state. Furthermore, the start switch harness (harness HN01) is in a state of electrically connecting the main control board 50 and the stop switch 41, and the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is connected to the main control board 50 by "3". is electrically connected to the stop switch 42 of .

After that, at the timing of "X442" in FIG. 222, a contact failure occurs at the harness HN01 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side due to vibration or the like, and all "3" leads constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the line LW01 is cut off.
From "X442" to "X450" in FIG. 222, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 is cut off.

Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by the start switch harness (harness HN01) is cut off at the timing of "X442" in FIG. No notification is given and progress of the game is not stopped.
After that, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X444" in FIG.
It is assumed that at the time of "X444" in FIG. 222, "3" or more medals are credited (stored).
Also, at the timing of “X444” in FIG. 222, instead of operating (turning on) the 3-bet switch 40b, “3” (predetermined number) medals may be inserted from the medal slot 47 . In this case as well, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" medals (the prescribed number).

After that, at the timing of "X445" in FIG. 222, the start switch 41 is turned on. Specifically, by pushing down the lever-shaped operating body of the start switch 41, the detection piece is not positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, and the start switch 41 is turned on.
From "X445" to "X453" in FIG. 222, the start switch 41 remains on.
At the timing of "X445" in FIG. 222, the power is on and "3" (specified number) medals have been bet, but the main control is performed by the start switch harness (harness HN01). Since the electrical connection between the board 50 and the start switch 41 is cut off, even if the start switch 41 is turned on by pushing down the lever-like operating body of the start switch 41, the main control board will not be affected. 50 is not detected. Therefore, the rotation of the “3” reels 31 does not start.

After that, at the timing of "X450" in FIG. 222, the contact failure at the harness HN01 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all the "3" leads constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) are released. The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the line LW01 is restored.
At the timing of "X450" in FIG. 222, the power is on, "3" medals (prescribed number) are betted, and "3" reels 31 are stopped. state, and the start switch 41 remains on.

Further, at the timing of "X450" in FIG. 222, when the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by all of the "three" lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is restored. , the main control board 50 neither performs error determination nor error notification, and does not stop the progress of the game.
Then, at the timing of "X450" in FIG. 222, when the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 is restored by all of the "three" lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01). 222, since the main control board 50 detects that the start switch 41 is on, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 is started at the timing of "X451" in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of "X452" in FIG. 222, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).

At the timing of "X442" in FIG. 222, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW01 for the light-emitting part among the "3" lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01). , the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X450" in FIG. 222, the poor contact in the lead wire LW01 for the light emitting portion of the start switch 41 is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all the "3" wires constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) are released. Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the lead wire LW01 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.
That is, at the timing of "X442" in FIG. 222, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by a part of the lead wire LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is cut off due to vibration or the like. 222, even when the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by all the lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is restored due to vibration or the like. , works in the same way as above.

In this way, when the slot machine 10 is powered on and the reels 31 are stopped, at least one of the three lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) "Even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW01 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
In addition, in a state where the electrical connection of at least "1" lead wire LW01 out of the "3" lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is disconnected, and a prescribed number of medals is bet. In this state, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on), the rotation of the reel 31 is not started.

Furthermore, in a state where "3" reels 31 are stopped, a prescribed number of medals have been betted, and the start switch 41 is ON, all components of the start switch harness (harness HN01) When the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the lead wire LW01 is restored, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 is started without error determination or error notification.
As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the start switch harness (harness HN01) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.
In other words, even if the start switch harness (harness HN01) is disconnected due to poor contact, the system operates in the same manner as when the electrical connection is not disconnected without error determination or error notification. . Therefore, the player can be prevented from noticing that the electrical connection has been cut off, and the game can be immediately resumed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. can be done.

FIG. 223 shows a state in which the start switch harness (harness HN01) is turned on while the start switch harness (harness HN01) is disconnected and the start switch 41 is turned on while the power is off. 4 is a time chart showing a state when connection is restored;
At the timing of "X461" in FIG. 223, the power is on. Also, "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, the 3-bet switch 40b, the start switch 41, and the "3" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are all in the off state. Furthermore, the start switch harness (harness HN01) is in a state of electrically connecting the main control board 50 and the stop switch 41, and the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is connected to the main control board 50 by "3". is electrically connected to the stop switch 42 of .

After that, at the timing of "X462" in FIG. 223, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurred at the harness HN01 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, and all "3" leads constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the line LW01 is cut off.
From "X462" to "X473" in FIG. 223, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by the start switch harness (harness HN01) is disconnected.

Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by the start switch harness (harness HN01) is cut off at the timing of "X462" in FIG. No notification is given and progress of the game is not stopped.
After that, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X464" in FIG.
It is assumed that at the time of "X464" in FIG. 223, "3" or more medals are credited (stored).
Also, instead of operating (turning on) the 3-bet switch 40b at the timing of "X464" in FIG. In this case as well, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" medals (the prescribed number).

After that, at the timing of "X467" in FIG. 223, the power is cut off due to equipment failure or the like.
After that, at the timing of “X469” in FIG. 223, the lever-like operating body of the start switch 41 is pushed down to turn on the start switch 41 .
From "X469" to "X476" in FIG. 223, the start switch 41 remains on.
Here, at the timing of "X469" in FIG. 223, the power is off and the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by the start switch harness (harness HN01) is cut off. Even if the start switch 41 is turned on by pushing down the lever-like operating body of the switch 41, the main control board 50 does not detect this. Therefore, the rotation of the “3” reels 31 does not start.

After that, at the timing of "X471" in FIG. 223, the power is restored by resolving the malfunction of the equipment.
Here, at the timing of "X471" in FIG. 223, the power is restored (turned on), but the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by the start switch harness (harness HN01) is cut off. Therefore, even if the start switch 41 is kept on, the main control board 50 does not detect it. Therefore, the rotation of the “3” reels 31 does not start.

After that, at the timing of "X473" in FIG. 223, the contact failure at the harness HN01 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all "3" leads constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) are released. The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the line LW01 is restored.
At the timing of "X473" in FIG. 223, the power is on, "3" medals (prescribed number) are betted, and "3" reels 31 are stopped. state, and the start switch 41 remains on.

Further, at the timing of "X473" in FIG. 223, when the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 is restored by all of the "three" lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01). , the main control board 50 neither performs error determination nor error notification, and does not stop the progress of the game.
Then, at the timing of "X473" in FIG. 223, when the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by all of the "three" lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is restored. 223, since the main control board 50 detects that the start switch 41 is on, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 is started at the timing of "X474" in FIG. After that, at the timing of "X475" in FIG. 223, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 reaches a constant speed state (constant speed rotation).

At the timing of "X462" in FIG. 223, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurs in the lead wire LW01 for the light receiving part among the "3" lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01). , the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X473" in FIG. 223, the contact failure in the lead wire LW01 for the light receiving portion of the start switch 41 is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all the "3" wires constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) are released. Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the lead wire LW01 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.
That is, at the timing of "X462" in FIG. 223, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by a part of the lead wire LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is cut off due to vibration or the like. 223, even when the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by all the lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is restored due to vibration or the like. , works in the same way as above.

In this way, when the slot machine 10 is powered on and the reels 31 are stopped, at least "1" of the "3" lead wires LW01 forming the start switch harness (harness HN01) "Even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW01 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
In addition, in a state where the electrical connection of at least "1" lead wire LW01 out of the "3" lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is disconnected, and a prescribed number of medals are bet. When the power supply is interrupted while the start switch 41 is turned on and the power is restored, the rotation of the reel 31 is not started.

Furthermore, in a state where "3" reels 31 are stopped, a prescribed number of medals are betted, and the start switch 41 is kept on, the start switch harness (harness HN01) is turned on. When the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by all the lead wires LW01 is restored, the rotation of the "3" reels 31 is started without error judgment or error notification. .
As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the start switch harness (harness HN01) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.
In other words, even if the start switch harness (harness HN01) is disconnected due to poor contact, the system operates in the same manner as when the electrical connection is not disconnected without error determination or error notification. . Therefore, the player can be prevented from noticing that the electrical connection has been cut off, and the game can be immediately resumed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. can be done.

FIG. 224 is a time chart showing the state when the connection of the start switch harness (harness HN01) is restored while the start switch 41 is on while the power is off, and then the power is restored while the start switch 41 is off. be.
At the timing of "X481" in FIG. 224, the power is on. Also, "3" (left/middle/right) reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, the 3-bet switch 40b, the start switch 41, and the "3" (left/middle/right) stop switches 42 are all in the off state. Furthermore, the start switch harness (harness HN01) is in a state of electrically connecting the main control board 50 and the stop switch 41, and the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is connected to the main control board 50 by "3". is electrically connected to the stop switch 42 of .

After that, at the timing of "X482" in FIG. 224, due to vibration or the like, contact failure occurred at the harness HN01 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side, and all "3" leads constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the line LW01 is cut off.
From "X482" to "X491" in FIG. 224, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by the start switch harness (harness HN01) is disconnected.

Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by the start switch harness (harness HN01) is cut off at the timing of "X482" in FIG. No notification is given and progress of the game is not stopped.
After that, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated (turned on) at the timing of "X484" in FIG.
It is assumed that at the time of "X484" in FIG. 224, "3" or more medals are credited (stored).
Also, instead of operating (turning on) the 3-bet switch 40b at the timing of "X484" in FIG. In this case as well, the main control board 50 executes the process of betting "3" (prescribed number) medals.

After that, at the timing of "X487" in FIG. 224, the power is cut off due to equipment failure or the like.
After that, at the timing of “X489” in FIG. 224, the start switch 41 is turned on by pushing down the lever-like operating body of the start switch 41 .
From "X489" to "X493" in FIG. 224, the start switch 41 remains on.
Here, at the timing of "X489" in FIG. 224, the power is off and the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by the start switch harness (harness HN01) is cut off. Even if the start switch 41 is turned on by pushing down the lever-like operating body of the switch 41, the main control board 50 does not detect this. Therefore, the rotation of the “3” reels 31 does not start.

After that, at the timing of "X491" in FIG. 224, the contact failure at the harness HN01 connector terminal on the main control board 50 side is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all the "3" leads constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) are released. The electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the line LW01 is restored.
At the timing of "X491" in FIG. 224, the start switch 41 is kept on, but the power is off, so all "3" wires forming the start switch harness (harness HN01) are turned off. Even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the lead wire LW01 is restored, the main control board 50 does not detect that the start switch 41 is on. Therefore, the rotation of the “3” reels 31 does not start.

After that, at the timing of “X493” in FIG. 224, the start switch 41 is turned off by stopping the operation of the lever-like operating body of the start switch 41 .
After that, at the timing of "X495" in FIG. 224, the power is restored by resolving the malfunction of the equipment.
Here, at the timing of "X495" in FIG. 224, the power is restored (turned on), and the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by the start switch harness (harness HN01) is also restored. However, since the start switch 41 is in the OFF state, the "3" reels 31 do not start rotating.

At the timing of "X482" in FIG. 224, due to vibration or the like, a contact failure occurred in the lead wire LW01 for the light receiving part among the "3" lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01). , the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 is cut off. Then, at the timing of "X491" in FIG. 224, the contact failure in the lead wire LW01 for the light receiving portion of the start switch 41 is resolved due to vibration or the like, and all the "3" wires constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) are released. Assume that the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 via the lead wire LW01 is restored. Even in such a case, it operates in the same manner as described above.
That is, at the timing of "X482" in FIG. 224, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by a part of the lead wire LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is cut off due to vibration or the like. 224, even when the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 by all the lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is restored due to vibration or the like. , works in the same way as above.

In this way, when the slot machine 10 is powered on and the reels 31 are stopped, at least one of the three lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) "Even if the electrical connection of the lead wire LW01 is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
In addition, in a state where the electrical connection of at least "1" lead wire LW01 out of the "3" lead wires LW01 constituting the start switch harness (harness HN01) is disconnected, and a prescribed number of medals is bet. When the power is turned off, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 is interrupted by all the lead wires LW01 that make up the start switch harness (harness HN01) while the start switch 41 is on. When the connection is restored and the power is restored with the start switch 41 turned off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed, and the reel 31 does not start rotating.

As a result, even if a contact failure occurs in the start switch harness (harness HN01) and the electrical connection is cut off, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.
In other words, even if the start switch harness (harness HN01) is disconnected due to poor contact, the system operates in the same manner as when the electrical connection is not disconnected without error determination or error notification. . Therefore, the player can be prevented from noticing that the electrical connection has been cut off, and the game can be immediately resumed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable or uncomfortable. can be done.

In the thirteenth embodiment, at least one lead wire LW04 out of the nine lead wires LW04 constituting the reel sensor harness (harness HN04) may Even if the electrical connection is cut off, the main control board 50 neither performs error determination nor error notification.
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, the lead wire corresponding to the stopped reel 31 among the "9" lead wires LW04 constituting the reel sensor harness (harness HN04) due to poor contact or the like after the rotation of the reel 31 stops. Even if the electrical connection of the LW04 is cut off, the main control board 50 does not perform error determination or error notification.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, at least one lead wire LW03 out of the twelve lead wires LW03 that constitute the motor harness (harness HN03) is pulled out due to contact failure or the like before the rotation of the reel 31 is started. Even if the electrical connection is cut off, the main control board 50 neither performs error determination nor error notification.
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, after the rotation of the reel 31 is stopped, the lead wire LW03 corresponding to the stopped reel 31 out of the "12" lead wires LW03 constituting the motor harness (harness HN03) due to contact failure or the like Even if the electrical connection is cut off, the main control board 50 neither performs error determination nor error notification.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the start switch 41 is operated while the power is on and the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 are electrically connected by the start switch harness (harness HN01). Then, the starting operation detection LED 501 on the main control board 50 lights up.
Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the power is on and the start switch 41 is on, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 is restored by the start switch harness (harness HN01). Then, the starting operation detection LED 501 on the main control board 50 lights up.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the power is on and the main control board 50 and the "3" stop switches 42 are electrically connected by the stop switch harness (harness HN02), the left When the stop switch 42 is operated, the left stop operation detection LED 502 on the main control board 50 lights up, and when the middle stop switch 42 is operated, the middle stop operation detection LED 503 on the main control board 50 lights up. , when the right stop switch 42 is operated, the right stop operation detection LED 504 on the main control board 50 lights up.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the power is on and the left stop switch 42 is on, the stop switch harness (harness HN02) connects the main control board 50 and the "3" stop switches 42. When the electrical connection is restored, the left stop operation detection LED 502 on the main control board 50 lights up.
Similarly, when the power is on and the middle stop switch 42 is on, electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the "3" stop switches 42 by the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored. When this is done, the middle stop operation detection LED 503 on the main control board 50 lights up.
Also, while the power is on and the right stop switch 42 is on, the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the "3" stop switches 42 via the stop switch harness (harness HN02) is restored. At this time, the right stop operation detection LED 504 on the main control board 50 lights up.

Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, stop switch lamps 511 are provided corresponding to the respective stop switches 42 to indicate the state of acceptance of the operation of each stop switch 42 .
When the operation reception of the stop switch 42 is valid, the main control board 50 lights the stop switch lamp 511 in blue.
Specifically, the main control board 50 lights the left stop switch lamp 511 in blue when the reception of the operation of the left stop switch 42 is valid. The same applies to the middle stop switch lamp 511 and the right stop switch lamp 511 .
In the thirteenth embodiment, due to poor contact or the like, the electrical connection between the lamp control board 510 and the "3" stop switch lamps 511 by the stop switch lamp harness (harness HN07) is cut off, and eventually the main control board 50 and the "3" stop switch lamps 511 are disconnected, the main control board 50 does not perform error determination or error notification.

Also, the electrical connection between the lamp control board 510 and the "3" stop switch lamps 511 by the stop switch lamp harness (harness HN07) is cut off, and the main control board 50 and the "3" stop switch lamps 511 are disconnected. When the electrical connection with is cut off, the stop switch lamp 511 does not light up in blue even if the operation acceptance of the stop switch 42 is valid.
However, the stop switch lamp 511 only stops lighting in blue, and the electrical connection between the lamp control board 510 and the "3" stop switch lamps 511 by the stop switch lamp harness (harness HN07) is cut off, As a result, even if the electrical connection between the main control board 50 and the "3" stop switch lamps 511 is cut off, the main control board 50 is operated when the stop switch 42 whose operation reception is valid is operated. The rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is stopped.

Next, based on FIG. 225, the fact that the main control board 50 cannot be visually recognized through the display window 18 will be described.
FIG. 225 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine 10 showing that the main control board 50 cannot be visually recognized through the display window 18. FIG. In the drawing, only the cabinet 13, the reel base 13g, the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, the motor drive board 34, the image display device 23, and the frame member 515 are hatched.

As shown in FIG. 225, a frame member 515 is attached to the back surface of the front door 12 (the surface opposite to the surface facing the player, the inner surface of the cabinet 13) and the outside of the display window 18. It is
The frame-like member 515 hides various parts and devices other than the reels 31 inside the cabinet 13 when the reels 31 are viewed from the front side (the side facing the player) of the front door 12 through the display window 18.例文帳に追加It is a member for
The frame-shaped member 515 is made of white opaque resin. Therefore, the point blocked by the frame member 515 cannot be visually recognized.
When the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front, the frame member 515 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front door 12 .
A portion of the frame member 515 above the display window 18 is called an upper frame portion 515a, and a portion of the frame member 515 below the display window 18 is called a lower frame portion 515b.

Then, as shown in FIG. 225, when the main control board 50 is viewed from the display window 18 with the line of sight at the angle of the chain double-dashed line with "A" in the figure, the upper frame portion of the frame member 515 The line of sight is blocked by 515a so that the main control board 50 cannot be viewed through the display window 18. FIG.
Also, as shown in FIG. 225, when the main control board 50 is viewed from the display window 18 with the line of sight at the angle of the chain double-dashed line with "B" in the drawing, the upper frame portion of the frame member 515 Although the line of sight is not blocked by 515a, the line of sight is blocked by the reel case 601 of the pattern display device 14 this time. Further, the reel case 601 is made of black opaque resin. Therefore, the point blocked by the reel case 601 cannot be visually recognized. This prevents the main control board 50 from being visually recognized through the display window 18 .

As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, when the front door 12 is closed, the display window 18 is blocked by the upper frame portion 515a of the frame-shaped member 515 and the reel case 601 of the pattern display device 14. It is configured so that the control board 50 cannot be visually recognized.
If the main control board 50 can be viewed through the display window 18, the model numbers, positions, shapes, etc. of various electronic components on the main control board 50 may be grasped and misused. By making the 50 invisible, it is possible to prevent spying on the model numbers, positions, shapes, etc. of various electronic components on the main control board 50, and thus to prevent fraudulent acts.

Next, the relationship between the setting key CK and each part of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 226-237.
226 to 237, the setting key CK is exaggerated and enlarged.
Here, the setting key cylinder 150, the setting key insertion opening 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 will be described.
The set value relates to the degree of advantage of the player, and in the thirteenth embodiment, six levels of setting 1 to setting 6 are provided. The higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.
The setting key cylinder 150 also has a setting key insertion opening 151 and a setting key switch 152 .
The setting key switch 152 shifts to a setting change state in which setting values can be changed (also referred to as "setting change mode") or a setting confirmation state in which setting values cannot be changed but can be confirmed (also referred to as "setting confirmation mode"). This switch is operated when the
When the setting key CK is inserted through the setting key insertion opening 151 and rotated clockwise, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and when the setting key CK is returned to its original position, the setting key switch 152 is turned off. become.

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves both as the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 .
The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the set value in the setting change state.
The reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated when canceling the error notification (returning to the state before the error occurred) after removing the cause of the error.
In this manner, the setting change (reset) switch 153 functions as the setting change switch 153 in the setting change state, and functions as the reset switch 153 when an error is reported.

The setting key switch 152 and setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 .
When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on, the setting change state is entered, and when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is on, the setting confirmation state is entered.
When the setting change state is entered, the current set value is displayed on the set value display LED 73 .
Further, each time the setting change (reset) switch 153 is operated in the setting change state, the set value is incremented by "1". Specifically, every time the setting change (reset) switch 153 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 changes from "1"→"2"→...→"5"→" 6” → “1” → . . .
When the start switch 41 is operated in the setting change state, the set value displayed on the set value display LED 73 is determined.
After that, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting change state is terminated, and the start-up processing is performed with the changed setting values.
Further, when the setting change state ends, the setting value displayed on the setting value display LED 73 is turned off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the fact that the front door 12 can be closed while the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151 will be described.
226 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine 10 showing a state in which the front door 12 is closed with the setting key CK inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151. FIG. In the drawing, only the cabinet 13, the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, the motor drive board 34, the image display device 23, and the frame member 515 are hatched.
As shown in FIG. 226, when the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151, the projection width of the portion of the setting key CK projecting from the setting key insertion opening 151 is defined as "L21".
The distance from the entrance of the setting key insertion opening 151 to the sub board case 80a when the front door 12 is closed is defined as "L22".

The thirteenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "L21<L22".
That is, the distance "L22" from the entrance of the setting key insertion opening 151 to the sub board case 80a when the front door 12 is closed corresponds to the distance "L22" of the setting key CK when the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151. The protrusion width of the portion protruding from the setting key insertion opening 151 is configured to be larger than "L21".
Therefore, when the front door 12 is closed while the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151, the rear end of the setting key CK (the end on the side of the front door 12) does not touch the sub board case 80a. Therefore, the portion of the setting key CK protruding from the setting key insertion opening 151 is accommodated between the entrance of the setting key insertion opening 151 and the sub-board case 80a.
Therefore, the front door 12 can be closed while the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151 .

Here, after changing or confirming settings, the user may forget to remove the setting key CK from the setting key insertion slot 151 and close the front door 12 .
At this time, if the distance "L22" from the entrance of the setting key insertion opening 151 to the sub board case 80a is smaller than the projecting width "L21" of the portion of the setting key CK projecting from the setting key insertion opening 151, the setting key insertion opening When the front door 12 is closed with the setting key CK inserted in 151, the rear end of the setting key CK (the end on the front door 12 side) comes into contact with the sub board case 80a, causing the setting key cylinder 150 and the sub board case 80a to contact. The board case 80a and the like may be damaged.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance "L22" from the entrance of the setting key insertion opening 151 to the sub board case 80a is made larger than the projecting width "L21" of the portion of the setting key CK projecting from the setting key insertion opening 151. ing.
As a result, even if the front door 12 is closed while the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151, the rear end of the setting key CK (the end on the side of the front door 12) does not come into contact with the sub board case 80a. It is possible to prevent the setting key cylinder 150, the sub-board case 80a, and the like from being damaged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the setting key CK inserted in the setting key insertion opening 151 is slid and removed from the setting key insertion opening 151 with the front door 12 closed.
FIG. 227 shows that with the front door 12 closed, a space necessary for the setting key CK inserted in the setting key insertion opening 151 to slide and move out of the setting key insertion opening 151 is provided. 1 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine 10. FIG. In the drawing, only the cabinet 13, the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, the motor drive board 34, the image display device 23, and the frame member 515 are shown hatched.
As shown in FIG. 227, the total length of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction is assumed to be "L01".
Similarly to FIG. 226, when the front door 12 is closed, the distance from the entrance of the setting key insertion opening 151 to the sub board case 80a is defined as "L22".

The thirteenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "L01<L22".
That is, the distance "L22" from the entrance of the setting key insertion opening 151 to the sub-board case 80a when the front door 12 is closed is configured to be larger than the total length "L01" of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction.
As a result, when the front door 12 is closed while the setting key CK is inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151, when the setting key CK is slid rearward (toward the front door 12), a The setting key CK can be removed from the setting key insertion opening 151 before the end (the end on the front door 12 side) contacts the sub-board case 80a.
When the front door 12 is closed, the setting key CK inserted in the setting key insertion opening 151 slides into the space from the entrance of the setting key insertion opening 151 to the sub-board case 80a. It becomes a space necessary for exiting from the mouth 151 .

As described above, the front door 12 may be closed without removing the setting key CK from the setting key insertion opening 151 after changing or confirming the setting.
However, if the user forgets to remove the setting key CK from the setting key insertion slot 151 and closes the front door 12 while the setting key CK is still inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151, the gap between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 may be opened. There is a possibility that a wire may be inserted to turn the setting key CK with the wire to turn on the setting key switch 152 to shift to the setting change state to change the set value.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance "L22" from the entrance of the setting key insertion opening 151 to the sub-board case 80a is made larger than the total length "L01" of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction, so that the setting key CK slides. A necessary space is provided for moving and exiting from the setting key insertion opening 151 .

As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally operate the setting key CK with the wire inserted through the gap between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13, if the setting key CK fails, the setting key CK slides rearward (toward the front door 12). , the setting key CK can be pulled out from the setting key insertion opening 151 . Then, the setting key CK coming out of the setting key insertion opening 151 falls downward inside the cabinet 13 . Then, it is difficult to pick up the setting key CK with the wire inserted through the gap between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 and insert it into the setting key insertion opening 151 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of changing setting values.

Next, referring to FIG. 228, how the setting key CK coming out of the setting key insertion opening 151 falls downward inside the cabinet 13 will be described.
FIG. 228 is a side view of the slot machine 10 showing that the height from the upper end of the pattern display device 14 (reel unit 14) to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening 151 is greater than the total length of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction. is a partial cross-sectional view). In the drawing, only the cabinet 13, the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, the motor drive board 34, the image display device 23, and the frame member 515 are hatched.
As in FIG. 227, the total length of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction is assumed to be "L01".
Also, as shown in FIG. 228, the height from the upper end of the motor board case 34a to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening 151 is defined as "L23".

The thirteenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "L01<L23".
That is, the height "L23" from the upper end of the motor board case 34a to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening 151 is configured to be larger than the total length "L01" of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction.
As a result, when the setting key CK is slid rearward (toward the front door 12 ) and comes out of the setting key insertion opening 151 , the setting key CK that has come out of the setting key insertion opening 151 is pushed out of the cabinet 13 . can be made to fall downward inside the

As described above, if the wire inserted through the gap between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 fails to operate the setting key CK, the setting key CK slides backward and the setting key CK becomes the setting key. It is designed to come out from the insertion port 151 .
However, if the height from the upper end of the motor board case 34a to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening 151 is smaller than the total length of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction, the slid setting key CK is supported by the upper surface of the motor board case 34a. As a result, the setting key CK may not fall out of the setting key insertion opening 151 .

Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the height "L23" from the upper end of the motor board case 34a to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening 151 is made larger than the total length "L01" of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction. The setting key CK which has been set is pulled out from the setting key insertion opening 151 and falls downward inside the cabinet 13. - 特許庁Then, as described above, the setting key CK that has slipped out of the setting key insertion opening 151 and dropped down inside the cabinet 13 is picked up by the wire inserted through the gap between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13, and the setting key is inserted. Insertion into the mouth 151 is difficult. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of changing setting values.

In FIG. 228, the motor board case 34a housing the motor drive board 34 is fixed to the upper surface of the reel case 601 of the symbol display device 14 (reel unit 14). The substrate 34 and the motor substrate case 34a are sometimes referred to as the symbol display device 14 (reel unit 14). That is, when the reel case 601 and the motor board case 34a containing the motor drive board 34 are integrated, the symbol display device 14 (reel unit 14) including the motor drive board 34 and the motor board case 34a can be integrated. There are cases where it is called. In this case, the upper end of the pattern display device 14 (reel unit 14) means the upper surface of the motor board case 34a.

228, the motor board case 34a housing the motor drive board 34 is fixed to the upper surface of the reel case 601 of the pattern display device 14 (reel unit 14). There is also a case where the motor board case 34a containing the board 34 is not fixed. In this case, the upper end of the pattern display device 14 (reel unit 14 ) means the upper surface of the reel case 601 . In this case, the height from the upper end of the reel case 601 to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening 151 is defined as "L23", and the height from the upper end of the reel case 601 to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening 151 is defined as "L23". The total length of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction is made larger than "L01". As a result, when the setting key CK slides backward and comes out of the setting key insertion opening 151, the setting key CK coming out of the setting key insertion opening 151 can drop downward inside the cabinet 13. .

Next, referring to FIG. 229, it will be described how the setting key CK coming out of the setting key insertion slot 151 falls (passes through) between the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 (reel unit 14). .
FIG. 229 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine 10 showing that the distance between the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 (reel unit 14) is greater than the thickness of the setting key CK. be. In the drawing, only the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13, the main control board 50, the motor drive board 34, and the frame member 515 are shown by hatching.
As shown in FIG. 229, the thickness of the setting key CK is assumed to be "L03".
Also, the thickness of the door key DK is assumed to be "L13".
Further, the rearmost portion of the symbol display device 14 (reel unit 14) (referred to as "the rearmost part of the symbol display device" or "the rearmost part of the reel unit") is defined as "P01".
Further, the portion of the back plate 13b closest to the rearmost part of the pattern display device "P01" (referred to as "the nearest part of the pattern display device" or "the nearest part of the reel unit") is defined as "P02".
Also, the distance between the last part of the pattern display device "P01" and the nearest part of the pattern display device "P02" of the back plate 13b is "L24".
The thirteenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "L03<L24" and "L13<L24".

Here, the rearmost portion of the symbol display device (reel unit rearmost portion) “P01” means the rearmost portion of the symbol display device 14 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the rear surface of the reel case 601 is the rearmost portion of the pattern display device 14 . Therefore, the rearmost part of the pattern display device “P01” means the rear surface of the reel case 601 . That is, the rear surface of the reel case 601 is the rearmost part of the pattern display device "P01". If the back surface of the reel case 601 is a plane in the vertical direction, the entire back surface of the reel case 601 becomes the rearmost part of the pattern display device "P01". Furthermore, if the back surface of the reel case 601 is not flat but curved, the most rearward projecting portion of the back surface of the reel case 601 becomes the rearmost part of the pattern display device "P01".

Also, the symbol display device nearest portion (reel unit nearest portion) “P02” means the portion of the back plate 13b closest to the symbol display device rearmost portion (reel unit rearmost portion) “P01”. That is, of the parts of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13, the part closest to the rearmost part "P01" of the pattern display device is referred to as the nearest part "P02" of the pattern display device.
Furthermore, the space between the rearmost part of the pattern display device "P01" and the nearest part of the pattern display device "P02" of the back plate 13b means the narrowest part between the pattern display device 14 and the back plate 13b.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the distance "L24" between the rearmost part "P01" of the pattern display device and the nearest part "P02" of the pattern display device of the back plate 13b is larger than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK. , and larger than the thickness "L13" of the door key DK.

That is, the distance between the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 and the design display device 14 is greater than the thickness of the setting key CK "L03" and further than the thickness "L13" of the door key DK.
As a result, the setting key CK that has fallen out of the setting key insertion opening 151 can be prevented from being caught between the pattern display device 14 and the back panel 13b.
Further, the setting key CK and the door key DK are sometimes bound together by a metal ring or the like, but the setting key CK and the door key DK are not caught between the pattern display device 14 and the back plate 13b. can be made

Here, when the distance "L24" between the rearmost part "P01" of the pattern display device and the nearest part "P02" of the pattern display device is smaller (narrower) than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK, the setting key insertion opening There is a possibility that the setting key CK which has fallen out of the 151 and fallen downward may be caught between the pattern display device 14 and the back panel 13b. If the setting key CK is caught between the pattern display device 14 and the back plate 13b, the pattern display device 14 and the back plate 13b may be damaged. The same is true for the door key DK.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance "L24" between the rearmost part "P01" of the pattern display device and the nearest part "P02" of the pattern display device is made larger than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK. The setting key CK is prevented from being caught between the pattern display device 14 and the back plate 13b, and the setting key CK dropped downward through the setting key insertion port 151 is inserted between the pattern display device 14 and the back plate 13b. It is designed to fall (pass through). As a result, damage to the pattern display device 14 and the back plate 13b can be prevented. The same is true for the door key DK.

Next, based on FIG. 230, the setting key CK coming out of the setting key insertion opening 151 falls (passes through) between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 (reel unit 14), and Falling between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 will be described.
230, the space between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the design display device 14 is larger than the thickness of the setting key CK, and the space between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the design display device 14 is the distance between the setting key CK. Fig. 2 is a front view of the interior of the cabinet 13 of the slot machine 10 shown apart from the thickness;

Similarly to FIG. 229, the thickness of the setting key CK is assumed to be "L03".
Also, the thickness of the door key DK is assumed to be "L13".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 230, the distance between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 is "L25".
Further, the distance between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 is defined as "L26".
In the thirteenth embodiment, "L03<L25", "L03<L26", "L13<L25" and "L13<L26" are satisfied.

That is, the distance "L25" between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 is larger (wider) than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK and larger than the thickness "L13" of the door key DK ( broadly) configured.
Further, the distance "L26" between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 is larger (wider) than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK and larger than the thickness "L13" of the door key DK ( broadly) configured.

That is, the distance between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the design display device 14 is greater than the thickness of the setting key CK "L03" and further than the thickness "L13" of the door key DK.
Also, the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the design display device 14 are separated from each other by the thickness of the setting key CK "L03" and by the thickness "L13" of the door key DK.
As a result, the setting key CK that has fallen out of the setting key insertion opening 151 can be prevented from being caught between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14. It is also possible to avoid being caught between the left side plate 13f and the pattern display device 14. - 特許庁
Further, like the setting key CK, the door key DK can also be prevented from being caught between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14, and can be prevented from being caught between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device. 14 can also be avoided.

Here, if the distance "L25" between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 is smaller (narrower) than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK, the setting key CK is pulled out of the setting key insertion opening 151 and downward. There is a risk that the dropped setting key CK will be caught between the right side plate 13 e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 . If the setting key CK is caught between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14, the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 may be damaged. The same is true for the door key DK.
Similarly, when the distance "L26" between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 is smaller (narrower) than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK, the setting key CK is pulled out of the setting key insertion opening 151 and downwardly. There is a possibility that the dropped setting key CK may be caught between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14. - 特許庁If the setting key CK is caught between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14, the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 may be damaged. The same is true for the door key DK.

Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance "L25" between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 is made larger than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK. and the pattern display device 14 so that the setting key CK that has fallen out of the setting key insertion slot 151 is placed between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14. It is designed to fall (pass through). As a result, the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 can be prevented from being damaged. The same is true for the door key DK.

Similarly, by making the distance "L26" between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 larger than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK, the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 so that the setting key CK is not caught between the setting key insertion opening 151 and falls downward (passes through) between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14. I'm trying As a result, the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 can be prevented from being damaged. The same is true for the door key DK.
In FIG. 230, the distance between the right side plate 13e and the pattern display device 14 and between the left side plate 13f and the pattern display device 14 is greater than the thickness of the setting key CK. Only the display device 14 may be spaced from the setting key CK, and only the left side plate 13f and the pattern display device 14 may be spaced from the setting key CK.

Next, based on FIGS. 231 and 232, the setting key CK coming out of the setting key insertion opening 151 is prevented from entering the inside of the reel 31 from between the gap cover 607 and the reel 31 will be described.
231 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine 10 showing that the setting key CK is configured not to enter between the clearance cover 607 and the reel 31. FIG. In the drawing, only the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13, the main control board 50, the motor drive board 34, and the frame member 515 are shown by hatching.
FIG. 232 is a plan view (partial cross-sectional view) of the symbol display device 14 (reel unit 14) showing that the setting key CK is not inserted between the gap cover 607 and the reel 31. is. In the figure, only the reel case 601, reel frame 605, and gap cover 607 are indicated by hatching.

Here, the structures of the symbol display device 14 and the reels 31 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 231 and 232. FIG.
The pattern display device 14 has a box-shaped reel case 601 whose front side is open.
Also, "three" reel brackets 604 are fixed inside the reel case 601, motors 32 are fixed to the respective reel brackets 604, and reels 31 are fixed to the rotating shafts 32a of the motors 32, respectively.
In addition to the motor 32, each reel bracket 604 is fixed with a reel sensor 33, a back lamp unit, and the like.
In FIG. 231, illustration of the reel bracket 604, motor 32, reel sensor 33, back lamp unit, etc. is omitted, and in FIG. 232, illustration of the reel sensor 33, back lamp unit, etc. is omitted.

The reel 31 has a reel frame 605 as its skeleton and a strip-shaped reel tape 606 on which a pattern is displayed.
The reel frame 605 includes a hub 605a fixed to the rotating shaft 32a of the motor 32, a plurality of spokes 605c radially extending outward from the hub 605a, and an annular first ring supported at the tip of each spoke 605c. It comprises a first rim 605b and an annular second rim 60e arranged parallel to the first rim 605b.
One side edge of the reel tape 606 is attached to the outer circumference of the first rim 605b, and the other side edge (opposite to the first rim 605b) is attached to the outer circumference of the second rim 605e. It is Thereby, the reel tape 606 is cylindrical.
The second rim 605e is not connected to the hub 605a or the spokes 605c, but is supported by the reel tape 606 and arranged parallel to the first rim 605b.
231, illustration of the hub 605a, the spokes 605c, etc. is omitted.

The symbol display device 14 also has a gap cover 607 that hides the gap between the adjacent reels 31. - 特許庁
As shown in FIG. 230, a gap cover 607 is provided between the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31, and a gap cover 607 is also provided between the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31. .
Further, as shown in FIG. 231, the gap cover 607 is formed in an arcuate shape along the curves of the inner surfaces of the first rim 605b and the second rim 605e of the reel frame 605. As shown in FIG.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 232, a gap cover 607 is provided at the front end of the reel bracket 604 .
Since the gap cover 607 is provided at the front end of each reel bracket 604, the gap cover 607 is also provided on the left side of the left reel 31 as shown in FIG.

Similarly to FIG. 229, the thickness of the setting key CK is assumed to be "L03".
Also, the thickness of the door key DK is assumed to be "L13".
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the distance between the gap cover 607 and the reel 31 is defined as "L27".
More specifically, the distance between the outer surface of the gap cover 607 (the outer surface of the curve) and the inner surface of the first rim 605b or the second rim 605e of the reel frame 605 (the inner surface of the curve) is "L27 ”.
The thirteenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "L03>L27" and "L13>L27".
That is, the distance "L27" between the gap cover 607 and the reel 31 is smaller (narrower) than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK and smaller (narrower) than the thickness "L13" of the door key DK. there is

As a result, the setting key CK that has fallen out of the setting key insertion opening 151 can be prevented from entering the inside of the reel 31 from between the clearance cover 607 and the reel 31 .
Furthermore, the door key DK can also be prevented from entering inside the reel 31 from between the gap cover 607 and the reel 31, like the setting key CK.
Here, if the distance “L27” between the gap cover 607 and the reel 31 is larger (wider) than the thickness “L03” of the setting key CK, the setting key CK that has fallen out of the setting key insertion slot 151 and has fallen downward is However, there is a risk that it may enter inside the reel 31 from between the gap cover 607 and the reel 31 .

Since the motor 32, the reel sensor 33, the back lamp unit, etc. are provided inside the reel 31, when the setting key CK enters the inside of the reel 31 from between the clearance cover 607 and the reel 31, , the motor 32 and the reel sensor 33 may be damaged. The same is true for the door key DK.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance "L27" between the gap cover 607 and the reel 31 is set to be smaller (narrower) than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK. The setting key CK is prevented from entering the inside of the reel 31 through the gap. As a result, damage to the motor 32, the reel sensor 33, and the like can be prevented. The same is true for the door key DK.

Next, referring to FIG. 233, how the setting key CK coming out of the setting key insertion opening 151 falls (passes through) between the display window 18 and the reel 31 will be described.
FIG. 233 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine 10 showing that the display window 18 and the reels 31 are separated from each other by the thickness of the setting key CK. In the drawing, only the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13, the main control board 50, the motor drive board 34, and the frame member 515 are shown by hatching.
Similarly to FIG. 229, the thickness of the setting key CK is assumed to be "L03".
Also, although not shown in FIG. 233, the thickness of the door key DK is assumed to be "L13".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 233, the frontmost portion of the reel 31 (referred to as the "reel foremost portion") is designated as "P03".
Further, the part of the display window 18 closest to the reel foremost part "P03" (referred to as "reel nearest part") is defined as "P04".
Also, the distance between the reel foremost part "P03" of the reel 31 and the reel nearest part "P04" of the display window 18 is "L28".
The thirteenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "L03<L28" and "L13<L28".

Here, the reel foremost part “P03” means the part located at the most front of the reel 31 when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front.
Of the two points of intersection between the horizontal line passing through the rotating shaft 32a of the motor 32 and the reel tape 606, the point of intersection on the display window 18 side is the reel frontmost portion "P03".
Also, the reel nearest portion “P04” means the portion of the display window 18 that is closest to the reel foremost portion “P03”. That is, of the parts of the display window 18, the part closest to the reel frontmost part "P03" is referred to as the reel nearest part "P04".

Further, the space between the reel foremost part "P03" of the reel 31 and the reel nearest part "P04" of the display window 18 means the narrowest place between the reel foremost part "P03" of the reel 31 and the display window 18. do.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the distance "L28" between the reel foremost part "P03" of the reel 31 and the reel nearest part "P04" of the display window 18 is larger than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK. Moreover, it is configured to be larger than the thickness "L13" of the door key DK.
That is, the distance between the reel 31 and the display window 18 is more than the thickness of the setting key CK "L03" and more than the thickness "L13" of the door key DK.
As a result, the setting key CK that has dropped out of the setting key insertion opening 151 can be prevented from being caught between the reel 31 and the display window 18 .
Further, the setting key CK and the door key DK are sometimes bundled together with a metal ring or the like. can do.

Here, if the distance “L28” between the reel frontmost portion “P03” and the reel nearest portion “P04” is smaller (narrower) than the thickness “L03” of the setting key CK, the There is a risk that the setting key CK that has fallen downward will be caught between the reel 31 and the display window 18 . If the setting key CK is caught between the reel 31 and the display window 18, the reel 31 and the display window 18 may be damaged. The same is true for the door key DK.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the distance "L28" between the reel foremost part "P03" and the reel nearest part "P04" is made larger than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK, so that the reel 31 is displayed. The setting key CK is prevented from being caught between the setting key CK and the window 18, and the setting key CK dropped downward through the setting key insertion opening 151 falls (passes through) between the reel 31 and the display window 18.例文帳に追加there is As a result, damage to the reel 31 and the display window 18 can be prevented. The same is true for the door key DK.

Note that the distance between the rear end of the upper frame portion 515a of the frame-shaped member 515 and the reel 31 is also greater than the thickness "P03" of the setting key CK.
Further, the distance between the rear end of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515 and the reel 31 is also greater than the thickness "P03" of the setting key CK.
Therefore, the setting key CK that has fallen out of the setting key insertion opening 151 first passes between the rear end of the upper frame portion 515a of the frame-like member 515 and the reel 31, and then passes through the display window 18 and the reel 31. It passes between the reel 31 and finally passes between the rear end of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515 and the reel 31 and falls downward. The same is true for the door key DK.

Next, based on FIG. 234, the reason why the setting key CK is not placed on the lower frame portion 515b of the frame member 515 will be described.
234, the width of the rearward protrusion of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515 is narrower than "1/2" of the width of the setting key CK in the lateral direction, and the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515 is shown in FIG. A side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine 10 showing that the center of gravity G of the setting key CK is located behind the rear end of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515 when the setting key CK is placed on the ). In the drawing, only the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13, the main control board 50, the motor drive board 34, and the frame member 515 are shown by hatching.
Here, "rear" means the rear when the slot machine 10 is viewed from the front.
As shown in FIG. 234, the width of the setting key CK in the lateral direction is assumed to be "L02".
Although not shown in FIG. 234, the width of the door key DK in the lateral direction is assumed to be "L12".
Also, as shown in FIG. 234, the rearward projection width of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame member 515 is defined as "L29".
The thirteenth embodiment is configured to satisfy "L02/2>L29" and "L12/2>L29".

That is, the rearward projection width “L29” of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515 is smaller (narrower) than “1/2” of the width “L02” of the setting key CK in the lateral direction, and the width of the door key DK. It is configured to be smaller (narrower) than "1/2" of the width "L12" in the lateral direction.
Further, when the setting key CK is placed on the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515, the center of gravity G of the setting key CK is located behind the rear end of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515. FIG. Therefore, even if the setting key CK is placed on the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515, the setting key CK is not stabilized and falls downward from the rear end side of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515.
Furthermore, when the door key DK is placed on the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515, the center of gravity G of the door key DK is located behind the rear end of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515. FIG. Therefore, even if the door key DK is placed on the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515, the door key DK is not stabilized and falls downward from the rear end side of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515.

As a result, when the setting key CK that has fallen out of the setting key insertion opening 151 passes through between the reel 31 and the display window 18 and reaches the lower frame portion 515b of the frame member 515, the setting key CK can be made to drop downward from the rear end side of the lower frame portion 515b without remaining on the lower frame portion 515b.
Similarly, when the door key DK that has fallen down together with the setting key CK passes through between the reel 31 and the display window 18 and reaches the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-like member 515, the door key DK falls off the lower frame portion 515b. Instead of remaining on the top, it can be made to drop downward from the rear end side of the lower frame portion 515b.

Here, the rearward projecting width “L29” of the lower frame portion 515b is larger than (wider) than “1/2” of the width “L02” of the setting key CK in the short side direction. There is a possibility that the setting key CK that has passed through and reached the lower frame portion 515b will remain on the lower frame portion 515b.
When the setting key CK is resting on the lower frame portion 515b, the setting key CK can be seen from the front side of the slot machine 10 through the display window 18, so that the front door 12 is forced open and the setting key CK is exposed. It may be stolen. The same is true for the door key DK.

Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the rearward projection width "L29" of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515 is made smaller than "1/2" of the width "L02" of the setting key CK in the short direction. )are doing. As a result, when the setting key CK is placed on the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515, the center of gravity G of the setting key CK is located behind the rear end of the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515. I have to. Therefore, even if the setting key CK which has fallen out of the setting key insertion opening 151 and has fallen downward passes through between the reel 31 and the display window 18 and reaches the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-like member 515, the setting key CK is does not remain on the lower frame portion 515b but falls downward from the rear end side of the lower frame portion 515b, so that the setting key CK can be prevented from staying at a position visible through the display window 18.例文帳に追加The same is true for the door key DK.

Next, based on FIG. 235 and FIG. 236, it will be described how the setting key CK dropped out of the setting key insertion opening 151 does not come into contact with the power supply unit 11a.
FIG. 235 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) of the slot machine 10 showing the relationship between the setting key insertion slot 151 and the power supply unit 11a. In the drawing, only the cabinet 13, the reel base 13g, the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, the motor drive board 34, the image display device 23, and the frame member 515 are hatched.
FIG. 236 is a plan view (partially sectional view) of the slot machine 10 showing the relationship between the setting key insertion slot 151 and the power supply unit 11a. In the drawing, only the cabinet 13 is indicated by hatching.
As described above, the setting key CK removed from the setting key insertion slot 151 is located between the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 (reel unit 14), and between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14. , or between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14, and falls downward.

A power supply unit 11a is arranged on the bottom plate 13a inside the cabinet 13 . The power supply unit 11a includes a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, and the like, and a power switch 11 (FIG. 208) that is operated to turn on/off the power. ing.
Here, if the setting key CK passed through the setting key insertion opening 151 and passed between the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 comes into contact with the power supply unit 11a, the electricity will be short-circuited, causing various control boards to malfunction or cause a fire. may occur.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, a reel base 13g is provided between the setting key insertion slot 151 and the power supply unit 11a as a shielding member that prevents the setting key CK from contacting the power supply unit 11a.

The right end of the reel base 13g extends to the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and is supported by the right side plate 13e.
The left end of the reel base 13g extends to the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and is supported by the left side plate 13f.
Furthermore, the rear end of the reel base 13g reaches the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 and is supported by this back plate 13b.
In this manner, the interior of the cabinet 13 is vertically partitioned by the reel base 13g.
Inside the cabinet 13, the setting key insertion slot 151 is arranged on the upper side partitioned by the reel base 13g, and the power supply unit 11a is arranged on the lower side partitioned by the reel base 13g.

Therefore, the setting key CK that has passed through the setting key insertion opening 151 and passed between the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14 drops onto the reel base 13g and does not contact the power supply unit 11a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent electric short-circuits, failure of various control boards, and occurrence of fires.
Instead of being shielded by the reel base 13g, for example, a shielding member separate from the reel base 13g is provided between the setting key insertion opening 151 and the power supply unit 11a. The removed setting key CK may be prevented from contacting the power supply unit 11a.

Next, based on FIG. 237, the prevention of the setting key CK from being caught between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 will be described.
FIG. 237 shows that the gap between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 on the side of the hinge 520 is smaller than the entire longitudinal length of the setting key CK when the front door 12 is fully open, and when the front door 12 is closed. FIG. 4 is a plan view (partially cross-sectional view) of the slot machine 10 showing that the gap between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 is smaller than the thickness of the setting key CK. In the drawing, only the cabinet 13 is indicated by hatching.

As shown in FIG. 237, the total length of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction is assumed to be "L01".
Also, the thickness of the setting key CK is assumed to be "L03".
Furthermore, the total length of the door key DK in the longitudinal direction is assumed to be "L11".
Further, the thickness of the door key DK is assumed to be "L13".
Further, when the front door 12 is fully open, the gap between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 on the hinge 520 side is defined as "L30".
Furthermore, when the front door 12 is closed, the gap between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 is defined as "L31".

In the thirteenth embodiment, "L01>L30", "L11>L30", "L03>L31" and "L13>L31" are satisfied.
That is, when the front door 12 is fully opened, the gap "L30" between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 on the side of the hinge 520 is smaller (narrower) than the total length "L01" of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction, and the door key It is configured to be smaller than the total length "L11" of the DK in the longitudinal direction.
As a result, when the front door 12 is fully open and the setting key CK falls on the side of the hinge 520, the setting key CK is placed between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 with the longitudinal side of the setting key CK facing forward and backward. You can keep it out of the way.

Here, when the gap “L30” between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 on the side of the hinge 520 when the front door 12 is fully open is larger than (wider) the total length “L01” of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction, the front door 12 is fully opened, the setting key CK may fall between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 with the longitudinal side of the setting key CK facing forward and backward. be. If the front door 12 is closed without noticing this, the front door 12, the cabinet 13, and the setting key CK may be damaged.

Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the gap "L30" between the front door 12 on the hinge 520 side and the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is fully opened is made smaller (narrower) than the total length "L01" in the longitudinal direction of the setting key CK. ) prevents the setting key CK from entering between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 with the longitudinal side of the setting key CK facing forward and backward. As a result, damage to the front door 12, the cabinet 13, and the setting key CK can be prevented.

The door key DK is similar to the setting key CK. That is, the gap "L30" between the front door 12 on the hinge 520 side and the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is fully opened is made smaller than the total longitudinal length "L11" of the door key DK. As a result, the door key DK can be prevented from entering between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 with the longitudinal side of the door key DK directed forward and backward, and eventually the front door 12, the cabinet 13 and the door key DK are damaged. can be prevented.

Further, the gap "L31" between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed is smaller (narrower) than the thickness "L03" of the setting key CK and the thickness "K13" of the door key DK. ” is configured smaller (narrower).
As a result, when the front door 12 is closed without noticing that the setting key CK is dropped between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13, the front door 12 is not completely closed, so the setting key CK is dropped. It can make you aware of what is going on.

The door key DK is similar to the setting key CK. That is, the gap "L31" between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13 when the front door 12 is closed is made smaller than the thickness "L13" of the door key DK. As a result, when the front door 12 is closed without noticing that the door key DK is dropped between the front door 12 and the cabinet 13, the front door 12 can be prevented from being completely closed. It can be made aware that the door key DK is dropped.

Although the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In the thirteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 212, the main control board 50 and the start switch 41 are directly connected by the harness HN01 (start switch harness). may be connected.
Also, the main control board 50 and the stop switch 42 are directly connected by the harness HN02 (stop switch harness), but they may be connected via another control board (relay board).

In this way, the main control board 50 and the gaming peripherals can be directly connected by harnesses without passing through another control board (relay board), or can be connected via another control board (relay board). You can also connect.
Similarly, the sub-control board 80 and the performance peripheral device can be directly connected by a harness without going through another control board (relay board), or can be connected via another control board (relay board). You can also

(2) In the thirteenth embodiment, the number of lead wires LW01 constituting the harness HN01 (start switch harness) is set to "3", but the number of lead wires LW01 constituting the harness HN01 is not limited to "3". It can be set as appropriate.
(3) In the thirteenth embodiment, the number of lead wires LW02 constituting the harness HN02 (stop switch harness) is "9", but the number of lead wires LW02 constituting the harness HN02 is not limited to "9". It can be set as appropriate.

(4) In the thirteenth embodiment, when the lever-shaped operating body is not operated (not pushed down), the detection piece is positioned between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of the start switch 41. , the light emitted from the light-emitting portion is blocked by the detection piece and does not reach the light-receiving portion, and the start switch 41 is turned off. In addition, when the lever-shaped operation body is operated (pushed down), the detection piece is no longer positioned between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion. , and the start switch 41 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the lever-shaped operating body is not operated, the detection piece is not positioned between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion, and when the lever-shaped operating body is operated. Alternatively, the detection piece may be positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. In this case, when the light emitted from the light emitting portion reaches the light receiving portion, the start switch 41 is turned off, and when the light emitted from the light emitting portion stops reaching the light receiving portion, the start switch 41 is turned on. state.

(5) In the thirteenth embodiment, the detection piece is positioned between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion when the push-button-like operation body is not operated (not pushed) for the stop switch 42. At this time, the light emitted from the light-emitting portion is blocked by the detection piece and does not reach the light-receiving portion, and the stop switch 42 is turned off. In addition, when the push button-shaped operating body is operated (pushed), the detection piece is no longer positioned between the light emitting part and the light receiving part, and the light emitted from the light emitting part is received at this time. , and the stop switch 42 is turned on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the push-button-shaped operating body is not operated, the detection piece is not positioned between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion, and the push-button-shaped operating body is operated. In the state, the detection piece may be positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. In this case, the stop switch 42 is turned off when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion reaches the light-receiving portion. Also, when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion stops reaching the light-receiving portion, the stop switch 42 is turned on.

(6) In the thirteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 213, the motor drive board 34 and the "3" motors 32 are directly connected by harnesses HN03, but are connected via another control board (relay board). may be connected.
Although the motor drive board 34 and the "3" reel sensors 33 are directly connected by the harness HN04, they may be connected via another control board (relay board).
Furthermore, in FIG. 213 , the main control board 50 and the “3” motors 32 are connected via the motor drive board 34 , but the main control board 50 and the “3” motors 32 are connected without the motor drive board 34 . The individual motors 32 may be directly connected by harnesses.
Furthermore, in FIG. 213, the main control board 50 and the "3" reel sensors 33 are connected via the motor drive board 34, but the main control board 50 and the "3" reel sensors 33 are connected without the motor drive board 34. The reel sensor 33 may be directly connected with a harness.

(7) In the thirteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. Instead, the main control board 50 and the “3” stop switch lamps 511 may be directly connected by harnesses.
(8) In the thirteenth embodiment, when a plurality of stop switches 42 are detected to be ON at the same time, the order of priority for stopping the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to which stop switch 42 is set in advance from left → middle → Although they are set in the right order, they are not limited to this. For example, the order of priority can be set in the order of left→right→middle or in the order of middle→right→left.

(9) In the thirteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 228, the motor board case 34a housing the motor drive board 34 is fixed to the upper surface of the reel case 601 of the pattern display device 14 (reel unit 14). In some cases, the motor board case 34a housing the motor drive board 34 is not fixed to the upper surface of the reel case 601. FIG.
In this case, the upper end of the pattern display device 14 (reel unit 14 ) means the upper surface of the reel case 601 . In this case, the height from the upper end of the reel case 601 to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening 151 is defined as "L23", and the height from the upper end of the reel case 601 to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening 151 is defined as "L23". The total length of the setting key CK in the longitudinal direction is made larger than "L01". As a result, when the setting key CK slides backward and comes out of the setting key insertion opening 151, the setting key CK coming out of the setting key insertion opening 151 can drop downward inside the cabinet 13. .

(10) In the thirteenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 230, between the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14, and between the left side plate 13f of the cabinet 13 and the pattern display device 14, It is separated from the thickness of the setting key CK.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 and the design display device 14 may be spaced apart from the thickness of the setting key CK. It may be separated from the thickness of the setting key CK only during

(11) In the thirteenth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, a reel base 13g as a shielding member is provided between the setting key insertion opening 151 and the power supply unit 11a. The setting key CK coming out of the key insertion port 151 is prevented from coming into contact with the power supply unit 11a.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of providing the reel base 13g, a dedicated shielding member may be provided between the setting key insertion opening 151 and the power supply unit 11a. The setting key CK may be prevented from contacting the power supply unit 11a.

(12) In the thirteenth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the setting key cylinder 150 , the setting key insertion opening 151 , the setting key switch 152 and the setting change (reset) switch 153 may be provided on a control board different from the main control board 50 .

In the thirteenth embodiment, the main board case 50a is fixed at a position corresponding to the upper side of the pattern display device 14 on the front surface of the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13 (the inner surface of the cabinet 13). The main control board 50 is housed inside 50a. A setting key cylinder 150 , a setting key insertion opening 151 , a setting key switch 152 and a setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on the main control board 50 .
However, the present invention is not limited to this. (inside surface of cabinet 13), it may be attached at a position corresponding to the upper side of the pattern display device 14, or on the left side surface of the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 (inside surface of the cabinet 13), the pattern display device. It may be attached at a position corresponding to above 14 .

Further, for example, the setting key cylinder 150, the setting key insertion slot 151, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are provided on a control board different from the main control board 50, and this control board is installed in the cabinet 13. It may be attached to a position corresponding to the upper side of the pattern display device 14 on the right side of the left side plate 13f (the inner side of the cabinet 13), or the left side of the right side plate 13e of the cabinet 13 (the inner side of the cabinet 13). surface) above the pattern display device 14. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, this control board may be attached to a position above the pattern display device 14 on the rear surface of the front door 12 (the inner surface of the cabinet 13).
The front door 12 can be closed with the setting key CK inserted into the setting key insertion opening 151 regardless of the positions of the setting key cylinder 150, the setting key insertion opening 151, and the setting key switch 152. Furthermore, a space necessary for the setting key CK to slide and escape from the setting key insertion opening 151 is provided with the front door 12 closed.

(13) In the thirteenth embodiment, the slot machine 10 is used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a game medium, medal-less gaming machines (also called "smart slots") that use electronic information (electronic medals, electronic gaming media) instead of physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines , the present invention can be applied.
(14) The various modifications shown in the first to thirteenth embodiments and the first to thirteenth embodiments are not limited to being implemented independently, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate. is.

<Appendix>
Among the inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification, etc. of the present application, the thirteenth embodiment includes, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 17. Note that the reference numerals of the corresponding embodiments are shown in parentheses.
1. Original invention 1
The original invention 1 (thirteenth embodiment) is
a plurality of reels (31);
a start switch (41) operated when starting rotation of each reel;
a stop switch (42) operated when stopping the rotation of each reel;
a main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
a stop switch harness (harness HN02) for electrical connection of the stop switch;
The stop switch harness has a plurality of lead wires (lead wire LW02),
Even if the electrical connection of at least one lead wire among the plurality of lead wires constituting the stop switch harness is cut while the gaming machine is powered on and the reels are stopped. , neither error judgment nor error notification is performed (“X02” in FIG. 215),
In a state in which at least one of the lead wires constituting the stop switch harness is electrically disconnected and in a state in which a specified number of game values (medals) have been bet, the start switch is turned on. When operated, the reels start spinning (“X04” to “X05” in FIG. 215),
When the electrical connection of all the lead wires that make up the stop switch harness is restored during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is maintained without error determination or error notification (“X07” in FIG. 215). )
It is characterized by

According to the original invention 1, even if the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed, and the start switch is operated in a state where the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off. When the reels start spinning. Then, when the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is recovered during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is maintained without performing error determination or error notification.
Therefore, even if the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off, it operates in the same way as when the electrical connection is not cut off, so that the player does not notice that the electrical connection has been cut off. Since the player can immediately return to the game, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

2. Original invention 2
The original invention 2 (13th embodiment) is
a plurality of reels (31);
a start switch (41) operated when starting rotation of each reel;
a stop switch (42) operated when stopping the rotation of each reel;
a main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
a stop switch harness (harness HN02) for electrical connection of the stop switch;
The stop switch harness has a plurality of lead wires (lead wire LW02),
Even if the electrical connection of at least one lead wire among the plurality of lead wires constituting the stop switch harness is cut while the gaming machine is powered on and the reels are stopped. , neither error judgment nor error notification is performed (“X22” in FIG. 216),
In a state in which at least one of the lead wires constituting the stop switch harness is electrically disconnected and in a state in which a specified number of game values (medals) have been bet, the start switch is turned on. When operated, the reels start spinning (“X24” to “X25” in FIG. 216),
When the stop switch (left stop switch 42) is turned on while the reel is rotating and the electrical connection of all the lead wires constituting the stop switch harness is restored, neither error judgment nor error notification is performed. , stops the rotation of the reel (left reel 31) corresponding to the stop switch in the ON state, and maintains the rotation of the other reels (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) (in FIG. 216, "X28" to "X30")
It is characterized by

According to the original invention 2, even if the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed, and the start switch is operated in a state where the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off. When the reels start spinning. Then, when the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is restored while the stop switch is on while the reel is rotating, the reel rotation corresponding to the stop switch in the on state is performed without error judgment or error notification. to stop.
Therefore, even if the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off, it operates in the same way as when the electrical connection is not cut off, so that the player does not notice that the electrical connection has been cut off. Since the player can immediately return to the game, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

3. Original invention 3
The original invention 3 (13th embodiment) is
a plurality of reels (31);
a start switch (41) operated when starting rotation of each reel;
a stop switch (42) operated when stopping the rotation of each reel;
a main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
a stop switch harness (harness HN02) for electrical connection of the stop switch;
The stop switch harness has a plurality of lead wires (lead wire LW02),
Even if the electrical connection of at least one lead wire among the plurality of lead wires constituting the stop switch harness is cut while the gaming machine is powered on and the reels are stopped. , neither error judgment nor error notification is performed (“X162” in FIG. 218),
In a state in which at least one of the lead wires constituting the stop switch harness is electrically disconnected and in a state in which a specified number of game values (medals) have been bet, the start switch is turned on. When operated, the reels start spinning (“X164” to “X165” in FIG. 218),
When the power is turned off while the reel is rotating (“X168” in FIG. 218) and the power is restored while the stop switch is on (“X172” in FIG. 218), error judgment and error notification are performed. 218, restart the rotation of the reels and maintain the rotation of none of the reels without stopping (“X173” to “X174” in FIG. 218),
When the electrical connection of all the lead wires constituting the stop switch harness is restored while the stop switch remains on while the reel is rotating (“X176” in FIG. 218), an error judgment is also made. Stops the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop switch in the ON state without notifying the error, and maintains the rotation of the other reels (“X177” to “X178” in FIG. 218).
It is characterized by

According to the original invention 3, even if the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed, and the start switch is operated in a state where the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off. When the reels start spinning. Further, when the power is turned off while the reel is rotating and the power is restored while the stop switch is on, the reel is restarted to rotate without error determination or error notification. Then, when the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is restored while the stop switch remains in the on state while the reel is rotating, the stop switch in the on state is responded to without performing error judgment or error notification. Stop spinning the reel.
Therefore, even if the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off, it operates in the same way as when the electrical connection is not cut off, so that the player does not notice that the electrical connection has been cut off. Since the player can immediately return to the game, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

4. Original Invention 4
The original invention 4 (13th embodiment) is
a plurality of reels (31);
a start switch (41) operated when starting rotation of each reel;
a stop switch (42) operated when stopping the rotation of each reel;
a main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
a stop switch harness (harness HN02) for electrical connection of the stop switch;
The stop switch harness has a plurality of lead wires (lead wire LW02),
Even if the electrical connection of at least one lead wire among the plurality of lead wires constituting the stop switch harness is cut while the gaming machine is powered on and the reels are stopped. , neither error judgment nor error notification is performed (“X302” in FIG. 220),
In a state in which at least one of the lead wires constituting the stop switch harness is electrically disconnected and in a state in which a specified number of game values (medals) have been bet, the start switch is turned on. When operated, the reels start spinning (“X304” to “X305” in FIG. 220),
A power interruption occurs while the reel is rotating ("X308" in FIG. 220), and the electrical connections of all the lead wires that make up the stop switch harness are restored while the stop switch is on during the power interruption ( "X313" in FIG. 220), when the power is restored while the stop switch is off ("X317" in FIG. Keep the rotation of any reel without stopping (“X318” to “X319” in FIG. 220)
It is characterized by

According to the original invention 4, even if the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed, and the start switch is operated while the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off. When the reels start spinning. When the power is cut off while the reel is rotating, the electrical connection is restored by the stop switch harness with the stop switch turned on during the power cut, and the power is restored with the stop switch turned off, The rotation of the reel is restarted without error determination or error notification.
Therefore, even if the electrical connection by the stop switch harness is cut off, it operates in the same way as when the electrical connection is not cut off, so that the player does not notice that the electrical connection has been cut off. Since the player can immediately return to the game, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

5. original invention 5
The original invention 5 (13th embodiment) is
a plurality of reels (31);
a start switch (41) operated when starting rotation of each reel;
a main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
a start switch harness (harness HN01) for electrical connection of the start switch;
The start switch harness has a plurality of lead wires (lead wire LW01),
Even if the electrical connection of at least one lead wire among the plurality of lead wires constituting the start switch harness is cut off while the gaming machine is powered on and the reels are stopped. , neither error determination nor error notification is performed (“X442” in FIG. 222),
The start switch is operated while the electrical connection of at least one lead wire among the plurality of lead wires constituting the start switch harness is disconnected and a specified number of game values are betted. When the reels do not start rotating ("X445" in FIG. 222),
When the electrical connection of all the lead wires making up the start switch harness is restored while the reels are stopped, the prescribed number of gaming values have been betted, and the start switch is on. starts reel rotation without error determination or error notification (“X450” to “X451” in FIG. 222).
It is characterized by

According to the original invention 5, even if the electrical connection by the start switch harness is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed, and the start switch is operated with the electrical connection by the start switch harness cut off. does not start spinning the reels. Then, when the electrical connection by the start switch harness is restored while the start switch is on, the reel starts rotating without performing error determination or error notification.
Therefore, even if the electrical connection by the start switch harness is cut off, it operates in the same way as when the electrical connection is not cut off. Since the game can be returned to the game immediately, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

6. original invention 6
The original invention 6 (13th embodiment) is
a plurality of reels (31);
a start switch (41) operated when starting rotation of each reel;
a main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
a start switch harness (harness HN01) for electrical connection of the start switch;
The start switch harness has a plurality of lead wires (lead wire LW01),
Even if the electrical connection of at least one lead wire among the plurality of lead wires constituting the start switch harness is cut off while the gaming machine is powered on and the reels are stopped. , neither error judgment nor error notification is performed (“X462” in FIG. 223),
A power outage occurs when at least one lead wire out of the multiple lead wires that make up the start switch harness is electrically disconnected and a specified number of gaming values have been bet (Fig. 223, "X467"), when the power is restored while the start switch is on ("X471" in FIG. 223), the reel does not start spinning,
When the electrical connection of all the lead wires that make up the start switch harness is restored while the start switch remains on while the reels are stopped and the prescribed number of gaming values have been betted. (“X473” in FIG. 223) starts reel rotation without error judgment or error notification (“X474” in FIG. 223).
It is characterized by

According to the original invention 6, even if the electrical connection by the start switch harness is cut off, neither error determination nor error notification is performed, and the power cut occurs in the state where the electrical connection by the start switch harness is cut off. Even if the power is restored while the start switch is on, the reel does not start rotating. Then, when the electrical connection by the start switch harness is recovered while the start switch remains on, the reel starts to rotate without error determination or error notification.
Therefore, even if the electrical connection by the start switch harness is cut off, it operates in the same way as when the electrical connection is not cut off. Since the game can be returned to the game immediately, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

7. original invention 7
The original invention 7 (13th embodiment) is
a plurality of reels (31);
a start switch (41) operated when starting rotation of each reel;
a main control board (50) for controlling the progress of the game;
a start switch harness (harness HN01) for electrical connection of the start switch;
The start switch harness has a plurality of lead wires (lead wire LW01),
Even if the electrical connection of at least one lead wire among the plurality of lead wires constituting the start switch harness is cut while the gaming machine is powered on and the reels are stopped. , neither error judgment nor error notification is performed (“X482” in FIG. 224),
A power outage occurs in a state where at least one of the multiple lead wires that make up the start switch harness is electrically disconnected and a specified number of gaming values have been bet (Fig. 224, "X487"), the electrical connection of all the lead wires constituting the start switch harness is restored in the state where the start switch was on during the power failure ("X491" in FIG. 224), and the start switch is turned on. When the power is restored in the OFF state (“X495” in FIG. 224), neither error judgment nor error notification is performed, and reel rotation is not started.

According to the original invention 7, even if the electrical connection by the start switch harness is cut off, neither error judgment nor error notification is performed, and the power cut occurs in the state where the electrical connection by the start switch harness is cut off. When the start switch is turned on while the power is off, even if the electrical connection is restored by the start switch harness, the reel does not start rotating. When the power is restored while the start switch is off, the reel does not start rotating, but neither error determination nor error notification is performed.
Therefore, even if the electrical connection by the start switch harness is cut off, it operates in the same way as when the electrical connection is not cut off. Since the player can immediately return to the game, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable.

8. original invention 8
The original invention 8 (13th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) capable of opening and closing the cabinet;
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) located inside a cabinet and provided with a plurality of reels;
A main control board (50) that is attached inside the cabinet and controls the progress of the game,
The reel can be visually recognized through the display window (18) provided on the front door,
A predetermined member (the upper frame portion 515a of the frame-shaped member 515) is provided behind the front door and outside the display window,
When the front door is closed, the main control board cannot be seen through the display window because it is blocked by a predetermined member and the reel unit (Fig. 225).
It is characterized by

According to the original invention 8, since the main control board cannot be visually recognized from the display window, it is possible to prevent spying on the model numbers, positions, shapes, etc. of various electronic components on the main control board.

9. original invention 9
The original invention 9 (13th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) capable of opening and closing the cabinet;
a setting key switch (152) located inside the cabinet and operated when changing or confirming a set value relating to a player's advantage;
a setting key insertion slot (151) located inside the cabinet into which a setting key (CK) for operating the setting key switch can be inserted;
The front door can be closed while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot (Fig. 226),
With the front door closed, there is provided a space necessary for the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion opening to slide out of the setting key insertion opening (Fig. 227).
It is characterized by

If you forget to remove the setting key from the setting key insertion slot and close the front door while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, a wire will be inserted through the gap between the front door and the cabinet to There is a possibility that a fraudulent act of turning the key to turn on the setting key switch and shifting to the setting change state to change the setting value may be performed.
According to the original invention 9, with the front door closed, a space necessary for the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion opening to slide and move out of the setting key insertion opening is provided. For this reason, if a setting key that has been forgotten to be removed from the setting key insertion slot is unsuccessfully attempted to be illegally operated with a wire or the like inserted into the cabinet, the setting key will fall out of the setting key insertion slot, making it difficult to operate it illegally thereafter. become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of changing setting values.

10. original invention 10
The original invention 10 (thirteenth embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) capable of opening and closing the cabinet;
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) located inside a cabinet and provided with a plurality of reels;
a setting key switch (152) located inside the cabinet and operated when changing or confirming a set value relating to a player's advantage;
a setting key insertion slot (151) located inside the cabinet into which a setting key (CK) for operating the setting key switch can be inserted;
The reel (31) is visible through the display window (18) provided on the front door,
The front door can be closed while the setting key is inserted into the setting key slot,
With the front door closed, the space required for the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion slot to slide and move out of the setting key insertion slot is provided.
Inside the cabinet, the setting key insertion slot is located above the reel unit,
A reel foremost part (P03) is the frontmost part of the reel when viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
The part of the display window closest to the front of the reel is the closest part of the reel (P04),
The distance between the frontmost part of the reel and the nearest part of the reel (L28) of the display window is more than the thickness (L03) of the setting key (Fig. 233).
It is characterized by

If the distance between the foremost part of the reel and the closest part of the reel to the display window is narrower than the thickness of the setting key, the setting key that has fallen out of the setting key insertion slot may be caught between the reel and the display window. be. If the setting key is caught between the reel and the display window, the reel and the display window may be damaged.
According to the first invention 10, since the distance between the foremost part of the reel and the nearest part of the reel in the display window is larger than the thickness of the setting key, the setting key dropped out of the setting key insertion slot is displayed as a reel. It can pass between the reel and the display window without being caught between the window. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reel and the display window from being damaged.

11. original invention 11
The original invention 11 (13th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) capable of opening and closing the cabinet;
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) located inside a cabinet and provided with a plurality of reels;
a setting key switch (152) located inside the cabinet and operated when changing or confirming a set value relating to a player's advantage;
a setting key insertion slot (151) located inside the cabinet into which a setting key (CK) for operating the setting key switch can be inserted;
The reel (31) is visible through the display window (18) provided on the front door,
The front door can be closed while the setting key is inserted into the setting key slot,
With the front door closed, the space required for the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion slot to slide and move out of the setting key insertion slot is provided.
Inside the cabinet, the setting key insertion slot is located above the reel unit,
The reel unit has a gap cover (607) that hides the gap between adjacent reels,
It is configured so that the setting key does not enter inside the reel from between the gap cover and the reel (L27) (Figs. 231 and 232).
It is characterized by

Since a motor, a reel sensor, etc. are provided inside the reel, if a setting key that has fallen out of the setting key insertion slot and enters the inside of the reel from between the gap cover and the reel, the motor and reel sensor will be damaged. The reel sensor, etc. may be damaged.
According to the original invention 11, since the setting key is prevented from entering inside the reel from between the gap cover and the reel, damage to the motor, reel sensor, etc. provided inside the reel is prevented. be able to.

12. original invention 12
The original invention 12 (13th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) capable of opening and closing the cabinet;
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) located inside a cabinet and provided with a plurality of reels;
a setting key switch (152) located inside the cabinet and operated when changing or confirming a set value relating to a player's advantage;
a setting key insertion slot (151) located inside the cabinet into which a setting key (CK) for operating the setting key switch can be inserted;
The reel (31) is visible through the display window (18) provided on the front door,
The front door can be closed while the setting key is inserted into the setting key slot,
When the front door is closed, the space required for the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion slot to slide and move out of the setting key insertion slot is provided.
Inside the cabinet, the setting key insertion slot is located above the reel unit,
The side plate on the left side of the cabinet in the front view of the game machine is the left side plate (13f),
The side plate on the right side of the cabinet when viewed from the front of the game machine is the right side plate (13e),
The distance between the left panel of the cabinet and the reel unit (L26) is greater than the thickness of the setting key (L03) (Fig. 230),
The distance between the right panel of the cabinet and the reel unit (L25) is greater than the thickness of the setting key (Fig. 230).
It is characterized by

If the space between the left side panel of the cabinet and the reel unit is narrower than the thickness of the setting key, the setting key coming out of the setting key insertion slot will be caught between the left side panel of the cabinet and the reel unit. The reel unit may be damaged. The same applies to the space between the right side plate of the cabinet and the reel unit.
According to the original invention 12, the distance between the left side plate of the cabinet and the reel unit is greater than the thickness of the setting key, and the distance between the right side plate of the cabinet and the reel unit is also greater than the thickness of the setting key. , the setting key that came out from the setting key insertion slot can be prevented from being caught between the left side plate of the cabinet and the reel unit, and also prevented from being caught between the right side plate of the cabinet and the reel unit. can be Therefore, it is possible to prevent the left side plate, the right side plate, and the reel unit of the cabinet from being damaged.

13. original invention 13
The original invention 13 (13th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) capable of opening and closing the cabinet;
a power supply unit (11a) located inside the cabinet;
a setting key switch (152) located inside the cabinet and operated when changing or confirming a set value relating to a player's advantage;
a setting key insertion slot (151) located inside the cabinet into which a setting key (CK) for operating the setting key switch can be inserted;
The front door can be closed while the setting key is inserted into the setting key slot,
With the front door closed, the space required for the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion slot to slide and move out of the setting key insertion slot is provided.
Inside the cabinet, the power supply unit is located below the setting key insertion slot,
A shielding member (reel base 13g) is provided between the setting key insertion slot and the power supply unit to prevent the setting key from contacting the power supply unit (Figs. 235 and 236).
It is characterized by

If a setting key coming out of the setting key insertion slot comes into contact with the power supply unit 11a, there is a risk that the electricity will short-circuit, various control boards will malfunction, or a fire will occur.
According to the original invention 13, a shielding member is provided between the setting key insertion slot and the power supply unit to prevent the setting key from coming into contact with the power supply unit. It will fall on the part. Therefore, since the setting key pulled out from the setting key insertion slot does not contact the power supply unit, it is possible to prevent short-circuiting of electricity, failure of various control boards, and occurrence of fire.

14. original invention 14
The original invention 14 (13th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) capable of opening and closing the cabinet;
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) located inside a cabinet and provided with a plurality of reels;
a setting key switch (152) located inside the cabinet and operated when changing or confirming a set value relating to a player's advantage;
a setting key insertion slot (151) located inside the cabinet into which a setting key (CK) for operating the setting key switch can be inserted;
The reel (31) is visible through the display window (18) provided on the front door,
The front door can be closed while the setting key is inserted into the setting key slot,
With the front door closed, the space required for the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion slot to slide and move out of the setting key insertion slot is provided.
Inside the cabinet, the setting key insertion slot is located above the reel unit,
Having a back plate (13b) behind the cabinet in front view of the gaming machine,
The rearmost portion of the reel unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is the rearmost portion of the reel unit (P01),
The part of the back plate closest to the rearmost part of the reel unit is defined as the nearest part (P02) of the reel unit,
The distance between the rearmost part of the reel unit and the nearest part of the reel unit on the back plate (L24) is more than the thickness of the setting key (L03) (Fig. 229).
It is characterized by

If the distance between the rearmost part of the reel unit and the nearest part of the reel unit on the back plate is narrower than the thickness of the setting key, the setting key coming out of the setting key insertion slot will be caught between the reel unit and the back plate. The back plate may be damaged.
According to the original invention 14, since the distance between the rearmost part of the reel unit and the nearest part of the reel unit of the back plate is greater than the thickness of the setting key, the setting key that has been pulled out from the setting key insertion opening is stuck between the reel unit and the back plate. You can avoid getting caught in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reel unit and the back plate from being damaged.

15. original invention 15
The original invention 15 (13th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) capable of opening and closing the cabinet;
a display window (18) provided in the front door;
a setting key switch (152) located inside the cabinet and operated when changing or confirming a set value relating to a player's advantage;
a setting key insertion slot (151) located inside the cabinet into which a setting key (CK) for operating the setting key switch can be inserted;
The front door can be closed while the setting key is inserted into the setting key slot,
With the front door closed, the space required for the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion slot to slide and move out of the setting key insertion slot is provided.
Inside the cabinet, the setting key insertion slot is located above the display window,
A predetermined member (the lower frame portion 515b of the frame-shaped member 515) is provided on the back side of the front door and below the display window,
A predetermined member protrudes rearward in a front view of the gaming machine,
When the setting key is placed on the predetermined member, the center of gravity (G) of the setting key is located behind the rear end of the predetermined member (Fig. 234).
It is characterized by

If the setting key that has been pulled out of the setting key insertion slot is resting on a predetermined member, the setting key can be seen through the display window 19, so there is a risk that the front door will be forcibly opened and the setting key will be stolen. .
According to the fifteenth aspect of the invention, when the setting key is placed on the predetermined member, the center of gravity of the setting key is located behind the rear end of the predetermined member. , the setting key does not stay on the predetermined member and falls downward from the rear end side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting key from remaining visible through the display window, thereby preventing the front door from being forcibly opened and the setting key being stolen.

16. original invention 16
The original invention 16 (13th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) capable of opening and closing the cabinet;
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) located inside a cabinet and provided with a plurality of reels (31);
a setting key switch (152) located inside the cabinet and operated when changing or confirming a set value relating to a player's advantage;
a setting key insertion slot (151) located inside the cabinet into which a setting key (CK) for operating the setting key switch can be inserted;
The front door can be closed while the setting key is inserted into the setting key slot,
With the front door closed, the space required for the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion slot to slide and move out of the setting key insertion slot is provided.
Inside the cabinet, the setting key insertion slot is located above the reel unit,
The height (L23) from the upper end of the reel unit to the lower end of the setting key insertion slot is greater than the total length (L01) of the setting key in the longitudinal direction (Fig. 228).
It is characterized by

If the height from the upper end of the reel unit to the lower end of the setting key insertion slot is smaller than the total length of the setting key in the longitudinal direction, the setting key that has slid is supported by the upper surface of the reel unit. It may not fall out of your mouth.
According to the original invention 16, the height from the upper end of the reel unit to the lower end of the setting key insertion opening is made larger than the total length of the setting key in the longitudinal direction, so that the setting key slides out of the setting key insertion opening. can be made to fall downward inside the cabinet. In addition, it is difficult to pick up the setting key that has slipped out of the setting key insertion slot and dropped down inside the cabinet with the wire inserted through the gap between the front door and the cabinet and insert it into the setting key insertion slot. , can prevent fraudulent actions to change the setting value.

17. original invention 17
The original invention 17 (13th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (12) capable of opening and closing the cabinet;
a setting key switch (152) located inside the cabinet and operated when changing or confirming a set value relating to a player's advantage;
a setting key insertion slot (151) located inside the cabinet into which a setting key (CK) for operating the setting key switch can be inserted;
The front door can be closed while the setting key is inserted into the setting key slot,
With the front door closed, the space required for the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion slot to slide and move out of the setting key insertion slot is provided.
The front door is configured to be openable and closable with respect to the cabinet around a hinge (520),
When the front door is fully opened, the gap (L30) between the front door and the cabinet on the hinge side is smaller than the total length (L01) of the setting key in the longitudinal direction (Fig. 237).
It is characterized by

If the gap between the front door and the cabinet on the hinge side when the front door is fully open is larger than the total length of the setting key in the longitudinal direction (wider), the front door and the cabinet may not fit properly when the setting key falls off on the hinge side when the front door is fully open. There is a risk that the setting key may get caught between the cabinet and the cabinet. If the front door is closed with the setting key stuck between the front door and the cabinet, the front door, the cabinet, and the setting key may be damaged.
According to the original invention 17, the gap between the front door and the cabinet on the hinge side when the front door is fully opened is made smaller (narrower) than the total length of the setting key in the longitudinal direction. It is possible to prevent setting keys from entering. Therefore, the front door is not closed with the setting key stuck between the front door and the cabinet, so that the front door, the cabinet, and the setting key can be prevented from being damaged.

<14th Embodiment>
238 to 240 are external views of the slot machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 238 shows an external perspective view, FIG. 239 shows a front view (inside the cabinet 13) of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG. 240 shows a side view (partially sectional view).
In the above-described embodiments, including the thirteenth embodiment (FIGS. 209 and 211), there is one front door 12, but the front door 12 of the fourteenth embodiment is divided into an upper door 12a and a lower door 12b. It is
As shown in FIGS. 238 and 240, the upper door 12a is a door that includes a display window 18. FIG. On the other hand, the lower door 12b is a door including a control panel 12c (3 bet switch 40b, start switch 41, stop switch 42, medal slot 47, push button 86, cross key 87).

As shown in FIG. 240, the cross section of the upper edge of the lower door 12b is formed in a substantially L shape, and a flat surface portion located one step lower than the upper surface of the control panel 12c is provided on the rear side of the control panel 12c. 12d is formed (the details of the "flat surface portion 12d" will be described later). When the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are closed, the flat surface portion 12d of the lower door 12b and the lower edge of the upper door 12a are engaged so as to overlap each other.
As a result, when both the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are closed, only the lower door 12b can be opened first, and when the lower door 12b is closed, only the upper door 12a can be opened. you can't. Therefore, when opening the front door 12, first the lower door 12b is opened, and then the upper door 12a is opened.
On the other hand, when closing the front door 12 in a situation where both the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are open, the lower door 12b cannot be closed first. After closing the upper door 12a, the lower door 12b is closed.

As shown in FIG. 240, the sub-board case 80a containing the sub-control board 80 is attached at a predetermined position on the rear side of the upper door 12a. Further, as shown in FIG. 240, a main substrate case 50b containing a main control substrate 50 is attached to the back plate 13b of the cabinet 13. As shown in FIG. Inside the slot machine 10, the main board case 50a and the sub-board case 80a are arranged so as to substantially face each other.
A motor board case 34a containing a motor drive board 34 is mounted on the pattern display device (also referred to as a "reel unit") 14. As shown in FIG. The motor board case 34a is located below the main board case 50a and the sub-board case 80a.

FIG. 241 shows the sub-control board 80 and the sub-board case 80a, where (a) is a plan view and (b) is a front view.
The sub-board case 80a is composed of an upper case 621 and a lower case 622, both of which are made of transparent resin, as shown in FIG. Sub-control board 80 is fixed to lower case 622 with a predetermined fixing member (for example, a screw; not shown), and is covered with upper cover 621 in this state. Alternatively, the sub-control board 80 may be fixed to the upper case 621 with a predetermined fixing member (for example, a screw).
After the upper cover 621 and the lower cover 622 are engaged with each other, the vicinity of the four corners thereof are crimped by the crimping portions 623 .
A sub CPU 85 is mounted on the sub control board 80 , and a CPU cooler 624 is mounted on the sub CPU 85 . The CPU cooler 624 may have various structures, such as a fan only, a heat sink only, or a lower layer heat sink and an upper layer fan structure.
The upper case 621 of the sub-board case 80a is formed so that portions corresponding to the sub-CPU 85 and the CPU cooler 624 are convex in accordance with the shapes of the sub-CPU 85 and the CPU cooler 624 . Further, as shown in FIG. 241(a), the upper surface of the convex portion is formed with an exhaust port 621b for the fan of the CPU cooler 624. As shown in FIG.

Screw holes 621a are formed near the four corners of the sub-board case 80a. The screw holes 621a are for fixing the sub-board case 80a to the upper door 12a with screws. In the example of FIG. 241, the vicinity of four corners of the sub board case 80a is screwed to the upper door 12a. However, it is not limited to this structure. For example, in FIG. 241(a), of the four corners of the sub-circuit board case 80a, the vicinity of the lower two locations is engaged with the upper door 12a by means of hook-like members or the like (hooking shape), and one of the four corners is It is good also as a structure which screw-fastens to the upper side door 12a at two places of the upper edge side of .
Alternatively, in FIG. 241(a), the upper door 12a is engaged with a hook-like member or the like at two locations on the lower edge side of the four corners of the sub-board case 80a, and two locations on the upper edge side of the four corners are engaged. A structure may be adopted in which the upper door 12a is fitted without using screws.

Also, as shown in FIG. 241(a), a connector (in this embodiment, the connector is denoted as "CN") is provided at a predetermined position on the outer peripheral edge of the sub-control board 80 for connecting to another predetermined board. ) is implemented. In FIG. 241(a), when the sub board case 80a is attached to the rear side of the upper door 12a, the left side in the drawing is the open side of the upper door 12a, and the right side in the drawing is the hinge side (rotation fulcrum side). Become. No connectors are mounted on the left edge of the sub-control board 80 on the open side of the upper door 12a, and connectors are mounted only on the right, upper and lower edges of the sub-control board 80. FIG. In the example of FIG. 241(a), the sub-control board 80 has three connectors CN31, CN32, and CN33 on its upper edge, two connectors CN34 and CN35 on its lower edge, and two connectors CN34 and CN35 on its right edge. It has three connectors CN36, CN37, CN38. The upper case 621 has an opening corresponding to the shape of these connectors CN.
. . , CN38 of the sub-control board 80 are connected to harnesses (harnesses are denoted as "HN" in this embodiment) HN31, HN32, . , are connected to other boards.

As described above, no connector is mounted on the left edge of the sub-control board 80 in FIG. As a result, the risk of the harness connected to the sub-control board 80 being caught between the upper door 12a and the cabinet 13 when the upper door 12a is opened and closed can be reduced.
In this embodiment, the harnesses HN31 to HN33 connected to the connectors CN31 to CN33 on the upper edge of the sub-control board 80 in FIG. It is connected to a fixed substrate.
Similarly, in FIG. 241(a) of the sub-control board 80, the harnesses HN34 and HN35 connected to the connectors CN34 and CN35 on the lower edge are connected to other predetermined boards fixed at other predetermined positions on the upper door 12a. It is
241(a) of the sub control board 80, the harnesses HN36 to HN38 connected to the connectors CN36 to CN38 on the right edge are connected to the main control board 50. FIG.

By the way, the surface color of the component side of the sub-control board 80 (the same applies to the solder side) is green, which is the resist color. Also, the colors of the connectors CN31 to CN38 are white or brown. The color of the connector terminals of the harnesses HN31-HN38 is also white or brown.
Most of the harness is an assembly of lead wires (sometimes there is only one lead wire), and white, black, red, blue, etc. are used for the color of each lead wire. The harness may be composed of lead wires of the same color, or may be composed of lead wires of two or more colors.
On the other hand, pigments such as yellow, orange, pink, and blue are used for the color of the caulked portion 623 . Here, the base material of the caulked portion 623 before coloring is a transparent resin, and when this transparent resin is colored, a color close to fluorescent color can be obtained. When coloring the caulked portion 623, fluorescent pigments (for example, neon colors such as fluorescent yellow, fluorescent orange, and fluorescent pink) may be used for coloring.
On the other hand, fluorescent colors are not used for the component surfaces of the sub-control board 80, the connectors, and the lead wires of the harnesses.
This makes it possible to make the crimped portion 623 stand out when viewing the sub-circuit board case 80a. In other words, when viewing the sub-board case 80a, the crimped portion 623 is first visible. Therefore, when looking at the sub-board case 80a, it is possible to immediately determine whether the crimped portion 623 is damaged or not.

Next, the case where the sub board case 80a moves (falls off) from the predetermined position fixed to the upper door 12a will be described.
As described above, the sub board case 80a is fixed to the upper door 12a with screws or the like or is engaged or fitted with a predetermined member of the upper door 12a so as not to move. It is conceivable that the fixing of the sub-board case 80a may loosen or come off due to vibration or the like during transportation of the machine 10 (for example, the screw that is screwed in the screw hole 621a may loosen and come off).
In addition, the front door 12 (in this embodiment, the upper door 12a) is opened and closed frequently in the hall due to medal replenishment, error cancellation, setting changes, and the like. When the upper door 12a is opened and closed, vibration is transmitted to the sub-board case 80a. As a result, the fixation between the sub-board case 80a and the upper door 12a may be loosened.

FIG. 242 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing a state in which the sub-board case 80a is removed from the upper door 12a. In the drawing, only the cabinet 13, the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, and the motor control board 34 are hatched.
When the sub board case 80a is removed from the state fixed to the upper door 12a, it comes into contact with the motor board case 34a. However, the sub board case 80a is constructed so as not to fall completely onto the motor board case 34a by being pulled by the harnesses HN31 to HN33 and HN34 to HN35 (the harnesses HN31 to HN35 are designed to stop at such a position). length has been adjusted). 242, the connector terminals of the harnesses HN01 to HN35 are pulled out of the connectors CN01 to CN05 of the sub control board 80 due to the tensile force due to the weight of the sub board case 80a. The connector terminals of the harnesses HN31 to HN35 and the connectors CN31 to CN35 of the sub-control board 80 are coupled to each other so as not to cause any leakage.

Therefore, when the sub-board case 80a is removed from the upper door 12a, the lower edge of the sub-board case 80a may come into contact with the motor board case 34a as shown in FIG. The lengths of the harnesses HN31 to HN35 are set so that the upper surface of the motor board case 34a (the surface on which the exhaust port 621b is formed) does not overlap with the upper surface of the motor board case 34a.
Therefore, even if the sub-board case 80a is separated from the upper door 12a, the exhaust port 621b of the sub-board case 80a may come into contact with the motor board case 34a, or the exhaust air from the CPU cooler 624 may reach the motor control board 34. It does not occur to be directly affected. In this way, safety is ensured when the sub-board case 80a falls off.

FIG. 243 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing an example of the case where the sub board case 80a is detached from the upper door 12a, similar to FIG. In the drawing, only the cabinet 13, the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, and the motor control board 34 are hatched.
The example in FIG. 242 shows an example in which the sub-board case 80a is disengaged from the upper door 12a and moves downward, while the example in FIG. 243 shows an example in which it moves toward the main board case 50a.
Even if the sub board case 80a is removed from the upper door 12a and the sub board case 80a moves toward the main board case 50a, the sub board case 80a and the main board case 50a are prevented from coming into contact with each other. , harnesses HN31 to HN35 are set. As a result, the exhaust port 621b of the sub board case 80a does not come into contact with the main board case 50a. Therefore, safety is ensured when the sub-board case 80a falls off.
In the case of FIG. 243, how close the sub board case 80a and the main board case 50a are depends on the lengths of the harnesses HN31 to HN35. For example, it is preferable that the distance is at least 20 centimeters or more.

FIG. 244, like FIG. 242, shows an example in which the sub board case 80a is removed from the upper door 12a. FIG. (a) is a side view (partial cross-sectional view), in which only the cabinet 13, the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80, the motor control board 34, and the frame of the display window 18 are hatched. Moreover, FIG. (b) is a figure which expands and shows a part of (a).
FIG. 244(a) shows an example in which the sub-board case 80a is separated from the upper door 12a and moved downward along the rear surface of the upper door 12a. In this case, the lower edge of the sub board case 80a and the upper surface of the motor board case 34a come into contact with each other.
Here, as shown in FIG. 244(b), the thickness of the sub board case 80a is L11, and the gap between the motor board case 34a and the upper door 12a is L12. Note that the thickness L11 is the thickness of the portion where the CPU cooler 624 is not provided.
In this case, it is configured to satisfy "L12<L11". Therefore, when the sub-board case 80a is disengaged from the upper door 12a and moves downward, the sub-board case 80a comes into contact with the upper surface of the motor board case 34a (contact point "X" in the figure). 80a does not enter the gap L12 between the motor board case 34a and the upper door 12a. Therefore, the detached sub-board case 80a does not reach the position of the display window 18 of the upper door 12a. As a result, even if the sub-board case 80a is removed and the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the sub-board case 80a, for example, does not hinder the visual recognition of a part of the pattern, and the player can proceed with the game normally.
Further, even if the sub-board case 80a is separated from the upper door 12a and moves toward the pattern display device 14, the sub-board case 80a and the reel 31 do not come into contact with each other, thereby preventing the reel 31 from being damaged. be able to.

Next, the structure of the pattern display device 14 will be described.
FIG. 245 is a front view (partially cross-sectional view) showing the pattern display device 14, in which only the reel frame 605 of the reel 31 is hatched.
The symbol display device 14 has three (left, middle, right) reel modules 602 arranged side by side in a reel case 601 . The reel case 601 is fixed on the reel base 13g of the cabinet 13, as shown in FIGS. A case fixing portion 601a is provided near the outer end of the lower edge of the lease case 601, and the reel base 13g and the reel case 601 are fixed by the case fixing portion 601a. The case fixing portion 601a may be screwed, for example, or a locking mechanism may be used without screws.

Reel module 602 includes reel bracket 604 . The reel bracket 604 is made of sheet metal, for example.
An upper fixing portion 604a is provided at the upper end of the reel bracket 604, and a lower fixing portion 604b is provided at the lower end. The reel bracket 604 is fixed to the reel case 601 by fixing the upper fixing portion 604a and the lower fixing portion 604b to the reel case 601, respectively. The fixing between the upper fixing portion 604a and the lower fixing portion 604b and the reel case 601 may be, for example, by screwing, or a locking mechanism may be used without using screws.

Also, as shown in FIG. 245, the gap L14 between the reel 31 of one reel module 602 and the leaf bracket 604 of the adjacent reel module 602 is, for example, about 10 to 20 mm. Also, in the figure, the clearance L15 between the reel module 602 on the right side and the reel case 601 is approximately the same as the above L14.
Further, in the drawing, a gap L13 between the reel bracket 604 of the reel module 602 on the left side and the reel case 601 is approximately the same as the above-described gap L14. Note that the gap L13 may be shorter than the gap L14. However, if the gap L13 becomes almost "0" and the reel case 601 contacts the reel bracket 604 of the left reel module 602, the vibration generated when the motor 32 of the reel module 602 is driven is transmitted to the reel case 601, which is not preferable. . Therefore, the clearance L13 is larger than "0".
A gap cover 607 is provided between the left reel 31 and the middle reel 31 and between the middle reel 31 and the right reel 31 (see FIGS. 231 and 232 of the thirteenth embodiment).

FIG. 246(a) is a front view (partially cross-sectional view) showing the reel module 602, in which only the reel frame 605 and the screw SC01 are hatched. In addition, in FIG. 246(a), the back lamp case 603a is illustrated by a chain double-dashed line.
Also, FIG. 246(b) is a diagram showing the dimensions of the screw SC01.
Further, FIG. 247 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing the reel module 602 and the reel case 601, and only the reel case 601 is illustrated with hatching.
246, the reel 31 is composed of a reel frame 605 and a reel tape 606. As shown in FIG.
The reel frame 605 is made of resin such as polycarbonate (PC). The reel frame 605 includes a substantially cylindrical hub 605a connected to the rotating shaft 32a of the motor 32, a plurality of spokes 605c radially extending from the hub 605a, and a first rim 605b (annular ring) located at the outer end of the spokes 605c. and a second rim 605e (annular body) located opposite the first rim 605b. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 247, six spokes 605c are provided at intervals of 60 degrees.

Also, in the reel frame 605, the hub 605a, the spokes 605c, and the first rim 605b are integrally formed, but these are separate from the second rim 605e. The first rim 605b and the second rim 605e are connected only by the reel tape 606. As shown in FIG.
The reel tape 606 is made of resin such as polycarbonate (PC), for example, and has a pattern printed on a transparent base material. The thickness of the base material of the leap tape 606 is, for example, about “0.15” to “0.25” millimeters, and the thickness including the pattern printed layer is, for example, about “0.18” to “0.30”. ” is on the order of millimeters.
The reel tape 606, the first rim 605b and the second rim 605e are connected by adhesion, for example.
The reel frame 605 and the reel tape 606 are not limited to polycarbonate (PC), and may be polypropylene (PP), polyethylene (PE), acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene copolymer (ABS) resin, or the like. However, as will be described later, it is made of a resin capable of elastic deformation (deflection) to some extent.

As shown in FIG. 246, the motor 32 is fixed to the reel bracket 604 by screwing (not shown in FIG. 246), for example.
A back lamp case 603a is fixed to the reel bracket 604, for example, by screwing (not shown in FIG. 246).
Furthermore, the reel sensor 33 is fixed to the reel bracket 604 via a sensor fixing portion 604c. The reel sensor 33 and the sensor fixing portion 604c, and the sensor fixing portion 604c and the reel bracket 604 are fixed by screws (not shown in FIG. 246), for example.
Further, as shown in FIG. 247, six spokes 605c are provided at intervals of 60 degrees from the center of the hub 605a, and the spoke 605c located in the 6 o'clock direction in the figure has an index 605d. (also shown in FIG. 246). The index 605d is detected once each time the reel 31 makes one rotation, and as shown in FIG. It is configured.

Next, various dimensions of the reel module 602 will be described.
In FIG. 246, the rotating shaft 32a of the motor 32 is inserted into a hole in the hub 605a of the reel frame 605 and screwed with a screw SC01. It should be noted that FIG. 246 omits illustration of the structure by which the screw SC01 fixes the hub 605a and the rotating shaft 32a.
In FIG. 246, if the thickness of the hub 605a is L21, the length by which the rotary shaft 32a of the motor 32a is inserted into the hub 605a is also L21.
On the other hand, in FIG. 246, the distance between the right end of the first rim 605b and the adjacent reel bracket 604 or reel case 601 is L14 or L15, as also shown in FIG.
The relationship between L21 and L14 or L15 is configured to be "L21>L14" and "L21>L15". As a result, for example, the screw SC01 is removed, the reel frame 605 moves to the right in FIG. (in other words, when L14 or L15 in the drawing becomes "0"), the hub 605a of the reel frame 605 is not separated from the rotating shaft 32a of the motor 32. This prevents the reel frame 605 from falling off from the rotating shaft 32a of the motor 32 even when the screw SC01 comes off.

Also, as shown in FIG. 246(b), the total length (including the screw head) of the screw SC01 is L23, and the diameter of the screw head of the screw SC01 is L27.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 246(a), the distance between the hub 605a and the reel bracket 604 or the reel case 601 adjacent to the first rim 605b is L24.
The relationship between L23 and L24 is configured to be "L24>L23".
As a result, even if the screw SC01 comes off and falls off the rotating shaft 32a of the motor 32, the screw SC01 can be dropped outside the first rim 605b (reel frame 605). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the loosened screw SC01 from being caught between the first rim 605b or the spoke 605c and the reel bracket 604 or the reel case 601, causing damage to the members or generation of abnormal noise.

Furthermore, as described above, one spoke 605c of the six spokes 605c is formed with a convex index 605d. .
In this case, the relationship between the total length L23 and L25 of the screw SC01 is configured to be "L25>L23".
This prevents the detached screw SC01 from being caught between the index 605d and the reel tape 606. FIG.

Also, as shown in FIG. 246(a), the distance (gap) between the reel tape 606 and the bottom surface of the reel case 601 is L26. Here, as shown in FIG. 247, the bottom surface of the reel case 601 is inclined forward (a forward inclined surface portion 601b is formed). The distance L26 indicates the shortest distance between the reel tape 606 and the bottom surface of the reel case 601 .
In this case, the relationship between the distance L26 and the diameter L27 of the screw head of the screw SC01 is configured to satisfy "L27>L26".
As a result, the dislodged screw SC01 can be prevented from entering the gap L27.
When the screw SC01 comes off and is ejected outside the frame of the reel frame 605, it falls onto the front inclined portion 601b of the reel case 601. It never moves. Therefore, the screw SC01 rolls down the front inclined portion 601b of the reel case 601 and drops forward.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 247, the distance (gap) between the outer circumference of the reel tape 606 and the rear surface on the inner surface side of the reel case 601 is L31.
In this case, the relationship between the distance L31 and the screw head L27 of the screw SC01 is "L31<L27". Since the distance (gap) L31 is short in this way, it is difficult to attach a foreign object to the inner back surface of the reel case 601 so as to be hidden by the reel tape 606 .

Next, a case where the reel module 602 and the reel case 601 move forward (refers to the player side, the front door 12 side) will be described.
248 is a side view showing the positional relationship among the reel case 601, reel module 602, and display window 18. FIG. In FIG. 248, part of the reel tape 606 is shown by a two-dot chain line, and the reel frame 605 is not shown. In FIG. 248 and FIG. 249 described later, the front door 12 is closed.
As described above, the reel module 602 is fixed to the reel case 601 by the upper fixing portion 604 a and the lower fixing portion 604 b of the reel bracket 604 .
Also, the reel module 602 uses three harnesses. The first is a harness HN06 (see FIG. 213) connected to the back lamp board 603b. Harness HN06 is connected to connector CN06 of motor drive board 34 .
The second is the harness HN03 of the motor 32 (see FIG. 213). The harness HN03 is connected to the connector CN03 of the motor drive board 34. As shown in FIG.

The third is the harness HN04 (see FIG. 213) connected to the reel sensor 33 . The harness HN04 is connected to the connector CN04 of the motor drive board 34. As shown in FIG.
Incidentally, since the reel module 602 has three modules, namely, the left reel module 602, the middle reel module 602, and the right reel module 602, the connectors CN06, CN03, and CN04 of the motor drive board 34 are also the connectors CN06, CN06, and CN04 for the left reel module 602. CN03, CN04, connectors CN06, CN03, CN04 for the middle reel module 602, and connectors CN06, CN03, CN04 for the right reel module 602. Harnesses HN06, HN03 and HN04 of each reel module 602 are connected to connectors CN06, CN03 and CN04 of the motor drive board 34, respectively.
Although the motor board case 34a is not shown in FIG. 248, the motor drive board 34 is housed in the motor board case 34a and fixed to the top of the reel case 601 as shown in FIG. . In other words, the motor drive board 34 and reel module 602 are connected by harnesses HN06, HN03 and HN04.

249 shows an example in which the upper fixing portion 604a and lower fixing portion 604b of the reel bracket 604 are disengaged from the reel case 601 from the state shown in FIG. there is The normal positions of the upper fixing portion 604a and the lower fixing portion 604b are illustrated by two-dot chain lines.
In this case, the reel case 601 remains fixed to the reel base 13g, and the reel case 601 does not move relative to the reel base 13g.
When the reel module 602 moves in the A direction in the figure, the motor drive board 34 fixed to the reel case 601 side does not move. Therefore, as the reel module 602 moves, the harnesses HN06, HN03 and HN04 are gradually extended, and finally the harnesses HN06, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN03, HN04 At least one of the HN04 is pulled, and further movement in the A direction in the drawing is restricted. Even if at least one harness HN is pulled in this way, the harnesses HN06, HN03, HN04 are connected to the back lamp board 603b, the motor 32, the reel sensor 33, the connectors CN06, CN03 of the motor drive board 34, It is configured so as not to come off from CN04.

The reel tape 606 is configured so as not to come into contact with the back side of the display window 18 even when the reel module 602 moves to the maximum in the direction A in the figure. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 249, when the reel module 602 is moved to the maximum in the direction A in the drawing, a gap L41 is provided between the rear side of the display window 18 and the reel tape 606. ing.
As a result, the upper fixing portion 604a and the lower fixing portion 604b of the reel bracket 604 are disengaged from the reel case 601, and even if the reel module 602 moves in the direction A in FIG. Since 606 does not contact the display window 18, the reel tape 606 can be prevented from being damaged when the reel 31 rotates.
In FIG. 249, the harness HN06 is in the most stretched state, but the state is not limited to this, and any harness HN may be in the most stretched state. For example, the thickest (largest number of lead wires) harness HN may be pulled. Alternatively, the lengths of harnesses HN06, HN03 and HN04 may be adjusted such that any two harnesses HN or all three harnesses HN are pulled simultaneously.
Further, each harness HN06, HN03, HN04 is provided for each reel module 602, but at least one of the harnesses HN06, HN03, HN04 of only one reel module 602 (for example, middle reel module 602) is pulled. may be made available. Alternatively, at least one of the harnesses HN06, HN03, HN04 of two reel modules 602 (eg left and right reel modules 602) may be pulled. Additionally, at least one of the harnesses HN06, HN03, HN04 of all three reel modules 602 may be pulled.

FIG. 250 is a side view illustrating a case where the reel base 13g and the reel case 601 are disengaged (fixed by the case fixing portion 601a in FIG. 245) and the pattern display device 14 moves toward the display window 18 side. . Note that in FIG. 250, the front door 12 is closed.
(a) in the drawing shows a state in which the reel case 601 is fixed at a predetermined position with respect to the reel base 13g. A harness HN05 is connected to the connector CN05 of the motor drive board 34, and the harness HN05 and the main control board 50 are connected (see FIG. 213). When the reel case 601 is fixed to the reel base 13g at a predetermined position, the shortest distance between the inner surface of the display window 18 (cabinet 13 side) and the outer peripheral surface of the reel tape 606 is L51. and
In FIG. (b), the engagement between the reel base 13g and the reel case 601 is disengaged from the state of (a) in the figure, and the connection of the harness HN05 is also disengaged. state. Thus, when the reel base 13g and the reel case 601 are disengaged and the harness HN05 is also disengaged, the symbol display device 14 can move to the display window 18 side to the maximum. Here, FIG. (b) shows a state in which the display window 18 and the leap tape 606 are in contact with each other. . Before the reel tape 606 and the display window 18 come into contact with each other, some member of the pattern display device 14 and some member on the back side of the upper door 12a are configured to come into contact with each other. With this configuration, even if the pattern display device 14 moves to the maximum, it is possible to prevent the reel tape 606 from contacting the display window 18 and prevent the reel tape 606 from being damaged. In the state shown in FIG. 2B, the motor 32 does not rotate because the harness HN05 connecting the motor control board 34 and the main control board 50 is disconnected. Therefore, the reel 31 does not rotate in the state shown in FIG.

FIG. (b) shows that even if the pattern display device 14 approaches the display window 18 to the extent that the leap tape 606 contacts the display window 18, about 70% or more of the reel case 601 is placed on the reel base 13g. Indicates that the state is maintained. As a result, even if the symbol display device 14 moves forward to the position shown in FIG. 13g It will not fall from above.
Furthermore, even if the symbol display device 14 approaches the display window 18 to the state shown in FIG.
FIG. 24C shows that the reel base 13g and the reel case 601 are disengaged (fixed by the case fixing portion 601a in FIG. 245), and the connectors CN05 and the harnesses HN05 of the motor drive board 34 and the main control board 50 are released. 10 is a diagram showing a state in which the symbol display device 14 is moved to the display window 18 side with the . Even if the reel base 13g and the reel case 601 are disengaged, the connectors CN05 and the harnesses HN05 of the motor drive board 34 and the main control board 50 are not disengaged. As a result, it actually becomes as shown in FIG.

Then, when the pattern display device 14 approaches the display window 18 side, the harness HN05 is pulled, and further movement of the pattern display device 14 toward the display window 18 side is restricted.
In this case, the harness HN05 is not disconnected from the connector CN05 of the motor drive board 34 and the main control board 50. FIG.
Furthermore, as shown in (c) of the figure, even if the pattern display device 14 approaches the display window 18 side at maximum, the reel tape 606 does not contact the display window 18, and the outer peripheral surface of the reel tape 606 and the display window do not contact each other. The shortest distance to the inner surface side of 18 is L52 (L52<L51, L52>0). In other words, there is a gap L52 between the reel tape 606 and the display window 18. Therefore, even if the reel 31 rotates in this state, it does not contact the display window 18, so that the reel tape 606 is not damaged.
Furthermore, even if the reel case 601 approaches the display window 18 to the state shown in FIG. 1C, the visibility of the symbols on the reel 31 through the display window 18 is maintained as in FIG. 1B. Therefore, it is possible to proceed with the game.
Also, with the configuration as shown in FIG. 7C, even when the front door 12 is opened, the pattern display device 14 will not fall from the reel base 13g.

Next, features of the front door 12 (upper door 12a and lower door 12b) in the fourteenth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 251 is a front view showing a state in which the lower door 12b of the slot machine 10 is opened (in the drawing, the outer shape of the lower door 12b is indicated by a chain double-dashed line) and the upper door 12a is closed.
As shown in FIG. 251, when the lower door 12b is opened, the reel base 13g, the lower portion of the reel case 601, the case fixing portion 601a of the reel case 601, the lower portion of the reel 31, and the lower fixing portion 604b of the reel bracket 604 are visible. It has become.
Thus, even when the upper door 12a is closed, it is possible to visually confirm whether the case fixing portion 601a of the reel case 601 is normally fixed to the reel base 13g. When it is determined that the case fixing portion 601a is not normally fixed to the reel base 13g, the case fixing portion 601a can be fixed again. For example, if the case fixing portion 601a is made of a screw, the operator can tighten the screw with a screwdriver. Alternatively, if the case fixing portion 601a is configured with a lock mechanism, the operator can re-fix with the lock mechanism. Needless to say, it has a space necessary for performing such fixing work.

Also, when only the lower door 12b is open, the lower fixing portion 604b of the reel bracket 604 is visible. Therefore, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the lower fixing portion 604b of the reel bracket 604 is normally fixed to the reel case 601. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the lower fixing portion 604b is not normally fixed to the reel case 601, the lower fixing portion 604b can be fixed again. For example, when the lower fixing portion 604b is configured with a screw, an operator can tighten the screw with a screwdriver. Alternatively, when the lower fixing portion 604b is configured with a lock mechanism, the operator can re-fix with the lock mechanism. Needless to say, there is a space necessary for performing such fixing work again.

Further, as shown in FIG. 251, when the upper door 12a is closed and the lower door 12b is opened, a part of the lower side of the reel 31 is exposed. is visible and accessible. Therefore, by manually rotating the reel 31, it is possible to check whether the motor 32 is not energized and whether there is any abnormality in the reel 31, the motor 32, or the like.
Here, even when the reel 31 is manually rotated, the back electromotive current of the motor 32 is configured so that the power LED 508 of the main control board 50 in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the power LED 508 of the main control board 50 from turning on when the reels 31 are manually rotated, thereby preventing misunderstanding that the slot machine 10 is powered on.
Since the upper door 12a is closed in the above situation, the main control board 50 cannot be directly seen when the main control board 50 is mounted at the position shown in this embodiment. However, when the power LED 508 of the main control board 50 lights up, the light may leak out to the open side of the lower door 12b depending on the mounting position of the main control board 50. FIG.
Also, for example, the main control board 50 (main board case 50a) may be attached to the left side plate 13f or the right side plate 13e in FIG. In such a case, even when the upper door 12a is closed, the main control board 50 may be visible, and the lighting status of the power supply LED 508 of the main control board 50 may be visible.
Furthermore, both the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are opened, the reel 31 is manually rotated, and it is confirmed whether the motor 32 is not energized and whether there is any abnormality in the reel 31, the motor 32, etc. You may
In this case, since the main control board 50 can be viewed at any position, the power supply LED 508 of the main control board 50 is configured so that it does not turn on even when the reel 31 is manually rotated. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that the power of the machine 10 is on.

FIG. 252(a) is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing the upper end portion of the lower door 12b and the lower end portion of the upper door 12a. In the figure, the screw SC02 for fixing the push button 86 of the lower door 12b and the upper door 12a are indicated by hatching.
FIG. 252(b) is a front view of the upper end of the lower door 12b (the portion where the push button 86 is attached) viewed from the rear side of the lower door 12b (direction B in FIG. 252(a)). arrow view).
FIG. 252(a) shows a state in which the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are closed. The lower door 12b has a button bracket 625 for attaching the push button 86 to the control panel 12c. there is Here, the screw head of the screw SC02 may protrude from the surface of the lower door 12b facing the upper door 12a as shown in FIG. 252(a). The surface facing the upper door 12a may be flush, or the surface of the screw head of the screw SC02 may be buried in the surface facing the upper door 12a of the lower door 12b.
The length of the threaded portion of the screw SC02 (the length of the portion inserted into the lower door 12b) is L61, and the diameter of the screw head of the screw SC02 is L62.

On the other hand, a space 12e is formed at the lower end of the upper door 12a at a position corresponding to the screw SC02. Since the space 12e is formed in this way, when the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are closed, the upper door 12a can be pulled toward the lower door 12b or the lower door 12b can be pulled upward. Even if it is pushed toward the door 12a, the screw head of the screw SC02 does not come into contact with the upper door 12a.
Furthermore, even if the screw SC02 is loosened and protrudes rightward in FIG. 252(a), the space 12e prevents the screw SC02 from coming into contact with the upper door 12a. If the threaded portion of the screw SC02 is even slightly engaged with the button bracket 625, the maximum projecting length of the screw SC02 is less than L61. And it is configured to satisfy "L61<L63". Therefore, even if the screw SC02 is loosened and protrudes to the maximum, the screw head of the screw SC02 does not come into contact with the upper door 12a.

If the screw SC02 falls off (separates) from the button bracket 86, the screw SC02 falls onto the flat portion 12d of the lower door 12b. The flat portion 12d is an inclined surface, and is inclined downward on the right side (in other words, on the side of the cabinet 13) in FIG. 252(a).
Here, when both the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are closed, the gap between the upper surface of the flat portion 12d of the lower door 12b and the lower end of the upper door 12a is defined as L64. In this case, it is configured to satisfy "L64<L62". Therefore, even if the screw SC02 falls onto the flat portion 12d of the lower door 12b, if both the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are closed, the loosened screw SC02 will fall onto the flat portion 12d. stay in.
When the lower door 12b is opened, the flat portion 12d causes the screw SC02 to roll down. Accordingly, when the screw SC02 is removed from the button bracket 625, the screw SC02 drops to the ground when the lower door 12b is opened, so that the removal of the screw SC02 can be easily recognized.

If the game medium is not a medal but a game ball, and for some reason the game ball falls onto the flat surface portion 12d, the game ball falls to the ground due to the flat surface portion 12d (inclined surface). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining on the flat surface portion 12d.
Further, in the above example, the configuration is such that "L64<L62" is satisfied, but the configuration is not limited to this, and may be configured so as to be "L64>L62". In this way, when the screw SC02 comes off under the condition that both the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are closed, and it falls onto the flat surface portion 12d, it rolls down as it is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 252(b), the flat surface portion 12d is configured to be a downward inclined surface on the left side (open end side of the lower door 12b) in the drawing.
Here, the flat surface portion 12d may be a downward sloped surface on the left side as shown in FIG. 252(b) under the condition that the lower door 12b is closed. Alternatively, in the situation where the lower door 12b is closed, the flat surface portion 12d in FIG. 252(b) is substantially horizontal, and the attachment between the lower door 12b and the cabinet 13 when the lower door 12b is opened. play (also referred to as "play" or "clearance"; the same shall apply hereinafter) of the part (hinge) and tilting of the lower door 12b due to its own weight (the open end side moves lower than the hinge side due to its own weight). , the lower door 12b may be configured to incline toward the open end. As a result, when the lower door 12b is open, the flat surface portion 12d in the horizontal direction slopes downward to the left in FIG. 252(b).
With this configuration, when the screw SC02 comes off and stays on the flat surface portion 12d as in the above example, when the lower door 12b is opened, it will move toward the cabinet 13 (right side in FIG. 252(a)). Not only does it roll, but it also rolls toward the open end side of the lower door 12b (left side in FIG. 252(b)). As a result, the screw SC02 (or other foreign matter) that has fallen onto the flat portion 12d can be reliably dropped to the ground. In particular, if the screw SC02 can be dropped to the open end side of the lower door 12b, it is possible to reduce the possibility of losing sight of the screw SC02 and to reliably know that the screw SC02 has been dropped.

It should be noted that the flat surface portion 12d may be configured to have only an inclined surface as shown in FIG. 252(a), and not to have an inclined surface in the horizontal direction in FIG. 252(b).
Alternatively, the flat surface portion 12d in FIG. 252(b) has only a downward inclined surface on the left side (open end side of the lower door 12b) in the horizontal direction, and the side cross section of FIG. 252(a) does not have an inclined surface. It may be configured as
Alternatively, the flat surface portion 12d has an inclined surface as shown in FIG. 252(a), and in FIG. You may make it have a surface.
Further, in FIG. 252(b), when the flat surface portion 12d is configured to have a downward inclined surface on the left side (open end side of the lower door 12b) in the horizontal direction, the lower door 12b is closed. Alternatively, it may be a horizontal surface (non-inclined surface) when the lower door 12b is closed and become an inclined surface as the lower door 12b is opened. may be configured.

FIG. 253 is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing the upper end of the lower door 12b and the lower end of the upper door 12a, similar to FIG. 252(a). In FIG. 253, as in FIG. 252, the screw SC02 and the upper door 12a are hatched.
The state of (a) in the drawing is a state in which the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are closed, or a state in which both the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are open. It shows a situation in which no human load is applied to the side door 12b.
In this state, the screw SC02 is hidden by the upper door 12a. Therefore, the screw SC02 cannot be accessed in the state of (a) in the figure. As shown in FIG. 253(a), the distance from the lower end of the upper door 12a to the lower end of the screw head of the screw SC02 is L71.
When the lower door 12b is opened and the upper door 12a is closed, the screw SC02 is exposed on the rear side of the lower door 12b. Therefore, screw SC02 is accessible under this circumstance.

FIG. 253(b) shows a situation in which the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are closed, or a situation in which both the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are open, and the upper door 12a and the cabinet are closed. 13 is a diagram showing a state when a human load is applied (pushed up) in an upward direction (F3 direction in the drawing) to the upper door 12a due to play of the mounting portion (hinge) between the upper door 12a and the door 13. FIG.
When such a human load is applied, the upper door 12a is lifted slightly upward. However, even if the upper door 12a is lifted upward by the play of the upper door 12a, the screw SC02 is hidden by the upper door 12a and is not exposed. In the example of FIG. 253(b), by lifting the upper door 12a, the distance from the lower end of the upper door 12a to the lower end of the screw head of the screw SC02 changes from L71 to L72 (L72<L71). . Even in this case, "L72>0" holds. Therefore, even if a human load is applied to the upper door 12a, the screw SC02 cannot be exposed in an accessible manner.

FIG. 254 is a plan view showing the slot machine 10 with the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b opened.
In this embodiment, both the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b have a maximum opening angle of "120 degrees". In addition, the state opened to the maximum open angle of "120 degrees" is described as "fully open." FIG. 254 shows a situation in which the lower door 12b is fully opened, and an upper door 12a is opened at an angle less than "45°" (that is, "75°") with respect to the lower door 12b. ing.
If only the lower door 12b is fully opened and the upper door 12a is closed, the upper door 12a is not positioned near the screw SC02 in FIG. It is exposed without being disturbed by 12a. It is therefore possible to access the screw SC02 (to loosen and tighten it with a screwdriver).
On the other hand, when both the lower door 12b and the upper door 12a are fully opened, as shown in FIG. 252(a), the front of the screw head of the screw SC02 is covered by the upper door 12a, so that the screw SC02 cannot be accessed. can't

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 254, when the opening angle difference between the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b is "45°", the upper door 12a is positioned slightly away from the front of the screw head of the screw SC02. , there is not enough space in front of the screw head of the screw SC02. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 254, the screw SC02 is configured to be inaccessible. It is not impossible to see the screw SC02 by looking into the screw SC02 from between the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b.
On the other hand, assuming that the push button 86 is provided near the open end of the lower door 12b, the screw SC02 is also positioned near the open end of the lower door 12b. Even in the "45°" situation, the screw SC02 can be accessed without being obstructed by the upper door 12a.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 254, when the opening angle difference between the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b is "45°", the vertical line from the open end of the upper door 12a to the lower door 12b ( , indicated by a two-dot chain line) is drawn, in the range L73 between the open end of the lower door 12b and the intersection of the lower door 12b and the perpendicular line, there is some member on the back of the control panel 12c. Make sure the mounting screws are not in place. In this way, when the opening angle difference between the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b is "45 degrees", it is possible to configure the control panel 12c such that the screws positioned on the rear surface of the control panel 12c cannot be accessed.
As described above, the mounting portions (hinges) between the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b and the cabinet 13 are provided with play, so that the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are not subject to human weight. When applied, the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b can be tilted. However, when the opening angle difference between the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b is 45°, even if the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b are tilted by the amount of play, the screw SC02 cannot be accessed. It is configured.

Next, elastic deformation (deflection) of the leap tape 606, the second rim 605e and the first rim 505b will be described.
As described above, the reel tape 606 of this embodiment is made of polycarbonate. Furthermore, the thickness of the reel tape 606 is about "0.2" to "0.3" millimeters. Therefore, it can be elastically deformed by applying a human load (a load within a range in which the reel tape 606 can be elastically deformed) (for example, by pressing with a finger).
The “elastically deformable range” refers to a range in which a proportional relationship is established between stress and strain due to pressing force (in accordance with Hooke's law).
The second rim 605e is made of polycarbonate, has an annular shape, and is connected only to the reel tape 606. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the outer peripheral edge of the second rim 605e is pushed (for example, pushed toward the first rim 605b or away from the back lamp case 603c), the second rim 605e is bent (elastically deformed) to some extent.
On the other hand, the first rim 605b itself is formed in an annular shape like the second rim 605e, but is connected with six spokes 605c, which are connected with the hub 605a. Therefore, when the outer peripheral edge of the first rim 605b is pushed (for example, pushed toward the second rim 605e or pushed away from the back lamp case 603c), the second rim 605e is slightly bent (elastically deformed). It doesn't bend like it does when you press .

255(a) and (b) are front views (partial cross-sectional views) showing the reel module 602. FIG. In FIGS. 255(a) and (b), cross-sections of the first rim 605b and the second rim 605e are hatched.
FIG. 255(c) is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing the back lamp case 603a and the second rim 605e. In FIG. (c), the back lamp case 603a is indicated by hatching.
In the drawing, (a) shows a state where no load is applied to the second rim 605e (no load), and (b) shows a state when a load is applied to the second rim 605e in the F4 direction. ing.
FIG. 255(c) is a side view (partially cross-sectional view) showing the back lamp case 603c, the reel tape 606, etc., and only the back lamp case 603c is hatched.
In FIG. 255(a), the back lamp case 603a is fixed to the reel bracket 604. In FIG. On the other hand, the second rim 605e and the reel bracket 604 are arranged so as not to contact each other.
In the state of FIG. 255(a), when the reel module 602 is viewed from the front, the back lamp case 603a is almost hidden behind the reel tape 606, and the back lamp case 603a is almost invisible from the front. is configured as
The reel tape 606 and the back lamp case 603a are close to each other (not in contact) as shown in FIG. 255(c), which will be described later.

Then, as shown in FIG. 255(b), when the outer peripheral edge of the second rim 605e is pushed toward the first rim 605b (F4 direction in the drawing), the second rim 605e is elastically deformed toward the first rim 605b. do. Furthermore, this force in the F4 direction not only pushes the outer peripheral edge of the second rim 605e toward the first rim 605b as shown in FIG. Let the outer peripheral edge be the direction away from the back lamp case 603a. In FIG. 255(c), the position of the second rim 605e when force in the F4 direction is applied is indicated by a chain double-dashed line.
When the second rim 605e is pushed in this way, the second rim 605e and the reel tape 606 are elastically deformed, the gap between the second rim 605e and the reel tape 606 and the back lamp case 603a widens, and the inside of the back lamp case 603a expands. can be visually confirmed.
In other words, as shown in FIG. 255(b), a maximum gap L81 is formed when viewed from the front, and the inside of the back lamp case 603c becomes visible. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 255(c), when viewed from the side, a maximum gap L82 is formed, making it possible to look into the interior of the back lamp case 603c.
Thereby, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not foreign matter is mixed in the back lamp case 603a.
As shown in FIG. 255(b), even if the second rim 605e is elastically deformed by pushing the outer peripheral edge of the second rim 605e in the direction of F4 in the figure, the back lamp substrate 603b can be seen from the front. It is constructed so as not to be elastically deformed up to a position where the LED 603c of is visible.
After that, when the force in the F4 direction is removed, the second rim 605e and the reel tape 606 return to their original shapes and are not plastically deformed (for example, the leap tape 606 is not creased).

FIG. 256(a) is a side view (partial cross-sectional view) showing the back lamp unit 603, the reel tape 606, and the like. In the drawing, the reel case 601 and the second rim 605e are indicated by hatching.
Also, FIG. 256(b) is a front view showing the positional relationship between the back lamp unit 603 and the reel tape 606, and the reel tape 606 is illustrated with a chain double-dashed line.
In FIG. 256(b), the reel tape 606 at the center position of the middle LED 603c among the LEDs 603c in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the back lamp unit 603 and at the middle position between the two LEDs 603c is It is assumed that the reel tape 606 is pushed (pushed with a force within a range in which the reel tape 606 can be elastically deformed) in the direction of F51 in the drawing (the direction in which the reel tape 606 approaches the LED 603c). The force at this time is within a range in which the reel tape 606 does not separate from the first rim 605b or the second rim 605e.
When the reel tape 606 is pushed in this way, as shown in FIG. 256(a), the reel tape is elastically deformed as indicated by the chain double-dashed line and approaches the LED 603c.

However, even if the reel tape 606 is pushed in the F51 direction in the drawing with the maximum force within the elastically deformable range, the reel tape 606 and the LED 603c are configured so as not to come into contact with each other. When the reel tape 606 is pushed in the F51 direction in the figure, the outer peripheral edge of the back lamp case 603a on the reel tape 606 side contacts the reel tape 606, so that the portion of the reel tape 606 that does not face the outer peripheral edge of the back lamp case 603a. is pushed toward the LED 603c, its movement is restricted by the outer peripheral edge of the back lamp case 603a. As a result, even if the operator erroneously applies a force in the direction of F51 in the figure, the reel tape 606 does not come into contact with the LED 603c, so the reel tape 606 and the LED 603c are protected.

Similarly, the reel tape 606 at the central position of the upper LED 603c and the central position of the two LEDs 603c among the upper, middle, and lower LEDs 603c of the back lamp unit 603 is moved in the direction of F52 in the figure. Similarly to the above, the reel tape 606 elastically deforms and approaches the LED 603c, but the movement of the reel tape 606 is restricted by the outer peripheral edge of the back lamp case 603a. no contact.
Furthermore, similarly, the reel tape 606 at the center position of the lower LED 603c among the upper, middle, and lower LEDs 603c of the back lamp unit 603 and at the center position of the two LEDs 603c is shown at F53 in the figure. Also when pushed in the direction, the reel tape 606 is elastically deformed and approaches the LED 603c in the same manner as described above, but since the movement of the reel tape 606 is restricted by the outer peripheral edge of the back lamp case 603a, the reel tape 606 and the LED 603c are separated from each other. do not come into contact.
As a result, even if some external force is applied to the reel tape 606 (reel 31) during transportation of the slot machine 10 or during work by an operator, the reel tape 606 does not come into contact with the LED 603c, so damage to the LED 603c can be prevented. can be prevented. On the other hand, since the reel tape 606 is also formed to be elastically deformable to some extent, it is possible to prevent the reel tape 606 from being damaged.
When the force is removed after the reel tape 606 is pushed in directions F51, F52, and F53 in the drawing, the reel tape 606 and the second rim 605e return to their original shapes and are not plastically deformed. .

Next, whether or not the reel frames 605 are in contact with each other will be described.
FIG. 257 is a front view (partially cross-sectional view) showing adjacent reel modules 602, in which the reel frame 605 (hub 605a, first rim 605b, spokes 605c, second rim 605e) is hatched.
257, the outer edge of the first rim 605b of the reel frame 605 on the right side is pushed in the direction of F61 in the figure (toward the second rim 605e) (the first rim 605b is pushed with a force within a range in which it can be elastically deformed). ). The direction of F61 is the center position of the reel frame 605 in the height direction and the position on the side of the player (the position of F61 is also illustrated in FIG. 247). When this position is pushed in the direction of F61, the spoke 605c contacts the back lamp case 603a. Here, as shown in FIG. 247, six spokes 605c are arranged at intervals of 60 degrees. It is positioned so as to overlap with the case 603a. Therefore, when the first rim 605b is pushed toward the second rim 605e, the one or two spokes 605c and the back lamp case 603a come into contact with each other, and the reel frame 605 is hardly elastically deformed any further.

In this case, although the second rim 605e and the reel bracket 604 are not in contact with each other in the example of FIG. Alternatively, when the first rim 605b is pushed in the direction F61, the reel frame 605 is elastically deformed and the second rim 605e and the reel bracket 604 come into contact with each other before the spokes 605c contact the back lamp case 603a. can be
In particular, the second rim 605e is annular and less rigid than the first rim 605b. Therefore, when the first rim 605b is pushed in the direction F61, the second rim 605e comes into contact with the reel bracket 604 first, the second rim 605e bends, and then the first rim 605b contacts the back lamp case 603a. Contact.

On the other hand, in FIG. 257, of the reel frame 605 on the left side, the outer peripheral edge of the second rim 605e is pushed in the direction of F62 (toward the first rim 605b) (the second rim 605e is pushed within the elastically deformable range). force). Here, the direction of F62 is opposite to the direction of F61, is the center position of the reel frame 605 in the height direction, and is the position on the player side.
In this case, the second rim 605e (and reel tape 606) is elastically deformed. When the first rim 605b is also elastically deformed, the first rim 605b comes into contact with the rib bracket 604 of the adjacent reel module 602. As shown in FIG. Since the first rim 605b is connected to the spokes 605c and has higher rigidity than the second rim 605e, it does not elastically deform much.
As described above, when the first rim 605b of the right reel frame 605 is pushed in the F61 direction and the second rim 605e of the left reel frame 605 is pushed in the F62 direction in FIG. Frame 605 is configured so that it does not touch. As a result, the reel frame 605 is protected even if the operator's arm or the like comes into contact with the reel frame 605 .

Next, whether or not the index 605d contacts the reel sensor 33 when the spoke 605c is pushed will be described.
246 and 247, it is assumed that the portion of the spoke 605c where the index 605d is provided is pushed in the F11 direction (pushed by a force within a range in which the reel frame 605 can be elastically deformed).
In this case, the reel frame 605 is elastically deformed and the index 605 d slightly approaches the reel sensor 33 , but the index 605 d does not contact the reel sensor 33 . 246 and 247, when the position facing the reel sensor 33 of the spoke 605c is pushed in the F11 direction in the figure, the spoke 605c adjacent to this spoke 605c and close to the back lamp case 603a moves back. It contacts the lamp case 603a. In the example of FIG. 247, when the spoke 605c is pushed in the F11 direction in the figure, the spoke 605c adjacent to this spoke contacts the back lamp case 605a at CP1 in the figure. Pressing the first rim 605b located near the reel sensor 33 is similar to the above.
In other words, the index 605d and the reel sensor 33 are configured so as not to come into contact with each other when any position of any spoke 605c is pushed toward the second rim 605e. Similarly, the index 605d and the reel sensor 33 are configured so as not to come into contact with each other when the first rim 605b is pushed toward the second rim 605e.
This prevents the index 605d from contacting the reel sensor 33 and the index 605d from being damaged or the reel sensor 33 from being damaged or out of order when the operator accidentally touches the reel frame 605. FIG.

Furthermore, in FIG. 246, when the second rim 605e is pushed in the F12 direction in the figure (with a force within the range in which the second rim 605e can be elastically deformed), the second rim 605e is elastically deformed. Even if the reel frame 605 bends, the index 605d and the reel sensor 33 do not come into contact with each other. In other words, the index 605d and the reel sensor 33 are configured so as not to come into contact with each other even if an arbitrary position of the second rim 605e is pushed toward the first rim 605b.
Furthermore, even if an arbitrary position of the first rim 605b or the spokes 605c is pushed toward the second rim 605e and an arbitrary position of the second rim 605e is pushed toward the first rim 605b (the first rim 605b or the spokes 605c and the second rim 605e at the same time), the index 605d and the reel sensor 33 do not come into contact with each other.

Although the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications such as those described below are possible.
(1) In FIG. 241, among the outer peripheral edges of the sub-control board 80, the connectors CN are provided at the upper, right, and lower edges in the drawing, but among the outer peripheral edges, the connectors CN are provided at the two edges including the upper edge. By providing the connector CN, it is possible to restrict the movement of the sub-board case 80a with the harness HN when the sub-board case 80a is removed from the upper cover 12a. For example, in FIG. 241, among the outer peripheral edges of the sub-control board 80, connectors CN are provided on the upper and lower edges and connected by harnesses HN, or connectors CN are provided on the upper and right edges and connected by harnesses HN. Things are mentioned.
(2) The position of the exhaust port 621b (the position of the CPU cooler 624 of the sub-control board 80) in the sub-board case 80a is arbitrary and not limited to the position shown in FIG.
In FIG. 241, two crimped portions 623 are provided on each of the left edge and right edge of the sub-board case 80a, but the positions are not limited to this. Also, any number of crimped portions 623 may be provided.

(3) The sub-substrate case 80a is fixed using screws or hooked (engaged) using a hook-shaped member or the like as an example, but both may be used. As a result, even if the screws come off, the sub-board case 80a can be configured to remain at a predetermined position by means of a hook-like member or the like.
Further, for example, when the upper edge side of the sub-board case 80a is fixed with a screw and the lower edge side is engaged using a hook-shaped member or the like, when the screw comes off, the sub-board case 80a shown in FIG. The lower edge remains on the side of the upper cover 12a, and the sub-board case 80a tilts toward the motor board case 34a with the lower edge of the sub-board case 80a as a fulcrum. Harnesses HN31 to HN33 on the upper edge side of the sub-board case 80a regulate the inclination so that it does not increase. As a result, the portion of the sub board case 80a where the CPU cooler 624 is provided does not come into contact with the motor board case 34a.

(4) In the example of FIG. 244, when the screws fixing the sub-board case 80a came off and the sub-board case 80a moved downward, it came into contact with the motor board case 34a.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are cases where the motor board case 34a does not exist on the upper surface of the reel case 601 and on the display window 18 side, as shown in FIG. 211 (thirteenth embodiment).
In this case, the gap between the upper surface of the reel case 601 and the display window 18 side is L12 in FIG. 244(b). As a result, when the sub-board case 80a moves as shown in FIG. 244, the sub-board case 80a and the upper surface of the reel case 601 come into contact with each other, so that the sub-board case 80a is configured so as not to be visually recognized through the display window 18. be able to.
(5) Similarly, in the example of FIG. 242, when the sub-board case 80a comes off, it contacts the motor board case 34a, but when the motor board case 34a is positioned as shown in FIG. The sub-board case 80a and the upper surface of the reel case 601 come into contact with each other.

(6) In the example shown in FIG. 246, etc., the rotating shaft 32a of the motor 32 and the reel frame 605 are fixed with the screw SC01, but the fixing is not limited to this, and a fixing tool other than the screw may be used.
Further, although the example of FIG. 246 shows an example in which the screw SC01 is screwed in the direction of the rotating shaft 32a of the motor 32, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation shaft 32a of the motor 32 may be provided with a screw hole in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction, and a screw insertion port may be provided on the side surface of the hub 605a so that the rotation shaft 32a of the motor 32 and the hub 605a are screwed. good.

(7) Six spokes 605c of the reel frame 605 are provided, but any number of spokes 605c may be provided. However, it is preferable that at least one spoke 605c and the back lamp case 603a overlap when viewed from the position of FIG. 247, regardless of the position of the reel frame 60. FIG. It is also possible to make the two spokes 605c and the back lamp case 603a always overlap when viewed from the position in FIG.
(8) In the fourteenth embodiment, the front door 12 is composed of an upper door 12a and a lower door 12b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the front door 12 is composed of a single front door 12 as in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 211), other than the invention that essentially consists of the upper door 12a and the lower door 12b, the 14 embodiments can be applied.

(9) In the fourteenth embodiment, the second rim 605e is annular, and the first rim 605b and the second rim 605e are separated. However, the shape is not limited to this, and the shape may be such that the first rim 605b and the second rim 605e are partially connected.
(10) As shown in FIGS. 247 and 256, the back lamp case 603a is divided into three spaces corresponding to the upper pattern, the middle pattern and the lower pattern. However, the shape of the back lamp case 603a is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily set. However, when the reel tape 606 is pushed to the LED 603c side, the reel tape 606 contacts part of the back lamp case 603a and is configured so that the reel tape 606 does not contact the LED 603c.

(11) The twelfth embodiment is not limited to conventional slot machines. The present invention can also be applied to medalless gaming machines (smart pachislot machines) and casino machines.
Furthermore, the invention relating to the upper cover 12a and the lower cover 12b is applicable not only to slot machines but also to pachinko game machines.
(12) The 14th embodiment is not limited to being carried out independently, and can be carried out in combination with at least part of the first to 13th embodiments as appropriate.

<Appendix>
Among the inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification, etc. of the present application, the fourteenth embodiment includes, for example, the following original inventions 1 to 15. Note that the reference numerals of the corresponding embodiments are shown in parentheses.
1. Original invention 1
The original invention 1 (14th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (upper door 12a and lower door 12b) capable of opening and closing the front of the cabinet;
a reel unit (symbol display device 14) arranged inside the cabinet;
A reel drive board case (motor board case 34a) disposed above the reel unit and housing the reel drive board (motor drive board 34);
A performance control board case (sub-board case 80a) that accommodates a performance control board (sub-control board 80) is attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the front door with a predetermined member, and the performance control board is connected to the performance control board by a predetermined harness. with a predetermined substrate and
The production control board has a CPU cooler (624),
The production control board case has an exhaust port (621b) for the CPU cooler,
Even if the effect control board case falls out of a predetermined position due to disengagement between the effect control board case and a predetermined member, movement of the effect control board case is restricted by a predetermined harness (HN31 to HN38). By doing so, the discharge port of the effect control board case and the reel driving board case are configured not to come into contact (Fig. 242).
It is characterized by
According to the first invention, even if the effect control board is detached from the front door, the discharge port of the effect control board case and the reel driving board case can be prevented from coming into contact with each other by regulation by the harness.

2. Original invention 2
The original invention 2 (14th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (upper door 12a and lower door 12b) capable of opening and closing the front of the cabinet;
A performance control board case (sub-board case 80a) that is attached to the back side of the front door at a predetermined position with a predetermined member and houses a performance control board (sub-control board 80), and a predetermined board connected to the performance control board. with
Connectors (CN31 to CN38) provided at a plurality of edges (upper edge, right edge, lower edge) of the effect control board and connectors of a predetermined board are connected with a predetermined harness,
Even when the performance control board case is disengaged from the predetermined member, the performance control board case remains behind the front door because the movement of the performance control board case is restricted by a predetermined harness. (Fig. 242)
It is characterized by
According to the first invention 2, even if the effect control board is detached from the front door, the movement of the effect control board case can be restricted by the regulation by the harness.

3. Original Invention 3
The original invention 3 (14th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door (upper door 12a and lower door 12b) capable of opening and closing the front of the cabinet;
A performance control board case (sub board case 80a) that is attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the front door with a predetermined member and houses a performance control board (sub control board 80);
A predetermined board connected by a production control board and a predetermined harness (HN31 to HN38),
A main control board case (main board case 50a) that is attached inside the cabinet and houses the main control board (main control board 50),
The production control board has a CPU cooler (624),
The production control board case has an exhaust port (621b) for the CPU cooler,
Even if the presentation control board case is disengaged from a predetermined member and the presentation control board case falls from a predetermined position, the movement of the presentation control board case is restricted by a predetermined harness. It is configured so that the exhaust port of the performance control board case and the main control board case do not come into contact (Fig. 243)
It is characterized by
According to the first invention 3, even if the performance control board is detached from the front door, the outlet of the performance control board case and the main control board case can be prevented from coming into contact with each other by regulation by the harness.

4. Original Invention 4
The original invention 4 (14th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a reel unit (symbol display device 14) arranged on a reel base inside the cabinet;
A front door (upper door 12a and lower door 12b) that can open and close the front surface of the cabinet and has a display window through which the pattern of the reel of the reel unit inside the cabinet can be viewed;
A production control board case (sub board case 80a) that is attached to the back side of the front door with a predetermined member and houses the production control board (sub control board 80),
L1 (L12 in FIG. 244(b)) is the minimum distance between the upper end of the reel unit on the display window side and the display window,
When the thickness of the production control board case is L2 (L11 in FIG. 244(b)),
L1 < L2
(Fig. 244)
It is characterized by
According to the present invention 4, even if the performance control board case comes off and moves to the display window side, the performance control board case can be prevented from moving to a position visible from the display window.

5. original invention 5
The original invention 5 (14th embodiment) is
a reel module (602) that includes a reel (31), a motor (32) for rotating the reel, and a reel bracket (604) that secures the motor;
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) having a reel case (601) that accommodates a plurality of reel modules,
L1 (L21 in FIG. 246) is the coupling length between the reel and the rotating shaft (32a) of the motor,
L2 (L14 or L14 in FIG. 246 or L15), when
L1 > L2
(Fig. 246)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 5, even if the engagement between the reel and the rotating shaft of the motor is disengaged and the reel moves to the outer end side of the rotating shaft of the motor, the reel is prevented from falling off from the rotating shaft of the motor. can do.

6. original invention 6
The original invention 6 (14th embodiment) is
a reel module (602) that includes a reel (31), a motor (32) for rotating the reel, and a reel bracket (604) that secures the motor;
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) having a reel case (601) that accommodates a plurality of reel modules,
The reel and the rotating shaft (32a) of the motor are fixed by a predetermined fixing member (screw SC01),
The total length of the predetermined fixing member is L1 (L23 in FIG. 246(b)),
When the distance from the outer end to which the predetermined fixing member is fixed to the reel bracket of the reel case or other reel module is L2 (L24 in FIG. 246(b)),
L1 < L2
(Fig. 246)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 6, even when the predetermined fixing member comes off, the predetermined fixing member can be discharged outside the reel.

7. original invention 7
The original invention 7 (14th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
A front door (upper door 12a and lower door 12b) that can open and close the front of the cabinet and has a display window;
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) arranged on a reel base (13g) inside the cabinet,
The reel unit comprises a plurality of reel modules (602),
reel module
a reel (31);
a motor (32) for rotating the reel;
a reel sensor (33) for detecting the position of the reel;
Each reel module is fixed by predetermined fixing members (upper fixing part 604a and lower fixing part 604b) (Fig. 245),
Even if the predetermined fixing member comes off, the reel can be visually recognized from the display window of the front door,
The motor and reel sensor of the reel module are connected to a predetermined board (motor control board 34) by predetermined harnesses (HN03 and HN04),
When a predetermined fixing member comes off and the reel module moves to the display window side, the maximum movement distance until the movement is restricted by a predetermined harness is L (L31 in FIG. 249). It is characterized in that the reel and the display window are constructed so as not to come into contact with each other even when the reel is moved to the window side by the maximum moving distance L. - 特許庁
According to the seventh aspect of the invention, even if the predetermined fixing member is disengaged and the reel module moves toward the display window, the reel can be prevented from coming into contact with the display window.

8. original invention 8
The original invention 8 (14th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
a front door that can open and close the front of the cabinet and consists of an upper door (12a) and a lower door (12b);
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) arranged on a reel base (13g) inside the cabinet and fixed by a predetermined fixing member (case fixing portion 601a),
When the upper door is closed and the lower door is open, the predetermined fixing member is visible and accessible (Fig. 251).
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 8, even when only the lower door is open, it is possible to visually confirm whether the reel unit is properly attached to the reel base. Also, if it is not installed correctly, it can be reinstalled.

9. original invention 9
The original invention 9 (14th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
A front door that can open and close the front of the cabinet and consists of an upper door (12a) and a lower door (12b),
A predetermined fixing member (screw SC02) for fixing a predetermined operating member (push button 86) is provided on the back side of the lower door,
When the lower door is open to the limit (120°) and the upper door is closed, the predetermined fixing member is accessible,
When the upper door and the lower door are opened to the limit of opening, the upper door is positioned near the predetermined fixing member so that the predetermined fixing member cannot be accessed (Fig. 252(a)).
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 9, when the upper door and the lower door are opened, the predetermined fixing member can be concealed.

10. original invention 10
The original invention 10 (14th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
A front door that can open and close the front of the cabinet and consists of an upper door (12a) and a lower door (12b),
After opening the lower door, the upper door can be opened,
After closing the upper door, the lower door can be closed,
A predetermined fixing member (screw SC02) for fixing a predetermined operating member (push button 86) to the lower door is exposed on the back side of the lower door.
A space (12e) is formed at a position facing a predetermined fixing member in the upper door when the upper door and the lower door are closed,
L1 (L61 in FIG. 252(a)) is the total length of the screw portion of the predetermined fixing member,
When the distance from the mounting surface of the predetermined fixing member to the deepest part of the space is L2 (L63 in FIG. 252(a)),
L1 < L2
(Fig. 252(a))
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 10, even if the predetermined fixing member is loose, the lower door can be closed without the predetermined fixing member coming into contact with the upper door when the lower door is closed.

11. original invention 11
The original invention 11 (14th embodiment) is
a cabinet (13);
A front door that can open and close the front of the cabinet and consists of an upper door (12a) and a lower door (12b),
After opening the lower door, the upper door can be opened,
After closing the upper door, the upper door can be closed,
The portion of the lower door that engages with the upper door has a flat surface (12d),
The flat surface portion is configured to be inclined downward toward the cabinet side (Fig. 252(a)).
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 11, even if a foreign object falls on the flat surface portion, it can be dropped without remaining on the flat surface portion.

12. original invention 12
The original invention 12 (14th embodiment) is
A reel unit (symbol display device 14) having a reel frame (605), a reel tape (606), and a back lamp case (603a),
The reel frame (605) is
a first rim (first rim 605b) having a plurality of (six) spokes (605c) to which a reel tape is attached;
A second rim (second rim 605e) attached to the reel tape,
The second rim was pushed toward the first rim (assumed to be pushed with a force within a range in which the second rim can be elastically deformed) (in FIGS. 255(b) and (c), pushing in the F4 direction (255(b) and (c))
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 12, by elastically deforming the second rim, it is possible to check whether there is any foreign matter in the back lamp case.

13. original invention 13
The original invention 13 (14th embodiment) is
having a plurality of reel modules (602);
reel module
a reel frame (605);
a back lamp case (603a) containing a back lamp substrate (603b);
and a reel bracket (604) fixing the back lamp case,
In the reel frames of two adjacent reel modules, the side of one of the reel frames farther from the other reel frame is pushed toward the other reel frame (direction F62 in FIG. 257) (to the extent that the reel frame can be elastically deformed). The same shall apply hereinafter), and of the other reel frame, when the side far from one reel frame is pushed toward the one reel frame (in the direction of F61 in FIG. 257), One reel frame contacts the reel bracket of the other reel module, the other reel frame contacts the back lamp case of the other reel module, and the one reel frame and the other reel frame do not contact each other. (Fig. 257)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 13, for example, even if an operator accidentally touches the reel frames, the reel frames do not contact each other, so that the reel frames can be prevented from being damaged.

14. original invention 14
The original invention 14 (14th embodiment) is
a reel frame (605);
a reel tape (606) attached to the reel frame;
a back lamp case (603a) containing a back lamp substrate mounted with an LED;
and a reel bracket (604) fixing the back lamp case,
The position facing the LED (603c) of the back lamp substrate (603b) on the reel tape (F51 to F53 in FIG. 256) is moved with a force within a range where the reel tape and reel frame can be elastically deformed. When pushed to the side, the reel tape and the reel frame are elastically deformed so that at least one of the reel tape and the reel frame contacts the back lamp case, and the reel tape does not contact the LED of the back lamp substrate. (Figure 256)
It is characterized by
According to the original invention 14, for example, even if an operator accidentally touches the reel tape, the reel tape and the LED do not come into contact with each other, so damage to the reel tape can be prevented.

15. original invention 15
The original invention 15 (14th embodiment) is
a reel frame (605) having a plurality of spokes (605c);
an index (605d) formed on a part of the reel frame;
a reel sensor (33) capable of detecting passage of the index;
A back lamp case (603a) containing a back lamp substrate
and,
A reel bracket (604) fixing the reel sensor and the back lamp case,
When the reel frame is pushed in the direction in which the index and the reel sensor approach each other (assuming that the reel frame is pushed with a force within the elastically deformable range) (pushed in the F11 direction in FIGS. 246 and 247), At least one of the spokes of the reel frame contacts the back lamp case (contact at CP1 in FIG. 247) so that the index and the reel sensor do not contact each other (FIGS. 246 and 247).
It is characterized by
According to the fifteenth aspect of the invention, even if an operator accidentally touches the reel frame, for example, the contact between the spoke and the back lamp case prevents contact between the index and the reel sensor, thereby preventing damage to the reel sensor. can be done.

10 slot machine (gaming machine)
10a lower panel 11 power switch 11a power supply unit 12 front door 12a upper door 12b lower door 12c control panel 12d flat surface portion 12e space portion 13 cabinet 13a bottom plate 13b back plate 13c top plate 13d side plate 13e right side plate 13f left side plate 13g reel base 14 Pattern display device (reel unit)
15 Medal Dispensing Device 16 Medal Dispensing Port 17 Door Switch 18 Display Window 19 Medal Receptacle 21 Production Lamp (Decorative Lamp Part)
22 speaker 23 image display device 31 reel 32 motor 32a rotary shaft 33 reel sensor 34 motor drive board 34a motor board case 35 hopper 35a storage acceptance port 36 hopper motor 37a, 37b payout sensor 40a 1 bed switch 40b 3 bed switch 41 start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Settlement switch 43A Settlement switch (medalless game machine)
44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal slot 48 Count switch 50 Main control board (main control means, main control board, main control means)
50a main substrate case 51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM (first main control RWM)
54 ROM (first main control ROM)
55 Main CPU (main chip, first main control CPU)
61 Winning Lottery Means 62 Winning Flag Control Means 63 Push Order Instruction Number Selection Means 64 Effect Group Number Selection Means 65 Reel Control Means 66 Winning Judgment Means 67 Payout Means 71 Control Command Transmission Means 73 Set Value Display LED (Set Value Display Means)
74 management information display LED (role ratio monitor)
75 display substrate 76 credit number display LED
77 Advantageous period display LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 Status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2bet indicator LED
79c 3bet indicator LED
79d Game start display LED
79e Input indicator LED
79f Replay display LED
80 sub control board (sub control means, sub control board, sub control means)
80a sub board case 81 input port 82 output port 83 RWM (sub control RWM)
84 ROM (secondary control ROM)
85 sub CPU (sub control CPU)
86 Push Button 87 Cross Key 91 Effect Output Control Means 100 Game Media Number Control Board 101 Input Port 102 Output Port 103 (Second Main Control) RWM
103a Game media number storage means 104 (Second main control) ROM
105 (second main control) CPU
106 total game media count clear switch 107 game media count display substrate 107a game media count display portion 110 medal selector 111 medal passage 111a vertical portion 111b inclined portion 111c entrance 111d exit 112 gap 113 selector base 120 chute member 121 medal guide passage 122 bottom portion 123 inner wall portion 124 outer wall portion 125 stepped portion 126 fixing portion 127 screw 130 return member 131 return acceptance opening 132 medal return passage 133 payout acceptance opening 134 medal payout passage 135 upper edge portion 140 closing member 150 setting key cylinder 151 setting key insertion Port 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 154 Setting key cylinder 160 Door key cylinder 160a Door key insertion opening 161 Outer cylinder 161a Notch 162 Inner cylinder 170 Locking device 171 Cam 171a Projection 171b Projection 172 Moving member 172a Follower member 172b Detection piece 172c hook 173 moving member 173a driven member 173b hook 173c hook 173d opening 173e stopper 174 driven portion 175 door sensor 176 coil spring 177 coil spring 178 coil spring 179 fixing member 180 connection terminal plate 190 external collective terminal plate 200 rental unit 20 2 lending switch 203 Return switch 204 Loanable game media number display unit 206 Loanable game media number storage means 220 Hall computer 230 Management computer 501 Starting operation detection LED
502 Left stop operation detection LED
503 Medium stop operation detection LED
504 Right stop operation detection LED
505 Left reel sensor LED
506 middle reel sensor LED
507 Right reel sensor LED
508 Power LED
510 lamp control board 511 stop switch lamp 515 frame member 515a upper frame part 515b lower frame part 520 hinge 601 reel case 601a case fixing part 601b forward inclined surface part 602 reel module 603 back lamp unit 603a back lamp case 603b back lamp substrate 603c LED
604 reel bracket 604a upper fixing part 604b lower fixing part 604c sensor fixing part 605 reel frame 605a hub 605b first rim 605c spoke 605d index 605e second rim 606 reel tape 607 gap cover 621 upper case 621a screw hole 621b exhaust port 622 lower case 623 Crimped part 624 CPU cooler 625 Button bracket CK Setting key DK Door key DK1 Projection DK2 Keyway PP Power supply plug PP1 Cord PP2 Insertion plug PP3 Plug blade HN01 to HN08 Harness CN01 to CN08 Connector LW01 to LW04, LW07 Lead wire

Claims (1)

a cabinet;
A front door that can open and close the front of the cabinet and consists of an upper door and a lower door,
Having a predetermined fixing member for fixing a predetermined operation member on the back side of the lower door,
In a situation where the lower door is open to its open limit and the upper door is closed, the predetermined fixing member is accessible,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the upper door and the lower door are opened to the limit, the upper door is positioned near the predetermined fixing member so that the predetermined fixing member cannot be accessed. .

Images